CIVICIMA COMITE INTERNATIONAL DU VOCABULAIRE DES INSTITUTIONS ET DE LA COMMUNICATION INTELLECTUELLES AU MOYEN AGE President
Jacques Monfrin † Secretaire
Olga Weijers Representants nationaux
Allemagne Belgique Canada Espagne Etats-Unis France Grande Bretagne Italie Pays-Bas Pays Scandinaves Pologne Portugal Tchequie
Helmut Walther Jacqueline Hamesse Claude Lafleur Antonio Garcia y Garcia Richard Rouse Jacques Verger John Fletcher † Francesco del Punta Lambertus M. de Rijk Eva Odelman Aleksander Gieysztor † Maria Candida Pacheco Pavel Spunar
Coordination generate
Olga Weijers C H I , Section d'etudes medievales Postbus 90754 2509 LT La Haye Pays-Bas
CIVICIMA ETUDES SUR LE VOCABULAIRE INTELLECTUEL DU MOYEN AGE
X
The Vocabulary of Intellectual Life in the Middle Ages
MARIKEN TEEUWEN
BREPOLS TURNHOUT BELGIQUE 2003
illustration on the cover: Picture of a master and his students in an early thirteenthcentury manuscript, Wien, Osterreichische Nationalbibliothek, Cod. 2499, fol. lv.
Provenance and copyright Bildarchiv der O N B , Wien.
© 2003, Brepols Publishers n.v., Turnhout, Belgium All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior permission of the publisher. D/2OO3/OO95/128 ISBN 2-503-51457-X Printed in the E . U . on acid-free paper
Table of contents Acknowledgements
11
Introduction
13
Category I: The Vocabulary of Schools and Universities arc(h)a, capsa, cista baccalarius bancarius bedellus, nuntius bejaunus (beanus) bursa, bursarius, bursalis, beneficiatus cancellarius, archidiaconus cathedra cessare, cessatio, suspendere, suspensio clericus collecta, salarium collegium commissaries, hebdomadarius communa, communia, communarius congregatio conservator (privilegiorum), iustitiarius (scholarum), tractator (studii) custos decanus discipulus doctor dominus (legum) facultas hospitium, domus, aula lector licentia, licentiare, licentiatus litteratus, illiteratus
29 31 33 36 38 41 42 45 48 50 53 55 57 61 63 65 68 70 73 75 76 79 80 82 85 88 92
6
TABLE OF CONTENTS
magister magisterium, magistralis, magistrare massarius, receptor, campsor matricula natio, societas, consiliaria notarius, syndicus p(a)edagogus, p(a)edagogium, pr(a)eceptor prior procurator, consiliarius professor provisor, principalis questionista, sophista rector rotulus, rotula sc(h)ola sc(h)olaris sc(h)olasticus, magister sc(h)olarum socius, collegiatus statutum, statutarius studens, studere studium, studium generale taxatio, taxare, taxator universitas
95 98 100 102 104 107 109 Ill 113 116 118 120 122 126 128 131 133 135 137 139 141 145 147
Category I I : The Vocabulary of the Book and Book Production 151 archivum, c(h)artarium, chartularium 153 armarium, armarius 155 atramentum, encaustum, tincta 157 bibliotheca, bibliothecarius 159 calamus, penna, plumbum 161 c(h)arta, instrumentum, munimentum 163 chirographum 166 codex 168 exemplar, exemplum, exemplator 170
TABLE OF CONTENTS
graphium, stilus inventarium, registrum, repertorium, catalogus liber, libellus librarius, librarium, libraria papyrus, pergamenum, membrana pecia (petia), peciarius quaternio, quaternus radere, eradere, rescribere sc(h)eda, sc(h)edula, protocollum scriba, scriptor, notarius, clericus scribere, transcribere scriptorium stationarius, statio tabula cerata taxatio, taxator volumen, tomus Category I I I : The Vocabulary of Teaching Methods, Instruments and Products of Intellectual Life accessus ad auctorem alphabetum (-us), alphabetarium, abecedarium (h)arenga, (h)arengare, propositum auctor, (actor, aut(h)or), auctoritas audire, auditor, auditio, auditus brocarda, brocardica capitulum, titulus, rubrica, paragraphus, articulus collatio commentari, commentarius (-ium), commentum, commentator compilare, compilatio, compilator concordantia cursus, cursorius (-ie), cursor, (cursare) declarare, declaratio; exponere, expositio; explanare, explanatio; interpretari, interpretatio
173 175 178 180 183 187 190 192 194 196 198 201 203 207 209 211
213 215 218 220 222 224 226 228 232 235 237 240 242 245
TABLE OF CONTENTS
derivatio, compositio determinare, determinatio, determinator, subdeterminator dictare, pronuntiare disputatio, disputare, qu(a)estio disputata distinctio, distinguere edere, editio, editor, publicare, publicatio, publicator etymologia examinare, examen, examinatio, conventus, examinator exemplum fallacia glossa, glosa glossarium, vocabularium, dictionarius incipere, inceptio, inceptor, resumere, resumptio insolubile interpretari (-tare), interpretatio, transferre, translatio, vulgarizare (-zatio), theutonizare (-zatio) involucrum, integumentum legere, lectio, lectura, legibilis obligatio opponere, opponens; respondere, respondens ordinarius (-ie), extraordinarily (-ie) postilla pr(a)edicare, pr(a)edicatio, sermo pr(a)esentare, pr(a)esentatio, pr(a)esentator, deponere, depositio, depositor principium, vesperie promovere, promotio, promotor, promovendus punctum qu(a)estio, dubium quodlibet, quodlibetalis, quodlibetarius, quodlibeticus regere, regimen repertorium, inventarium reportare, reportatio, reportator sententia, summa
247 250 253 256 260 264 266 268 272 275 277 279 282 285 287 290 292 298 301 304 307 309 313 315 318 320 322 326 329 331 333 336
TABLE OF CONTENTS
sophisma, sophistaria syllogismus, conclusio, corollarium syncategoremata, consignificantia tabula, registrum (regestum) Category I V : The Names of the Disciplines, their Teachers and Students abacus, abacista arithmeticus, mathematicus ars, scientia, disciplina ars dictaminis, ars dictandi, dictator artes liberates, trivium, quadrivium artes mechanicae artista astrologia, astrologus, astronomia, astronomus computus, calculus dialectica, logica divina scientia, sacra doctrina, theologia, theologus, metaphysica, prima philosophia ethica, oeconomica, politica geometria, geographia, mappa mundi grammatica, grammaticus, grammatica speculativa ius canonicum, ius civile, canonista, decretista, decretalista, legista musica, musicus, cantus, cantor philosophia, philosophus, philosophari physica, physicus, medicina, medicus rhetorica, rhetor theoreticus, practicus
9
340 343 345 348
351 353 355 358 361 364 367 370 372 374 376 379 382 384 386 389 391 395 400 404 406
Index I: Reference to the relevant articles per category Index I I : Reference per term to pagenumbers
409 434
Select bibliography
453
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS This book, which brings the C I V 1 C I M A series to completion, could obviously not have been written without the specialist input of the many scholars, from all over Europe, who took part in the C I V I C I M A workshops and sent in articles for the nine volumes of proceedings that have already been published. Many of them will see the fruits of their research summarized here. I hope I have done justice to their work and wish to record my gratitude and admiration for their research, which has often been groundbreaking. The research project for this, the final volume in the series, was carried out at the Constantijn Huygens Institute in The Hague ( C H I ) , under the auspices of the Royal Netherlands Academy of Arts and Sciences ( K N A W ) . Olga Weijers, senior researcher at the C H I , has been the initiator of C I V I C I M A , and organiser of most of the workshops. She has also supervised the writing of this book with great care. Now that I know her high standards of scholarship from four years of collaboration, I appreciate the trust she placed in me when I was asked to write this book even more. She has been a constant source of information and encouragement, a stern critic and a good friend at the same time. The other members of the medieval section of the C H I , especially Marijke Gumbert-Hepp, have welcomed me in their midst and made me feel at home immediately. I am very glad that the end of this project does not mean the end of our collaboration. The copy editing of the book was in the professional hands of Marjo Eijgenraam, who turned stacks and stacks of paper into a publishable and, hopefully, readable book and did this quickly, competently and with characteristic cheer. She also helped me with the dull work of putting together indices. If English-speaking readers of this book will not find thousands of "Dutchisms" in it, this is due to the good services of my friend, dr. Maria Sherwood-Smith, who has attempted to wield out as many errors as she could and always cried to convince me that she actually enjoyed doing it.
12
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
The house of Brepols has been very supportive, too, and I would like to thank Christophe Lebbe, not only for the efforts he put into the present volume, but for the work he has done over the years for the ten volumes of the C I V I C I M A series, most of which were typeset by Brepols under his supervision. Leiden — Den Haag, July 2003
INTRODUCTION History of the CIVICIMA project
In 1978, at the 'Mediaevistentagung' organised by the Thomas-Institut of the University of Cologne, Olga Weijers gave a paper with the title Terminologie des universités naissantes. Etude sur le vocabulaire utilise par
I'institution nouvelle.1 It was the first step on a long road that led to a series of articles, colloquia, proceedings and monographs, all undertaken under her direction or at her instigation, and all on the subject of the vocabulary of intellectual life in the Middle Ages. One of the first spin-offs of the 1978 paper was her monograph Terminologie des universites an XIIIe siecle, which appeared in 1987 in the series Lessico Intellettuale Europeo (39). In this study she describes the terminology used by a new phenomenon in medieval intellectual life: the universities of the thirteenth century. At the centre of her study lie the questions of the origin of the terms and the semantic shifts that the old vocabulary underwent in order to fit into its new environment.2 Since she was embarking upon a new and relatively unexplored field of research, she chose to use for her inventory and analysis of the vocabulary only sources that were available in a modern edition. This left her with an abundant body of official documents from the thirteenth- and fourteenth-century universities of France3 and a relatively complete overview of the technical vocabulary used in the English universities;4 for the universities of Italy5 and the Iberian peninsula,6 however, she had to resign
1. The paper was published in Miscellanea Mediaevalia 12 (1979), pp. 258-280. 2. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie ties universites (1987), 'Introduction', pp. 1-12. 3. She inventorized the sources of the universities of Paris, Toulouse, Montpellier and Orleans. 4. That is, Oxford and Cambridge. 5. The universities of Bologna, Padua and Naples. 6. The universities of Salamanca, Lisbon-Coimbra and Valladolid. Due to the focus on the thirteenth century, i.e. the earliest history of the universities, the institutions of Germany and central Europe are not featured in this monograph.
14
INTRODUCTION
herself to a much more lacunal situation. The technical vocabulary found in these sources was divided into three categories: 1. the terminology of the institutions (both concrete concepts such as cathedra, cista, etc. and abstract concepts such as universitas, facultas, etc.); 2. the terminology of persons attached to the university (teachers, students, administrators and employees); and 3. the terminology of teaching methods, examinations and ceremonies. The method used to describe each of these terms was an analysis in three steps: first, the use of the term in its university context is described on the basis of the sources themselves and the modern bibliography existing on the subject; secondly, the first occurrences of the term in the university sources are studied in order to determine — if possible — its origin within the new context; and thirdly the semantic development of the term is studied: the relations between its meaning in classical Latin, late-antique (Christian) Latin (if the term is not a medieval neologism), medieval Latin and in its specific context studied here. Weijers concludes with a tentative sketch of the general tendencies.7 First, the lion's share of the vocabulary used in medieval schools and universities was already used in an educational context in the ancient and late-antique world. Many of these terms retained approximately their original meaning, such as sc(h)olaris, discipulus, procurator, etc. Others acquired completely new meanings in the medieval sources: facultas, for example, collegium, natio or universitas developed specific technical meanings. The birth of the university in the thirteenth century was a particularly strong and influential force in this respect. For example: in die pre-university period magister had approximately the same meaning as in classical Latin. But, in the period of the university alongside its classical meaning of 'teacher' it developed the meaning of 'someone with an academic degree'. Another example: determinatio already had the general meaning of 'conclusion' in classical Latin, but in the context of the teaching method of the disputation, it developed a new, technical meaning: the part of a
7 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universités (1987), pp. 425-428; E A D . , La spécifité du vocabulaire universitaire, CIVICIMA I (1988), pp. 41-46.
INTRODUCTION
15
disputation in which all the arguments were weighed against each other, and in which a solution was proposed to the central question. Secondly, a small amount (ca. 25% according to Weijers' estimate) of the vocabulary found in the early sources of the universities is post-classical. Some of these words are already part of the medieval Latin vocabulary (such as taxator, commissarius, lectura), others are newly created in the university (such as questionista, peciarius, or set expressions such as studium generate or licentia ubique docendi). They either, like baccalarius, bedellus, pecia, have their roots in vulgar Latin, or are derived from already existing Latin words. Examples of the latter phenomenon are: doctoratus and doctoria, which are created from doctor, bursarius from bursa, rectoratus and rectoria from rector, etc. The technical terms used in the educational institutions of the late twelfth and early thirteenth centuries are derived from four distinct fields of medieval life: education, the Church, public administration and law. In general one could say that the majority of the terms found for the educational institutions are taken from the field of public administration (of cities or corporations) — universitas, for example, or societas and collegium in the sense of'corporate body of professors'. Some are derived from the field of the Church (congregatio and convocatio, or collegium in the sense 'student house'), some were already in use in the field of education (for example, studium, licentia, facultas and cathedra), and others are part of the common Latin vocabulary of the period (such as natio, hospitium or salarium). The terms used for teachers are all already present in the educational context of the pre-university period; those used for students have different origins. Some of them were also already in use in an educational context (scolaris, socius), others are newly created or acquired new, specific meanings (sophista, questionista, baccalarius). For the functionaries and administrators of the university terms were used that were taken from the field of public administration (of cities, corporations, regions or nations); examples are rector, procurator, syndicus, notarius, etc. Some of these are terms used specifically by the Church for its administrators (cancellarius, commissarius, hebdomadarius, etc., or for the officials running the university colleges: beneficiatus, provisor, prior, etc.); others are taken specifically from the field of law (bedellus, apparitor); others again from the world of financial administration (receptor, campsor) or from the world of books and book production (librarius, exemplator, etc.).
16
INTRODUCTION
The vocabulary used for university courses and teaching methods is largely derived from the field of pre-university education {audire, regere, lectio, etc.) or from the religious world (predicatio, sermo, collatio). The terminology for examinations and grades, finally, is generally derived from the common Latin vocabulary of the period (terms such as gradus, promovere, inceptio, principium); some terms are already used in a more technical meaning in the field of education (examinare and examinatio, for example), others had acquired specific meanings in the field of law {audire and deponere, for example). In short, the vocabulary of the early university is rich and inspired by a multitude of sources. Some words underwent major shifts in meaning in order to fit into their new environment, others remained very close to their earlier meanings. Neologisms were created on the basis of older, general concepts, or on the basis of new (vernacular) roots. Continuity and change go hand in hand. Weijers' book was well received and many reviewers emphasized that it filled an important lacuna in modern scholarship.8 In 1985 this gave rise to an initiative to establish an international committee for the study of medieval intellectual vocabulary - the Comite International du Vocabulaire des Institutions et de la Communication Intellectuelles au Moyen
8 See, for example, the comments of L . J . BATAILLON, Bulletin d'histoire des doctrines medievales, in: Revue des sciences phihsophiques et theologiques 73 (1989), pp, 87-88: 'le magnifique travail d'O. Weijers permettra aux historiens de l'enseignement, et a bien d'autres, une precision accrue dans l'etude de leur documentation' (p. 88); and of G. F R E D E R I C I V E S C O V I N I in Rivista di storia delta filosofia 44 (1989), pp. 606-607: ' I I volume ... costituisce pertanto un indispensabile punto di riferimento e un prezioso strumento di lavoro per chiunque si interessi del mondo delle Universita del secolo X I I I e, quindi, dell'organizzazione del sapere del Medioevo' (p. 607). Other reviews are found in: Quaderni per la storia dell'Universita di Padova 20 (1987), p. 211; Rassegna di letteratura tomistica 23 (1987), pp. 33-37; Vivarium 25 (1987), p. 162; Collectanea franciscana 58 (1988), p. 371; Nuncios'},! (1988), pp. 308-309; Revue d'histoireecclesiastique 83 (1988), pp. 423-426; Deutsches Archiv fur Erforschung des Mittelalters 45 (1989), p. 757; Revista espanola de derecho canonico 46 (1989), pp. 803-804; Scriptorium 43 (1989), p. 281*; Glossde 2 (1989-90), pp. 240-241; Bibliotheque de I'Ecole des chartes 148 (1990), pp. 195-196; History of Universities 9 (1990), pp. 265-266; Bulletin de théologie ancienne et medievale 15 (1992), pp. 178-179; MittellateinisckesJahrbuch 29,2 (1994), PP' 144-148.
INTRODUCTION
17
Age, abbreviated to CIVICIMA.9 The board committed itself to organising round-table discussions or colloquia, and to instigating monographs and collective works in the field of the vocabulary of intellectual life in the Middle Ages. After the first colloquium, held in September 1985 in Leiden and The Hague, a working programme was formulated in which the terminological area of Weijers' monograph on the vocabulary of thirteenth-century universities was broadened in all kinds of directions.10 First of all, the restriction to the thirteenth century was abandoned: the vocabularies of pre-university education, but also of the fourteenth and fifteenth century11 were given a place in the programme. In other words: studies investigating the terminology not only of universities and colleges, but also of monastery schools, cathedral schools, urban schools and Mendicant schools were invited in the series. The second major expansion of the research-field was the inclusion of the vocabulary of the book and book production, since it was felt that this was an indispensable aspect of medieval intellectual life. Other restrictions were lifted and (geographical) limits were stretched. All these decisions led to a working programme divided into five sections, each containing a thematically coherent collection of technical vocabulary:
9 Lambert M. de Rijk became president of the board, Olga Weijers its secretary. In 1990, CIVICIMA changed its structure: instead of forming a closed group of president, secretary and a dozen national representatives, it became an open society. Jacques Monfrin became its president and after his death in December 1998, it was decided that — since the series was nearing completion with a final tenth volume — he would not be succeeded. 10 The programme was published in several journals - for example, as part of the report of CIVICIMA's first workshop, organised in September 1985 in Leiden and The Hague, in Studi Medievali (3" Serie) 27 (1986), pp. 475-478. It was also included in CIVICIMA I (1988), pp. 7-10. 11 Forays into the vocabulary of the educational institutes of the Renaissance were also welcomed in the series; see esp. CIVICIMA V11I (1995): Vocabulary of Teaching and Research Between Middle Ages and Renaissance.
18
TNTRODUCTION
1) Vocabulary of the schools (institutions, teachers, students, teachingmethods) a) ninth to eleventh century (Carolingian schools) b) twelfth century (cathedral schools) c) thirteenth to fifteenth century (urban schools and Mendicant schools) 2) Vocabulary of the universities (institutions, persons, teaching-methods) a) thirteenth century (Weijers' monograph of 1987) b) fourteenth to fifteenth century (with emphasis on the regional and national differences between the universities of France, the British Isles, Italy, the Iberian Peninsula, Germany and Central Europe) 3) Vocabulary of the book and book production a) the book itself (making, composition, edition, distribution) b) other forms of written documents c) writing (materials, writing-styles, scribes) d) text and transmission (copies, corruption and correction of the text) e) libraries and archives (objects, library-catalogues and inventories) 4) Vocabulary of methods of teaching and research, of instruments and products of intellectual life a) the use of the alphabet as a structuring principle, methods of annotation, translation and communication b) concordances, tables, glossaries, encyclopedias, dictionaries c) treatises, commentaries, summaries, florilegia, compendia, etc. 5) Vocabulary of the disciplines and their students a) the disciplines and sciences b) the scholars and students devoted to them W i t h this working programme at its centre, a series of colloquia was started, roughly concurring with the areas of terminology defined. The first one was held in Leiden/The Hague in September 1985 and had a general and exploratory character: its proceedings were published in 1988 under the title Terminologie de la vie intellectuelle au moyen Age.12
12 Brepols in Turnhout adopted the series and published all ten volumes.
INTRODUCTION
19
The second 'table ronde' was held in Paris in September 1987 and was devoted to the vocabulary of the book and writing: Vocabulaire du livre et de I'e'criture au moyen Age (Turnhout 1989). The third volume was a collective work edited by O. Weijers on terms in the fourth category of the working programme: Methodes et instruments du travail intellectuel au moyen Age (Turnhout 1990), and the next was a monograph by her on terms in the same category: Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen Age (Turnhout 1991). The fifth volume contains the proceedings of a colloquium held in October 1989 in Rome, on terms falling in categories one and four: Vocabulaire des e'coles et des methodes d'enseignement au moyen
age (Turnhout 1992). The sixth, the proceedings of the colloquium held in Louvain in April 1992, deepens and broadens Weijers' monograph on the thirteenth-century terminology of the universities (category 2): Vocabulaire des colleges universitaires (XIII'-XVI' siècles) (Turnhout 1993). The seventh volume is a collective work edited by D. Jacquart on the subject of the terminology of intellectual life in the Arabic world: La formation du vocabulaire scientifique et intellectuel dans le monde arabe (Turnhout 1994). The eighth volume contains the proceedings of a colloquium held in March 1994 in London, mainly on terms falling in category 4 and containing several excursions to the Renaissance: Vocabulary of Teaching and Research Between Middle Ages and Renaissance (Turnhout 1995). The ninth volume fills in the lacuna of the vocabulary of the Mendicant schools - it contains the proceedings of a colloquium held in Porto in October 1996: Le vocabulaire des ecoles des Mendiants au moyen Age (Turnhout 1999). The tenth and concluding volume, finally, you see before you now. In retrospect one could argue that Weijers' conclusions in her initial study largely still stand. The medieval vocabulary of schools and universities, but also of teaching methods, of the book and writing and of the disciplines themselves is a mixture of tradition and innovation, of stability and change. In general it can be said that the new organisational phenomenon of the university caused new terms to be coined, or old terms to be used in new meanings. Within the university the new phenomena of examinations and grades are a particularly rich area for new
20
INTRODUCTION
terminology or significant semantic shifts.13 In the world of the book, the thirteenth century was the age in which new research tools were invented, and new ways were devised to produce books on a larger scale. Each of these developments is, of course, reflected in the Latin of the period. New words are created for these phenomena, or old words are used in new meanings to describe them. Furthermore, towards the end of the Middle Ages, once the initial model universities of Paris and Bologna had in a way lost something of their universal value and the universities of Northern, Central and Eastern Europe and of the Iberian peninsula had developed along their own lines, the technical vocabulary of the university seems to become richer and the regional differences seem to become greater. For example, the number of years needed for a student to acquire his baccalaureate or master's degree, or the exact role of a respondens or opponens in an official disputation (and thus the exact meaning of these words) differs per period, per faculty and university. Moreover, new influences caused the curriculum of the universities to change, and with this new terms were added to the vocabulary, and the meaning of certain terms changed. The present volume Even though the reception of the volumes in the academic world was enthusiastic14 and the ambitious goals set out in the working programme
13 Cf. J . V E R G E R , 'Nova et vetera dans le vocabulaire des premiers statuts et privileges, CIVICIMA V (1992), pp. 191-205. 14 See for reviews of CIVICIMA I: Schede Medievali 16-17 (1989), pp. 564-565; Revista augustiniana 30 (1989), p. 800; Studium 30 (1990), p. 191; Speculum 65 (1990), pp. 514515; Deutsches Archiv für Erforschung des Mittelalters 47 (1991), pp. 263-264; Euphrosyne 19 (1991), pp. 486-487; ZeitschriftfurRomanische Philologie 107 (1991), pp. 695-696; Revista de Historia des Ideias 14 (1991), pp. 577-578; Bulletin de theologie ancienne et medUvaU 15 (1992), pp. 177-178. For CIVICIMA I I : Zeitschrift fur Romanische Philologie 106 (1990), pp. 580-582; Euphrosyne 19 (1991), pp. 487-489; Revue d'histoire ecclesiastique 86 (1991), pp. 203-204; Speculum 6y (1992), pp. 500-502; Scriptorium 47 (1993), p. 94*. For CIVICIMA I I I : Euphrosyne 20 (1992), pp. 484-485. For CIVICIMA TV: Revue des sciences philosophiques et thiologiques 76 (1992), p. 367; Studium 32 (1992), pp. 624-625; Collectanea franciscana
INTRODUCTION
21
were not even close to being reached,15 it was felt that — with the nine volumes — the interest in the subject as a separate field of research was waning.16 It was therefore decided to conclude the series with a tenth volume: an overview of the subjects treated in the series, supplemented by additions such as references to more recent bibliography on these subjects and articles on lemmata which were felt to be most obviously missing. This final volume was conceived to function as a dictionary of terms, alphabetically arranged within pre-established themes. To achieve a result that would suit the consulting researcher best, we chose to fol-
63 (1993). pp- 639-640; Deutsches Archiv fur Erforschung des Mittelalters 49 (1993), p. 690; Scriptorium 47 (1993), pp. 96*-97*; Vivarium 31 (1993), p. 268; lus Commune 20 (1993), pp. 353-355; Schede Medievali 24-25 (1993), pp. 412-413; Bulletin de theologie ancienne et medievale 16 (1994), pp. 48-49; Speculum 69 (1994), pp. 270-271; Zeitschriftfur Romanische Philologie 112 (1996), pp. 132-134. For CTVICIMA V: Revista de Histdria des Ideias 14 (1992), pp. 578-580; Studium 32 (1992), p. 625; Collectanea franciscana 63 (1993), pp. 640-641; Schede Medievali 24-25 (1993), pp. 412-413; Euphrosyne 22 (1994), p. 479; Nuovi annali della Scuola speciale per archivisti e bibliotecari 8 (1994), pp. 259-262; Deutsches Archiv fur Erforschung des Mittelalters 51 (1995), pp. 714-715; Mediaevistik 8 (1995), pp. 450-452; Revue Beige de Philologie et d'Histoire 73 (1995), pp. 1141-1143; Archives Internationales d'Histoire des Sciences 49 (1996), pp. 587-588; Zeitschrift fur Romanische Philologie 112 (1996), pp. 132-134; Latomus 55 (1996), pp. 478-479. For CIVICIMA V I : Revista de Histdria des Ideias 15 (1993), pp. 720-721; Rivista di storia della Chiesa in Italia 47 (1993), p. 660; Collectanea franciscana 64 (1994), pp. 374-375; Revue des sciences philosophiques et theologiques 78 (1994), p. 591; Euphrosyne 23 (1995), pp. 529-530; Mediaevistik 8 (1995), pp. 450-452; Nuovi annali della Scuola speciale per archivisti e bibliotecari 9 (1995), pp. 275-277; Deutsches Archiv fur Erforschung des Mittelalters 51 (1995), pp. 714-715; Scriptorium 49 (1995), p. 79; Millennium 12 (1998), pp. 198-199, Revue beige de philologie et d'histoire 76 (1998), pp.
581-583. For CIVICIMA VII: Speculum 71 (1996), p. 721. For CIVICIMA VIII: Speculum 72 (1997), p. 259; Deutsches Archiv fur Erforschung des Mittelalters 54 (1998), pp. 270-271; latomus 59 (2000), pp. 470-471. 15 There is, for example, comparatively little material on the schools and universities of Germany and central Europe in the series. I h e educational system of religious orders is a second example of a subject treated in a rather arbitrary and incomplete way. Moreover, die last category of terms, the names of the sciences and disciplines and their students, was never systematically embarked upon at all. 16 Rather the study of the precise meaning of technical vocabulary seems to have become an acknowledged element of research into die sources of intellectual life. In many general studies the subject of terminology now receives more attention than in the 1980s.
22
INTRODUCTION
low largely the thematic layout of the working programme on the one hand, and Weijers' working-method of 1987 on the other. The terms are treated in short articles, which sketch their meaning as found in the intellectual context of the Middle Ages and their semantic development from Antiquity to the Middle Ages. An important departure from Weijers working method, however, is that the basis of the articles is not formed by the sources themselves, but by the work done on the terms as found in the CIVICIMA volumes and other secondary bibliography. Since no limits are set for the corpus of sources we would wish to take into account, it would be impossible to provide an overview of the first attestations of each term within the chosen context. The working programme of Civicima has also been slighdy adapted for this final volume. First, the first two categories (vocabulary of the schools and vocabulary of the universities) are molten into one, since many of the terms that belong to the technical vocabulary of schools and studia also occur in the vocabulary of die universities. It seemed unwise to hold on to the thematically logical, but terminologically artificial separation of the two categories.17 Thus the lay-out of the present volume is as follows: Section I: The vocabulary of schools and universities; Section I I : The vocabulary of the book and book production; Section I I I : The vocabulary of teaching-methods, instruments and products of intellectual life; Section I V : The names of the disciplines, their teachers and students. Especially in the third section, the vocabulary of teaching-methods, instruments and products of intellectual life, many studies that postdate the majority of the Civicima volumes were used to give a more complete overview. Several recent studies have been published on the academic questio, disputatio and questio disputata, its structure, function, and specific
17 The chronological and further thematic subdivision of the themes found in the working programme has, of course, also been abandoned. Instead of being treated in a chronological or thematic order, the terms are arranged in alphabetical order within the four sections mentioned below.
INTRODUCTION
23
vocabulary,18 and the whole field of logic, the terminology of logic and tools for training students in logic reasoning {fallacia, insolubilia, obligatio, quodlibet, sophisma, syllogismus, syncategorematd) have been newly ex-
plored in studies from the 1980s en 1990s onwards by Ebbesen, de Libera, Maieru, Kretzmann, de Rijk, Rosier-Catach, Stump, etc.19 For the first and third section several studies were frequently consulted which focus on educational institutions of the later Middle Ages and their vocabulary, on individual colleges, or education in, for example, the Mendicant orders.20 In the second section many of the articles of Richard and Mary Rouse on new research tools such as the (alphabetical) index, the concordance and the florilegium, but also on book production and the book trade in the thirteenth century and later proved especially valuable.21 A particular problem was that the treatment of the fifth category of the working programme, the terminology of the disciplines and their students, remained very sketchy in the series. In Weijers' Terminologie des universites this category of terms is deliberately left aside, since 'la terminologie des disciplines individuelles — et d'ailleurs des personnes qui s'y consacraient (artista, legista, canonista, etc.) — est tellement riche
18 See, for example, the study of B.C. BAZAN, G . FRANSEN, D . JACQUART and J.W. W I P P E L , Les questions dispute'es et les questions quodlibe'tiques (1985); O . W E I J E R S , La 'disputatio'a la Faculte' des arts de Paris (1995); and E A D . , La 'disputatio'dans Us Facultes des arts au moyen age (2002). 19
See, for example, several contributions in N . K R E T Z M A N N , A . K E N N Y and J . P I N B O R G
(eds.), The Cambridge History of Later Medieval Philosophy (1982); the bibliography in P. SCHUI.THESS and R . I M B A C H (eds.), DiePhilosophie im lateinischen Mittelalter (1996); and in O . W E I J E R S , La 'disputatio'dans les Facultes des arts au moyen age (2002). 20 See, for example, A . M A I E R U , University Training in Medieval Europe (1994); several contributions in I . C R A E M E R - R U E G E N B E R G and A. S P E E R (eds.), Scientia und ars im Hoch- undSpdtmittelalter (1994); and in O . W E I J E R S and L . H O L T Z (eds.), L'enseignement des disciplines a la Faculte' des arts (1997). On individual colleges, see, for example, N. G O R O C H O V , Le college de Navarre de sa fondation (i}0$) au debut du XV siecle (1418) (1997). O n Dominican education, see M . M . M U L C H A H E Y , First the Bow is Bent in Study. Dominican Education before 1350 (1998); on Franciscan education, see B . ROEST, A History of Franciscan Education (c. 1210-1517) (2000). 21 See, inter alia, their recently republished collected studies Authentic Witnesses. Approaches to Medieval Texts and Manuscripts (1991).
24
INTRODUCTION
qu'il faudra de nombreuses etudes pour lui rendre justice' (p. 6). A separate publication on this subject, however, although included in the programme, never materialized, and very little material on this particular subject can be found in the Civicima-articles. The object of this tenth volume could never be to undertake the 'numerous studies' necessary in this particular field. It was nevertheless felt that the 'terminological gap' on this aspect of medieval intellectual life would have to be filled, albeit in a modest way. Only those terms that are central to the terminological field of this category, such as ars and scientia, or artes liberates, and complex concepts with large technical vocabularies of their own such as philosophia, diakctica, logica and the opposing set theorica {speculativa) and practica {actualis), are therefore treated in this study. Still, the fourth category remains undeservedly small. An in-depth inventory and analysis of such terms remains a desideratum in this field. Modesty is a cloak in which this tenth CIVICIMA volume wishes to envelop itself in more respects, for this tenth volume will without doubt still convey the lacunae or perhaps odd imbalances of the CIVICIMA series as a whole. The ambitions of the working programme, in which studies on all aspects of medieval (and renaissance) intellectual life were welcomed, could never be covered in a short study such as this: one would need a multi-volume encyclopedia to achieve that! The goal of this study is to bring the results of the whole CIVICIMA project, now scattered over nine volumes, together in a manageable format, to provide pointers to the relevant volumes in each case, and to shape the dissimilar and — in a certain sense — unorganised information of the previous studies into more or less standard articles. Where the relative neglect of the terminology of disciplines and their students can be seen as one of the shortcomings of the nine CIVICIMA volumes, the information on the terminology of the book and writing — though far from exhaustive — seems to suffer from superabundance for the purposes of the present volume. The vocabulary used in the field of miniature-making22 or book-binding,23 for example, is - however impor22 See, for example, the article by P. STIRNEMANN and M.-Th. GOUSSET, Marques, mots, pratiques, CIVICIMA II (1989), pp. 34-55. 23 See, for example, the articles by J . V E Z I N , Le vocabulaire latin de la reliure au moyen age, CIVICIMA I I (1989), pp. 56-60; and M-P. LAFITTE, Le vocabulaire medieval de la reliure, CIVICIMA II (1989), pp. 61-78-
INTRODUCTION
25
tant and interesting — considered too specialized to be treated in the 'general overview' that this volume wishes to provide. Furthermore, with the decision to concentrate on Latin vocabulary, all vernacular terminology,24 Greek or Hebrew terminology25 and (most importantly) Arabic terminology26 fell beyond the scope of this volume. Many of the 'discarded' terms that did not receive separate treatment, however, are nonetheless present in footnotes and references in articles which treat closely related terms. Organisation of the present volume Each lemma (either a single term or set of related terms) is treated in a short article in two parts. In the first part the meaning of the term in the medieval intellectual context is outlined, in the second its semantic development is sketched. In the footnotes references are found to Weijers' book on the terminology of the thirteenth-century universities, to Civicima articles, other modern bibliography, and relevant entries in dictionaries of classical, Christian or medieval Latin. The lemmata themselves are printed in bold, the secondary terms are in italics. When within these short articles on the individual terms or clusters of terms a reference is made to a term treated in full elsewhere in the book it is printed in italics, and marked with an arrow. For example,
24 See, for example, the lists of vernacular terms in CIVICIMAII (1989), Vocabulaire du livre et de I'ecriture au moyen age, pp. 250-251; and in CIVICIMA VI (1993), Vocabulaire des colleges universitaires (XIII'-XVP siecles), pp. 184-185. 25 See, for example, the lists of Greek terms in CIVICIMA II (1989), Vocabulaire du livre et de I'ecriture au moyen Age, pp. 244; and in CIVICIMA I I I (1990), Methodes et instruments du travail intellectuel au moyen age, p. 250. See also the list of Hebrew terms in CIVICIMA V I I I (1995), Vocabulary of Teaching and Research Between Middle Ages and Renaissance, p. 254. 26 This meant that the entire seventh volume of the series, la formation du vocabulaire scientifique et intellectuel dans le monde arabe, fell outside the scope of this book, and also the Arabic terms which occurred elsewhere: see, for example, the lists of Arabic terms in CIVICIMA I I I (1990), Methodes et instruments du travail intellectuel au moyen age, p. 251; CIVICIMA VI (1993), Vocabulaire des colleges universitaires (XIII'-XVP siecles), p. 184; and CIVICIMA V I I I (1995), Vocabulary of Teaching and Research Between Middle Ages and Renaissance, p. 254.
26
INTRODUCTION
in the article on collegium, a term found in the first category, the following passage is found: 'In the context of medieval education the word collegium occurs in three senses. First, it is used synonymously with, for example, —>universitas or societas, in the sense of the university itself as a corporate body of teachers or students.' In this passage collegium is printed in bold, because it is the central term treated in the article. Universitas is preceded by an arrow (—>), since this term is treated elsewhere in a separate article. Societas is printed in italics but not preceded by an arrow, for it does not receive a separate treatment in this volume. Sometimes the treatment of another relevant term is found in a different section. Then it is preceded by an arrow and followed by '(Cat. . . . ) ' . For example, in the article on questionista and sophista in Section I , the reader is referred to the articles on disputatio, quaestio, and sophisma, terms treated in Section I I I : "The use of the term [sophista] in the specific context of the Faculty of Arts of the University of Oxford goes back to another term: —>sopkisma (Cat. I I I ) . ... Questionista is a thirteenth-century neologism. It does not exist in classical or late-classical Latin, but just as sophista was derived from—tsophisma (Cat. I l l ) , questionista was forged from —> quaestio (Cat. III).' In order to guide the reader to the appropriate entry, two sets of indices are found at the end of this book. First, indices of the individual categories are found, in which the reader is referred to the lemma under which a certain term is treated.27 Sometimes the link is obvious: bursarius, for example, is treated in the article on bursa; statio under stationarius. In other cases, the link is less obvious: expositio, for example, is treated under declamre\ corrollarium under syllogismus; theologia and metaphysica both
under divina scientia. Second, a cumulative index of all Latin technical terms is found, in which the reader is referred to the pages on which a particular term is found.
27 When the term only occurs in footnotes, it is marked with a superscript n in the index.
INTRODUCTION
27
In the footnotes the bibliographical references are found in an abbreviated form. At the end of the book a complete bibliography of the present volume is found. It is not, however, a complete and exhaustive bibliography of the whole research field. In this way 1 hope to have made it easy to use this book as a small and simple work of reference, in which one can find one's way from one term to the next, or from one concept and its vocabulary to the next. Finally, it is regrettable that the present volume focuses only on the Latin vocabulary of medieval intellectual life, and that even certain areas of the Latin vocabulary remain underexposed (such as the vocabulary of the disciplines and their students). In order to keep the size of the project manageable, however, it was also inevitable to restrict myself largely to the material that was already there in the CIVICIMA volumes, and to proceed from there. I hope to have created a practical tool for finding information and material about a considerable number of key terms of intellectual life in the Middle Ages. I also hope that it will inspire readers to go beyond my limited collection of material, and search for the origin and context, the meaning and the shifts in meaning of the vocabulary they encounter in their sources. For the Civicima series has proved convincingly that analysing the verbal expressions and their precise meanings is a worthwhile and rewarding task, which sharpens and deepens our understanding of the medieval world.
Category I The Vocabulary of Schools and Universities arc(h)a, capsa, cista baccalarius bancarius bedellus, nuntius bejaunus (beanus) bursa, bursarius, bursalis, beneficiatus cancellarius, archidiaconus cathedra cessare, cessatio, suspendere, suspensio clericus collecta, salarium collegium commissaries, hebdomadarius communa, communia, communarius congregatio conservator (privilegiorum), iustitiarius (scholarum), tractator (studii) custos decanus discipulus doctor dominus (legum) facultas hospitium, domus, aula lector licentia, licentiare, licentiatus litteratus, illiteratus magister magisterium, magistralis, magistrare massarius, receptor, campsor matricula natio, societas, consiliaria notarius, syndicus
p(a)edagogus, p(a)edagogium, pr(a)eceptor prior procurator, consiliarius professor provisor, principalis questionista, sophista rector rotulus, rotula sc(h)ola sc(h)olaris sc(h)olasticus, magister sc(h)olarum socius, collegiatus statutum, statutarius studens, studere studium, studium generale taxatio, taxare, taxator universitas
31
arc(h)a, capsa, cista Arc(h)a, capsa, and cista are three terms used for the communal cash or archives1 of universities, faculties or nations. Archa or archa communis is the most common of the three, and was used throughout the continent. Capsa was used with exactly the same meaning, but occurs only in sources from Bologna. The archa or capsa was a chest, usually locked with three different locks - three separate officials held the responsibility for the keys. In the chest documents were kept (charters, statutes, records, bullae, privileges, etc.), but also valuable objects (books, seals, insignia, ceremonial objects, etc.) and the revenues of the university, faculty or nation. The chest was usually kept in a church. The cista (communis) or loan chest was an English institution of the thirteenth century. Money collected from the students, from fines and taxes was kept in the cista. Those students who were in need of cash could borrow from the chest against a pawn, usually a valuable object such as a book. The first English loan chest is attested in Oxford in 1240;2 other universities followed suit. In the context of medieval libraries, area, capsa and cista are three of the four terms inherited from Antiquity for chests or (cylindrical) boxes designed for the keeping of scrolls and books; the fourth is scrinium? In the Middle Ages cista was the most common word for a book chest; scrinium occurs mainly in literary sources and not in inventories, catalogues, etc. Archa is found commonly in thirteenth-century sources, but only rarely in the fourteenth or later centuries. When the word capsa was used, this usually meant that the chest could be locked.
1 For terminology pertaining to archives see also —>archivum and ->armarium in Cat. I I . For archa, capsa and cista in the sense of cash see O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 89-92. 2 O. Weijers also mentions one attestation of the word cista in sources from the University of Paris ( O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 90). In the statutes of the English -^natio the communal cash of the Faculty of Arts is called cista, the cash of the -^natio itself archa. 3 See for a detailed description of these terms J.-F. G E N E S T , Le mobilier des bibliotheques, CIVICIMA II (1989), pp. 136,138-140.
32
ARC(H)A, CAPSA, CISTA
Archa (or arca in classical Latin) and cista were both used, in Antiquity, to refer to a wide variety of chests — trunk, coffin, safe, money-chest, chest for clothing, books, etc.4 In the Middle Ages, the same variety of specific uses remains, and their use in the context of the university does not bring new shades of meaning. Capsa was less frequent in Antiquity and had only a limited set of meanings. It was used for cylindrical cases for storing scrolls, or for relatively small boxes.5 In Christian Latin it developed the meaning of reliquary.6 It was also used for other kinds of chests or safes.7
4 Cf. T L L {area I, cista); MW (area I, cista 1); D M L (area, cista 1-2). 5 T L L (1-2); O L D (a). 6 Cf. MW (ia); D M L . Capsa lies at the root of modern French 'chasse' - reliquary. Note, however, that area was also used for reliquaries. 7 Cf. MW, e.g. ib, book chest, but also 2a, soundbox or wind-chest for an organ; D M L (a-f).
33
baccalarius In general, the meaning of baccalarius 8 in the context of the medieval universities is unequivocal: it designates an advanced student, who — apart from passively receiving education — also partakes actively in the schooling process, and has obtained the right to teach.9 The baccalarius taught courses of a different character than the masters or professors: instead of lecturing ordinarie, he gave lectiones extraordinariae or cursoriae; that is, he treated texts on a relatively superficial level. 10 He was not allowed to collect money for his teaching (cf. —>collecta), and did not receive a salary from the university. The sources do not reveal whether the practice of letting advanced students contribute to education at a lower level dates back to the twelfthcentury schools. It is first described in the university sources of Paris in the early thirteenth century, and the use of the term becomes general and widespread in the 1220S-1230S." Although the general meaning of the term is clear, the specifics differ for each university, faculty, and period. In Paris, for example, a student was called baccalarius after passing the so-called determinatio (cf. —>determinare, Cat. I l l ) , which was, in the fourteenth century, distinctly defined in the statutes of the university.12 Thus there are three steps in the career of a student: from ordinary student to bachelor after passing the deter-
8 There is little consistency in the spelling of the word. In the thirteenth-century university sources O. Weijers found the following list of variants: bacalarius; bacallarius; baccalarius; baccallarius; bacellarius; bachalarius; bachallarius; bachelarius; bachellarius; bachilarius; bachillarius; bacularius; bacullarius; bakellarius; bazallarius. On the geographical and chronological spreading of these variants, cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 178. 9 See for a full treatment of the term O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 173-176. See also N I E R M . (5); D M L (4). 10 See —>legere, —>ordinarius, extraordinarius and —>cursus in Cat. I I I . 11 See for the first attestations of the term in the different geographical areas O. W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 176-178. 12 It is not entirely clear whether the student was called baccalarius after his determinatio, or whether he already became a baccalarius on passing the so-called examen determinantium, an examination which preceded the determinatio. In fact, it is not even
34
BACCALARIUS
minatio, from bachelor to 'licensed' bachelor (licentiatus, cf. -^licentid) after passing the licentiate examination, and from licentiatus to -^magister after passing the examination of the so-called inceptio (cf. -^incipere in Cat. I I I ) . In this context the term baccalarius can thus be considered a title or a university-degree.13 In Italy, on the other hand, the term seems to indicate a status rather than a degree, and was used for students who had reached a level high enough to deserve the right to teach. Another regional difference is the time it took to advance from baccalarius to —> magister licentiatus: in Bologna, for example, it took two years, in Paris much longer.14 In the late thirteenth or early fourteenth century, the Faculty of Theology introduced a system with three categories of baccalarii. At the lowest level were the baccalarii biblici,n who treated the Bible at its textual level; more advanced were the baccalarii sententiarii, who treated the famous Sententiae of Peter of Lombard; and at the highest level were the baccalarii formati, who had an active role in the official —> disputationes (Cat. III). 1 6 In the sources of the Faculties of Law in Orleans and Toulouse, a different specific category of baccalarii is found: the socalled baccalarii institutarii, that is, relatively 'fresh' bachelors, who - as their first teaching-experience - were responsible for the teaching of the
clear whether the determinatio was an actual examination, in which the knowledge of the student was actually put to the test, or whether it had more the character of a solemn rite of passage, in which the student declared that he had read all the necessary texts at all prescribed levels and the master avowed his competence. See for a detailed treatment of this controversy O . W E I J E R S , Les regies d'examen dans les universites medievaks (1995), pp. 207-209. 13 In the vocabulary of die College of the Sorbonne, the term is applied in a completely different sense: it is used as a unit of measurement in a fine-system: the fine is, for example, defined as 'one bachelor of wine'. O . W E I J E R S , Le vocabulaire du College de Sorbonne, CIVICIMA VI (1993), p. 16. 14 See for further regional differences O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 173-17515 The terms (baccalarius) biblicus and cursor were —though not synonymous— very close in meaning. Cf. ->cursus in Cat. I I I . 16 These baccalarii formati were also obliged to preach once a year for die university before they were admitted to the final exam. Cf. O . W E I J F . R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 379.
BACCALARIUS
35
Instituta}1 In the context of the religious orders the term baccalarius is also found, but here it is used for assistent-teachers (also secundus lector or sublector, cf. —>• lector).™ There is little consensus on the origin of the word baccalarius.19 Although it has been suggested that its root should be found in Latin words such as baculus ('staff) or bacca laurea™ the general opinion is that the word has a vernacular origin.21 Its oldest attested form is baccalaris, a word found in sources from Northern Spain and the Limousin from the ninth century onwards. Its meanings are 'a small tenant of land' or 'a young noble, subordinate in rank to a landlord or knight'; 'an owner of a small domain';22 or, within the context of chivalry, 'a squire in the service of a knight and aspiring to become one himself in due time'. From this last meaning more general senses developed: 'youngster' in the sense of 'apprentice in the service of a master'; 'youngster' in general, sometimes in opposition to the established authority; 'youngster' in the sense of 'unmarried man' — bachelor. The meaning of baccalarius in the context of the medieval universities corresponds with the meaning of'youngster' and 'apprentice': a baccalarius is a student in the service of a master, assisting him in his task as teacher and aspiring to become a master himself.
17 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 175-176. 18 It seems that the use of the term in the educational context of the religious orders was adopted from its use in the terminology of the university rather than the other way around. It does not occur in pre-thirteenth-century sources. Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Termimlogie des universites (1987), p. 176. It is, perhaps, significant that the term does not occur in any of the articles of CIVICIMA IX on the vocabulary of the Mendicant schools - the term was apparently not very common in this context. 19 See for a description of the semantic development of the term O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 178-180. 20 D u C ; cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 178 n. 72. 21 The Mittellateinisches Worterbuch suggests a Gallic origin ("bakkano, that is 'rusticus'), the Glossary of Catalonian Latin an unknown Celtic one (Gloss.Med.Lat. Cataloniae I, pp. 209-210), and the scholars R.Y. Ebied and M . J . L . Young an Arabic one. (R.Y. E B I E D and M . J . L . Y O U N G , New light on the origin of the term 'Baccalaureate' (1974), pp. 3-7. They disregard, however, the tradition of the word in Latin sources before the university period.) Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 178-179. 22 The domain is called baccalaria.
36
bancarius Within the context of the universities of Southern France (Toulouse, Montpellier and Orleans), one finds, besides the -^bedelli, the so-called bancarii (banquarii, banquerit).23 They too were, in origin, personal servants of the professors, and were a kind of caretakers or janitors, literally in charge of the school furniture (the bancae upon which the students sat). From the fourteenth century onwards, just as was the case with the —tbedelligenerates!maioreslcommunes and the subbedelli, bedelli speciales or
bedelli minores, here too there was a hierarchy within the profession: the bancarius generalis or bancarius maior of Toulouse coordinated the tasks of the bancarii of the individual schools. As the educational institutions grew, the tasks of the bancarius also changed; it became his duty not only to look after the school furniture, but also to make anouncements concerning meetings, vacations, repetitions or disputations, which bachelors or masters would take which classes, etc.24 The term was probably introduced because of the changing responsibilities of die —>bedelli, who — having originally been personal assistants of the professors, in charge of the material side of education — became officials with assisting and ceremonial tasks. Thus the function of the person who actually took care of the school received a different name. Bancarius is a medieval word, derived from the vulgar Latin banca (or bancus) — bench. Banca was the bench upon which students sat in the classroom, but also the desk (or office) of a money-changer — in this context bancarius {banc(h)erius) developed the meaning of 'banker'. In fact, it is this meaning which is more common; the other (janitor, caretaker) is found in none of die medieval Latin dictionaries.25 The meaning
23 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Tirminologie des universites (1987), pp. 228-230. 24 In other words: the office of bancarius grew closer to that of —tbedellus. 25 Cf. M W ; D M L ; but also Lex.Lat.Ned. Medii Aevi; Lex.Lat.Med.Aev. lugoslaviae; Lex.Med. etInf.Lat. Polonorum; Gloss.Med.Lat. Sueciae. Only the Hungarian dictionary of Medieval Latin gives a meaning which comes from a school-context: a bancarius is here a student, (jestingly) one who wears out benches (from the letters of Iohannes Vitez de Zredna, ca. 1450, Lex.Lat.Med.Aev. Hungariae).
BANCARIUS
37
'banker', moreover, can also be found within the context of the university: bancarius then means university treasurer.26
26 Cf. NIERM.: this is, however, the only dictionary in which this meaning is found, and there are no references or citations.
38
bedellus, nuntius The history of the office of bedellus {bidellus, pedellus) at a school, university, faculty or -^natio, which still exists in modern languages (Eng. beadle, Ger. Pedell, It. bidello27), begins in the thirteenth century.28 Originally, a bedellus was a servant or assistant to a professor, in charge of the maintenance, opening and closing of die school building and responsible for books and other teaching materials. He was paid from the revenue of a collection amongst the students. In Bologna at the beginning of the thirteenth century, every professor had his own bedellus. In the course of the century, however, as the university developed into a large and important institution, the need for one coordinating bedellus for the entire body of teachers grew, and both universities (Ultramontani and Citmmontani) employed their own bedellus generalis, who was the superior of die bedelli speciales (the personal assistants of the professors). The bedellus generalis had different tasks: he was to inform students of university regulations, lessons, topics of disputations, feasts, books available at the stationarius (cf. -^statio in Cat. II), 2 9 etc. He was present at official ceremonies, accompanying the -erector, and assisted at solemn examinations. As a token of his office he carried a mace, decorated with a curling snake, the so-called massa. In Paris, the bedellus also started out as a personal servant of professors or doctors, and developed into a university official employed by the faculties or the -^nationes. He had roughly the same responsibilities as the bedelli of the Bolognese Universities, and the office was hierarchi-
27 Note, however, that 'bidello' in Italian is not used in the academic sense of beadle, but kept the original meaning of school-caretaker, janitor. 28 The term is treated in O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 223-228. 29 At the beginning of the thirteenth century, the offices of bedellus and stationarius were not yet distinguished. The bedellus (generalis) was responsible for the books, and often owned to this purpose a ->statio (Cat. I I ) . Only at the end of the thirteenth century were the two offices clearly separated. See also F.P.W. S O E T E R M E E R , La terminologie de la libmirie a Bologne aux XIII' et XIV siecles, CWICIMA I (1988), p. 91 and n.8; and on pedelli and stationarii in Bologna I D . , Utrumque ius inpeciis (2002), pp. 465-467 and 491-492.
BEDELLUS, NUNTIUS
39
cally distinguished: the bedellus (maior) was assisted by a subbedellus or bedelhus minor.30
While in Cambridge the term bedellus was common for the beadle, in Oxford it was rare - there the beadle was more often referred to as serviens or apparitor?^ At these and other universities beadles had more or less the same function, varying according to the size and importance of their employers: faculties, —^nationes, universities or individual professors. In the second half of the thirteenth century, terms were created for the office of beadle: bedellionatus, bedallaria, or bedellaria?2
In the earliest history of the universities, the function of bedellus was closely related to that of nuntius or messenger, who was - at first - also a personal servant of a professor and who also developed into a university official. There were two kinds of nuntii within the context of the medieval universities.33 First, there were nuntii who were representatives of a university, faculty or nation, charged with a certain mission. Thus, for example, from the fourteenth century onwards nuntii were sent to the papal court in Rome every year with a list of candidates for benefices (the socalled —trotuli nominandorum). Secondly, the students and staff of the universities needed messengers to transport money, letters and goods back and forth between them and their families. Originally these nuntii were personal servants employed by rich scholars, but in the course of the thirteenth century, the nuntius became an official of the university. The university, faculty or -^natio took the organization of this kind of transport into their own hands: in Paris each year a nuntius was chosen by the -^procuratores of the -^nationes, and was then sworn into office and granted immunity. In some places there were also nuntii for the communal service of
30 In Orleans, besides bedelli and subbedelli one finds also a bedellus communis (instead of the bedellus generalis). Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 224-225.
31 In modern French, the beadle is still called 'appariteur'. For the semantic background of apparitor, see O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 228. 32 See for references O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 225 and notes 260-262. 33
O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 230-233.
40
BEDELLUS, NUNTIUS
the students: the so-called nuntii scholarium (Vicenza) or nuntii communes (Toulouse).34 The origin of the word bedellus is vulgar Latin: Teutonic 'bital', 'butif or 'bitil', or Frankish 'bidil', 'bidal' lies at its roots — one who bids or proclaims. In Old High German one finds 'bitil', in Old French 'bedel', in Anglosaxon 'bydel'.35 The most common Latin form is bedellus, but bidellus or pedellus also occur. The word is in use since the twelfth century, in the specific sense of minor court official, bailiff,36 or in the general sense of official or agent invested with a certain authority (employed by, for example, a lord, a city or borough).37 The second, general sense of bedellus concurs with the early bedelli, the personal servants of teachers, in charge of their schools. The bedelli generates (or maiores, or communes), however, seem to bear a stronger resemblance to the bailiffs, summoning the students for their examinations as the bailiff summoned the accused, and being present at these examinations just as the bailiff was present during trial.
34 I n fourteenth-century Paris, these nuntii, carrying money, correspondence or goods between their employers, were sometimes called nuntii volantes/ordinarii/minores. There were also nuntii maiores, who functioned as bankers or money-lenders. Cf. O. W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 231 and n. 296.
35 Cf. M l 36 The tasks of the court official are described in MW ( I ) . 37 Cf. D M L : ib manorial official, lord's agent; 2 court official, official in a city or borough; 3 ecclesiastical official; 4 (acad.) beadle of a faculty or university.
41
bejaunus (beanus) In the vocabulary of the French universities and colleges, the word bejaunus occurs from the second half of the fourteenth century onwards; it is even preserved in modern French as bejaune.n A bejaunus was a freshman or novice, who was subjected to ragging in the first year of his academic existence.39 It is clear that this ragging went quite far from the fact that the terminology associated witli the ragging of freshmen comes from statutes of colleges, in which rules are set out to protect freshmen against die practice. We learn from the sources that bejauni were used to fag for advanced students, and that they were forced to pay some kind of tax in money, books or pieces of clothing (die so-called bejaunium), that they were taunted and mocked at their first appearances in lessons or disputations. At the end of his first academic year, the bejaunus, together with his combejauni, was purged of the slur of his freshmanship (the labes bejaunica) and was called a -^sc(h)olaris collegiatus.
Bejaunus has an Old-French origin, and is a contraction of bee jaune — literally 'yellow beak', such as young birds have.40 The expression avoir le bee jaune, literally to have the yellow beak of a young bird, and figuratively to be naive and ignorant, existed in the late thirteenth century. From there, the expression bee jaune for 'fool' developed, and in the fourteenth- and fifteenth-century sources of the French colleges, bejaunus (or beanus) is found as a denigratory term for 'freshman'.41
38 See M . - H . J U L L I E N D E P O M M E R O L , Le vocabulaire des colleges dans le midi de la France, CIWCIMA VI (1993), p. 34. 39 On the terminology of ragging in Spanish colleges (arrastre, arrastrar, arrastrar bayetas) see A . M . CARABIAS T O R R E S , The Vocabulary of the Spanish 'Colegios Mayores'duringthe Middle and the Modern Age, CTVICIMA VI (1993), pp. 95, 97. 40 Cf. D u C , beanus, bejaunum and bejaunarelbejannizare ('to accept a freshman'). D u C . refers to French sources, but also to one outside France, from the Academy of Vienna. 41 Cf. L E R O B E R T , Diet. Hist, de la Langue Francaise. Note, however, that the denigratory tone is not always implied. In the charters of the University of Paris, for example, bejaunus is also used for a newcomer to the office of -^procurator of a —tnatio (CUP, col. 396, anno 1371). Here, it seems, the aspect of freshmanship is implied, but the idea of 'lower status' is not.
42 bursa, bursarius, bursalis, beneficiatus The term bursa occurs in the context of the university colleges in a range of meanings, which seem at first glance to be contradictory, but are in fact related.42 In the twelfth century, the most common meaning of bursa was 'cash' or 'fund', usually of a community such as a monastery or church. This meaning was adopted into the vocabulary of the hospices where the students were lodged: the bursa communis was the communal purse, to which the students contributed a certain amount of money each week for their living expenses.43 Bursa then came to refer to this weekly contribution itself— that is, the amount of money for one week's board and lodging.44 In this sense, the term bursa became a monetary unit - the expenses of one week's living — and was used to express, for example, the costs of fines, the amount of money to be given to the —>bedelli, the amount of money owed the faculty for the taking of examinations, etc.45 For poor students, however, who could not afford to pay the bursa, a system was developed through which a benefactor could take care of the expenses for him, or the college could provide for him. The poor student thus did not pay a bursa, but the bursa was paid for him — in other
42 See for a full treatment of the term O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universith (1987), pp. 93-99. 43 Note that in English universities the term bursa communis was occasionally used for the communal cash, but that bursa was almost never used in the sense of expenses for a week's living'. Instead of bursa one finds —>communa or communia in this sense. Cf. O. W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universith (1987), pp. 96-97, 99-102. 44 At the College of the Sorbonne a remarkable system was developed, in which a student or -^socius had to pay a full bursa if he used the facilities of the college to their full extent, and paid even more if he used them less, and, for example, took meals outside the college. See O . W E I J E R S , Le vocabulaire du College de Sorbonne, CTVICIMA V I (1993), p. 14-
45 O. Weijers rightly notes, however, that the term bursa was never used for the salaries of beadles: it is the monetary unit in which their salaries were expressed ( O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 94). On the usage of bursa as a monetary unit within a system of fines, but also as a measurement for wine, see O . W E I J E R S , Le vocabulaire du College de Sorbonne, CTVICIMA VI (1993), pp. 15-16.
BURSA, BURSARIUS, BURSALIS, BENEFICIATUS
43
words, he received some kind of scholarship or was provided for out of a fund. Bursa thus developed a third meaning: burse or scholarship. Already in the thirteenth century, but more commonly in the later Middle Ages and especially in the German and Slavonic countries, bursa was also used for the buildings themselves in which students (or masters) were lodged — thus standing on a par with terms such as domus or -^collegium*6
Bursarius, a medieval derivation of bursa, was also used in different meanings. In Paris, bursarius (or bursalis) was used for someone who received a bursa, that is, who received his expenses for board and lodging from a private benefactor, or who was provided for out of a fund by the college in which he was accepted.47 A related kind of poor students, unable to pay their own living expenses, were known as beneficiati or beneficiarii. These students lived on the left-overs of college meals, and earned their board by performing odd jobs for the richer students {-^socii or bursarii). Beneficiati are found in the sources of the College of the Sorbonne in the thirteenth century, and later also in other institutions in Paris. The College of the Sorbonne even had a domus beneficiatorum — a house partly reserved for beneficiati.48
46 See for an early attestation of this sense in the sources of the University of Paris, O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 96 [before 1274]. The usage of the term in the sense of 'college' was never common in France, but see for examples from Cologne and Prague in the later Middle Ages G.-R. T E W E S , Terms used in Academic Life, CIVICIMA V I (1993), pp. 59-71; and F. S M A H E L , SchoUe, Collegia et Bursae Universitatis Pragensis, CIVICIMA VI (1993), pp. 120-122. In Prague, the system of bursae or studenthouses was originally different: the houses were often owned by a professor or a group of professors, and were sublet to students. Later student corporations (-^nationes) owned their own houses. 47 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 97. See on bursarii at the College of the Sorbonne, O. W E I J E R S , Le vocabulaire du College de Sorbonne, CIVICIMA V I (i993)» PP- ii-ij48 Cf. O. W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 266-268; O. W E I J E R S , Le vocabulaire du College de Sorbonne, CIVICIMA VI (1993), p. 12. Note that the semantic development of this term is unusual. The substantively used participle beneficiatus or adjective beneficiarius are both related to the verb beneficiare, which was, in the Middle Ages, mainly used in the sense of 'to grant someone an ecclesiastical benefice'. In the context of the medieval colleges, the favour was not granted by the Church, but by the members of the college, and although in bodi cases an amount of money was granted, the tasks of university beneficiarii were not especially honourable!
44
BURSA, BURSARIUS, BURSALIS, BENEFICIATUS
In England, however, bursarius was used for someone who controlled the communal purse of a college (cf. -^-procurator).m In Oxford, for example, there were three bursarii, hierarchically distinguished into a primus or iunior bursarius, a secundus or medius bursarius, and a tertius or senior
bursarius. The function of bursarius was a principal office, usually held by senior members of the college.50 The use of the term in the sense of college administrator seems to be related to its use in the context of the Mendicant orders, where bursarii collected the bursae and managed the communal funds. Bursa or byrsa is a late Latin derivation of the Greek word {Jtipcra, die skin of an animal, hide or leather.51 In the Middle Ages, the word was used for a leather bag, purse, or especially money-bag, and from this meaning followed naturally the meaning of'cash' or 'fund'.52 In the twelfth century it was commonly used in the meaning of 'communal cash' of a monastery, church or other kind of institution, and in the thirteenth century this usage was adopted into the vocabulary of the student hospices and colleges. As explained above, the related senses of bursa, such as 'one week's living expenses', 'monetary unit' or 'stipend', developed from this basic meaning.53 Both meanings of bursarius described above54 are connected to bursa's basic meaning of 'communal cash' or 'fund'. In the first sense it is used for the student who receives money from the fund, in the second for the official who manages the fund.55
49 In Paris, such a financial manager of college funds was often called prepositus burse. Other related terms for financial managers of colleges are -^procurator, administrator, depositarius or yconomus. Cf. -^procurator. 50 J . M . F L E T C H E R , The Vocabulary of Administration and Teaching at Merton College, Oxford, CTVICIMAVI (1993), p. 50. 51 Cf. T L L , byrsa 52 Cf. N I E R M . byrsa (1), (2) and (3); M W (I), (IIA); D M L (1), (2) and (3). 53
Cf. N I E R M . (4), (5); D M L (5).
54 Note that in the Middle Ages bursarius is also used for purse-maker, leather worker.
Cf. DML(i), (2);MW(z). 55 Cf. D M L (5) and (4).
45 c a n c e l l a r i u s , archidiaconus One of the principal officials in the universities was the cancellarius, chancellor.56 Originally a cancellarius was the secretary of, for example, a king, duke, abbot or bishop. In Carolingian times schools were headed by a so-called -^scolasticus, who took care of the teaching and administration of the school, and was often assisted by his personnel. In the Cathedral schools of the eleventh century, it was initially the bishop who was head of school; subsequently a separate —>scolasticus, -^>magister scolarum, caput
scholae or capiscola was appointed. In the course of the twelfth century, however, as schools expanded, the head of school was no longer involved in the actual teaching, but was fully occupied with his administrative tasks, such as the granting of —tlicentiae docendi. Sometimes these administrative tasks were delegated to the cancellarii of cathedral chapters — secretaries to the chapter and composers of its charters57 —, since their secretarial tasks were quite similar to those of the heads of schools.58 Frequently, however, both functions seem to have been fulfilled by one person, and gradually the ->scolasticus disappeared as head of school, whereas the cancellarius became more and more important.59
56 See for a full discription of the term O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 194-199. 57 See on the terminology of the writing of charters O . G U Y O T J E A N N I N , Le vocabulaire de la diplomatique en latin medieval, CIVTCIMA II (1989), pp. 126-127. Other terms for writers of charters in an institutional context which occur in his article are tabellio and amanuensis {ibid., p. 127). 58 One of the tasks of the head of school was to check and - if necessary - correct the books, and to take care of the book-collection. Cancellarius is thus found, alongside terms such as —>custos or sacrista(-nus) for 'keeper of the books', 'librarian'. Cf. A . V E R N E T , Du 'chartophylax'au 'Librarian, CIVICIMA II (1989), p. 161. 59 Generally speaking it can be said that in cities with universities the function of —> scolasticus was taken over by the cancellarius, whereas in episcopal cities the —tscolasticus or —tmagister scolarium remained head of school. There are, however, several exceptions to this rule, such as the university-cities of Salamanca and Orleans, where the person who performed the tasks of chancellor was called -^scolasticus. Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 194-195. See, on the role of the cancellarius in the educational system of the Jesuits in the late Middle Ages, L . G I A R D , La constitution du systeme educatif jesuite, CIVTCLMA VI (1993), p. 148.
46
CANCELLARIUS, ARCHIDIACONUS
The cancellarius, as an official of the bishop and a representative of the Church, was not, originally, a member of the university, but was nevertheless very powerful; the right of granting the -^-licentiae docendi rested exclusively with him. In Paris he was also the judge of spiritual matters, and had the right to excommunicate. In confrontation with the corporate body of the masters of the university, however, his powers were restricted: the right to grant teaching licences still remained his, but he was obliged to grant them to any of the candidates who had passed their examinations and who were recommended by their professors.60 In Bologna it was only after papal intervention in 1219, when pope Honorius I I I decreed that the archidiaconus held the right to award teaching licences, that the professors lost this right. Despite protests from the professors, the archidiaconus was also the only official who was allowed to grant a doctorate; the professors allowed students to proceed to examinations, but the archidiaconus presided over the ceremony. Thus the function of archidiaconus in the University of Bologna is comparable to the function of cancellarius in Paris, and in the later Middle Ages in Bologna too the archidiaconus was also referred to as cancellarius.61 In Oxford and subsequently also in Cambridge the position of cancellarius in fact combined the functions of -erector and cancellarius.62 He was not, as was the case in e.g. Paris and Bologna, directly appointed by bishop or pope, but a candidate was chosen from the body of professors by his fellows, who was subsequently confirmed in his function by the bishop. He was thus a representative of the Church and the university in one, and in time gained independence from the bishop.63
60 O . W E I J E R S , Terminology des universites (1987), pp. 195-196. 61 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 196. 62 The situation in Montpellier was also comparable to that in Oxford: a cancellarius was chosen from the body of professors, and appointed to office by the bishop. In Cambridge and Montpellier the function of vicecancellarius is also attested. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universith (1987), p. 198 and n. 95. 63 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 196-197. See on the role of the chancellor of the University of Oxford also M . B . H A C K E T T , The University as a Corporate Body (1984), pp. 43-49.
CANCEI.LARIUS, ARCHIDIACONUS
47
For the function of cancellarius the word cancellaria was in use from the beginning of the thirteenth century.64 Cancellarius is a post-classical word, which was at first used in the sense of'door-keeper' or 'porter'. In the Latin of late Antiquity, the function of cancellarius developed into a more important one: scribe of charters and official documents - secretary or chancellor.65 In this sense it was used in different contexts in the Middle Ages: to refer to the chancellor or scribe of a court of law; of a monastery; of a chapter, etc.66 Cancellarius was also used to designate the head of the chancellery of, for example, the papal court or the court of the Carolingian rulers.67 From the twelfth century onwards, when the cancellarii of chapters were appointed as heads of the (cathedral) schools, the word became part of the vocabulary of the administration of schools and universities. The tasks of the university chancellor were closely related to those of the ecclesiastical chancellor. Moreover, the chancellor of the university was, in most cases, a representative of the Church.68
64 Cf. D M I . (3b). 65 Cf. T L L ; B L A I S E , Diet. 66 67
68
Cf. N I E R M . (2), (3) and (7); MW (I); D M L {%), ( 3 a). Cf. N I E R M . (6), (5); MW (II). Cf. O. W F I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 199; N I E R M . (8); D M L (3b).
48
cathedra Cathedra is a term that, in Antiquity as well as in the Middle Ages, had a specific technical meaning in the context of education.69 Already in Antiquity, the term had both a concrete and an abstract meaning, referring either to the actual seat of the master, or metonymically to his dignity or function. In the Middle Ages, cathedra is thus used both for the royal throne itself and the honour or power of the ruler; both for the (arch)bishop's see and the dignity and function of a(n arch)bishop; both for the actual seat of the master and his function or rank.70 The abstract use of the term in an educational context can be illustrated by expressions such as tempus protectionis ad cathedram, cathedra magistralis, or cathedra docentis/doctoris; the concrete use is apparent from expressions such as cathedram magistralem ascendere, or in the participle cathedratus, that is, seated on a master's seat.71 In the thirteenth century, with the adoption of the term in the vocabulary of the universities, it was also used in a slightly different meaning: in this new context cathedra was also used in the sense of'a chair': a professorship or post. The semantic development of the term cathedra is clear. Borrowed from the Greek (KaGeSpcc) its general meaning was 'chair' or 'armchair',72 but it was used in particular to refer to the chair of a master, or to the dignity attached to the function of master. Its concrete and abstract senses were both already present in classical Latin,73 and were used without significant shifts of meaning in the educational context of the Middle Ages. In
69 For a full treatment of the term see O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 119-121. 70 For attestations of cathedra in the sense of 'the function of a master' in the context of urban schools see C . V U L L I E Z , Le vocabulaire des holes urbaines des XII' et XIII' siecles, CTVICIMA V (1992), pp. 93, 98-99. Cathedra is here found alongside regimen scolarum - school management. 71 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 119-120. 72 Cf.TLL(i);OLD(i). 73 Cf. T L L (2a and b).
CATHEDRA
49
the early Middle Ages, the term is particularly common in the meaning of (arch)bishop's see, or the dignity of a bishop.74 Since the Church was closely connected with any kind of education in this period, it is not surprising that the term was adopted into the vocabulary of secular schools and universities.75 Its meaning in this particular context follows naturally from its traditional usage and its usage within the Church.
74 Cf. N I E R M . (2), (3); also: (5) dignity of an abbot; D M L (2); M W (IIB1-2). 75
Cf. N I E R M . (6); D M L (1); M W (IID1-2).
50
cessare, cessatio, suspendere, suspensio In the context of medieval education and, from the thirteenth century onwards, especially in the vocabulary of the university, cessare and suspendere (cessatio and suspensio) refer to the interruption of lessons, either for (summer) vacations or religious feasts, but also due to illness, etc., or because of a strike.76 At the universities, the academic year was interrupted by holidays or other periods in which no lessons took place. In the statutes and calendars, cessare {a lectionibus) or cessatio are the terms used for these interruptions — at first both for unofficial interruptions because of illness or some other personal reason, later especially for statutory vacations.77 The terminology to mark the end of a vacation was resumere or incipere.1* Temporary suspension of lessons, however, happened also for completely different reasons: several conflicts between universities and cities are known in which professors or students felt compelled to put pressure on the city by means of a strike.79 The right to strike had been granted to the masters of Paris before the end of the twelfth century by Louis V I I ,
76 For a full treatment of the terms see O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 315-318, 122-126. 77 See O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 315-318. Other terms that were used for interruptions in the daily routine of lessons are vacatio, dies legibilis and crastina. These are treated in O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 318-323. The summer period, when less educational activity took place, was also called parvum ordinarium, in opposition to the rest of the year, which was called magnum ordinarium. See P. G L O R I E U X , L'enseignement au moyen Age (1968), p. 100. 78 Resumere and incipere were also used to refer to the resumption of lessons after a strike. At the English universities, resumere (or resumptid) was generally used for the recommencement of lessons after a vacation, while in Paris the term was used especially to mark the end of a strike. In Cambridge incipere lectiones or inceptio lectionum also occurs regularly, as does the term reassumere. Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 123, 315-318. For the use of resumerelresumptio and inciperelinceptio in a different sense, that is, pertaining to examinations and ceremonial entry into the corps of professors, see -^incipere (Cat. I I I ) . 79 The use of the term in this sense is treated in O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 122-126.
CESSARE, CESSATIO, SUSPENDERE, SUSPENSIO
51
Honorius I I I granted the same right to the students of the University of Bologna in 1217, and other universities immediately followed suit. The terminology used to mark the beginning of such a strike is, again, cessare {a lectionibus) or suspendere (lectiones).*0
Suspendere, however, though commonly used in the sense of'to (temporarily) interrupt a certain activity', could also have different meanings, such as 'to suspend someone from his office', or, more literally, 'to hang someone'. In a conflict between the clerics and citizens in Oxford in 1209, for example, the sources mention the suspendium clericorum: these clerics were not suspended from office nor did they cancel their lessons till further notice; rather they were actually hanged on the gallows. This course of action of the city caused the professors of Oxford to strike, and the students to move to Cambridge.81 Both cessare and suspendere were already used in classical Latin in meanings closely related to the ones described above. Cessare had a wide variety of meanings, among which 'to end an activity' or 'to take a rest from an activity',82 and preserved this meaning in the context of medieval education. The specific meaning of 'to strike', however, seems only to have arisen in the course of the thirteenth century. Cessatio, the noun derived from cessare, was the intermission or relaxation in business itself.83 In the Middle Ages cessatio was commonly used to refer to 'withdrawal' or 'retirement' from an office.84 In the sources of the universities it was used for the end of an academic term {cessatio magistrorum) .8S
80 The first attestations of suspendere and cessare in the sense of'to strike' date from 1231, while the nouns suspensio and cessatio occur a little later: O. Weijers mentions a source from 1255. Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 124. 81 The University of Cambridge owes its existence to this strike and student migration. (See D.R. LEADER, History of the University of Cambridge (1988), pp. 16-19.) Another example of student migration because of a strike occurs in the history of the University of Bologna, where in 1222 strikes caused the students to move away to Padua, where consequently a university was founded. See O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 123.
82 Cf. TLL; O L D (1), (2). 83 Cf. O L D (ia-b). See also cessatio in the sense of refraining from work on Sundays: BLAISE,
Lex.
(3).
84 Cf. DML(ic) 85 Cf. DML(ia)
52
CESSARE, CESSATIO, SUSPENDERE, SUSPENSIO
Suspendere was less common in Antiquity, at least in metonymical senses such as 'to keep a person in suspense' or 'to leave a matter undecided'. 86 The meaning of 'to interrupt' or 'to break off or suspend an activity temporarily', which is at the basis of the meaning found in the vocabulary of the university, is also found in Antiquity. 87 The literal sense of 'to kill someone by hanging' is in use in Antiquity as well as the Middle Ages. 88 In the Christian Latin of late Antiquity, suspendere {aliquem) came to mean to suspend someone from office89 — a meaning that remained in common use in the Middle Ages. 90
86 Cf. OLD(ya-b) 87
Cf. F O R C ; O L D (8)
88 Cf. O L D (3); SOUTER. Note that suspendium is the common word for 'hanging', and that suspensio usually has other meanings, such as 'break' or 'intermission', 'suspension from office', or 'a state of incertainry'. Cf. N I E R M . 89 B L A I S E , Diet., (4) 90
Cf. NIERM.; SOUTER
53
clericus
[•;
Since from the early Middle Ages to roughly the twelfth century education and literacy were the preserve of members of the clergy, throughout these centuries clericus, besides meaning 'cleric' in the modern sense of the word, was also used to refer to 'someone who could read and write', a -tlitteratus in other words.91 By the tenth century clericus litteratus had almost become a hendiadys, and expressions such as litteras discere or puero litteras dare actually meant 'to become a member of the clergy', or 'to predestine a child for the clergy.'92 The basic meaning of clericus was, of course, 'member of the clergy', someone who had taken holy orders, or at least the lower ones, which he showed by having a tonsured head.93 Because of the implied ability to read and write, however, the term was used for all kinds of officials who were professional readers and writers: notaries, for example, or treasurers or registrars.94 Moreover, for the same reasons the term was applied to persons who were educated, or who had the reputation of being learned.95 In the twelfth century, clericus was used in the context of the monastic and cathedral schools to refer to anyone who belonged to the school's circle, whether he was a teacher or a student. Subsequently, the same use of the term is encountered in the thirteenth century in the early sources of the universities: here too clericus can refer to either teacher or student. By the thirteenth century, however, the participation of laity in education had increased greatly. Particularly in Italy, the number of lay professors and lay students who were members of the universities was
91 See on this H . G R U N D M A N N , Litteratus — illitteratus (repr. 1978), pp. 44-47. See also O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universith (1987), pp. 183-185, and see —»'litteratus, illitteratus. 92 Cf. H . G R U N D M A N N , Litteratus- illitteratus (repr. 1978), p. 9, 44-ff. 93 Clericus was used for any ordained clerk: monk, canon, a clerk with minor or major orders. Cf. N I E R M . (1-4); D M L (1); M W (I). 94 BLAISE, Lex. (5-7); D M L (2-6); M W (IIA) 95
NIERM.
(6); B L A I S E , Lex.
(4); D M L (7b) and MW ( I I B ) .
54
CLERICUS
considerable. Consequently, the expression clerici scolares (as opposed to laid scolares) was used to clarify the ecclesiastical status of the students in question.96 Clericus, which is actually the adjective derived from clerus (litt. 'fate'), is a late-classical term for anyone who serves the Church. Already in late Antiquity its opposite number is the term laicus, 'lay person'.97 The link with literacy is made from the early Middle Ages. Jerome, for example, writes in one of his letters 'Qui litteras nescit clericus esse non potest', 'He who does not know his letters cannot be a clericus.'98 From the Carolingian period onwards, the term is commonly used in the meaning of scholar or man of learning.99 There were also clerks, of course, who were at a less advanced stage of their education; correspondingly the term clericus can also refer to pupil or student in general.100
96 The legal status of these clerici scolares, however, remained ambiguous. While in a way they were bound to the Church by their ordination and enjoyed the privileges and immunities of a man of the Church, at the same time they were free to retire from the clergy, to get married and to pursue a secular career as soon as their studies were at an end. Cf. O. W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 184. 97
Cf. F O R C ; TLL.
98
H I E R O N Y M U S , Ep. 60 n. 10.
99
Cf. N I E R M . (6); B L A I S E , Lex.
(4); D M L (7b) and MW (IIB).
100 Cf. BLAISE, Lex. (3); D M L (7a) and MW (IIC).
55
collecta, solarium For the payment of teachers two terms are generally used, which in principle refer to two different systems of payment. First, collecta is used for a system in which the lay master, who could not live on the revenues from his benefice, received payment for his services directly from the students.101 The students agreed to pay their fees once or twice a year, either in a contract between the master and the individual student, or a group of students contracted a teacher. This system is attested from the twelfth century onwards. Secondly, the term solarium is used for a system in which the teacher is paid out of communal funds, owned by either the city or the university. This system was first introduced in the course of the thirteenth century in the universities of Italy. The first attestations date from ca. 1225-1230, and occur in the sources of the universities of Naples, Vercelli, Padua and Sienna — all of which had to compete with the famous university of Bologna. At the end of the thirteenth century, the University of Bologna also adopted the system and employed a few salaried professors of her own, but most of the professors teaching in Bologna were paid out of the so-called collectae. Thus, in the sources a (yearly) salary is usually referred to as salarium, (or sometimes stipendium) while fees paid directly by the students to their master are called collectae. In the sources of Italy and Spain, a neat distinction is usually made between the two, resulting in expressions such as {doctores) salariati or sedes salariate. In Paris and England, the term salarium is conspicuously rare in the university sources, or even altogether absent. Salarium is hardly ever used for the fixed salary of a teacher, although the system of fixed payment must have been common. Just to complicate matters, in the sources of the universities of Toulouse and Montpellier the term salarium is used for fees paid directly by the students to their masters.
101 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universith (1987), pp. 103-m, for a full treatment of these terms.
56
COLLECTA, SALARIUM
The term collecta did exist in Antiquity, but was not frequent. It was derived from colligo, the basic meaning of which is 'to gather, collect', and it was also used for the gathering of money.102 In the Middle Ages, the term was commonly used for all kinds of gatherings, whether of people or of things. Thus, for example, the term was used for meetings in the sense of divine services, for the armed escort of travelling parties, for periodical meetings of monks, etc.103 On the other hand, it was also used for the gathering in of money for a banquet, for collections of alms or taxes.104 The term could, furthermore, be used both for the act of collecting money, and for the contribution itself.105 In the context of schools and universities, the term acquired the technical meaning of 'school fee' or 'lecturer's fee',106 which accords with the use of the term in other areas of public life of the time. The expression collectas facere was commonly used for the collection of contributions. The verb collectare occasionally occurs in the sense of'to impose taxes or fees on someone'. Salarium, which ultimately derives from sal, salt, was used already in Antiquity for the official payment of a civil or military servant.107 In the Middle Ages, many meanings related to the original one of 'something pertaining to salt' remain in use: salarium can refer to a salt cellar, for example, or a toll on salt.108 In addition, however, the word also continued to be used to refer to a (yearly) salary or fee.109 It was very common in the context of public life as well as of schools and universities. The medieval neologisms salariare or salarizare are attested from the thirteenth century onwards, and are used in the sense of'to give or pay a salary'.110
102 Cf. T L L , under colligo, I I I , col. 1621. Collecta is here cited in two meanings: 1. a fee, contribution or tax, and 2. an assembly or meeting. The examples are from early Christian texts. 103 Cf. N I E R M . (2, 7, 4 resp.); see also M W ( I A and I B ) . Note that the term was also used in a liturgical meaning, viz. for the first prayer of the office, after the faithful have gathered. (NlERM. 3 ; M W I I C ) 104 Cf. N I E R M . (9, 10, 11 resp.); see also M W ( I I A and B ) ; and D M L (under colligere, 3a-c, 4a-c). 105 Cf., for example, D M L 4b: '(collection of) tax, levy, contribution or sim.' 106 See N I E R M . (13), and D M L (under colligere, 4d). 107 Cf. F O R C ; O L D . Note the expression salarium annuum for yearly salary. 108 See N I E R M . (1-4); B L A I S E , Lex. (1-3). 109 See B L A I S E , Lex. (4, 5) no DuC; BLAISE, Lex.
57
collegium In the context of medieval education the word collegium occurs in three senses. First, it is used synonymously with, for example, —^universitas or societas, in the sense of the university itself as a corporate body of teachers or students. Secondly, it occurs in the expression collegia magistrorum or doctorum, which refers to associations of professors of a faculty.1" Thirdly, it denotes the houses founded for poor students."2 Collegium in its broad sense of corporation, society, was used in the Middle Ages in the specific sense of university, just like -^yuniversitas, societas, and consortium. When used in this context, the term emphasizes the corporate character of the organisation."3 The sense of 'college of professors' was developed in Bologna, where the university was in principle an organisation of students. In the late twelfth or early thirteenth century professors founded their own associations for the management of examinations and degrees. These 'examination-committees' developed into real corporate organisations, so-called collegia, with their own statutes and representatives {-^priores or prepositi). In fourteenth-century Bologna there were two colleges of professors, one of Civil, and the other of Canon Law, which consisted of doctorates of the University of Bologna. These colleges of professors nominated their own candidates for membership, examined them and accepted them into their college. They operated independently, but pledged allegiance to the rector of the students' university. In Padua, similar colleges were formed in the Faculty of Law around 1260, and later also in the Faculties of Arts and Medicine (collegium artistarum or artistarum et medicorum). In Naples, every faculty seems
111 For a full treatment of the term in these two senses see O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 70-75. 112 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 80-84, 88. 113 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 70-71, gives examples of the use of the term in this sense from the second half of the thirteenth century,
58
COLLEGIUM
to have had its own college of professors by the end of the thirteenth century.114 In Paris, where the basic organisation of the university was not an association of students, but of professors, the institution of colleges of professors seems perhaps redundant. Nevertheless, the earliest attestations of such collegia magistrorum belong in just this context:115 from 1250 onwards, several colleges were founded, first for the Faculties of Law (perhaps in imitation of Bologna), and then also for other faculties. In the fourteenth century the University of Montpellier had its own collegium doctorum utriusque iuris, and in Orleans, there was one college of professors for the entire University. The English universities never adopted the institution. In its sense of student house — still preserved in today's academic vocabulary -, the term collegium entered the vocabulary of the medieval university in the second quarter of the thirteenth century. Since board and lodging for students was scarce and expensive, benefactors founded houses in which students lived collectively. The important advantage over previous systems of shared housing (cf. —thospitium, domus, aula)116 was that these colleges had a much more permanent character, and as such
114 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 71-72; see also A . M A I E R U , La terminologie de I'universite de Bologne de medecine et des arts, CIVICIMA V (1992), p. 142; and I D . , University Training in Medieval Europe (1994), p. 75 n. 18, on the number of colleges in Italian universities. 115 O. Weijers found attestations of collegia magistrorum in the sources of the Italian universities from the end of the thirteenth or beginning of the fourteenth century onwards, while the earliest attestation of such a college at the University of Paris is dated in 1272. (Cf. note 19 for the rejection of an even earlier attestation, which is (wrongly) frequendy cited.) Ihis, however, must be attributed to the fact that many of the Italian sources have been lost, and many sources are unedited; circumstantial evidence points convincingly to die practice of the foundation of colleges before the appearance of the term collegium in Italian sources. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 7172. 116 Note, however, that domus remained in use alongside and synonymous with collegium. Stricto sensu collegium was used to emphasize the collective body, and domus was used rather for the actual building in which the community lived. In practice, however, die terms were interchangeable. Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 82-84 f ° r a comparison between attestations of -thospitium, domus and collegium.
COLLEGIUM
59
contributed greatly to the stability and continuity of the university as a whole. The number of colleges founded expanded enormously in the second half of the thirteenth century, and the colleges almost completely ousted previous forms of shared housing by the end of the Middle Ages. The members of the colleges were usually called -^socii, and at the head of a college stood the so-called -^>prior or -^provisor. The college further housed a master of Arts, or at least a —ybaccalarius, who acted as a tutor or supervisor for the academic activities of the students, and a library.117 Among the first colleges founded in Paris were the College des DixHuit (which was founded in 1180, but only developed into an actual college in 1231), and the College de Sorbonne (1257); Merton College in Oxford was founded in 1274. At the end of the thirteenth century, Paris numbered fourteen colleges, Oxford three.118 In the context of the religious orders, similar colleges were founded by Benedictines, Cistercians, and Mendicants, but their educational goals and especially their recruitment were completely different.119 First of all, these houses were only accessible for brothers within die order, and second, they housed complete schools.120 Shared characteristics, however,
117 In the fourteenth century and later the educational programme of the college was in some cases even more extensive than tutoring and supervision. The College de Navarre in Paris, for example, employed no less than three professors, one for Grammar, one for Arts and a third for 'iheology. O n Navarre, see N . G O R O C H O V , Le college de Navarre de safondation (130s) au debut du XVe siecle (1418) (1997). The sources of other Parisian colleges show that there was a weekly or even daily routine of disputations and lessons. See S. L U S I G N A N , L'enseignement des arts dans les colleges parisiens au Moyen Age (1997), pp. 43-55118 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 80-81. O n colleges in Southern France, see M . - H . J U L L I E N D E P O M M E R O L , Le vocabulaire des colleges dans le midi de la France, CIVICIMA VI (1993), pp. 27-29; on the history of the colleges of the University of Prague, F. S M A H E L , Scholae, Collegia et Bursae Universitatis Pragensis, CIVICIMA V I (1993), pp. 122-130; and on the College de Sorbonne, O . W K I J E R S , Le vocabulaire du College de Sorbonne, CIVICIMA VI (1993), pp. n, 25. 119 Note, however, that within the context of the religious orders the common term for 'school' was —tstudium, less common and less specific terms are domusllocus, conventus or monasterium. The less specific terms can refer both to a religious house and a religious school. The two functions are not always distinguished. 120 See, however, for some late-medieval examples of Parisian secular colleges in which education seems quite advanced, S. L U S I G N A N , L'enseignement des arts dans les colleges parisiens au Moyen Age (1997).
60
COLLEGIUM
are that in these houses too a group of people was lodged for the purpose of study. Just as in the secular colleges they lived according to certain regulations not so different from monastic rules, under the supervision of a senior, usually called —^provisor. It is very likely that the large secular colleges of the second half of the thirteenth century, especially those for students of Theology, were based on the religious collegia. The secular student's houses, which at the outset differed gready from die religious colleges, came to resemble them in many respects.121 In Antiquity, the term collegium was used in general for a (corporate) body of persons, and applied in specific meanings such as a college of priests or the board of magistrates of a city.122 In the Middle Ages, this usage in an administrative context continued,123 but the term was also commonly used for monastic communities, ecclesiastical or canonical colleges or collegiate churches.124 The academic use of the term seems to incorporate both connotations:125 the uses of the word as a synonym of university and for colleges of professors emphasize the corporate aspect, while the application to student houses emphasizes the aspect of collectivity, and seems to have been inspired by models of communal living as found in monasteries and convents.
121 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 81-82. 122 Cf. T L L ( I B ) ; O L D (1), (3a). For a description of the semantic development of the term see O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universite's (1987), pp. 73-75. 123 See, e.g., MW (IA2); M L D (ia). 124 M W (IAi), (IB2); M L D (ib-c). 125
MLD (2); BLAISE, Lex., (3).
61
commissarius, hebdomadarius At the English universities, specific terms were used for those who were delegated by the chancelor to take care of the weekly affairs of its court of justice. In Oxford, these functionaries were called hebdomadarii, as they were appointed to this office for a period of one week.126 In Cambridge, these delegated judges were called commissarii.127 They had jurisdiction in routine cases, but in important matters the authority rested with the chancelor.128 In principle these hebdomadarii or commissarii were professors of Canon or Civil Law, but they often delegated the task to their —> baccalarii.129 In Oxford the specific office of hebdomadarius is first mentioned in 1267; in Cambridge the function is described in the statutes of 1236-1254, but the term commissarius appears for the first time in 1293. In the Christian Latin of late Antiquity, hebdomadarius (or ebdomadarius) was commonly used for a person who was charged with a certain task or responsibility for a period of one week.130 In the Middle Ages the term is most often used in a monastic context,131 for example as a substantive for the priest who conducts the services for a week, or as an adjective in expressions such as hebdomadarius lector (ad mensas), the person responsible for reading aloud in the refectory for one week, or hebdomadarius
126 Professors of Canon and Civil Law also took turns, in rotation, to cover a larger span of time. See M . B . H A C K E T T , The University as a Corporate Body (1984), pp. 79, 81. 127 See for a full treatment of the two terms O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 215-218. 128 One could appeal to the court of the chancellor. In graver cases -such as those where professors were involved- the jurisdiction went directly to the court of the chancellor. For die most serious offences, requiring (for example) suspension from the university or imprisonment, the jurisdiction went to the supreme court, that is, the assembly of all the -+magistri. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 215-216, n. 194. 129 These -^baccalarii were nominated by the professors and appointed by the chancellor or —tprocurdtores. 130
Cf. T L L (2),
B L A I S E , Lex.
(1).
131 Though not exclusively; see, e.g., B L A I S E , Lex. (2); N I E R M . (3): 'serf liable to weekly labour service'.
62
COMMISSARIUS, HEBDOMADARIUS
coquine, the person in charge of the kitchen for one week.132 The use of the term in the context of the university is concurrent with the existing usage in the vocabulary of the church. Commissarius is a medieval Latin term, derived from the verb committere. In general it is used for a person who is charged with a certain assignment or task.133 A delegate of the king or pope, for example, could be called a commissarius,134 but so could an executor,135 or a person charged with a certain responsibility and competence in matters of the law.136 It is this last meaning that concurs with the use of the term in the sources of the University of Cambridge.137
132 Cf. N I E R M . (3 and 1 respectively); D u C ; B L A I S E , Diet. (2). Examples closer to the world of the university are found, e.g., in the sources of the College of the Sorbonne; cf. O . " W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 217. 133 Cf. DMI, (i);MW(l-2). 134 NIERM. ( I ) ; DML (2a-c). 135 Cf. B L A I S E , Lex. (1); N I E R M . (2).
136 This meaning can be found in English sources from 1136 onwards; cf. D M L (3). 137 DML (5).
63 c o m m u n a , c o m m u n i a , communarius In the sources of the English universities, communa (or communia) has a meaning which is comparable to -^bursa in, for example, Paris.138 It has several meanings, which are interrelated in the same way as those of —» bursa. First, it can be used in the sense of 'expenses for a week's living', and is attested with this meaning from the 1270s onwards. Further, the term came to mean a certain amount of money, viz. as much as was needed for a week's board and lodging, and was used in this sense as a unit in which to express, for example, fees due to the faculty or university.139 Like the term —>btma, it was also used for the amount of money poor students received from their college for a week's living expenses; a kind of weekly bursary or scholarship. In the sources of Merton College, two meanings are attached to the term communarius, which are only distantly related to the meanings of the term communa described above, and unrelated to each other. First, the college chose two to four communarii each year, who acted as servants (for the community, but especially to the warden) or functioned, for example, as organists in the college chapel.140 Secondly, individuals of great wealth or outstanding scholarly eminence sometimes stayed in the college and were placed in college rooms. They shared the communal provisions (the 'commons' or collective meals, for example) with the members of the college, and were therefore called communarii. In return, their presence brought income, prestige and perhaps social or political advantages to the college.141
138 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 99-102. 139 T h i s m e a n i n g is attested in the statutes of O x f o r d from 1350 onwards.
140 J . M . F L E T C H E R , The Vocabulary of Administration and Teaching at Merton College, Oxford, CIVICIMA VI (1993), p. 49. 141 In Tudor times they were also called commemales. Cf. ibid., p. 50.
64
COMMUNA, COMMUNIA, COMMUNARIUS
A more general meaning, which remains closer to the first sense of communa in the context of the English university colleges, is that of 'a student receiving commons'. This use is attested only from the fifteenth century onwards.142 Both communa and communia143 are medieval forms, related to classical Latin words such as commune, communitas or communio. These, of course, have a wide range of meanings and uses in the classical and medieval periods, but the specific technical meaning which concerns us here is rooted in the use of the word in the Anglo-Saxon area. The first meaning of the word is, both on the continent and in the Anglo-Saxon world, 'right of common', or 'common land'.144 Further, the term was used for all kinds of common or communal possessions or goods, such as pasture, woods, buildings, but also common funds145 — it is this last meaning which forms the basis for its use in the context of the university. Additionally, commune was used in an ecclesiastical context for die so-called 'commons' —allowances of food from common funds—; this use is also related to the use of the term in the university colleges, where poor students were given an allowance to pay for their communal meals.
142 D M L (2b). 143 The first seems to be more common in England, the second on the continent. O. W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 101 and n. 40. 144 Cf. B L A I S E , Lex., communia (2 and 1, 5, 6, 7); M W , communia (ia and b); D M L (ia andb). 145 D M L (3a).
65
congregatio Congregatio has two closely related meanings, the first of which refers to the act of gathering (esp. of people), the second to the result of this act: the gathered group of people or the assembly itself.146 In this second meaning, 'a (socially coherent) group of people', congregatio was used in the context of the medieval universities alongside -^collegium for a community of students (living in the same hospice).147 In this same context the term congregatio also developed the specific technical meaning of'an assembly or meeting of the members of the university, the faculty or the —>natio\ Assemblies were an important means of university administration and took place at different organisational levels: the members of —>nationes and faculties met regularly and were represented at the meetings of the university as a whole. The general assembly or congregatio generalis (also: plena) consisted of all members of the university who qualified to vote. In Bologna this meant that all the students were part of the congregatio generalis, in Paris and in Oxford it included only the —>magistri regentes, that is the masters who were actually teaching (cf. -^regere in Cat. III). 1 4 8
146 For a full treatment of the term see O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 63-69. 147 See, for example, the usage of the word in the sources of the College of the Sorbonne, where it is interchangeable with —^collegium, conventus, consortium, and domus: O. W E I J E R S , Le vocabulaire du College de Sorbonne, CTVJC1MA V I (1993), p. n . I n the sources of the University of Prague, conventus was interchangeable with -^collegium: F. S M A H E L , Scholae, Collegia etBursae Universitatis Pragensis, CTVICIMA VI (1993), p. 122. The terminology seems to be different in the context of medieval schools in general. In the context of the urban schools, C. Vulliez found the terms grex, consorcium and conventus for the notion of the school as a community: C . V U L L I E Z , Le vocabulaire des e'coles urbaines des XII' et XIII' siecles, CTVICIMA V (1992), p. 93; and in the context of the Mendicant schools, G. Barone attested domus, conventus and locus as terms for the place of education of the friars: G . B A R O N E , Les convents des Mendiants, des colleges de'guises?, CIVICIMA V I (1993), p. 150. Congregatio seems not to have been used in this context. 148 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universite's (1987), pp. 63-64.
66
CONGREGATIO
In thirteenth-century Oxford, the sources of the university distinguish two kinds of assemblies: the congregatio plena or magna149, which consisted of all the masters of the university, both regentes and non regentes; and the congregatio regentium or minor of only the -^magistri regentes. The members of the congregatio plena devoted themselves to editing the statutes of the university, while those of the congregatio regentium were involved in the day-to-day management of the unverisity: its financial and administrative affairs and matters concerning teaching and examinations. In the fourteenth century, a third group was added — the congregatio artistarum or nigra, which consisted of the -^magistri regentes of the Faculty of Arts.150 In this assembly, the drafts of statutes were discussed in advance of their discussion in the congregatio plena.151 Although congregatio is the most frequent term for these kinds of statutory meetings, other terms also occur, such as cetus (coetus, cetus magistrorum) in the sources of Oxford, Cambridge and Montpellier, convocatio in Oxford and Cambridge, and -^conventus in the sources of the French universities.152 The meanings of the term in classical and medieval Latin do not fundamentally differ. In classical Latin, the term denotes both the act of congregation and the congregation itself.153 The two meanings were preserved in medieval Latin,154 though, as in Antiquity, the second was much more common than the first. Its usage in the university does not differ
149 Note, however, that the expression congregatio magna had an entirely different meaning in Cambridge: here the congregatio magna was the annual meeting of representatives of the cicy and university, at which occasion both parties pledged keep their peace. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 64. 150 I.e. die largest and most influential Faculty of the University of Oxford. 151 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 63-64; with references to, among others, M . B . H A C K E T T , The University as a Corporate Body (1984), pp. 55-63. 152 For a more extensive treatment of these terms as alternatives for congregatio see O. W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 68-69. 153 Cf.TLL;OLD 154 Cf. D M L (i), (3)
CONGREGATIO
67
from other contexts,155 but expressions such as congregatio generalis, congregatio plena, congregatio or cetus magistrorum do have certain technical aspects specific to the university context.156 In the Middle Ages the term was also commonly used to refer to religious communities, especially monastic communities, but also, for example, chapters of canons.157 In this usage, congregatio develops the meaning of a corporate collectivity or institutional community. The usage of congregatio for colleges or student hospices runs parallel to this development.
155 S u c h as, for example, the use of the w o r d for 'synod' in ecclesiastical contexts; cf. N I E R M . (2); D M L (ic); B L A I S E , Lex., (2). 156 Cf. N I E R M . (6); D M L (id); B L A I S E , Lex., (5). 157 Cf. N I E R M . (3-5); D M L (ic), fra-b); B L A I S E , Lex. (4), (6).
68
conservator (privilegiorum), iustitiarius (scholarum), tractator (studii) There were several officials who had a certain role in the administration of the universities, but who were in fact extraneous. They were appointed by authorities outside the universities to exercise supervision, defend privileges or promote interests. In 1252 Pope Innocent IV created the office of conservator (privilegiorum) for the University of Paris:158 the conservator was an official appointed by the Church to protect the privileges bestowed on the university by the pope.159 In Salamanca the term conservator was used for a different office: here a conservator studii (attested from 1254 onwards) was appointed by the king to promote the interests of the university.160 A second category is that of the iustitiarius (scholarum) at the University of Naples. This university fell under the authority of its founder, Emperor Frederick I I , and his successors. Consequently, the administration of justice was in die hands of the royal chancellor, and was delegated, when members of the university were involved, to an official appointed by tlie king — the so-called iustitiarius.161 A diird category of officials is that of the tractatores studii in thirteenth-century Padua; these were citizens of Padua chosen to supervise
158 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 211-222. The term seems not to have been used before 1265. 159 These officials sometimes delegated their task to others: in the sources of the University of Toulouse, for example, one finds the function of subconservator or defensor. Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 221. 160 Note that in the fifteenth century the term conservator (librorum) also occurs in the meaning of librarian or curator of books. Cf. A . V E R N E T , DU 'chartophylaxau 'Librarian, CIWCIMA II (1989), pp. 158-159; -^librarius (Cat. I I ) . 161 The term iustitiarius was also used for high officials of justice appointed by other secular authorities. The function of iustitiarius at the university first occurs in the second half of the thirteenth century. He was assisted in his task by servientes or apparitores (cf. -^•bedellus). See also O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 220-221.
CONSERVATOR, IUSTITIARIUS, TRACTATOR
certain matters of the university. They had the right, for example, to appoint paid professors and to negotiate their salaries.162 All of these terms and their uses are not specific for the vocabulary of the university. They have the same meanings both in and beyond this context. Since they are terms for officials who were, strictly speaking, not part of the university, this is exactly as one would expect. The meaning of conservator as 'someone who defends or protects' (in all kinds of areas)163 remained in essence the same in classical and medieval Latin.164 The term iustitiarius is a medieval creation, derived from the substantive iustitia, and means 'someone who administers justice'. In the field of law it was used for officials of kings or other secular authorities.165 The term tractator, finally, is scarce in classical Latin.166 It is derived from the verb tractare, and in the Christian Latin of the late-antique period developed the meaning of'someone who treats something', for example, the author of a treatise, an orator or preacher, or especially, an exegete of the Bible.167 In the Middle Ages, tractator is also used in the sense of 'negotiator'.168
162 For a full treatment see O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 218-219. In the fourteenth century these same functionaries were called reformatores studii. In Merton College at the close of the Middle Ages, however, reformator was a term used for an official within the university: the so-called reformator baccallariorum, for example, was a master who surveyed the progress of newly elected fellows of the college. Cf. J . M . F L E T C H E R , The Vocabulary of Administration and Teaching at Merton College, Oxford, CIWCIMA VI (1993), pp. 46-58. 163 Cf. TLL; O L D 164 Cf. D M L (1); MW ( I , I I ) . The related term defensor was, in the Middle Ages, often found in expressions such as defensor ecclesiae or defensor monasterii - the 'patron' of a church or monastery (cf. BLAISE (I); N I E R M . (6)). The function defensor ofthe university follows naturally from this use. 165 Cf. D M L (3-6). In origin iustitiarius was an adjective ( D M L 1-2), but it was soon used as a substantive. 166 The O L D mentions two meanings: 'imperial official' (2), or 'masseur' (1)! 167 Cf. B L A I S E , Diet. (3); N I E R M . (1-2); but see also O L D (s.v. tractare) (9). 168 Cf. NIERM. (6): 'S. XIII'.
70
custos The term custos, 'guardian' or 'keeper', is applied to two specific technical meanings in medieval intellectual life. First, the term is used in the context of medieval libraries or archives {custos librorum, chartarum, bibliothece, armarii etc.), to mean 'librarian or 'keeper of the archives'. Secondly, it is sometimes used in the context of medieval schools: as an alternative for the term magister in the teaching of the very young {custos puerorum, infantium), with more stress on the disciplinary aspects of a master's duties; and as a term for an administrative function (and several servant functions) in the English university colleges.169 The school-related meaning of the term, 'teacher of the very young', is first found in the context of the monastery. In the Carolingian period the term was sometimes used for the person responsible for the education of the oblates {custos puerorum, custos infantium)™ emphasising not only the educational aspect of his function but also the disciplinary aspect of supervision and punishment. It was also used for several administrative functions within a monastic community, such as, for example, the custos hospitii (who was responsible for guests), or the custos maneriorum or grangiorum (who was the keeper of the manors owned by or under the management of the monastery).171 In this same administrative sphere, the term was applied in several specific technical meanings at the English university colleges, especially at Merton College in Oxford. Custos was used for the college principal or warden (elsewhere called -^provisor or -^principalis), appointed for life and responsible for the day-to-day management of the college. He was
169 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 269, 270-271 ('Attestations'), 272273 ('Developpement semantique"). She does not examine the word in its book-related context. 170 N I E R M . 21; O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 273, n. 38. J.-Y. T I L L I E T T E , Le vocabulaire des ecoles monastiques, CIVICIMA V (1992), pp. 69-70. 171 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 273, n. 39-40.
CUSTOS
71
assisted by a vicecustos or senior (subwarden), who was elected on a yearly basis by the college members.172 Both in Antiquity and in the Middle Ages, custos has the general meaning of 'guardian' or 'keeper'.173 In the Middle Ages, custos without attributive adjunct is often used to refer to the guardian of a church or monastery in general174 (sometimes assisted by a subcustos), but also to the guardian or keeper of the church treasure or its book-collection.175 Set combinations of terms that are found in reference to such functions are custos thesauri, custos librorum, custos armarii, custos bibliothece and custos
litterarum}16 The origin of tiie term custos for the function of librarian or archivist lies in the Greek word (pv>Xa|, used in the Byzantine terms
172 See for custos as 'college principal' or 'warden' at the colleges of Cambridge and Oxford, O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 268-271; J . M . F L E T C H E R , The Vocabulary of Administration and Teaching at Merton College, Oxford, CIVICIMA VI (I99i)> PP- 46-48, 52-53. At the Oxford and Cambridge colleges the term was further applied to several servant functions, such as the college groom, custos equorum, and the person responsible for the college swans, custos cignorum. At Merton College, the keepers of the so-called 'Rede Chest', a fund for loans and pledges for the benefit of the college members, were called the custodes ciste. 173
TLL; FORC.
174 N I E R M . gives examples of custos meaning 'guardian' in a literal sense, e.g. the keeper of the church building (8), but also figuratively: custos is used for a bishop (4) or abbot, either in his capacity as administrator of the temporalities of a monastery, or as the spiritual head of a monastery (1-3). 175
N I E R M . (7)
176 I h c origin and different applications of the term in a book-related context are discussed extensively by A. V E R N E T in Du 'chartophylax'au 'Librarian, CIVICIMA I I (1989), pp. 157, 159-161. He mentions different combinations for the function of librarian: custos thesauri, custos librorum, custos armarii and custos bibliothece (pp. 160-161, with references to sources in footnotes 28-32). For the function of archivist, he mentions custos chartarum and custos thesauri chartarum (p. 161, references in footnotes 33-35). As alternative terms for the keeper of books or archives he points to words derived from his main attribute - the key(s): archiclavus, archiclaverius, claviger, clavipotens (p. 161, references in footnotes 36-38). O. GUYOTJEANNIN, Le vocabuhiire de la diplomatique, CIVICIMA I I (1989), found in his sources for the function of archivist custos litterarum (p. 132, references in footnote 52). A. GARCIA Y GARCI'A, Vocabulario de las escuelas en la peninsula Iberica, CIVICIMA V (1992), found the term librorum custos in the sources for the history of schooling in the Iberian Peninsula in the Visigothic period (p. 165).
72
CUSTOS
and PvpA,iocpuXa^, which were translated in ninth-century sources as chartarum custos"1 and librorum custos.™ The custos puerorum or infantium in medieval schools was, so to speak, not a keeper of things, but of pupils. He was responsible for their education, but also their upbringing in a wider sense. He had to guard the rules as well as the children.
177 ANASTASIUS BIBLIOTHECARIUS, P L 129, c. 47-48; cf. A. V E R N E T , DU 'chartophylax'au 'Librarian, CTVJCIMA II (1989), p. 157, n. 3. Other terms used for chartophylax or chartarum custos are chartularius or chartinacius (references: ibid., p. 157, n. 4). 178 Liber Pontificalis z, p. 180, I.18; cf. A . V E R N E T , DU 'chartophylax' au 'Librarian, CLWCLMA II (1989), p. 157 n. 5.
73
decanus In the thirteenth century, the office of faculty dean existed only in Paris and in Montpellier.179 Originally, this title and function were reserved for the eldest professor of the faculty, who convened its meetings and presided over them, and who equalled the -Erector in rank. As die importance and power of the -Erector grew in the course of the thirteenth century, the office of decanus gradually changed. Title and function were no longer automatically bestowed on the eldest of the professors, rather the decanus was elected by his fellow professors. He represented his own faculty in general assemblies of the university, just as the -Erector represented the university as a whole, and the -^>procuratores represented their -^nationes. The main task of the decanus was the organisation of the teaching-activities within his own faculty. In the thirteenth-century sources of the universities, decani are mentioned for the Faculty of Theology in Paris, the Faculties of Arts and Medicine in Montpellier. In late medieval Europe decani as heads of faculties are more common.180 In the English colleges, the term decanus (College Dean) also existed, but designated a different function. These decani were in charge of a group often students, tutoring them, monitoring their progress and maintaining order. In the thirteenth century, vicenarii are also found, who watched over a group of twenty students, but this office disappeared in the fourteenth century.181
179 See for a fuller treatment of the term O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 206-209. 180 See, e.g., decani for the Faculties of Theology and Canon Law in fourteenth-century Bologna ( O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 207); and examples from Scottish sources in D M L (9). 181 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 277-279. See also J . M . F L E T C H E R , The Vocabulary of Administration and Teaching at Merton College, Oxford,
CIWCIMAVI (1993), p. 50.
74
DECANUS
Decanus is a post-classical word meaning 'a person in charge of a group of ten others' — in a military context, for example, the leader of ten soldiers; in a monastic one, the superior often monks."12 In the Middle Ages, the word becomes more frequent and is used in more specific applications. Its literal meaning — 'head of a group often' — is generalized to primus inter pares, the leader of a group irrespective of its size, designated on the basis of seniority or by means of election. In a monastic context, the decanus is then (in principle) the eldest, responsible for discipline and spiritual education (prior or vice-abbot);183 from the eleventh century onwards one finds decani as deans of chapters.184 But also outside the ecclesiastical hierarchy the word is used: a decanus can be a manorial officer, the master of a group of craftsmen or the dean of a guild.185 Nevertheless, the general meaning of decanus — the senior or chosen leader of a certain group of people - remains the same in any of these specific applications, and it is in complete accordance with its use in the context of university or college life.
182 Cf. T L L ; B L A I S E Lex. (4), Diet. (2); N I E R M . (5); D M L (2). 183 Cf. B L A I S E Lex. (5); N I E R M . (6); D M L (3). 184 NIERM. (7); DML (6). 185
Cf. N I E R M .
(3),
(9)
and
(10);
DML
(8)
and (10).
75
discipulus Discipulus is, throughout Antiquity and the Middle Ages, a common term for a pupil or apprentice.186 It often occurs in combination with —> magister, a master and his pupils. In the later Middle Ages, that is, from the thirteenth century onwards, the word seems to have been eclipsed by terms that fit the context of the university better, notably -^studens and -^socius.wi Its use becomes less frequent, and the word comes to have a somewhat old-fashioned or literary ring. Both in Antiquity and in the Middle Ages, the term can be applied to students in the (liberal) arts and to apprentices or trainees in trades.188 In the Latin of the early-Christian authors, discipulus is used to refer to followers of Christ, especially with reference to the apostles, and this usage was also continued in medieval Latin.189
186 For the usage of the term in the context of medieval intellectual life, see several articles in the C7V7C7A£4-series: C . V U I . L I E Z , Le vocabulaire des e'coles urbaines des XII' et XIII' siecles, CIVICIMA V (1991), pp. 94-101; C . FROVA, Le scuole municipali all'epoca delle university, CIVICIMA V (1992), p. 185; A . G A R C I A Y GARCIA, Vocabulario de las escuelas
en la Peninsula Iberica, CIVICIMA V (1992), p. 165; and M.C.M. PACHECO &. M.I.M. PACHECO, Le vocabulaire de I'enseignement dans Us Sermones d'Antoine de Lisbonne/Padoue, CIVICIMA IX (1999), p. 147. 187 J. Verger noted that the old opposition of -^>magister versus discipulus, —^sc(h)olaris, puer or iuvenis seems to have gone 'out of fashion' in the period of the universities, and that it is gradually replaced by (doctor or professor) regens (cf. —¥regere in Cat. I l l ) versus -^•studens (studentes); J . V E R G E R , 'Nova' et 'veteradans le vocabulaire des premiers statuts et privileges, CIVICIMA V (1992), p. 196. 188 Cf. T L L (1-2); O L D ; D M L (1). Note also the meaning of'monk, disciple of the abbot', listed in B L A I S E , Diet. (2). 189 Cf. T L L (3); B L A I S E , Diet. (1); D M L (2).
76
doctor In the context of medieval intellectual life, doctor is used, alongside, for example, —>magister and —>professor, to identify someone who teaches.190 Its first meaning is 'teacher' or 'master', and it stands on a par with terms such as -^magister, -^professor, -^paedagogus, etc. The term can, however, also refer to someone with a specific knowledge of some intellectual discipline, without necessarily implying teaching activity.191 The broad meaning of the term ('teacher' or 'someone learned') is found throughout the Middle Ages, but specific technical meanings also developed within the vocabulary of the university. The term was first used in a specific sense at the Faculty of Law in Bologna. Here, the expression legis (legum) doctor was used to refer to someone who was learned or educated in the field of law, but who did not necessarily teach.192 In the course of the twelfth century, however, the meaning of doctor shifted, and was used to refer to those who taught (Civil) Law.193 In the course of the thirteenth century a second shift of meaning occurred: doctor became an academic title, referring to someone who had graduated from the Faculty of Law {doctor iuris civilis for
190 The use and meaning of the term in the context of the medieval unversities is treated extensively in O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des univenites (1987), pp. 142-151. She also discusses the first attestations in this context: pp. 148-149. 191 Cf. T L L V : I . See A. Hus, Docereetles mots de lafamille de docere (1965), pp. 271-276, for an evaluation of the term in classical Latin. In the Middle Ages, one finds expressions such as doctor (actu) legens or (actu) regens to distinguish those who actually teach from those who are learned. See also die articles on —tlegere (Cat. I l l ) and -^regere (Cat. I I I ) . 192 The term was then used in the same sense as causidicus (advocate, pleader) or even iudex (judge). See for the semantic development of the term in Bologna O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universith (1987), pp. 143-145; see also for a more ample treatment of the subject R . FEENSTRA, 'Legum doctor', 'legumprofessor ' et 'magister', CIVICIMA I (1988), pp. 72-77. 193 Those who taught Canon Law were sometimes referred to as doctores decretorum. See also the article on —>ius, canonista and decretista (Cat. I V ) . In Bologna, the term doctor in the meaning of 'teacher' was only used within the Faculty of Law. Teachers of other disciplines were referred to as —tmagistri.
DOCTOR
77
Civil Law, doctor iuris canonici for Canon Law, and also, for those who took a degree in both fields, doctor utriusque iuris or in utroque jure).'9* Outside Bologna, we find the term in a more general sense. In the sources of Mendicant and urban schools, for example, the term often carries the same meaning as -^magister, that is, 'someone who teaches'.195 The sources of the University of Paris seem to suggest that there the term was introduced by the theologians, who used it in line with its thirteenthcentury Bologna meaning: a doctor theologiae or doctor in sacra pagina is someone with a degree in Theology.196 In the course of the thirteenth century the term was also used in this sense by other faculties, and we find doctores in, for example, Law or Medicine.197 The term doctor, a derivative of the verb docere, only appeared in late Antiquity, when it was a relatively uncommon word. Its first meaning
194 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 145. The other faculties followed suit, and doctor was then also used to refer to graduates in Medicine, Grammar, etc. See,
e.g., the list of terms collected by A. MAIERU in University Training in Medieval Europe (1994), index p. 172. He lists examples from the field of Medicine and Arts on pp. 81-2: doctor medicine, artium doctor, doctor in artibus, grammatice et rhetorke doctor, and in Logic (p. 123): doctor logicae. 195 See, e.g., A . G A R C I A Y G A R C I A , La terminologia en las Facultades Juridicas Ibericas, CFVTCIMA I (1988), pp. 68-9 and I D . , Vocabulario de las escuelas en la Peninsula Ibe'rica,
CIVICIMA V (1992), p. 165, for schools and faculties of Law on the Iberian peninsula; P. R I C H E , Le vocabulaire des e'coles carolingiennes, CIVICIMA V (1992), p. 39 for examples from the Carolingian period; C . V U L L I E Z , Le vocabulaire des e'coles urbaines des XII' etXIII' siecles, CIVICIMA V (1992), pp. 94,100, and C . FROVA, Le scuole municipali all'epoca delle universita, CIVICIMA V (1992), pp. 179-189 for examples from urban schools. In her sources C . FROVA also found a notable second meaning of doctor, which concurs with the general sense of doctor!'doctus (someone who is learned, who has certain knowledge): the students of the urban schools are sometimes classified into rudes (beginners, freshmen) andperiti, provecti or doctores (advanced students). {Ibid., p. 189) 196 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 145-146. 197 As a general rule it can be said that graduates from the lower Faculty of Arts were usually referred to as —>magistri, while those with a degree from the higher Faculties (Theology, Law, Medicine) were called doctores. The title of doctor is, in this specific context, more prestigious than that of-^magister. Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 147,151.
78
DOCTOR
was 'teacher' or (in a military context) 'trainer',198 but the meaning of 'someone with specific knowledge' in some intellectual discipline199 already occurs in the late-antique period. In Christian Latin the term is used in its broad sense of 'teacher', and is often applied to, for example, the apostles or the Church Fathers.200 In late Antiquity and throughout the Middle Ages, doctor has overtones of highly valued learning and erudition, which the term -^magister does not necessarily have.201 At the end of the thirteenth century, the verb doctorare and its participle doctoratus were derived from doctor. Both these terms are found in a university context only, and have a meaning which is related to the specific, technical use of doctor as 'someone who has obtained an academic degree': doctorare means 'to confer a doctorate on someone', or 'to teach a class'; its passive form doctorari was used in the sense of'to become a doctor' or 'to obtain the degree of doctor',202 doctoratus denoted the position of doctor or the doctor's degree.203
198 T L L (esp. 3-4-5). 199 Especially rhetoric and philosophy. Cf. O . W E T J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 149; A. H u s , Docere et les mots de lafamille de docere (1965), p. 273. 200Cf. T L L (6); BLAISE, Diet. (3-4); N I E R M . 201 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 150. 202 Cf. D M L ; N I E R M . ; O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 147. 203 Cf. D M L . In Bologna, the terms doctoratus and conventus were sometimes used as synonyms for the examination one had to pass in order to graduate. See on doctoratus also J . VERGER, 'Nova et 'vetera dans le vocabulaire des premiers statuts et privileges, CTVICIMA V (1992)» PP- 203-204.
79
dominus (legum) Dominus in general, as an honorary title or form of address for someone superior, occurs in the vocabulary of medieval intellectual life,204 but it is only in the context of legal education that it acquires a specific, technical meaning.205 In twelfth-century Bologna, before the existence of the Faculty of Law, students were addressed as -^socii (mei) by their teacher, and he was addressed by them as dominus [rneus). From this usage dominus (legum) developed into the official honorary title for a teacher of Civil Law.206 Within the vocabulary of the University of Bologna, the usage of dominus in this sense was quickly adopted, and the title dominus legum became an official term for a 'professor of Civil Law'.207 It is important to note, however, that, despite its close relation to terms such as -^magister and especially -^doctor, dominus never developed into a term for an academic degree. Outside Italy, the term is rarely used in a specifically educational context. It occurs in its Bolognese meaning ('professor of Civil Law') in the sources of several faculties of Law, for example at the Faculty of Law in Orleans at the end of the thirteenth century,208 and also in sources from the British Isles.209
204 See, e.g., D M L (5b): 'person of (scholarly) authority'. Note, further, that in the later Middle Ages, especially in the context of disputed questions, -^baccalarii were often designated as domini. 205 See O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 156-157. 206 See for examples from the context of Italian urban schools C . FROVA, Le scuole munkipali all'epoca delle university CF/ICIMA V (1992), p. 183 n. 13. 207 Other terms for the same profession are -^doctor kgum (doctor iuris), and (though rarely in Bologna) —^professor legum. See for a comparison between the different terms for jurists R . FEENSTRA, 'Legum doctor', 'legumprofessor'et magister', CTVJCIMA I (1988), pp. 72-77. The terms -^magister, -^doctor, -^professor and dominus arc also compared in O. W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 157-160. 208 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 157. I n Orleans, to distinguish professors of Civil Law from those who taught Canon Law, professors in the first category were called domini, and in the second —tmagistri. 209 Cf. D M L (5b)
80
facultas In the intellectual context of the Middle Ages the term facultas occurs in two different, though closely related meanings.210 Close to its general meaning of 'ability, power, skill' lies its use for a certain discipline as taught at the medieval schools and universities.211 This meaning first occurs in sources from the twelfth century, and was adopted in the vocabulary of the universities in the thirteenth century. Within this new context, however, the term developed a new meaning in the course of the thirteenth century:212 it came to refer to the body of teachers responsible for the education in a certain discipline.213 This latter meaning has survived to the present day, where a 'faculty' is still a part of the university devoted to a certain discipline. At the University of Paris, for example, there were four faculties: Arts, Theology, (Canon) Law and Medicine.214 The number of faculties at a university was not uniform — at smaller universities there were usually
210 For a full treatment of the term see O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 52-55. 211 It is noteworthy that this meaning of facultas is not attested before the twelfth century and seems to be rooted in one passage of Boethius' Commentary on Porphyry: 'tertium genus quod inter philosophos tractatur cuiusque ad dialecticam facultatem multus usus est' (In Ysag. Porph. Comm., ed. B R A N D T , C S E L 48, p. 178). I n the twelfth century, however, it is attested in all kinds of intellectual texts by authors such as Alan of Lille, Gilbert of Poitiers, Peter of Blois, Adelhard of Bath, etc. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 54. 212 It is difficult to put a specific date on this shift in meaning, but on die basis of its first attestations in the university sources O. Weijers argues that it must have taken place in the second quarter of the thirteenth century. 213 In fact, the meaning of facultas remains often (especially in the early university sources) ambiguous, oscillating between the sense of 'art' or 'discipline', and 'organisational unit', 'faculty'. 214 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 52. For set expressions for the different disciplines or faculties, see the indices of C7V7C/M/4-volumes V and VI and the index of A . M A I E R U , University Training in Medieval Europe (1994), pp. 173-174: facultas artium (liberalium), astrologiae, chirurgiae, geometriae, grammaticae, iuris canonicilcivilis, logicae, medicinae (or medicorum), physicae, rhetoricae and theologiae.
FACULTAS
81
only two or three. The internal organisation of a faculty was also not uniform, although it was generally headed by the ->magistri actu regentes, or by the primus inter pares of these masters, the -^decanus. The faculty was responsible for the organisation of teaching activities, the supervision of examinations, the conferring of academic degrees, and the recrutement of teachers.215 The whole spectrum of classical meanings of facultas, all generated from its broad meaning of 'ability, power, capacity',216 remained in use in the Middle Ages. In the twelfth century, facultas was used in its new specific technical meaning and started to overlap with terms such as ars, scientia or disciplina (cf. —>ars, Cat. IV). 2 1 7 In the second quarter of the thirteenth century it developed a new meaning in the context of the universities: '(organisational) unit responsible for the education in a certain discipline' — our modern meaning of'faculty' (faculte, Fakultat, faculta, etc.).218
215 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 52. 216 The classical senses vary from 'quantity available', 'resources' to specific legal uses in senses such as 'dispensation' or 'licence'; cf. T L L , col. 145-157; O L D . 217 Cf. N I E R M . (2); D M L (6). O n the use of the term in this sense see the examples taken from the sources of the Faculty of Medicine at the University of Bologna: A . M A I E R U , La terminologie de I'universite de Bologne de medecine et des arts, CIVICIMA V (1992), pp. 141-149. 218 Note, however, that the meaning 'discipline', 'art' or 'science' also remained in use. See for the use of the term in its modern sense in relation to medieval universities the articles of M . - H . J U L L I E N D E P O M M E R O L , Le vocabulaire des colleges dans le midi de la France, CIVICIMA V I (1993), p. 38; F. S M A H E L , Scholae, Collegia et Bursae Universitatis Pragensis, CIWCIMA V I (1993), p. 124; and G.-R. T E W E S , Terms used in academic life, CIVICIMA VI (1993), pp. 60, 69.
82
hospitium, domus, aula Domus and hospitium are the oldest terms used for houses where students lived collectively.219 Because individual housing was expensive and scarce, from the beginning of the existence of universities, there were initiatives of communal living for students. A group of students rented a house, usually for a period of one academic year, and lived and studied there under the guidance of a master of Arts or at least a -^baccalarius.120 Such student houses were generally called hospitia221 or, less frequently, domus.222 In Oxford, however, the term aula was more common,223 while in Cambridge domus was most frequent. The terms often occur in ex-
219 For ample treatments of these terms see O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des university's (1987), pp. 76-80, 85-87. 220 In English sources these heads of student houses are called principales. They were not actually employed by the university, but did have strong ties to it — they owed responsibility to the university, and were in turn financially supported by the university. Another common system of student housing was a master sharing his house with his students. Cf. W . COURTENAY, The Arts Faculty at Paris in 1329 (1997), pp. 55-69. 221 For the attestation of the term in the context of urban schools see C . V U I X I E Z , Le vocabulaire des koles urbaines des XII' etXIII' siecles, CIVICIMA V (1992), pp. 98-99. 222 Note that domus was also used alongside and synonymously with -^collegium (or -^•bursa in Germanic and Slavic countries), -^studium or -^schola. In the sources of the College de Sorbonne, for example, domus is the term used in its earliest history, while —y collegium wins ground in the second half of the thirteenth century ( O . W E I J E R S , Le vocabulaire du College de Sorbonne, CIVICIMA V I (1993), p. 11). See also F. S M A H E L , Scholae, Collegia et Bursae Universitatis Pmgensis, CIVICIMA VI (1993), pp. 124, 126; and M . - H . J U L L I E N D E P O M M E R O L , Le vocabulaire des colleges dans le midi de la France, CIVICIMA VI (i993)' PP- 27-29O n the expression domuspauperum scolarium see O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des university (1987), pp. 82, 268; and J . VERGER, Conclusion, CIVICIMA V I (1993), p. 177. In Visigothic Spain domus occurs in the expression domus eccUsiae for episcopal schools, where -^clerici received their education under supervision of the bishop: A . G A R C I A Y G A R C I A , Vocabulario de las escuelas en la Peninsula Iberica, CIVICIMA V (1992), pp. 158, 162,165. 223 In Oxford the word introitus also occurs for student houses, presumably because of their narrow entrances. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universith (1987), p. 77 n. 8.
HOSPITIUM, DOMUS, AULA
pressions such as hospitia clericorum or domus scolarium. In the course of the thirteenth century the system of hospitia was generally replaced by the system of -^collegia, student houses founded by benefactors, which had a more permanent and stable character, and therefore added much to the continuity and stability of the university itself.224 It is difficult to assess when the terms first occur in the specific technical sense of'student house', since it is often hard to distinguish between organised student houses and hostels or inns in general, where individual students could also seek board and lodging. When the sources mention hospitia or domus in combination with the concepts -^taxare, -^taxatio or -^taxatores, that is, the practice of the estimation of a standard price for board and lodging for students by a board of official estimators, this can be seen as a clear indication that the term is being used in specific sense of 'a student house where students lived and studied under the supervision of a master or bachelor'. The first examples of hospitia that are clearly related to universities date from the second decade of the thirteenth century.225 In the course of the thirteentli century the term becomes common in all European countries. Aula in its specific technical meaning is attested in Oxford from ca. 1250 onwards.226 In classical and medieval Latin the word hospitium is used both in an abstract sense of 'hospitality', 'the act of accommodating somebody'227 and in the concrete sense of 'accommodation', 'hostel', 'home'.228 This
224 See for an evaluation of the meaning of —^collegium in relation to that of domus or hospitium, O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 80-84. 225 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 77-78; the first evidence for the existence of a student house in Oxford dates from 1214, in Paris from 1215. 226 Aula further occurs in university-sources in the sense of 'large room', 'hall'; in the sources of the College de Sorbonne, for example, the hall in which the disputationes Sorbonicae were held was called aula, cf. O . W E I J E R S , Le vocabulaire du College
de Sorbonne, CTVFCIMA V I (1993), p. 23. See also, M.-H. JULLIEN DE POMMEROL, Le vocabulaire des colleges dans le midi de la France, CIVJCIMA V I (1993), p. 29; F. SMAIIEL, Scholae, Collegia et Bursae Universitatis Pragensis, CIVICIMA VI (1993), p. 129. 227 Cf. TI.L (I); O L D (1-2); D M L (1). 228 Cf. T L L (II); O L D (3); D M L (2-8).
HOSPITIUM, DOMUS, AULA
'accommodation' could refer to private initiatives, such as homes of individuals open for guests, hostels, or - i n the context of the university- student houses.229 It could also be part of an institution (such as monasteries or chapters): hostels for the accommodation of the sick230, poor-houses {hospitia pauperum), or houses for pilgrims {hospitiaperegrinorum). Aula was used, both in Antiquity and in the Middle Ages, for a large monumental house, a royal or noble residence,231 or for a large and monumental room within such a residence.232 In the Middle Ages aula is thus applied both to palaces of kings or bishops, to church buildings, halls of justice, guildhalls or - i n Oxford- student halls,233 but also to, for example, refectories of monasteries, or -again in the context of the university- the room large enough to accommodate all members of a college on occasions such as public disputations, lectures, ceremonies, etc.
229 D M L (7). 230 Cf. B L A I S E , Lex., (2); N I E R M .
(2); D M L (5).
231 Cf. T L L (2. aula); O L D (3); MW (II), D M L (2-6). 232 Cf. T L L (2. aula); O L D (1-2); MW (I); D M L (1).
233 DML (6).
85
lector In the context of education the medieval latin term lector can refer to different kinds of teachers.234 In the Mendicant orders, lector was used for the head of the —>studium of a convent. 235 Usually, lectores of Mendicant schools had studied or were studying Theology at the university.236 Their educational task is often specified in set expressions such as lector sententiarium (or sententiarius, someone who teaches Peter of Lombard's Sententiae), lector biblicus (or biblicus, someone who teaches the Bible), etc.237 Often they were assisted by sublectores,m who, generally speaking,
234 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 160-166. 235 G . B A R O N E suggests in Les couvents des Mendiants, des colleges deguise's?, CIVICIMA VI (1993), pp. 150-151, that the term lector was perhaps used to accentuate the biblical character of education in the Dominican schools, or perhaps to avoid — for reasons of humility - the prestige of the title -^magister. 236 In the Dominican schools, the standard education of a friar was divided into three levels: basic skills were acquired in the studia gmmmaticalia, which were followed by the studia artium (also called studia logicalial logicae novae); for education at an advanced level one attended the studia naturaliuml naturaruml natumlia (also called studia philosophiae). On top of this curriculum, one had to put in a few extra years of study at the studia sollemnia or studia generdlia provinciae if one wanted to become a lector. A lector of studia artium was supposed to have studied at the studia naturalia for at least two years, and a lector of studia naturalium was supposed to have completed a study of Theology at the university, or at least be a student of Theology. Cf. -^studium; A . M A I E R U , University Training in Medieval Europe (1994), pp. 8-9. See also M . M . M U L C H A H E Y , 'First the Bow is Bent in Study. Dominican Education before 1350, (1998), pp. 219-384. 237 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 161; 166 n. 207; 176 n. 62. For other set combinations see A . M A I E R U , University Training in Medieval Europe (1994), p. 176 (index): lectorordinarius, lector extraordinarius, lectorSententiarum, etc. See also M . M . M U L C H A H E Y , Dominican Educational Vocabulary, CIVICIMA I X (1999), p. 98. And see E . PANEIXA, // 'lector romanae curiae', CIVICIMA V (1992), pp. 130-139: he discusses the lectores romanae curiae and lectores sacri palatii — terms which appear in thirteenth- and fourteenth-century Dominican chronicles. The kctores romanae curiae are professors of theology who teach at the Dominican convent of the city in which the Roman court resides; die lector sacri palatii teaches at the studium of the papal court in Avignon. 238 A sublector (usually an advanced student or bachelor) was responsible, for example, for 'extraordinary' reading of the Bible or the Sententiae. To distinguish between a lector and sublector, the lector was sometimes referred to as lector principalis. Cf. A . M A I E R U , University Training in Medieval Europe (1994), pp. 20-21.
86
LECTOR
were responsible for extraordinary or cursory lectures,2" and -^magistri scolarium/studentium, responsible for the student discipline.240 In the context of the university the term was used in several meanings.241 It could signify a student (of Theology), who happened to be a lector at a Mendicant school. Sometimes, however, lectores from Dominican schools were also professors at the Faculty of Theology - in which case the term referred to teachers at the highest level. Thirdly, the term lector was used for the category of students who participated in the teaching of courses, i.e. teachers at a relatively low level.242 Finally, the term lector was used to express the fact that somebody with an academic title such as -^doctor or -^professor actually taught; in other words, in this case it was an alternative for (magisterldoctor!etc.) legens or regens?n
In classical Latin, the term has the basic meaning of'he who reads', either in private to himself, or out loud for an audience.244 In Christian Latin, the term is used for the monk charged with reading during meals, or the reader of lessons during liturgy.245 All these specific usages derive from the prime meaning of legere, to read, and all of them continued to exist in the Middle Ages.246
239 See the articles —>ordinarius, extraordinarius and —>cursus, cursorius in Cat. I I I . 240 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 161 and p. 139 n. 39. 241 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 161-163. 242 The term thus overlaps both with -^professor or -^doctor, and with -^baccalarius. From its application to students participating in teaching stems its use for teachers of extraordinary courses: at the Faculties of Medicine and Arts of Bologna, for example, one finds the terms lector, repetitor and -^scholaris for teachers of extraordinary courses. They earned half the wages of a -^doctor, who was qualified to teach both ordinary and extraordinary lectures. Cf. A . M A T E R U , University Training in Medieval Europe (1994), p. 51. See also O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 164 n. 199. 243 Cf. -^flegere and —>regere in Cat. IV. Examples are lector in logica, lector in iure civili; Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 163. 244 T L L , esp. col. 1090 sqq. 245 Whence lector became a rank in the ecclesiastical hierarchy: he who took the second of minor orders. Cf. B L A I S E ; N I E R M . ( I ) ; D M L (3a).
246 See, e.g., J . H A M E S S E , Le vocabulaire de la transmission orale des textes, CTVICIMA I I (1989), pp. 185-186 and E A D . , Approche terminologique de certaines methodes d'enseignement
etde recherche, CTVICIMA VIII (1995), pp. 11, on the use of the term lector by Gilbert of
LECTOR
87
In the early Middle Ages, however, legere developed a second meaning, that is, to 'read and explain', that is, to teach or lecture.247 From this, lector began to mean 'teacher', first in the context of medieval schools and later also in the universities, which quickly adopted the term into their vocabulary.
Poitiers: he distinguishes the lector-recitator (he who reads a text to an audience) and the lector-interpret (he who explains a text). The meaning of'a person charged with divine reading during meals' is also found in a university context: this use of the word lector appears, for example, in the sources of the College of the Sorbonne. Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Le vocabulaire du College de Sorbonne, CIVICIMAVl (1993), p. 18. 247 Cf. ->legen (Cut. I I I ) .
88
licentia, licentiare, licentiatus The term licentia, which in a general sense means 'permission or freedom to act on behalf of someone else', received a specific technical meaning in the vocabulary of twelfth-century intellectual life in the expression licentia docendi, 'the right or licence to teach'.248 In the twelfth century these licences were granted by -^scolastici (the heads of monastic or cathedral schools) or by the -^>cancellarii (chancellors) of bishops, and were valid within the geographical boundaries of the authority in question.249 In the history of the universities, the licentiae docendi obtained in the prestigious universities such as Paris and Bologna, universities of international stature, gained universal recognition. This was reflected in the expression licentia ubique docendi, the right of graduates of a particular university to teach in any school without further examination.250 By the end of the thirteenth century, however, the concept of a degree with universal recognition already existed. Moreover, obtaining the right to grant licentiae ubique docendi became an important goal for universities in general. The term thus became a key term in the history of the university, since precisely this right formed one of the most crucial distinctions between universities and other schools. As it became more widespread, the right to grant licentiae ubique docendi became a privilege that could only be conferred by the ultimate authority: in most cases the pope. It was first officially granted to the University of Toulouse in 1233. The licentiae granted by the universities of Paris and Bologna had universal recognition based on their historicity and prestige, but only in the 1290s was the right confirmed officially by the pope.251 The University of Oxford requested the right to grant
248 See for a full treatment of the term O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 386-390; see furthermore O . W E I J E R S , Les regies d'examen dam les universites medievales (1995), pp. 201-223. 249 See also J . V E R G E R , 'Nova et 'vetera dans le vocabulaire des premiers statuts et privileges, CWICIMA V (1992), pp. 202-203. 250 See O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 46-51. 251 It was conferred on Bologna in 1291, and on Paris in 1292. Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 48-49.
LICENTIA, LICENTIARE, LICENTIATUS
89
licentiae ubique docendi up to three times, but it was denied on each occasion.252 The University of Montpellier was granted the privilege in 1289, the University of Orleans in 1306, the University of Cambridge in 1318 and the University of Padua as late as in 1346. On the Iberian peninsula, the Universities of Salamanca and Lisbon received royal privileges to grant universal licences in 1255 and 1290 respectively, but these were limited in certain ways: the ubique of the licentia ubique docendi obtained at the University of Salamanca excluded Paris and Bologna, and in Lissabon it excluded the Faculty of Theology.253 Apart from these explicit restrictions there is also evidence that the universal value of licentiae ubique docendi was not always in fact respected.254 The licentia ubique docendi was the only university degree granted by authorities other than the universities themselves; it was conferred by die -^cancellarius or archidiaconus (representatives of the Church). The bachelor's or master's degrees, which marked the phases of a candidate's admission to the community of the university, were granted by the masters or professors themselves. There were also other kinds of licentiae that were granted by the universities themselves and marked certain steps in the education of the student. Essentially, his education was structured in two phases: a bachelor's and a master's degree. To conclude the first phase, the student needed an official admission to the examination of the determinatio, the so-called licentia determinandi.255 The second phase was concluded with an examination in which the bachelor obtained his licentia (ubique) docendi, and his master's title. After this examination the new master was called li-
252 See on this, C . H . L A W R E N C E , The University in State and Church (1984), pp. 113-116. 253 See also A . G A R C I A Y G A R C I A , La terminologia en las Facultades Juridkas Ibericas, CTVICIMA I (1988), p. 67; I D . , Vocabulario de las escuelas en la Peninsula Iberica, CTVTCIMA V (1991), pp. 171, 176. The Universities of Paris and Bologna were excluded from the licentia ubique docendi obtained in Salamanca from 1255 to 1333. 254 Paris and Oxford came in conflict shortly after the universal recognition of Paris in 1292: cf. C . H . L A W R E N C E , The University in State and Church (1984), p. 114: 'After 1292 there was an outbreak of mutual recrimination between Paris and Oxford; both universities complained that their own graduates were being refused recognition and were not being allowed to resume lecturing in the other establishment.' 255 Cf. -^fdeterminare (Cat. I I I ) .
90
LICENTIA, LICENTIARE, LICENTIATUS
centiatus. Finally, he was officially granted admission to the ceremony of the inceptio by the licentia incipiendi, and with this ceremony he was accepted into the corporation of masters of the university.250 At the Faculty of Medicine a fourth kind of licence existed: the licentia practicandi, which allowed a student to practice medicine.257 Another term for a university degree was the even more general gradus, which occurs in the university sources in expressions such as gradus magistri, gradus magisterii (theologie), or gradus bachela-
rii.15i It occurs in these sources from the second half of the thirteenth century onwards, and its use does not differ from that in other contexts, such as gradus ecclesiasticus, a rank in the hierarchy of the church, or, in a secular context, gradus dignitatum. It marks a step on the social or professional ladder.259 The semantic development of the term licentia is not very revealing. Its general sense, permission, freedom, or privilege, remained unchanged from Antiquity to the Middle Ages.260 The expression licentia docendi was firmly embedded in the vocabulary of the twelfth-century schools.261 The universities adopted it into their vocabulary, and added the word ubique in the course of the fourteenth century. In medieval Latin all kinds of derivations of licentia were formed,262 such as the verb licentiare, 'to permit, allow or authorize', or, in an academic context, 'to grant a li-
256 Cf. -^incipere (Cat. I I I ) . 257 See on the licentia incipiendi the D M L (3b); on the licentia exercendi (a licence for notaries), cf. R . FERRARA, 'Licentia exercendi' ed essame di notariato a Bologna (1977), pp. 49-120. For other expressions with the term licentia (licentia disputandi, (extra)ordinaria, specialis, etc.) see the 'Index' of A . M A I E R U , University Training in Medieval Europe (1994), p. 177. 258 See on this O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 385-386, 389-390. 259 This metaphorical sense of an imaginary ladder in the social hierarchy already existed in Antiquity, and was merely continued in the late-antique and medieval periods. Cf. O L D (6, 7, 8); B L A I S E , Lex., (1,3); N I E R M . (4, 5, 8,10); D M L (5, 8, 9, and acad. 15). 260 Cf. T L L (1); O L D (1), and N I E R M . ( I ) ; NG ( I ) ; D M L (1, 2). 261 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 51, 93; N I E R M . (2).
262 See, for example, D M L : licentiabilis, licentiatio, licentiatorius, licentiatura, licentiose,
UCENTIA, LICENTIARE, LICENTIATUS
91
cence'.263 Its participle, licentiatus, was used as a substantive in the meaning of'licensed student or scholar'.264
263
Cf. N I E R M .
(3); D M L .
264 Note that a similar word already existed in Antiquity, but then of the second declension {licentiatus, -us) in the meaning of permission": cf. T L L , O L D . For the medieval sense in the context of the university, see BLAISE, Lex. (I); N I E R M .
92
litteratus, illitteratus As Herbert Grundmann argued in his article Litteratus — illitteratus,265 the shifts in the meanings of these terms are valuable witnesses of developments in the history of education: they reflect the extent of education, the social classes distinguished by education, and the fluctuations in the appreciation of education. First, litteratus, in its basic meaning, is used for someone who knows his letters, who knows, in other words, how to read and write. From the fourth century onwards (at the latest), tiie language of the written word — the Latin of the Roman empire — bore so little resemblance to spoken languages (even in the Romance languages), that litteratus (orgrammaticus) also became synonymous with 'a person who knows Latin'.266 Few people, however, learned to read and write: from the fifth to the eighth century these skills were reserved for an intellectual elite of clergy. Lay people, even kings and nobility, usually did not acquire diese skills. Moreover, schooling and writing were often thought unsuitable precisely for high social classes. Thus illitteratus did not have a negative or denigratory tone in this period; it was used for people of the highest levels of society.267 In the Carolingian period, litteratus came more and more to be synonymous with —tclericus, cleric, since Latin was taught in schools at-
265 H . GRUNDMANN, Litteratus - illitteratus (repr. 1978), pp. 1-66. See for a recent bibliographical overview on the subject of literacy in the Middle Ages, M . MOSTERT (ed.), Communicatie in de Middekeuwen. Studies over de verschriftelijking van de middeleeuwse cultuur (1995), esp. pp. 93-105,113-122. 266 Expressions such as litterate, 'in Latin' (cf. N G ) , literaliter loqui, 'to speak Latin' ( H . G R U N D M A N N , Litteratus — illitteratus (repr. 1978), p. 4), or the use of littera as a synonym for grammatica (that is, of the Latin language, ibid, p. 5) testify to this meaning. See also -^•gramrnatica, gmmmaticus in Cat. IV. 267 Cf. H . G R U N D M A N N , Litteratus — illitteratus (repr. 1978), pp. 22-39. The s e t of terms illitteratus and idiota are reflections of the Greek set ayp&m-iaTOl iSiOTca {ibid., pp. 6-
LITTERATUS, ILLITTERATUS
93
tached to monasteries or churches.268 Illitteratus (or idiota), on the other hand, someone who did not know how to read and write, and did not know Latin, became synonymous with laicus, lay person. This is the general picture for the entire Carolingian period. Some kings and noblemen were in fact able to read and write in Latin, but these were exceptions to be marvelled at. The group outside the clergy who were most often educated in Latin and letters were noble ladies.269 In the course of the twelfth century, when an increasing number of lay people, especially (at first) kings and nobility, learned how to read and write, the meaning of litteratus gradually shifted. The term no longer implied just the ability to read and write, but also a certain quality of education. A litteratus could read and write in Latin, but was also familiar with the ancient and Christian classics - he was well-read, educated. Consequently, the term could be used in different degrees: litteratior and litteratissimus.270
In the religious movements of the twelfth and thirteenth century, with their strong espousal of austerity, the meaning of litteratus did not alter, but its appreciation did.271 Bernhard of Clairvaux, for example, expresses a certain disdain for the prevalent tradition of study, and accords high value to terms such as simplex, idiota and illitteratus. Moreover, in the thirteenth century, literacy in the vernacular languages developed and disturbed the conceptual pair litteratus - illitteratus.272 Thus the old classifications and class-distinctions were no longer valid in the last centuries of the Middle Ages: litteratus was no longer reserved for cler-
268 Grundmann points to expressions such as litteras discere, 'to become a cleric or a monk'; or to give a child litteris, 'to donate him as an oblate to a monastery': H. G R U N D M A N N , Litteratus — illitteratus (repr. 1978), p. 9. See also D u C ; B L A I S E , Lex. (2). 269 Cf. H . G R U N D M A N N , Litteratus - illitteratus (repr. 1978), pp. 39-45. See also his article Die Frauen und die Literatur im Mittelalter (repr. 1978). See also, among others, R. M C K I T T E R I C K , Frauen und Schriftlichkeit im fruhen Mittelalter (1991); L.J. S M I T H and J . H . M . TAYLOR (eds.), Women, the Book and the Worldly and Women, the Book and the
Godly (1995). 270 H . G R U N D M A N N , Litteratus - illitteratus (repr. 1978), pp. 45-55. 271 Cf. H . G R U N D M A N N , Litteratus — illitteratus (repr. 1978), pp. 56-66. 272 See on literacy and the laity, for example, J . W . T H O M P S O N , The Literacy of the Laity in the Middle Ages (1939); M . B . PARKES, The literacy of the laity (1973).
94
LITTERATUS, ILLITTERATUS
ics, and, though Latin remained the language of official writing until the very end of the Middle Ages,273 litteratus could also be applied to someone involved in writing or education in the vernacular. By that time the meaning and connotations are dependent on the context. In Antiquity, litteratus had several meanings.274 Its basic meaning was 'knowing how to read and write, knowing the letters of the alphabet', but metonymically it also meant 'cultured, erudite, well-read'.275 Consequently the term could be used in different degrees, and its pendant, illitteratus, was often used in a denigratory way: an uneducated or uncivilized person, but also a badly educated person.276 This meaning disappeared in late Antiquity and the early Middle Ages, when the language of the written word no longer corresponded to the language of the spoken word: literacy' and 'Latinity' became synonyms, and since literacy/Latinity were reserved for the clergy, 'literate' and 'cleric' also became synonyms. It resurfaced, as described above, in the course of the twelfth and thirteenth centuries, when lay participation in education and the development of literacy in the vernacular complicated the old sets of connotations.
273 Cf. H . G R U N D M A N N , Litteratus - illitteratus (repr. 1978), pp. 61-63. He argues that Latin remained the language of the written word until the very end of the Middle Ages, even in the urban schools (tellingly also called Latin schools), where the children of the middle classes were educated. Only in the sixteenth century were children introduced to the skill of writing in the vernacular, and learned Latin at a later stage. 274 Cf. H . G R U N D M A N N , Litteratus - illitteratus (repr. 1978), pp. 15-22. Throughout Antiquity and the Middle Ages litteratus was also used, e.g., in the meaning of'marked or inscribed with letters': cf. T L L (1); O L D (1); N G (2); BLAISE, Lex. (1). 275 T L L (2a); O L D (2). The word was used as an adjective, but also as a substantive: 'someone who knows how to read and write'. 276 H . G R U N D M A N N , Litteratus - illitteratus (repr. 1978), pp. 17-18.
95
magister In the context of medieval intellectual life the term magister has a very broad meaning, in which two aspects are present: leadership and teaching.277 Magister can refer to someone who functions as a superior in a group of juniors or apprentices, to someone who teaches, or to a(n honorary) title bestowed on someone who has received a (university) education. The wide variety of applications of the term in different contexts is aptly illustrated by the many set combinations of terms found in the medieval sources.278 Just a few of these, which acquired specific technical meanings in the context of medieval teaching, will be treated here. Besides its more general meaning of'teacher', magister is used in the context of the universities as a(n honorary) title for someone who has graduated from the university, obtained a —>licentia docendi (a licence to teach), and been officially accepted to the corporate body of teachers.279 Whether or not the magister in question had an actual professional function as a teacher was indicated by the expressions magister (actu) regens (legens) (i.e. a master who teaches) or magister non regens (legens) (i.e. a
graduate of the university, accepted into the corporation of magistri, who does not have a teaching career).280 The term magister is often followed by a definition of the field in which the magister is active: e.g., magister artium (teacher of the liberal
277 The term is treated extensively in O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 133-142. She includes a treatment of the first attestations in the printed sources of the medieval universities: pp. 136-137. 278 See, e.g., the lemmata magister in the indices of volume 5 and 6 of CFVICIMA: ( V ) m. abachi, de abacho; m. artis litterarie; m. gram(m)dtke, in grammatica; m. in logica; m. infantium; m. monasterii; m. novitiorum; m. principalis; m. puerorum; m. sacri palatii; m. scolae, scolarispuerorum, scolarum; ( V I ) m. domus; (doctus) m. in theologia. m. studentium; m. in primitivis; m. bundles; m. exhibitionis; m. in artibus; m. collegii, collegiatus; magistri regentes; pauperes magistri. To this short list many other more-or-lcss set combinations could be added which are mentioned in the C7V7(7//V44-series. 279 Cf. -^licentia, and -+incipere (Cat. I I I ) . 280 In the field of legal terminology, magister seems to be applied most often to someone who has obtained the title magister, but who is not active as a professional teacher. Cf. R. FEENSTRA, 'Legum doctor', 'legumprofessor'et 'magister', CIVIC/MA I (1988), pp. 72-77.
96
MAGISTER
arts), magister sacrepagine or in theologia (teacher of theology). A special case are the so-called magistri grammatice or grammaticales {magistri re-
gentes in grammatica), who at the English universities provided the basic language training for new students.281 The semantic development of the term magister is complicated.282 In Antiquity, the uses of the term can be divided into two main groups: i) 'one who leads', 'superior', and 2) 'one who teaches' (either in a strict sense: 'one who is professionally active as a teacher', or in a more general sense: 'one who serves as an example' or (in a Christian context) 'one who preaches').283 In medieval Latin, the sense of'leader, superior' seems to be applicable to a wider variety of areas284, and the second group of meanings remains in use. At the same time, there seems to be a third group of applications of the term in which the two aspects are combined — in other words, a leader or superior who also functions as a teacher.2*5 It is often difficult to decide which of the two aspects should be taken as prevalent. A magister sc(h)olae/scolarum,2i6 for example, can refer to someone who teaches at a
281 In Oxford these teachers are called magistri gram(m)atice, in Cambridge one Ends the term magister glomerie (a degeneration of grammatica, according to the Oxford English Dictionary), with its derivative glomerellus, i.e. a student at a grammar school. Cf. O. W E I J E R S , Terminohgie des universites (1987), pp. 134-135 for further references. 282 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987) treats the semantic development on pp. 137-142, and bases her observations mainly on C . R E N A R D Y , Le monde des maitres universitaires du diocese de Liege 1140-1350 (1979), pp. 80-90. 283 T L L , col. 76 sqq. 284 O. Weijers gives examples which range from chef (magister coquine) and master builder (magister lapidum, magister operis) to military leader (magister exercitus, magister militum) and ecclesiastical leader (magister for abbot). O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 138; N G , col. 22-27. 285 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 138-139. A n apt example is described by J.-Y. T I L L I E T T E , Le vocabulaire des ecoles monastiques, CTVICIMA V (1992), pp. 67-70: it was the responsibility of the magister (puerorum, novitiorum) to see to the education of the young oblates and novices, but also their moral education and correct behaviour: discipline and punishment were among his concerns (an aspect of his function for which he was also sometimes referred to by the term —tcustos). 286 As synonyms for this set of terms one finds terms which explicitly refer to the 'leadership'-aspect of magister: caputscole, capiscol, archiscola. On the other hand, one also finds terms which ignore that aspect: scholaster, scolaris, scolastkus. (See also the separate treatment of the terms —>sc(h)olaris and —*sc(h)olasticus.)
MAGISTER
97
school, but also —as is often the case, for example, in the twelfth-century use of the term within the context of the large educational centres- for the headmaster or principal, who is the leader of the teaching staff. In general it can be said that use of the term magister in the pure sense of teacher or master is much less common in the Middle Ages than is often assumed.287 There is yet another use of the term: magister is frequently used as an honorary title, without any implications of actual teaching, education or leadership. The term can be used to refer to anyone whose authority is acknowledged and valued.288
287 At the same time it must be noted that almost every paper in the CLWCIMA-stries ranks magister as the most common term for schoolmaster, sometimes perhaps in close rivalry with —^doctor. Thus, e.g., for Spanish and Portuguese legal schools: A . G A R C I A Y GARC£A, La terminologia en las facultades juridicas ibericas, CP/ICIMA I (1988), p. 6y; for Carolingian schools: P. R I C H E , Le vocabulaire des ecoles carolingiennes, C1VICIMA V (1992), p. 39; for monastic schools: J.-Y. T I L L I E T T E , Le vocabulaire des ecoles monastiques, CIV1CIMA V (1992), pp. 67-70; for urban schools: C . V U L L I E Z , Le vocabulaire des ecoles urbaines des XII' etXLII' sihles, CLVLCLMA V (1992), pp. 98-101 and C . FROVA, Le scuole municipali all'epoca delle universita, CD/ICIMA V (1992), pp. 179-184. 288 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 139-140 .
98
magisterium, magistralis, magistrare These three derivatives of magister used in the context of medieval intellectual life share the ambiguity of their root.289 Magisterium refers either to the function of teacher, the right to teach, or the degree of -^magister.290 The adjective magistralis (belonging or relating to a -^magister)291 is used in combinations such as -^cathedra magistralis, dignitas magistraUs. The plural adjectival noun magistralia is used in the meaning of'rights and duties of magistri', or to refer to authoritative collections of sayings or works by magistri.292 The verb magistrare means either 'to lead' or 'to teach', both in classical and in medieval Latin, but is used in only a few isolated examples.293 Concerning the semantic development of these terms, we can be very brief. Both magistralis and magistrare are rare in Antiquity and in the Middle Ages, and mean essentially the same throughout.21"1 Magisterium occurs in classical Latin in the meaning of 'function and duties of a magister (that is, of a leader or superior, or of a teacher), but it can also refer to the contents of the education itself, or 'science' in general.295 In late Antiquity, the term was used in new, specifically Christian meanings:
289 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 135-136,137 (Attestations), 141-142 (Developpcment semantique). 290 N G , col. 30-32. 291 T L L (col. 91). 292 O . W E I J E R S , Terminohgie des universites (1987), p. 135. For cathedra magistralis, cf. ibid., pp. 119, 121. The latter meaning of magistralia, 'authoritative collections of sayings or works of magistri', is illustrated by J . H A M E S S E in Le vocabulaire des florileges medievaux, CIVICIMA I I I (1990), p. 213: in her article on twelfth- and thirteenth-century terminology used in and for anthologies, she finds the combinations sententiae magistrales, definitiones magistrales, auctoritates magistrales and dicta magistralia. 293 T L L (col. 100); NG (col. 34-35). 294 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 142. 295 T L L (col. 88-91).
MAGISTERIUM, MAGISTRALIS, MAGISTRARE
99
(doctrinal) authority and the content of Church doctrine.296 From the twelfth century onwards, the meaning of 'master's degree' seems to have been added to magisterium, and it was this meaning that was expanded upon in the context of the medieval universities.297
296 O. W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 141, with references to Y. CONGAR, Pour une bistoire semantique du terme 'magisterium' (1976); and I D . , Bref historique des formes du magistere' et de ses relations avec les docteurs (1976); NG (col. 30). Note that the term magisterium was also often used in contrast with ministerium; magisterium referring to the authority of God himself (who is, of course, both the highest authority and master), ministerium to the lower authority of the Church and her servants. 297 O. Weijers knows, however, of only one attestation before 1200, cited in NG ( I V B) ( O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 142).
100
massarius, receptor, campsor For the financial administration of the medieval universities, which were organised as corporations, a variety of terms was used. In the sources of the later thirteenth and the fourteenth centuries, terms like massarius, receptor and campsor occur for the functionaries who worked in this administration.298 At the University of Bologna, for example, two massarii or treasurers were chosen by the -Erector and his consiliarii each year to take care of the administration of expenses, the collection of taxes and contributions, etc. At the University of Paris similar functionaries were appointed, but here they were called receptores.299 The history of the term campsor in the context of the university seems to be older: from the middle of the thirteenth century onwards the term was used in Padua for functionaries who were essentially bankers, administrators of the university funds.300 Massarius, derived from massa, mansa or mansus, 'domain',301 was used from late Antiquity onwards for the official who managed such a domain. In the Middle Ages it was also used in a more general sense, a manager of goods or, specifically, financial funds.302 The term was current for administrators of cities, and the function of massarius at the Italian universities was undoubtedly adopted from that context.
298 O n these terms see O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 236-239. 299 In the sixteenth century, the term quaestor was introduced for the same functionary at the Faculty of Arts in Cologne. Thus, under the influence of humanism, the unpretentious receptor was replaced by a term which had a much more ancient ring to it. Cf. G.-R. T E W E S , Terms used in Academic Life, CLVLCLMA V I (1993), p. 69. 300 In Paris this same function was fulfilled by the so-called nuntii maiores, cf. -^bedellus. Note that in Padua the terms mutuatores and feneratores were also in use, for those who lent money to the members of the universities. Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 237 n. 335. 301 O n this meaning and etymology see N G ; see also N I E R M . ( I ) . 302 H U G U T I O , in his Liber derivationum, proposed an etymology based on the word mensa, which was commonly used in the sense of 'the table of a money changer'. Cf. O. W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 238; N I E R M . (3).
MASSARIUS, RECEPTOR, CAMPSOR
101
Receptor, which in a general sense means 'one who receives or collects',303 developed a financial connotation in the twelfth century From then on the term is commonly used for financial administrators of hospitals, churches, etc., and also, from the fourteenth century onwards, also of universities.304 Campsor, finally, or its older form cambitor, was derived in the Middle Ages from the verb cambire, cambiare. It occurs from the twelfth century onwards in the meaning of 'money changer', and was adopted into the vocabulary of the Italian universities in the more general sense of'banker'.305 In conclusion: these three terms were current in the context of (civil) administration, and were used, without any significant change in meaning, to define certain functionaries of the university as a corporate body. 306
303 The word already exists in classical Latin, but then in a specific meaning different from that used in the Middle Ages: 'one who receives into shelter, a harbourer'; O L D . 304 There seem to be no earlier sources for die use of the term in this specific context. O. W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 237 and n. 340; N I E R M . 305 Cf. NIERM.; MW; DML.
306 Accordingly, none of these terms occur in the context of schools or -^studia.
102
matricula In the context of the medieval universities, matricula is the term most common in the meaning of register or list of some kind, generally of personal names.307 The use of the term in the context of the university persists today in, for example, English, French and German. It has been suggested that the term originates in the context of the Italian 'student-type' universities, but this has also been contested.308 Whatever the origin of the term, it is clear that its meaning originally varied among the different universities. In the context of the Italian universities, it is used to refer to the general register of personal names affiliated to the entire university,309 while in France, for example, the term is used for lists of students under one particular master.310 The term matricula does not occur in classical Latin. It is a late-classical derivative of matrix and is used in meanings such as register or list of names.311 The medieval Latin use of the word is in complete concurrence with the late-classical use: matricula can refer to all kinds of lists, but generally it refers to a list of names, a register.312 It is used, for example, for the list of pauperi who should receive gifts within a certain parish, etc. The practice of registering as a student at a certain university or with a certain master is common throughout medieval Europe from the thir-
307 The term is treated more extensively in O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 112-118. In her treatment of the term, she includes a census of the first attestations of the term in printed university sources, pp. 113-114. See also J . PACQUET, Les matricules universitaires (1992), esp. pp. 14-T5. A closely related term is -^rotulus (or rotula). 308 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 112 and n. 1. 309 The responsibility for keeping this kind of register rests with the -Erector. 310 A different kind of list is signified in an expression in which a related term occurs: matricularium libmrie, 'list or catalogue of books'. Cf. J . M O N P R I N , Le catalogue et I'inventaire, C1VICIMA I I (1989), p. 135; O . W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen
dge, CIWCIMA IV (1991), p. 117. 311 Cf. TLL; BLAISE, Diet. 312
Cf. NG; NIERM.
MATRICULA
103
teenth century onwards.313 The term matricula, however, is found in thirteenth-century sources only in England (sources of the universities of Oxford and Cambridge); on the continent we find the term in fourteenth-century sources.314
313 Registration w e n t h a n d in h a n d w i t h certain obligations (e.g. d i e p a y m e n t of contributions) a n d rights. 314 J . P A C Q U E T , Les matricules universitaires (1992), gives a list o f synonyms for m a t r i c u l a in the m e a n i n g of register of members of a university (p. 15): frequently one finds rotulus,
registrant, liber, rarely rotula, papyrus, volumen, carta sive membrana. On these terms see the relevant articles in Cat. I I : -±inventarium, -+liber, -^-papyrus, —>volumen, -^c(h)arta. At the beginning of the sixteenth century, new terms occur: album, catbalogus, annales, leucoma
rotuli.
104
natio, SOCietaS, consiliaria The term natio developed a specific technical meaning in the context of the medieval universities: an association of students (or masters and students) with the same region of origin.315 Its earliest history lies in Bologna, where student associations are referred to by two terms. First, diere are societates: student associations that regulate the relationship between professor {-^>dominus) and student (-^socius) by means of official contracts.316 Associatons of this kind are attested from the twelfth century onwards, the terminology, however, is found later. Associations were also formed on the basis of region or country of origin — the so-called nationes or 'nations'. Here too the practice preceded the terminology: although the first associations can be traced back to the late twelfth century, the term natio occurs only, as far as we know, from the middle of the thirteenth century.317 The first official natio was that of the so-called Ultramontani, students from the northern side of the Alps (mostly Germans). The number of nationes quickly grew: in the thirteenth century, the Bologna numbered 18 nationes: 14 at the University of the Ultramontani, and 4 at the University of the Citramontani (students
315 For a full treatment o f these terms see O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 56-62. See also J . V E R G E R , La Faculte des arts: le cadre institutionnel (1997), and the somewhat older but still useful study o f R . K I B R E , The Nations in the Mediaeval Universities (1948). 316 The role of the professor within these societates is not entirely clear. See for a discussion of the different opinions O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universitis (1987), pp. 56-57; see also R . F E E N S T R A , 'Legum doctor, 'legumprofessor'et 'magister, CIVICIMA I (1988), p. 73. Note that the term societas can also be used for different kinds of collectives or societies, and can be synonymous with more general terms such as communio, communitas, consortium, confratria. See O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 27-29, 3133. See also for the university-colleges of Southern France, M.-H. JULLIEN DE POMMEROL, Le vocabulaire des colleges dans le midi de la France, CIVICIMA VT (1993), pp. 27-28: here societas is used as a synonym of -^collegium or domus. 317 Note that nationes are also called -^universitates at the beginning of their history. See O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 57-58: the first attestation of natio in official documents from the University of Bologna is dated in 1244.
NATIO, SOCIETAS, CONSILIARIA
105
from the Italian peninsula). Students originating from Bologna itself did not have a natio, whereas foreign students were obliged to join their own natio. 318
At the University of the Citramontani, the nationes were divided into smaller units, which were represented by their so-called consiliarii,m who were to advise the rector of the University. These smaller units were named accordingly: consiliariae. Thus a natio at the University of the Ultramontani corresponds roughly with a consiliaria at the University of the Citramontani?20 Around the middle of the thirteenth-century there were four powerful nationes in Paris: a German-English one, a French one, and the nations of Normandy and Picardy.321 Here too, it seems, the practice of foreign students grouping together according to their region of origin, or their mother tongue, existed decades before the official corporal associations of the so-called nations. Sources reveal such organisations from the second half of the twelfth century onwards, but the first attestation of the term natio is dated in 1222, and the term seems to become common only around the mid-thirteenth century.322 In contrast with the nationes of Bologna, where they were student unions, the nationes in Paris were formed by the masters of Arts rather than the students. One should note, however, that masters of Arts were usually students at the higher faculties (of Theology, Law or Medicine) — the difference may, therefore, seem greater than it actually is. The nationes were powerful bodies, who had
318 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 58. 319 See -^procurator. 320 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 58-59. Consiliaria is a medieval derivation of -^consiliarius, and seems to have been used mainly in its specific technical meaning of (subdivision of a) societas or natio. In the L a t i n of the late M i d d l e Ages it is only attested in the Polish dictionary, in the sense of adiutrix or consiliatrix ('female helper or advisor', Lex.Med. et Inf.Lat. Polonorum), and in the Yugoslav one, in the sense oimunus consiliarii ('gift of advice', Lex.Lat.Med.Aev. lugoslaviae). 321 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 59-60; J . V E R G E R , La Faculte des arts: le cadre institutionnel (1997), pp. 30-35. 322 Weijers cites attestations from IZ2Z (papal bull of Honorius I I I ) , 1249 (Chartularium of the University of Paris) and 1252 (seal of the German natio).
106
NATIO, SOCIETAS, CONSILIARIA
a strong hold on the policy of the university. They employed their own personnel, and were represented by a chosen -^procurator, who was one of the main advisers to the rector.323 The number of nationes differed per university. In Toulouse, for example, there were none, whereas in Orleans there were ten, in Padua eight (four at the University of the Ultramontani, four at the University of the Citramontani), in Oxford two (the natio of the Boreales and of die Australes) .324 The nature of these organisations also differed: whereas in Oxford the associations had a more social function (an association of foreign students in order to help them cope witli the circumstances of living abroad),325 in Paris they were powerful corporations which had a strong influence at the highest level of the university administration.326 Both in Antiquity and die Middle Ages natio has two common meanings: it signifies either the abstract concept of 'origin', 'provenance',327or die concrete concepts of 'people', 'race', 'nation'.328 For people living abroad natio becomes the 'region of origin', or the linguistic family into which one was born. In the context of the medieval university a second change in nuance occurs, so that natio becomes not only the region of origin, but also an association of people of a common region of origin, or who have the same mother tongue.329
323 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p.6o. 324 O n the nationes at the University of Prague, see F. S M A H E L , Scholae, Collegia et Bursae Universitatis Pragensis, CTVTCIMA VI (1993), pp. 122-123. 325 S e e J . V E R G E R , La Faculte des arts: k cadre institutional (1994), pp. 30-31. 326 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 60. 327 Also social or legal status determined by birth, see, e.g., N G ( I I ) ; N I E R M . (4). 328 Cf. F O R C . (2). Also 'group of people with a common background or interest' (e.g. with the same profession): O L D (3); N G ( V I ) . 329 Outside the context of the university one finds die same meaning in the so-called 'Landmannschaften' or nationes: commercial associations of fellow-countrymen living abroad in die large cities of the late Middle Ages. ( O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 62)
107
notarius, syndicus The medieval universities employed several functionaries for administrative or legal matters. Terms for these were taken from the context of the administration of cities or ecclesiastical organisations, and were adopted into the vocabulary of the universities.330 In Italy and Spain, for example, professional scribes, notarii,331 were chosen from among the masters of the university for the redaction of charters, documents, etc. for a period of one year.332 The sources of the universities of Padua and Salamanca show that this office existed in the second half of the thirteenth century, but the term was first attested in the early fourteenth century in the statutes of the University of Bologna. In the later Middle Ages, -^nationes or -^collegia doctorum might also have their own notarii.333 An official in the field of legal representation of, or advice to, the university was called a syndicus, again after the use of this term in the context of the administration of cities or corporate bodies.334 In Bologna, one legal adviser was chosen annually from among the members of the two universities {Ultramontani and Citramontant). Furthermore, syndici rectorum were chosen to supervise the activities of the -^rectores. At other
330 Other examples are —>massarius, receptor, campsor. 331 Note that notarius is commonly used for a (professional) scribe in general, alongside terms such as —>scriba, scriptor (Cat. I I ) . Furthermore, in concurrence with its original meaning of 'writer of shorthand', it is used for 'one who takes notes' or 'one who writes down what is dictated to him'. O n this use of the term see J . H A M E S S E , 'Collatid et 'reportatio, CP/ICIMA I (1988), p. 83; and E A D . , Le vocabulaire de la transmission orale des textes, CIWCIMA I I (1989), p. 172. O n its use in the meaning of 'professional scribe', 'redactor of charters, etc.', see O . G U Y O T J E A N N I N , Le vocabulaire de la diplomatique en latin medieval, CIVICIMA II (1989), p. 127. 332 The term notarius is treated by O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 235-236. There was an important school for notaries in Bologna; cf. R . FERRARA, 'Licentia exercendi' ed esame di notariato a Bologna (1977), pp. 49-120. Note that this school had its own —>licentia, the so-called licentia exercendi. On the so-called ars notariae, see —fars dictaminis (Cat. I V ) . 333 The term seems not to have been used for similar functionaries at French or English universities, at least not in the thirteenth-century sources. 334 O n this term sec O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 233-235.
108
NOTARIUS, SYNDICUS
universities the syndicus was not chosen from among the members, but was appointed by the university and functioned as its principal official. At first, the offices of syndicus and -^-procurator were very similar, and were sometimes even held by a single person. When, by the mid-diirteenth century, -^procurator developed its specific meaning of 'leader of a —tnatio', the meaning of the term syndicus became more specific as well. By the end of the thirteenth century, it was used for a functionary charged with the administration and legal representation of a university, —tnatio or college.335 In Antiquity, the word notarius was used for a stenographer, a writer of shorthand, but also for anyone who writes down what is dictated to him (a taker of notes).336 This usage of die term continued in the Middle Ages, but it was also used for a specific functionary: the professional scribe in charge of the redaction of charters in tlie chancellery of a pope, king, bishop, monastery, etc.337 Accordingly, die term was used for a similar function in the context of the universities as corporate organisations. In classical Latin, syndicus, derived from the Greek O"6V5IKOC, meant 'one who represents a community' or 'who acts in the name of a community'.338 In the Middle Ages, this general meaning did not change, but was applied to specific functions in the organisation of all kinds of governing bodies: cities, corporations, and also universities.339
335 A different use of the term, however, is indicated by A . V E R N E T , in: Du 'chartophylax au 'Librarian, CFVTCIMA II (1989), p. 161: here syndicus occurs in a list of terms which refer to curators of valuable books. On the use of both terms, notarius and syndicus, in the context of Jesuit education, see L . G I A R D , La constitution du systeme (ducatifjesuite, CIVICIMAVl (1993), p. 148. 336 Cf. O L D . On the continued use of this meaning in the medieval intellectual context see NG ( I I B ) . 337 A notarius publicus or communis, employed by local authorities, took care of public documents, such as wills. Cf. N I E R M . (2-9); N G (HC, Di-8). 338 Cf. FORC; OLD 339 Cf. D u C ; B L A I S E , Lex.; S O U T E R and N I E R M . ('syndic', 'proctor').
109
p(a)edagogus, p(a)edagogium, pr(a)eceptor Although the most common terms for teachers or instructors in schools and on universities are -^magister, -^professor, and -^doctor, pedagogus and preceptor also occur in this meaning.340 Thus the term was used, for example, in the context of (monastic) schools for the keeper of discipline and educator of the youngest among the community.341 It was also applied to the personal teachers or tutors of the sons of nobility or royalty.342 Paedagogium, also a classical word, carried in origin the meaning of 'training establishment for slave-boys', or 'school for boys' in general.343 In late-antique texts, the term was also used in the more abstract sense of'the act of teaching'.344 In the later Middle Ages, the term was used more frequently and acquired new meanings. In Latin sources from the Netherlands, for example, the term is used in the meaning of'the office of a teacher or pedagogus'. More generally, it was used for 'school'. Although in general pedagogus and pedagogium were more common in the field of primary education for children (pueri), at the end of the Middle Ages pedagogium was also used alongside, and synonymously with, -^collegium.™ 340 The term is certainly not common in the Middle Ages. In the context of Carolingian education, for example, it is found less frequently than the related terms —>magister, —^doctor, praeceptor and institutor. (P. R I C H E , Le vocabulaire des icoles carolingiennes, CTVJCIMA V (1992), p. 39.) In eleventh- and twelfth-century sources of monastic schools —>magister is the common word, and paedagogus is sometimes used as a distinguished alternative. (J.-Y. T I L L I E T T E , Le vocabulaire des ecoles monastiques, CIVICIMA V (1992), p. 70.) The same holds true for the urban schools in the thirteenth and fourteenth century: paedagogus only occurs in the more literary sources. ( C . FROVA, Le scuole municipali all'epoca delle universita, CIVICIMA V (1992), pp. 180,184-185.) Other terms for 'teachers' mentioned in these articles are institutor (P. R I C H E ) , instructor (C. V U L L I E Z , Le vocabulaire des ecoles urbaines desXII' etXIIF siecles, CWICJMA V (1992), p. 94), grammaticus (cf. —> grammatica in Cat. I V ) and ductorpuerorum ( C . FROVA). 341 NG (1-3). 342 Some examples are listed in NG (1). 343 O L D ; T L L (1). 344 O L D ; T L L ; BLAISE, Diet. 345 D u C ; Lex.Lat.Ned. MediiAevi (za-b: examples from Louvain). See also O . W E I J E R S , Le vocabulaire du College de Sorbonne, CIVICIMA VI (1993), pp. 21-22: in the course
110
P(A)EDAGOGUS, P(A)EDAGOGIUM, PR(A)ECEPTOR
Pr(a)eceptor is even less common in the context of institutionalised education in the Middle Ages. It occurs in the general sense of instructor or master,346 but is not as common as, for example, —tmagister, -^doctor or —>professor.M1 The medieval use of both terms does not deviate greatly from their use in Antiquity. Already in classical Latin the word paedagogus, which was originally used for the slave who accompanied children to and from school, and generally supervised their behaviour,348 developed the general meaning of 'teacher' or 'master'.349 The term is generally associated with the primary education of young boys, and the twofold meaning of instructor and childminder persisted in the Middle Ages. The prime meaning of the term praeceptor seems to have shifted over the ages from 'one who instructs'350 to 'one who gives orders',351 but although the term is not common in the context of medieval education, both meanings continue to occur throughout the Middle Ages.
of the fourteenth century, as the actual teaching came to take place more and more in the colleges themselves, the terms -^-scola and pedagogium were used for the houses of Arts students. They were taught and/or supervised by a pedagogus. One could perhaps assume that a general aspiration to humility formed the basis for the use of the term in this specific context. It is significant, in this respect, that the term pedagogus often occurs in Franciscan sources as a synonym of -^nnagister. ( M . C . M . P A C H E C O & M . I . M . PACHECO, Le vocabulaire de I'enseignement dans les Sermones d'Antoine de LisbonnelPadoue, CIWCIMA IX (1999), p. 147.) 346 NlERM. 347 The term occurs in Carolingian sources, cf. P. R I C H E , Le vocabulaire des ecoles carolingiennes, CIV1CIMA V (1992), p. 39, and in sources of monastic and urban schools in the eleventh-thirteenth centuries, cf. J.-Y. T I L L I E T T E , Le vocabulaire des ecoles monastiques, CWICIMA V (1992), p. 70; C . V U L L I E Z , Le vocabulaire des ecoles urbaines des XII' etXIII' siecles, CTVICIMA V (1992), p. 94; and C . FROVA, Le scuole munkipali all'epoca delle universita, CP/ICIMA V (1992), pp. 184-185. The term is more common in texts of a more literary nature.
348OLD;TLL(l2). 349 TLL (I, II). 350 T L L (IA); O L D (a-b). 351
N o t e that its m o r e c o m m o n m e a n i n g is 'one w h o gives orders' or 'one w h o leads'
( O L D (c); T L L (IB); B L A I S E , Diet. (2)); it is used, for example, in the expressions praeceptor palatii for Count Palatine; praeceptor monasterii for the provost or manager of a monastery; praeceptor provinciae for the head of a province (of the Templars, the Knights of Saint John or the Teutonic Knights); cf. N I E R M .
Ill
prior In the medieval university colleges in Paris the prior was responsible for discipline and moral and spiritual guidance in the colleges.352 He was in charge, for example, of the rolls on which the duties of the members of the college were listed; consequently, he was also called lator rotuli (—> rotulus), carrier of the rolls. In this meaning the term is first attested in the statutes of the College de Sorbonne, in 1274. Here, a prior was chosen for a period of one year, and he assisted the -^provisor in his function as head of the college. Note, however, that the roles seem to have been reversed in the context of colleges in southern France. Here, the head of a college was usually called -Erector, but sometimes also prior, and he was assisted by a -^provisor, who took care of administrative and financial matters and stood in for him in case of absence.353 Sometimes, however, the terms prior and -^provisor seem to have been synonymous. In the Cistercian -^studio, of the thirteenth century, for example, the head of the house nominated by the abbot of Clairvaux was not called prior, but -^provisor.354 Further, the term prior occurs in the context of the schools of the Mendicant orders: here the chief person responsible for education at a monastic school was sometimes called magisterprior,355 and expressions such as prior provincialis occur for the heads of the provincial monasteries or (monastic) schools.356
352 For a full treatment o f the term see O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 277-279; O . W E I J E R S , Le vocabulaire du College de Sorbonne, CLVLCLMA V I (1993), p. i3353 M . - H . J U L L I E N DE POMMEROL, Le vocabulaire des colleges dans le midi de la France, CLVLCLMAYl (1993), pp. 30-31. 354 C . H . L A W R E N C E , Stephen of Lexington and Cistercian Studies in the Thirteenth Century (i960), pp. 169-170; cf. J . H A M E S S E , La terminologiedominicaine, CLVLCLMAIX (1999), p. 37 and n. 31. 355 J.-Y. T I L L I E T T E , Le vocabulaire des ecoles monastiques, CLVLCLMA V (1992), p. 68; the expression magisterprincipalis was also used. 356 Cf. DuC.
112
PRIOR
In Antiquity, the word was used widely as an adjective in a great variety of meanings, all of which go back to the basic meaning of 'in a more forward position': earlier, elder, first, superior, etc.357 It was only in late Antiquity, however, that it began to be used as a substantive in the meanings of'predecessor' (in an office) or 'superior'.358 In the Middle Ages its use became particularly widespread, and its basic meaning of 'first' or 'superior' is found in all kinds of contexts.359 In the vocabulary of the church prior was mostly used for the head of a monastery or church (abbot or provost), but also for the office of precentor (prior cantoruni), for the head of a school (prior scolarum), or for the elder monks of a monastery.360 From the tenth or eleventh century onwards, prior, which had been a term equivalent to abbas ('abbot'), came to refer to a functionary ranked immediately below the abbot.361 It is this place in the hierarchy which concurs with the rank as found in the sources of, for example, the College de Sorbonne.
357 Cf. TLL; OLD. 358 Cf. B L A I S E , Lex., notablypriores ecclesiae; N I E R M . ( I ) 359 See, for example, N I E R M . ( I , 'predecessor', 7-8, 'the great men of the realm' or 'local nobilities') 360 N I E R M . (2, 4, 5 and 9 respectively)
361 Cf. N I E R M . (2, 'abbot', and 3, 'second monk behind the abbot'). See also O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 279.
113
procurator, consiliarius The function of procurator, which in a broad sense signifies anyone who manages another person's affairs, occurs in different educational institutions of the Middle Ages. First, it occurs in the context of the university,362 its history starting in Paris in the first decennia of the thirteenth century. The term procurator is, in this period, used for officials who represent a certain group of people, for example their -^natio, the Faculty of Arts, or the entire university. In the middle of the thirteenth century, the definition of the term procurator becomes more specific. From then on, the head of the university is called -Erector, and the top officials of the four —tnationes are called procuratores. They were chosen indirectly from the body of teachers of the Faculty of Arts, and — though originally charged mainly with financial matters — developed into real leaders of the -^nationes. They were responsible for the administration and jurisdiction within the -^nationes, for convening and presiding over meetings, representing the —tnationes in the general assemblies of the university, and assisting the —»• rector in his administrative and executive tasks.363 In Oxford, where there were two —tnationes, there were also two procuratores to represent them. Just as in Paris, they were chosen (indirectly) from among the —>magistri regentes of the Faculty of Arts, but in fact represented the entire university.364 In Bologna, only the leader of the —>natio of the Ultramontani was called procurator; the heads of the other —>nationes were called consiliarii.365 Procuratores and consiliarii
362 For a full treatment of the term in this context see O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 200-205. 363 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des university (1987), pp. 200-201. 364 Note that in Cambridge the heads of the —>nationes were usually called —>rectores rather than procuratores. Cf. —Erector, O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (19S7), p. 190; J . V E R G E R , La Faculte des arts: le cadre institutionnel (1997), pp. 30-31. 365 These consiliarii gave their name to the so-called consiliariae, the subdivisions of the -±nationes of the Citramontani. Cf., in the article on -^natio, consiliaria. See also O. W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 58-59.
114
PROCURATOR, CONSILIARJUS
had more or less the same responsibilities, although consiliarii seem to have had fewer administrative and financial tasks, and their function was more one — as the word itself suggests — of an advisory nature. In Toulouse, this function was excercised by a board of consiliarii, consisting of professors, bachelors and ordinary students, which formed a kind of university council.366 In Montpellier, there were originally two procuratores to assist the rector in his administrative tasks, chosen from among the professors. Later, the students appointed their own procurator, and subsequently the system of an advisory board of consiliarii was adopted. Both functions, that of procurator and that of consiliarius, comprised the duties of assisting the rector and of representing a certain group of people. The general difference between the two is that procuratores were administrators, officials with mainly financial responsibilities, whereas consiliarii were chiefly advisors. Secondly, procurator occurs in the context of medieval college life.367 The administration of the college's properties and the management of its finances were usually in the hands of the procurator. Other, related terms for financial managers of colleges were bursarius,™ administrator,369
366 The members of this council were distributed over the various ranks in the university: four of them were professors, two were advanced students (bachelors), and two were ordinary students. The bishop and the chancellor each added their own candidate to this board of eight. It should be noted that the student representatives at the university council were called procuratores by their fellow-students. Cf. O . WEIJERS, Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 202. 367 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 273-276. 368 Note, however, that bursarius generally has the meaning of a student who receives a scholarship. (See -^bursa; O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 265-268.) It is only in England that the term is used for someone who controls the finances of a college. ( O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 273-276.) 369 See M . - H . J U L L I E N D E P O M M E R O L , Le vocabulaire des colleges dans le midi de la France, CIVICIMA VI (1993), p. 32. In the sources of southern France, the procurator or administrator is the administrator of the college. The head of a college was called —>prior or —>
PROCURATOR, CONSILIARIUS
115
depositarius, or yconomus.™ In the College of the Sorbonne, a procurator maior took care of financial matters, whereas subprocuratores or procuratores parvi/minores were in charge of personnel, household, etc.371 Neither procurator nor consiliarius changed its basic meaning throughout the ages. In Antiquity, procurator, derived from procuro ('to attend to' or 'to be in charge o f ) , was used for a person given responsibility for a property, a business, etc., and also for a person appointed to perform business in the capacity of another, in other words: a representative or agent.372 Both meanings are preserved in the medieval sense of the word described above: procuratores were representatives of their -^nationes, of their faculty or of their university, and their main responsibilities were in the field of financial or administrative matters. A consiliarius was, both in Antiquity and in the Middle Ages, someone who provided counsel. Although specific applications may differ according to context,373 the general sense of the word remains the same and is also preserved in the technical meaning it acquires in the context of the university.
370 Depositarius sndyconomus are both treated in O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites ^987), pp. 273-277. Depositarius is a term which occurs only in the sources of Merton College, Oxford, and which apparently developed from the custos depositi - the keeper of deposited goods in a monastery. ( D u C . has this meaning, but without references.) Yconomus or oeconomus is the Latin form of the Greek word 0i.K0v6p.05, which means 'administrator of goods'. In the Middle Ages it was commonly used in the field of the Church for administrators (of church) or monasterial property. 371 The procurator major assisted the -^provisor, the head of the college. See O. W E I J E R S , Le vocabulaire du College de Sorbonne, CTVICIMA V I (1993), pp. 12-13, 2O> 2 5372 Cf. O L D (1), (2). 373 See, e.g., N I E R M . : 'city-counsellor', or D M L : (2) 'papal, royal, municipal counsellors'; (3) 'counsellor-at-law'.
116
professor Professor is, after -^magister and -^doctor, the third most common term used to refer to a teacher. In the context of the twelfth-century schools, professor is used to refer to teachers in various disciplines (law, dialectic, logic).374 In the early history of the university, it is found most frequently in Italy, where it is used in the same sense (professores of Medicine, Arts, Theology, etc.375). For teachers in the Faculty of Law, -^doctor (iuris, legum) is the most common term, but legum professor also occurs.376 This term is also used as a kind of honorary title, to indicate that someone is learned in the field of law; and does not necessarily imply that the person is actually active as a teacher of law.377 In the second half of the thirteenth century, professor seems to have been introduced in France, and here too it refers to teachers in various disciplines, mostly Theology and Arts. In southern France and Spain, professor seems to be restricted to legal specialists only, but in Paris and England teachers of other disciplines are also referred to as professores. 378
374 The term is treated in O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 152-155. For pre- and non-university attestations of the term see C . V U L L I E Z , Le vocabulaire des ecoles urbainesdesXII'etXIII'siecles, CTVICIMAV (1992), p. 94; C . FROVA, Lescuolemunkipali all'epoca dell* university, CTVICIMA V (1992), pp. 183-184; A . M A I E R U , Figure di docenti nelle scuole domenicane, CTVICIMA IX (1999), p. 66. Both Vulliez and Frova note that there seems to be no difference in meaning between -^magister, -^doctor and professor in this context. Maieru mentions the set of terms sacrae theologiae professor in the fourteenthcentury Dominican sources. 375 Cf, for example, O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 152: professor medicinae or medicinalis scientiae, professor naturalis et phisicalis scientiae, professor grammaticae. 376 See on this subject R. FEENSTRA, 'Legum doctor', 'legum professor' et 'magister', CTVICIMA I (1988), p. 73:'... les expression contenant le terme professor ne semblent pas avoir ete beaucoup en faveur chez les anciens Bolonais; nous verrons cependant qu'ils ont eu un certain succes ailleurs a partir du X I I P siede.' 377 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 152, 155; R . FEENSTRA, 'Legum doctor', 'legum professor' et 'magister', CIVICIMA I (1988), pp. 75-76. 378 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 153.
PROFESSOR
117
Although in all disciplines save law the term professor has strong connotations of actual teaching activity, the designation professor legum is an exception; graduates of the Faculty of Law who held only one (inaugural) lecture (—tprincipium, in Cat. I l l ) were also referred to as professores legum.379 An important difference between -^nnagister and -^doctor on the one hand, and professor on the other, is that professor is less often used as an academic title.380 Professor is a post-classical term derived from profiteor ('to state openly, declare'). From the outset, it has a twofold meaning. On the one hand it may refer to someone who makes a public statement, for example, someone who puts himself forward as a candidate (for a magistracy),381 professes a faith or takes religious vows,382 or claims to be an expert in some branch of learning;383 on the other hand it is used for someone who teaches.384 Both meanings persist in the Middle Ages, and the use of the term in medieval Latin does not greatly deviate from its use in late Antiquity.
379 Cf. R. FEENSTRA, 'Legum doctor, 'legum professor' et 'magister', CIVICIMA I (1988), pp. 75-76. 380 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 155 and, for a comparison between —>magister, -^doctor and professor, pp. 157-160. 381 Cf. O L D (2) 382
BLAISE,
Lex.
(1-2)
383 O L D (1) 384 O L D (1) (spec, 'teacher of rhetoric'); B L A I S E , Lex. (3).
118
provisor, principalis The head of the French student houses or colleges was generally called a provisor, a term adopted from the vocabulary of the church.385 The term occurs, for example, in the sources of the Cistercian -^studia:386 their directors were usually called provisores. In the sources of the university colleges the term is also common. At the College of the Sorbonne, for example, a provisor was appointed for life, and he was the person in charge of the internal matters of the college and its external representation. In matters of administration and finance he was assisted in his task by —» procurators, and in matters concerning discipline and moral behaviour by the —tprior. The first provisor of the College of the Sorbonne was Robert of Sorbon himself.387 In England, this same function was fulfilled by the so-called principales or, through the term is less common, -+custodes?%% Principalis was already in use for the principals of -^hospitia or aulae in Oxford and Cambridge, and was later adopted by the colleges. In the colleges it was customary to choose a principalis from among the members of the college. Provisor, derived from providere, existed in Antiquity, but was not common.389 It was only in the Middle Ages that it became a widely used term, and adopted all sorts of meanings. It was used in a very literal sense for 'provider' (of bread, for example),390 but also for a manorial agent or ur-
385 See for a full treatment of this term O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 268-272. 386 B L A I S E , Diet.; Lex.Lat.Ned. MediiAevi. Note that the person with the same function in the -^studio, of the Mendicant orders was, at first, usually called -^>prior instead of provisor. (Cf. -^prior.) 387 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Le vocabulaire du College de Sorbonne, CTVJCIMA V I (1993), pp. 12-13
388 Other terms, such as -Erector, were also in use from the fourteenth century. 389 The O L D lists the following meanings: 'one who foresees' or 'one who takes care of something'. 390 NIERM.
(7)
PROVISOR, PRINCIPALS
119
ban administrator.391 In addition the term was used for administrators of hospices or monasteries.392 The use of the term in the meaning of 'chief person responsible for a student house or college' was probably adopted from this latter context, and occurs from the first decade of the thirteenth century.393 As an adjective, principals (meaning 'first' or 'most important') was very common throughout Antiquity and the Middle Ages. The substantive use of principals, however, is rare before the thirteenth century. It occurs in late Antiquity, mainly in the expression principals civitatis (urban administrators);394 Eusebius uses the word for Christ in one of his sermons;395 and Gregory of Tours uses it for an abbess in his Historia Francorum.i96 From the twelfth century onwards, the term is sometimes used for a prince or other high-ranking person, but only from the thirteenth century does the use of the term become more extensive. In the context of the student houses or -^hospitia, the term may have been particularly apt precisely because of its neutrality; it was not as deeply imbedded in the vocabulary of the church as provisor or -^prior, and may therefore have been more suitable for die secular student houses. Its use in this particular context seems to have started in England (its first attestation is found in the sources of Balliol College in 1282), and from there it was adopted into the vocabulary of colleges in France.397
391 Cf. N I E R M . (8); B L A I S E , Diet.
392 Cf. N I E R M . (1, 5), and, for example, Lex.Lat.Ned. Medii Aevi. (2, 3). I n this latter sense, the term is on a par with terms such as -^procurator, or (in certain contexts) —> custos, etc.: terms used for those in charge of die administrative and financial matters of a community. Note, however, that provisor could also be used for the spiritual leader of a monastic community: cf. N I E R M . (2). 393 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universite's (1987), pp. 268, 270. 394 O L D (2b) 395 Serm. 4, 6; cf. T L L . 396 9, 39; M G H Scriptores Rerum Merovingicarum I ; cf. B L A I S E , Diet; N I E R M . 397 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 270, 272.
120
questionista, sophista Questionista and sophista are two terms used at the Faculty of Arts in Oxford, to define students at a certain stage of their studies, or performing a certain role.398 Both terms are derived from the technical vocabulary of teaching, the terms —>quaestio and -^sophisma respectively, which are treated in separate articles in Category I I I . It is important to note that both terms are tied to the practice of the disputation {-^disputatio, Cat. I l l ) , for that is die framework in which the specific meaning of the socalled questionistae and sophistae must be placed. Sophista or sophista generalis was, technically speaking, an arts student who, having receptively followed courses and disputations for two years, was now to acquire his own skills in the art of disputing on formal logic by beginning to take an active part in disputations. The area of logic in question was called de sophismatibus (cf. -^sophisma in Cat. I I I ) . More in general, students studying for a lower degree were often known as sophistae, and those who had performed a specific number of exercises (in disputation) were called sophistae generales.399 Although the meaning of questionista is not quite agreed upon, it seems to have a very similar meaning. It is used for an (advanced) student who takes an active part in the disputations, and who has to perform the role of 'answering on the question', respondere de questioned00 In Oxford the bachelor who answered questions during the ceremony of admission (cf. -^incipere in Cat. I l l ) was called questionista, and here, it seems, sophista and questionista are qualifications that imply consecutive stages in a student's career.401 398 For a full treatment of the terms see O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 180-182. Note that she also found one attestation of the term in the charters of the University of Paris, p. 180, n. 88. 399 O n sophista see also J . M . F L E T C H E R , The Faculty of Arts (1984), pp. 379-380. O n the expression sophista in parviso, see ibid.; J.A. W E I S H E I P L , Curriculum of the Faculty of Arts at Oxford (1964), p. 154; A . M A I E R U , University Training in Medieval Europe (1994), pp. 137-141.
4OoOn respondere de questione and respondere de sophismatibus see O . W E I J E R S , La 'disputatio' dans les Facultes des arts (2002), pp. 79-80. 401 J . M . F L E T C H E R , The Faculty of Arts (1984), pp. 380-381; A . M A I E R U , University Training in Medieval Europe (1994), p. 138.
QUESTIONISTA, SOPHISTA
121
In Antiquity, a sophistes (from the Greek oocpioxfiq or (less common) sophista was a teacher of rhetoric and philosophy; a teacher of public speaking.402 In the Latin world, the term sometimes had a negative connotation: a 'teacher of falsities'.403 It also remained in use, however, in positive meanings, such as 'philosopher', 'wise man' or 'rhetor'.404 In the Middle Ages this double use of the term continued.405 Negatively it was defined by, for example, Dominic Gundisalvi as sapiens deceptor ('learned fraud'), but it was also used in a general sense of'wise' or 'erudite' man, and in a specific sense of'specialist in rhetoric or philosophy'. The use of die term in the specific context of the Faculty of Arts of the University of Oxford goes back to anotlier term: —tsophisma (Cat. I I I ) . The student who had gathered enough experience in the art of disputing on —>sophismata was consequendy called a sophista. Questionista is a thirteenth-century neologism. It does not exist in classical or late-classical Latin, but just as sophista was derived from —> sophisma (Cat. I l l ) , questionista was forged from -^quaestio (Cat. Ill) in its technical meaning associated with the practice of disputation. It signified the student performing the role of 'respondent' in the practice of the disputation. Its use is attested from die mid-thirteenth century onwards.406
402 Cf.
F O R C ; OLD.
403 Cf. BLAISE, Diet. (i). 404 Cf. BLAISE, Diet. (2-3). 405 Cf. D u C ; O. W E I J E R S , Terminologie cUs universites (1987), pp. 181-182. 4O6O. W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 181.
122
rector From the Middle Ages to our own day the term rector has signified the head of the university. The history of the term, however, is more complex than it seems, and its meaning differs per university and period of time. In the broader context of medieval education, the term rector, derived from -^regere (Cat. I l l , 'to reign, lead', but also in a specific educational sense 'to teach'), has the general meaning of'head'. As such it is used, for example, in the fixed expression rector hospitiorum, 'head of a house in which students are lodged'.407 Rector is also one of the terms used to refer to the man in charge of the colleges in which students lived, and who was responsible for almost every aspect of daily life there: lodging, food, drink, medical care, discipline, surveillance, etc.408 The expression rector scolarum also occurs in the context of medieval schools, and signifies not (as one might expect) 'head of school', but rather 'a master who actually teaches', a -^professor regens.409
The use of the term rector in a university context started, as is the case with so many other university terms, in Bologna.410 At the end of the twelfth century, the two groups of students (the Ultramontani and the Citramontani)4" were headed by their chosen representatives, fellow
407 C £ O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 191 n. 39. 408 Other terms for 'head of college' are: gubernator (cf. M . - H . J U L L I E N D E P O M M E R O L , Le vocabulaire des colleges dans le midi de la France, CIVICIMA VI (1993), pp. 30-31); —tmagister (cf. P. D E N I . E Y , The Vocabulary of Italian Colleges to 1500, CIVICIMA V I (1993), pp. 76-77); —>custos or warden in England (cf. J . M . F L E T C H E R , Ihe Vocabulary of Administration and Teaching at Merton College, Oxford, CIVICIMA VI (1993), pp. 4647 and J . V E R G E R , Conclusion, CIVICIMA V I (1993), p. 178); andpraesidens in Louvain ( J . V E R G E R , Conclusion, CIVICIMA V I (1993), p. 178). At the head of the Jesuit colleges there were also rectores, but these were in charge of the purity of doctrine and orthodoxy within the colleges rather than the material aspects of daily life. (Cf. L . G I A R D , La constitution du systbne educatifjesuite, CIVICIMA VI (1993), p. 147.) 409 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 191 n. 36, and C . V U I X I E Z , Le vocabulaire des ecoles urbaines desXII' et XIII' siecles, CIVICIMA V (1992), p. 101. 410 For a full treatment of the term see O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 187-194. 411 Cf. -+natio
RECTOR
123
students called rectores. They looked after the interests of the foreign students, which often clashed with those of the city of Bologna.412 Although the professors repeatedly expressed their dissatisfaction with the studentcentred character of the system, they accepted the status quo, and around the middle of the thirteenth century the rector ultramontanorum and the rector citramontanorum were officially recognised in the statutes of the city. These rectores had a wide range of responsibilities, including jurisdiction over the members of the university. They had no authority, however, over the contents of curriculum and examinations; these were the responsibility of the professors only. The election of rectores was an elaborate process, which was laid down in detail in the statutes of the university. The rectores were assisted by a council of consiliarii.4n In Paris, where the professors rather than the students formed the core of the University, the rector was not a student, but a proper master. The students and the professors of the Faculty of Arts were organised into four —>nationes. At first, the representatives of these corporate organisations were each called either -^procurator or rector. In the course of the thirteenth century, when the need grew for one central representative for the entire Faculty of Arts, he was called rector, and the heads of the —> nationes were called -^procuratores. Thus, the rector was in fact the head of the four -^nationes, that is, of all students and masters of the Faculty of Arts. Gradually, however, the rector seems to have developed into a representative for the entire university, including the higher faculties of Medicine, Law and Theology. As such, his office became one of great power; his responsibilities included the financial management of the university and jurisdiction over its members. He was in office for only a few months, and was accountable for his actions to the general assembly of the university.414
412 W h e n the city tried to abolish the system of elected rectores in 1224, the two parties had such a heated conflict that papal intervention was needed to settle the crisis. See for further references O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 187. 413 Cf. -^procurator. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 187-188. 414 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 188-189.
124
RECTOR
In the chief other universities, the term rector was used in more or less the same sense: representative and main administrator of the university.415 Only in England was the situation different: here it was not a secular administrator who was in charge, but a chancellor (cf. -^cancellarius): a representative of the Church, appointed by the bishop. The term rector was used for the head of a -^matio, alongside and synonymously with -^procurator (just as was originally the case in Paris). Later, the term —> procurator became usual in Oxford, while in Cambridge rector was commonly used. Thus in Cambridge there were two rectores (for the two —> nationes), who were appointed by the chancellor and the professors. They were representatives for the entire University (not only the Faculty of Arts or the —>nationes), but were never as important or as powerful as the rectores of Paris or Bologna.416 In the thirteenth and fourteenth century, derivatives such as rectoria, rectomtus ('rectorate' or 'rectorship'), and the adjective rectorius ('belonging to the rector') were forged.417 In classical Latin, rector was used for all kinds of leaders, from a helmsman of a ship to someone who rides or drives an animal.418 In the Christian Latin of late Antiquity, rector mundi is used for God: 'He who leads the world'.419 In die early Middle Ages, Charlemagne, the Carolingian David, was referred to as rector- 'the leader of the empire'.420 Rector was also used for all kinds of leaders in the administrative sphere, and this context is the one in which it is found most often in medieval
415 But there were also many differences. In Salamanca, for example, there were several rectores until the offices of rector and -^procurator were distinguished from each other (just as we have seen in Paris). In Toulouse and Montpellier, the rectores seem to have been much less powerful than in Bologna or Paris. In Padua, there were originally two rectors (of the Ultramontani and of the Citramontani), but these two rectorates were often held by one person. Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 189. 416 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 190. 417 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 191, n. 40. 418 419
Cf. F O R C ; O L D Cf. B L A I S E , Lex.
(1),
(2).
420 Cf. M . C R I S T I A N I , Le vocabulaire de I'enseignement dans la correspondance d'Alcuin, CIVIC/MA V (1992), p. 24.
RECTOR
125
Latin. A rector provinciae, for example, is a duke; the rector palatii is the major-domo, or some other leading court official; the rectores ecclesiarum are those in charge of churches (bishops, abbots); managers of hospices, governors of cities, magistrates: all these are called rectores.421 In the context of corporate associations such as guilds one finds the meaning of rector which comes closest to the one found in the university context. Here rector is used for the person at the top of the hierarchy, who held the power over the entire corporate organisation. The specific technical sense of 'head of a university' or 'head of a -^-natid (both corporate organisations) seems to have developed from the use of the term in this corporate sphere.422 Rector was, however, also used, in Antiquity and in the Middle Ages, in the sense of preceptor or tutor. An example of the term used in this sense is the rector scolarum, the teacher or -^professor regens at a medieval school.
421 Cf. NlERM. (1), (2- 3 ), (5-7), (12), (13), (14). 422 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 193-194.
126
rotulus, rotula The medieval meaning of the term rotulus is 'roll' or 'scroll'. Consequently, it comes to refer to any kind of text which is kept in the form of a scroll, such as letters, commemorative lists, charters and documents. It occurs very often, unsurprisingly, in an administrative context, and is used for all kinds of texts and documents written on single leaves and kept in archives as scrolls.423 In the narrower context of the universities, rotulus (or rotula) took on several specific, technical meanings.424 In English sources the term is used as a synonym of —*matricula, register, in this case of students taking a particular course. In fourteenth-century Italy rotuli is used for lists of masters and of courses. A set term which acquires a specific technical meaning is rotuli nominandorum: these are lists of names of students (from universities or other institutions) recommended for papal benifices, which were sent regularly (most often annually) to the court of Rome. Rotulus is also used in another fixed expression: from the thirteenth century the office of lator rotuli is installed at the College of the Sorbonne. This office was always held by the -^prior of the college, one of whose many responsibilities was to keep lists of the general and financial obligations of each member.425
423 O . G U Y O T J E A N N I N , Le vocabuUire de la diplomatique en latin medieval, CLVICLMA IV (1991), esp. p. 131. Guyotjeannin has a list of derivatives: irrotulare, irrotulamentum, contrarotulatio, contrarotulator, contrarotulatum. 424 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 112-118. In her treatment of the term in a university context, she includes a census of the first attestations in the printed sources, pp. 114-115. 425 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 115; O . W E I J E R S , Le vocabulaire du college de Sorbonne, CWICIMA VI (1993), esp. pp. 13, 20-21. These lists were read out loud by the procuratores minores. At the College of the Sorbonne, rotulus is also used for lists of the titles of the -^quaestiones (Cat. I l l ) that will be disputed during a given academic year.
ROTULUS, ROTULA
127
In classical and late-classical Latin the term exists as a diminutive of rota, 'wheel'.426 In medieval Latin, rotulus becomes the most current form427 and has the meaning of'a (parchment) scroll upon which a text is written', or, by extension, 'a text written on a scroll'.428 The contents of a scroll can, of course, vary widely, from letters to lists of the dead, from registers of beneficiaries to documents bearing on legal proceedings. Often, however, these scrolls contained lists or registers, and the specific use of the term in a university context, as found in the set expressions rotuli nominandorum and lator rotuli, is completely in accordance with this meaning.
426 Cf. F O R C ; BLAISE, Lex.
427 Other forms are rotella, rollus, rolla ( O . W E I T E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 117). F. D O L B E A U , Noms des livres, CFVICTMA I I (1989), esp. pp. 82-83, notes that rotulus becomes the usual term for scroll instead of the classical word -^volumen (Cat. I I ) . In the Carolingian period the shifting of the terms is commented upon by Gottschalk of Orbais, who says that just as —>volumen is derived from volvere, die more modern term rotulus is derived from roto (ppusc. gmmrn. I, 59). The precise origin of the shift from one term to the orlier is, however — according to Dolbeau — unknown to us. 428 Cf. NIERM.
128
sc(h)ola In the world of medieval education, the word sc(h)ola is the most common term referring to the room or building in which teaching actually took place. At the same time - as in the modern use of the word 'school' — no clear terminological distinction was made between the physical schoolbuilding or classroom and the activity that took place in it. The whole of the 'school': the building, master(s), students and teaching, can thus be indicated by the word scola.429 There are many set expressions for different types of schools. For example, schools attached to monasteries were called scolae monasticae or claustrales,430 those attached to (cathedral) chapters scolae canonicae. Charlemagne proclaimed that scolae publicae were to be set up throughout the Carolingian empire.431 The expression scolae lectorum was used for schools, often attached to a cathedral, where one could learn to read and write and studied the Bible. The term scolae scribendi was sometimes used for workshops of copyists, were a master taught the art of fine writing.432 In the thirteenth century, by which time the number of educational institutions had grown considerably and a very diverse range of schools had developed, the term scola, without further specification, was generally used for the lowest form of education: the village schools in which one could learn how to read and write.
429 See also O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 7,43-44,139, 296-298. O . Weijers does not treat the term separately, but she does treat the opposition of scola versus -^studium. 430 These were especially meant for oblates. Cf. M . B . D E J O N G , In Samuel's Image (1996), esp. pp. 228-245. 431 Cf. P. R I C H E , Ecoles et enseignement dans le Haut Moyen Age (repr. 1989), pp. 76-79; M . M . H I L D E B R A N D T , The External School in Carolingian Society (1992). 432 See, for example, F.P.W. S O E T E R M E E R , La terminologie de la librairie a Bologne, CIVICIMA I (1988), p. 94. These workshops were usually called —*stationes> but the expression scola scribendi is also used. Another set expression with the term scola is scolas regere or exercere, which signified 'to run a school', and which was also used for the term -^studium (studia regere). From the use of the word -^regere (Cat. I l l ) in this expression the absolute use of —>regere in the sense of'to teach' developed around 1215-1220. Cf. O. W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 44, 296-298.
SC(H)OLA
129
When scola was used for the physical room or building in which the master taught his students,433 scolae was sometimes used for a complex of several schools, or for an institution of (higher) education that included several schools. When scola and —>studium were used in contrast, however, the use of scola was restricted to the building, and -^studium was used for the organised teaching establishment as a whole. The university, for example, consisted of several scolae, but the university itself was referred to as -^studium or ->universitas, not scola(e).434 The term also occurs in the context of the university colleges, which in the course of the fourteenth century came more and more to function as full educational institutions.435 In the fifteenth-century sources of the College de Sorbonne, for example, expressions such as magne scole, parve scole and nove scole are used. In these schools members of the college {—tsocii) were taught, but also external students, who were called —> 436 scola: res.
In Antiquity, the word scola (from the Greek o%oX.f|, 'leisure')4 in many meanings. First, the word was used in the sense of 'a place or establishment' in which leisure activities took place.438 Thus the word was
433 See for examples of the use of the term in this sense in the context of the University of Prague, F. S M A I I E L , Scholae, Collegia et Bursae Universitatis Pmgensis, CIVICIMA V I (1993), pp. 125-126. 434 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 7, 43; cf. —tstudium. 435 The teaching of the courses of especially the Faculties of Arts and Theology were increasingly the preserve of the colleges, and they were often even taught within the walls of the colleges. The terms scola andpdeddgogium (cf. —>p(a)edagogus), which appear more frequently in the sources of the colleges from the fourteenth century onwards, bear witness to this change of location. Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Le vocabulaire du College de Sorbonne, CTVJCIMA V I , pp. 21-22; S. L U S I G N A N , L'enseignement des arts dans les collegesparisiens au MoyenAge (1997), pp. 43-54. 436 Ibid. 437 Xxo^f| means 'leisure, free time', but also 'the way in which leisure is employed,' esp. 'learned disputation'. From there the meanings of'a group of people who are taught die art of disputing' and 'school' (that is, the place in which die teaching takes place) developed. (Cf. LSJ) 438 See also the usage of the word in late-antique Christian and medieval texrs for the communal dormitories in monasteries; FORC. (IV); N I E R M . (IT); BLAISE, Lex. (3).
130
SC(H)OLA
used for open areas with benches for the public, where ritual, ceremonial or recreational meetings happened.439 The most common usage of the term, however, was for a place or establishment in which a teacher expounded his views, a school,440 and, metonymically, for the subjects taught in the school or the group of students taught by the teacher.441 In the Middle Ages, the word was basically used in two senses: a place or establishment where people met for scholarly, ceremonial or recreational purposes —from this usage stems the meaning of 'school' as an educational entity —, and a group of people engaging in the same activity. Thus the royal or imperial guard was called the schola palatina, a choir a schola cantorum;^2 the entourage of a bishop or of the pope was called schola, and so was a craft guild, a group of soldiers, or a company of poor people connected with a certain church, etc.443
439 F O R C . (4-5); O L D (4a-c); e.g. scholae bestiarum were amphitheatres where shows with wild animals were staged. 440 F O R C .
(1);
OLD
(2).
441 F O R C . (2); O L D (la-b). Also: the group of followers of the particular teacher or system of teaching. F O R C . (3); O L D (3).
442 In this particular expression, however, the two aspects of the word, 'school' and 'group' may both be present, for children were taught chant in scholae cantorum. 443
Cf.
NIERM.
and B L A I S E ,
Lex.
131
sc(h)olaris In the Middle Ages, several terms for students or pupils were in use, each with its own set of connotations or specific meanings. The four main terms that occur in the sources of schools and universities are scolaris, -^discipulus, -^studens and —>socius.'m Scolaris (or scholaris) is both the most common and the most ambiguous of the four. It is used in two general senses: 'a student or pupil' and 'one who belongs to the school community', a 'scholar', so to speak.445 Both meanings are widely used. The term is used both as an adjective, in expressions such as disciplina scolaris, magister scolaris, clericus scolaris, etc., and as a substantive, for example in magister scolarium or pauperes scolares.44(>
The ambiguity of the term is caused mainly by its second meaning, 'someone associated with a school', for in this sense the term can refer either to a master or a student.447 To complicate matters further: masters
444 For a full treatment see O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 168-172. 445 Cf. N I E R M . (3-4); B L A I S E , Lex. (1-2).
446 The latter expression, pauperes scolares or scolares pauperes, had, in several contexts, a specific meaning. In the context of the cathedral schools and external schools of monasteries, for example, it was used for the group of pupils who received a free education. (Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 171.) The use of the expression in this sense was also adopted into the vocabulary of the university, or, more specifically, of college life, where pauperes scolares or studentespauperes (or, also, just pauperi) received scholarships to pursue their studies. In the sources of Merton College at the close of the Middle Ages, the fellows of the college (socii) sometimes invited students (pauperes scolares) to study with them, perhaps they even tutored them. These students remained, however, unofficial residents of the college. (Cf. J . M . F L E T C H E R , The Vocabulary of Administration and Teaching at Merton College, Oxford, CIVICIMAYl (1993), pp. 48-49.) 447 Note that the word -^sc(h)ola is equally ambiguous: it can refer to a school, but also to a different kind of group of people or associated place. Thus, the term scolares is used in Carolingian sources to refer to the guard of the Carolingian court (the scolares of the so-called scola palatina, the group of armed men at the royal palace), or to the group of young men who were part of the entourage around the Carolingian prince. Even in Carolingian sources, however, scolaris or also scolarius was the most common term used to refer to students or pupils. (Cf. P. R I C H E , Le vocabulaire des ecoles carolingiennes, CTVJCIMA V (1992), pp. 33, 39.) Or, in yet another context, scolares may refer to copyists, who were part of the so-called scola scribendi, as in the sources of the book trade in medieval Bologna. (Cf. F.RW. S O E T E R M E E R , La terminologie de la librairie a Bologne, C / W C / A M I (1988), p. 94.)
132
SC(H)OLARIS
of Arts were often students at the higher Faculties of Theology, Law, or Medicine. The ambiguity is lifted, of course, when -^magistri and scolares are mentioned in the same sentence or passage to indicate the two categories: masters and students. Furthermore, the use of the term seems most ambiguous in the sources of the University of Paris, whereas in Bologna, for example, scolaris generally refers to students only.448 A further connotation which may be observed in certain contexts is that of 'undergraduate' — a student who had not yet obtained a bachelor's degree. Thus the terms scolares and -^clerici were used in the fifteenthcentury sources of the College de Sorbonne for students who had not yet obtained a degree.449 In sources of the Faculties of Law of the Iberian Peninsula, it is applied to a category of scholars below that of the b calarii.450 In Antiquity and late Antiquity, the word sc(h)olaris existed only as an adjective, and was rarely used.451 It was only in the Middle Ages that the word flourished and developed the meanings described above.
448 Other contexts in which the term occurs for students are treated in several articles from the C7V7CZM4-series. For example, on the urban schools of the twelfth and thirteenth century, see C . V U L L I E Z , Le vocabulaire des ecoles urbaines des XII' et XIII' siecles, CIVICIMA V (1992), pp. 94-101: scolaris is the most common term for student, used alongside less common words such as -^discipulus, auditor, puer and -^socius. See also C . FROVA, Le scuole municipdli all'epocd delle universitit, CIVICIMA V (1992), p. 185: she lists scolaris as the more modern word for student, which gradually replaced the old word -^discipulus. See also J . V E R G E R , , 'Nova et 'vetera' dans le vocabulaire des premiers siatuts et privileges, CIVICIMA V (1992), p. 196, who views the pairs -^magistri et scolares and (doctores, professores) regentes (cf. —>regere Cat. I l l ) et -^studentes as 'old' and 'new' (that is, pre-university and university) vocabulary. A n d see, finally, M . - H . J U L L I E N D E P O M M E R O L , Le vocabulaire des colleges dans le midi de la France, CIVICIMA VI (1993), pp. 33-34, who lists the words scolares, —>studentes and collegiati (see also -^socius) for students at the colleges of southern France. 449 See on this O . W E I J E R S , Le vocabulaire du College de Sorbonne, CIVICIMA V I (1993), pp. 12-15. 450 See A . G A R C I A Y G A R C I A , La terminologia en las Facultades Juridicas Ibericas, CIVICIMA I (1988), p. 69. 451 Cf. F O R C ; O L D : 'used in school'. Note, however, that the medieval meaning of scolaris is very similar to the meaning of the classical word —tscholastkus: 'one who is associated with a school of rhetoric (as student or teacher)'; 'one who studies, a scholar' (cf. O L D , under scholasticus). See also B L A I S E , Diet., who mentions one example for the Christian authors of late Antiquity of a substantively used scolaris in die meaning of 'singer' (i.e., of Gregorian chant).
133
sc(h)olasticus, (magister sc(h)olarum) The adjective scolasticus {scholasticus), 'pertaining to a school', was used throughout the Middle Ages as a substantive to refer to someone who belonged to the world of letters: a 'schoolman', a teacher or a student, but also a scholar in the sense of a learned or cultivated man.452 In the eleventh and twelfth centuries, the term began to be used for a specific function in the world of education: masters at the head of monastic or cathedral schools were called scolastici or magistri scolarum.453 Their function was twofold: on the one hand they taught their students, assisted by teaching staff, on the other hand they were the administrators of their schools. In the course of the twelfth century, however, die numbers of students and teaching staff at cathedral schools grew considerably, which led to a situation in which the function of the scolasticus or magister scolarum became more and more administrative in nature. This meant that the functions of scolasticus and —^cancellarius became very similar, and the two offices were sometimes united in one person. In general the following trend can be recognised over the course of the thirteenth century. In the university cities, the -^cancellarius, that is, the secretary of the cathedral chapters, gradually replaced the scolasticus. The tasks of the -^cancellarii were manifold, and they were very powerful: the right of granting the —>licentia docendi, which had been one of the responsibilities of the scolastici, now rested exclusively with the -^cancellarii, and they acted as judges in spiritual or scholarly matters. In episcopal cities without universities, on the other hand, the scolasticus (or magister scolarum) remained the head of a cathedral school.
452 See also O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 46, 139, 194-195, 199. 453 Other terms for headmasters or school principals are, for example, caput scole, capiscol, archiscola, (magister) -^sc(h)olaris, etc. See also the article under —Hnagister. Note that originally the head of a cathedral school was the bishop himself. Soon, however, it became usual practice to appoint a scolasticus or magister scolarum for this task.
134
SC(H)OLASTICUS, (MAGISTER SC(H)OLARUM)
There are, of course, exceptions to this generalisation. In Salamanca, for example, where the University fell under the authority of the cathedral, the jurisdiction was in the hands of the scolasticus or magister scolarum, and not of the -^cancellarius. In Orleans, the official called scolasticus actually had a function comparable to that of the -Erector at the English universities. Throughout Antiquity and the Middle Ages, the word scolasticus (or, in classical spelling, scholasticus, derived from the Greek
454 Cf. O L D . Note, for example, that singers who were part of the so-called schola cantorum, were also called scolastici. Cf. B L A I S E , Lex. (2); D u C . 455 Cf. O L D (1); see also F O R C . (2): scholastica (pl.n.), school exercises. Note that the meaning of scolasticus as 'one who has learned how to argue cases' persists into late Antiquity and the Middle Ages; in B I A I S E , Lex., the meanings 'lawyer' or 'assistent to the judge' are listed (2-3), and in N I E R M . the meanings 'learned lawyer' or 'jurist' (2). See also the second meaning listed by D u C . 456 Cf. N I E R M .
(3);
B L A I S E , Lex.
(3);
DuC.
135
s o c i u s , collegiatus
When socius is used in the sense of 'student' in the sources of the medieval universities, it can be interpreted in a twofold manner.457 First, it may refer to the amicable relations between those who studied with the same master or at the same school, or who lived together in the same house. Thus the term is frequently used even in the pre-university period in twelfth-century Bologna, where the master was called -^dominus meus by his students, and the students were called socii mei by their master.458 In university sources, students often use the term to refer to their fellows, who were presumably also their companions or friends. Secondly, it may refer to the official status of'member' of a university, nation, or, most commonly, of a college: a fellow, so to speak, of such a society. At the College de Sorbonne, for example, the term socii was at first only used for the pauperes magistri at the college, that is, those masters of Arts who received a scholarship for their expenses; in this sense, the terms bursarius and beneficiatus (cf. -±bursa) are very similar in meaning to socius. The other inhabitants or 'guests' living in the college building were called hospites. In the course of time, however, when the number of hospites grew and the nature of their stay became more and more permanent, this distinction disappeared; in the fourteenth century all inhabitants of the college were called socii.459 In England, student members of a college were called either -^scolares or socii, although the latter only came into use at the end of the thirteenth century.458 In the fourteenth century
457 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 68-170,172-173, and 265-267. See also other terms for students: -^scolaris, -^studens, -^bursarius. 458 Apart from this early example, the term socius in the sense of 'student, pupil' seems restricted to the world of the university. The only other examples of socius outside the context of the university are provided by C. Vulliez, who lists the term among those used for students in the sources of urban schools. The term is, in this case, best interpreted as 'comrade' or 'fellow student'. C . V U L L I E Z , Le vocabulaire des ecoles urbaines desXIF etXIIF siecles, CLVLC1MA V (1992), pp. 95, 98-101. 459 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 266-267; O . W E I J E R S , Le vocabulaire du College de Sorbonne, CIVICIMA VI (1993), pp. 12-15. 460See, for example, O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 265-266, where she dates the first attestation in the English sources to 1276 (Merton College); and SOUTER, under socius, 'fellow (acad)' c. 1290.
136
SOCIUS, COLLEGIATUS
the expression senior socius was used at University College in Oxford for the head of the college (see also ->custos, 'warden').461 As a synonym for socius, the term collegiatus is attested in the sources of the colleges of southern France: from the late fourteenth century onwards, collegiatus is used instead of or alongside socius.462 Collegiatus is used both as an adjective {scholaris collegiatus) and as a noun. Sometimes the term is used to mark the transition from freshman to fellow: a -^bejaunus purged of the slur of his freshmanship after his first academic year was subsequently called a scholaris collegiatus.463
The basic meaning of socius is 'one who accompanies another', and from this follow its various applications. Thus a socius is a companion or comrade, a colleague, an associate, or a partner in business,464 a partner in matrimony or even in crime: an accomplice.465 Socii were, both in Antiquity and in the Middle Ages, fellows of some kind of association, such as the members of a trading company, allies (in a situation of war),466 the brothers of the ecclesiae toletanae,461 or fellow of an academic college.468 In conclusion: the seed of both meanings of the word which occur in the medieval intellectual context, that is, that of fellow-student or comrade and that of fellow of the university, nation or college, was already present in Antiquity.
461 O. W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 269. 462 Apart from this use, collegiatus was, of course, used in the general meaning of 'belonging or pertaining to a collegiate body'. Thus ecclesia collegiata is a collegiate church, and collegiatd as a noun can refer, for example, to a nun. 463 See M . - H . J U L L I E N D E POMMEROL, Le vocabulaire des colleges dans le midi de la France, CIVICIMA VI (1993), pp. 34-35. The D M L notes the same meaning in English sources from the fifteenth century (University of Oxford, Balliol College): 'c. person attached to a college (acad.)'. 464Cf. O L D (1-3). 465 These last two meanings seem to be post-classical: BLAISE, Diet. 466 Cf. O L D (3-6). 467 Cf. D u C . Note that DuCange also lists uses of socius from the world of shipping: 'shipmaster', 'captain' or 'ship's officer'. Furthermore, he notes the meaning of 'friend', amicus, in the fourteenth century. 468 Cf. SOUTER.
137 S t a t u t u m , statutarius The term statutum and its plural statuta occur frequently in the sources for the history of the universities, since the statutes of the universities are prime sources for this history. The use of the term is not restricted to the universities themselves, but occurs also for the statutes of corporations within the larger body of the university, such as -^facilitates, -^nationes, and -^collegia. It is directly related to the status of the universities, faculties, nations and colleges as corporate bodies, entities, in other words, with a certain amount of legal autonomy. The word, however, does not have a specific meaning within the context of the university. Its usage with relation to the organisation of ecclesiastical or civil life is similar. From the early history of the universities onwards statutum or statuta is used for the collection of decrees of the corporate body of masters and/or students, just as it was used, in the early Middle Ages, for the collection of decrees of a synod, king, pope, etc. In fourteenth-century Italy, the office of statutarius (or compositor statutorum) was established, probably following the practice of civil administration. In Bologna, for example, a committee of eight statutarii (four from the Citmmontani and four from the Ultramontani) revised the statutes of the university every ten years.469 In classical Latin, the term statutum, derived from the participle of the verb statuo,*10 was occasionally used in the meaning of 'ordinance', 'decree'.471 In the Christian period, statuta was used for the decrees of ecclesiastical councils or synods, especially in expressions such as statuta con-
469 See on this term O . W E I J F . R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 213-214. The term is attested from the thirteenth century onwards, in the meaning of'officer administering municipal regulations', cf. N I E R M . ; D U C . 470 See on the many meanings of statuo the O L D . Its basic meaning is 'to make something stand upright', 'to raise or set up' ( O L D 1), but one of its applications is also 'to establish by authority', 'to decree' ( O L D 9). 471 Cf. FORC; OLD.
138
STATUTUM, STATUTARIUS
ciliorum or concilii, statuta synodi, statuta decretalia, etc.472 Furthermore, it was used for statutory regulations of emperors, kings or popes.473 It was only in the thirteenth century that statutum or statuta was used in the context of the organisation of cities {statuta civitatis) or other corporations, such as unions of merchants, medical doctors or jurists, ecclesiastical institutions, fraternities, or, in the present case, associations of professors and students.474 In all of these contexts, the term, both singular and plural, referred to the collection of regulations and decrees pertaining to the members of the corporation.
472 See B L A I S E , Diet. (2); G . K O B L E R , 'Statuten', in: Lexikon des Mittelalters 8, col. 7072473 Ibid.. See also N I E R M . ( I ) .
474 Cf. ibid..
139
studens, studere From the thirteenth century onwards the word studens was used widely, both as an adjective and as a substantive, to refer to students.475 Studentes (the term almost always occurs in the plural) is originally a term used for students in general, that is, anyone who is studying at a certain university.476 Around the turn of the thirteenth century, however, the term is sometimes used in opposition to -^sc(h)olares; in this case studentes are those who have already obtained a degree, whereas -^>sc(h)olares are the less advanced students.477 The verb studere, of which studens is the present participle, is common even before the period of the university to describe the act of study.478 In the earlier Middle Ages, the term is often specified by a dative designating the field of study: studere sacre pagine, for example. Or it is further defined by a clause starting with in: studere in scientiis, for example. The absolute use of the verb was common in the ancient and Christian periods, but seems to have fallen into disuse in the early Middle Ages. The reappearance of the verb in the sense of 'to study at a certain school or university', 'to be a student' seems to be related to the development of the universities, and becomes especially widespread in the tliirteenth-century context of the universities and Mendicant schools.479 Apart from this specific use, however, the general meaning of the term also continued. Thus studere could be used to refer to the act of studying
475 See also O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 167-168,172. 476 Note that the use of the term appears to be stimulated by the development of the universities. J. Verger argued that the old pair -^magistri et -^scolares (or: -^discipuli, pueri, iuvenes) seems to have been replaced by the modern (doctores, professores) regentes (cf. —>regere in Cat. I l l ) et studentes in the time of the universities. ( J . V E R G E R , 'Nova et 'veterd dans le vocabulaire des premiers statuts et privileges, CF/ICIMA V (1992), p. 196.) See for the use of die term in the context of the colleges of southern France, M . - H . J U L L I E N D E P O M M E R O L , Le vocabulaire des colleges dans le midi de la France, CIVJCIMA V I (1993), PP- 33-34477 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 168. 478 For a fuller treatment of the term see O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 287-288, 290-291. 479 A closely related term is —¥audire (Cat. I I I ) .
140
STUDENS, STUDERE
a certain text, or to carry out research. Its general meaning of 'to act as a scholar' can even be applied to teachers and their activities; die verb can be used in the meaning of'to teach'.480 One can be brief on the semantic development of studens, since -as far as we know- it is first attested as a substantive in 1221, in a letter from Pope Honorius I I I concerning the University of Paris.481 Studere is widely used in Antiquity and in die Middle Ages. Its primary meaning is 'to devote or apply oneself to a certain task',482 but, both in Antiquity and in the Latin of the Christian authors, it was also used in the sense of'to apply oneself to one's books', 'to study'. This meaning seems to have fallen into disuse in the early Middle Ages, and resurfaces only in the twelfth century.483
480 See O . W E I J E R S , Tirminologie des universites (1987), pp. 287 and 291, where she lists some examples of this usage. 481 See, however, B L A I S E , Diet., where one example is given of a substantively used studentes from P S . - A U G U S T I N E , Quaestiones veteris et novi testamenti, YLJ, 10. The word has here the meaning of'fanatics of a religious cult'. 482 Cf. FORC; OLD (i).
483 Note that in late Antiquity and in the earlier Middle Ages the term was widely used in the sense of'to treat a patient'; cf. B I A I S E , Diet, (4); D u C ; N I E R M . ( I ) . Furthermore it was used in meanings such as 'to administrate', or 'to occupy oneself with' ( N I E R M . (2); B L A I S E , Lex), and 'to take care of, to look after' ( N I E R M . (3)).
141
studium, studium generale Studium was used, both in Antiquity and in die Middle Ages, for die zeal with which one devoted oneself to something, especially die study of letters.484 Furthermore, in the Middle Ages studium was used commonly, alongside —>sc(h)ola(e), as a term for a school. It differs from ->sc(h)ola, however, in that it was almost never used —certainly before the fourteenth century— to refer to the physical school, die building or room in which the teaching took place, but rather to the school as a learned institution.485 Since studium itself was such a fundamental and general term, many expressions were in use to distinguish between the different kinds of schools. Their number grew particularly in the thirteenth and fourteenth centuries.486 In the educational system of the Mendicant orders (especially the Dominicans) a strict hierarchy of schools or studia was set up.487 First
484 For medieval examples of the use of the term in this sense see several expressions noted in articles of the CIVICIMA-stries: studia exteriom for the advanced study of the liberal arts (P. R I C H E , Le vocabulaire des ecoles carolingiennes, CIVICIMA V (1992), p. 40); studium sapientiae for philosophy ( D . L U S C O M B E , Philosophy and Philosophers in the Schools of the Twelfth Century, CIVTCIMA V (1992), p. 74); studium sacrae scripturae for theology ( G . R . EVANS, Theology: The Vocabulary of Teaching and Research 1300-1600, CMCIMAVUl (1995), p. 120). 485 For the locus of education -^schola was generally used. On the dichotomy between the two see O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 7, 43-44. The only expression occurring (though not very often) before 1300 in which -^schola and studium seem to be perfectly synonymous is studium regere, which has a parallel in scholas regere — 'to run a school' (see also ->regere in Cat. I I I ) . 486 For the use of die term in urban schools see C . V U L L I E Z , Le vocabulaire des ecoles urbaines des XII' et XIII' siecles, CIVICIMA V (1992), pp. 92-93, 98-101. On the terminology of individual schools in other contexts see: E . PANELLA, // 'lector romanae curiae', CIVICIMA V (1992), p. 130 (the expression studium romanae curae for the papal court school); A . G A R C I A Y G A R C I A , Vocabulario de las escuelas en la Peninsula Iberica, CIVICIMA V (1992), p. 176 (the expressions studia generalia iuris canonici, liberalium artium or theologiae). 487 See on this A . M A I E R U , University Training in Medieval Europe (1994), esp. pp. 6-10; I D . , Figure di docenti nelle scuole domenicane, CIVICIMA IX (1999), pp. 47-80; M . M .
1 42
STUDIUM, STUDIUM GENERALE
of all, novices were educated in the local conventual schools, which were called plainly studia: these were, so to speak, the 'primary schools' of the order. Promising students were subsequently enrolled in what were deceptively referred to as studia artium, also known as studia logicalia or in logicalibus; these schools did not (as their name might suggest) offer a propaedeutic training in all the liberal arts, but only in (Aristotelian) logic. More advanced still were the studia natumlium, naturarum or in naturalia, also called studia phibsophiae —where the students were introduced to natural philosophy—, or the so-called studia particulare theologiae (or studia particularia), in which the Sententiae and, later, the Summae theologiae were, studied (cf. -^sententia, summa in Cat. I I I ) . Dominican friars who were destined to become lecturers were sent to the order's theology schools, which were called studia provincialia or provincial schools. There were four of these, one for each province of the order: Lombardy, Provence, Theutonia and Anglia. The expression studia generalia was also used for these schools,488 to stress that i) they were founded on the authority of the Chapter General, and 2) students from the entire province were accepted. Furthermore, they were referred to by expressions such as studia sollemnia or studia generate theologiae, to emphasise the fact that they were theology schools.489 At the top of the Dominican educational hierarchy, finally, stood the famous school of St.-Jacques in Paris.490
M U L C H A H E Y , Dominican Educational Vocabulary, CfWCIMA I X (1999), pp. 90-91, 106-110; E A D . , 'First the Bow is Bent in Study. Dominican Education before 1350 (1998), esp. Part Two: 'The Institutional Face of Dominican Education. The Schools and Their Curricula'. 488 It is important not to confuse these Dominican studia generalia with the studia generalia of the universities (see studium generale below). Perhaps to facilitate the clear distinction between the two the Mendicant 'general schools' were also called studium generale provinciae, cf. A . M A I E R U , Figure di docenti nelle scuole domenicane, CFVJC1MA IX (1999), pp. 71-73. 489 On tiie expression studium generale theologiae (school of general theology-that is, including exegesis-versus studium particular theologiae) seeM.M. M U L C H A H E Y , Dominican Educational Vocabulary, CF/ICIMA IX (1999), p. 109. 490 The interpretation of the terms used in the Mendicant educational system is complicated by the strong resemblance between Mendicant studia and university colleges. While the statutes of Mendicant studia used, in part, the same terminology as the university colleges, their nature differed fundamentally. See on this M . M . M U L C H A H E Y , Dominican Educational Vocabulary, CIVICIMA IX (1999), pp. 89-106.
STUDIUM, STUDIUM GENERALE
143
In addition, the Dominicans founded schools in languages {studia arabica, studia ebraica, studia linguarum) at the edges of the Christian empire or in the cities where there were contacts with Arabs and Jews (for example in Tunis, Toledo and Saragoza).491 For the medieval university, the term studium generate was used widely from the beginning of the thirteenth century, and from the 1240s it also occurs in official university documents.492 The meaning of the adjective generate is a much-discussed issue.493 In essence, its implication seems to be threefold. First, it may refer to its enrolment policy: students from any province or nation were accepted. Secondly, it may refer to the nature of its curriculum, which is universal and international in character. Thirdly, and perhaps most importantly, it may refer to the character of its foundation, which was instigated or supported by a generally accepted authority, that is, the pope or the emperor. This last aspect is closely related to the privilege, bestowed on some studia generalia by the pope or the emperor, of granting -^licentiae ubique docendi.*9* Thus, at the end of the thirteenth century, the expression studium generale had fully developed into a technical term, in which four different aspects were implied: the school in question was 1) an institution of higher education; 2) open to students from all regions;
491 See A . M A I E R U , Figure di docenti nelle scuole domenkane, CWICIMA I X (1999), pp. 59-62. For many more expressions with studium see the index of his University Training in Medieval Europe (T994), pp. 186-187. 492 For a full treatment of this expression see O . W E I J F . R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 34-45. Pope Innocent IV (1243-1254) was the first to use studium generale in official documents (ibid., p. 41). In the earliest decades of the universities, they were sometimes referred to as studia. Instead of generale, the adjectives commune or universal* are also found occasionally. See also the much more recent article by J . M I E T H K E , Universitas und Studium (1999). 493 See for a historical overview of the discussion O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 34-38. 494 Ihere were, however, studia generalia that were universally acknowledged before their official recognition by pope or emperor. For these, the expression studia generalia ex consuetudine (versus studia generalia ex privilegio) was created by fourteenth-century jurists. In Spain the king deemed himself important enough to found studia generalia without consent of the pope; these royal studia generalia (called studia generalia respectu regni in legal documents) consequently lacked the right to grant -^lkentiae ubique docendi.
144
STUDIUM, STUDIUM GENERALE
and 3) officially acknowledged by emperor or pope; and 4) (accordingly) privileged to grant -^licentiae ubique docendi. The semantic development of studium is not particularly complex. Its basic meaning, 'zeal' or 'ardour', remained in use throughout Antiquity and the Middle Ages.495 The derived meaning of intellectual activity or study already existed in Antiquity and was used throughout the Middle Ages.496 The sense of 'school' or 'learned institution', however, is a medieval innovation. It is first attested in the twelfth century and becomes particularly common from the thirteenth century onwards.497
495 Cf. F O R C . (i); O L D (1). See the expression ad studium in medieval Latin, which means 'studious' or 'zealous': D u C ; B L A I S E , Lex. (1). 496 Cf. F O R C . (iii); O L D (7).
497 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 43-44. See also D u C ; N I E R M . (1-2);
BLAISE, L { $
145
taxatio, taxare, taxator In the context of the medieval colleges and student houses, the verb taxare was used for the annual assessment of the standard price for a student's board and lodging in the so-called —>hospitia or student houses.498 The practice of a regulated assessment seems to be as old as the universities themselves; as early as in the second decade of the thirteenth century the privilege of taxatio was confirmed by legate in Oxford and Paris. The taxatio was carried out by a board of taxatores, representatives of both city and university (equally distributed, usually two of each). The usage of the term in the sense of 'to decide on a standard price' is closely related to its usage in a different context: in contracts of commissioners and copyists the expression taxatio quatern(i)orum or peciarum occurs with reference to the assessment of the number of -^quaterniones (Cat. II) or -^peciae (Cat. II) the exemplar contained, and thus an estimate of the price of the copy. The word taxatio also occurs in the context of fixing a standard price for borrowing -^peciae.499 The fixing of such standard amounts, weights, or prices was generally referred to by the terms taxare or taxatio. Thus, for example, taxatio was used in the sources of the College de Sorbonne for the agreement of a standard quantity of wine;500 and the taxatores of the University of Cambridge were responsible not only for fixing the standard rent, but also for weights and standard measures.501 Already in Antiquity taxare and taxatio were used in the sense of 'to estimate the worth of something', and also in the more general sense of'to assess'.502 In the Latin of the Christian authors of late Antiquity, taxare
498 For a fuller description of these terms see O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 78-80, 87-88. 499 See -^pecia (Cat. II); F.RW. S O E T E R M E E R , La terminologie de la librairie a Bologne, CTVICIMA I (1988), p. 92; I D . , Utrumque ius inpeciis (1002), esp. Chapter 4. 500 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p.79 n.16. 501 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 79. 502 Cf. F O R C . (3); O L D (2-3).
146
TAXATIO, TAXARE, TAXATOR
was also used for 'to judge', or 'to decide'.503 In the Middle Ages, the previous senses remained in use, and the terms also developed new usages, such as 'to allot', or 'to mention' (as in the expression, for example, quas supra taxavi — 'which I mentioned above').504 The words were first used for the assessment of a standard rent in the twelfth century. Although taxator did exist in classical Latin,505 in the Middle Ages it was only used after the introduction of the taxatio-system at the univer-
503 B L A I S E , Diet., (2-3). 504 Cf. N I E R M . (1-9) - also: 'to cite', 'to reckon among", 'to designate as', 'to bid', 'to fine', etc. 505 Cf. O L D . 506 O. W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 87; she found the term attested in the sources of the universities from 1237 onwards.
147
universitas The modern meaning of 'university' has its origins in the thirteenth century.507 In addition to the general meaning of universitas, 'whole' or 'entirety', the term was used, even before the Middle Ages, to denote certain groups of people, associations or collectives. At the beginning of the thirteenth century the term universitas was used accordingly in official documents as a legal term for the body of teachers and/or students of the newly founded universities {universitas magistrorum et scolarium, universitas scolarium, universitas doctorum, etc.).508 In the second half of the thirteenth century the term also occurs in non-official documents such as chronicles and sermons, where it is used without explicative genetives or adjectives in the sense of 'university' — the meaning of the term has then developed from 'corporate body of teachers and/or students' to 'school where higher education is provided', and is interchangeable with -^studium generate.509 In the fifteenth century universitas is even used to refer to the university buildings, the actual schools, and has exactly the same meaning as our modern word 'university', 'universite', 'Universitat', etc. The origin of the use of universitas for the medieval university is thus found in the legal use of the term in the sense of 'corporate body of
507 The term is treated in O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 15-26. For the discussion of the semantic development of the term, she followed P. M I C H A U D Q U A N T I N , Universitas. Expressions du mouvement communautaire dans le moyen dge latin
(!97o), pp. 11-57- See also the more recent article by J . M I E T H K E , Universitas undStudium () 508 For an overview of the first attestations of the term per country see O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 18-22. See also A . M A I E R U , La terminologie de I'universite de Bologne de medecine et des arts, C1VICIMA V (1992), p. 145: he mentions that the term —>facultas can also be used in the sense of'corporate body of teachers', and is thus, in some contexts, interchangeable with universitas. 509 See O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 15-16, 21-23 a n d 25, where the two terms are compared. See also J M I E T H K E , Universitas undStudium (1999).
148
UNIVERSITAS
persons'.510 It was first used in the context of education at the end of the twelfth century in Bologna511 for the -^nationes, associations of students from the same region, and at the beginning of the thirteenth century it was used for the association of masters at the university of Paris.512 Of the cluster of terms used for corporate associations, such as conventus, —> collegium, communio, consortium, societas, universitas was the only one to be used in an absolute way for the institution.513 Its popularity grew very rapidly from the thirteenth century onwards, perhaps because of its generality on the one hand and its legal specificity on the other. The term is never found for educational institutions other than the university.514
510 As a corporate entity, the university was entitled to determine its statutes, to appoint personnel (librarians, scribes or copyists, beadles, messengers, etc.), it had certain p r i v i leges a n d was protected by the authorities. 511 T h e r e are several theories about the earliest phases of the universitas of B o l o g n a . T h e U n i v e r s i t y of B o l o g n a was a university governed by associations of students (the so-called —>nationes), w h o were responsible for the a p p o i n t m e n t of professors. In its earliest stages, the universitas was either formed w h e n the -^nationes j o i n e d forces, or w h e n the societates out of w h i c h the -^nationes later developed d i d so. E i t h e r way, at the beginning of the thirteenth century, B o l o g n a h a d t w o universities, b o t h of L a w : o n e for the Citramontani (the students from the Italian peninsula), a n d die other for die Ultramontani (those f r o m the other side o f the A l p s ) . C f . O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 17-18. 512 In Paris, the universitas was not f o r m e d by the association of students (as in B o l o g n a ) , but by the association of masters, w h o took it u p o n themselves to protect their o w n rights a n d those of the students. It should be noted, however, that the t w o types of universities ( B o l o g n a a n d Paris) were not as far apart as it m a y seem. In Paris, it was m a i n l y the masters of A r t s w h o formed a corporate body, a n d they were often students at the higher faculties ( o f Theology, L a w o r M e d i c i n e ) . I n die early days o f the universities the average age of the members of the universitates of B o l o g n a a n d Paris was roughly the same. C f . O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 16-17. 513 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 26. See also J . V E R G E R , 'Nova et 'veterd dans le vocabulaire des premiers statuts et privileges, CWICIMA V (1992), p. 201. 514 This is established, inter alia, in several articles of the CIVICIMA-scvies, in which the terminology of sources from non-university schools is scrutinized: C . V U L L I E Z , Le vocabulaire des ecoles urbaines des XII' et XIII' siecles, CIVICIMAV (1992), p. 96; G . B A R O N E , Les convents des Mendiants, des colleges de'guise's?, CIVICIMA V I (1993), p. 156; J . V E R G E R , Conclusion, CIVICIMAWl (1993), p. 176.
UNIVERSITAS
149
Universitas, derived from universus, had several meanings in Antiquity.515 It is not common in classical Latin, nor in the Christian Latin of late Antiquity and the early Middle Ages; it only became popular with its application to die medieval universities in the thirteenth century. Its medieval meaning of'corporate body', however, already existed in Antiquity, when it was used to refer to, e.g., the court or state as a corporate body - always accentuating the entirety of the group as opposed to the individual.516 In Christian Latin the term was used to refer to, for example, the whole of Christendom, or the universality of the Church.517 In the middle of the thirteenth century the legal aspect of the term was elaborated by the famous canonists Innocent IV and Cardinal Hostiensis: universitates were to have common interests and goals, and had to be recognized by the authorities. Universitas could be applied to corporate religious associations, associations on the basis of a common place (city or village), or associations within certain professional sectors, such as the associations of masters or students.518 The absolute use of universitas in the sense of 'university' began, as noted, in the course of the thirteenth century. By the fifteenth century, universitas had lost its connotation of 'corporate body' and was simply used for the whole institution: its body of teachers and students, but also the education provided by the teachers and the buildings where the teaching took place.
515 T h e O L D has, for example, 'the sum of things', 'the universe', but also 'a collective unit of property' or 'community'. 516 Cf. F O R C . (esp. 5); O L D (2). 517 Cf. BLAISE (I); NIERM. (I).
518 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universith (1987), p. 24.
Category II
The Vocabulary of the Book and Book Production archivum, c(h)artarium, chartularium armarium, armarius atramentum, encaustum, tincta bibliotheca, bibliothecarius calamus, penna, plumbum c(h)arta, instrumentum, munimentum chirographum codex exemplar, exemplum, exemplator graphium, stilus inventarium, registrum, repertorium, catalogus liber, libellus librarius, librarium, libraria papyrus, pergamenum, membrana pecia (petia), peciarius quaternio, quaternus radere, eradere, rescribere sc(h)eda, sc(h)edula, protocollum scriba, scriptor, notarius, clericus scribere, transcribere scriptorium stationarius, statio tabula cerata taxatio, taxator volumen, tomus
153
archivum, c(h)artarium, chartularium Medieval archives were commonly called archiva, chartaria or chartularia.1 The term archivum refers to the chest or case in which the documents were kept (cf. —*arc(h)a in Cat. I ) , 2 whereas chartarium and chartularium refer to the documents or —>chartae themselves. An archive was often part of the library or treasury, and terms for these concepts, such as -^armarium or thesaurus, can also be used with the meaning of'archive'. On the other hand, chartularium also carried other meanings related to -^charta, such as 'register', 'cartulary' or 'collection of formulae for the writing of charters'.3 The names for the function of archivist reflect the ambivalence of the concept archive. Often the word custos is used to refer to the function: custos thesauri (chartarum), custos litterarum or the Latinised Greek alternative chartophylax.A The latter two expressions, however, also occur in the meaning of 'librarian' (cf. -^librarius). The alternative terms archiclavus or archiclaverius reveal that the keeper of the archive was often the keeper of the key to the place where the documents (and sometimes also the books) were kept. Other medieval Latin terms for archivists are archiverius and chartarius (or, alternatively, chartularius).5 Note, however, that chartarius (or chartularius) was also used in its original meaning, that
1 On this, see O. GUYOTJEANNIN, Le vocabulaire de U diplomatique en latin medieval, CP/ICIMA11 (1989), pp. 130-134; A. VERNET, DU 'chanophylax'au 'Librarian, CIVICIMA II (1989), pp. 157,161. 2 The use of archivum in the sense of'place in which the documents were kept' led, in some contexts, to a different meaning of archivum: Flodoard of Reims (ca. 893-966), for example, uses it for 'sacristy' (cf. NIERM. (2)). 3
Cf. N I E R M . (2-3); M W (2); D M L (d).
4 The Greek loan word chartophylacium for 'archive' occurs in the sixth century, and then again in the fifteenth, under the influence of humanism. Cf. NIERM. 5 Cf. O. GUYOTJEANNIN, Le vocabulaire de la diplomatique en latin medieval, CLVICIMA I I (1989), p. 132 n. 52. A. VERNET, DU 'chartophylax au 'Librarian, CIVLCLMA II (1989), pp. 157,161. For the function of archivist-librarian he also notes the terms chartinacius and archiscrinius.
154
ARCHrvuM, C(H)ARTARIUM, C H A R T U L A R I U M
is, maker of, or dealer in, leaves {-^cbartae), that is, papyrus in Antiquity and papyrus, paper, and above all parchment in the Middle Ages.6 Archium or archivum, derived from arc(h)a, chest, already existed in Antiquity, in the meaning of 'repository of public records'.7 In the Middle Ages its meaning broadened to 'a repository of valuable writings and objects', and the term was sometimes also used for a library, treasury, sacristy or reliquary.8 The main meaning, however, remained the same: the place (chest, room, etc.) where records were kept. Chartarium, derived from -^charta or carta (sheet), is a late-antique word which had the same basic meaning: 'repository of records or charters'.9 In the Middle Ages, especially in the thirteenth century, it developed other meanings related to —tcharta, such as 'register', 'cartulary' or 'formulary'.10 The adjective chartularius, derived from chartula (litt. 'small sheet', 'piece of papyrus, parchment or paper') had a wider spectrum of meanings: used as a masculine noun it could refer to an archivist, notary or scribe, but also to a dealer in, or maker of, parchment; as a neuter noun it could refer to an archive or cartulary, but also to a formulary of charters, or to goods transferred to a new owner by means of a charter.11
6 Cf. O L D chartarius ('maker of or dealer in papyrus'), and MW chartarius (2), chartularius (IA2) ('maker of or dealer in parchment'). A chartularius is, furthermore, also used for someone who makes chartulae or charters, i.e. a scribe or notary. Cf. N I E R M . ; DML. Finally, it can also refer to a former slave, set free by means of a chartula, or to a leaseholder (the lease contract being the chartula). Cf. M¥ (IB 1-2).
7 Cf. TLL; OLD. 8 Cf. MW.
9 Cf. TLL; BLAISE, Diet. 10 Cf. MW;DML. 11
Cf. NIERM.; MW; DML.
155
armariUUl, armanus The original meaning of armarium is 'cupboard', a place for keeping arms, clothes, or other objects of value.12 Already in classical Latin it acquired in addition the specific meaning of 'a cupboard holding books', and in the Middle Ages this sense was prevalent.13 The term armarium was, moreover, used more widely to refer to all kinds of depositories for books. In some contexts it has the meaning of'chest or cupboard holding books', in others that of 'lectern',14 or 'niche (where books are kept)', or even 'room', that is, 'library' in the concrete sense of the word.15 In the Middle Ages the word was also often used for the collection of books it-
12 Cf. J.-F. G E N E S T , Le mobilkr des bibliotheques, CIWCIMA I I (1989), pp. 141-149, in which earlier literature on the subject is reviewed. See also W . W A T T E N B A C H , Das Schrifiwesen im Mittelalter (1896), pp. 6T7-619. 13 The word occurs in several forms: in addition to the most common form armarium one finds armaria, armarius, and also almarium. Cf. W . WATTF.NBACH, Das Schrifiwesen im Mittelalter (1896), pp. 617-618. The word also remained in use for cupboards or chests in which other objects were kept. In some sources, for example, armarium commune ('general chest') is used in opposition to armarium ecclesie ('church-chest'), and the objects kept in these chests may be books (general books versus liturgical books), but also other objects (general valuable things versus liturgical objects: garments, reliquaries, etc.) (cf. MW ( I C ) ; the modern German word 'Almerei' for sacristy attests to this specific usage). Cf. J . - F . G E N E S T , Le mobilier des bibliotheques, CLVLCIMA I I (1989), p. 144. The word can also be used for 'archives' or 'depository of charters'. Cf. O . G U Y O T J E A N N I N , Le vocabulaire de la diplomatique en latin medieval, CIVICLMA II (1989), p. 133; MW (IB2). 14 Note, however, that in some contexts 'lectern' and 'armarium' are used in opposition to each other. In some libraries, for example, the lecterns held the books attached to chains (—>libri catenati), whereas the cases or shelves housed the unchained books. On this and on the vocabulary of the lectern {ambo, analogium, discus, pluteus, pulpitum, repositorium, bancus, scamnum, stallum, sedile) see J.-F. G E N E S T , Le mobilier des bibliotheques, CIVICIMA II (1989), pp. 146-147,149-154. 15 Such as, for example, in the famous proverb: 'claustrum sine armario quasi castrum sine armentario', 'a monastery without a library (or: bookcase) is like a military camp without an arsenal'. (First attested in a letter dated ca. 1170 from Canon Gottfried of Sainte-Barbe-en-Auge.) Cf. 'WATTENBACH, Das Schrifiwesen im Mittelalter (1896), p. 430.
156
ARMARIUM, ARMARIUS
self. Thus the expression armarium sive libraria is common in fourteenthand fifteenth-century sources.16 The use of the word in this latter sense lay at the base of the term armarius for librarian. In addition to the common form armarius the word armararius was used in the thirteenth century, and armarista in the fourteenth.17 Armarium was originally a place for keeping arms, and later a cupboard, set upright against the wall of a room, in which all kinds of objects could be kept. In Antiquity it was already used in the specific meaning of 'bookcase'.18 In the Middle Ages it became a common word for different kinds of storage systems for books, whether chests, cupboards, lecterns or even rooms.19 The more abstract use of the word for the collection of books kept in such a storage is particularly prominent in fourteenth- and fifteenthcentury sources.20
16 CF. J.-F- GENEST, Le mobilier des bibliotheques, CIVICIMA I I (1989), pp. 147-149. 17 See J.-F. GENEST, Le mobilier des bibliotheques, CIVICIMA I I (1989), p. 148; A. VERNET, DU 'chartophylax au 'Librarian, CIVICIMA I I (1989), p. 157. Armarius is the oldest of the three: see D M L (1); MW (1). 18 Cf. TLL (1, 2); OLD (1). 19 D M L ; M W ( I B ) . 20 See J.-F. G E N E S T , Le mobilier des bibliotheques, CIVICIMA I I (1989), pp. 147-149; see
also MW armaria.
157
atramentum, encaustum, tincta Medieval scribes generally used pen and ink for writing; the quill pen {-^calamus, pennd) was dipped in brown or black ink. This ink was usually made from a blackening material such as soot or gallnut and vitriol, mixed with a binder such as gum or honey, and a thinner such as water, wine or vinegar.21 Both in Antiquity and in the Middle Ages the term atramentum (derived from ater, black) was generally used for ink.22 In the Latin of late Antiquity encaustum (or incaustuni) came into use, which formed the root for our modern word 'ink' (Fr. 'encre', Du. 'inkt'). In the medieval period these two terms were treated as synonyms. Less frequently tincta (or tintd) was used, the basis for the modern German word 'Time'. Different colours of ink were referred to by the names of the colours, but more often by the names of their base material: red ink, for example, was called rubeus (red), but also minium (sulphide of mercury)23 or cinnabaris or cinnabriu-m2"1 (cinnabar [i.e. mercury sulphide], or a kind of resin called Dragon's blood).25
21 On the subject of medieval ink see, among others, W. WATTENBACH, Das Schriftwesen im Mittelalter (1896), pp. 233-244; H . LECLERCQ, 'Encre, encrier', (Dictionnaire d'archiologie chretienne V . i ) ; P. GASNAULT, Les supports et les instruments de I'ecriture, CIV1CIMA I I (1989), pp. 31-32; P. L A D N E R , T i m e , I Westen' (Lexikon des Mittelalters 8, col. 797); M . Z E R D O U N B A T - Y E H O U D A , Les encres noires au moyen age (1983), esp. pp. 143190; C . L I S T and W . B L U M , Buchkunst des Mittelalters (1994), pp. 27-29. 22 In the ancient world the word sepia (cuttle fish) was also used, since the secretion of this fish was also used as ink. Cf. O L D (b). 23 Cf. NG (3). Minium formed the basis of the verb miniare, 'to touch up with red ink", or 'to write or draw in red ink' (cf. N I E R M . ; N G ) . 2 4 Cf. M W (cinnabaris) and D M L (cinnabrium). 25 Note, however, that substance and colour are not properly distinguished in most cases: minium, for example, is used both for the substance yielding a bright red pigment, and for the colour red. (Cf. O L D (a and c).) O n red ink see further W . "WATTENBACH, Das Schriftwesen im Mittelalter (1896), pp. 244-151; on 'GoldschrifV see ibid. pp. 251-261. On the materials used for making colours see C . L I S T and W. B L U M , Buchkunst des Mittelalters (i994)> PP- 27-29. O n the terminology of colours in miniatures see P. S T I R N E M A N N & M . Th. G O U S S E T , Marques, mots, pratiques, CWICIMA I I (1989), pp. 43-45.
158
ATRAMENTUM, ENCAUSTUM, TINCTA
Ink was usually kept in pots made from a hollowed horn: cornu (cum incausto), corniculus or cornicularius. Another common word for inkpot was atramentarium, derived from atramentum, and in the late fourteenth century a similar derivation from encaustum is attested: en- or incausterium.26
The term commonly used in classical times for writing ink, atramentum or atramentum librarium or atramentum scriptorium, remained in use throughout die medieval period.27 It is derived from ater, 'black', and formed the basis for new words such as atramentarium or atramentariolum ('ink holder').28 Encaustum or incaustum was adopted from the Greek EyKawrov, which originally had the meaning of a pigment or colour that was heated before use, and was applied warm. In late Antiquity, however, when it was adopted into Latin, it had the general meaning of 'liquid colour' or 'ink for writing'.29 The medieval word tincta,30 finally, derived from tingere, 'to dye' or 'colour', was used for ink throughout the Middle Ages, but it was less common than atramentum or encaustum.
26 Terms for inkpots are treated by W . WATTENBACH, Das Schriftwesen im Mittelalter (1896), pp. 242-244; P. GASNAULT, Les supports et les instruments ck I'ecriture, CWICIMA I I (1989), p. 31. Cf. M W ; D M L atramentarium; D M L encausterium. 27 Cf. 'I'LL; O L D (2a); MW (IB); DML(i). 28 The MW also notes atramentarius, 'scribe'. 29 Note that it still had special meanings, such as the ink reserved for magistrates, or the purple ink suitable for emperors only (encaustum sacrum). Cf. I'LL; D M L . 30
Cf. NIERM.
159
bibliotheca, bibliothecarius In Antiquity and the Middle Ages, the word bibliotheca was used for a library, either the actual repository ('chest', 'archive', 'room',31 or even 'bookcover',32 etc.) where the books were kept, or, metonymically, the collection of books themselves." In the Latin of the patristic period and in medieval Latin its metonymical sense widened: it came to be used not only for a collection of books in a chest or room, but also for a collection of texts in one codex. Thus it was used especially for the Bible ('bibliotheca veteris et novi testamenti', for example, or 'bibliotheca divinae legis'), but also for other collective works.34 The originally Greek word bibliotheca was used particularly in the early Middle Ages (up to and including the Carolingian period), and again at the very end of the Middle Ages. From the twelfth to fourteenth century its Latin equivalent, librarian was much more common. In the fifteenth century the Greek word bibliotheca again gained in popularity under the influence of humanism.36 Unlike bibliotheca, its derivative bibliothecarius, librarian, was popular throughout the Middle Ages. Its history starts in the second century A . D . , where it was used in the sense of'keeper of
31 The distinction between 'library' and 'archive' is a relatively modern one. In the Hellenistic period, x«ptEUx/xrapTO
A,aKiov and pif}Xio0TiKT|/pipXiO(pT)XaKi.ov were synonymous. Cf. A . V E R N F . T , DU 'chartophylax au 'Librarian, CIVICIMA I I (1989), p. 15532 DML(b). 33 TLL; OLD; M W ( H I ) ; D M L (a). 34 BLAISE, Diet.; M W (II b); D M L (c). See also W. WATTENBACH, Das Schriftwesen im Mittelalter (1896), pp. 152-157. 35 Cf. -^librarius. 36 See, for example, the article of M . - H . J U L L I E N D E P O M M E R O L , Le vocabulaire des colleges dans le midi de la France, CIVICIMA VI (1993), p. 40. In her sources she found the word libraria countless times, the word bibliotheca only sporadically (and even then mostly in the expression 'bibliotheca seu libraria'). On the humanistic influence on college vocabulary, see J . M . F L E T C H E R , Ihe Vocabulary of Administration and Teaching at Merton College, Oxford, CIVICIMA VI (1993), p. 57-
160
BIBLIOTHECA, BIBL1OTHECARIUS
books', 'librarian'.37 In the eight century the term was adopted by the papal court in Rome for the officer, chosen from among the cardinals, who took care of the papal archive.38 Perhaps in imitation it was also used at the courts of archbishops and bishops, at the secular courts of kings and emperors, and in monasteries and cathedral chapters.39 In monasteries the word bibliothecarius was often used for the one who took care of the books and charters, but also for the person in charge of the scriptorium. From the eleventh century onwards the word was widely used for librarians/ archivists, alongside -^libmrius and armarius (cf. -^armarium). Bibliotheca was adopted from Greek PipA,io9f)KT|, and its literal meaning is 'repository of books'.40 Already in Antiquity it was used both for the actual repository and, metonymically, for the collection of books kept in it. In the early Christian period it developed a third, additional meaning: a collection of texts kept in one codex. This was used particularly for the Bible.41 In the Middle Ages die word kept all of these three meanings.42
37 38 39 40 41 42
O n this subject see A . V E R N E T , DU 'chartophylax'au 'Librarian, pp. 163-165. Cf. MW(i). Cf. MW (2-5). For the classical tradition see F O R C ; TLL11, col. 1955-1958; O L D . B L A I S E , Diet. Cf. MW;DML.
161
calamus, penna, plumbum In the ancient world the reed pen was commonly used for writing with ink on materials like papyrus or bark.43 Calamus, 'reed' or 'cane', came to mean 'reed pen', and metonymically 'pen in general. In the Middle Ages, when the common writing instrument was in fact made not from reed but from a feather, calamus was still used in the sense of'pen'.44 The quill pen, attested from the fifth century onwards, was cut from the flight-feathers of large birds, such as swans, turkeys or crows, but most commonly geese. It was generally called penna (or pennuLt), 'wing' or 'feather', orpluma, plumalis ('feather') but other terms, which in fact referred to other materials, were also used: calamus and occasionally (h)arundo.45
A lead stylus, plumbum or stilus plumbeus, was used for taking notes, for making sketches or drawings and (in the twelfth century) for drawing lines to prepare the empty page for writing.46 Other objects which belonged to the standard equipment of a scribe are the pen knife,47 called cultellus, scalpellum, artavus,4S and the case or
43 O n writing instruments see W . W A T T E N B A C H , Das Schriftwesen im Mittelalter (1896), pp. 122-232; P. GASNAULT, Les supports et les instruments de I'ecriture, CTVJCIMA I I (1989), pp. 29-32. 44 I h e same development can be seen with (h)arundo, originally 'reed' or 'bamboo', but metonymically also 'reed pen'. Cf. O L D (2d). 45 At the end of the Middle Ages there are occasional records of copper or brass pens: argenteus calamus, plumalis aerea. These must have been the precursors of the sixteenthand seventeenth-century dip pen. Cf. W . 'WATTENBACH, Das Schriftwesen im Mittelalter (1896), p. 231; P. GASNAULT, Supports et instruments de I'e'criture, CIVICIMA I I (1989), p. 30. 46 Until the twelfth century line drawing was generally done in 'dry point': a sharp instrument (stilus or stilus ferreus) was used to press lines into the page. One side of the parchment leaf would show furrows, the other ridges. At the end of the twelfth century it became customary to draw lines using ink. 47 Cf. W . W A T T E N B A C H , Das Schriftwesen im Mittelalter (1896), pp. 228-231; J . L E CLERCQ, Pour I'histoire du canifetde la lime (1972). 48 In old French glossaries or vocabularies these terms are often translated as canivet, quenivet — derivations of the late Latin word canipulus, short sword or dagger. The
162
CALAMUS, PENNA, PLUMBUM
holder for his or her writing materials. Terms for the case were derived from terms for pens: most common are calamaris, calamare or calamarium, other terms arepennaculum and -^scriptorium*9 Calamus and (h)arundo were already used in Antiquity in the sense of 'reed pen'.50 In the Middle Ages they remained in use for 'pen', even though pens were no longer made of reed.51 The quill pen, made from feathers of large birds, came into existence, it seems, in the fifth century, and was called by the common Latin word for 'feather', penna (also spelled pinna).51 In some texts the distinction is made between reed pens and quill, but in general the two terms, calamus and penna, are treated as synonyms.
Germanic root knip, which leads us to the modern English word knife, can be recognised in this word. W . W A T T E N B A C H , Das Scbriftwesen im Mittelalter (1896), p. 229; P. GASNAULT, Supports et instruments de I'ecriture, CIVICIMA I I (1989), p. 30 and n. 71. For the sharpening of a pen Wattenbach further notes the expressions calamum or pennam acuere or tempemre. 49 W. 'WATTENBACH, Das Schriftwesen im Mittelalter (1896), pp. 223-224; P. GASNAULT, Les supports et les instruments de I'ecriture, CIVICIMA II (1989), p. 32. According to Gasnault —>scriptorium was used, in this context, for the ensemble of pen case and ink holder, fastened with a leather strap or chain to each other and to the belt. Terms for ink and ink holders are treated under -^atramentum. 50 Cf. O L D calamus (2), harundo (2d). 51 Cf. calamus MW (IIA); D M L (4). 52 Cf. DuC; NG (IB).
163
c(h)arta, instrumentum, munimentum There is a wide range of terms for documents, records or charters in medieval Latin.53 Carta or charta is the most common and most general, and the basis for many derivations such as c(h)artula ('(small) record'), c(h)art(ul)arium or chartophylacium ('archive', 'register of charters'), c(h)art(ac)eus or c(h)articinus (the adjective 'of papyrus'), c(h)artigraphus ('writer of charters', 'chancellor'), etc. Like charta, which has the basic meaning of'papyrus sheet, leaf for writing',54 many other terms used for charters were derived from the material they were written on. Pagina, for instance, was often used in this meaning, and also -^sc(h)eda, schedula or membranaP Another set of terms is based on the form of the document's contents. The commonly used terms epistola, scriptum and litterae fall into this category, as do the less common nota, notitia or brevis. Other terms relate to the content itself of the document in question: pr(a)eceptum, mandatum, decretum, privilegium, etc. Others, again, relate to the function of the document, such as testamentum (based on the notion of witness or testimony), memoratorium or memoriale (based on the notion of memory or remembrance).
53 The subject has not yet been fully explored. See the stock-taking studies of W. " W A T T E N B A C H , DasSchriftwesen imMittelalter (1896), pp. 187-203; and O . G U Y O T J E A N N I N , Le vocabulaire de la diplomatique en latin medieval, CIVICIMA II (1989), pp. 120-134. See, furthermore, for an extensive introduction to the subject and ample bibliography, O. G U Y O T J E A N N I N , J . P Y C K E and B . - M . T O C K , Diplomatique medievale (1993). 54 J . I R I G O I N , Terminohgie du livre et de I'ecriture dans le monde byzantin, CJVICIMA I I (1989), pp. 15-17. 55 Another term used for official documents, records or charters that hints at their (original) physical appearance is, for example, diploma ('folded in two'). It was rarely used in the Middle Ages, and restricted to royal charters or (even more specifically) papal letters of appointment. (Cf. O . G U Y O T J E A N N I N , Vocabulaire de la diplomatique en latin medieval, CIVICIMA II (1989), p. 120; D M L . ) A further example is polyptychum ('multiple waxtablets fastened together'), which developed the meaning of register (of public records) and land-register. (Cf. R . H . & M.A. R O U S E , The Vocabulary of Wax Tablets, CJVICIMA I I (1989), pp. 222-223; O . G U Y O T J E A N N I N , Vocabulaire de la diplomatique en latin medieval, CIVICIMA II (1989), pp. 129-130.)
164
C(H)ARTA, I N S T R U M E N T U M , M U N I M E N T U M
Instrumentum and munimentum, two terms commonly used throughout the Middle Ages in the meaning of charter or record, have different backgrounds. Instrumentum (with its deviating spellings such as stormentum, esturmentum, extramentum etc.) 56 has the original meaning
of 'tool', 'equipment' or 'apparatus', but was also used in the sense of 'a means'. In legal and administrative contexts it was used for 'evidence' (on which a case rests) or 'document' (to which one can refer in case of a dispute). The original meaning of munimentum (or monimentum and sometimes even, confusingly, monumentuni) is 'fortification', 'defensive wall'. In the Middle Ages the term developed the additional meaning of 'ratifying document', 'letter of confirmation',57 probably because these kinds of documents gave their owners protection or a sense of security. Charta, derived from the Greek xapxr\c,, had the basic meaning of'(strip of a) papyrus sheet'. Already in Antiquity it was used in the wider meaning of 'sheet or leaf for writing', and metonymically also for something written, on a single sheet (a letter, song or poem, or charter) but also on several sheets (a book or booklet).58 In the Middle Ages it was similarly used for, on the one hand, writing material (usually parchment, but also papyrus or paper), and, on the other, a piece of writing, text or document.59 The specific meaning of 'official document' is unattested in Antiquity. The basic meaning of instrumentum is 'tool' or 'equipment'.60 In Antiquity, however, it was already used in the metonymical sense of 'a means', and, derived from this, also of'evidence' (which proves a case of law) or 'official document' (with which one can prove that one is within
56 C £ O . G U Y O T J E A N N I N , Vocabulaire de la diplomatique en latin medieval, CFVICIMA II (1989), p. 122. 57 Cf. O . G U Y O T J E A N N I N , Vocabulaire de la diplomatique en latin medieval, CJVICIMA II (1989), p. 123.
58 Cf.TLL;OLD. 59 Cf. M W ; D M L . D u C . has a long list of expressions with charta or words derived from its root: e.g. inchartare (to donate something by means of a charter), chartam facere (to draw up a charter), etc. Note that chartula was used in the same range of meanings. 60 Cf.TLL;OLD.
C(H)ARTA, I N S T R U M E N T U M , M U N I M E N T U M
165
one's rights).61 This meaning remained in use in the Middle Ages, when instrumentum became a common term for charter or document.62 The use of munimentum in the meaning of'charter' or 'record' is medieval. In Antiquity munimentum meant 'fortification', 'defensive earthwork', any kind of'protective wall' or 'covering'.63 In the ninth century it was already used in the figurative meaning of '(protective) document',64 and in the eleventh and twelfth centuries it was commonly used as a synonym for instrumentum.65
61 Cf. O L D (4-5). 62 Cf. D M L (3); Lex.Lat.Ned. MediiAevi (3). Instrumentum, derived from instruere, to instruct or teach, was also used in the meaning of'teaching', 'education' — synonymous with instructio. Cf. B L A I S E , Diet. (6); D u C ; D M L (5).
63 Cf.TLL;OLD. 64 Cf. D u C ; NG (5); Lex.Lat.Ned. MediiAevi (4). 65 O . G U Y O T J E A N N I N , Vocabulaire de la diplomatique en latin medieval, CLVICIMA I I (1989), p. 123.
166
chirographum In a legal or administrative context the word chirographum {chy-, ci-, cy-) —from yzip, 'hand' and ypatpeiv, 'to write'— was used for a charter or decree, legally validated by a subscription in the handwriting of the authorities involved.66 In the ninth and tenth centuries, however, it developed a new specialized meaning. Two (or more) copies of a charter were written on a single piece of parchment, and in the empty space between the two copies a word (usually the word chirographum itself), sentence, alphabet or ornament was written or drawn. At an official meeting of the parties involved, the sheet was cut, right through the letters or drawings. Often the edges were indented, and the modern English word 'indenture' for an act in duplicate still testifies to this practice. Each party took a copy, the unique part of a two-piece jigsaw. Note that chirographum was used for the document itself, but also for the word (usually ' C H I R O G R A P H U M ' in long and narrow capital letters) or other legend which marked the place of the cut.67 The practice of cutting a document in this way for legal validation is first attested in the British Isles, where the oldest examples date back to the mid-ninth century.68 In the early tenth century the practice is also found on the continent. It gained in popularity in the eleventh, and especially the twelfth century. Apart from chirographum all kinds of expressions are used for the same phenomenon: cartae partitae, divisae or dentatae, cartae per cyrographum (or alphabetuni) divisae/partitae, cartae
litterae or abedecaria. Furthermore, new words were created on its basis:
66 Cf. B . BISCHOFF, Zur Friihgeschichte des mittelalterlichen Chirographum (1955, repr. 1966); W . T R U S E N , Chirographum und Teilurkunde im Mittelalter (1979); O . GuYOTJEANNIN, Le vocabulaire de la diplomatique en latin medieval, CP/ICIMA II (1989), pp. 122,124-125. Winfried Trusen emphasizes that a chirographum is not necessarily a 'Teilurkunde' (an indenture), but that in many cases it is an act or charter signed by the authorities in their own handwriting. 67 C f . N i E R M . ( 3 - 5 ) ; M W ( I I B 2 a - b ) . 68 The earliesr original chirographa, however, belong to the early years of the tenth century. Cf. W . T R U S E N , Chirographum und Teilurkunde im Mittelalter (1979), p. 242.
CHIROGRAPHUM
167
chirographare and chirographizare (-isare), 'to write in the form of a chirograph' or 'to put a chirograph legend on (a document)'.69 In Antiquity chirographum, imported from the Greek xd-poypoccpov, was generally used in the sense of 'handwriting', or 'document in a person's own handwriting', 'manuscript'. In a legal context, however, the word was also used for a 'written undertaking', a 'record of a promise' or 'bond'.70 In the Middle Ages,71 two sources exercised a major influence on the meaning of the word. In the first place Isidore of Seville defined the word as cautio, which means not only 'caution', but also 'precaution', and had the specialized meaning of a 'written guarantee'.72 Secondly, the term occurs in two places in the Bible: it is used frequently in the Book ofTobiah and once in one of the epistles of St. Paul. Here it has the sense of 'acknowledgement of debt' or 'bond'.73 The two sources are both invoked in medieval glossaries and commentaries, in which chirographum is often translated as manu scriptum, explained as cautio, and illustrated with the biblical passages. At die basis of the meaning of'indenture', however, lies the specific legal meaning it had received in the Roman empire: a document legally validated by the subscription in their own handwriting of the parties involved.74 The practice of writing a document in duplicate and separating the two copies in such a way that each carried an authenticating mark along its edge was just a different way of assuring its validation — a different means to the same end.
69 Cf. NlERM. 70 Cf. T L L ; O L D . 71 Note that the basic meaning of'handwriting' or 'manuscript' did not disappear in die Middle Ages: cf. MW (IA); D M L (ia). 72 Cf. ISIDORE, Etym. V, 24, xz: Chirographum cautio, id est manus inscriptio. See also MW(IlA2);DML(ib). 73 Tb 1,17; 4,21; 4,22; 5,3; 9,3; 9,6 & Paul. Col. 2,14. For a detailed description of the passages in question see W . T R U S E N , Chirngraphum und leilurkunde im Mittelalter (1979), pp. 235-236. Note that the word syngrapha (acknowledgement of debt) occurs in AngloSaxon sources as a synonym for chirographum. Cf. ibid., p. 239. 74 Cf. W . T R U S E N , Chirographum und Teilurkunde im Mittelalter (1979), p. 236. See also MW (I A ib).
168
codex In Antiquity as well as the Middle Ages, codex is in certain contexts interchangeable with —tliber and/or -^volumen,15 and has among its meanings 'book' in general.76 Often, however, it has the connotation of 'volume', referring to a part of a book77 or a quire.78 It can also be used to express the notion of'collection', such as, for example, a collection of documents instead of individual documents in an archive, or a collection of legal texts.79 Finally, the term codex is sometimes used to express the concept of'archetype' or 'modeltext', from which copies (-^exemplaria) could be made.80 The diminutives codicillus (-ellus) and codiculus are used in the general sense of'small book, booklet'.81 Codicillus, however, is also used in several
75 In the Graeco-Roman world -^-volumen and codex stricto sensu referred to two different objects, -^>volumen being a scroll, codex being a collection of folded (and sewn) papers. Both terms, however, were also used to refer to 'written text' in general, and in some contexts lost their specific material distinction. See also -^volumen. F. D O L B E A U , Noms de livres, CIVICIMA II (1989), pp. 81-82. j6 In F. D01.BEAU, Noms de livres, CFVICIMA II (1989), pp. 83, 88 and 90-92, the relations between these three words are thoroughly examined. Dolbeau reaches the conclusion that, throughout the Middle Ages, in almost any kind of source, -^liber is the most common word for book. In the Carolingian period -^liber ranks first and is followed by codex and —>volumen respectively. In the course of the eleventh and twelfth century, codex seems to disappear almost entirely (except in sources from the Germanic countries) in favour of—tvolumen. From the twelfth century onwards, new terms appear in addition to -^rvolumen, such as par, pars, etc. 77 This is aptly illustrated by the use of the plural codices in the language of the Christian authors to refer to the Bible: sacri codices, codices Dominici, divini codices, latini codices (the Latin translation of the Bible); cf. BLAISE, Lex. 78 F. D O L B E A U , Noms de livres, CIVICIMA I I (1989), p. 91, n. 69. 79 F. D O L B E A U , Noms de livres, CIVICIMA I I (1989), pp. 90, 92 (in this sense of 'collection' Dolbeau mentions corpus as a synonym for codex); T L L I I I , col. 1406-1407 (2B); D M L (2B); MW. 80 T L L (2A); cf. also for a medieval example L.J. BATAILLON, Exemplar, pecia, cjuaternus, CIVICIMA II (1989), p. 215. 81 In this sense, they are interchangeable with libellus (cf. -^liber).
CODEX
169
more specific meanings, such as 'document', 'charter', 'will', or 'supplement to a will'. 82 The word codex in its general meaning of book is common in Antiquity and the Middle Ages. Originating etymologically from caudex, 'treetrunk', codex and its diminutive codicillus were at first used to describe a -^tabula or a number of tabulae attached to each other: wooden tablets covered with a thin layer of wax into which text could be scratched.83 The word was then also used for several leaves of papyrus or parchment folded or sewn together.84
82 T L L (2B); D M L ; M W . 83 Also codicilli cerati, cf. P. GASNAULT, Les supports et les instruments de Tecriture, CIVJCIMA II (1989), p. 23 n. 18. Although the use of codex for 'wax tablet' was common in (late)-Antiquity, -^tabula was much more common in medieval times; cf. R . H . & M.A. ROUSE, The Vocabulary of Wax Tablets, CTVICIMA I I (1989), p. 222. 84 F O R C ; T L L . The Latin word also found its way into the Greek-speaking world, where KWSI!; and KCOSIKIOV are used (if rarely) in the sense of 'book' (as opposed to 'scroll'). Cf. J . IRIGOTN, Terminologie du livre et de Vecriture dans ie monde byzantin, CTVICIMA I I (1989), pp. 13, 15.
170
exemplar, exemplum, exemplator Throughout Antiquity and the Middle Ages exemplar and exemplum both had the double meaning of original and copy.85 Exemplar had the general meaning of model, in an abstract sense (exemplary life or behaviour) as well as in the concrete sense of the rhetorical model for a certain genre (e.g. exemplaria epistolarium)ib, but also a copy of a text or a text to be copied.87 Before the thirteenth century the meaning of 'a copy of a text' was much more common than that of 'model text',88 but in the course of that century the usage of the term began to shift. In the context of the university exemplar became the technical term for a model text in the possession of a stationer (^>stationarius) or bookseller, who copied it or had it copied onto separate quires {-specie) which could then in turn be rented by students or others for copying.89 The stationers kept lists of their exemplaria, together with the number of -specie and the rental
85 See O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 254-260; F.RW. S O E T E R M E E R , La terminologie de la librairie a Bologne, CIVICIMA I (1988), pp. 90-93; L . J . BATAILLON, Exemplar, pecia, quatemus, CIVICIMA II (1989), pp. 211-219. See also —>pecia, —>stationarius, and see —>exemplum in Cat. I I I . 86 Cf. J . O . W A R D , Rhetoric and the Art ofdictamen, CIVICIMA I I I (1990), pp. 45-46. 87 See S E D U L I U S SCOTTUS, who defines the difference between —>codex and exemplar as follows: 'Inter exemplar autem et codicem hoc interest, quod codex sit jam scriptum quodlibet volumen, etiamsi ex ipso codice adhuc nihil scribatur; cum vero ex ipso alter codex scribatur, tune exemplar esse incipit' — 'The difference between exemplar and codex is this: a codex is a book in which something is written, but from which nothing has so far been copied. W h e n , however, from this codex another one is written, it starts to be an exemplar. (Explan. in praef. S. Hieronymi ad Evangelia, PL 103, col. 333, mid- ninth century.) O . W E I J F . R S cites a twelfth-century passage in which exemplar and exemplum are contrasted with one another as model and copy — O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 256 n. 452. 88 L . J . BATAILLON argues that in the sense of'copy of a text' it often had the connotation of'reliable' or 'authorized copy'. It was used, for example, for authographs. Cf. Exemplar, pecia, quaternus, CIVICIMA II (1989), pp. 214-215. 89 Cf. R . H . & M . A . R O U S E , The Book Trade at the University of Paris (1988), p. 44, where the meaning of exemplar within the context of stationer book production is defined as 'a text whose sole raison d'etre was the production of further copies'.
EXEMPLAR, EXEMPLUM, EXEMPLATOR
171
price (c£ -^taxatio).90 The quality of these exemplaria was safeguarded by the university. The use of exemplar in this specific meaning, however, is restricted to the universities in France, Italy and Spain. In England, where there is mention of a so-called cista exemplariorum., the technical meaning described above should not be read into the expression. The chest probably did not contain university approved exemplars, but rather either originals or copies of administrative documents.91 Exemplum, which already in Antiquity had the meaning of 'a copy of a text', kept this meaning in the Middle Ages, and was used in the same specific technical meaning as exemplar in the context of the pecia system. In the humanist period exemplar and exemplum were often used in opposition to each other, exemplar meaning original, authenticum, and exemplum meaning transcript or copy.92 The derived term exemplator seems restricted to the universities of Bologna and Padua, where it had the meaning of'maker of exemplaria'. Since the keeper of the exemplaria, that is, the stationer, was often also the person who transcribed them, exemplator is often synonymous with -^>stationarius.9i
The semantic background of exemplar and exemplum remained essentially the same in Antiquity and the Middle Ages. Already in Antiquity
90 Note that in fact different stages in the process of making new copies were indicated by exemplar: 1. technically speaking it was the model text or autograph used by the stationer to make his copy on separate quires (-specie), 1. but often the -specie themselves were also called exemplar(ia), as well as 3. the copies of the -specie. Cf. G . POLLARD, The Pecia System in the Medieval Universities (1978), pp. 151-152. 91 Cf. M . B . PARKES, The Provision of Books (1992), pp. 466-467; here he argues plausibly against the earlier interpretation by (among others) G . P O L L A R D . 92 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universite's (1987), p. 256 n. 452. See also, however, M . S T E I N M A N N , 'Exemplar', Lexikon desMittelalters 4, col. 165: here it is noted that in the case of charters exemplar is often used in opposition to authenticum, and has the meaning of 'transcript' v 93 See F.P.W. S O E T E R M E E R , Utrumque ins inpeciis (2002), pp. 49-50. In Oxford the form exemplarius was also used for the same figure. Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universite's (1987), p. 256; D M L .
172
EXEMPLAR, EXEMPLUM, EXEMPLATOR
both terms were in use in the double meaning of original and copy (of a text).94 Before the thirteenth century exemplar was more commonly used in the sense of 'copy'. Its meaning began to shift towards 'original' or 'model text' in the age of the university. In the specific context of book production with relation to the schools and universities, the term exemplar developed the technical meaning of 'an authorized copy of a text, copied on separate quires (—specie)'. Exemplum had the general meaning of'example',95 but it was also used in the same technical sense as exemplar. 96
Both exemplator and exemplarius are thirteenth-century neologisms which have their basis in this technical meaning specific for the world of the medieval university.97
94 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 258-260; O L D exemplar (2, 3); exemplum (6, 9). The verb exetnplare already existed in Late Antiquity, notably also in the sense of'to make a copy (of a text)', cf. T L L col. 1326. In medieval Latin 'to copy' is also one of its meanings ( D M L 4). Other meanings are 'to adduce as an example' or 'to form after a model' (cf. D M L 1-3). 95 See -^exemplum in Cat. I I I . 96 Cf. F.P.W. S O E T E R M E E R , Utrumque ius inpeciis (2002), n. 1. 97 Cf. D M L . Note that both N I E R M . and B L A I S E , Lex. wrongly give 'corrector of copies of a text' as the meaning of exemplator. See F.P.W. S O E T E R M E E R , Utrumque ius in peciis (2002), n. 65.
173
graphium, stilus For writing on wax tablets (-^tabulae ceratae), an instrument (stylus) was used which had a sharp end and a blunt one.98 One could write in the layer of wax with the sharp point, and erase such writing with the blunt end. In the early Middle Ages, this writing instrument was commonly referred to as a graphium (or also graphius). Isidore translated the word, adopted from the Greek ypacpetov, as -^scriptorium, and throughout the Middle Ages this term was also used for stylus." In the eleventh and twelfth century graphium was gradually superseded by another ancient term:100 stilus (or stylus), believed to be related to the Greek cxx>Xoq.l0i The stylus was made from all kinds of materials such as wood, bone, ivory or precious metals.102 Often its point was strengthened with iron, and accordingly ferrum (iron) is sometimes also found to signify stylus.103 Furthermore, figurative terms were used.104 In the metaphor of ploughing one's stylus through the layer of wax, vomer ('ploughshare') was sometimes used for the implement. In another example the act of 98 Cf. W . W A T T E N B A C H , Das Schriftwesen im Mittelalter (1896), pp. 219-222; P. GASNAULT, Les supports et les instruments de I'e'criture, CIVICIMA I I (1989), p. 24; R . H . & M . A . R O U S E , The Vocabulary of Wax Tablets, CIVICIMA I I (1989), pp. 224-229, 224-225. 9<) ISIDORE, Etymologies, lib. 6 cap. 9. Cited and discussed in R . H . & M . A . R O U S E , The Vocabulary of Wax Tablets, CIVICIMA II (1989), p. 224. See also D u C . graphium (1); W. W A T T E N B A C H , Das Schriftwesen im Mittelalter (1896), p. 221: in their dictionaries both Aelfric and Papias mention —^scriptorium as an alternative for graphium. 100 R . H . and M . A . R O U S E argue that its eclipse could be caused by die fact that graphium acquired other meanings, such as 'piece of land held by written deed' (or, more generally, 'document, charter' — cf. D M L (2)). Stilus, however, also had other meanings: see, for example, B L A I S E , Lex: (1) style, manner, custom, (2) salary, pay, (3) zeal, ardour, enthusiasm. Cf. The Vocabulary of Wax Tablets, CIVICIMA II (1989), p. 224. 101 In fact, however, it is probably related to the root *stei-, to prick', and not to ox'ohoc,, 'pillar, wooden pole'. The wrong connection was already made in Antiquity. Cf. O L D stilus; L S J , arokoq (4). 102 Silver, for example: stilus argenteus or graphium argenteum. Cf. W . W A T T E N B A C H , Das Schriftwesen im Mittelalter (1896), p. 221. Pictures of styli decorated with animal heads etc. are found in R. B U L L , Das grofie Buch vom Wachs 2 (1977), p. 854-857. 103 Cf. R . H . & M.A. ROUSE, The Vocabulary of Wax Tablets, CIVICIMA I I (1989), p. 225.
104 See R . H . & M . A . R O U S E , The Vocabulary of Wax Tablets, CIVICIMA I I (1989), pp. 227-229.
174
GRAPHIUM, STILUS
writing letters in the wax is compared to 'pricking' them into the soft surface, and the stylus is referred to as mucro ('sword'). Both graphium and stilus were used in the meaning of stylus already in Antiquity.105 In the Middle Ages the ancient words continued to be used in the same meaning — first graphium,106 which was used commonly throughout the Merovingian and Carolingian periods, and then, from the eleventh and twelfth centuries onwards, stilus or stylus.™1
105 Cf. graphium T L L ; O L D . stilus O L D (3). 106 Cf. D u C . (1); D M L (1). Note also the Late Latin variant graphiolum, mentioned in the D M L . 107 Cf. D u C . , stillus (3).
175
inventarium, registrum, repertorium, catalogus Throughout the Middle Ages lists of books or catalogues were often described in general terms: hi(i) sunt libri, isti sunt libri or libri de armario.m Inventarium (or inventoriuni), a general term for a list of goods owned by a certain person or institution, is commonly used from the ninth century in the specific sense of list of books (in a certain collection)'.109 From the thirteenth century, registrum (or regesturri) also became common — a register of the books owned by a certain monastery, church or other institution.110 Tabula, too, was often used in this sense, not only in its general meaning of 'enumeration', 'list', but also in its concrete meaning of 'board', 'notice board', when used for the large boards with lists of books that were sometimes hung on the walls of libraries.111 From early times these lists of books were often systematically organized, and contained short descriptions of the author, title and/or discipline or genre of the book in question. Sometimes alphabetical indices were attached, or the lists themselves were alphabetically organized. That these lists were in fact seen as research tools is suggested by the term repertorium, which came into use in the fourteenth and fifteenth centuries
108 O n the terminology for this phenomenon see T. G O T T L I E B , Uber Mittelalterliche Bibliotheken (1890); A . D E R O L E Z , Les catalogues de biliotheques (1979), pp. 23-26; O . W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen age, CIVICIMA I V (1991), pp. 144-152. 109 For other uses of this term in the context of reference books, see -^repertorium, inventarium in Cat. I I I . O n its use in the sense of 'library catalogue' see A . D E R O L E Z , Les catalogues de bibliotheques (1979), p. 23; O . W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen
age, CIVICIMA IV (1991), p. 145. HO A . D E R O L E Z , Les catalogues de bibliotheques (1979), p. 23; O . W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen age, CIVICIMA IV (1991), p. 145. I l l See also -^tabula in Cat. I I I . On so-called 'mural catalogues' or tabulae see A. D E R O L E Z , Les catalogues de bibliotheques (1979), pp. 42.-43. The oldest examples date back to the twelfdi century, and these kinds of catalogues were quite common in Germany and the Netherlands in the fifteenth century. See further P.F.J. O B B E M A , Een Deventer bibliotheekcatalogus (1973).
176
INVENTARIUM, REGISTRUM, REPF.RTORIUM, CATAI.OGUS
— an instrument to help scholars find (reperire) certain books, works on certain subjects or by certain authors.112 Besides these three terms, numerous expressions are used in the titles of library catalogues. Some emphasize the brevity of the information {brevis librorum, breve de libris, breviarium, breviculus, adbreviatio librorum), others the aspect of (systematical or alphabetical) order (prdo librorum, ordinatio librorum). Some refer to the description of the books in the collection (annotatio, notitia, or descriptio librorum), others to their number {numerus, summa librorum), and yet others to their titles (nomina, tituli librorum).m Index114 and catalogus only occur in the sense of'library catalogue' in the later Middle Ages (fourteenth-fifteenth centuries), and are even then a rarity. From the twelfth century, however, catalogus (also cathalogus or kathalogus) was generally used for a list of books by one author, or a bibliography.115 Similarly, registrum, tabula and indiculum {-ulus) were used in the sense of bibliography.116 In classical Latin inventarium is found in the meaning of inventory, list of possessions."7 In the Middle Ages this meaning remained in use, and
112 A . D E R O L E Z , Les catalogues de bibliotheques (1979), p. 24; O . W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen age, CJWCIMA IV (1991), p. 146. For the use of the term in the context of reference works see —trepertorium in Cat. I I I . 113 For these and other expressions sec A . D E R O L E Z , Les catalogues de bibliotheques (1979), pp. 24-26; O . W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen age, CIVICIMA I V (1991), pp. 146-148. 114 On index see also -^tabula in Cat. I I I . 115 Catalogus, imported from the Greek (KOtt&Xoyoc;), entered the Latin language in the post-classical period, signifying an enumeration or list (TLL; BLAISE, Diet.). In the Middle Ages it was used for all kinds of lists: of the names of kings, popes, abbots, etc., of virtues, provinces, relics, goods, etc. (cf. M W ; D M L ) . By metonymy it was also used for the record or register containing such lists. Within library catalogues, furthermore, it was often used to distinguish (bibliographical) sections: catalogus romanorum pontificum, cat(h)alogus bereticorum. See O . W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen age, CIVICIMA IV (1991), p. 151. 116 On the phenomenon and terminology of medieval bibliographies, sec R . H . & M.A. ROUSE, Bibliography before Print (1986); O. W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen age, CIVICIMA IV (1991), pp. 148-150. 117 Cf. T L L ; O L D .
INVENTAR1UM, REGISTRUM, REPERTORIUM, CATALOGUS
177
the specific meaning of 'list of books' follows naturally from its basic meaning. The medieval form inventorium is found next to its classical form inventarium. Registrum {regestum) is a medieval word, which perhaps has its origin in the ancient participle regestus (from regerere, lit. 'to carry or move back to its original position'). The verb was also used in the figurative meaning of 'to pile up' or 'to make a collection of. In the Middle Ages the term was used for collections of letters, and for lists of letters, books or documents, of which one kept record in a certain (chronological, alphabetical or systematical) order.118 Library catalogues naturally fit the profile: a list of books or documents, arranged in a certain order. Repertorium is rare in classical Latin, and in the Middle Ages it remains unattested before the thirteenth century."9 The term is derived from the verb reperire — 'to find by looking', 'to search' —, and gained popularity only in the fourteenth and fifteenth centuries. It was used for research tools such as reference works, indices or tables of contents, and also became a common denomination for library catalogues. Next to repertorium the forms reportorium and reportatorium are occasionally found.
118 Cf. F O R C , regestus (5); OLD, regero (4c); DuC. {regestum); BLAISE, Diet, (registrum). 119 Cf. OLD; D u C ; O. W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen age, CIWCIMA IV (1991), p. 139 n. 351.
178
liber, libellus Liber is, in Antiquity as well as the Middle Ages, the most common word to refer to any kind of book or written text. It can refer to a manuscript as a material entity, or a written text or 'work' as an intellectual product; to a document or charter, or a work which consists of many pages; to a book in its entirety, or a part of a book (volume or chapter).120 To specify its precise meaning, all kinds of adjectives or genitives are found in combination with liber — ample examples are found in Latin dictionaries and in several of the articles in the CIVICIMA-series. Within the context of medieval intellectual life specific combinations occur frequently: libri ordinarii/extraordinarii are the books treated in the 'ordinary' or 'extraordinary' lessons at medieval schools and universities;121 the phrase liber quasi armarium is used for library catalogues;122 the terms liber alfabeti or liber vocabulorum refer to glossaries or dictionaries.123 -^Codex and -^volumen are, in specific contexts, interchangeable with liber. 124
One expression that catches the eye in this context is libri catenati — lit. 'chained books'. It comes from the thirteenth-century practice of attaching the most frequently used books in the library to their racks with chains, to prevent them from being displaced or removed, and to assure their accessibility to every user.125
120 Cf. F. D O L B E A U , Noms de livres, CIVICIMA I I (1989), pp. 83-89 for a full treatment of the term; see also T L L , esp. col. 1272-1280; NG (1,1-15); D M L (1-9). 121 See also -^ordinariusl-ie, extraordinariusl-ie in Cat. I l l , and O. W E I J E R S , Terminobgie des universites (1987), pp. 308-309. 122 A . A . N A S C I M E N T O , Terminologie du livre dans les sources documentaires portugaises medievales, CIVICIMA IX (1999), p. 125. 123 O . W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen age, CIVICIMA I V (1991), pp. 137 n. 338 and 59 n. 158 respectively. 124 For the evaluation of the relations between these three terms see F. D O L B F . A U , Noms de livres, CIVICIMA II (1989), pp. 83, 88, 90-92 and 98. 125 Cf. A . D E R O L E Z and G . B E R N T , 'Bibliothek', Lexikon des Mittelalters 2, col. 113; M . M C C O R M I C K , 'Chained books', Dictionary of the Middle Ages 3, p. 240.
LIBER, LIBELLUS
179
As diminutives of liber, the classical forms libellus and libellulus should be noted, and the fourteenth- ot fifteenth-century neologism liberculus.126 These terms all mean 'booklet' or 'short text', but libellus is also found in several specific meanings in an administrative or legal sphere, such as 'accusation' or 'plaintiffs statement of complaint', 'slanderous libel', 'deed concerning a matrimonial gift', 'document containing the terms of a lease', etc.127 The primary meaning of liber is 'the inner bark of a tree' — a material used for writing in Antiquity. From there, the word began to mean metonymically the written text itself,128 on one leaf (a document, charter, letter, etc.) or on several leaves bound together in a book.129
126 E D O L B E A U , Noms de livres, CJV1CIMA I I (1989), p. 94 n. 92. 127 B L A I S E , Lex. (2-5); N I E R M . (distinguishes 14 different uses of the term in administrative, legal and ecclesiastical contexts); NG (2-4); D M L (2-3). 128 F O R C ; T L L , col. 1271-1280. The Greek word ptpAO<;, which also means 'inner bark of a tree', developed in the same way: from the sense of 'material on which one writes' the meaning 'written text, book' evolved. Cf. J . I R I G O I N , La terminologie du livre et de I'ecriture dans le monde byzantin, CIVICIMA II (1989), pp. 12-13. 129 For the medieval tradition see N G ; D M L .
180
librarius, librarium, libraria In the high Middle Ages, in addition to bibliothecarius and armarius (cf. -^bibliotheca, -^armarium), librarius was commonly used for 'a librarian', the keeper of books or archives in an ecclesiastical or secular institution.130 In the early Middle Ages, however, a librarius was generally a scribe or copyist, either of books (scribe) or of charters (notary). In the monastic context, furthermore, the librarius was often the functionary in charge of the copying activity, the head of the scriptorium. In this same context the term developed the additional meaning of 'keeper of books', 'librarian'.131 And since library and archive were not always distinguished, the term was also used for 'an archivist'.132 Within its general meaning of 'man of books' librarius occasionally acquired specific meanings such as 'learned man', 'scholar', 'author',133 or 'schoolmaster' (who taught his pupils how to write).134 In thirteenth- and fourteenth-century Paris librarius was often used alongside and synonymously with -+stationarius.m In the university
130 O n the background of this term see J . S C H N E I D E R , Zur Verbreitung und Verwendung von 'librarius' (1976); A . V E R N E T , DU 'chartophylax' au 'Librarian, CPVLCIMA I I (1989), pp. 155-167. O n its meaning in the context of the medieval university see O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 240-249; R . H . & M . A . R O U S E , The Book Trade at the University of Paris (1988). 131 N o t e , however, that the term -^bibliothecarius was more frequent in this meaning. J. S C H N E I D E R , Zur Verbreitung und Verwendung von 'librarius' (1976), p. 26. 132 J . S C H N E I D E R , Zur Verbreitung und Verwendung von 'librarius' (1976), pp. 24-27. Other expressions for the same office are mentioned by A . V E R N E T , DU 'chartophylax' au 'Librarian, CTVICIMA II (1989), pp. 156-162: armararius, armarista and the odd forms armamentarius and armentarius (as alternatives for armarius); librarista in addition to librarius; repositor librorum or librorum repositorius; conservator or observator librorum; expressions w i t h -^custos (Cat. I ) , such as custos librorum, custos thesauri, custos armarii, custos chartarum or custos bibliothece; archiclavus or archiclaverius (keeper of the key to library or archive); sacrista or sacristanus; and, finally, expressions for the keeper of the treasury ( o f w h i c h books were often a part): tbesaurarius, scrinarius, archiscrinius, etc. 133
Cf. NIERM.
(2); NG (4); DML (2b).
134 Cf. J . S C H N E I D E R , Zur Verbreitung und Verwendung von 'librarius' (1976), p. 23 for a late-antique example, N I E R M . ( I ) for a medieval one. 135 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 242-244, 248-249; R . H . & M . A . R O U S E , The Book Trade at the University of Paris (1988), pp. 41-47.
LIBRARIUS, LIBRAR1UM, LIBRARIA
181
booktrade librarii and -^stationarii were the providers of curricular texts, professional copyists of texts and sellers of new and used books. If the two terms are distinguished, then -^> stationarius refers to the additional function of renting out -specie and keeping -^exemplaria.n6 In such cases, one could say that a librarius is a bookman in general, whereas a —> stationarius is a bookman with an additional function. The two functions show more similarities, however, than differences: both were regulated by the university;137 both were involved in the trade of new and used books. Both, moreover, formed the backbone of the so-called pecia system — the production of copies of approved texts per quire or for a fixed rental price. Librarium was used, both in Antiquity and in the Middle Ages, for 'library', in the same double meaning as the modern word: a repository (room, building) of books, or the collection of books kept in it.138 In the early Middle Ages other terms such as -^bibliotheca and —>armarium were much more common, but librarium gained in popularity from the second half of the tenth century onwards. In the thirteenth century, however, it was eclipsed by the female form libraria. 139
136 The term —>stationariuswas adopted from the University of Bologna, where the term was used for bookmen involved in the -^pecia trade {stationarius peciarum), but also for other kinds of bookmen. Cf. -^stationarius. In the sources of the University of Paris librarius and —»stationarius are often used in juxtaposition ('librarius et stationarius', 'stationarius et librarius'). For examples see R . H . & M . A . R O U S E , The Book Trade at the University of Paris (1988), Appendix 2, pp. 89-103. 137 T h e University of Paris prescribed that 'librarii et stationarii' must swear oaths of observance. R . H . & M . A . R O U S E , The Book Trade at the University of Paris (1988), pp. 8788. 138 Cf. N G , D M L . O n librarium and libraria see J . S C H N E I D E R , Z,ur Verbreitung und Verwendung von 'librarius'(1976), pp. 28-31. 139 Cf. D M L . Originally libraria was used for a female writer. In the Middle Ages its usage only starts in the thirteenth century, wirii a new meaning: 'library'. See J . S C H N E I D E R , Zur Verbreitung und Verwendung von 'librarius''(1976), pp. 30-31.
1 82
LIBRARIUS, LIBRARIUM, LIBRARIA
In classical times librarius was mainly used for a scribe or copyist.140 In the second century A . D . it was also occasionally used in the sense of bookseller.14' In the early Middle Ages the term kept its principal meaning of'scribe or copyist', and in addition developed more specific meanings, such as 'scribe of charters, notary',142 or 'person in charge of the copying activity of a monastic scriptorium'.143 W i t h the increase in the number of books in the Western world, librarius came to develop the sense of 'keeper of books', 'librarian' or 'archivist'.144 Other terms such as bibliothecarius and armarius, however, were in fact more common for these functions. In the context of the university the term librarius was again used in the sense of'bookseller', and in relation to the pecia system also in a more specific sense of'keeper of —>exemplarid and 'renter f
140 For the classical and medieval semantic development of this term see J . SCHNEIDER, ZurVerbreitungundVerwendungvon 'librarius'(197r6), pp. 24-28; O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 248-249. 141 Cf. T L L ; O L D . 142
Cf.
NIERM.
(4);
NG
(2);
DML
(2a).
143 J . S C H N E I D E R , Zur Verbreitung und Verwendung von 'librarius' (1976), p. 25. 144 Cf. NIERM.
(3); NG (3); DML (TA).
183
papyrus, pergamenum, membrana In Antiquity and at the outset of the Middle Ages papyrus was chiefly used as the material support for records, scrolls and books.145 A papyrus leaf consisted of strips cut from the papyrus plant, which were wetted and superimposed, pressed and then dried in the sun. The papyrus used in medieval Europe was imported from the East, mainly from Egypt. When the Mediterranean commercial network began to dissolve in the seventh century, papyrus gradually disappeared from Western book production. By the ninth century, parchment, which was locally manufactured, had taken its place. Isolated examples, however, occur for a further two centuries: until the middle of the eleventh century the papal chancery used papyrus for its records. Terms for papyrus were, like the material itself, inherited from Antiquity. Papyrus (papirus, papirius) — 'papyrus plant' — and -^charta (carta) — from the Greek %&pTr|<;, '(strip of a) papyrus sheet' — were commonly used.146 Both formed the basis for derivations such as the adjectives papyraceus, papyreus (-rius), charteus, chartaceus (-cius, -icius) or charticinus (-nius), 'made of papyrus'.147 Parchment was made from hides of sheep, goats or other cattle. The hides were soaked and the hairs removed; they were then stretched during drying. The technique of parchment-making was already fully de-
145 There is a large bibliography on the subject of writing materials in Antiquity and the Middle Ages. The terminology of writing materials is treated in W . W A T T E N B A C H , Das Schriftwesen im Mittelalter (1896), pp. 96-111 (papyrus), 113-131 (parchment), and 139-149 (paper); P. GASNAULT, Les supports et les instruments de I'ecriture, CTVICIMA I I (1989), pp. 24-29. Useful introductions with bibliographies, furthermore, are found in the relevant articles in the Lexikon des Mittelahers: K . M A R E S C H , 'Papyrus' (Vol. 6, col. 1693-1695); P. L A D N E R , 'Pergament' (Vol. 6, col. 1885-1887); and H . B . K X L I N , 'Papier' (Vol. 6, col. 16641666); and in the Dictionary of the Middle Ages: M . M C C O R M I C K , 'Writing materials, Western European' (Vol. 12, p. 699); I D . , 'Papyrus' (Vol. 9, p. 392); I D . , 'Parchment' (Vol. 9, p. 400); J . I R I G O I N , 'Paper, Introduction of", (Vol. 9, pp. 388-390). 146 For charta in the meaning of charter, document, sec -+c(h)arta, instrumentum, munimentum. 147 Note that papytus was used not only as supporting material for writing, but also for the fabrication of boats, sleeping mats, torches, etc. Cf. N G , papyrus (A2a-d).
1 84
PAPYRUS, PERGAMENUM, MEMBRANA
veloped at the outset of the Middle Ages. When papyrus became scarce, parchment gradually took its place as the predominant writing material for books and records until in the thirteenth and fourteenth centuries it began to be gradually replaced by a new material imported from the East: paper. The vocabulary of parchment is much richer than that of papyrus. Most common was the term pergamenum (pergamena, pergamind), after the name of the ancient city Pergamon, where parchment was supposedly first produced. -^Charta, originally used for papyrus sheets, developed the general meaning of 'leaf for writing', and was also used for parchment leaves. Other terms refer to the basic material — the hide of an animal: membrana (membranum and also membranula or -ulum)m was used from Antiquity, and in the Middle Agespellis was added. Sometimes adjectives were used to specify the kind of parchment in question: frequent expressions are, for example, pelles edulinae (goats' hides), cartae pecudinae ('leaves made of cow- or sheep-hide') or vitulinae ('of calves').149 In addition, album was used for the flesh-side of a hide, which was often whiter than the hair-side. In the fourteenth and fifteenth century very thin and delicate parchment was produced, supposedly from unborn or very young animals: the expressions charta non nata or virginea were used for such leaves. For makers of and/or traders in parchment, finally, the terms pergamenarii (-minarii) or pergamentarii were invented. 150
Paper was introduced in the West in the regions under Arab influence — on the Iberian peninsula in the tenth, and in Sicily in the eleventh century.151 At first it was imported from Muslim countries, but from the
148 Also menbrana (cf. N G ) . For membranula and membmnulum in similar meanings to membrana see NG membranula (4, 5) and membranulum. 149 Vitulinium and vitulinum (also vellum) were used for the high quality, extra white leaves made from calfskins. Cf. W . W C T T E N B A C H , Das Schriftwesen im Mittelalter (1896), p. 118; B . B I S C H O F F , Pald'ographie des romischen Altertums und des abendlandischen Mittelalters (repr. 1986), p. 24. 150 Cf. N G . The NG also gives the adjective pergamineus — 'made of parchment'. In medieval Italy, the term cartularii was used for manufacturers of or traders in parchment. Cf. F.P.W. S O E T E R M E E R , Utrumque ius inpeciis (2002), p. 156, n. 137. 151 On the techniques of paper production and the historical development of these techniques see M . Z E R D O U N B A T - Y E H O U D A (ed.), Lepapier au moyen age (1999). See in this volume esp. the introduction of P.F. T S C H U D R I N , Le de'veloppement technique de la papeterie, pp. 12-16.
PAPYRUS, PERGAMENUM, MEMBRANA
185
eleventh century it was produced locally in Muslim Spain, and it began to be exported from there in the twelfth century. After the Reconquest of Spain in the thirteenth century the production of paper was continued. In Italy paper began to be produced locally in Genoa and Fabriano in the first half of the thirteenth century. By the end of the century the manufacture of paper had extended to central and northern Italy, and export boomed, at the expense of paper manufacturers in Spain. In the course of the fourteenth and fifteenth centuries paper mills were established in other European countries (first in France, then in Germany, Switzerland and other Central European countries), which began to rival Italy. Medieval names for the new writing material were in fact old ones: papyrus or (more often) papirus —used for paper now that papyrus was no longer in use—, and -^c(h)arta —supposedly in its general meaning of'leaf for writing'. To distinguish paper from parchment, new expressions were created such as charta depapyro or charta papyri. Other expressions refer to the supposed geographic origin: charta damascena ('sheet from Damascus') orpergamena graeca ('sheet from Greece'). The expression charta bambukina may refer to the ancient city of Bambyke on the Syrian border, but it could also refer to the basic material from which paper was made: charta bombicyna (bambacyna) ('from silk or cotton'), or charta cuttanea (cuttunea) ('from cotton'). Bombyx or bambyx ('silk or cotton')152 were also occasionally used as alternatives for papyrus. The medieval names for papyrus were, like the material itself, inherited from Antiquity. Papyrus (orpapirus), from the Greek Kaimpoq, signified the reed whose leaves were used to make sheets for writing, and metonymically it also signified such a sheet for writing.153 —» Charta (or carta), from the Greek x&pTni;, originally signified '(strip of a) papyrus sheet', but already in Antiquity it was used in the wider meaning of 'sheet or leaf for writing'. These ancient words were commonly used in the Middle
152 l h e orthographic variants of bombyx (and bombycinus) are many: bombix, bomix, bombax, bombis, pombix, pambix, banbix, etc. Cf. MW under bombyx and bombycinus. 153 Cf. O L D ; NG (Ai, A2e, B). Note, furthermore, the figurative meaning of 'secular science' (C).
186
PAPYRUS, PERGAMENUM, MEMBRANA
Ages, and were reintroduced in new meanings when, after papyrus had been eclipsed by parchment, paper was introduced in the West. New expressions were created referring to the basic material of paper (derivations from bombyx, bambyx or cotum (cow))154 or to its (supposed) geographic origin. From the fourth century membrana and pergamenum were commonly used for the writing material made from animal hides, and the terms were adopted into the vocabulary of the Middle Ages.155 Pergamenum, after the ancient city of Pergamon, where the technique of parchment making was supposed to have been perfected, occurs in many variants: pergamena, pargamena, bergamena, bergamela, pergamentum, pergomentum, pergamenus, parchamen, palcaminum, etc.156 Membrana also occurs in neuter forms (rnembramen, membranum) and diminutives {membranula, membranulum). From Carolingian times pellis ('skin, hide') is also attested for parchment.157
154 Cf. M W bombyx (3), bombycinus ( i c ) . 155 FORC. membrana (3), pergamena; TI.L. membrana (IC). Note that membrana and pergamenum were also metonymically used for 'text' (written on parchment), 'record' or 'book': cf. N G membrana (3,4); pergamenum ( I I B ) . 156 These variants are listed by P. GASNAULT, Les supports et les instruments de I'ecriture, CTVJCIMA II (1989), p. 28. A longer list is found in N G , under pergamenum. 157 Cf. NG (C 4 ).
187
pecia (petia), peciarius Pecia or petia, 'piece' or 'quire', is a term which relates to book production. In the course of the thirteenth century a new technique was developed to meet the need, created inter alia by the schools and universities, for more and more copies of (curricular) texts.158 A corrected and approved copy of such a text (cf. -^exemplar) was copied on loose quires of varying length,159 clearly numbered. These quires or pecie were kept by beadles {-^>bedellus, Cat. I ) , or more often by librarians {-^libmrius) or stationers (—tstationarius), who rented them out one by one, often for one week at the time, so that they could be copied by students or masters themselves, or at their expense by a third party. The main function of the pecia-system was to provide as many people as possible with a model copy of a curricular text. A text consisted of tens, sometimes even hundreds of pecie, so tliat a large number of scribes could use the same model at once. A second major advantage of the system was that it enabled the university to exercise a certain degree of control over the quality of the models. First, the stationers had to pledge that they would not rent out faulty or corrupt -^exemplaria. Secondly, it
158 There are a great many articles and monographs on this subject. The main works are: J . D E S T R E Z , Lapecia dans les manuscrits universitaires (1935); G . P O I X A R D , ThePecia-System
in the Medieval Universities (1978); L.J. BATAILLON, B.G. GUYOT, R.H. ROUSE (eds.), La production du livre universitaire au moyen age (1988) — especially the contribution of R . H . & M . A . R O U S E , The Book Trade at the University of Paris; F.P.W. S O E T E R M E E R , Utrumque ins inpeciis (2002). See also O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 249-250; L . J . BATAILLON, Exemplar, pecia, quaternus, CIVICIMA I I (1989), pp. 206-208; and for decent short introductions to the subject see A . D E R O L E Z , 'Pecia, petia', Lexikon des Mittelalters 6, col. 1847-1848; R . H . R O U S E , 'Manuscript books, Production o f , Dictionary of the Middle Ages 8, pp. 100-105 ( e s P- IO 3); M - M C C O R M I C K , 'Pecia', Dictionary of the Middle Ages 9, p. 481. 159 In Bologna the standard size of a pecia was two bifolia, half of a regular -^quaternus, which consisted of four bifolia. Because of the standardization of the size of pecie the term was also used in relation to -^punctum (Cat. I l l ) — the unit of measurement of teaching material for university courses. Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 250; L . J . BATAILLON, Exemplar, pecia, quaternus, CIVICIMA I I (1989), pp. 207, 208-211.
188
PECiA ( P E T I A ) , P E C I A R I U S
seems that the quality of the texts was safeguarded by university committees, probably professors or students appointed by the rector. Thirdly, in order to avoid over-charging, the rental price of —>exemplaria was controlled by the university (cf. -^taxatio).^ In die statutes of the University of Bologna a permanent committee of peciarii is mentioned, which convened weekly and checked up on the quality of the —texemplaria. They were authorised to impose fines, and to have pecie corrected or repaired. They probably also took care of the -^taxatio of'^exemplaria, that is, the official assessment of the number of quires, -^quaterni or pecie of a certain work. Peciarii also figure in the statutes of the universities of Padua, Florence and Perugia.161 The origin of the pecia-system has been traced back to the first half of the thirteenth century, starting either in Bologna or Paris and spreading from there across the Western countries of medieval Europe.162 In Paris, die earliest attested stationers who rented out peciae were perhaps attached to the Dominican school of St. Jacques.163
160 Cf. R . H . R O U S E , 'Manuscript Books, Production op, Dictionary of the Middle Ages 8, p. 103: "The universities as they grew in strength, however, were increasingly able to regulate those trades that were essential to the university's welfare.' See also R . H . & M . A . R O U S E , The Book Trade at the University of Paris (1988), pp. 47-51; F.P.W S O E T E R M E E R , Utrumque ius inpeciis (2002), pp. 8-12, 45-47. 161 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des university (1987), pp. 250-251; F.P.W. SOKTERMEER, La terminologie de la librairie a Bologne, CWICIMA I (1988), p. 93; I D . , Utrumque ius in peciis (2002), pp. 79-80, 176-183. The system used for control over the quality of the texts in Paris is treated in pp. 154-158. Soetermeer notes, furthermore, that the term peciarius was occasionally used as a synonym of —>stationarius (peciarum), that is, 'one who rents out pecie', or of —>exemplator, 'one who writes pecie'. 162 The existence of a pecia-system has been attested in France, Italy and Spain, roughly from the thirteenth to fifteenth centuries, but not in the Eastern part of Europe. At the German universities, for example, it seems that texts were provided to the students by reading them out loud before the beginning of the academic year (the so-called pronun' tiationes). See also —>di*tare, pronuntiare (Cat. I I I ) . In England, there seems to have been a practice of copying from distributed quires, but there is no conclusive evidence that the university regulated a system in which authorised copies were rented out per pecia. Cf. M . B . PARKES, 'The Provision of Books (1992), pp. 462-467. 163 This is the central thesis of R . H . & M . A . R O U S E , The Book Trade at the University of Paris (1988), pp. 56-64, 84-85. See also, for example, their article The Commercial Production of Manuscript Books (1990).
PECIA (PETIA), PECIARIUS
189
Copying through the lending of peciae was at its peak from ca. 1270 to 1350. In the second half of the fourteenth century the practice seems to have been abandoned, possibly due to a shrinking market caused by the Hundred Years War and the Black Death. In the fifteenth century the printed book rendered the pecia-system redundant. The term pecia or petia is of vulgar Latin origin, probably from Gaulish pettia or pettis, 'piece'.164 In Late Antiquity the term was in use for a piece of cloth or a fragment of an object. In this meaning it also occurs in Merovingian and Carolingian sources, where it is also used in the meaning of 'plot of land' {pecia terre, peciaprati, pecia vinee, etc.).165 It is only in the thirteenth century that the term is used for a 'piece' of a manuscript, a quire.166 In fact, it is only within the rental system of manuscripts per quire that the term has this specific sense: a pecia is, within this context, almost always a quire containing a portion of a certain text, intended for the quick production of relatively sound copies of that text.
164 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 253-254; L . J . BATAILLON, Exemplar, pecia, quaternus, CP/ICIMA II (1989), pp. 206-207. 165 TLL; DuC; NIERM.; NG. 166 D u C ; N I E R M . (4); BLAISE,
Lex (1).
190
quaternio, quaternus In patristic times the word quaternio was first used for a gathering of four folded bifolia (eight leaves).167 In the late twelfth or early thirteenth century the word quaternus (also quaternion or caternus, -num) was used in the same meaning."'8 For quires consisting of a different number of leaves different names were invented according to their size: a quinio or quinternus, for example, consisted of five bifolia (ten leaves), a senio or sexternus of six bifolia (twelve leaves).169 Soon it became common to refer to quires as quaterniones or quaterni regardless of their size. In some contexts, however, it was important to know the number of leaves in a quire, and in these cases it was reflected in the words used. In the —>pecia-system, for example, a quaternus (eight leaves) usually equalled two -specie (of four leaves each).170 It speaks for itself, moreover, that in the book trade in general and especially in professional scribal work the number of leaves in the quires was often specified. In the later Middle Ages quaternus or caternus was also used in the sense of'notebook', a gathering of several folded bifolia used for notes.171 The diminutives quaternulus, quaterniunculus or quaterniolus were used for loose quires or small booklets.172
167 Cf. W . WATTENBACH, Das Schriftwesen im Mittelalter (1896), pp. 176-180; K. PREISENDANZ, 'Quaternio', Paulys Realencyclopddu 47, col. 845-849; F. D O L B E A U , Nomsde livres, CTVJCIMA I I (1989), p. 96; L . J . BATAILLON, Exemplar,pecia, quaternus, CWICIMA II (1989), pp. 208-211. 168 W . W A T T E N B A C H , Das Schriftwesen im Mittelalter (1896), p. 177; K . P R E I S E N D A N Z , 'Quaternio', Paulys Realencyclopddie 47, col. 847. 169 Also: binio (2 bifolia), ternio or ternus (3 bifolia). 170 Note, however, that the taxations of works in quaterni are not always unequivocal. In Bologna, for example, unequal numbers of -specie were usually rounded down: eleven -specie equalled five quaterni. Cf. F.P.W. S O E T E R M E E R , Utrumque ius inpeciis (2002), pp. 134-138. X7lCf. G . B A R O N E , Les convents des Mendiants, des colleges deguise's?, CFVICIMA V I (1993), pp. 151, 154. She also notes the expression caternos scribere for 'to take notes' (of a lecture). l72For example, in library catalogues: F. D O L B E A U , Noms de livres, CIVTCIMA I I (1989), p. 96.
QUATERNIO, QUATERNUS
191
In classical Latin the plural adjective quaterni (derived from quattuor, 'four') was used in relation to things organised in fours: quadrumvirates of soldiers, for example, were called quaternae cohortae by Cicero. In the patristic period the substantive quaternio was formed, and used with a similar meaning. It was also used, however, for a gathering of several bifolia, usually four (a quire of eight leaves).173 In the Middle Ages Walahfrid Strabo distinguished between quaternio —a military leader of a quadrumvirate of soldiers— and quaternus —a quire of eight leaves.174 Others, however, used the two indiscriminately in the sense of 'quire', usually of eight leaves but also of other sizes.175 Besides quaternio and quaternus the forms caternio, caternus and quaternum {caternum) occur, and quaternio is sometimes used as a feminine noun rather than a masculine one.176
173 Cf. FORC; DuC. 174 Cf. BLAISE, Lex. 175 Cf. NIERM.
176 Notably by Alcuin, cf. W. WATTENBACH, Das Schriftwesen im Mittelalter (1896), p. 177 n. 3.
192
radere, eradere, rescribere The phenomenon of effacing a text from its material base (parchment or papyrus) in order to reuse the writing material is known in Antiquity and the Middle Ages.177 It was common practice, especially in the eighth and ninth centuries, when parchment must have been scarce and expensive. In these centuries the practice is attested in the great cultural centres of the Carolingian empire: Bobbio, Luxeuil, Fleury, Corbie and St. Gall. The incentive to erase texts must have been chiefly economic. The reasons to select certain manuscripts for reuse vary: they were often incomplete or damaged copies, written in scripts or languages that were obsolete or with contents that were outmoded or no longer of interest. The vocabulary used for the phenomenon, however, is not very specific. Palimpsestus, the word adopted from the Greek JiaXiu\|/T|OTOC, and present in our modern word 'palimpsest', is rare in Antiquity, and seems not to exist in the Middle Ages.178 To describe the phenomenon the verbs radere (or eradere, and sometimes abradere) —'to scrape'— or rescribere —'to write again'— were often used. Rasura was used for erasure. The way to prepare parchment leaves for rewriting was described in the Middle Ages: they were soaked in milk or a mixture containing milk and other substances (cheese, quicklime), and then scraped or rubbed with a knife {scalprum, scalpellum, rasorium, novacula), pumice stone (pumex) or chalk (creta). Already in Antiquity, the word radere, which had the general meaning of 'to scrape, scratch or rasp',179 was also used in the specific sense of 'to
177 See W. W A T T E N B A C H , Das Schriftwesen im Mittelalter (1896), pp. 299-317; E.A. L O W E , Codices rescripti (1972); G . K A R P P , 'Palimpsest', Lexikon des Mittelalters 6, col. 1641-1642. 178 D u C . gives one attestation of the term: 'Laur. in Amalth.'. This attestation, however, is untraceable. I h e reference could be to Laurentius of Monte Cassino, the later archbishop of AmalpAitanus, who lived in the first half of the eleventh century, but I have been unable to find the word in the latest edition of his works (F. N K W T O N (ed.), Laurentius monachus Casinensis archiepiscopus Amalfitanus Opera, M G H Quellen zur Geistesgeschichte des Mittelalters 7, Weimar 1973). 179 Cf. FORC; OLD.
RADERE, ERADERE, RESCRIBERE
193
rub clean a writing tablet', or 'to erase writing'.180 The medieval use of the word for the process of making a palimpsest (or scraping out individual words or phrases for the sake of correction) concurs with this ancient meaning. Rescribere, on the other hand, in Antiquity had the meaning of 'to write back' (in answer to a letter, but also in opposition or refutation), 'to answer or reply. It was also used in the sense of'to rewrite' a text, but not in tlie sense of 'to reuse a cleaned leaf'.181 In the Latin of the late-anantique Christian authors rescribere was used with these same meanings, and sometimes also as a synonym of transcribere, 'to copy'.182 By the end of the sixth century, however, the word was also used for the act of writing on recycled leaves, and it remained in use in this sense throughout die Middle Ages.183 The word palimpsestus (or palimpsestuni), adopted from the Greek raxA,iui|nicTO<; {i.e. %ak\.v, 'again', and xj/dcoo, 'to scrape or rub') was used only rarely in Antiquity,184 and seems to have disappeared in the Middle Ages. It resurfaces only in the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries.185
180 Cf. O L D (4). Other specific uses are to shave, prune or trim', 'to touch lightly in passing, graze, brush, skim'. 181
Cf. FORC; OLD.
182 Cf. B L A I S E , Diet. 183 Cf. W . W O T E N B A C H , Das Schriftwesen im Mittelalter (1896), pp. 30of., who mentions Gregory of Tours using the word in this sense. 184 Cf. T I . L ; F O R C ; O L D . They mention attestations in the sense of'palimpsest' (recycled leaf) in Cicero and Catullus. 185 Cf. 'palimpseste' in: Tresor de la langue frangaise 12 (1986), with a first attestation in the sixteenth century; and 'palimpsest' in the Oxford English Dictionary, with a first attestation in the seventeenth century.
194
sc(h)eda, sc(h)edula, protocollum From patristic times onwards scheda (or scedd) and its diminutive schedula {scedula, cedula, sc(h)iduld) were generally used for loose leaves, pieces of papyrus, parchment or paper which could be used as writing material, for taking notes, writing a letter, etc. Initially scheda was also used in the sense of 'preliminary version of a text, a text at the stage at which it had yet to be corrected, before it was written down in its final form.186 In addition it developed the meaning of 'a document written on a single sheet of parchment (or papyrus or paper)', such as a letter, charter, or will. 187 A word with a very similar background is protocollum, imported from the Greek TipooxoKoAAov. Originally it had the meaning of 'the first sheet of a papyrus roll' (a papyrus roll consisted of several leaves glued together). In medieval Latin it was used alongside schedula with the meaning of 'a loose sheet of writing material'.188 It is also used in the sense of'charter' (written on papyrus), 'preliminary draft of a charter', or 'a book with formulae for the writing of charters'.189 The diminutive schedula has the same meanings as scheda: a (small) piece of writing material, or a document written on a single sheet. Furthermore, schedula is used in the meaning of'a strip of parchment'. Sometimes, for example, a schedula or strip of parchment is attached to charters, either to function as a kind of seal itself or for attaching the
186 Jerome and Isidore use the term in this way, cf. F. D O L B E A U , Noms de livres, CIVIC1MA II (1989), p. 96. 187 O n this subject see W . W V T T E N B A C H , Das Schrifrwesen im Mine/alter (1896), pp. 198, 232, 412, 630; S. Rizzo, IIlessicofilologico degli umanisti (1984), pp. 305-306; F. D O L B E A U , Noms de livres, CIVICIMA I I (1989), p. 96; L . J . BATAII.LON, Exemplar, pecia, quaternus, CIWCIMA II (1989), p. 210. 188 Cf. L . J . BATAILLON, Exemplar, pecia, quaternus, CIVICIMA I I (1989), p. 210. 189 See D u C ; N I E R M . ; Lex.Lat.Ned. Medii Aevi. The latter also mentions protocollare — to make a brief note, or to register something or have it registered (in a notary's roll); and protocollarius or protocollator — one who makes protocolla. Note that in the same dictionary schedarius (or scedarius) is mentioned as synonymous to protocvllarius.
SC(H)EDA, SC(H)EDULA, PROTOCOLLUM
195
seal.190 In other sources strips of parchment used as amulets are referred to as schedulae.191 Both scheda and schedula, finally, sometimes have the same meaning as codicellus, libellus or -^-quaternio: booklets or leaflets too small in size to deserve to be called -^codices or -^volumina were often referred to as schedae or schedulae, especially in Carolingian times.192 The Greek ancestor of scheda (sceda) or schida (scida) is a%i5a, which was used for the strips which formed a papyrus sheet. In classical Latin the word was already also used for a small piece of writing material.193 In medieval Latin scheda and the diminutive schedula kept this meaning — a loose leaf, usually of parchment, or a scrap of parchment on which a short text could be written.194 In addition their meaning stretched to comprise all kinds of documents written on loose leaves: letters, charters, registers, notes etc.195
190 Cf. W . ' W A T T E N B A C H , Das Schriftwesen im Mittelalter (1896), pp. 197-198. 191 Cf. Lex.Lat.Ned. Medii Aevi (ib). In these examples the meaning of schedula is remarkably close to its Greek ancestor
Cf. OLD; L E W I S & SHORT.
194 Cf. B L A I S E , Diet.; B L A I S E , Lex. (1); Lex.Lat.Ned. Medii Aevi (1). 195 Cf. N I E R M . ; B L A I S E , Lex. (2); Lex.Lat.Ned. Medii Aevi (ib-d).
196
scriba, scriptor, notarius, dericus Throughout the Middle Ages the writing of books and records was by and large in the hands of professionals — mostly monks and clerics, who had learned to read and write in the schools of their monasteries, chapters or orders.196 In Antiquity and the Middle Ages, scriba and scriptor (and also the substantively used participle scribens) were generally used to signify 'writer', or 'scribe'.197 The term notarius often occurs in the context of the writing of documents, charters or records, alongside other terms for officials who produced or took care of documents, such as -^cancellarii,m c(h)artularii, scriniarii, tabelliones, amanuenses, etc.199 It was also used for those who
wrote down documents, letters or other texts at dictation.200 Already in Antiquity, however, notarius frequently signified a professional transcriber of books. -^Librarius and antiquarius, two terms for 'bookmen' used
196 O n this subject see W . WATTENBACH, Das Schrifiwesen im Mittelalter (1896), pp. 416488; for a short introduction and recent bibliography see O . M A Z A L , 'Schreiber', Lexikon des Mittelalters 7, col. 1552-1554. Note that both in Antiquity and in the Middle Ages 'author' and 'writer' are two distinct functions. Although the two activities are sometimes united in one person, in most cases they are not. The professional writer or scribe of Antiquity and the Middle Ages is mostly a transcriber. (See also —tauctor, anctoritas in Cat. III.) 197 The profession of writer was not entirely a men's affair. In a few medieval sources the female form scriptrix is also attested. W . WATTENBACH, Das Schrifiwesen im Mittelalter (1896), pp. 444-447, 478; BLAISE, Diet. 198 See -^cancellarius (Cat. I ) . 199 Note, however, that the writing of charters, documents, letters or records was mostly just one of their responsibilities. They also functioned as treasurers, keepers of archives or chests or their keys, office managers, etc. On the professional writers of charters and documents, see W . WATTENBACH, Das Schriftwesen im Mittelalter (1896), pp. 422-423, 456466; O . GUYOTJEANNIN, Le vocubulaire de la diplomatique en latin medieval, CIWCIMA II (1989), p. 127. zoo W. WATTENBACH, Das Schriftwesen im Mittelalter (1896), pp. 457-464; J . H A M E S S E , Le vocabulaire de la transmission orale des textes, CIVICIMA I I (1989), p. 172.
SCRIBA, SCRIPTOR, NOTABIUS, CLERICUS
197
in Antiquity and the Middle Ages, often appear in conjunction and/or synonymously with scriba, scriptor and notarius.201 Since until roughly the twelfth century education and literacy were reserved for members of the clergy, dericus was often used for 'someone who can read and write', and, by extension, for a '(professional) writer'.202 The terms scriba and scriptor, derived from the verb —>scribere, 'to write', speak for themselves. They were commonly used in Antiquity and the Middle Ages, both in the general meaning of'writer', 'scribe' or 'copyist', and in the more specific meaning of 'notary', 'secretary'.203 Scriba seems to be more common in Antiquity, and scriptor in the Middle Ages, but both occur in abundance in ancient and medieval sources. Notarius and dericus occur at least as often as scriba and scriptor. Originally the word notarius was used for a stenographer, a writer of shorthand (notae), or someone who writes down a text at dictation.204 Already in Antiquity it acquired the more general meaning of 'professional scribe', and it was used in a wide variety of specific meanings relating to 'scribe' in the Middle Ages.205 Notarius, clericus and similar terms (such as amanuensis, —tcancellarius (Cat. I ) , tabellio, etc.) originally seem to have come from the context of administration, and to be used for writers of documents, charters or records. In the context of the copying of books, on the other hand, scriptor seems to occur most often. The two categories of scribes and notaries, however, are not strictly divided, and their terms are just as often used as synonyms.
201 O n antiquarii see W. WATTENBACH, Das Schriftwesen im Mlttelalter (1896), p. 423425. In the late-antique period antiquarius was commonly used alongside and synonymously with -^libmrius. In the Middle Ages it is still used in the same meaning, but only sporadically. 202 See also -^clericus in Cat. I. 203 Cf. OLD; D u C ; N I E R M . ; B I A I S E , Lex. For notaries the expression scriptores publici was also used. 2O4Cf.TLL;OLD. 205 Cf. N I E R M . ; N G . See also —>notariw in Cat. I . On the semantic background of -> clericus see the relevant article in Cat. I.
198
scribere, transcribere Scribere, the most neutral term for the act of writing in medieval Latin, is most often used in the meaning of 'to write down' (an already existing text), 'to copy'. Often it is synonymous with transcribere, which literally means to transfer a text, from one manuscript or document to another, or from wax tablet to parchment or paper. Other terms for the copying of a text were translatare, rescribere,206 exemplare or (in the later Middle Ages) copiare.207 For the act of composing a text, being the author of a text, on the other hand, scribere is also occasionally used, but more specific verbs in this context are edere, componere, dare adpennam or dictare.20* W h e n scribere is used for the writing down of an original text, it still often emphasises the act of writing itself, rather than the composition of the text. Synonyms that stress the act of writing are, for example, graphiare (taken
206 Similarly, the participles transcriptum, tmnslatum and from the twelfth century onwards also rescriptum were used as nouns in the sense of 'copy', 'transcript'. Cf. O. G U Y O T J E A N N I N , Le vocabulaire de la diplomatique en latin medieval, CLVICLMAII (1989), p. 119; N I E R M . tmnslatum; B L A I S E , Lex., transcriptum. G U Y O T J E A N N I N further notes sumere (sumptum) and transsumere (transsumptum), which occur in the same meaning in the vocabulary of administrative documents in the fourteenth and fifteenth centuries. 207 On exemplum see -^exemplar. Copiare seems to be derived from a specific use of copia, which has the original meaning of abundance, plentiful supply. The D M L (4) cites examples of the use of the word in the specific meaning of 'copy from 1274 onwards, and connects it with the more general meaning of'the means of availing oneself of something', 'possession', or 'free use (of things)'. Cf. O L D (5 or 8) and D M L (2b). (For attestations from die German area see M W copia (IIB).) Copiare is attested from the fourteenth century onwards (cf. D u C ; D M L (2), B L A I S E , Lex.). B L A I S E , Lex. furthermore notes the medieval tautological form transcopiare. Copista (copyist) seems not to occur before the fifteenth century ( D M L ) . 208 Cf. -^dictare and -^edere in Cat. I I I .
SCRIBERE, TRANSCRIBERS
1 99
from the Greek ypotcpeiv),209 c(h)araxare (from the Greek and calamare (derived from -^calamus, pen).211 Finally, for writing on wax tablets a more specific set of terms was used in addition to the general scribere:212 stilum ducere, for example, 'to guide the stylus', implere ceras, 'to fill wax tablets' (with writing), or imprimere, 'to mark or imprint' (the wax with letters). Metaphorically exarare ('to plough'), pungere ('to prick'), sculpare ('to carve') or effigiare ('to mould') were used. In Antiquity scribere was used in the general meaning of'to write', and mostly implied the act of composing a text together with the act of writing it down — 'to put down in writing' or 'make a record of';213 'to compose a text',214 'to send in a letter' ,215 etc. Transcribere, on the other hand, was used in the meaning of 'to copy', 'to transfer (written matter) from one tablet or book to another'.216
209 Cf. W. W A T T E N B A C H , Das Schriftwesen imMittetalter(i%<)6), p. 261; D M L . The Greek Yponpeiv means to scratch' (lines or signs into a surface), but also 'to draw', 'to inscribe' or the general 'to write'. Cf. L S J . 210 The Greek xocpOKTOEiv literally means 'to make pointed", 'to sharpen', but is was also used for 'to cut into furrows', 'to scratch', and thence for 'to sketch, draw or engrave' (with letters). Cf. L S J . For the use of the word in medieval Latin see W . W A T T E N B A C H , Das Schriftwesen im Mittelaker (1896), pp. 261-262; D u C ; N I E R M . ; D M L ; M W . Here it had the meaning both of'to scratch' (lines or letters into a surface), to draw' or 'to write', and of'to erase', 'to rub out'. Medieval derivations are, among others, charaxator ('scribe') and charaxatura ('script' (and also: 'document') or 'erasure'). See D u C ; N I E R M . ; D M L ;
MW. 211 Note, however, that the verb calamare also had the meaning of'to gather stubble' (cf. D u C . ; D M L ) , and that the noun calamare is synonymous with calamarium: pen case, ink holder or the ensemble of both (cf. -^calamus, and see D M L ; M W ; B L A I S E , Lex.). 212 Cf. R . H . R O U S E & M . A . R O U S E , The Vocabulary ofWax Tablets, CIV1CIMAII (1989), pp. 227-229. 213 Cf. O L D (5). 214 O L D (12). 215 O L D (13). 216 O L D (1). Note also the meaning of'to make a false copy', 'to forge' — O L D (ib).
200
SCRIBERE, TRANSCRIBERS
Perhaps due to the fact that the act of writing had, in a way, become the domain of professionals,217 scribere and transcribere became by and large synonymous. The writing of a text as an author was usually not commonly referred to with the verb scribere, but rather with -^dictare, dare ad pennant, componere.
1VJ Note, for example, the expressions ars scribendi or an scriptoriae, 'the art of writing letters' (not the art of composing texts).
201
scriptorium In modern scholarship scriptorium is used in the sense of 'workshop for the production of books' — a place in which monks or lay professional scribes copied texts.218 In the Middle Ages, however, scriptorium had several other meanings as well: 'writing material', 'pen-case and/or inkholder', or 'stylus' (cf. ->graphium). First, Isidore used the word scriptorium to translate the originally Greek word -^graphium (ypatpeiov, 'stylus'), and throughout the Middle Ages this Isidorian meaning of 'stylus' kept being repeated.219 Secondly, the word was used in a more general sense for a range of instruments that were related to the act of writing, such as, for example, 'pen-case' or 'the ensemble of pen-case and ink-holder'.220 Thirdly, the word was used for places where books were made: the central writing room of a monastery or perhaps also a professional workshop of copyists,221 but also for an individual writing desk, or the individual cell of a monk with a lectern and writing material.222 In Antiquity the word scriptorium, a substantive formed from the adjective scriptorius, 'of or connected to writing', was only used in the sense
218 For an introduction to this phenomenon and references to further literature see O . M A Z A L , 'Skriptorium', Lexikon des Mittelalters 7, cols. 1992-1997; R . H . R O U S E , 'Manuscript Books, Production of, Dictionary of the Middle Ages 8, pp. 100-105. See also M . - C . G A R A N D , Manuscrits monastiques etscriptoria auxXI' etXII' siecles (1980). 219 Cf. —>graphium. See also W. W A T T E N B A C H , Das Schrijhuesen des Mittelalters (1896), p. 221; R . H . & M . A . R O U S E , The Vocabulary of Wax Tablets, CIWCIMA I I (1989), p. 224. 220 Cf. B L A I S E , Lex. (4); W . ^Xfo.TTENBACH, Das Schriftwesen des Mittelalters (1896), pp. 207, 243-244; P. GASNAULT, Les supports et les instruments de I'ecriture a I'epoque medievak, CIVICIMA II (1989), p. 32. See also —^calamus, penna, plumbum. 221 Cf. D u C . (1); B L A I S E , Lex. (1) ; N I E R M . (2). It is unclear whether this last meaning can also be read into the word. The word mostly occurs in monastic contexts, but S O U T E R also mentions the expression scriptorium regis — the scribal department of the King. More research has to be done before a clear conclusion can be drawn. 222 Cf. D u C . (4); B L A I S K , Lex. (5). See also W W A T T E N B A C H , Das Schriftwesen des
Mittelalters (1896), pp. 332, 430-432, 440, 442; P. G U M B E R T , Le texte intellectueU CLV1CIMA I (1988), p. 100. According to D u C . , the word was possibly also occasionally used for the chest in which books or writings were kept: D u C . (3).
202
SCRIPTORIUM
of'stylus' or 'ink-holder'.223 In the Middle Ages its meaning varied much more widely. It continued to refer to a stylus or some other piece of writing equipment (pen-case, ink-holder or the ensemble of the two), but was also used for the place in which books were made: the individual writing desk, the individual cell of a monk, or the central writing room of a monastery. The modern sense of the word scriptorium is thus only occasionally implied in the medieval context.
223 FORC; OLD.
203
stationarius, statio In documents pertaining to the book trade in the later Middle Ages (that is, the thirteenth century and later) the term stationarius occurs frequently, sometimes alongside and synonymously with -^libmrius, sometimes in set expressions such as stationarius librorum, stationarius peciarum, or stationarius universitatis.11* All in all, the meaning of the term is fairly imprecise, and varies in different contexts or geographical areas. Statio, which lies at the basis of stationarius, developed the meaning of'shop' or 'workshop' in the course of the twelfth century. It was applied to all kinds of ateliers and shops, including the workshop of professional scribes and/or booksellers. Stationarius, however, was almost exclusively used for one kind of tradesman only, that is, the bookman or stationer. In Bologna, where the earliest attestations of the term are found,225 two different kinds of stationarii are distinguished in the sources. First, the stationarius universitatis is mentioned, a function which was originally combined with that of beadle or -^bedellus generalis (Cat. I ) . In the statio of the beadle, one of whose many responsibilities was to keep the curricular texts, books and texts of vital importance to the university were held.226 Furthermore, in order to facilitate the copying of curricular texts
224 The best introduction to the book trade in medieval Paris is R . H . & M . A . R O U S E , The Book Trade at the University of Paris (1988); for the book trade in Bologna, see F . P W . S O E T E R M E E R , Utrumque ius in peciis (2002). I n these studies previous scholarly work on the subject is reviewed. See also K . W . H U M P H R E Y S , The Provision of Students' Text-Books (1979); O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 240-249; EP.W. S O E T E R M E E R , La terminologie de la librairie a Bologne, CTVICIMA I (1988), pp. 90-93. 225 In 1250 the statutes of the University of Bologna mention 'stacionarii exempla tenentes'. In 1228, however, in documents from the University of Padua, exemplatores (cf. —> exemplar) are mentioned, which suggests that stationers existed long before the middle of the thirteenth century. Cf. F.P.W. S O E T E R M E E R , Utrumque ius in peciis (2002), pp. 49-50; O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 244. 226 The beadle's statio had many other functions as well: it was the place in which, for example, lists were kept of names of bookbinders or examination regulations, where statements were made concerning the rent oi^-hospitia (Cat. I ) , and where the -^rectores (Cat. I) of the University held court twice a week. This statio was called statio generalis, statio publica, statio universitatis. F.P.W. S O E T E R M E E R , Utrumque ius in peciis (2002), p. 81.
204
STATIONARIUS, STATIO
corrected and approved copies (—^exemplaria) were rented out per quire (—>pecia). The bookmen who kept these -^exemplaria were called stationariipeciarum.221 Stationarii librorum or venditores librorumni, finally, were bookmen who acted as agents for book-sales and produced new books on commission. One should note, however, that the existence of the different expressions does not necessarily imply that there were only specialised shops or tradesmen. On the contrary, in most cases the sources suggest that stationarii were scribes, keepers of -^exemplaria and booksellers all at once, and sometimes even also illuminators or bookbinders.229 In Paris, the term stationarius was almost always used in combination with —>lii>rarius.m The distinction between the two is not always easy to detect, and in some contexts the terms seem interchangeable. In general, however, the use of the term stationarius (instead of or in addition to —> librarius) seems to indicate that the bookman in question rented out —> pecie to students or masters. Stationarii, in other words, were booksellers with an additional function rather than a different one.231 Thus, a typical stationer, so it seems, would display a sheet in his shop window showing a list of all his -^exempLtria, their number of -specie and their official rental prices (cf. -^taxatio).
227 In this context, where presumably the stationarius was often also the scribe of the —> exemplar, stationarius is sometimes synonymous with exempLztor or scriptor. Cf. F.P.W. S O E T E R M E E R , La terminologie de la librairie a Bologne, CWICIMA I (1988), p. 92. 228 The expression stationarius qui vendit libros is also found in the sources, cf. F.P.W. S O E T E R M E E R , Utrumque ius in perils (Z002), pp. 45-47; and I D . , La terminologie de la librairie de Bologna, CWICIMA I (1989), p. 91. 229 R . H . & M . A . R O U S E , The Book Trade at the University of Paris (1988), pp. 94, 96, 101.
230 The term is attested in the sources of the University of Paris from 1275 onwards. Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 245. 231 Richard and Mary Rouse defined it as follows: 'those librarii who were stationers rented out peciae, and those librarii who were not stationers did not.' R . H . & M . A . R O U S E , The Book Trade at the University of Paris (1988), p. 43.
STATIONARIUS, STATIO
205
Stationarii, who are found besides Italy and France also in Spain,232 were under the protection but also the control of the university.233 In the fourteenth century the university's records even mention them as officers of the university. In exchange for tax exemption and a monopoly of the university's trade, they were ordered to swear oaths and to commit themselves to rent out only reliable, correct —>exemplaria, and to refrain from overcharging their university customers. They were restricted to the role of intermediary in secondhand sales, and could only make a small margin of profit. Statio, literally 'the state of standing still', had many meanings in classical Latin, and retained many of these in the Middle Ages.234 It is used for the stationary position of a planet, an armed post or military garrison, or for a place of business, such as a market-stall or office. From this latter meaning the use of statio for 'shop' developed, which became common in the course of the twelfth century.235 In classical Latin stationarius existed only as an adjective and was originally restricted to a military use: (a soldier) belonging to a certain post or detachment.236 In medieval Latin it kept this meaning, but it was also used for different kinds of persons that were 'bound to a certain place'; a canon in residence, for example,
232 In English sources stationarii also occur, but it seems that the term here has a different meaning. Stationarii were certainly involved in the university book trade, but their principal role seems to have been not to sell or hire books, but to assess the value of pledges or sequestered goods. Usually students pledged books, and the stationarius put these on the market if they were not redeemed. In fact, however, these pledges could be anything unperishable. The existence of stationarii in the English university sources, therefore, does not prove that their book trade was organised similarly to that of Paris or Bologna. See M . B . P A R K E S , The Provision of Books (1992.), pp. 418-422 and 462-467. 233 O n this subject see F E W . S O E T E R M E E R , Utrumque ins inpeciis (2002), pp. 8-12; R . H . & M.A. R O U S E , The Book Trade at the University of Paris (1988), pp. 47-51. 234 Cf. FORC; OLD; NIERM.
235 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 246. 236 FORC; OLD. 237 D u C ; N I E R M . ;
Jfa
BLAISE,
Lex.
206
STATIONARIUS, STATIO
Although statio was used, in the twelfth century and later, for all kinds of shops (a bakery or butcher's for example), the substantive use of stationarius in the sense of 'the owner of a statio' is almost only used for booksellers.238 Both the term (in this meaning) and the phenomenon seem to have been created by the university community.239
238 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 247. 239 R . H . & M.A. ROUSE, The Book Trade at the University of Paris (1988), p. 43.
207
tabula cerata Throughout Antiquity and the Middle Ages wax tablets were common writing material.240 'Until quite late in the Middle Ages', Richard and Mary Rouse write, 'virtually everyone who learned to write did so on a wax tablet; and virtually everyone who made a draft, of letter or lyric, treatise or document, did so on a wax tablet.'241 In its basic form a wax tablet is a hollowed slab of wood or ivory, which was filled with a layer of beeswax to form a surface for writing. Letters were carved in this layer with a sharp instrument, usually called a -^graphium or stylus.141 The most common terms for wax tablets are tabula, tabella or tabellula, sometimes accompanied by die adjective cerata or cerea,24^ sometimes not. Luxurious tablets were made from ivory {tabulae eburneae, tabulae delex ebore) or other costly materials, but most tablets were made of wood.244 Buxum (box wood) was sometimes used figuratively for the whole writing tablet.245 Just as the 'tablet'-part could be used as a pars pro
240 W . W A T T E N B A C H , Das Schrifiwesen im Mittelalter (1896), pp. 51-89; R. B U L L , 'Beitrag 9: Wachs als Beschreib- und Siegelstoff— Wachsschreibtafeln und ihre Verwendung', in: Das grofie Buch vom Wachs 2 (1977), pp. 785-887; P. GASNAULT, Les supports et les instruments de I'e'criture, CIWCIMA I I (1989), pp. 22-24; R - H . & M.A. R O U S E , The Vocabulary of Wax Tablets, CTVICIMA I I (1989), pp. 220-230; E . L A L O U , Inventaire des tablettes medievales et presentation generate (1992). 241 R . H . & M.A. R O U S E , The Vocabulary of Wax Tablets, p. 220. 242 On the largely metaphorical language used for the act of writing on wax see R . H . & M A . R O U S E , The Vocabulary ofWax Tablets, CTVICIMA I I (1989), pp. 227-229. Terms for 'ploughing' (exarare), 'pricking' (pungere) or 'moulding' (effigiari) are used to describe the process. 243 Another expression mentioned by R . H . & M . A . R O U S E is tabula cera illita (The Vocabulary of Wax Tablets, CTVICIMA II (1989), p. 221). 244 E . L A L O U , Inventaire des tablettes medievales et presentation generate (1992), p. 234: she mentions tablets made of horn, bone, leather, silver or gold. At the end of the Middle Ages there are examples of writing tablets in which wax and parchment or paper leaves are combined. 245 Also: tabellae buxeae, buxa cerata. Cf. P. GASNAULT, Les supports et les instruments de I'ecriture, CTVICIMA II (1989), p. 23.
208
TABULA CERATA
toto, so the 'wax'-part could serve the same purpose: cera, or more often the plural cerae, and ceraculum are common words for wax tablets.246 For several tablets attached together (most commonly two) specialized terminology could be used: dipticha,247 polypticha, duplices, triplices, multiplices, -^codices or caudices. However, expressions such as bina tabula, duae tabulae, etc. were more common in the Latin of the Middle Ages. The separate planks of these 'wax books' were referred to as folia or paginulae.™ In Antiquity and the Middle Ages, the adjective pugillaris (small enough to hold in the hand) was also used as a noun in the meaning of wax tablet.249 The background of these terms is not very revealing. The terminology was essentially adopted from Antiquity,250 and remained in use in the same meanings in the Middle Ages. Only ceraculum seems to be a medieval invention,251 as well as the variant dictica for diptycha with its own forged etymological explanation.
246 For examples of cera in this metonymical meaning see T L L (2a, 3a); MW (IAib), B L A I S E , Lex.
(2).
247 Note that diptic(h)a had its own corrupt variant, dictica, which was falsely explained as 'a tablet suitable for dictators' (that is: those who dictate). D u C : dictica and diptycha, W . 'WATTENBACH, Das Schriftwesen im Mittelalter (1896), pp. 60-61. 248 O n polyptychs see R . H . Sc M . A . ROUSE, The Vocabulary of Wax Tablets, CF/ICIMA II (1989), pp. 212-224. 249 Cf. P. GASNAULT, Les supports et les instruments de I'ecriture, CIVICIMA I I (1989), pp. 23-24. Note, however, that it was also used for other small objects: N I E R M . , for example, mentions the sense of'small tube used to administer eucharistic wine to the faithful'. 250 Cf., for example, cera T L L (2a, 3a); O L D (3d, 4); tabula O L D (6); pugillares
OLD. 251 D u C . cites three examples taken from early medieval Irish saints' lives.
209
taxatio, taxator In the thirteenth and fourteenth centuries, when the system of renting out manuscripts per quire or -^pecia was devised, to facilitate the fast production of many copies of the same text, the universities also came up with a system to control the prices of books.252 In Bologna,253 the two -^rectores (Cat. I) of the University had the task of determining the official number of specie of a certain text — this was called the taxatio of the -^exemplar (a university-approved copy of the text). This system was adopted by other Italian universities, which often even adopted the Bolognese assessment and only translated the rates to their own currency. Later, the assessment of the number of —specie probably fell under the responsibilities of so-called peciarii (cf. -^pecid). The central fixing of rates led to two developments. First, the price of an -^exemplar was expressed in -specie, but the number of -specie no longer needed to correspond to the actual number of quires or half-quires of which the text consisted. Secondly, a standard length of-specie developed: according to the norm a -^pecia comprised 16 columns of 62 lines, each line containing 32 characters. In Paris,254 the taxatio of -^exemplaria was carried out differently. Although the earliest records show that the task originally also fell to the central authorities from the university, i.e. the -Erector, the proctors of die —tnationes and representative masters of higher faculties, setting rates for the hire of -^exemplaria was not a matter of central administration. The taxatio-lists that survive255 are assessments of individual -^exempla-
252 For descriptions of the taxation system see R . H . & M A R O U S E , The Book Trade at the University of Paris (1988), pp. 76-78; F.P.W. S O E T E R M E E R , Utrumque ius in peciis (2002), pp. 119-165; O . W E I J E R S , Terminotogie des universites (1987), pp. 250-253. 253 F.P.W. S O E T E R M E E R , Utrumque ius in peciis (2002), pp. 119-165. 254 R . H . & M . A . R O U S E , The Book Trade at the University of Paris (1988), pp. 76-78. 255 Only two taxatio-lists of the University of Paris survive: the first is an anonymous list from circa 1275, the second is from the -^statio of Andrew of Sens, and dates from 1304. These lists contain the title of a work, the number of -specie and (often but not always) the rental price for the whole manuscript. R . H . & M . A . R O U S E , The Book Trade at the University of Paris (1988), Appendix 1.1A (pp. 86-87).
210
TAXATIO, TAXATOR
ria kept in individual bookshops (-^stationes) — displayed, even, in the window of that shop. In the late thirteenth and early fourteenth century the university records show that officers were appointed for the task: so-called taxatores are appointed at the beginning of each term, probably chosen by the —Erector from among die members of the university. They were to set the rates of the -^exemplaria kept by the stationers (—> stationarii). In 1316, however, these taxatores were no longer chosen from among the members of the university, rather four men were appointed from among the sworn Hibrarii et stationarii. The wordings of the later regulations show that tliese officers had powerful, lucrative positions.256 The semantic backgrounds of taxatio and taxator are discussed under taxare in Cat. I, where the term is used in the context of standard prices for a students board and lodging. The use of the terms in the context of books does not differ essentially from this earlier usage, and one can perhaps infer that it derives from it. The basic meaning of 'to set a standard price' is present in both contexts.
256 Allusions to bribery or foul play suggest that they did not refrain from abusing their powers. Cf. R . H . & M . A . R O U S E , The Book Trade at the University of Paris (1988), p. 77 and n. 134.
211
volumen, tomus In Antiquity and in the Middle Ages, the word volumen was used in the general sense of'book' or 'written text'.257 Originally volumen referred to scrolls or text written on scrolls and, in this sense, was used in opposition to -^codex, written text preserved in 'book'-form.258 In the course of time, however, both terms came to refer to written text in general, and in certain contexts became interchangeable with each other and with —>liber.259 What remained was the notion of the shortness of the written text in question: volumen is often used to refer to charters, deeds or documents, or to a specific part of a work. Tomus (thomus) and its diminutives tomellus or tomulus are only rarely used in the Middle Ages, and became more common only in the Renaissance. They do not have specific meanings, but are used (alongside -either or volumen) for texts, parts of texts or (alongside -^codex) the physical form of a text — a 'book'.260
257 F O R C ; O L D . See also F. D O L B E A U , Noms de livres, CFVICIMA I I (1989), pp. 79-99, where the semantic developments of the three most common terms for 'book' in the Middle Ages, —tliber, -^codex and volumen, are analysed. 258 In the Greek world, this same distinction was expressed by the terms eiA,r|T6v or eiXr|T(xptov (from die verb eiAeco, 'to roll') and m-OKTiov/jn^lov (from the verb JCTOCTCO, 'to fold'). Cf. J . I R I G O I N , Terminologie du livre et de I'ecriture dans le monde byzantin, CTVICIMA II (1989), pp. 13-14. In the early Middle Ages, someone like Gottschalk of Orbais was still aware of the etymological relation between volvo and volumen, and the basic meaning of 'scroll'. As the contemporary equivalent of volumen in this sense of 'scroll', however, he mentions -^rotula (Cat. I ) . Cf. K D O L B E A U , Noms de livres, CIVJCIMA II (1989), p. 82 and 11.18. 259 See F. D O L B E A U , Noms de livres, CIV1CIMA I I (1989), pp. 83, 88, 90-92 and 98 for the relations between the three terms. Dolbeau's general conclusion is that in the early Middle Ages, volumen and —tcodex were interchangeable, and that from the eleventh century onwards the word -^codex started to disappear from the Latin vocabulary, while volumen took over its meaning. 260 Cf. F. D O L B E A U , Noms de livres, CIVIC1MA I I (1989), pp. 97-98.
212
VOLUMEN, TOMUS
Already in Antiquity the word volumen, originally used — as a derivative of volvo, 'to roll or to move in a circular motion' — for a roll of papyrus, acquired the extended meaning of a book in any form.261 In the Middle Ages the word kept this meaning, and developed some others in addition. First, volumen was used in the general meaning of'written work', 'book', and could thus refer to a work in its entirety (subdivided into chapters or librt) — x libri in uno volumine. Secondly, it was used in the sense of 'part of a work', in which case one can speak of a work subdivided into several volumina — liber/codex in x voluminibus. When volumen was applied to part of a work, it could refer to a part within a book that was physically one entity, or to a part of a larger work that was a physical entity in itself: a 'volume' in the modern sense of the word.262 Thirdly, the term was used to refer to a short text (in principle suitable for preservation on a scroll): a charter, deed or letter.263
261 Cf. OLD. 262 Cf. O. W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen dge, CIVICIMA I V (1991), p. 29: volumen occurs here, alongside words such as -either, capitulum or versus (cf. -^capitulum in Cat. Ill), in a list of classical names for subdivisions of a work. 263 Cf. O. G U Y O T J E A N N I N , Le vocabulaire de la diplomatique en latin medieval, CIVICIMA II (1989), p. 122. The more common word for charter or deed, however, is —> c(h)arta or c(h)artula. Cf. also N I E R M . ; LATHAM.
Category I I I The Vocabulary of Teaching Methods, Instruments and Products of Intellectual Life accessus ad auctorem alphabetum (-us), alphabetarium, abecedarium (h)arenga, (h)arengare, propositum auctor, (actor, aut(h)or), auctoritas audire, auditor, auditio, auditus brocarda, brocardica capitulum, titulus, rubrica, paragraphus, articulus collatio commentari, commentarius (-ium), commentum, commentator compilare, compilatio, compilator concordantia cursus, cursorius (-ie), cursor, (cursare) dedarare, declaratio; exponere, expositio; explanare, explanation interpretari, interpretatio derivatio, compositio determinate, determinatio, determinator, subdeterminator dictare, pronuntiare disputatio, disputare, qu(a)estio disputata distinctio, distinguere edere, editio, editor, publicare, publicatio, publicator etymologia examinare, examen, examinatio, conventus, examinator exemplum fallacia glossa, glosa glossarium, vocabularium, dictionarius incipere, inceptio, inceptor, resumere, resumptio insolubile interpretari (-tare), interpretatio, transferre, translatio, vulgarizare (-zatio), theutonizare (-zatio) involucrum, integumentum
legere, lectio, lectura, legibilis obligatio opponere, opponens; respondere, respondens ordinarius (-ie), extraordinarius (-ie) postilla pr(a)edicare, pr(a)edicatio, sermo pr(a)esentare, pr(a)esentatio, pr(a)esentator, deponere, depositio, depositor principium, vesperie promovere, promotio, promotor, promovendus punctum qu(a)estio, dubium quodlibet, quodlibetalis, quodlibetarius, quodlibeticus regere, regimen repertorium, inventarium reportare, reportatio, reportator sententia, summa sophisma, sophistaria syllogismus, conclusio, corollarium syncategoremata, consignificantia tabula, registrum (regestum)
215
accessus ad auctorem Texts on the curricula of medieval schools were often preceded by short introductions to the author and text, the so-called accessus ad auctores.1 These introductions contained biographical information about the author and touched briefly on the subjects treated in the text at hand. They were organised according to certain schemes, adopted from late-antique educational practice. In each of these schemes usually seven questions (the so-called septem circumstantiae or periochiae) were asked at the beginning of the text, to help the reader focus on the important issues:2 Scheme adopted from Scheme adopted from Scheme adopted from the field of Grammar Servius the field of Rhetoric locus vitapoetae quis (place) tempus (time) persona (author)
(life of the poet)
(who?)
titulus opens (title of the work) qualitas carminis (nature of the poem)
quid (what?) cur (why?)
causa (reason)
intentio scribentis quomodo (the purpose of the (how?) writer) res numerus librorum quando (subject) (the number of books) (when?) modus ordo librorum ubi (manner) (the order of books) (where?) explanatio materia or facultas quibus facultatibus (introduction to its (discipline) (subject or discipline?) contents) After: G . G L A U C H E , 'accessus ad auctores', Lexikon desMittelalters i , col. 71-72.
1 Cf. E.A. Q U A I N , The Medieval accessus ad auctores (1945); G . G L A U C H E , Schullektiire im Mittelalter (1970), pp. 37-6T, 118-127. See also his article 'accessus ad auctores' in the Lexikon des Mittelalters I , col. 71-72; P. K L O P S C H , Einfuhrung in die Dichtungskhren des lateinischen Mittelalters (1980), pp. 48-64; and A J . M I N N I S , Medieval Theory of Authorship (X984)> e s P - PP- '3"29- A . J . Minnis notes that the accessus was also called materia (by 'glossators of the Roman Law') or introitus or ingressus (by 'scriptural exegetes'); p. 15 and n. 41 (pp. 222-223). See also -^principium. 2 For a description of the content of these (and other) questions see A J . M I N N I S , Medieval Theory of Authorship (1984), pp. 19-29.
216
ACCESSUS AD AUCTOREM
Early medieval examples of accessus organised in accordance with these schemes date from the Carolingian period. In the ninth century, remarkable combinations of the schemes are found among authors of the intellectual circles around Johannes Scottus, Sedulius Scottus, Heiric of Auxerre, etc. At the end of the ninth century Remigius of Auxerre was a particularly active author of accessus ad auctores.3 The genre flourished particularly in die twelfth century, with authors such as Conrad of Hirschau and Bernard of Utrecht.4 Under the influence of new works on rhetoric and dialectic new schemes of ordering the short introductions gradually replaced the late-antique ones. Usually only three or four questions were asked instead of the original seven, such as operis materia (the subject matter of the work), scribentis intentio (the purpose of the writer), cut parti philosophiae supponatur (to which branch of 'philosophy' or learning the work belonged),5 and utilitas or finalis causa (the ultimate usefulness or justification of the work, i.e. the reason why it was part of the curriculum). The technique had, by then, become a common educational practice. In the thirteenth century the tradition seems to have run its course. Examples of accessus ad auctores from that century onwards are less frequent, and show a mere survival of a practice that had largely lost its real meaning.6 In the context of the university, however, accessus remained very popular. They were often combined with, or replaced by, a scheme in which the four Aristotelian causae were presented.7 From the term accessus, which basically means 'approach', several meanings were derived already in Classical Antiquity. It was used for the approach of two heavenly bodies, of die enemy (attack), for the right of approach or audience, or for the onset of fever or disease.8 The specific
3 Cf. J . C . FRAKES, Remigius of Auxerre, Eriugena, and the Greco-Latin CircumstantiaeFormula (1988). 4 See R . B . C . H U Y G E N S , Accessus ad auctores (1970). 5 On the term philosophia in this particular context see A . J . M I N N I S , Medieval Theory of Authorship (1984), pp. 18 and 23-27. 6 E.A. Q U A I N , The Medieval accessus ad auctores (1945), p. 262. 7 O. W E I J E R S , Le maniement du savoir (1996), p. 58. 8 Cf. T L L ; O L D .
ACCESSUS AD AUCTOREM
217
meaning of 'approach' in the sense of 'introduction' (to an author or work) is a late-antique invention and goes back to the fifth- and sixthcentury commentary tradition on logical and other works of Aristotle.9 In the Middle Ages the term accessus remained in use, in addition to the specific meaning of 'introduction' described above,10 in its other meanings, such as 'approach', 'onset' (of illness or fever), 'attack', 'audience'.11
9 E.A. Q U A I N , The Medieval accessus ad auctores (1945), p. 263, suggests that the practice was adopted by medieval authors under the dominant influence of Boethius, who wrote an accessus to Porphyry in his commentary on the Isagoge. 10 Cf. MW (IIA3). 11
Cf. D u C ; N I E R M . ; B L A I S E , Lex.
218
alphabetum (-us), alphabetarium, abecedarium The principle of ordering items in a text according to the letters of the alphabet was part of the classical inheritance of the medieval world.12 Until the twelfth century, however, it was only rarely used as a means of organising lists. Before the twelfth century, other organising principles prevailed (a systematical or logical ordering), and when items were ordered alphabetically (which was usually only the case for lexicographical works such as -^glossaria), this often did not go further than the first, second or third letter. Only in the twelfth century did an absolute alphabetical ordering become more or less standard, but until the end of the Middle Ages authors using the principle of alphabetical organisation felt the need to explain their method in a preface. Meanwhile, in the course of the twelfth century and particularly in the thirteenth century, as the need for research-instruments grew, more and more scholars used alphabetical classification for the creation of these instruments. Thus the alphabet became a basic organising principle for collections of sermons, concordances, -^distinctiones, -^exempla, etc. Terms used in the context of alphabetical ordering are alphabetum (with its derivation alphabetarium) and abecedarium.13 Both alphabetum and abecedarium can be used in two meanings: i. the alphabet itself,14 and 2. a text ordered alphabetically. Furthermore, alphabetarium was used (though not very frequently) in the later Middle Ages in the second meaning only. Alphabetum (or also alfabetum) in die sense of 'alphabet' is found mainly in expressions such as per or secundum ordinem (seriem, cursum)
12 There is a large bibliography on the subject. For a concise overview of recent scholarship see O . W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen age, CIVICIMA I V (1991), pp. 14-17. Central studies she cites are, among others, L W . DALY, Contributions to a History of Alphabetization (1967); and R . H . & M.A. R O U S E , 'History of Alphabetization', Dictionary of the Middle Ages 1, pp. 204-207. 13 O n these terms see O . W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen age, CTVICIMA IV (1991), pp. 18-21. 14 For the individual letters of the alphabet the words littera and elementum were commonly used, and occasionally also figura. Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen dge, CIVICIMA IV (1991), pp. 21, 61-62, 66.
ALPHABETUM (-US), ALPHABETARIUM, ABECEDARIUM
219
alphabetic or per or secundum littems alphabeti. Abecedarium only became common from the twelfth century onwards, when it was used for dictionaries and other alphabetically ordered collections. It occurs in all kinds of spellings, such as abcdarium (-darius), abezedarius, abescetarius, abicidarium, etc. Alphabetum is a post-classical word. In Antiquity the standard expression for 'alphabetical order' was ordo littemrum. In the Christian period the term was adopted from the Greek.15 Throughout the Middle Ages it was used in the meanings described above." Alphabetarium was probably derived from alphabetum after the example of abecedarium. Although the adjective alphabetarius is first attested at the end of the eleventh century, the substantive alphabetarium was only used from the twelfth century onwards. It only became common as late as the fifteenth century.17 Like alphabetum, abecedarium is a post-classical word. Saint Augustine used abecedarius as an adjective in the expression psalmi abecedarii for die psalms in which the opening letters of the stanzas were in alphabetical order.18 There are some examples of the use of the term, also as a substantive, from the early Middle Ages, but its more frequent use began in the twelfth century.19
15 Cf. TLL (col. 1721); BLAISE, Diet. 16 Cf.MW;DML. 17 Cf. O . WF.IJF.RS, Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen age, CFVICIMA I V (1991), p. 19
(and n. 34). 18 Cf. ibid., p. 20 (and n. 48). 19 Cf. ibid., pp. 20- 21. For a list of attestations from the early Middle Ages see n. 49.
220
(h)arenga, (h)arengare, propositum The term arenga {(h)ar(r)eng(u)a, (h)ar(r)anga, (h)ar(r)inga), a medieval term which still lives on in modern Romanic languages (Fr. 'harangue'; It. 'arringa', Sp. 'arenga'), occurs in sources from the faculties of Law from the fourteenth century onwards.20 In this particular context an arenga is a public speech — it is one of the official occasions at which bachelors must present themselves to the public, in order to be granted the licence to teach. The arenga was not, however, an examination or dispute, but rather a eulogy on the study of Law itself.21 Another example of such a public speech as part of the Law curriculum is the so-called propositum, the public occasion on which candidates for the bachelor's degree of Law had to treat certain —> questiones from the field of Canon Law. The ceremony was similar to that of the —> detei"minatio at the Faculty of Arts: disputations during which die candidate had to defend his position and refute opponents. The propositum is also first attested in the fourteenth century.22 Derived from arenga was the verb arengare, which had the meaning of 'to deliver a speech', 'to utter' (a speech) or even 'to take the floor'.23 Arenga is a medieval Latin word, apparently derived from the Germanic root 'hring', circle.24 It was used in the meaning of 'meeting, assembly',
20 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 404 n. 90; C . THUROT, De ['organisation de I'enseignement dans I'Universite de Paris (1850), p. 172; G . P E R I E S , La Faculte de droit dans I'ancienne Universite de Paris (1890), p. 117. Some examples of arengae from a fourteenth-century manuscript from Padua are described in G . FRANSEN & D . M A F F E I , Harangues universitaires duXTV sieck (1971). 21 See also D u C , under arengua, with examples from the fifteenth and sixteenth centuries. 22 Cf. O. W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 4O4n. 90, with references to C. T H U R O T and G. P E R I E S . 23 Cf. NIERM.; MW.
24 Cf. N I E R M . ; M W (with references to *hringus and *rengum, but these lemmata have not yet appeared in print); S. BATTAO.LIA, Grande dizionario della lingua italiana I , (1961), p. 689 and 641.
(H)ARENGA, (H)ARENGARE, PROPOSITUM
221
and of 'public speech' on an official occasion, such as the meetings at which bachelors presented themselves.25 The term also has the meaning, however, of 'introductory formula' in charters — the medieval equivalent of the classical prooemia, full of common-places and citations.26 The relation between these two uses has not been researched, but perhaps the two are compatible in some degree. Arengae held at the Faculties of Law seem to have been eulogic in nature, and they may have fulfilled the same function as the arengae of charters: that of a public and official introduction to a document or subject.27
25 Cf. D u C ; N I E R M (1-2); B L A I S E , Lex. (1-2); M W (1); Lex.Lat.Ned. MediiAevi (2). 26 Cf. H . F I C H T E N A U , 'arenga, Lexikon des Mittelalters 1, col. 917-918; M W (2) and Lex.Lat.Ned. MediiAevi (1). 27 The etymological background of arenga (circle, meeting) seems closer to the meaning of'public speech' than 'introductory formula'.
222
auctor, (actor, aut(h)or), auctoritas The terms auctor and auctoritas had strong connotations of 'veracity' and 'sagacity'.28 An auctor was the author of not just any literary work, but a work with officially acknowledged authority, worthy of study and imitation.29 Auctoritas, on the other hand, was used not only for the abstract notion of'authority', 'prestige' or 'esteem', but also for the authoritative texts themselves, or for quotations or extracts from the works of auctores.30 The two terms are related in an almost circular way: an auctor was the creator of a book worth reading, and an auctoritas was a book worth reading, written by an auctor. Consequendy, books of unknown or uncertain authorship possessed less auctoritas — a phenomenon which explains the tendency of the medieval world to accept improbable attributions to older and respected writers. The ultimate authority, of course,
28 O n these terms see M . - D . C H E N U , Auctor, actor, autor (1927); A . J . M I N N I S , Medieval Theory of Authorship (1984), csp. pp. 10-12; the articles on 'auctor' and 'auctoritas' by G. B E R N D T in Lexikon des Mittelalters 1, cols. 1189-1190; and several articles in the recent volume edited by M . Z I M M E R M A N , Auctor et auctoritas (2001). 29 The medieval etymologies of auctor are telling in this respect. Medieval lexicographers such as Papias (Ekmentarium or —as Minnis prefers to call it— De linguae latinae vocahulis, around 1050) and Hugucio of Pisa {Derivationes, around 1200) linked the term to agere (to act, perform, i.e. the act of writing), augere (to grow, i.e. to bring (a literary work) into being), auieo (to tie, since the classical poets 'tied' tlieir verses together with feet and metres) and the Greek word a"O0ev9r|i; ('authentic' in the sense of 'authoritative'). A . J . M I N N I S refers to PAPIAS, De linguae latinae vocabulis, [s. 1, 1476], s.v. auctor, and H U G U C I O , Magnae derivationes, [Oxford, Bodleian Library, M s . Bodley 367, fol. ir], s.v. augeo. Medieval Theory of Authorship, pp. 219-220, note 6. M . - D . C H E N U , Auctor, actor, autor (1927), pp. 85-86, argues that the medieval variant orthography of the term, author, derives from linking auctor with authenticus. Actor, as is argued in the same article, in the Middle Ages took the sense of auctor: author of a literary work. 30 Especially in the context of education; cf. G . B E R N D T , 'auctoritas', Lexikon des Mittelalters 1, col. 1190; MW (VIB3b). On the use of the term auctoritates in the context of anthologies or florilegia, see O . W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen age, CTVTCJMA TV (1991), pp. 85-88. A famous example is the Auctoritates Aristotelis (ed. b y j . H A M E S S E , Louvain, Paris 1974), a collection of extracts from works of Aristotle.
AUCTOR, AUCTORITAS
223
was God, and the authoritative book par excellence was the Bible.31 The status of (late) antique pagan works was less clear-cut, but in general these works too were seen as highly authoritative:32 the philosophical and ethical truths of pagan fables were disguised under exotic masks, but they were there nevertheless, and could be uncovered in a Christian interpretation (cf. -^involucrum). Modern writers, on the other hand, were (at least before the thirteenth century)33 rarely called auctores,34 and contemporary literary works hardly ever acquired the status of auctoritas. Apart from the Bible, the Church Fathers and the works of the classical poets, every discipline had its own auetoritates: Priscian and Donatus in grammar, Cicero in rhetoric, Hyginus and Ptolemy in astronomy, etc. The study of their texts formed the basis of the medieval educational system. In Antiquity, auctor already had among its meanings 'the person who wrote a book',35 but also 'authority' or 'acknowledged expert'.36 Auctoritas was used in the abstract sense of'authority', 'prestige' or 'esteem'.37 In the Middle Ages the two concepts were (in addition) united into one meaning: an auctor was an 'author, worthy to be read',38 and when a work or author was called an auctoritas it was officially acknowledged as 'worthy to be read'. Moreover, especially in the context of education in the thirteenth century and later, the term auctoritas acquired a concrete meaning in addition to its abstract one: 'a sententious work or phrase', 'a curricular text'.39
31 O n this see A J . M I N N I S , Medieval Iheory of Authorship (1984), pp. 33-39. 32 See ibid., pp. 112-117. 33 G . B E R N D T argues that after the thirteenth century medieval texts gradually replaced the ancient ones in the school curriculum. 34 A J . M I N N I S , Medieval Theory of Authorship (1984), p. 12: 'From all this, it would seem that the only good auctor was a dead one'. 35 O L D (13 c). 36 O L D (2, 6, 8-9). 37 O L D (7-8,11,13). 38 D M L (b). MW has a long list of specific uses of auctor, ranging from 'Creator' to testimony' or 'guarantee'. 39 D M L (e). Note also the use of its plural, auctoritates, in the concrete meaning of 'anthology'or 'florilegium'.
224
audire, auditor, auditio, auditus In the context of education audire often has the meaning 'to follow a lesson or course', 'to attend (lessons)'.40 Unlike its synomym studere (—> studens in Cat. I) the term was almost never used on its own, but with object (audire leges, audirephysicam) or with a clause beginning with de or in {audire de artibus, audire in artibus). In the context of the medieval university, audire seems to have become the pendant of —tlegere, in the sense that audire defines die activity of die student, and -^legere that of the master.41 Like -^legere, audire is found in set expressions such as audire -^(extra)ordinarie, cursorie (cf. -^cursus). Note that audire was also used widi respect to a different phenomenon in the world of the medieval university: examinations. In this context audire was used for the 'hearing' of the candidate, and stood on a par with —>examinare.42 In the same context auditor seems to have been introduced in the sense of 'he who attends lessons', 'student'. In some thirteenth-century texts, in which auditor is used alongside -^sc(h)olaris (Cat. I ) , the term is used in a more specific meaning: the auditor is then distinguished from the more advanced student, who did not only attend lessons, but took
40 For a full treatment of the audire, auditor and auditio (auditus) see O. WEIJERS, Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 283-291. 41 Although both audire and auditor were part of the vocabulary of schools before the period of the universities (that is, before the thirteenth century), they became widely used only in the context of the universities. Cf. C . FROVA, Le scuole municipali all'epoca delle universita, CIVICIMA V (1992), p. 185; C . V U L L I E Z , Le vocabuhire des ecoles urbaines des XII' et XIII' siecles, CIVICIMA V (1992), pp. 93-94; G . B A R O N E , Les convents des Mendiants, des colleges de'guises?, CIVICIMA VI (1996), pp. 154,157. 42 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 392-393. The use of the word in this sense is rooted in Antiquity; audire had among its meanings that of 'to hear as judge', 'to judge'. Cf. T L L (col. 1283-1284); O L D (7b); B L A I S E , Diet. (4). Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 289. This same meaning also lies at the base of yet a different use of the term in the context of the university: at Merton College in Oxford, so-called auditores (auditors' of the university accounts) checked the records of income and expenditure. Cf. J . M . F L E T C H E R , The Vocabulary of Administration and Teaching at Merton College, Oxford, CIVICIMA VI (1993), p. 52.
AUDIRE, AUDITOR, AUDITIO, AUDITUS
225
part in them actively.113 In these particular cases the -^sc(h)olares are students in general, and auditores are the less-advanced ones, 'freshmen'. Auditio and auditus, finally, were used (though not very frequently) for the act of attending lessons. In Antiquity the verb audire was already used in a meaning related to the world of education: a pupil listened' to a master or 'attended' his lessons.44 In the Middle Ages, the use of the verb in this sense continued, be it initially only sparsely. Only in the period of the universities did audire become a commonly used word for the act of attending lessons with a master. Auditor was also already used in classical Latin in the meaning of 'pupil' or 'student'.45 Again, the use continued into the Middle Ages, and became particularly frequent in the context of the medieval university. Both auditio and auditus, finally, have classical roots. Auditio was used in the sense of 'the act of hearing or attending (a public lecture, a speech)', and auditus was used for 'that what one heard or had heard': the lecture itself.46 In the context of medieval education auditio and auditus were interchangable, and both had the meaning of 'the act of attending lessons from a master'.47
43 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 284-285. See -^qu(a)estio, disputatio. 44 T L L (Ve); O L D (6a). 45 Cf. T L L (col. iZ93ff); O L D (2). 46 Cf. T L L (col. I292ff); O. W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 285. 47 Cf. MW auditus (IB2); auditio (m).
226
brocarda, brocardica In the twelfth and thirteenth century the technical term brocarda or (argumenta) brocardica is found in the context of the teaching of Law in Bologna and related schools of Law.48 Brocarda-collections were collections of pairs of contradicting legal arguments, which could be used in the Court of Law or in classroom disputations on legal issues. In the second phase of the evolution of the genre, solutions — solutiones contrarietatum — were added to these contradictions, which can be defined as general rules of law, generalia.49 The first brocarda-collections date from the 1180s, and the practice of providing the contradiction with their solutions is attested from the 1190s onwards (the Libellus disputatorius of Pilius and Brocarda of Richard Anglicus). The genre flourished in the first two decades of the thirteenth century, with the large systematically-organized collections of Azo {Brocarda, before 1204/1209) and Damasus {Brocarda, between 12101215). By the end of the thirteenth century, the genre seems to have run its course: no new collections are published, only revisions of existing ones. The etymological background of the medieval term brocarda or its variant brocardica is enigmatic.50 It has been variously suggested that brocarda derives from Bishop Burkhard of Worms; that its roots are to be
48 For a concise bibliography on the subject see P. W E I M A R , 'brocarda, brocardica', Lexikon des Mittehlters 2, cols. 707-708; for introductions to the subject see I D . , Argumenta brocardica (1967, repr. 1997); and I D . , Die legistische Literatur und die Methode des Rechtsunterrichts (1969, repr. 1997). 49 I n fact> brocarda or brocardica is often defined as 'legal maxim' (cf. N I E R M . ) , or made synonymous with generalia, general rules of law (cf. S. K U T T N E R , Repertorium der Kanonistik (1937), pp. 239-242, 416-422). R W E I M A R , however, argues that brocardae were arguments rather than rules of Law, and that their main function must be sought in the context of teaching Law; glossators formed brocardica when lecturing or commenting on the sources of Law. P. W E I M A R , Argumenta brocardica (1967), pp. 92-105. 50 The word first occurs in Hugucio's Summa Decreti (between 1188 and 1192), and in the second version of Pillius' Libellus disputatorius (compiled after 1195). Here, however, a masculine form derived from the root broccus is used: brocardus. Cf. P. W E I M A R , Argumenta brocardica (1967), pp. 107-108.
BROCARDA, BROCARDICA
227
sought in a Greek-Celtic root; that it is a corruption oi pro-contra {brocarda —procarda —pro-contra) .51 The most sound etymological explanation has been defended by Paul Weimar, who argues that it derives from the Latin root brocc(h)us, 'with prominent (or sharp) teeth'.52 Weimar interprets this in the connotation of a verbal fight such as a legal defence or debate — the 'broccus or 'person with sharp teeth' is well armed with brocardae, legal arguments as weaponry in the dispute.
51 A n overview of etymological explanations is given by P. W E I M A R , Argumenta brocardica (1967), 105-109. 52 The first to suggest this etymology was L . SPITZER, Latin medieval brocard frangais brocard (1955), pp. 501-506. The suffix -ardus, however, remains an oddity.
228
capitulum, titulus, rubrica, paragraphus, articulus The method of dividing long texts into smaller sections was inherited from Antiquity. The classical vocabulary for these divisions —terms such as liber, volumen, tractatus, capitulum, titulus, versus— was in part adopted into the medieval vocabulary, without significant shifts in meaning. In addition, however, new terms were used and older terms developed new meanings.53 One of the most common terms for a (coherent) unity within a larger text is capitulum, 'chapter'.54 The plural capitula was often used for a list of chapter-headings — one of the first tools for the quick consultation of large works.55 Already in Antiquity capituLtre, the verb derived from capitulum, had the meaning of'to divide a text into chapters'. Another term with a very similar meaning is titulus, originally 'title' or 'heading' — a chapter-heading in which the content of the chapter in question is revealed.56 Metonymically the word was also used for the chapter itself.57 The verb, titulare, 'to provide (a chapter) with a title', already existed in Late Antiquity. In the Middle Ages it also developed the meaning of 'to divide a text into chapters'.
53 This subject is treated by J.P. G U M B E R T , Le texte intellectuel, CIVICIMAI (1988); N . F . P A L M E R , Kapitel und Buch (1989), esp. pp. 46-56, 'Spatantike u n d friihes Mittelalter'; O . W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen Age, CIVICIMA I V (1991), pp. 23-37. 54 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen age, CIVICIMA I V (1991), pp. 29-30, 34-35. Note that caputwas also used in the sense of'chapter-heading' or 'chapter'. ( D M L lie; M W I I I A 4 . See also the closely related meaning of'beginning' (of, e.g., a prose passage or section): D M L 16; MW I I I C 2 . ) Capitulum, however, seems to be the more common word. 55 In Late Antiquity and in the early Middle Ages such a list was also called capitulatio or titulatio; cf. N.F. P A L M E R , Kapitel und Buch (1989), pp. 53, 56; O . W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen age, CIVICIMA IV (1991), p. 30. To facilitate consultation even further, a capitulum could be subdivided into panes capituli or particule, which were sometimes marked with letters; cf. ibid., pp. 29-30. 56 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen Age, CIVICIMA I V (1991), pp. 30-31, 35. 57 The hierarchy of capitulum and titulus is not consistent. In some contexts capitula are the larger entities, and tituli the sub-sections, in others it is the other way round. Often capitulum and titulus are synonymous.
CAPITULUM, TITULUS, RUBRICA, PARAGRAPHUS, ARTICULUS
229
Rubrica, furthermore, originally meant 'that which is written in red ink', but since chapter-headings usually were written in red ink, in many contexts the word is interchangable with capitulum or titulus.58 Like titulus, rubrica was used both for the title written in red ink and for the section of the text set apart by the red title. Other kinds of sections, distinguished by rubrice, were also called rubrica: -^exempla in exemplum-coV^e.cx\ow%, —tdistinctiones in distinctio-coiltcuons, entities in liturgical texts, etc. The word is particularly common in a juridical context, where it is used for a section of the law. Around the middle of the twelfth century, the diminutive rubricella ('short section') was introduced. From early Christian times onwards rubricare is attested in the meaning of 'to paint with red ink'. In the later Middle Ages it could also be used in the meaning of 'to make a list (of chapter-headings) or resume'.59 Both paragraphus60 and articulus, finally, are generally used for text divisions smaller than chapters. Isidore defined paragraphus as the graphic sign (F) that marked the elements in an enumeration. In the Middle Ages the term was commonly used for the sign marking the beginning of a section (a subdivision of a chapter),61 and, metonymically, also for the section itself.62 Paragraphare (-fare), a medieval neologism attested from the thirteenth century onwards, has the meaning of 'to divide into sections'. The meaning of articulus more or less corresponds to that of paragraphus: a section smaller than a chapter,63 but the word never became
58 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen Age, CIVICIMA I V (1991), pp. 32-33, 36. 59 Cf. D u C ; O. W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen Age, CIVICIMA I V (1991), p. 33 n. 149. 60 See the articles by J . C H A T I L L O N , Desarticulation et restructuration des texts (1985), esp. pp. 24-25; and J . V E Z I N , La division en paragraphes (1985), esp. pp. 46-47; O . W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen age, CIVICIMA IV (1991), pp. 31-32, 35-36. O. Weijers also mentions the forms paragraphum and paragrafa, but notes that paragraphus (-Jus) remains the common one. 61 Cf. N G (1). O n the signs used see M . B . PARKES, Pause and Effect (1992), p. 305. The opposite of paragraphus was positura — a sign indicating the end of a section of text {ibid., p. 306). 62 This use is attested from the middle of the twelfth century onwards. Cf. NG (2). 63 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen age, CIVICIMA I V (1991), pp. 33-34. 36.
230
CAPITULUM, TITULUS, RUBRICA, PARAGRAPHUS, ARTICULUS
as common as paragraphus. Its use remained largely restricted to specific contexts, such as articuli fidei, articles of faith, sections of the law or of a rule.64 Furthermore, in the context of the university it was generally used for the sections into which the concluding part of a questio disputata (cf. —^disputatio) was divided.65 In the Latin of early Christian times capitulum, literally '(small) head', was already used for a passage or section of a text.66 In medieval Latin the word became the common term for a chapter, a coherent division of a text. In the later Middle Ages the verb capitulare ('to divide in chapters') was formed, but its use remained rare. Throughout classical, late-antique and medieval times, titulus had the basic meaning of 'title' (of a literary work). In late Antiquity it was also used metonymically for the text set apart by the title, the chapter.67 Both meanings became common in the medieval vocabulary. TituLtre ('to provide with a title') is attested in lateantique times, but received a new meaning in the Middle Ages: 'to provide chapters with a title' or 'to divide a text into chapters'.68 Rubrica, derived from ruber, red, already in classical Latin had the specific meaning of'chapter-heading in a book of law, painted red', and, metonymically, 'the actual chapter in such a work'.69 In medieval Latin
64 Weijers also mentions articulatus ('divided into sections'). Furthermore, she mentions —tdistinctio as a general term for divisions of texts. Specific technical terms are canon and fen (terms used for chapters or sections in Latin translations from Arabic), and palea (used for an additional sections in Gratian's Decretals). Cf. N.F. P A L M E R , Kapitel undBuch (1989), p. 57; O . W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen age, CIVICIMAIV (1991), p. 34. 65 For examples see O . W E I J E R S , La 'disputatio' dans les Facultes des arts au moyen age (2002), pp. 32-33. 66 Cf. T L L , col. 351; BLAISE, Diet. (4). 67 BLAISE, Diet. (4). 68 On capitulatio ('list of chapter-headings', but also 'recapitulation', 'resume') and titulatio ('the act of providing a chapter with a title', 'title', and also 'list of chapter-headings'), see N.F. PALMER, Kapitel und Buch (1989), pp. 50-51, 53, 56; O. W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen age, CIVICIMA IV (1991), pp. 31, 35. 69 Cf. O L D (2).
CAPITULUM, TITULUS, RUBRICA, PARAGRAPHUS, ARTICULUS
231
the use of the word did not remain restricted to the field of law, but was also common for chapters or sections in other disciplines. Paragraphus {paragrafus, pamgraphum, paragrafa), imported from the Greek, is attested from late Antiquity onwards in the sense of 'a graphic sign, which distinguishes elements in an enumeration'. In medieval Latin it also acquired the meaning of'a sign at the beginning of a section',70and was also used as a. pars pro toto for the section itself.71 One of the classical meanings of articulus, 'subdivision' or 'part',72 lies at the basis of its use for a subdivision of a text, section. The application of the word to written texts is first found in late Antiquity.73 In the Middle Ages the use of the word remains largely restricted to particular contexts: 'articles of faith' {articuli fidei), 'a section of a law, rule or disputed question'.74
70 71 72 73
Cf. NG(i). NG(2). Cf. O L D (4). Cf. I L L , col. 694-695; the use is particularly frequent in juridical contexts.
74 Cf. DML (3); MW (IIB6).
232
collatio The term collatio has many meanings in late Antiquity and in the Middle Ages, but its medieval use in an educational context originates from its application to a monastic custom: die gathering of the monks at die end of the day for a (short) sermon, a reading or discussion, usually preceded, accompanied or followed by a meal.75 This custom was adopted by the twelfth-century schools, where each day was concluded with a sermon, which differed from the morning sermon in its short and plain character. In this evening sermon, the theme of the morning sermon was often recapitulated. In the context of the university, the practice of the 'sermon-collatio' is first attested in the thirteenth century at the University of Paris, where Jordan of Saxony describes the introduction of the practice for the Dominican students at Saint-Jacques.76 From there it seems to have spread quickly throughout the rest of Europe. The collatio had a second aspect, however, which was also present in the late-antique and early-medieval use of the term:77 it was often used for an exchange of thoughts or discussion, which in an educational context
75 For a full treatment of the term, cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 372.-37876 In an article on the Dominican educational vocabulary, M . M . Mulchahey warns against the assumption that collatio was, in a Dominican context, only used for this sermon type of collatio — an assumption which is too easily made because 'the Dominicans themselves' (i.e. in the person of Jordan of Saxony) 'coined it in the university environment'. She argues that the Dominicans themselves used the term collatio in multiple senses, and that they did have academic exercises called by that name. In Humbert of Romans' works, she finds ample descriptions of these kinds of scholastic exercises, led by the magister studentiurn at a frequency of once or twice a week. In a fourteenth-century source she finds die explicit distinction between 'collationes in v i . feriis' (sermon-like collationes, held daily, except for Sundays) and the 'collatio scientifica'. M . M . M U L C H A H E Y , Dominican Educational Vocabulary, CP/ICIMA IX (1999), pp. 110-118. See also E A D . , 'First the Bow is Bent in Study. Dominican Education before 1350 (1998), esp. pp. 193-203. 77 J . H A M E S S E distinguishes the two and describes their semantic developments in 'Collatio et 'reportatio, CP/ICIMA I (1988), pp. 78-83.
COLLATIO
233
resembled the practice of the -^disputation In the course of the twelfth century, this type of'exchange of thoughts-collatio', which was originally a discussion on spiritual topics amongst monks and their abbot, gradually became a scholastic exercise, not necessarily concerned with moral or spiritual topics.79 From the thirteenth century on we see the practice of the discussion-collatio firmly embedded in the curriculum of schools and universities,80 as a —^disputatio-like exercise with clearly defined rules.81 Within the context of the universities, different specific technical ap-
78 See for a fuller treatment of this kind of discussion-collatio A . M A I E R U , University Training in Medieval Europe (1994), pp. 25-2,9. His conclusion about the collatio as a teaching-tool is formulated as follows: "Therefore, it seems that recitations and collationes, which were distinguishable by their respective requirements and frequency, developed from the same need: to promote the student from auditor (who listened and followed the text that he was to carry with him to lectio, and who, at most, took notes) to an active member of the scholastic community, who progressively proved his advancement in knowledge and possession of argumentative tools. Possessing these skills would become evident in the disputation, opponendo et respondendo, and even more so in the disputation deqiwlibet.' (p. 28) 79 A third type of collatio, which is — so to speak — somewhere in the middle between these two, is the Dominican practice of the so-called 'collatio de moral ibus' (described by Humbert of Romans). These 'collationes de moralibus' were, according to M . M . Mulchahey, 'a forum for discussing the issues of Christian morality which would confront the friars as doctors of souls, a forum for examining sample cases of conscience as would be brought to them in confession'. M . M . M U L C H A H E Y , Dominican Educational Vocabulary, CIVTCIMA DC (1999), p. 115. Cf. also A . M A I E R U , University Training in Medieval Europe (1994), p. 70. 80 This is aptly illustrated by the CIVICIMA-articles: cf. O . W E I J E R S , Le vocabulaire du College de Sorbonne, CP/ICIMA VI (1993), pp. 18-19 on the rules for the discussion-collatio as laid out by Robert de Sorbon; cf. M . - H . J U L I E N D E P O M M E R O L , Le vocabulaire des colleges dans le midi de la France, CTVICIMA VI (1993), p. 39 on the occurrence of the term in sources for the universities of southern France; cf. A. ESPOSITO, / collegi universitari de Roma, CTVICIMA VI (1993), pp. 87-88 on the uses of the term in the context of the university colleges and mendicant schools in Rome. 81 The —>disputatio-character of the collatio is confirmed by the use of terms such as opponens, respondens (cf. -^opponere) and —>quaestiones. The collatio, however, was undoubtedly less ceremonial than the -^disputatio. It was held once or twice a week, not in the official schools of the university themselves, but rather in the colleges or student hospices, and it was intended as an academic exercise for the students. Cf. O . W E T J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), 374-375. B. Roest describes a similar practice in his study on Franciscan schools: B . ROEST, A History of Franciscan Education (c. 1210-1517)
234
COLLATIO
plications of collatio developed: at the theological faculty in fourteenthcentury Bologna, e.g., the term could also refer to the first element of the ceremonial inauguration of bachelors;82 in later sources, collatio is used to refer to the (perhaps sermon-like) opening-statement of a master or bachelor at the beginning of a course; or it referred to the speech for the ceremony during which the candidates received their licentiates.83 In classical Latin, both collatio and its root, the verb conferre, already have a wide spectre of meanings.84 In the language of the Christian authors, collatio is frequent and used in many senses — the act of discussing; the discussion or deliberation itself; a synod, conference or assembly; the assembly of the faithful; the gathering of monks or the speech held at the gathering of monks; etc.etc.85 In medieval Latin, the variety of meanings is just as wide. The term is used in an administrative sphere, for the conferment of land or office or for the appointment of a person to a certain office; the term is used for the comparison and collation of texts;86 and it is used in senses which relate to the uses described above: 'conference', 'discussion', 'lecture' or 'sermon'.87
(2000), pp. 133-134. For the Dominican schools, Humbert of Romans describes three different kinds of discussion-collationes, each with its own specific purpose: a collatio could be a re-enactment of a recent disputation; it could be a non-ceremonial —>disputatio on new questions, in which students could practise their rhetorical skills and train their memories; or it could be used as a kind of examination-training, on the basis of which the master could decide whether the student was ready for his examination or not. M . M . MOLCHAHEY, Dominican Educational Vocabulary, CTVJCIMA I X (1999), p. 116. 82 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 373. 83 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 375; A . M A I E R U , University Training in Medieval Europe (1994), p. 70. 84 See for collatio, O L D ; for conferre, T L L . Closest to the medieval use of the term described here are meanings like 'to discuss', 'to confer', as present in expressions such as sermones conferre, verba (ora) conferre, consilia conferre. Cf. T L L ; O L D confero 12c. 85 B L A I S E , Diet. 86 A use, incidentally, which is already found in classical Latin (cf. O L D confero 14, collatio 4), and which is also mentioned as part of the medieval diplomatic vocabulary in O. GUYOTJEANNIN, Le vocabuLiire de la diplomatique en latin medieval, CIVICIMA I I (1989), p. 130. 87 D M L ( i - 6 )
235
commentari, commentarius (-ium), commentum, commentator The most common method of teaching in the Middle Ages consisted of the reading of a(n authoritative) text, which was simultaneously explained and commented upon by a master.88 This activity of explaining and commenting on a text-book was, from late Antiquity onwards throughout and beyond the Middle Ages, commonly referred to by the verb commentari (or in the Middle Ages also commentare)f the result was called a commentarius (-ium) or commentum;90 and the writer of a commentary was called a commentator. Terms which could be used with similar meanings are exponere (expositio, expositor), annotate (annotatio, annotator), glossare (-^>glossa),m etc.
One should notice, however, that commentari and its derivative commentarius had more meanings than just this narrow one. Both in Antiquity and in the Middle Ages the terms were also used, for example, in the context of administration, in the meaning of '(public) record' or 'register',92 that is, a list of things that needed remembering {commentari as a derivative of con and miniscor). W i t h reference to literary works, the verb was used to refer to the writing of note-books or treatises in general, or to the jotting down of short notes to aid one's own memory.53
88 See also -^lectio 89 Examples of this use are given by J . O . W A R D in his article Rhetoric and the Art of dictamen, CWICIMA I I I (1990), pp. 39-40. 90 For examples of the use of these words for literary works of an explanatory nature cf. P. L E H M A N N , Mittelalterlkhe Bikhertitell (1949), pp. 30, 32. 91 On the distinction sometimes made between —tglossa and commentarius (or commentum) see E . J E A U N E A U , Closes et commentaires de textes pbilosophiques (1982), csp. pp. 117-119.
Closely related to annotate and annotatio are, of course, the terms notae, notulae, etc., 'notes', which could make up an extensive commentary, or contain only occasional information. See also —>declarare, exponere, explanare, interpretari. 92 C f . T L I . ( I A ) ; O L D ( 2 a ) . 9 3 T L L ( B i ) ; O L D (la-b).
236
COMMENTARY COMMENTARIUS
Commentarius was used for 'booklet' (of a synoptic nature),94 'register', 'enumeration',95 or even 'translation';96 commentator had the meaning of 'composer (author) of a literary work' in general, in addition to the more specific meaning of'writer of a commentary'.97 Since the working method of commenting upon a text already existed in the educational context of Antiquity and simply remained in use in the Middle Ages, the semantic background of the terms is not very revealing. The diverse meanings of commentari which were used in Antiquity continued to exist in the Middle Ages, including those treated above: 'to comment upon', 'to write a commentary' or 'to explain, interpret (an authoritative text)'.98 The masculine and neuter forms commentarius and commentarium co-existed already in Antiquity, although commentarius seems to be the more common form.99 In the Middle Ages, besides the passive form commentari, the active form commentare was also used. Another medieval neologism is the noun commentum, which was (inter alia) used as a synonym of commentarius (-ium).100
94 MW(ib) 95 M W (ic); D M L (b). 96 Cf. Ch. BURNETT, The Institutional Context of Arabic-Latin Translations of the Middle Ages, CTVICIMA V I I I (1995), p. 217: he notes the use of the terms comtnentare, commentum and commentarium in the context of Arabic-Latin translations in the schools of the twelfth and diirteendi centuries. 97 Cf. MW (1-2). Note diat in the context of the philosophical works of Aristotle in the later Middle Ages commentator was often used as such for 'the Commentator", that is, Averroes. 98 In Antiquity and in the Middle Ages, commentari was also used in the meaning of 'to imagine', 'to invent or devise'. Consequently, in Antiquity but especially in the Middle Ages the verb and its derived nouns could also have negative connotations. Commentator, for example, was also used in the sense of'someone who makes up something', 'lier', 'contriver of evil' (cf. MW (3); D M L (1)), and commentari in the sense of'to lie, cheat' (cf. D M L (2a)). 99 Note that in some contexts in medieval Latin commentarius is synonymous with commentator: MW (2); D M L (a). 100 Cf. MW (2b-c). In MW the meaning of commentum is divided in two categories: 1) those meanings that are related to thinking or speaking (thought, idea, point of view, intention, etc., but also in a negative way: a fabrication, lie, deceitful plan); and 2) those that are related to the written word (message, book, comment or commentary).
237
compilare, compilatio, compilator The practice of compiling anthologies or florilegia, collections of citations or extracts taken from the writings of others, was very common throughout the Middle Ages,101 and flourished in particular in the thirteenth century.102 The vocabulary used to express this literary activity is extremely varied and rich. Neutral expressions were used which emphasized the aspect of collection {colligere, collectio, collectanea), the content of the collections (dicta, -^sententiae and summae, auctoritates (see —> auctor)), or the method of working (compilare (compilatio), extrahere (extractiones), abbreviare (abbreviationes), etc.),103 but there was also a rich set of metaphorical expressions, which frequently used the metaphor of (plucking) flowers.104 Florilegtum itself is a modern coinage, compounded
1 0 1 There is a sufficient bibliography on the subject: cf., among others, M . A . & R . H . R O U S E , Florilegia of Patristic Texts (1982); B . M U N K O L S E N , Les floriliges d'auteurs classiques (1982);). H A M E S S E , Les florilegesphilosophiques (1982); M . B . PARKES, The Influence of the Concepts of'Ordinatio' and 'Compilatio' on the Development of the Book (1976); A . J . M I N N I S , Late-Medieval Discussions of 'Compilatio' and the Role of the 'Compilator' (1979); and B . G U E N E E , LO storico e la compilazione nel XIII secolo (1986). Terminologically oriented articles are those by G . M E L V I L L E , Zur Flores-Metaphorik in der Mittelalterlichen Geschichtsschreibung (1970); N . HATIIAWAY, Compilatio: from Plagiarism to Compiling (1989); and J . H A M E S S E , Le vocabuLtire desflorileges me'dievaux, CTVICIMA I I I (1990). 102 Cf. M . B . PARKES, The Influence of the Concepts of'Ordinatio' and Compilatio' on the Development of the Book (1976), who speaks of a 'compiling industry' (p. 138) and calls the thirteenth century 'the age of the compiler' (p. 129). 103 Many more of these expressions are listed by J . H A M E S S E in Le vocabulaire des florileges medievaux, CWICIMA I I I (1990). 104 The classical origin of this metaphor and its medieval history are discussed in G. M E L V I L L E , Zur Flores-Metaphorik in der mittelalterlichen Geschichtsschreibung (1970). I n Antiquity flos was already used to mean 'the best part of something' in the context of literary works, and in the Middle Ages, the use of flares to mean 'extracts' was, according to M.A. and R . H . R O U S E , 'SO widespread that it almost ceases to be a metaphor' {Florilegia of Patristic Texts (1982), p. 165). In similar metaphors, words such as gemma (gemstone) or scintilla (spark) were used in the sense of'(authoritative) words or passages worth preserving.
238
COMPILARE, COMPILATIO, COMPILATOR
from flos ('flower') and legere ('to pick up or pick out'),1"5 but it captures the spirit of medieval collections remarkably well. The titles of many medieval collections reveal this: Liber florum (Book of Flowers), Libri deflomtionum (Books of Plucked Flowers), Flores pamdysi (Flowers of Paradise), Manipulus florum (Bouquet of Flowers), Florarium (Flower Garden), Floretum (Garland), etc.106 The most interesting terms from this whole spectrum, however, are compilare, compilatio and compilator — these evolved from a pejorative meaning, 'to plunder, pillage' to the neutral meaning of 'to extract from the writings of another', 'to compile'.107 In medieval definitions of the terms it is often stressed that the compilator, as opposed to the compositor or -^auctor, in principle adds no matter of his own.108 The usefulness of a compilation lay in the collection and arrangement of the authoritative material at hand,109 or, in other words, the new context created by the compiler. Roughly speaking until the second half of the twelfth century compilare, compilatio and compilator were mostly used in a negative sense: the stealing or plagiarizing of another's words.110 In the thirteenth century, when the genre of the florilegium began to flourish in all kinds of areas (literary florilegia, academic florilegia, religious florilegia, etc.), 105 J . H A M E S S E refers to an attestation in 1621: Le vocabulaire des florileges medievaux, CIVFCIMA I I I (1990), p. 209 n. 2. She notes that anthologia, imported from the Greek, is also a post-medieval term for the phenomenon. 106 The list is taken from M . A . & R . H . R O U S E , Florilegia of Patristic Texts (1982), pp. 167169. See also their paragraph on terminology, pp. 169-170. J . H A M E S S E mentions deflorare and deflomtio, Le vocabulaire des florileges medievaux, CTVICIMA I I I (1990), p. 222 and n. 57107 The semantic background of these terms is convincingly uncovered in the article by N . HATHAWAY, Compilatio: from Plagiarism to Compiling (1989). 108 Note that the term tractatus was often used to indicate that the work at hand was the work of the author himself, as opposed to works such as compilations {compilatio, etc.), commentaries (-^commentarius) or other collections or excerpts. 109 For this arrangement a multitude of principles could be applied: following the order of the original text(s), grouping according to subject matter, arranging on logical principles or in alphabetical order. HO N . HATHAWAY shows that up to that time the practice of compiling was defended with arguments such as utility, aptness or the power of the well-put phrase. The willingness to defend it, moreover, is attested from Late Antiquity onwards, through Carolingian times and into the twelfth century. By the eleventh century compile and compilatio were sometimes used in a neutral sense for the literary activity of compiling, and in the twelfth
COMPILARE, COMPILATIO, COMPILATOR
239
the activity of compiling became more prevalent and sophisticated, and it was only then that the terms compilare, compilatio and compilator became firmly rooted in the vocabulary of the phenomenon. In a florilegium the material worth reading was selected, arranged according to a certain principle to facilitate easy access and/or learning by heart; the florilegium itself was handy in size and affordable."1 In Antiquity compilare had the meaning of 'to deprive violently', 'to rob' or 'plunder', and was also used in the sense of'to plunder another's writing', 'to plagiarize'."2 Compilatio and compilator are post-classical terms,113 and in late Antiquity the terms had, with reference to the written word, the negative connotation of the illicit borrowing and altering of another's writing."4 Until the twelfth century, the terms were rarely used in a neutral sense."5 Before then, consequently, other terms were used for the literary activity we call compilation, such as colligere, excerpere, decerpere, abbreviare or componere."6 From the second half of
the twelfth century, the neutral meanings of compilare, compilatio and finally also compilator became more widespread, and at the end of the same century, when the genre of florilegium was flourishing, the negative connotation had eroded."7 century compilator was also used in a neutral sense. It is only in the second half of the twelfth century, however, that the activity of compiling generally came to be seen as useful and instructive, and that there was no longer a need to make excuses for borrowing from the work of others. i n O n all of these aspects see J . H A M E S S E , Le vocabulaire des florileges medie'vaux, CIVICIMA I I I (1990), pp. 223-226. 112 Cf. T L L ; O L D . For a full treatment of the semantic background of the terms see N. HATHAWAY, Compilatio: from Plagiarism to Compiling (1989). 113 Compilatio, however, does occur once in the classical sources: Cicero uses it in the meaning of'robbery'. 114 See B L A I S E , Diet., compilator. 115 Cf. N I E R M . , compilator (1); M W , compilator (1) and compile (IA); D M L , compilare (ia) and compilator (1). 116 Cf. N . HATHAWAY, Compilatio: from Plagiarism to Compiling (1989), p. 21, n. 10. Hathaway stresses that 'Compiling is as old as the ancient literary tradition itself (p. 41) — in other words, the activity of compiling is not a thirteenth-century invention. 117 Cf. N I E R M . , compilare, compilator (2); M W , compilatio (1-2), compilator (2) and compile ( I B ) ; D M L , compilare (2), compilatio (1) and compilator (2). Note, however, that compilare was used not only in the narrow sense of 'to put together an anthology', but also in the wider sense of'to compose a work based on the work of others'.
240
concordantia In the course of the thirteenth century, new research-tools were invented in the world of learning, which was characterized by an ever growing number of books. Among these tools was the concordance, which was at first only made of the Bible and for which the plural form concordantie (verborum) was commonly used.'18 Other terms used for the same phenomenon were die more general -^tabula (table, list) or promptuarium (that is, a work that facilitates quick access to another).119 W i t h these concordances, students could find their way to specific biblical passages more easily, and preachers could use them when writing their sermons.120 The first concordances were verbal concordances of the Bible, which listed, in alphabetical order, in a first column the words (in context) of the Bible, and in a second column a reference to the passages where they were found. Three of these verbal concordances were made in die period 1235-1275, in the Dominican convent of St. Jacques in Paris. The youngest of the three became immensely popular and was copied extensively. It is hard to overestimate the effect of the invention of the working tool of the concordance. It not only facilitated the search for specific passages, but it also had an impact on the invention of other tools, such as the (alphabetical) index, the thematical concordance or index, and alphabetically or thematically ordered collections of -^distinctiones. The tool, introduced for the Bible, was soon adopted for other texts, such as the works of Saint Augustin, Saint Ambrose, Boethius, Isidore, etc. Furthermore, it was soon adopted outside the field of theology.121 In 118 R . H . and M . A . R O U S E published several papers on the subject, a.o., La concordance verbaledesEcritures (1984); and Concordanceset index (1990). See also O . W E I J E R S , Les dictionnaires etautres repertoires, CTVICIMA I I I (1990), pp. 206-208; and E A D . , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen dge, CTVICIMA TV (1991), pp. 126-133. 119 This term, however, was not only used for concordances, but also, for example, for dictionaries. Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen dge, CTVJCIMA I V (1991), p. 131. 120 At the basis of die making of a biblical concordance lies the division of the biblical text into chapters. The division of chapters into seven parts, marked A to G, was invented in the thirteenth century, in the Dominican convent of St. Jacques in Paris. On the subdivision of texts, see also —tcapitulum. 121 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen dge, CIVICIMA I V (1991), p. 128.
CONCORDANTIA
241
die area of Law, for example, concordantie are found in which parallel passages from different sources (e.g. Canon Law and the Bible, or Old Testament and New Testament) were collected. One should note, however, that theological and legal concordances are different in nature: a theological concordance strove to form a complete list of passages which use the same verbal expression, whereas a legal concordance consisted of a collection of passages which dealt with the same subject. Furthermore, in the field of Law the term concordantia was often used together with its counterpart, contraria — i.e. the side-by-side presentation of (seemingly) contradictory passages.122 Furthermore, in the area of Medicine alphabetically organized collections were made of lemmata with references to other sources, short abstracts, citations, etc., which were also presented as concordantie.123 The substantive concordantiawas invented in the Middle Ages.124 Derived from the verb concordare, 'to accord', 'to bring into or be in accordance', the noun was used from the end of the twelfth century for 'parallel passage'.125 In the thirteenth century its plural, concordantie, became the common term for 'concordance' — list of parallel passages.
122 One could also think of, for example, the Concordia discordantium canonum of Gratian — a work in which (seemingly) contradictory passages from the field of Canon Law are harmonized. Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen Age, CF/ICIMA IV (1991), pp. 142-144. 123 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen dge, CIVTCIMA I V (1991), p. 128; she refers to L . C . M A C K I N N E Y , Medieval Medical Dictionaries and Glossaries (1938). 124 O n the semantic development of the term see O . W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen age, CIVICIMA IV (1991), pp. 132-133. 125 Cf. D M L (3); M W (2); O. W E I J E R S , Les dictionnaires et autres repertoires, CTVICIMA I I I (1990), pp. 207-208.
242
cursus, cursorius (-ie), cursor, (cursare) A cluster of terms based on the noun cursus (or the verb currere) acquired a specific technical meaning in the Middle Ages.126 In this technical, teaching-related sense, the term was used in the context of the universities,127 where in addition to the regular lessons (cf. -^legere and -^ordinarius), given by masters or professors at regular hours (usually in the morning), lessons of a different character were given, either by licenced masters or by unlicenced bachelors128 at hours which were not reserved for the lectiones ordinarie: die so-called lectiones cursoriae (lectio ad cursum, legere cursorie). These 'cursive' lessons differed from the 'ordinary' lessons not only in their practical aspects (time, place,129 and — possibly — status of die teacher), but also in the teaching-method employed: they were meant to introduce students to a text at its first level of interpretation (the textual level or sensus litteralis) and treated it less extensively, that is: more
126 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987) treats the terms 'Cursorie (-ius), (Cursus, Cursor), Biblice in one section (pp. 329-335), with separate sections on the first attestations of these words in (printed) university sources (pp. 331-333) and on their semantic developments (pp. 333-335). See also the more recent article by A . M A I E R U , Les cours: 'lectio' et 'lectio cursoria (1997); on cursorius/-ie: esp. pp. 374-375, 378-381, 386-387, and on cursor: pp. 379-380. 127 It seems that the terms ad cursum and cursorie were first used in Paris, and that the application of the term to the particular type of teaching described below spread quickly from there to the rest of Europe. In Italy, however, these terms were not used in Padua and Bologna; they do occur in the sources for the university of Naples. In Bologna and Padua, the term -^extraordinariusl-ie corresponds to the Paris use of cursoriml-ie. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 308, 329. 128 In the sources of the University of Paris we sometimes find a refinement to make a distinction between the two: the term lectio extraordinaria was reserved for 'extraordinary' lessons given by a professor, the term lectio cursoria, on the other hand, was used for lessons given by a bachelor. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 308, 329-330. The distinction, however, is not universal, and the use of the terminology is by no means consistent. 129 The lectio cursoria did not necessarily take place within the walls of the official classroom or school. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 307, 330.
C U R S U S , C U R S O R I U S ( - I E ) , CURSOR, ( C U R S A R E )
243
quickly and more cursorily than was the case in the ordinary lessons.130 The term cursor, in a technical educational sense, was first used in the context of the schools of the Mendicant orders. It referred to the assistant of the -elector (Cat. I ) , who was responsible for the lectio cursoria of the Bible (legere Bibliam cursorie or legere Bibliam biblice), i.e., for treating the textual aspects and literal sense.131 Cursorie and cursor were also used in the Mendicant orders for the teaching of another standard text on the curriculum: the lectio of the Sentences of Peter Lombard {legere Sententias cursorie, cursor Sententiarum, cursor de Sentenciis) .132
Within the context of the university, cursor was only used at the Faculty of Theology from the beginning of the fourteenth century onwards,131 in a meaning which follows naturally from its application within the context of the religious orders: the word was used for bache130 Weijers suggests that this aspect of speed is confirmed by the university calendars, where days reserved for lectio cursoria were marked Le(gibiles) fes(tinanter). The days reserved for regular lessons were marked legibiles (ordinarie) ( O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 329, references in n. 33). The abbreviation fes, however, could also be read as festive — that is, denoting a day on which a festive lesson was read, suitable for the special occasion of that day. The sources also suggest that certain subjects could only be treated on certain (perhaps these festive) days. Cf. A . M A I E R U , Les cours: 'lectio' et 'lectio cursoria (1997), p. 377. (To add to die confusion, Maieru erroneously writes that on festive days, 'le maitre Yit festine — in a hasty way. It is clear from die context, however, that die author meant to write festive — in a festive way.) 131 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 331. O n die use of the word in the context of education at the Mendicant schools, see also G . BARONK, Les convents des mendiants, des colleges deguises?, CIVICIMA V I ((1993), p. 156; and A . M A I E R U , Figure di docenti nelle scuole domenicane, CIVICIMA DC (1999), pp. 83-85. Maieru mentions die terms sublector or secundus lector (in opposition with lector (principalis)) as alternatives for cursor. The cursor bibliaewas also called biblicus. Cf. —elector in Cat. I. 132 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 331; G . BARONE, Les convents des mendiants, des colleges deguises?, CIVICIMA VI (1993), p. 156 (she mentions the term sententiarius — a fourteenth-century neologism for someone who, just as die biblicus read the Bible in a 'cursive' way, read die Sentences in a 'cursive' way); A. M A I E R U , Figure di docenti nelle scuole domenicane, CIVICIMA K (1999), p. 74. 133 There is one exception: the word occurs in a set of rules for the Faculty of Arts in Paris, issued by Innocent IV in 1245. In these, he determines the days and hours reserved for lectio cursoria. He uses the term cursores for diose who deliver the lectiones cursoriae, diat is, either magistri or bachelors. This, however, is the only known example of the word used in the context of the university before the fourteendi century, and applied to education at another faculty than that of Theology. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 330-331.
244
CURSUS, CURSORIUS ( - I E ) , CURSOR, (CURSARE)
lors teaching the Bible during their first two years of teaching.134 In the fourteenth century, the word cursare was created as a synonym of legere In Antiquity, the word cursorius/-ie is practically non-existent.136 Cursor was used for someone who currit, a runner, for example a messenger or athlete.137 Cursus had a variety of meanings, such as the act of running, the course of things, the movement of things or their speed, a journey or career, a series or sequence of things.138 This last meaning was applied in a new context in the Christian Latin of late Antiquity, where the term was used for liturgical concepts such as the yearly cycle of offices, psalms or liturgical hours: cursus divinus, cursus horarum, cursus vigilarum, cursus canonicus, cursus psalmorum, cursum canere, etc.139
It has been suggested that the meaning of the term in its educational context of the Middle Ages concurs with this notion of'series' or 'sequence'.140 The examples of the use of the terms cursorius/-ie, ad cursum and cursor, however, refute this. From the outset, the term was used to refer to a certain type of teaching, as distinct from the lectio ordinaria: the less extensive, faster treatment of texts, often at the hands of bachelors rather than masters. In the medieval examples, cursorie corresponds with cursu or cursim in classical texts, and has the connotation of fastness, speed. The combination of the two aspects ('sequence' and 'speed'), however, is also found in some examples with the word cursus: phrases like cursum incipere or cursum terminare, for example, are applied in the meaning of 'to start' or 'to end a series of lessons of a 'cursive' nature.'141
134 It is not entirely clear what the relation was between these cursores from the Faculty of Theology and the baccalarii biblici (see also —±baccalarius in Cat. I ) , whose task it was to read one Bible-chapter per session and one book per academic year. Cf. A . M A I E R U , Les cours: 'lectio et 'lectio cursorid (1997), pp. 386-387. 135 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 333. 136 T L L , col. 1528. 137 T L L , col. 1527-1528. 138 T L L , col. 1529-1539. 139 T L L , col. 1539; B L A I S E , Diet. 140 D M L ; refutation in O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 334. 141 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 334-335.
245
dedarare, dedaratio; exponere, expositio; explanare, explanatio; interpretari, interpretatio The basis of the medieval educational system consisted of the collective reading of authorized texts, which were expounded by the masters. Intrinsic to this system is a whole range of terms relating to the act of expounding or commenting on words, passages or texts. Exponere, explanare, dedarare142 and —^interpretari143 are the most common, along with their nouns expositio, explanatio, dedaratio and interpretatio, and other derivations such as expositor, expositivusl-e, interpretator, interpretativusl-e, etc. These terms commonly occur in contexts which relate to the exposition of texts or passages in general,144 but also, for example, in relation
142 J . H A M E S S E notes that dedarare could be used in contrast to recitare (or declamare): recitare is the reading aloud of texts, whereas dedarare includes the reading aloud of a text, but also its explanation or elucidation. J . H A M E S S E , Approche terminologique de certaines methodes d'enseignement et de recherche, CIVICIMA Vlll (1995), pp. 11-12, 14-19. Furthermore, A . M A I E R U investigates another term from the context of textual analysis, which he finds used in fourteenth- and fifteenth-century sources from the Faculties of Medicine: verificare and verificatio. The candidates are asked to Verify' certain statements, that is, to investigate their truth by logic reasoning, or by linking it to other authorities. See A . M A I E R U , La terminologie de I'universite de Bologne de medecine et des arts, CIVICIMA V (1992), pp. 149-156; English translation: Bolognese Terminology in Medicine and Arts, in: University Training in Medieval Europe (1994), pp. 81-92. 143 Interpretari can also have the more specific meaning of to translate' (from one language into another), cf. —>interpretari, transferre. Another term commonly used for the practice of commenting is, of course, -^commentari. 144 For examples of the use of the terms interpretatio, expositio and dedaratio in the context of juridical vocabulary, see: V. C R E S C E N Z I , Lingttaggio scientifico e terminologia giuridka, CIVICIMA V (1992). Interpretatio, expositio and dedaratio (legum) are used for the interpretation of juridical rules in real life, the application of the Law in concrete cases. Expositio on its own most often refers to commentaries in general, and exegesis in particular, i.e. the interpretation of the Bible or the works of the Church Fathers. ( O . W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen age, CIVICIMA I V (1991), p. 75). See also the expression expositores sacri or sacre pagine —used by Grosseteste—, which, according to D . L U S C O M B E , Philosophy and Philosophers in the Schools of the Twelfth Century, CIVICIMA V (1992), p. 80, has the meaning of'theologians'.
246
DECLARARE, EXPONERE, EXPLANARE, INTERPRETARI
to lexicographical works such as dictionaries, where individual words are explained or elucidated by a (more familiar) synonym.145 Expositio (terminorum, vocabuloruni) is the most common term used in this particular context. It can be used both for simple word explanations and for more complex descriptions of terms (which treat aspects such as derivation (—» derivatio) and etymology (-^etymologia)). The semantic backgrounds of these terms are not very revealing. Most of them were already used in the sense of 'to expound', 'to explain (a text)',146 and continued to be used in that way in the Middle Ages. The only exception is declarare, which in Antiquity did not have the transitive meaning of'to explain', but was only used intransitively as 'to signify, to mean'.147 Furthermore, it should be noted that exponere had a wide range of specific meanings (e.g., 'to spend (money)', 'to pawn, 'to expose, lay unprotected');148 'to explain, expound' is only one of the many meanings in which the word was used.149 Explanare, finally, was also used in Antiquity in the sense of'to utter distinctly',150 and explanatio in the sense of'a clear pronunciation',151 but these meanings seem to have disappeared in the Middle Ages.
145 See O . W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen age, CIWCIMA I V (1991), pp. 73-75. Other terms mentioned in this context are describereldescription definire/definitio, or the less common enucleare/enncleatio. 146 Cf. T L L , explanare ( I , and especially IBib* ) , explanatio (A, and especially A i c ) , exponere (IIB2, col. 1761-1765), expositio (IIA2), interpretari (col. 2258-2261), interpretatio ( I ) ; O L D , explanare (2), explanatio (a), exponere (6), expositio (2), interpretari (1), interpretatio (ib). 147 Cf. T L L ( I ) ; O L D (3). See also D M L (1): 'to reveal, make clear, elucidate, demonstrate'. 148 Cf. N I F . R M . (1-12); D M L (1-8). 149
NIERM.
(13);
DML
(9).
150 Cf.TLL(IB3);OLD( 3 ). 151 TLL; OLD (b).
247
derivatio, compositio Derivatio (dir-) is a technical term from the field of grammar, which is closely related to -^etymologia. Grammarians from late Antiquity and the early Middle Ages used the term derivatio for a teaching device, which was based on the origin of words, like —>etymologia, but in a formal way: it aimed at creating families of terms, one of which was the original (principalis or primitivus), the others its derivatives (derivationes).^2 The term derivatio was used both for the derived word itself (also nomen derivatum, derivativum), and for the method of grammatical derivation.153 Originally, it was merely a pedagogical or mnemotechnic device: the student who needed to remember or understand an individual word would be helped by knowing the family relations of the group of words involved. A grammatical term closely related to derivatio (and -±etymologid) is compositio.154 The two are close in meaning: whereas the former emphasizes the fact that a word is to be resolved into basic elements (in order to enhance understanding), the latter indicates that a word is built out of several elements, into which it can be resolved (in order to enhance grammatical insight into its construction). Thus compositio involved the same grammatical method as derivation, but aimed at a different goal. The commonly used terminus technicus, however, was derivatio.
152 See O . W E I J E R S , Lexicography in the Middle Ages (1989), esp. pp. 141-143, 147-149; and E A D . , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen age, CIVICIMA IV (1991), pp. 56-58, 7678, 81. Older studies are L . W . D A L Y and B.A. DALY, Some Techniques in Mediaeval Latin Lexicography (1964); R . K L I N C K , Die lateinische Etymologie des Mittelalters (1970), esp. pp. 22-30; C . B U R I D A N T , Lexicographic et glossographie medievales (1981). More recent is the volume edited by C . B U R I D A N T , L'etymologie de I'Antiquite a la Renaissance (1998); see especially the articles by C. BURIDANT, I . ROSIER-CATACH and B . MERRILEES. 153 The verb derivare was also used in this context (usually in the passive mode): 'to derive' or 'to be derived' — e.g. D M L (3b). !54 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen age, CTVICIMA I V (1991), pp. 78-79. A distinction between the two is made in passages where grammarians or lexicographers discuss die different methods of explaining words and their relations to each other: ->etymologia, derivatio, compositio and interpretatio (cf. -^declarare).
248
DERTVATIO, COMPOSITIO
In the eleventh and especially the twelfth century the method of derivatio was applied to the field of lexicography, and shaped the evolution of the medieval dictionary. Papias, who wrote his dictionary Elementarium doctrinae rudimentum around the middle of the eleventh century, was the first to introduce a limited amount of derivatio into the history of lexicography.1''5 Hugucio of Pisa, the famous twelfth-century lexicographer, took the method to its peak: his dictionary, called Derivationes, was entirely arranged according to etymological families or derivations.156 The result was a dictionary that contained very diverse material: some entries were provided with simple explanations, others were explained with long passages of etymological information, or were illustrated with long digressions on historical, grammatical or juridical subjects. W i t h the treatment of words in etymologically related groups, however, the alphabetical order of entries was largely lost; consultation of the dictionary was not at all easy. From the second half of the thirteenth century onwards, alphabetical indices were created to facilitate practical use of the book. Later dictionaries show a return to the alphabetical principle of organization, but die derivation method had certainly been an important phase in the history of lexicography: its heritage shaped later work in this field and contributed gready to the emergence of complete dictionaries, containing a considerable amount of grammatical and etymological information.157
155 O n Papias and his use of the derivation method see O . W E I J E R S , Lexicography in the Middle Ages (1989), pp. 140-141. 156 O n Hugucio and his use of the derivation method, see O . W E I J E R S , Lexicography in the Middle Ages (1989), pp. 142-143. Weijers treats the work of Osbern of Gloucester, which is chronologically between Papias and Hugucio, as a second step in the evolution of lexicography: ibid., p. 142. For both Osbern and Hugucio the term derivarius (author of derivations) was used, for Hugucio also derivator, cf. O . W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen age, CIVICIMA IV (1991), pp. 56-57, nn. 133-134. 157 Such as, for example, John Balbi's Catholicon (1286), a work in which grammatical subjects receive so much attention that, according to O. Weijers, it 'can hardly be called a dictionary'. It needs a separate alphabetical index to make it suitable for consultation. Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Lexicography in the Middle Ages (1989), pp. 143-144.
DERIVATIO, COMPOSITIO
249
Derivatio was already used as a grammatical term in late Antiquity, in the senses of 'a derived word' or 'the act or principle of derivation'.158 At the basis of its expansion in the Middle Ages lies, probably, Priscian, who stated that nouns, proper names and verbs should be divided into two species: principales or primitivi and derivativi. In the twelfth century, when the method of derivation was very much en vogue for lexicographical works, derivationes became the title of several dictionaries arranged according to this principle.
158 Cf. T L L (col. 635); O L D (3); D M L (2b). Note that the orthographic variants dirivare, dirivatio and dirivativus are also attested (cf. D M L , under derivare, etc.)- On the semantic development of the term cf. O. W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen Age, CIV1CIMA IV (1991), p. 8T.
250
determinatio, determinate, determinator, subdeterminator Even before the period of the university determinare and determinatio were the technical terms for the settlement of disputed questions in a public forum. W i t h the development of a structured curriculum for the faculties at the university, the terms came to refer to the event that marked the end of the first phase and the beginning of the second in a student's career.159 The scholarly exercise of -^disputatio was usually staggered over two sessions. In the first session the central question was put by the master and subsequently discussed by at least two (advanced) students, opponens and respondens (cf. —>opponere), the last of whom gave a preliminary solution. In the second session, which was usually held on a different day, the master summarized the previous discussion, gave his own solution (determinatio or solutio), and refuted counter-arguments. At a certain point in his career a student was allowed to step in the role of the master, and determine disputed questions himself. Thus, determinare and determinatio were used as terms for this point, with which a student rounded orT the first stage of his studies, and entered into the second.160 After several years of study, when a student at the Faculty of Arts was usually close to twenty years of age, had studied several books and had participated in -^disputationes for two years, he could ask permission to proceed to the examination of the determinatio (cf. -^licentia
159 See on this term O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 348-353, 354-355, 404-407; see also E A D . , Les regies d'examen dans les universites medievales (1995), pp. 207209; E A D . , La 'disputatio a la FacultedesartsdeParis (1995), pp. 41-50; E A D . , Le maniement desavoir (1996), Chap. 8: 'Les examens et les ceremonies: regies et pratiques', pp. 117-127. Details of the regulations for the determinatio in the various Faculties of Arts (of France, England, Italy and central and eastern Europe) are treated in her recent book La disputatio' dans les Faculth des arts au moyen age (2002). 160 Note the rather inaccurate translation of the term in N I E R M . , which must go back to this aspect of the term: 'to announce the beginning of lessons'.
DETERMINATIO, DETERMINARE, DETERMINATOR
251
determinandi in Cat. I). 161 In order to receive this permission, he had to appear before a committee of three masters, who evaluated the student's suitability as a candidate. The character of this meeting is a matter of disagreement in recent scholarship. Some argue that on this occasion the student was actually put to the test on the contents of the books he had studied,1'2 others say that it was simply a ceremony at which he swore to various things: first, that he had completed the required classes and, secondly, that he had the permission of a regent master to use his school for the disputes. The disputes themselves, then, functioned as his final test.163 Once die student was permitted the -^licentia determinandi, he was created a bachelor (cf. -^baccalarius in Cat. I ) . He had to determine questions in several disputes, which took place during Lent. The disputes themselves were also called determinationes, and the candidate, called the determinator, held the closing arguments and thus acted in the role of the -+magister.lM
Since entering these examinations was a costly affair (the master had to be paid for putting his school temporarily at one's disposal), in Paris a rule was invented in 1275 which made it easier for poor students to enter. The period of Lent, in which the determinationes were to be held, was divided in two: in the first period, die
161 Originally it took a student four or five years of study to complete the first phase, but generally speaking the number of years of study before the examination of the determinatio decreased in the fourteenth and fifteenth centuries. 162 Notably H . R A S H D A L L , The Universities of Europe in the Middle Ages, Vol. I (revised ed. 1987), p. 453; M . TANAKA, La nation anglo-allemande de I'Universite de Paris (1990), pp. 106-108. Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Les regies d'examen dans les universites medievales (1995), PP107-209; she herself does not come down on either side, and seems to keep the matter open. 163 Notably J.A. W E I S H E I P L , The Parisian Faculty of Arts in Mid-Thirteenth Century (I975)> PP- 2.07-209, 215: ' I n the thirteenth century this [i.e. the examination ad determinandum] was not an examination in the modern sense of the term. It was merely the vote of three masters testifying to the students ability.' 164 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 406-407 for the first attestations of these terms in their technical senses described above. Determinare occurs from ca. 1245, the other terms from the middle of the century onwards.
252
DETERMINATIO, DETERMINARE, DETERMINATOR
determinator held his closing arguments, and in the second, a subdeterminator could determine disputations — thus performing his master's test without having to pay the full fee for the entering of the examination. Perhaps a similar provision was made for the students in Oxford, where the expression determinatio in aliis occurs in the sources.165 In classical Latin, the first meaning of determinare is to mark out or fix the boundaries of something, in space or in time.166 In a more general sense, the word was also used in the meaning of 'to define something', or (especially in the field of rhetoric) 'to conclude' (a sentence).167 Determinatio was, in classical Latin, used for the marking off of a boundary (or, in concrete terms, a boundary or temporal limitation), but also for the conclusion or end of a speech (in rhetoric).168 In medieval Latin determinare and determinatio were used in all their classical senses, including to determine or settle a question or case' (doctrinal, legal, administrative or scientific of nature).169 From there the terms were used for the academic exercise of 'determining' a question, and to qualify, by so doing, for a baccalaureate.170
165 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 405-406. The term subdeterminator is first attested in 1275. 166 T L L (I); O L D (1). 167 T L L (II, IIC); O L D (3, 4). 168 Cf. O L D (2). 169 Cf. N I E R M . determinare (4, 6, 7) and determinatio (1, 3); D M L determinare (3) and determinatio (3); B L A I S E , Lex, determinatio (1, 5). 170 Cf. D M L determinare (4a and b), determinatio (4); BLAISE, Lex., determinare (4), determinatio (3).
253
dictare, pronuntiare The practice of dictating a text to a scribe, assistant or notary is common throughout the Middle Ages; dictare is the verb most frequently used for this activity.171 In fact, until the twelfth century it was common practice for an author not to 'write' his own book, but to compose it orally, and simultaneously dictate it to a secretary.172 Thus dictare meant 'to compose' or 'to write' as well as 'to dictate' (by reading aloud).173 In the context of schools and universities, dictare (legere ad pennant, dare ad pennam, in scriptis dare, etc.) also played an important role.174 Students were generally required to have their own copies of the curricular texts, but were not always able to afford diem. In the thirteenth century, a -^pecia system (Cat. I I ) was introduced at the universities of France, Italy and the British Isles to enable students to buy their books at low prices. At the universities of central and eastern Europe, however, masters were required to dictate their core texts before the courses started, so that each student could make his own copy. For this practice, expres-
171 For a full treatment of terms for oral transmission see J . H A M E S S E , Le vocabulaire de la transmission orale des textes, CIVFCIMA I I (1989); I . H A J N A L , L'enseignement de Vecriture aux universites me'dievales (1959), esp. pp. 119-135. 172 For references to late-antique and medieval texts in which die term is used in these meanings, see J . H A M E S S E , Le vocabulaire de la transmission orale des textes, CP/ICIMA I I (1989), pp. 171-176. She describes several processes of die composition of texts, and in each die verb dictare has a slightly different meaning. For example, an author could compose his text orally in the presence of a scribe or secretary who wrote down his words, but he could also draft a rough version on wax tablets, which was subsequently recopied on parchment. In both cases the verb dictare was used for the process. 173 J . H A M E S S E suggests a third, more neutral meaning: 'to transmit orally': Le vocabulaire de la transmission orale des textes, CLVICIMA I I (1989), pp. 176-177. 174 Expressions such as legere ad pennam were often accompanied by the adverb tractim (slowly, at dictating speed), versus (legere) raptim or cursorie (fast, at a speed that allowed students only to take notes). It is important to distinguish between the products of the two processes: the first aims at faithfully writing down the oral performance, whereas the other is a personal rendering of it, in which details could be left out or emphasized according to one's own judgement. On the latter see -^reportare, reportatio.
254
DICTARE, PRONUNTIARE
sions such as pronuntiare, pronuntiatio and modo pronuntiantium were used: the master read slowly (at dictating speed) and articulated distinctly, so that students could write down the oral performance.175 Meanwhile, in the course of the fourteenth and fifteenth centuries, the -^pecia system at western European universities gradually lost importance, and here too a practice of dictating developed:176 if requested, masters were required to dictate summaries to their audience of students, but only after the course had taken place.177 At the same time, the practice of pronuntiatio at the central and eastern European universities did not remain unaltered. Despite strict rules against bringing unauthorized copies or summaries into circulation, this seems to have happened on a large scale, mainly for economic reasons.178 The practice of dictating texts or summaries created more possibilities for abuse: both students and masters could use the dictation sessions to skip lessons and attend, or give, only summaries. In order to prevent these kinds of abuse and the circulation of unauthorized texts, numerous rules were issued, especially in the course of the fifteenth century. They tried to regulate the process of dictation, or to ban the practice altogether.179 The basic meanings of dictare and pronuntiare did not shift from Antiquity to the Middle Ages. In Antiquity dictare already had the two meanings of to dictate' and 'to write, to compose',180 and these remained 175 J . H A M E S S E , Le vocabulaire de la transmission orale, pp. 176-188. I n this article she heralds a separate paper on the subject to appear in Studi Medievali, but the project seems to have never been realized. 176 The practice of tegere adpennam was officially forbidden in Paris in the Statutes of 1355, but in 1452 this ban was again lifted by the cardinal of Estouteville. Cf. O . W E I J E R S , La 'disputatio dans les Facultes des arts au tnoyen dge (2002), p. 25. 177 England, however, seems to be an exception: no dictating practice of any kind is mentioned in the sources of the English Universities. J. Hamesse suggests that this remarkable absence is perhaps related to the fact that an Arts degree took longer in England than on the continent; students perhaps needed extra time to absorb the texts by means of repetitions (instead of dictations). Cf. J . H A M E S S E , Le vocabulaire de la transmission orale des textes, CIVICLMA I I (1989), p. 181 and n. 38. 178 Ibid, pp. T81-185. 179 Ibid., pp. 182-188. 180 Cf. T L L ( I B i and IB2); O L D (2c and 2b). Note also terms derived from dictare in related meanings: dictata, dictated lessons or exercises ( O L D ) ; dictator, he who dictates
(TLL II).
DICTARE, PRONUNTIARE
255
in use throughout the Middle Ages. In Christian and medieval Latin new terms were derived from the verbs, which adopted related meanings: dictamen was used for 'dictation',181 dictatio for 'dictating',182 dictator for 'one who dictates' or 'one who composes (a literary work)'.183 In Antiquity pronuntiare already had the meaning of 'to recite', or, mainly in a grammatical context, 'to utter (a word, syllable, etc.) in a given way'.184 Again these meanings remained in use throughout the Middle Ages. In the practice of the pronuntiatio at universities in central and eastern Europe, the terms pronuntiare, pronuntiatio and pronuntiator developed the specific technical meaning of 'to read aloud at dictating speed'. A new, post-classical derivation was pronuntiative, 'in a distinct way'.185
181 Cf. N I E R M . (i, 3). It was also used, however, in other meanings, such as: 'written copy, draft', 'literary work' (also: 'poem') or 'literary style', cf. N I E R M . (2, 4); D M L . See —tars dictaminis (Category I V ) . 182 Cf. NIERM.
183 C f N I E R M . ( I , 2); D M L (2). Note that dictatorwas also used in the sense of'one who teaches the art of (prose) writing', cf. N I E R M . (5); B L A I S E , Lex. (3). For examples of the use of the term in this sense, see C . V U L L I E Z , Le vocabukire des icoles urbaines des XIP et XIIF siecles, CWIC1MA V (1992), pp. 87, 94, 98. 184 Cf. O L D (6-8). Related words with related meanings are pronuntiatio, 'pronounciation' ( O L D 4) and pronuntiator, 'one who recites a text or pronounces words' ( O L D 2). 185
Cf. BLAISE, Lex.
256
disputatio, disputare, qu(a)estio disputata The disputatio or scholarly debate is one of the elements of medieval education which has appealed greatly to the interest of modern scholars.186 Even before the existence of the universities, indeed as early as the Carolingian period, there are examples of disputationes between medieval scholars: debates or polemics, in which each scholar tried to convince the public.187 In the course of the twelfth century, however, when the disputatio had become an important element in teaching, the technique of disputare and the disputatio developed into an art with fixed rules: a scholastic method of debating questions in a strictly logical form.188 In the context of the medieval university the disputatio was omnipresent: as a method of teaching a given subject, but also as a means of training
186 There is a fairly large bibliography on the subject. See, for example, the recent bibliographies of O . W E I J E R S , La 'disputatio'a la Faculte des arts de Paris (1995), pp. 123-130; B . C . B A Z A N , G . F R A N S E N , D . JACQUART and J . W . W I P P E L , Les questions disputees et les
questions quodlibetiques (1985), pp. 15-20; and especially O . W E I J E R S ' most recent book, La 'disputatio'dans les Facultes des arts au moyen age (2002), pp. 333-358. For a short introduction see L . H O D L , J . V E R G E R , 'Disputatio(n)', Lexikon des Mittelalters 3, col. 1116-1120. 187 For references to examples, see G . P A R E , A . B R U N E T and P. T R E M B L A Y , La renaissance
du Xlle. siecle (1933), p. 130 n. 2. 188 Cf. J . A . W E I S H E I P L , Curriculum of the Faculty of Arts at Oxford (1964), p. 176. O n the earliest history of the disputatio, see G . PARE, A . B R U N E T and P. TREMBLAY, La renaissance du XLL' siecle (1933), pp. 130-136. One should note that the primary goal of the disputatio, the debating of questions, was —as is stressed in many of the sources— to find the true answer, not just to sharpen one's skills in debating or in logic reasoning. The training of skills is at the centre of other exercises, such as the —tobligatio, or teaching on the subject of -^fallacia. Weijers argues that the older form of'dialectic' disputation had as its primary object the training of skills of logic reasoning, whereas the 'scholastic' disputation that we find in the university sources aims at finding the truth on a certain question. Cf. O . W E I J E R S , La 'disputatio' dans les Facultes des arts au moyen age (2002), pp. 319-329.
DISPUTATIO, DISPUTARE, Q U ( A ) E S T I O DISPUTATA
257
the dialectical skills of the students, doing research, or putting students to the test.189 Strictly speaking the disputatio referred to the act of debating or the debate itself, and the subject which was debated or the written report resulting from the debate was called the questio disputata. In reality, however, the two are largely interchangeable.190 In the context of the university, one can distinguish between 'private' disputations and 'public' disputations. Private disputations or disputationes in scholis were held in the privacy of a school; the masters presided and led the discussion between their own students. On the other hand, public disputations — disputationes sollemnes (or in studio sollempni), disputationes magistrorum or disputationes ordinarie — were events which were open, in principle, to all masters and students of a faculty. Only masters and bachelors participated in these discussions.191 An average public disputatio comprised the following elements. First, the -^magister (Cat. I) decided upon a question and allocated the roles of respondens and opponens or (generally) opponentes (cf. -^opponere). The
questio disputata was announced (usually a day in advance) in all the schools attached to the faculty. Secondly, in an initial session the -^magister introduced the central question — which was shaped as a dialectical opposition to be answered with yes or no — and usually he himself
189 O n the disputatio in the thirteenth century and later, see O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 335-347; E A D . , La 'disputatio'& la Faculte des arts de Paris (1995), pp. 41-108; E A D . , Le maniement du savoir (1996), pp. 78-91 (Chap. V, 'La 'disputatio': methode d'enseignement et de recherche'); E A D . , La 'disputatio dans les Facultes des arts au moyen age (2002). 190 O. W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 336, 345. On the quaestio disputata, see the studies by B.C. BAZAN, G . FRANSEN, D . JACQUART and J . W . W I P P E L , Les
questions disputees et les questions quodlibe'tiques (1985); B . L A W N , The Rise and Decline of the Scholastic 'Quaestio Disputata (199$. 191 The rules of play of these public or solemn desputations were laid out in the university statutes. For example, for an assessment of the material on the disputatio in the sources of the Faculty of Arts in Paris, see O . W E I J E R S , La 'disputatio'a la Faculte'des arts de Paris (1995), pp. 41-50. For Paris from 1350 and other faculties of Arts (in southern France, England, Italy, and eastern and central Europe), see E A D . , La 'disputatio'dans les Facultes des arts au moyen age (2002).
258
DISPUTATIO, DISPUTARE, Q T J ( A ) E S T I O DISPUTATA
treated the first arguments (argumenta, rationes) in favour and against.192 Thirdly, a debate between respondens and opponentes (usually bachelors) ensued: the respondens gave a provisional solution to the problem, the opponentes attacked this solution and gave counter-arguments, die respondens refuted the counter-arguments and added new ones in favour of his own solution, etc. Generally, the respondens was given the last word. Finally, the —tmagister gave his definitive answer, and refuted the counter-arguments; this solutio or —^determinatio probably took place in a second session.193 In the course of his academic career, a student was confronted with all kinds of disputations. First, as an undergraduate, he not only took part in the so-called disputationes in scholis, but also had to (passively) attend public disputations (disputationes sollemnes, publice, magistrorum or ordinarie). Secondly, in order to be admitted to his bachelors examination the student had to 'respond' (play the role of respondens) and 'oppose' (play the role of opponens) in various disputations. Thirdly, as a bachelor, he had to play the role of respondens and opponens in the public disputations of die masters. Fourthly, at the very end of his bachelorship and as part of his master's examination, he had to preside over public disputations and 'determine' questions.194 And lastly, a disputation was again part of the examination of die -^inceptio, which marked his entrance into die community of ^>magistri (Cat. I ) . As a master, it was his task to hold public disputations (at least once a year), to preside over them and to 'determine' the questio disputata.195 These public disputations were scheduled every week or every other week in the academic calendar on so-called dies disputabiles.™
192 The terms arguere, argumentum and argumentatio are commonly used in this context. 193 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 339-340. I n La 'disputatio' ct la Faculte des arts de Paris (1995), Weijers gives several examples of quest iones disputate with special emphasis on their structure: pp. 65-66, 74-75, and 78-79. 194 O . W E I J E R S , La 'disputatid h la Faculte des arts de Paris (1995), pp. 41-48; J . A . W E I S H E I P L , Curriculum of the Faculty of Arts at Oxford (1964), pp. 154-163. 195 Note that the expression questio disputata is mostly used for the literary genre which sprang from the practice of disputatio — a commentary in the form of a debated question, or a report or edited report of an actual disputation. Cf. ->questio. 196 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 338, and pp. 339-345 for the specifics for each faculty. Disputabilis is a term which existed in Antiquity and throughout the Middle Ages in a different sense: 'arguable', 'open to discussion' (cf. O L D ; D M L (a)). In
DISPUTATIO, DISPUTARE, Q U ( A ) E S T I O DISPUTATA
259
Note that the plural questiones disputate is often used in a different sense. It does not refer to the written result of a public disputation, but rather to the result of a master's classroom teaching: a commentary on a schooltext, organized in the form of disputed questions. The wealtli of expressions featuring disputatio aptly illustrates the complexity of the genre. In addition to the expressions mentioned above, there were disputationes de sophismatibus (in which —generally speaking— a logical or grammatical question was treated, cf. -^sophisma), disputationes de questione (an expression which seems to have been reserved for questions on a more advanced level)197 and de quolibetlquodlibetice (literally: a question on any subject, cf. -^quodlibei). Throughout Antiquity and the Middle Ages disputare and disputatio were used as general terms for 'discussion', 'debate' or 'dispute', but also in the neutral meanings of 'dialogue' or 'treatment'.198 In the course of the twelfth century, however, when disputare became a distinct teaching method, the term developed a specific technical meaning. The discussion itself took the form of a strictly logical debate, ruled by dialectical principles. In the thirteenth century the term was adopted into the vocabulary of the medieval universities, where the disputatio became one of the most important teaching devices. The questio disputata, the -^questio at the centre of a disputatio, became a widely used expression for the literary genre resulting from the disputatio. the context of the university, the term shifted in meaning in the expression dies disputabilis, which meant 'day reserved for disputations' (cf. D M L (b)). For references see O. W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 347 and n. 146. 197 J.A. W E I S H E I P L , Curriculum of the Faculty of Arts at Oxford (1964), pp. 181-182, suggested that the expression was used for propositions in the field of the natural sciences. This has since been refuted, for example by O . W E I J E R S in La 'disputatio' a la Faculte des arts de Paris (1995), pp. 44-45: she suggests that the expression respondere de sophismatibus can also refer to disputations on questions of a logical or grammatical nature. The expression respondere de questione, on the other hand, refers, according to her assessment of the sources, to disputations on questions of a more general nature, either in the field of logic or another field, and at a more advanced level. See also E A D . , La 'disputatio'dans les Facultes des arts au moyen age (2002), pp. 137-153. 198 Cf. T L L (disputare and disputatio I I B ) ; O L D (disputare T-2 and disputatio); D M L (disputare 1 and disputatio 1). On the semantic development of the terms see O. W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 345-347.
260
distinctio, distinguere In the course of the late twelfth and early thirteenth century, a new genre of intellectual production developed, which found its function in facilitating the consultation of large texts or corpora of texts. One fundamental feature of this principle of consultation-literature {i.e., versus reading a book from cover to cover), was the division of a text into manageable and meaningful units — the noun distinctio and the verb distinguere (and divisio — dividere) are terms which are commonly used for this process.199 Moreover, the result of the division of a text was also called a distinctio: a section of text which was defined as a (coherent) unit.200 Besides the distinctio (or divisio) of a text into smaller units, however, distinguere and distinctio were also used for the process of distinguishing different meanings within a text or even a word. This is shown by literary genres in the fields of Theology and Law, which made use of the term distinctio in a specific, technical manner. In Theology, distinctio was used for a specific kind of intellectual method: the process of distinguishing (distinguere) different layers of
199 See on this O . W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen age, CTVICIMA I V (1991); E A D . , Le maniementdu savoir (1996), pp. 170-171. 200 The division of a text into sections was either an intellectual effort, or it was based on artificial or mechanical principles. Sometimes, for example, the division followed already defined units such as chapters. Another example is the division of each chapter of the Bible into seven units, of a similar length, marked with the letters a to g; this system was probably introduced by the Dominicans of Saint-Jacques in Paris. The division into sections which formed coherent units, on the other hand, was applied, for example, to school texts, which were treated section by section in lectures. Other terms which occur in relation to this phenomenon are format'ordo tractatus (the arrangement of a treatise) and formalordo tractandi (the development of the argument), ordinatio (partium) (the arrangement (of sections)) and divisio (textuskapitulorum) (the division (of a text)/(into chapters)); in addition to distinguere the verbs partiri and dividere are used. Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen age, CNJCIMA I V (1991), pp. 23-18.
DISTINCTIO, DISTINGUERE
261
meaning in the words of the Bible.201 This method of exegesis goes back to the patristic period, but was revived in the twelfth century for a specific cause: the creation of a working tool for composing sermons.202 The last decade of the twelfth century saw the birth of several major distinctio-collections, arranged in systematical or alphabetical order,203 or some mixture of the two. In these collections, the various figurative meanings of a word in the Bible, furnished with references to the Bible passage in question, were stated in highly compressed language, or even displayed schematically. Distinctio-collections continued to be produced throughout most of the thirteenth century, and became a standard working tool for the composition of sermons in the thirteenth century and beyond.204 In the area of Law, the term distinctio was also used for a specific literary genre, but of a different nature.205 First of all here, as in all disci-
201 There is a large bibliography on the subject. Some of the introductory works are L . J . BATAILLON, Les instruments des predicateurs au XIII" sUcle (1981); I D . , Intermediates entre les traites de morale pratique et les sermons (1982); R . H . & M A . R O U S E , Biblical Distinctions in the Thirteenth Century (1974); I I D . , 'Statim invenire' {yfoi). 202 O n distinctio-collections and sermons, see also B . K I E N Z L E (ed.), The Sermon (2000). 203 R . H . and M.A. R O U S E stress at several instances that the twelfth-century distinctiocollections which were alphabetically organized were 'the first tools so organized; and they were, insofar as we have been able to determine, the direct ancestor of all later alphabetical and searchable tools — beginning with the alphabetical verbal concordances to the Scriptures and the first alphabetical subject indexes before the middle of the thirteenth century, and continuing through the thirteenth and fourteenth centuries with alphabetical indexes to the Fathers and Aristotle, collections oi exempla and florilegia alphabetized by topic, tenant and tax rolls alphabetized by name, and so on.' Cf. 'Statim invenire' (1982), pp. 210-211. 204 The method of distinguishing different meanings was also applied in philosophical texts of the scholastic period. The solution of a -^questio disputata, for example, is often based on the distinctio of a central concept or term. See O . W E I J E R S , La 'disputatio'dans les Facultes des arts au moyen age (2002), e.g. p. 321. 205 For a brief description of the genre and concise bibliography, see O . W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen age, CF/ICIMA IV (1991), pp. 140-142. Central studies are written by H . K A N T O R O W I C Z , Studies on the Glossators of the Roman Law (1938); S. K U T T N E R , Repertorium der Kanonistik (1937), or Reflexions sur les Brocards des Clossateurs (1951). And, especially on the vocabulary of Canon Law, G . F R A N S E N , La lexicographie du droit canonique medieval (1981). See also the lucid introduction of L.E. B O Y L E in the lemma 'Decretists' in the New Catholic Encyclopedia 4, pp. 711-713.
262
DISTINCTIO, DISTINGUERE
plines, distinctio was used for a manageable and coherent unit of a large text (such as the central Decretum by Gratian), subdivided for practical or educational purposes. Subsequently, its plural, distinctiones, was used for a literary genre in which, as L . E . Boyle puts it, 'a conclusion from, or a summary of, some text or series of texts in the Decretum was tested by arguments 'Sed contra based on general dialectic principles (e.g. the Distinctiones of Peter of Blois, c. 1180)', or in which 'concepts or doctrines were analyzed in diagrammatic condensations (e.g. Distinctiones of Richard of Mores, c. 1196-1198)'.206 Thus the purpose of these juridical distinctiones lay not in the distinction of different layers of meaning, but in the systematic ordering of material from the field of Canon or Civil Law, in order to reach some level of abstraction from daily practice to juridical concepts and principles. The genre flourished in the second half of the twelfth century (especially in Bologna), but fell into disuse in the course of the thirteenth century. In Classical Latin distinctio had the double meaning of the action of separating something into divisions, and the action of noting a difference between things, distinction.207 The medieval application of the term specifically to the subdivision of texts follows naturally from its basic meaning. The concrete meaning of distinctio as a defined section of text' is well attested in the Middle Ages.208 The meaning of distinctio which lies at the basis of the biblical distinctiones-collections of the twelfth and later centuries developed along a different path: the distinction of different meanings of a word. Although this method of gaining insight into texts is attested from Antiquity onwards, the use of the terms distinguere and distinctio in relation to this method is only attested from the twelfth century onwards.209
206 L.E. BOYLE, 'Decretists', New Catholic Encyclopedia 4. 207 Cf. TLL; O L D (1-2). On the semantic development of the term, cf. O. WEIJERS,
Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen age, CTVICIMA IV (1991), pp. 28-29 a r ) d 125-126. 208 C£, for example, D M L (2a). 209 Cf. O. W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen age, CIVICIMA IV (1991), pp. 125-126.
DISTINCTIO, DISTINGUERE
263
For the juridical distinctiones-collections yet another manner of development can be traced.210 Distinctio was already used in the context of Law in Antiquity, where it referred to the act of distinguishing between cases, situations, etc.211 In the Middle Ages the term remains in use in the same context — for example, for the distillation of legal concepts from the particularities of actual practice. From this use grew the connotation of systematization, which lay at the basis of the juridical distinctionescollections of the twelfth and thirteenth centuries. In the thirteenth century, moreover, the plural distinctiones was used in the concrete meaning of '(alphabetically or systematically ordered) compendium', either for preachers or for jurists.
210 Ibid., p. 140-142. 211 TLL(IA2)
264 edere, editio, editor, publicare, publicatio, publicator In the Middle Ages edere and its related nouns are used for the official publication of a book.212 However, expressions such as edere in publicum or the less frequent edere in lucem have this meaning unambiguously, whereas edere on its own is in fact more frequently used in the sense of'to write' or 'compose' a text, editio for the act of writing or the result of that act: the text itself, and editor for the author of the text. Thus the terms can be used both for the 'birth' of a text on parchment, the creation of a literary work, and for its official publication, the act with which it is sent into the world.213 The context must decide which meaning is intended in each particular case. When the term is used in the meaning of'to write, compose (a text)', it is interchangeable with terms such as scribere, -^dictare, componere, —» compilare, promere, expromere, depromere, and expressions such as litteris
mandare or stylo commendare.nA When, on the other hand, the term isused in the meaning of 'to publish', it is synonymous with expressions in which die public aspect is emphasized: tradere in arnicas aures, in lucem prodire, in publicum venire, etc.215
Publicare, a term which one would perhaps expect to have the same meaning as edere {in lucem), was in fact almost never used in this sense in the Middle Ages.216 Its use is mainly restricted to
212 Medieval terms for the publication of books are treated by P. B O U R G A I N , La naissance officielle de I'oeuvre, CP/ICIMA II (1989), pp. 195-205. 213 Terms such as emittere, educere have similar meanings in classical Latin. 214 Cf. P. BOURGAIN, La naissance officielle de I'oeuvre, CTVICIMA I I (1989), p. 202. 2 I J Ibid., pp. 202-203. It is remarkable that the term edere is seldomly found in prefaces to official publications. It seems to have been deliberately avoided in this kind of text. P. B O U R G A I N suggested that the word is perhaps too prosaic, too technical or too ambiguous. Another reason might be that the term contains too little humility: medieval authors often presented their text not as their own product, but as a gift from God, which had flown through their pens, or as an offering, a token of their obedience to their religious orders or other authorities. {ibid., pp. 204-205) 216 It did have the meaning of 'to publish' in classical Latin: cf. O L D (3a). Cf. P. BOURGAIN, La naissance officielle de I'oeuvre, CFVICIMA I I (1989), pp. 201-202.
EDERE, PUBLICARE
265
areas of law and administration, and it has meanings such as to denounce in public', 'to announce in public (marriages, for example)', 'to appropriate or seize', 'to abandon to plundering', etc.217 It may have a negative meaning, which is sometimes reflected in the use of publicatio — 'unveiling of secrets', 'calumniation', 'plundering' — and of publicator: 'he who divulges (confidential) secrets'.218 However, exceptions to these general rules are also attested. The Dictionary of Medieval Latin from the Low Countries, for example, has among the meanings of publicare also 'to publish', with citations from the early fourteenth century and later. Furthermore, it has attestations of publicatio in the meaning of the 'publication of writings, and of publicator in the meaning of 'publisher'.219 In Classical Latin the basic meaning of edere is 'to eject, emit', and it was frequently used in the sense of'to bring forth, to give birth'.220 It was also used figuratively: to give birth to a literary work, to publish (writings).221 In medieval Latin the meaning of 'to give birdi', 'to produce or bring forth' remained in use, and it also continued to be applied to the bringing forth of literary works. The term developed, however, a new ambiguity, since it was used both for the creation of a literary work ('to compose or write') and for its publication.222
217 Cf. D u C ; N I E R M . ; B L A I S E , Diet, and Lex.
218 Cf. B L A I S E , Diet, and Lex. 219 Cf. Lex.Lat.Ned. Medii Aevi, publicare (3), publicatio (ia) and publicator (with a fifteenth century citation). It seems fait to conclude that the meanings of publicare, publicatio and publicator will have to be reassessed once more medieval Latin Dictionaries have been completed. The Dictionary of medieval Latin from Yugoslavia also gives a much more neutral translation of publicatio: 'public announcement', and of publicator: 'announcer, messenger' (Lex.Lat.Med.Aev. lugoslaviae). 220 It was used in many other meanings as well, such as 'to produce, yield , to cause', 'to perform or carry out', 'to utter (sounds)', 'to make known or disclose', 'to announce (formally)', 'to present', etc. (cf. O L D ) . 221 Cf. O L D 9 222 Cf. D M L edere (3a); editio (3a, c) and editor. Note that editio was used both for the act of publishing and for the result of the act: the published text itself. The D M L also has editiuncula, 'small edition or publication'.
266
etymologia Etymologia (ethy-, eti-, ethi-) is, traditionally, the branch of grammar which concerns itself with the origin of words (prigo vocabuloruni), and explains or interprets them accordingly.223 In the twelfth century, however, the meaning of etymologia changed under the influence of new ideas on the logic of language.224 The contours of etymologia were newly marked out to distinguish it from -^derivatio, the method of creating etymologically related families of words, in which one was the principle, the others its derivatives. Etymologia, on the other hand, became the discipline of the interpretation of words (explicatio or expositio) based on the similarities between the sounds of a word, its syllables or letters {litterarum similitudo) and its (deeper) meaning {proprietas ret). An often cited example is the etymology offenestra (window), which was said to stem from ferens nos extra (that which leads us outside): here the meaning is explained by several words which are related to the first one only by similarity of sound, not by grammatical relations.225 An early exponent of the changed attitude towards etymologia is Peter Helias, who was the first explicitly to distinguish between the
223 For a short historical sketch of the concept see O . W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen age, CIVICIMA IV (1991), pp. 75-77, 80-81; on etymologia from Antiquity to the Renaissance see M . A M S L E R , Etymology and Grammatical Discourse in Late Antiquity and the Early Middle Ages (1989); C . B U R I D A N T (ed.), L'etymologie de I'Antiquite a la Renaissance (1998). 224 O n this changed definition see R . K L I N C K , Die lateinische Etymokgie des Mittelalters (1970), esp. pp. 10-22; K . G R U B M U L L E R , Etymologic als Schliissel zur Welt? (1975). 225 At the basis of this theory lies the conviction that language is a logical and (divinely) organized phenomenon, and that sound-similarities are full of meaning: they allow humans to fathom the spiritual meaning of a word. This important point is emphasized by K . G R U B M U L L E R in Etymologic als Schlussel zur Welt? (1975), pp. 228-230, e.g. p. 229: 'Die Erymologie des Wortes kann dazu beitragen, den geistigcn Sinn der Dinge zu erschlieGen.' The fact that etymologia became a separate discipline is underlined by die creation of a new word, ethimologista, a professional or authoritative person in this discipline. This term is first attested towards the end of the twelfth century. See L . B I O N D I , Lat. 'ethimologista'(2001).
ETYMOLOGIA
267
methods of -^derivatio and etymologia in his commentary on Priscian (Summa Prisciani).2211 In die second half of the twelfth century the new definition quickly gained popularity. From the twelfth century onwards the term etymologia was thus used in both a narrow and a broad meaning: a) the explanation of a word by another or several others, related to it through phonetic likeness and —through this likeness of sound— leading to its intrinsic meaning; or b) the discipline of explaining words in general, including -^>derivatio (defining its grammatical root), compositio (distinguishing its grammatical elements) and interpretatio (translation, ->interpretari).
In Antiquity and until the twelfth century, etymologia (imported from the Greek, ETOUoXoyiot) was that feature of grammar which explained words tlirough their origin.227 From about the middle of the twelfth century, however, etymologia was newly defined in contrast to the concept of -^derivatio, which focused on grammatical relationships between words. Etymologia came to refer to the method of explaining words by relating their (deeper) meaning to other words on the basis of sound.
226 Early discussions on rhe meanings of etymologia versus —tderivatio (and also compositio and interpretatio) are described by R. K L I N C K , Die lateinische Etymologie des Mittelalters (1970), pp. 17 ff. See also O . WP.IJF.RS, Lexicography in the Middle Ages (1989), pp. 147-148. 227 Cf. O. W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen age, CF/ICIMA I V (1991), pp. 80-81; I ' L L (col.980-981).
268
examinare, examen, examinatio, conventus, examinator In the context of medieval education, examinare, examen and examinatio were readily used for scholarly tests. In the context of the medieval university, the terms were specified with adjectives or adjuncts: these corresponded to the examinations that marked the transition from one phase to another in a student s career.228 In the first decades of the existence of the university there was only one examination, namely that relating to the —>licentia (ubique) docendi (Cat. I ) , the licence to teach — the examen/examinatio licentiandi. The number of examinations and tests to which students were submitted grew in the course of the thirteenth century.229 The main addition was the bachelor's examination, which concluded the first phase of a student's career. It was referred to as the examen determinantium or examinatio determinandi (see also -^determinatio). The interpretation of the terms examen and examinatio is complicated by the fact that the examination itself, the testing of the candidate, is
228 See for a full treatment of the term O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 390-395 and 401-404. 229 Thus the terms examinare and examinatio are frequently used in descriptions of so-called repetitiones or repetitions, usually taking place in the afternoon, in which the subject matter of the morning lectures was repeated in order to fix it in the students memories. Examples are given in O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 392. Set expressions that occur in the sources of Faculties of Arts are, further, examen in communibus versus examen in propriis. The precise meaning of these expressions is uncertain. Olga Weijers suggests that examen in communibus refers to the examination held in front of the chancellor, whereas the examen in propriis took place within the faculty. Claude Lafleur, on the other hand, suggests a different interpretation: the in communibus versus in propriis could, according to him, also refer to the subject matter on which the candidate was questioned. The material shared by all disciplines would be treated in the examen in communibus, while the material specific to one discipline would be treated in an examen in propriis. This hypothesis is supported by the use of the expressions in this same sense in student manuals (not with respect to examinations, but to the subject matter itself). It is weakened, however, by the fact that examen in cameris occurs as a synonym of examen in propriis. Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 391 & n. 30; C. LAFLEUR, Les textes 'didascaliques'de la Faculte des arts de Paris auXIII' siecle (1997), pp. 356-359.
EXAMINARE, EXAMEN, EXAMANATIO, EXAMINATOR
269
not always clearly distinguished from the ceremony in which the candidate is given his title. Thus, for example, it is not always clear whether in the examination for the licence to teach, the testing (examinatio publica or conventus) was actually separate from the ceremony of the inceptio (cf. —tincipere), the official acceptance of the candidate in the body of magistri; nor is it always clear which part was deemed more important. Furthermore, examinations often consisted of two phases: a candidate had to obtain permission to enter the examination, and subsequently had to pass the examination itself. In many cases it is not only unclear whether these two phases occurred in quick succession, but also whether the candidate was actually put to die test in both phases or just in one of them. Thus, whether these examinations had the character of proper tests in the modern sense of the word often remains obscure. There is certainly no medieval evidence for written examinations; the students seem to have been submitted to oral questionings on the subject matter treated in the lectures.230 When the terms examinatio or examen occur in the medieval sources, however, the nature of the test usually seems to be different: students were tested by obligatory participation in (public) discussions such as -^disputationes. Moreover, the assembly of the candidate and professors referred to by the expression examinatio (licentiandi, determinandi or similar expressions) may have been no more than a session in which the candidate swore that he had taken the required courses and in which his master testified to his abilities and moral standing. In the bachelor's examination (cf. —>determinare) the proper testing of the candidate actually consisted of an evaluation of his performance in the disputations held during Lent. The situation described above is characteristic for the northern universities; in southern European universities, on the other hand, the prac-
230 I n Les textes 'didascaliques' de la Faculte des arts de Paris au XIII' siecle (1997), pp. 364369, Claude Lafleur studies the expression (libri) de forma as it occurs in the sources of the Faculty of Arts of the University of Paris. He suggests that the expression was used to indicate that these books (or parts of books) formed obligatory reading, were treated in courses, and contained material on which the candidates could be questioned in their final examination for the licence to teach.
270
EXAMINARE, EXAMEN, RXAMANATIO, EXAMINATOR
tice of examination for the licence to teach was somewhat different.231 In Bologna, for example, the candidates were first submitted to a closed examination or examinatio privata {examen privatum). In this session the candidate had to appear before a committee of five professors, presided over by the bishop or his representative (the archdeacon), and was given two passages or -^puncta for preparation in the morning. In the afternoon, he had to give a lecture on these passages and was questioned about them. If the candidate performed satisfactorily, he was created a licentiatus {-^licentia in Cat. I) and was admitted to the examinatio publica or conventus. The second session or examinatio publica closely resembled the ceremony of inception of the northern universities {-^inceptio, -^principiuni). The candidate appeared before the same committee, this time, however, in a meeting in the cathedral, open to the public. The session opened with the commendation by die professor of his student, then the candidate discussed the same passages as he had been given in the examinatio privata. The session ended with the proper investiture of the new master, now called (doctor) conventatus, by giving him his ring and cap.232 Conventus and its medieval derivations conventctre (the act of granting someone his licence), conventatus (a candidate who has passed the examinatio publica) and conventandus (the candidate for the examinatio publica) were introduced into the vocabulary of the universities in this specific technical sense in the second half of the thirteenth century. Furthermore, conventatio is found as a synonym of conventus in the fourteenth century.233
231 N o t only Italian universities, but also those of southern France (Montpellier, Toulouse) and even Orleans, used this set of expressions for the examination and ceremony of inception. Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 402, see also pp. 401-404. 232 On the examinations in the Italian and central European Faculties of Arts, see also the recent book of O . W E I J E R S , La 'disputatio'dans les Facultes des arts au moyen age (2002), pp. 270-275, and 312-315233 O. Weijers further notes the expressions recipere or suscipere conventum and conventari, 'to pass the public examination; O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 402.
EXAMINARE, EXAMEN, EXAMANATIO, EXAMINATOR
271
In classical Latin the terms examinare, examinatio and examen are not frequent. They occur in the sense of'swarming' (of bees), or 'balancing, weighing', and (figuratively) 'comparative assessment'. Examinatio was mainly used in the context of justice.234 In the Latin of the Christian period, examinare also developed the sense of 'to put someone to the test', 'to try (something or someone)'. Furthermore, the term examinator was used in the senses of 'evaluator', 'arbitrator' or 'judge'.235 In the Middle Ages the terms were used for all kinds of situations of research, examination or evaluation.2'6 The terms were used, for example, for the research preliminary to legal matters, the evaluation of the quality of some matter, or the careful examination of a text.237 But they were also used for the evaluation of clerics upon their entrance to a religious order {examinatio clericoruni) or of new hosts upon their entrance into a guest house.238 In the context of schools and universities, the terms were used for the testing of both the student's knowledge or level, and his suitability to become a bachelor or master.239
234 Cf. TLL; O L D . 23 s For example, God was given the name verus examinator, and the Last Judgement examen extremum. Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 393; B L A I S E , Diet. examino (1-2); examen (2); examinator (2). 236 Note that the term examinatio was also used for the result of the assessment: 'judgement' ( D M L 5). 237 C £ , e.g., N I E R M . examinare (1-3); D M L examinatio (3, 1, 4 resp.). I n the context of official documents, O. Guyotjeannin notes that examinare and examinatio are used in the meaning of'to asses the authenticity of documents'; O . G U Y O T J E A N N I N , Le vocabulaire de la diplomatique en latin medieval, CTVICIMA II (1988), p. 130. 238 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 394. 239 Cf. D M L examinare (5c); examinatio (4c); examen (6b). O. Weijers noted that Robert of Sorbon often used the terms audire and auditio in the meaning of 'to test a students knowledge'. In the second half of the fourteenth century, the terms temptare and temptator or temptor were also used, especially for preliminary examinations. For the passing of examinations approbare and appwbatus were often used. Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universith (1987), p. 392; G . - R . T E W E S , Terms used in academic life, CMCIMAVI (1993), pp. 63-65.
272
exemplum In addition to the general meaning of'example', the term exemplum was used in a specific sense, which developed in the twelfth century and has been researched by Claude Bremond, Jacques Le Goflf and Jean-Claude Schmitt.240 Le Goffs definition is: 'un recit bref donne comme veridique et destine a etre insere dans un discours (en general un sermon) pour convaincre un auditoire par une lecon salutaire'.241 Thus all the elements which characterize medieval exempla are condensed into this one sentence: an exemplum is a narrative,242 it is short, it is presented as a true story,243 it is designed to be included in a longer discourse (usually a sermon),244 it aims to convince a public (of a Christian truth), its rhetoric is 240 C . B R E M O N D , J . L E G O F F and J . - C . S C H M I T T , L'Exemplum (1982.). A n extensive bib-
liography to the field is given on pp. 17-46, which mentions as principal works H . P E T R E , R. C A N T E L and R . R I C A R D , 'Exemplum', Dictionnairede Spirituality, IV.2, col. 1885-1902; Rhetorique et histoire. U 'exemplum' et le modek de comportement dans le discours ancient et medieval(1980); R . S C H E N D A , Stand undAufgaben der Exempla Forschung(1969): F-C. T U B A C H , Index exemplorum, A Handbook of medieval religious tales (1969); J.-Th. W E L T E R , L"Exemplum dans la litterature religieuse et didactique du Moyen Age (1927, repr. 1973). The definition of the genre is discussed on pp. 27-38. For an even more recent (but short) bibliography see M M . M U L C H A H E Y , 'First the Bow is Bent in Study. Dominican Education before 1350 (1998), p. 414 n. 42. 241 U'Exernplum'(1982), pp. 37-38. In this study, however, the attention is focused solely on the sermon-exemplum, and the phenomenon of the use of exempla in other contexts, such as scholarly texts, is given no consideration. 242 The sources of exempla could be manifold. Firstly, they could come from a JewishChristian or early-Christian background (the Bible, the Church Fathers or the earlymedieval auctoritates: (Boethius, Cassiodore, Gregory the Great, Isidore of Seville, Bede, Vitae Patrum); they could be of pagan origin (but used to illustrate a Christian moral); they could be of more modern origin (authors from Carolingian times or later ages); or they could have an oral background. Further, the nature of the exemplum can be classified according to the main actors in the story: human beings, mostly, but also animals or supernatural creatures. L'Exemplum' (1982), pp. 39-42. 243 In relation to this aspect one should note that historia or narratio (authentica) are sometimes presented as synonyms of exemplum. Cf. U'Exemplum (1982), p. 31. 244 Exempla can be introduced with 'legi, legimus, legitur', and have a written background, but in many cases they are introduced with 'audivi, etc' or 'memini, etc.', which suggests that their origin rests in oral culture. The 'oral' element of the exemplum and its close relation to the practice of preaching is illustrated by the fact that from an early stage on the genre also existed in the vernacular languages. Cf. U'Exemplum'(1982), pp. 41-42, pp. 52-53.
EXEMPLUM
273
one of persuasion,245 and its tone is didactic. Exempla are short illustrative stories, used not only to enliven sermons, but also as moral lessons and arguments in the act of persuasion (and conversion) of the preacher. Although exempla in this sense had classical and late-antique Christian forerunners,246 and although the medieval exemplum seems to have its origin in the monastic milieu, the true origin of the exemplum as a literary genre has been placed specifically with the Cistercians and in the urban milieu of the late twelfth century.247 From the thirteenth century up to (and beyond) the end of the Middle Ages the genre flourished, and logically or alphabetically ordered collections of exempla made their appearance.248 The earliest specimens of these date from the third decade of the diirteenth century and the production, which mainly comes from Cistercian, Dominican and Franciscan circles,249 was at its peak in the period 1250-1350. In 1275 alphabetical ordering, which must have greatly enhanced the use of these collections as reference works, was introduced by the Franciscans, and brought to perfection (supposedly) by the Dominican Arnold of Liege (f 1308) in his Alphabetum narrationum. After 1350 the production of new collections more or less came to a halt, but old collections remained in use, were copied in great numbers and were printed.250
245 This element is illustrated by the fact that exempla could be classified according to their basic structure: one of analogy (like this <exemplum> so is this ), or one of generalisation (this general is illustrated in this particular <exemplumy). U'Exemplurri (1982), p. 42. A term used in the context of exempla of the first kind is similitudo. Cf. pp. 31 (n. 9), 42. 246 LTExemplum (1982), pp. 43-50. 247 Ibid., pp. 50-55. 248 These are discussed in L'Exemplum (1982) on pp. 57-68. See also O . W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen age, CTV1C1MA IV (1991), pp. 152-153; and R . H . & M . A . R O U S E , 'Statim invenire' (1982), pp. 210-212 ('Alphabetization as a finding device for preachers'). 249 On collections of exempla as 'preaching aids' in the Dominican milieu, see M . M . M U L C H A H E Y , 'First the Bow is Bent in Study. Dominican Education before 1^0 (1998), pp. 458-472. 250 L"Exemplum'(1982), pp. 59-60.
274
EXEMPLUM
In classical treatises on rhetoric, exemplum already features as the Latin translation of the Greek concept paradigma (• • ),-mr illustration or example, adduced to convince someone of something.251 Exemplum was also used in the sense of 'an example for imitation', and was, in this sense, also applied to persons as objects of imitation.252 In the Christian Latin of late Antiquity exemplum was applied to the concept of prefiguration in the Old Testament of that which would be realized in the New, or in the sense of the biblical parable.253 It was also used in the classical sense of 'role-model', particularly in hagiography.254 In the Middle Ages these more general meanings remained in use.255 By the thirteenth century, however, exemplum had developed the new, more specific meaning described above: a brief, illustrative narrative (parable, (historical) anecdote, fable, myth, passage taken from bestiaries or lapidaries, hagiography, etc.), adduced to communicate a particular moral lesson. In this sense it evolved into the literary genre of the exempla-collection, which served the production of sermons.
251 On the history of theexemplum in Antiquity, see L"Hxemplum' (1982), pp. 43-48; and in pre-Carolingian Christian times, pp. 48-50. See also T L L (esp. I, I I ) and O L D (esp. 2, 4). 252 TLL (III); OLD (6). 253 B L A I S E , Diet., (2, 5). 254 B L A I S E , Diet., (1, 4). 255 Cf. D M L ( 1 , 2). Note also other specific meanings such as, in the field of Law, precedent (a case taken as an example) (5); or copy or transcript (6). On the latter meaning of the word cf. -^exemplar in Cat. I I .
275
fallacia In the thirteenth century a part of logical thinking and teaching was based on the subject of fallaciae, 'fallacies' or 'unsound syllogisms'.256 Fallaciae are deceptive conclusions, which appear sound but are in fact invalid, because of a misconception of the meaning of the words used (fallacia in dictione), or because of a flaw in the logical reasoning involved (fallacia extra dictionem). Medieval scholarship on the subject was based on Aristotle's Sophistici Elenchi, 'Sophistical Refutations', a work which arrived in the West in the 113OS/114OS. Courses on logic began to include the work and a western tradition developed: Elenchi commentaries and several treatises on fallacies were produced in the twelfth and thirteenth centuries.257 By the end of the thirteenth century the genre seems to have run its course — fourteenth- and fifteenth-century works do exist, but (as far as one can tell from the modest amount of modern scholarship on the subject) appear to be of very limited interest.258 Traditionally fallacies were classified into two categories, in dictione (as explained above: a misconception of the meaning of the words, for example because of equivocation or figure of speech) and extra dictionem (a logical flaw). These two categories were subsequently divided into respectively six and seven sub-classes. A whole spectrum of technical vocabulary was used to describe these classes and sub-classes.259
256 O n this see the excellent introduction by S. E B B E S E N , The Way Fallacies were treated in Scholastic Logic (1987). At the end of the article an elaborate bibliography on the subject is given, including primary sources (pp. 128-131) and secondary literature (pp. T31-134). Paralogismus and —tsophisma were sometimes used as synonyms; see the ample treatment of fallacia in the Lex.lat.Ned. MediiAevi ( B ) . 257 Medieval authors who produced Elenchi commentaries or treatises on fallacies are, among others, Albertus Magnus, Petrus Hispanus, Robert Grosseteste, Roger Bacon, etc. 258 S. E B B E S E N , The Way Fallacies were treated in Scholastic Logic (1987), p. 112. 259 S. E B B E S E N mentions, e..g.,peccansin materia/informa, causa apparentiae/defectus, loci sophistici and maximae apparentes, multiplex actualelpotentialelphantasticum, etc. Cf. The way fallacies were treated in scholastic logic (1987), pp. 113-123.
276
FALLACIA
The term fallacia, derived (romfallax (deceitful or misleading) or fallere (to deceive), did already exist in Antiquity in the sense of'deceit', 'trick', 'deceptive behaviour',260 and continued to be used in that sense in the Middle Ages.2''1 The development from 'deceit' in general to 'deceptive argument' is not merely the use of the term in a different context; Boethius already used it in this particular sense.262 In the thirteenth century, however, the term developed into a full terminus technicus in the field of logic and was used as such in, for example, titles of treatises on fallacious arguments.263
26oCf.TLL;OLD. 261 Cf. D M L (1). 262 Cf. TLL. 263 Cf. D M L (3); BLAISE, Lex (1). Similarly, fallere (to deceive) developed the sense of 'to argue fallaciously' ( D M L (4)), or 'to be invalid' (of an argument or reasoning) (Lex.Lat.Ned. MediiAevi (2)).
277
glossa, glosa The practice of providing unusual words widi simple explanations in the interlinear or marginal spaces of a manuscript is as old as our oldest manuscripts; these annotations were usually called glossae or glosae, or (less frequently) glossemata.2^4 Further, from the sixth or seventh century onwards the practice of copying glosses on separate sheets independently of the basic text is attested, and such a collection of glosses was commonly called (collectae) glos(s)ae or -^glossarium. Marginal glosses were often tied to their lemmata by means of socalled 'signes de renseignement', signs which refer from lemma to gloss, just as our superscript numbers refer to footnotes at the base of a text (or to endnotes at the end). For complex texts such as the Bible or Gratian's Decretals new layouts were invented to display text and commentary in an intelligible way.265 The most famous example is the Glossa ordinaria, a standard set of explanatory comments on the Bible, copied from the beginning of the twelfth century in such a way that it completely surrounded the basic text, covering more space than the basic text itself.266
264 These terms are treated briefly in O . W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen dge, CIVICIMA IV (1991), pp. 41, 43, 44, 51. Note that the term scholia, which also had the meaning of comments, annotations of lecture notes, does not occur until the sixteenth century; cf. J . KRAYE, Renaissance Commentaries on the Nkomachean Ethics, CIVICIMA V I I I (1995), pp. m , 113-114; J . O . 'WARD, Ciceronian Rhetoric (1995), pp. 15-17. Other terms that often carried a very similar meaning are nota or notula, 'note' or 'annotation'. 265 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Le maniement du savoir (1996), Chap. 14, 'Mise en page des textes universitaires', pp. 203-227. 266Examples of specific lay-outs of glossed texts are given in H . - J . M A R T I N , J . V E Z I N (eds.), Mise en page et mise en texte (1990): examples of biblical glosses are given in the three articles by G . L O B R I C H O N , Le Psautier d'Otbert (pp. 175-178); Les gloses biblique d'Henri, frere du roi Louis VII (pp. 179-180); La bible d'un maitre dominicain de Paris (pp. 181-183). On the mise en page of manuscripts of Law, see the articles of J . R A M B A U D : Le Decret de Gratian (pp. 201-203); Les Decretales (pp. 204-209). On the layout of the university manuscripts, finally, see the article of R . M A R I C H A L , Les manuscrits universitaires (pp. 210-217) in the same book, and see the aforementioned chapter of O . W E I J E R S in Le maniement du savoir(1996) (pp. 203-227).
278
GLOSSA, GLOSA
The practice of writing glosses was so widespread that a whole series of terms were invented in relation to the phenomenon:267 glossare ('to comment on or write a commentary on', 'to interpret or explain') with its derived forms glossatus ('provided with explanatory comments') and the substantively used glossans ('writer of glosses, commentator');268 glossator or glossogmphus (writer of glosses, commentator');269 glossatura ('commentary');27" and -^glossarium ('collection of glosses'). Furthermore, the Late Latin term glossula ('brief gloss or comment') was the basis of the medieval Latin verb glossulare ('to gloss, comment on').271 In Antiquity glossa or glosa, imported from the Greek Y^<*>O"O"a, tongue or language,272 was already used in the meaning of'unusual word, requiring explanation'. It was defined as such by, among others, Quintilian, Varro, and, following them, Isidore of Seville. In die plural it was also used in the sense of 'a collection of unfamiliar words'.273 In the Middle Ages the term was mostly used in the sense of 'an explanation of a difficult word',274 or, as a pars pro toto, a set of comments on a basic text, a commentary.275 Further, glos(s)a could be used for the Glossa ordinaria (or Glossa communis), the standard collection of comments accompanying the text of the Bible.276
267 See O . W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen age, C1VICIMAIV (1991), p. 51 and n. 84. 268 Note that other terms are also used synonymously with glossare: -^commentari ('to provide with a commentary', cf. J . O . W A R D , Rhetoric and the Art ofdictamen, CF/ICIMA I I I (1990), p. 40) and apparare ('to provide with a body of glosses', cf. K P . W S O E T E R M E E R , La terminologie de la librairie a Bologne, C/VTCIMA I (1988), p. 92). On the distinction sometimes made between glossa and —>commentarius or commentum, see E . J E A U N E A U , Gloses et commentaries de textesphilosophiques (1982), pp. 117-119. 269Cf. DMLglossator (1); B L A I S E , Lex.,glossographus. 270 Cf. NIERM.;DML.
271 Cf. D M L . 272 Cf. LSJ (I-II). See also I I , 2: 'obsolete or foreign word which needs explanation'. 273 Cf. T L L ; O L D . Note that t h e T L L defines glossarium as a diminutive of glossa. 274 Cf.
DML
(2);
NIERM.
(2).
275 Cf. D M L (3-4); N I E R M . (4).
276 Cf. DML(3a-b).
279
glossarium, vocabularium, dictionarius The concept of a dictionary, a(n alphabetically or systematically organized) list of words with (short) explanations, is known throughout the Middle Ages, and the terms commonly used for this concept are glossar i u m (glossarius, glosarium, glosarius), and vocabularium (vocabularius) .277
Occasionally odier terms or expressions are used, the most common of which is dictionarius {dictionarium),278 Glossarium, derived from —>glossa or glosa (Gk. ykaaca), was used in the meaning of'a collection of glosses' from the ninth century onwards.279 In Carolingian and later times it was a common working method to write glosses in the margins and interlinear spaces of the main text. From the late ninth and tenth century onwards independent collections of glosses appeared, which were often merely called -^glos(s)ae, glossulae or glossematd. In the eleventh century the common term for these collections seems to have become glossarium or glossarius. The independent collections of glosses were sometimes systematically or alphabetically organized; in this way they became more detached from a 'main text' and came closer to the concept of a dictionary.
277 O n this subject see O . W E I J E R S , Lexicography in the Middle Ages (1989); E A D . , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen Age, CLVLCJMA IV (1991), pp. 4.T-52. See on the history of the phenomenon also C . B U R I D A N T , Lexicographie et glossographie medie'vales (1986); and I..W. & B . A . DALY, Some Techniques in Medieval Latin Lexicography (1964). 278 Other terms and expressions used for the phenomenon are: lexicon (but this term rarely occurs before the late fifteenth/early sixteenth century); expositio(nes) vocabulorum, terminorum, dictionum, nominum or similar expressions with exponere such as liber exponens diversa vocabula, liber expositivus vocabulorum, expositorium. Similarly declaratio(nes), descriptio(nes), diffinitio(nes), appericio(nes), elucidatio(nes) etc. are occasionally used. Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen age, CIVICIMAIV (1991), pp. 49-50, 52. Further terms used for particular kinds of dictionaries are treated on pp. 52-61 of the same book. 279 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen age, CLVLCLMA I V (1991), pp. 43-45-
280
GLOSSARIUM, VOCABULARIUM, DICTIONARIUS
The lists of words with short explanations or synonyms280 became a common phenomenon, and were applied to all kinds of subjects: lists of (rare) Latin words with Latin explanations; lists of Latin words with vernacular explanations (or vice versa); lists of words from the Bible or other texts. Vocabularium (vocabularius) did not develop from the practice of adding glosses to a basic text; the term was merely created, analogously with glossarium, from vocabulum, word.281 A vocabularium does not necessarily consist, therefore, of rare or obscure words; the term was applied to all kinds of word-lists: lists of technical terms from the field of law, medicine, or botany, for example, or bilingual word-lists. Nevertheless, the two terms were used as synonyms in certain cases. In the fourteenth century and later vocabularia were often distinguished from glossaria: while glossaria were lists of words with short and simple explanations or synonyms, vocabularia were dictionaries of a more complete nature, in which each word was accompanied by the explanation of its meaning and some grammatical information. It is not clear when the term vocabularium came into use, but it was current only in the later Middle Ages, from the fourteenth century onwards. The less common term dictionarius {dictionarium), the origin of our modern terms dictionary/dictionnaire/dictionario, was also a later creation.282 It was used for the first time in library catalogues from the second half of the thirteenth century,283 and only gained popularity in the fourteenth century and later. Again analogously with glossarium, the
280 See ibid., pp. 52-53 on the genre of synonyma {synonima, sinonima, senonima, sininima, cinonimd) —collections of synonyms—, which was inherited from Antiquity and applied in new fields in the Middle Ages. 281 Cf. ibid., pp. 45-47. 282 Cf. ibid., pp. 47-49. 283 O . W E I J E R S refers to a passage from John of Garland's Dictionarius, dating from around the middle of the thirteenth century, as a 'first attestation' of the term. In this case, however, —as she herself stresses— the 'dictionary' at hand is a non-alphabetical list of words to remember. Ibid., p. 47.
GLOSSARIUM, VOCABULARHJM, DICTIONARIUS
281
term was created on the basis of dictio, word or term. A dictionarius was thus merely a collection of terms. The word could be applied to all kinds of dictionaries: general alphabetical word-lists, lists of termini technici from the field of Law, Medicine or some other art, or a specific theological genre: collections of biblical -^distinctiones.2M The backgrounds of the three medieval Latin words glossarium, vocabularium and dictionarius are clear: they are collections of -^glossae, vocabula and dictiones respectively; lists of words or terms with short explanations, often alphabetically or systematically organized.285 Glossarium is almost non-existent in Antiquity, and is only used in the sense of 'collection of glosses' from the ninth century onwards.286 From the Carolingian period onwards the word was commonly used throughout the Middle Ages and beyond. It occurs in a masculine (glossarius) and neuter form (glossarium).
Vocabularium seems the youngest word of the three: although the time at which the term came into use remains uncertain, it is clear that it gained popularity only in the fourteenth century. From this time it even eclipses glossarium and dictionarius. Its most common form is neuter (vocabularium), but it also occurs in a masculine form (vocabularius). Dictionarius, finally, is attested from the thirteenth century onwards, in both a masculine (dictionarius) and a neuter form (dictionarium). Its use never became as widespread as that of glossarium or vocabularium.287
284 Cf. ibid., pp. 48-49. 285 Cf. ibid., pp. 51-52. Terms used for the individual words in a word-list or dictionary are dictio and vocabulum, and at the end of the Middle Ages also the more specific terminus. Cf. ibid., pp. 62-64. Less frequently pars, nomen, verbum and vox were also used in the context of lexicography, but each has its own connotations. Cf. ibid, pp. 64-68. 286 It was used by Aulus Gellius in the meaning of'small gloss', as a synonym oiglossula. Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires
48-49; DML.
282
incipere, inceptio, inceptor, resumere, resumptio Incipere and inceptio are general terms for the beginning (of an activity), and are used in the context of education for the beginning of lessons after a period of vacation, etc.288 In this context, however, the terms also developed specific technical meanings, which relate to the official beginning of a teacher's career and the acceptance of a candidate into the corporate body of masters.289 Before the existence of the universities, a ceremony must have existed in which a candidate was officially proclaimed a master and received the tokens of his profession (cap and book). As the schools of the twelfth century developed into the corporate organisations of the university, the ceremony gained in importance: it no longer marked just the beginning of a teaching career, but also the acceptance of a new member into the body of ^-magistri. In the course of the thirteenth century, the details of the ceremony of the inceptio were set down in the statutes of the universities.290 Firstly, a candidate had to obtain a -llicentia incipiendi (Cat. I ) , that is, he had to be officially admitted to the ceremony of the inceptio. In order to receive this licence, he needed a so-called depositio magistrorum, a favourable vote from the congregation of regent masters, concerning his learning and his morals.291 The date of the ceremony was fixed, and the candidate, now called inceptor, had to inform all of the regent masters of the faculty of this date, and to invite them to a banquet after the ceremony. The ceremony of the inceptio itself was divided into two parts. Firstly, the vesperie (cf. -^principiurn) took place, that is an afternoon disputa-
288 See on this ->cessare, cessatio in Cat. I. 289 See on this O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 407-4T3. 290 The whole process as laid down in the statutes of the Faculty of Arts in Oxford is described by, among others, J.A. W E I S H E I P L , Curriculum of the Faculty of Arts at Oxford (1964), esp. pp. 163-166. 291 See on this O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 395-400. See also —> pr(a)esentare, pr(a)esentatio.
INCIPERE, INCEPTIO, RESUMERE, RESUMPTIO
283
tion, in which the candidate acted as respondens (cf. —topponere). The disputation was followed by a commendatio, a short address in which die presiding master commended his student. Secondly, on the following day the solemn investiture of the new master was held, in a ceremony called inceptio.292 After having passed the examination of the —>licentia ubique docendi (Cat. I ) , the young master received in a separate ceremony in the presence of all the regent masters of the faculty the insignia of office: cap and book.293 Subsequendy he held a short lectio or -^principium, which was followed by a disputation on (usually) two questions. The new master held the closing argument or determinatio {-^-determinare). Finally, he took an oath of fidelity to die university. Thus the term inceptio is used both for the whole of the ceremony, and for the second part alone. In Oxford and Cambridge the terms resumere and resumptio294 were used for the inception of those who resumed teaching after an interruption, or of those who had obtained their licence to teach at foreign universities. This last practice was controversial, because it was against die very nature of the -^licentia ubique docendi to submit a licenced master to a new test.295 Nevertheless, the terms are attested in the statutes of
292 The vesperie took place on a day intended for lectures {dies legibilis, -^legere), the inceptio on a day intended for disputations {dies disputabilis, —tdisputatio). The term inauguratio for this same ceremony is mentioned by G.-R. T E W E S in Terms used in Academic Life-, CIVICTMA VI (1993), p. 70: he argues that inauguratio gradually replaced inceptio in the sixteenth century under the influence of the humanist deans of the Faculty of Arts at Cologne. 293 The cap was called biretta, birettum or hirretum, and Weijers points to fourteenthcentury creations such as birettare, birettatio, biretizare and biretizatio for the act of granting a young master his beret. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 408 n. 112.
294 Also resumentes, which stands in the statutes next to incipientes for the candidates in the ceremony of inception. 295 There seem to have been protests against the practice, especially from the University of Paris. Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 422.
284
INCIPERE, INCEPTIO, RESUMERE, RESUMPTIO
Oxford from 1264, and in Cambridge from the beginning of the fourteenth century.296 In classical Latin, the basic meaning of incipere and inceptio are 'to start', 'to begin', and 'beginning'. This general meaning is used in several applications, for example, to begin speaking or writing, to embark on a study or profession, or to commence one's period of reign.2'7 In the Latin of the Christian period, incipere was also used for entering an order or monastery, and incipiens was used for a novice.298 In medieval Latin all of these uses continued. In the context of the medieval universities, the specific technical meaning of'to start one's career as a master' (also: incipere legere) developed.299 Furthermore, this use formed the basis of the meaning of inceptio as the ceremony which marked this beginning or a distinct part of this ceremony, and for inceptor as the candidate at the centre of the proceedings.300
296 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 422-424. Note that resumere and resumptio are also used for the recommencement of lessons after a vacation; see the article on -^cessare, cessatio (Cat. I ) . Furthermore it should be noted that the term resumpta, which occurs in the sources of the Faculties of Theology of Paris and Bologna from the fourteenth century, has a different meaning. Here resumpta is an abbreviation of questio or disputatio resumpta. It refers to the first official lecture of a new master of theology after his inceptio. The term resumpta, '(discussion) continued', was used because in this first lecture the master returned to the subject of his vesperie and —>principium or inceptio. Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 420-422. 297 Cf. T L L ; O L D (zb-c, jb). 298 Cf. B L A I S E , Diet.
299 The use of the term in this sense is attested from 1215 onwards. Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 410; N I E R M . (2); D M L (7). 300 The use of these terms in these specific meanings is attested from ca. 1250, and becomes common in the second half of the thirteenth century. Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 411; N I E R M . (inceptio); D M L inceptio (2), inceptor (2).
285
insolubile In the thirteenth century, when the art of logic reasoning had become a large and important element in teaching and scholastic discourse, a set of terms from this field had gained the status of termini technici and became the subject of separate (logical) treatises. -^Syncategoremata, for example, that is, terms with uncertain meanings, or —>fallaciae, fallacies, received ample treatment in commentaries or were treated as separate subjects. Another term from this area is insolubile, literally 'insoluble proposition', 'antinomy'. Insolubilia were discussed in great detail by medieval logicians.3"1 Insolubilia are propositions which contain apparent contradictions, paradoxes, or, to put it more technically, 'contradictions derived by sound rules of reasoning from accepted axioms'.302 A much discussed and often cited example of such a contradictory statement is the so-called 'Liar Paradox', passed down from early Greek times: 'ego dico falsum', 'I lie'. Discussions of insolubilia are found in works from the early twelfth century, but John of Salisbury is credited with the first use of the term in the meaning outlined above.303 The solution of insolubilia remained the object of logical treatises until the end of the Middle Ages and beyond.
301 See L . H I C K M A N , 'Insolubilia, Historisches Wb'rterbuch der Philosophic, Band 4, col. 396-400. See also E J . A S H W O R T H , Les manuek de logiquea Vuniversite d'Oxford (1994), p. 365; H . A . G . B R A A K H U I S , Logica modernorum as a Discipline at the Faculty of Arts of Paris (1997). p- 365. On insolubilia at the Faculties of Arts of Paris, Oxford and Cambridge, see the relevant sections in O . W E I J E R S , La 'disputatiodans les Facultes des arts au moyen age (2002), pp. 71-74 and 157-159. A bibliography has been put together by P.V. SPADE, The Mediaeval Liar: A Catalogue of the Insolubilia'-literature (1975). 302 H.A. N I E L S E N , Antinomy', New Catholic Encyclopedia I , p. 621. Solubile and its opposite insolubile are derived from the verb solvere, which was used in the same context, for example in the expression 'solvere sophismata'. (See, e.g., the title of a work of William of Heytesbury, 'Regulae solvendi sophismata'). Cf. A . M A I F . R U , Methods of Teaching Logic during the Period of the Universities (1994), pp. 12.0-121. 303 Cf. L . H I C K M A N , 'Insolubilia, col. 397.
286
INSOLUBILE
In classical Latin insolubilis, in the rare cases that it was used, mainly had the concrete meaning of'that which cannot be repaid' (of debts), or 'that which is incontestible' (of evidence).304 The substantive use of the term is only attested in the Middle Ages. The adjective insolubilis remained in use in its classical meanings,1115 but it also acquired a new meaning in the field of logic: insoluble (of a proposition, argument or question).306 In this meaning it was used substantively as a technical term.™7
304TI.I.; O L D . Note that Boethius used the term in the context of rhetoric, but in a different meaning. In his Analytica Priom he speaks of 'argumenta insolubilia, that is, arguments that cannot be broken, that are irrefutable (cf. T L L , reference to Anal. Pr. 2,27 p. 711C). 305 D M L (1-2) 306 D M L (3). 307 Cf. D M L (3b); Lex.kt.Ned. MediiAevi, (2b).
287
interpretari (-tare), interpretatio, transferre, translatio, vulgarizare (-zatio), theutonizare (-zatio) Although in medieval Latin interpretari (or interpretare) was used in the sense of our modern word 'to interpret', 'to expound',308 more commonly it was used in the sense of'to translate from one language to another'.309 Another common term for the same phenomenon was transferre,310 literally 'to transfer', 'to bring something from one place to another', but also metonymically 'to translate'. Less frequently more general verbs such as traducere, vertere or transponere were used.311
308 See on this -^declarare. 309 O n the terminology of this phenomenon see O . W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen age, CIVICIMA I V (1991), pp. 82-85. See also G . C O N T A M I N E (ed.), Traduction et traducteurs au Moyen Age (1989); and various articles in J . H A M E S S E (ed.), Les manuscripts des lexiques et glossaries (1996). Note that interpretari was both used as a deponent verb with an active meaning (to translate, to interpret), and as the passive form of the active verb interpretare, in the sense of 'to signify, to mean'. 310 F. Dolbeau, who studied the hagiographic translations produced in southern Italy in the ninth and tentli centuries, notes that, in this particular context, interpretari and interpres are reserved for translations by intermediaries. The use of the term suggests a direct contact between the speakers of the different languages (i.e. Greek and Latin). Transferre, on die other hand, does not imply such direct contact, and can be used for translations, but also for Latin adaptations of Greek. E D O L B E A U , Le role des interpretes dans les traductions hagiographiqu.es (1996), pp. 151-152. The distinction seems, however, to have eroded in the later Middle Ages. See, for example, the use of interpres in the sense of 'translator' (of a foreign language): D M L (4). Note, furthermore, that in medieval Latin the non-classical verb translatare was occasionally used alongside transferre — it carried the literal meaning of'to transfer', but also the metaphorical meaning of'to translate'. See, e.g., Lex.lat.Ned. MediiAevi, translato. Translatare, however, seems to have been used
in yet another meaning: 'to copy (a text)'; cf. O. GUYOTJEANNIN, Le vocabulaire de la diplomatique en latin medieval, CIVICIMA II (1989), p. 129. 311 O . W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen age, CIVICIMA I V (1991), p. 83. On p. 84 Weijers notes that traducere only came to mean 'to translate' in the Middle Ages, and that its use in this sense was not frequent. She cites an example from Notker of St. Gall, and refers to S. SONDEREGGER, Notker des Deutschen Terminologie dts Ubersetzungsvorganges (1987), p. 17.
288
INTERPRETARI, TRANSFERRE, VULGARIZARE
These terms were used for translations from Hebrew, Greek and Arabic into Latin. For translations from Latin into the vernaculars, the linguae vulgares, the neologism vulgarizare (vulgarisare) could also be used,312 or, specifically for translations into the German language, t(h)eutonizare.313 Interpretatio, translatio and also the more specific terms vulgarizatio and theutonizatio similarly refer to 'translations' into other languages. Interpretatio, however, was also used in the sense of 'interpretation', 'explanation'. In the context, for example, of lexicographical works such as dictionaries with etymologies (—>etymologia) and derivations (—^derivatio), the word could tlius also be used for Latin-Latin 'translations': synonyms or short word explanations. Interpret, interpretator —the classical and the Late-Latin form— and also translator were all used in the sense of 'translator' (from a foreign language).314
312 Although the expression lingua vulgaris was already in use in the twelfth century, the verb vulgarizare and its noun vulgarizatio seem to be of a later date. Cf. D u C ; he refers to an attestation in an Italian source dated in 1275. Apart from the meaning of'to translate into a vernacular language' the verb could also have the meaning of 'to make public, to publish'; D u C . (2); B L A I S E , Lex., (2).
313 The active meaning of theutonizare, 'to translate into German', is attested in the Lex.Lat.Ned. MediiAevi. I n D u C . , N I E R M . and B L A I S E , Lex., the meaning is given as 'to mean in German' or 'to call in German'. The earliest attestation of the term dates from 1030, M E G I N F R E D U S , Vita Emmerammi ( A A S S , Sept. V I , p. 490, col. 2): 'Hujus [civitatis] vocabulum modernis temporibus lingua nostra Reganisburc teutonizat.' 314 Cf. D M L , interpres (4); interpretator (2). Both, however, also have the meaning of 'one who explains, expounder' —cf. D M L , interpres (2); interpretator (1)— and of 'intermediary' —cf. D M L , interpres (1); interpretator (3). Note the specifically Christian meaning of interpretator as 'exegete': B L A I S E , Diet.
For translator, seeTLL; OLD; BLAISE, Diet.; Lex.lat.Ned. MediiAevi.
INTERPRETARI, TRANSFERRE, VULGARIZARE
289
In Antiquity and in the Middle Ages both interpretari and transferre were used in the sense of 'to translate';315 interpretatio and translatio in the sense of'the act of translating' or 'translation';316 and, finally, interpres and translator in the sense of'translator', from one language into another.317 Alongside interpretari's specific meaning of 'to translate', its other meanings, notably 'to interpret, expound, explain', also continued to be used in the Middle Ages. The two meanings sometimes amalgamated into one, for example in the context of medieval lexicographical works, where (Latin) terms were 'translated' (or explained) with more current synonyms.318 Late Latin and medieval word forms related to the concept of translation are interpretator,™ which could be used in the meaning of 'translator'; translatare ('to translate'); and words related to the phenomenon of translation into vernacular languages: t(h)eutonizare (-sare) — t(h)eutonizatio, and vulgarizare (-sare), vulgarizatio. T(h)eutonizare seems to have been used first in the eleventh century, and vulgarizare seems to be of a later date.320
315 Cf. T L L , interpretari (coll. 2261-2262); O L D , interpretari (6), transferre (6); B L A I S E , Diet., interpretari (2), transferre (4); D M L , interpretari (4c); for transferre (and translatare) see, e.g., Iex.ht.Ned. MediiAevi. 316 Cf. O L D , interpretatio (5), translatio (4c); D M L , interpretatio (3). See also some examples given by O . W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen age, CIVICIMA I V (1991), pp. 79-80. 317 References given above. 318 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen age, CIVICIMA I V (1991), p. 82. 319 Cf. BLAISE, Diet. 320 On the semantic background of these see also O. W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen age, CIVICIMA IV (1991), pp. 84-85.
290
involucrum, integumentum In the twelfth century and later, the terms involucrum or integumentum, which literally mean 'veil' or 'garment', were frequently used in the interpretation of pagan authors: it was argued that beneath the covering (involucrum or integumentum) of their myths and fables lay deeper truths (of a religious, moral, or natural philosophical nature), worth uncovering by exegesis.321 The most famous definition of the term was given by Bernardus Silvestris in his introduction to the Aeneid, where he argues that 'integumentum is a kind of demonstration of truth hidden under fictitious tales'.322 Elsewhere he makes a sharp distinction between allegory (allegoria) and integumentum: the latter relates to secular allegory, whereas the first can be applied, for example, to biblical parables or Christian -+exempla.i2i
The topos of a 'truth' hidden beneath fictitious fables dates from Antiquity, and was transmitted to the Middle Ages through (amongst others) Macrobius and the Church Fathers.324 In the late Latin period in-
321 O n this subject see (among others) M . - D . C H E N U , Involucrum. Le mythe selon les theologiens medievaux (1955); E . J E A U N E A U , L'usage de la notion d"integumentum(1958); H . B R I N K M A N N , Verhiillung ('Integumentum') als litemrische Darstellungsform im Mittelalter (1971); B . STOCK, Myth and Science in the Twelfth Century (1972), esp. pp. 49-62. For a fairly recent status questionis and bibliography, see H . J . W E S T R A , The Commentary on Martianus Capella's 'De nuptiis Philologiae et Mercurii' attributed to Bernardus Silvestris (1986), pp. 23-33. See also, although not so much on the terminology of the phenomenon, I D . , The Allegorical Interpretation of Myth (1995). 322 'integumentum est genus demonstrationis sub fabulosa narratione veritatis involvens intellectum, unde etiam dicitur involucrum'. B E R N A R D U S SILVESTRIS, Comm.Aen. 3. Similar definitions are found in A B E L A R D , W I L L I A M O F C O N C H E S , etc. See M . - D . C H E N U ,
Involucrum. Le mythe selon les theologiens medievaux (1955); H . J . W E S T R A , The Commentary on Martianus Capella's 'De nuptiis Philologiae et Mercurii' attributed to Bernardus Silvestris (1986), p. 27. 323 This distinction, however, is not universal, and in most cases allegoria and integumentum or involucrum are synonyms. Cf. H . J . W E S T R A , The Commentary on Martianus Capella's 'De nuptiis Philologiae et Mercurii' attributed to Bernardus Silvestris (1986), pp. 26-27. 324 For a detailed analysis cf. B . STOCK, Myth and Science in the Twelfth Century (1972), pp. 49 ff.
INVOLUCRUM, INTEGUMENTUM
291
volucrum was the word used in this context. The topos was inspired with new life in the twelfth century, with the revival of (Neo)platonic thought and the study of classical authors. It was only then that integumentum was introduced as a term with the same metaphorical sense of 'allegorical covering, to be unlocked by exegesis'. Involucrum and integumentum are used interchangeably by authors such as Abelard, William of Conches, Thierry of Chartres, Bernard Silvestris and Alan of Lille. In classical Latin neither involucrum nor integumentum were common, and when used they had a concrete meaning: a physical covering of some kind.325 Cicero, however, used both terms in a figurative way that foreshadowed their later development: 'rhetorical veil'. In the late Latin period involucrum was adopted into Christian Latin and its metaphorical meaning eclipsed its physical one.32fi It came to represent a kind of covering, beneath which some truth was deliberately concealed. In the twelfth century, finally, integumentum and involucrum became synonyms, and came to signify the allegorical covering of a secular fable or myth.327 The terms are occasionally found in the context of the commentary tradition on the Bible and Christian authors, but most frequently they occur in the context of the reading of pagan texts, such as Ovid, Virgil, Lucan, Cicero, Plato, Martianus Capella, etc.
325 T L L ; O L D . O n the semantic development of the terms cf. B . S T O C K , Myth and Science in the Twelfth Century (1972), pp. 49-50 (classical Latin), pp. 50-51 (Christian Latin) and p. 52 (medieval Latin). 326 Cf. TLL; BLAISE, Diet. yvj Cf. DML, integumentum (3), involucrum (4). Note, however, that both integumentum and involucrum also have physical meanings in medieval Latin.
292 legere, lectio, lectura, legibilis From the early Middle Ages onwards, the most common method of teaching can be described as follows: a master read, and simultaneouslycommented upon, a(n authorized) text.328 In the early Middle Ages, the literary product that testifies to this method of teaching is the glossed manuscript, and (roughly) from the tenth century onwards, separate commentaries, copied independently of the text, appear. The usual terminology for referring to this kind of teaching is legere or lectio, and,
328 Ine basic principle of teaching by commenting on an authoritative text is found in all disciplines. At the centre of this concept of teaching, however, stood the Bible; the understanding of the Bible was the ultimate goal of any student, and throughout the Middle Ages it was often emphasized that all other arts were only useful as tools to penetrate to the essential meaning of the biblical texts. The expression used for the reading of the Bible (and authorities on its interpretation) is lectio divina. On the early history of this concept see D . G O R C E , La lectio divina des origines du Cenobitisme a Saint Benoit et Cassiodore (1925), esp. pp. i-xxxvi. On this concept of teaching in the early Middle Ages, see E . L E S N E , Les ecoles de la fin du VTII' siecle a la fin du XII' (1940), pp. 657-662; for the twelfth century, see G . PARE, A . B R U N E T , P. TREMBLAY, La renaissance du XII' siecle (1933), esp. 110-113; J . C H A T I L L O N , La Bible dans les ecoles du XII' siecle (1994). On the use of the terms in later ages and specifically in the context of the medieval universities, see, inter alia, J . V E R G E R , L'exegese de I'Universite (1994); O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 299-302 and 324-329; O . W E I J E R S , Le maniement du savoir (1996), pp. 39-59 (Chapitre 3, 'Les cours, methodes et pratiques'); A . M A I E R U , Les cours: 'lectio' et 'lectio cursorid (1997), pp. 373-392. See also the articles on —tordinarius and —> cursus, and die related terms -J>qu(a)estio and -^disputatio. The attitude towards the reading of texts in the monastic context of the early Middle Ages (which persisted into the later Middle Ages and beyond) is characterized by terms such as mminare, ruminatio and meditare, meditatio. These terms stand for a kind of reading which is, in essence, private; literally, a 'chewing' of a text, re-reading it (just as animals chew the cud) and learning it by heart.
M
LEGERE, LECTIO, LECTURA, LEGIBILIS
293
consequently, legere came to mean 'to teach or lecture',32) lectio 'lesson' or 'lecture', lectiones 'series of lectures' or 'course'.330 In the centuries that followed, the basic principle of legere and lectio, that is, the explanatory reading of an authorized text by a master to his audience of students, remained the same, but the methods used changed. In the twelfth century, a master s comment took the form of what has been called a 'continuous' or 'running commentary': a fairly literal explanation of the text, in which (part of) the phrase explained was usually included in the text of the commentary as a (typographically distinguished) lemma.331 Explanations or digressions were marked with expressions such
329 Other terms used in the meaning of 'to teach' are the classical terms docere and instruere, but also —tregere, which developed this meaning in the twelfth century. On docere, cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des university (1987), p. 297; on docere and instruere see C . V U L L I E Z , Le vocabulaire des ecoles urbaines des XII' etXIIF siecles, CIVICIMA V (1992), pp. 94, 98, 99,101; A . G A R C I A Y GARCIA, Vocabulario de las escuelas en la Peninsula Iberica,
CIVICIMA V (1992), pp. 165,176; M.C.M. PACHECO & M.I.M. PACHECO, Le vocabulaire de I'enseignement dans Us Sermones d'Antoine de Lisbonne/Padoue, CIVICIMA IX (1999), p. 148. Derivations from instruere are instructio and instructor. 330 Note, for example, the expression magister legens, the meaning of which is similar to magister regens — an actively teaching master (cf. -^magister (Cat. I ) , —>regere). The terms legere and lectio were in principle used in all kinds of schools. Both C. Frova and C h . Vulliez, however, stress the virtual absence of these terms from the sources relating to the urban schools: 'Mediocre est la place par contre de termes comme [...] le doublet legere/lectio usuel dans le vocabulaire universitaire pour designer Faction d'enseignement, mais ici rarement employe dans son acception scolaire'. C . V U L L I E Z , Le vocabulaire des ecoles urbaines des XII' etXIII' siecles, CIVICIMA V (1992), p. 94; see also C . FROVA, Le scuole municipali all'epoca delle universita, CIVICIMA V (1992), pp. 185-186. Frova, however, notes that legere and -elector (Cat. I) are rarely used in these sources, but that lectio is used for the reading (aloud) of texts. 331 See J . M A R E N B O N , Medieval Latin Commentaries and Glosses on Aristotelian Logical Texts (1993).
294
LEGERE, LECTIO, LECTURA, LEGIBILIS
as nota or notandum quod, and larger asides, in which (textual) problems of the text were treated, were called dubia or -^questiones?i2 In the course of the thirteenth century, different types of commentaries developed which were each in their own way related to the lectio of a master. O. Weijers characterizes them as 'lectio-commentaries', 'questio-commentciries and 'sententia-commentaries .^ The 7
332 Note that this method remained widespread after the twelfth century, and that the expressions mentioned {nota, notandum, dubia, —fquestiones) were adopted as technical terms in the vocabulary of the later types of commentaries. For early thirteenth-century examples see M . C . M . P A C H E C O & M . I . M . P A C H E C O , Le vocabulaire de I'enseignement dans les Sermones d'Antoine de Lisbonne/Padoue, CIVICIMA IX (1999), pp. 149-154, on the teaching vocabulary of Antonius of Padua. 333 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Le maniement du savoir (1996), pp. 42-46. 334 Weijers sketches the three types in Le maniement du savoir (1996) (Chapter 3): in Paris the 'fcao-commentary' was most common in the period 1230-1260, while the other two types flourished in the second half of the thirteenth century. In a '^rtzo-commentary' the basic text was generally divided into passages or lectiones, each of which was treated according to a predetermined scheme: a section on the general meaning of the passage in question (intentio or —tsententia in generali); a section on the meaning of this passage in particular, a paraphrase (expositio or -^sententia in speciali); the so-called ordo or ordinatio, i.e. the placement of the passage in the whole of the text; and, finally, a treatment of the problems (textual or concerning content) of the passage (dubia or questiones). In the 'sententia-commentaiits from the second half of the century, the main object was a paraphrase of the content of the passage in question, and only short problems or questions were treated in the commentary. Because of the difference in character of the two, Weijers suggests that the more literal and superficial narure of the 'sententia-commemary could perhaps correspond to the 'cursory' teaching of bachelors (-^lectio cursorid), while the '/^iTft'o-commentaries' and later also the '^«frt/o-commentaries' should be seen as related to the 'ordinary' teaching of masters (—>lectio ordinarid).
LEGERE, LECTIO, LECTURA, LEGIBILIS
295
ordinarie or lectio ordinaria^ versus legere cursorie or lectio cursoria or ad
cursum (cf. —>ordinarius, -^cursus). The lectio ordinaria on the one hand was used for the lectures of masters at regular hours (usually in the morning), on curricular books (cf. -^ordinarius). The lectio cursoria, on the other hand, could deviate from die 'ordinary lesson' in several aspects: the lectures could be given by bachelors, they could take place at a different time of day (usually the afternoon) or in a different place, they could treat different subject matter and — perhaps most importantly — they probably used a different teaching method, which introduced students (relatively superficially) to the sensus litteralis or textual interpretation of a text (on this, see -^cursus).™ In the thirteenth century, lectura was used alongside lectio for the lecturing of a master.337 Whereas lectio, however, was also used in the concrete sense of 'lesson' or 'lecture', lectura was in general used in a more abstract sense: the whole of the lecturing of a master on a certain (curricular) text.338 Consequendy, from the
335 Also: legere sollempniter, lectio sollemnis — cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 300, 307 n. 132. Weijers notes for the lecturing of a master also the expression lectio sollemnis, and for the lecturing of a bachelor lectio privata. Lectio sollemnis, however, was used in several meanings: it was also used, for example, for the inaugural lecture of a new master. 336 Note that the expression lectio extraordinaria also occurs, mainly in the sources of the Italian universities (cf. —tordinarius). On the meaning of extraordinarius versus ordinarius, cf. A . M A I E R U , Les cours: 'lectio' et 'lectio cursoria' (1997), pp. 375-378; on extraordinarius versus cursorius see ibid., pp. 378-381. 337 The term lectura existed in the twelfth century in the sense of 'the act of reading (aloud)'. Its use became more frequent in the thirteenth-century context of the university, where it developed the specific technical meaning described here. Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 299-302. In the vocabulary of the sixteenth-century university both lectio and lectura were also used in the meaning of 'lecturership' (cf. D M L lectio 5, lectura 4). Note that the term was also used in a meaning which was closer to its original meaning. The expression lectura in auk, for example, occurs in the sources of the College de Sorbonne for the daily reading held during the communal meal — O . W E I J E R S , Le vocabulaire du College de Sorbonne, C1VICIMA VI (1993), p. 18. 338 Cf. D M L (2c)
296
LEGERE, LECTIO, LECTURA, LEGIBILIS
fourteenth century onwards, lectura was also used for the literary product which resulted from a master s teaching, and sometimes it had the same meaning as -^glossae, commentarius, etc.339 Another term used in the vocabulary of the medieval university which was derived from legere in its technical sense is legibilis. This adjective designated days appointed for lecturing, dies legibiles, in the calendars of the academic year. The opposition was, on the one hand, between dies legibiles and festa or vacatio (holidays, cf. -^cessare), on the other hand between dies legibiles (days appointed for lecturing) and dies disputabiles (days appointed for disputations, cf. -J>disputatio).lAO
In Antiquity one of the meanings of the verb legere was 'to read (aloud)',341 and it is this meaning which lies at the base of the meanings of the term in the intellectual context of the Middle Ages.342 In the Christian period, legere and lectio were used for the reading of the Bible and the Church fathers;343 lectio in its meaning of 'that which is read' was used for the liturgical practice of reading passages from the Bible in divine offices or masses.344 In the context of medieval education, the meanings of legere and lectio developed in new directions. Legere was used for the act of reading and simultaneously explaining or commenting upon a text, and from the eleventh century, the term is used in the absolute sense of 'to lecture or teach'. Similarly, from the eleventh century onwards lectio was used in
339 Cf. D M L (3b); for examples see J . O . \CkRD, Rhetoric and the Art of dictamen,
CIVICIMA I I I (1990), pp. 39-40; V. C o m , Termini del dirrito civile, CMCIMA I I I (i99o),_pp. 234-235. 340 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 318-320. 341 Cf. T L L (cols. 1128-1133); O L D (8). Other meanings of legere are, for example, 'to gather or collect', or 'to choose or select'. 342 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie da universites (1987), pp. 326-329. 343 Cf. B L A I S E , Diet.
344 In the context of medieval education the term lectio often has this meaning: a passage of a text, which is read (aloud), treated in a lesson, or forms a chapter in a book. Cf. N G (3, 4); D M L (2c, 6); B L A I S E , Diet. (1-3).
LEGERE, LECTIO, LECTUEA, LEGIBILIS
297
the absolute sense of lecture'. The terms were used both for the activity of the master and of the student: to teach on the basis of a text, or to learn from the reading of a text.343 In the context of the medieval university, the terms were applied only to the activity of the master, whereas the role of the student was described with different terms (notably -±audire).
345 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 327 and n. 19. W h e n legere is used in the sense of'to learn from reading, from studying texts' it is often accompanied by the preposition apudor ab: legere ab aliquo ('to read in or learn from someone's work').
298
obligatio The obligational disputation or obligatio is one of the elements which one encounters when studying the area of medieval logic.346 Its position in the medieval curriculum of logic, however, remains unclear; it has been characterized as 'a disputational game',347 'an ingenious schoolboy exercise' and as 'primitively axiomatised logic'.348 In —>disputationes de obligationibus the interlocutor or respondens (cf. -^opponere) binds himself to uphold {concedere), deny inegare) or doubt (dubitare)™ a certain initial statement, put forward by the initiator of the disputation or opponens. This is the basis for the term obligatio: the opponens asks the respondens to take on the obligation, and the respondens is subsequently compelled {obligatus) to accept anything which logically follows from the position taken at the beginning of the disputation.
346 O n this subject see, a.o., E . S T U M P , Obligations: From the Beginning to the Early Fourteenth Century (1982); P.V. SPADE, Obligations: Developments in the Fourteenth Century (1982). On obligational disputations within the cutriculum of the Parisian Faculty of Arts see H . A . G . B R A A K H U I S , Logica modernorum as a Discipline at the Faculty of Arts of Paris (1997). O . W E I J E R S treats the genre in La 'disputatio'a la Faculte ties arts de Paris (1995)., pp. 88-91; and in La 'disputatio' dans Us Facultes des arts au moyen age (2002), pp. 67-70 and 154-157. See also L . M . D E R I J K , Some Thirteenth Century Tracts on the Game of Obligation (1974, 1975, 1976); and I D . , Specific Took concerning Logical Education, CIVLCIMA I I I (1990), pp. 70-75 — here he refers to the unpublished Louvain thesis (1963) of R . G R E E N , O . F . M . , An Introduction to the Logical Treatise 'De obligationibus'. Other terms of formal logic which are treated in this study are —tfallacia, —>insolubile, and -^syncategorema (consignificantia). 347 H . A . G . B R A A K H U I S , Logica modernorum as a Discipline at the Faculty of Arts of Paris (1997), p. 138. 348 E . S T U M P , Obligations: From the Beginning to the Early Fourteenth Century (1982), p. 315349 From these three positions which a respondent can take to the initial statement derive six species of obligatio. Examples of these, taken from Burley's obligations, are given in E . STUMP'S article on pp. 3:9-318.
OBLIGATIO
299
Thus a game of formal logic reasoning unfolds: 'the opponent proposes a number of other statements which the respondent must concede or deny — but always the respondent must maintain the initial statement according to the obligation accepted, and he must observe the logical rules of inference, if the various statements proposed are logically connected, at all times avoiding a contradiction.'350 If the respondent is compelled to maintain something impossible, it must be because he has made logical mistakes in responding. It is the task of the opponent to trap the respondent into maintaining contradictions, and it is the task of the respondent to avoid such a trap. Note that, as De Rijk writes, 'truth does not matter and the emphasis is on formal consistency.'351 The beginnings of this genre of logical treatises lay in the late twelfth or early thirteendi century,352 although its outlines became somewhat sharper only in the second half of the thirteenth century. Its roots seem to lie in the intellectual milieu of Paris,353 but in the fourteenth century the genre flourished and became more diverse in Oxford, with treatises on the art of the obligation by Walter Burley, William of Sherwood, Richard Kilvington and Roger Swineshead.354
350 L . M . D E R I J K , Specific Took concerning Logical Education, CW1CIMA I I I (1990), p. 70. 351 L . M . D E R I J K , Specific Took concerning Logical Education, CP/ICIMA I I I (1990), p. 71. Thus the obligatio clearly distinguishes itself from the scholastic -^disputatio — just as do indeed the earlier forms of dialectical disputation, which also seem to aim at sharpening one's abilities in logic reasoning. Cf. O . W E I J E R S , De lajoute dialectique a la dispute scolastique (2000). Roughly, the obligatio aims at practising or testing rules of formal logic, whereas the main goal of the —tdisputatio is to establish the truth in a certain matter or to truthfully solve a certain question. 352 The theoretical foundation of obligations was provided by Aristotle's works (e.g., Prior Analytics I 13: 'From the possible nothing impossible follows'). Cf. E . S T U M P , Obligations: From the beginning to the early fourteenth century (1982), pp. 318-319. 353 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , La 'disputatio' a la Faculte des arts de Paris (1995), p. 88 and n. 146, with a reference to L . M . D E R I J K , Some Thirteenth Century Tracts on the Game of Obligation, esp. Part I I : The Obligationes parisienses found in Oxford, Canon. Misc. 281
() 354 For the second phase of the development of the genre see P.V. SPADE, Obligations: Developments in the fourteenth century (1982).
300
OBLIGATIO
Both in Antiquity and in the Middle Ages obligatio had the meaning of 'obligation' in a legal ('liable') or moral sense.355 The specific technical meaning which developed in the context of medieval logic follows naturally from diis basic meaning: once the respondens has taken his position on a certain statement, he is obliged {pbligatus) to uphold that position. Furhtermore, not only the disputational games played according to these rules were called obligationes, but also the textual genre that rose from it.
355 OLD (3); NIERM.; NG (esp. I-II).
301
opponere, opponens; respondere, respondent Opponere and respondere developed specific technical meanings in the context of the practice of the -^disputatio, the scholarly debate.356 From the beginning of the thirteenth century the term opponere and its participle opponens357 were used in the setting of the -^disputatio: the opponens was the student who took it upon himself to defend one of the two solutions to the central problem.358 He did this in reaction to the master, who raised the central question in the first place, but not necessarily in opposition to the master. Around 1230, a third player became part of the practice of the -^disputatio, the respondens:359 it was the task of the respondens to find weaknesses in the arguments of the opponens,360 and to phrase a preliminary conclusion at the end of the debate. Thus the two players engaged in a dialectical dialogue: the central problem was, ideally, studied in full depth from all points of view and all implications of each solution were taken into account. Both opponens and respondens, however, fell under the authority of the master, who in the end gave the final answer (cf. -^determinare). Opponens and respondens had special roles in the so-called obligational disputations (cf.->obligatio), which flourished particu-
356 For a full treatment of the terms see O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 347-348, 350-351 and 353-354. Sec also the contribution of B.C. B A Z A N in B.C. B A Z A N , G . F R A N S E N , D . JACQUART and J . W . W I P P E L , Les questions disputees et les questions quodlibetiques (1985), esp. pp. 39-40, 52-56. For a treatment of the material on opponere and respondere in the statutes of the Faculties of Arts in France, England, Italy and central Europe see O . W E I J E R S , La 'disputatw dans les Facultes des arts au moyen age (2002). 357 Oppositio was used in a related meaning: cf. N I E R M . (3); N G (III). 358 The opponens seems to have first emerged in relation to the —>disputatio in the disputations of Simon of Tournai at the beginning of the thirteenth century. B.C. B A Z A N , Les questions disputees et les questions quodlibetiques (1985), pp. 39-40, 52-53. 359 Cf. B.C. B A Z A N , Les questions disputees et les questions quodlibetiques (1985), ibid.; O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 347-348. The terms respondere and responsio were used in related meanings in the same context. 360 And the opponens in turn tried, of course, to refute the arguments of the respond-
302
OPPONERE, OPPONENS; RESPONDERE, RESPONDENS
larly in Oxford in the 1320s and 1330s.361 Here too the opponens acted as the initiatior of the debate, and the respondens as his discussion partner, but the rules of play required that the respondens defended the initial statement of the opponens. In the course of the debate the opponens proposed a number of other statements, which were either accepted or rejected by the respondens on the basis of logical thinking. Thus the opponens tried to trap the respondens into maintaining logically incompatible statements, while the respondens tried to avoid such traps. At the beginning of the thirteenth century the role of opponens in the scholastic disputation was played by students, who engaged in a discussion with and under the guidance of their master. In the course of the thirteenth century, however, as the practice of the -^disputatio became an important element in university education, any student could play the role of opponens (and respondens) in private disputations {-^disputatio in scholis), but in the solemn disputations {-^>disputatio sollemnis, magis-
trorum, publica, etc.) only students advanced to die level of ^baccalarius (Cat. I) could participate in the discussion.362 For them participation in -^disputationes was not only a privilege, but also an obligation. In the thirteenth century an arts bachelor, for example, was required to 'oppose' and 'respond' in solemn disputations for two years in order to qualify for the licence to teach {-^licentia (ubique) docendi, Cat. I). 363
361 On the role of opponens and respondens in the obligational disputation see L . M . DE R I J K , Specific Tools concerning Logical Education, CFVICIMA I I I (1990), pp. 70-71; N . K R E T Z M A N N , A. K E N N Y , J . P I N B O R G (eds.),7fe Cambridge History of Later Medieval Philosophy (1982), pp. 318-319. 362 B.C. BAZAN makes a strong case for this against P. G L O R I E U X in Les questions disputees et les questions quodlibetiques (1985), pp. 56-57. 363 B A Z A N gives a detailed description of the specific requirements for bachelors in Theology, as determined in the statutes of the University of Paris: B.C. B A Z A N , Les questions disputees et les questions quodlibetiques (1985), pp. 54-56. In the Faculty of Arts a bachelor was first allowed to oppose, opponere, and then, after a year or so, to respond, respondere (de -^questione, de -^sophismatibus, etc.). It is only logical that the act of respondere was allowed at a more advanced level than the act of opponere, since the task of the respondens was to decide the discussion, albeit preliminarily, and his task was, therefore, closer to that of the -^magister (Cat. I). See also O . W H I J K R S , La 'disputatio'dans les Facultes des arts au moyen age (2002).
OPPONERE, OPPONENS; RESPONDERE, RESPONDENS
303
The semantic development of opponere and respondere, and, consequently, also of opponens and respondens, is not very revealing. In classical Latin one of the meanings of opponere was already 'to argue in reply', 'to object',364 and the verb kept this meaning in Christian and medieval Latin. 365 In the context of the university disputation, the term opponens developed a specific, well denned meaning: the bachelor who took it upon himself to react to the central question put forward by the master. Classical meanings of the verb respondere are manifold, but among them are 'to answer a question or, also, 'to say in refutation', 'to put forward an opposite point of view'. 366 The verb was used in a school context, inter alia, and this remained the case throughout the Middle Ages. Again, the term respondens developed a specific technical meaning in the context of the university disputation:367 the bachelor who entered into a debate with the opponens, who took it upon himself to refute the arguments of his discussion partner and propose a preliminary solution. In the scholastic tradition of the dialectical debate, the two terms became an opposing pair.368 In the context of the university the terms were used in the increasingly specific meanings described above.
364 OLD (7). 365 Cf. B L A I S E , Diet, (i); N G (IB6 and I I I B ) . Note that in medieval Latin the term opponere was used both transitively (to argue against something) and intransitively (to play the role of opponens). 366 O L D (1-3, 5 c-d). 367 For respondere and responsio in related meanings (viz. 'the act of'responding'' and the 'reply' itself) see N I E R M . respondere (4) and responsio (3). 368 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 353-354.
304
ordinarius/-ie, extraordinarius/-ie The terms ordinarius/-ie and extraordinarius/-ie, which occur in the sources mainly of the Italian universities, developed specific technical meanings in the context of the medieval university.369 They are used in expressions concerning courses, lessons, disputations, schools, books, hours, masters or professors, teaching-material, etc.370 Most common is the combination with ->legere or lectio: in this context ordinarie/-ia indicates that the course or lecture in question is given by a magister regens or legens (dressed in professional clothing) at regular hours (usually in the morning) within the walls of an officially acknowledged school, that material was treated by the 'ordinary' method, that it was part of the standard curriculum, and that the lessons had an official and solemn character. Extraordinarie/-ia, on the other hand, means that something about the course was not in accordance with the prescribed ordo: the course was, for example, taught by a bachelor instead of a master or professor,371 took
369 These terms are treated by O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 306315; she has a section on first attestations in (printed) university sources (pp. 311-313) and on the semantic development of the terms (pp. 313-315). See also A . M A I E R U , Les cours: 'lectio et 'lectio cursoria'ii^j), pp. 374-378. Note that extraordinarius mainly occurs in Italian sources. In the printed sources from the university of Paris the term cursorius (cf -^cursus) is used more or less synonymously with extraordinarius. Here extraordinarius is attested only once, cf. O . W E I J E R S , Le maniement du savoir (1996), pp. 48-49. 370 The adverb (extra)ordinarie is found in combination with verbs such as -^audire, —» legere, —tregere, disputare, intrare; the adjective (extra)ordinarius is found in combination with nouns such as lectio, lectura, —>disputatio, -either (Cat. I I ) , -^sc(h)ola (Cat. I ) , hora, habitus, —^doctor (Cat. I ) , sedes, —>punctum, materia, etc. ( O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 307). 371 See also cursoriusl-ie (-^cursus): the term 'cursory' is often used to refer to courses taught by bachelors, and indicates that the teaching-method of such courses differs from the teaching-method of the lectio ordinaria. A related aspect of the fact that the lectiones extraordinariae were often the responsibility of bachelors is that they were often free of charge, whereas the lectiones ordinariae usually required a certain contribution from the students. Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universith (1987), p. 308, references in n. 139; A . M A I E R U , Les cours: 'lectio' et 'lectio cursorid(1997), pp. 374-375, 378-381.
ORDINARIUS/-IE, EXTRAORDINARIUS/-IE
305
place at hours which were not reserved for lectio ordinaria,^2 or had a private character, etc. All other combinations with (extra) ordinarius/-ie can be interpreted along the lines of its basic combination with -^legerel lectio: the habitus ordinarius is the official clothing of a professor, as worn during his lecturing in 'ordinary' lessons; a hora ordinaria is an hour at which 'ordinary' lessons are given; a liber ordinarius is a book treated in 'ordinary' lessons;373 a disputatio ordinaria is a dispute held on offical days and hours;374 etc. The terms ordinarius and extraordinarius were also used as substantives, as synonyms of magisterI professor ordinarius or extraordinarius. The substantivized neuter ordinarium or extraordinarium was used for the horae ordinariae/extraordinariae, that is the hours reserved for 'ordinary'
372 In this context the alternative term estivaliter ('during the summer') for extraordi-
narie is noteworthy; A. M A I E R U , Figure di docenti nelle scuole domenicane, CIVICIMA IX (1939), pp. 82 n. 199, and 85-86 n. 211. 373 O n libri ordinarii versus libri extraordinarii, see O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 308-309; this concept initially mainly occurred at the Faculties of Law, but seems to have spread to the other faculties as well. See S. L O R E N Z , Libri ordinarie legendi (1985). The distinction between the two is not entirely consistent: one of the main books on the curriculum, the Digestum vetus, can, for example, be treated in lectiones ordinariae as well as lectiones extraordinariae. In principle, the libri ordinarii were lectured upon by 'ordinary' professors within the period of one academic year. The prescribed texts were divided into —>puncta ordinaria and extraordinaria, which were treated in the morning or in the afternoon respectively. 374 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 309-310. The concept of the —» disputatio ordinaria was mainly used at the Faculties of Arts and Theology. Disputationes ordinarie were held at 'ordinary' hours on days marked disputabilis. During the official disputes no lessons were held at the entire faculty — the whole faculty was supposed to be present at these disputes, which were led by magistri regentes in official clothing. They were held once a week or every fifteen days. The disputatio extraordinaria is less clearly defined. The term usually refers to exercises for students organised by individual masters, or disputes held on 'extra-ordinary' hours, but it was also used to refer to the disputes led by bachelors on the occasion of the examination called determinatio {-^determinare). Cf. P. SPUNAR, La Faculte des arts dans les universites de I'Europe centraU (i997)> p. 471; O . W E I J E R S , La 'disputatio' dans Us Facultes des arts au moyen age (2002), pp. 319-320.
306
ORDINARIUS/-IE, EXTRAORDINARIUS/-IE
or 'extraordinary' courses.375 In fourteenth-century and later sources, ordinarium was also used in the expressions magnum and parvum ordinarium. The magnum ordinarium was that time of the academic year in which 'ordinary' (and 'extraordinary') courses were held. Parvum ordinarium., on the other hand, referred to the summer time, in which only 'extraordinary' courses were held, if so desired.376 In classical as well as medieval Latin, the word ordinarius meant 'in accordance with the prescribed or natural order of things', and extraordinarius 'not in accordance with that order'.377 The ordo in question thus defines the terms ordinarius and extraordinarius. In the context of the medieval schools and universities, the ordo can be defined as the set of rules laid down in the statutes — in that context, the terms acquired the status of technical terminology with a specific technical meaning. Essentially, however, the meaning of the terms remained the same.
375 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 310. This same reference to 'ordinary hours', tempus ordinarium, can be found in uses of the term in specific meanings in a liturgical or juridical context ( N G , ordinarium I I B ) . These uses, however, seem unrelated, since the use of ordinarium for 'hours reserved for ordinary lessons' developed from the expressions legere ordinarie and lectio ordinaria. Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 315, n. 179. 376 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 321 & n. 210; P. G L O R I E U X , L'enseignement au moyen Age (1968), p. 100. 377 T L L , col. 2075-2077 and T L L , col. 932-934.
307
postilla In the thirteenth century the term postilla came into use for a kind of biblical commentary.378 The use of the term became frequent from the 1230's1240's onwards, beginning, it seems, with Hugh of St. Cher's Postillae in universa Biblia secundum quadruplicem sensum, a collective work of the
Dominican Friars of St. Jacques in Paris carried out under Hugh of St. Cher's supervision.379 According to Beryl Smalley this work, a continuous gloss on the Bible following the old scheme of an interpretation on four levels of understanding {littera, sensus, allegoria, anagogia), formed a
Dominican answer to different strands of teaching on the Bible which coexisted in thirteenth-century Paris. The postillae of the Dominican Friars of St. Jacques can be interpreted as an attempt to unify two different approaches to the Bible in one continuous commentary: on the one hand the commentary tradition of the religious orders, which emphasized the moral aspects and religious implications, and on the other the critical scholarly approach of the secular masters. As a work of unequalled size, it was to be found in any self-respecting library, and it was copied and even printed throughout and beyond the Middle Ages. It was quoted in many exegetical works, especially, of course, with a Dominican background, but also in other contexts.380 The
378 Cf. B . SMALLEY, The Study of the Bible in the Middle Ages (19522), pp. 264-281; J . V E R G E R , L'exegese de I'Universite (1984), esp. p. 225; H . R I E D L I N G E R in Lexikon des Mittelalters z, col. 52-54, under 'Bibel — 2. Geschichte der Auslegung — d) Das 13. J h . ' ; P.F. S T U E H R E N B E R G , The Medieval Commentary Tradition (1993). 379 Hugh of St. Cher held a chair of theology at St. Jacques from 1230 to 1235, and continued to direct and supervise after leaving the schools. B . SMALLEY, The Study of the Bible in the Middle Ages (19522), p. 270. The Postillae in universa Biblia have been characterized as a collective work by several modern scholars. O n this particular aspect see R.E. L E R N E R , Poverty, Preaching, and Eschatology in the Revelation Commentaries of'Hugh of St Cher' (1985), esp. pp. 181-189. 380 Note that for a commentary both the plural postillae (notes, glosses) and (later perhaps?) the singular postilla was used. Compare, for example, Hugh of St. Cher's Postillae in universa Biblia or Nicholas of Gorrans Postillae in epistolas canonicas septem with Nicholas of Lyre's Postilla litteralis super totam Bibliam.
308
POSTILLA
term postilla became a general technical term for biblical commentaries modelled after this first one. The origin of the term seems to be a contraction oipost and ilia, from post ilia verba.m It may refer to the fact that the commentary called postillae resembled a continuous gloss (comments interposed between the verba of the Bible and written out in a continuous form).382 It has also been suggested that the term may derive from the word posta in the meaning ofpaginal In the Middle Ages the word formed the basis for some new terms: postillare andpostillatio (the act of writting postillae), postillarium (a collection of postillae), andpostillator (a person who writes postillae).384
381 Note that postilla also existed in classical Latin, but here as an adverb in the meaning of'afterwards, after that time' ( O L D ) . The adverbial meaning has disappeared by the Middle Ages. 382 See B . S M A I X E Y , The Study of the Bible in the Middle Ages (19522), p. 270 383 Cf. DuC. 384 Cf. DuC; BLAISE, Lex. For most of these terms Du Cange refers to works by Nicholas of Lyre (ca. 1270-1349), the Franciscan author who wrote the influential exegetical works Postilla littemlis and Postilla moralis. Thirteenth-century authors cited are Salimbene and Roger Bacon.
309
pr(a)edicare, pr(a)edicatio, sermo From early Christian times on the practice of preaching was a major focal point of almost any religious community, and had its own firmly established pastoral and rhetorical traditions.385 In the context of education, however, preaching seems to become a matter of interest only in the course of the twelfth century, when the traditional practice of preaching386 changed under the influence of scholasticism, and adopted new methods of intellectual inquiry. Especially logic reasoning, a primary method of the art of disputation, which appeared at the theological schools at the end of the twelfth century, was adopted by the universities and further developed in this context.387 In the university context two fundamentally different categories of sermons can be distinguished. Firstly, official sermons (predicationes,
385 For an introductory study to the practice of preaching see J . L O N G E R E , La predication medievale (1983). In the recent and substantial volume on the medieval sermon in the series Typologie des sources studies and a large bibliography on the subject can be found: B . M . K I E N Z L E (ed.), The Sermon (2000). From the viewpoint of intellectual vocabulary interesting studies are, e.g., B . M . K I E N Z L E , The Twelfth-Century Monastic Sermon, pp. 271323; M.A. Z I E R , Sermons of the Twelfth-Century Schoolmasters and Canons, pp. 325-362; and N . B E R I O U , Les sermons latins apres 1200, pp. 363-447. Manuals for the writing of sermons) are treated in M . G . B R I S C O E , Artespraedicandi (1992). O n preaching and sermons within the context of the medieval university see further O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 378-381; P. G L O R I E U X , L'enseignement au moyen age (1968), pp. 153-161. 386 Traditional sermons or 'homilies' have been characterized as 'excurses on a single long biblical text'. Cf. M . G . B R I S C O E , Artes Praedicandi (1992), p. 29. 387 On the place of preaching in religious orders such as the Dominicans and the
Franciscans, cf. M.M. MULCHAHEY, 'First the Bow is Bent in Study. Dominican Education before 1350 (1998), esp. C h . 6, 'Preaching Aids: Sermon Collections, Florilegia, Exempla, and Artes', pp. 400-479, and on training in preaching, pp. 184-193; B . R O E S T , A History of Franciscan Education (c. 1210-1517) (2000), esp. C h . 7, 'Preaching: Cornerstone of the Franciscan Educational Project', pp. 272-324. I n her article Les sermons latins apres 1200 (pp. 368-370), N . B E R I O U treats other, less frequent terms for sermons: admonitio (and exhortatio), [h)omilia, tractatus, -^collatio, concio and processus.
310
PR(A)EDICARE, PR(A)EDICATIO, S E R M O
sermones, or also sermones magistrates, publici or generates)™ were held on
each Sunday and feast-day, which the whole congregation of university masters and students (of all faculties) were obliged to attend. Predicatio featured alongside lectio (-^legere) and -^disputatio among the official duties of a master.389 Secondly, at the Faculty of Theology preaching formed a compulsory element in the curriculum. In order to be granted the licence to teach, baccalarii formati (cf. -^baccalarius in Cat. I) were obliged to preach for the assembled members of the university at least once a year.390 Furthermore, baccalarii who lectured on the Bible {baccalarii biblict) or on Peter of Lombard's Sentences {baccalarii sententiarit) held sermon-like introductions to their courses called introitus or —> principium. In sources from the universities of Oxford and Cambridge sermones examinatorii are mentioned; 'examination sermons' which bachelors of Theology were required to hold as a condition for inception (cf. -^incipere) .m
At the end of the twelfth, and the beginning of the thirteenth century the genre of artes predicandi {ars sermocinandi, predicatoria, faciendi/ componendi sermones, etc.) developed,392 manuals on the art of preaching. These manuals clearly served as instruments for constructing sermons, alongside alphabetized compendia of quotations and abstracts on topics suitable for preaching, -^distinctio collections, catechetical manuals (which provided guidance in the administration of sacraments), sermon collections (which could serve as models), etc.393 They reflect the chang-
388 The expression sermones magistrates is attested in sources from the University or Paris from the fourteenth century, the expressions sermones publici and sermones generates occur in sources from the University of Oxford. O . W E I J K R S , Terminologied.es universites (1987), p. 381. 389 In texts from twelfth-century schools -^lectio and -^disputatio are even subservient to predicatio. Cf. O . WEIJERS, Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 380. 390 Note that only bachelors advanced to the highest level, i.e. baccalarii formati, were allowed to preach to the academic community. Cf. -^baccalarius (Cat. I ) . 391 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 381; H . RASHDALL, The Universities of Europe in the Middle Ages, Vol. I l l (revised edition 1987), pp. 70,159. 392 The beginnings of the genre are generally placed with Alan of Lille's Summa de arte praedicatoria, written around 1200, or Thomas of Cobhams Summa de artepraedicandi, which may have been produced a few decades earlier. Cf. M . G . B R I S C O E , Artes praedicandi (1992), pp. 27-29. 393 Ibid., pp. 64-66.
PR(A)EDICARE, PR(A)EDICATIO, SERMO
311
ing practice of preaching and show an awareness of their modernity. In these manuals, an increasingly complex theory of preaching is advocated, including scholarly methods such as -^distinctio and -^-derivatio, logical reasoning, quotation not only from the Bible and Church Fathers, but also from classical authors or more contemporary, accepted sources.394 In the thirteenth century the genre was dominated by French and English authors, in the fourteenth and fifteenth centuries it also flourished in the Spanish, Italian, Dutch, German and central European regions. Although most authors of these manuals are associated with universities or -^studia (Cat. I) attached to Mendicant orders, there is no clear evidence to suggest that the artespredicandi served as text books for students.395 In Antiquity praedicare was used in meanings such as 'to make known', 'to announce' or 'proclaim', but also 'to recommend, praise'.396 This last meaning lies at the basis of the specific use of the term in the Christian context: 'to preach the Gospel'.397 The verb was used both with object ('to preach the Gospels, Christian doctrine') and intransitively, 'to evangelize', 'to preach'. Praedicatio, likewise, came to mean, 'the act of preaching' or 'the sermon preached'.398
394 Examples are described by M . G . B R I S C O E , Artes praedicandi (1992), e.g., pp. 2025 (Alanus of Lille, Summa de arte praedicatoria, ca. 1200) and pp. 30-31 (William of Auvergne, fl. 1250). 395 Cf. M . G . B R I S C O E , Artes praedicandi (1992), p. 67; she argues that 'While the purpose of the manuals is clearly understood, that is, to provide practical instruction in the art of sermon writing and delivery, the actual use of the arspraedicandi is much less apparent.' She suggests use as 'more personal reference guides for practicing preachers', or she pictures some of these manuals/sermon collections in libraries serving theology students and preachers. 396 Cf. O L D . 397 BLAISE, Diet. (5, 6). 398 BLAISE, Diet. (3-4); NIF.RM. (3). Note that the word also kept the more neutral meanings of 'public anouncement, proclamation", 'statement (of a truth)' or 'teaching (of a doctrine)'.
312
PR(A)EDICARE, PR(A)EDICATIO, SERMO
Sermo had the neutral meaning of'speech' or 'discourse' in Antiquity,399 and in early Christian times developed the additional and more specific meaning of'sermon'.400
399 OLD. 4OoCf. BLAISE, Diet. (3). Sermocinari (as in ars sermocinandi) in Antiquity had the meaning of'to converse, to hold a(n informal) conversation. In Christian times it also acquired the meaning of 'to preach', and in the Middle Ages this latter meaning seems largely to have eclipsed the earlier one. Cf. BLAISE, Diet.; N I E R M .
313
pr(a)esentare, pr(a)esentatio, pr(a)esentator, deponere, depositio, depositor In the context of the medieval universities, pr(a)esentare and pr(a)esentatio were used for the practice of the presentation or recommendation of candidates for examinations.401 A professor, called magister or professor presentans in this context, tested his own students in a private session on their level of knowledge and moral qualities. If the student performed satisfactorily, his professor presented (presentare) him for the examination of the licence to teach.402 In the universities of Oxford, Paris and Naples the candidate needed an official testimony from the masters of the Faculty before he qualified for the licence to teach. This testimony was called the depositio (magistrorum); the act of admitting the candidate to examination for the licence was referred to with the verb deponere.403 At the Faculty of Theology in Oxford, furthermore, the expression depositio magistrorum was used for the evaluation of the candidate's performance during his examination, which was held in the absence of the candidate.404 In classical Latin praesentare was seldom used and had the meaning of 'to exhibit' or 'to present' (to the mind or the senses).4"5 In Late Antiquity the term was more common and kept its basic meaning. Praesentatio
401 See for a full treatment of these terms O. W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987),
pp. 395-4°°402 Note that representare and representatio are also used in this sense. Cf. O. W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 395. 403 Note that depositio had a different meaning in the context of obligational disputations (cf. -^obligatio): here depositio was used for a proposition that had been proved wrong and rejected, versus positio (a proposition that had been proved right), and dubitatio (a proposition that had been proved neither right nor wrong). Cf. L . M . DE R I J K , Specific Tools concerning Logical Education, CIV1CIMA I I I (1990), pp. 71-75. 404Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universith (1987), pp. 395-400. 4O5Cf.TLL;OLD.
314
PR(A)ESENTARE, D E P O N E R E
and praesentator were created, and used to refer to 'the act of presenting (something to someone)' or 'he who presents or offers (something to someone)'.40'1 In the Middle Ages, pr(a)esentare and pr(a)esentatio were widely used, and developed the meaning of'to present or recommend someone', in general, but also specifically for a benefice, position, office or grade.407 The use of the terms in the context of the universities is similar: a candidate was presented (with recommendations) before an examining board.
406 Cf. BLAISE, Diet. 407Cf. NIERM. praesentare (2-3); BLAISE, Lex., praesentare (3). Note that praesentatio had the meaning of 'the right to ptesent' (for ecclesiastical benefices or similar matters): N I E R M . ; BLAISK, Lex. Sec for praesentator: BLAISE, Lex.
315
principium, vesperie The term principium is generally used, in the context of the medieval university, for the inaugural lecture of a course. In the context of a student's career an inaugural lecture of this kind marked the transitions from one phase to another, and was, usually, a solemn and public occasion. Bachelors of Theology, who were first allowed to teach on the Bible and then on Peter of Lombard's Sententiae, held principia or inaugural lectures on each of these occasions, in which they eulogized the texts and gave short analyses or introductions.*8 These introductory lectures were also called introitus, ingressus or accessus, but these terms refer to the character of the lecture, and seem not to have been used as technical terms for the solemn occasion itself.409 The most important principium in a student's career, however, was the one he held at his inception (-^incipere) — the ceremony of his investiture as a master. This ceremony was usually staggered over two sessions. In the first session the so-called vesperie or afternoon-disputation took place. In the second the new master was solemnly accepted into the corporate body of masters and held his principium, an inaugural lecture, which was followed by a disputation on two questions.'10 In the vesperie the candidate acted as respondens (cf. -^opponere) in a disputation on two questions, under the supervision of a master — usually the one who had recommended him —; the candidate fulfilled, in
408 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 414-415; P. G L O R I E U X , L'enseignement au moyen age (1968), pp. 137-141; A . M A I E R U , in several articles in University Training in Medieval Europe (1994), e.g. pp. 19, 44, 68, 70. 409Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 415, 419-420. 410 Ibid., pp. 413-414, 415-420, and 407-413; see also J . GLORTEUX, L'enseignement au moyen age (1968), pp. 144-146; J A . W E I S H E I P L , Curriculum of the Faculty of Arts at Oxford (1964), pp. 164-165. Note that in the fourteenth century the principium was also called questio or disputatio in aula, or just aula, aulatio or aulica. lhese expressions are found in the sources of Paris and Bologna, and can be explained from the fact that the principium was held in the hall {aula) of the episcopal palace or another equally prestigious hall. Related expressions are magister aulandus or aulator. Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 420-422.
316
PRINCIPIUM, VESPERIE
other words, a bachelor's role.4" At the end of the session the presiding master held a commendatio or commendation of the candidate. In the principium, however, the candidate acted for the first time as -^magister (Cat. I) and was allowed to give the closing argument (cf. -^determinare) in a disputation on two more questions. Inception principia were held on days reserved for disputations (dies disputabiles). They were also called inceptio, a term that could either refer to the ceremony of inception as a whole, or to the second session alone. They were solemn occasions, to which all regent masters of a faculty were invited. The term principium seems only to have been part of the technical vocabulary of the northern universities. In the thirteenth-century sources of Paris and Cambridge the term occurs occasionally, but only in the fourteenth century is it commonly used in the sense of 'inaugural lecture'.412 In Italian universities, the principium did not exist; instead the -^examinatio publica functioned as the investiture of a master.413 In the thirteenth century vesperie only occurs in the sources of the English universities (with the exception of one occurence in the charters of Paris).414 In the fourteenth century vesperie is also found in the sources of other universities (Bologna, for example). In classical Latin principium was a very widespread word, with the basic meaning of'the action of beginning', and with many specific meanings.415 In the vocabulary of the university, however, the basic meaning
411 Note the fourteenth-century neologisms vesperiare ('to do' one's vesperie) and vesperiandus (a candidate in the vesperie); O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 416. 412 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 415, 417. Note that in the sources of the universities of southern France the term was sometimes explained, as if either the practice of principium or the term were unfamiliar: 'quando aliquis doctor ... faciet solempne principium vel quando recipiet insignia doctoratus' (Statutes of Montpellier, ed. M . F O U R N I E R , Lesstatutsl, p. 545 [1314]). 413 See the article on -^examinare, and O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 401-404. 414 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 418 and n . 172; B L A I S E , Lex.
415 Cf. O L D ; examples of specific meanings are: 'source' (of a river) (4a); (pi.) 'headquarters of a military camp' (10); but also 'starting point' (in a discussion), 'principle' or 'basis' (4a, 8b) or the 'first passage in a speech or book', 'introduction' or 'preface' (5b).
PRINCIPIUM, VESPERIE
317
of 'beginning' suffices: the principium marks the beginning of a teaching career of a new master in the context of the inception (-^inceptio).416 When used for the inaugural lectures of bachelors of Theology, the term marks the beginning of a series of lectures on the Bible or the Sentences. Principium could then also refer to the introductory character of the inaugural lecture, which is suggested by the use of terms such as introitus, ingressus or accessus as synonyms.
Vesperius is a medieval derivation of the classical word vesper or vespera, and seems to have been created in the thirteenth century.417 Vesper was used, both in Antiquity and in the Middle Ages, for evening.418 In Christian Latin vesperae became the standard expression for evening prayer or evensong.419 Vesperie is, in fact, an abbreviation of the expression disputationes vesperie: the adjective vesperius refers to the time of day at which the session that preceded the inception ceremony was held.
416
Cf. N I E R M . ; B L A I S E , Lex.
(2).
417 Note that in classical Latin the adjective for vesper is vespertinus ( O L D ) . 418 Cf. O L D ; B L A I S E , Diet. (1); B L A I S E , Lex. (2). Note also the classical meaning of'west' (as a region of the earth or sky) or 'people of the west', O L D (3a-b). 419 Cf. B L A I S E , Diet. (2); N I E R M . ; B L A I S E , Lex. (2).
318
promovere, promotio, promotor, promovendus In the sources of the medieval universities the advancement of a student from one level to another was referred to as promovere or promotio.420 These terms were used for advancement in general, but more specifically for the advancement from -^studens or —>scolaris to respondens, from respondent to —>baccalarius, from -^baccalarius to licentiatus, and, most frequently, from licentiatus to -^magister or -^doctor.42' For this last promotion expressions such as promovere or promotio ad cathedram, ad magisterium or ad honorem magisterii were used. Promotor, a term that occurs only from the fourteenth century onwards (in this specific meaning), was used in a similar sense topresentator (cf. -^presentare): die professor who presents his candidate to the examining board for examination for the licence to teach. Promovendus referred to the examinee. The meanings of promovere and promotio did not shift from Antiquity to the Middle Ages.422 In Antiquity promovere was already used in the sense of'to advance (a person) to a higher office", 'to promote', and promotio occurs (though only in inscriptions) in the meaning of 'advancement in office' or 'promotion'.423 In the Middle Ages the terms were adopted into the vocabulary of the universities: promovere developed the specific meaning of 'to advance to a higher grade', 'to graduate', and
420 For a M l treatment of these terms see O . W E I J E R S , Terminobgie des universites (1987), pp. 396, 398-400. 421 On these terms see the relevant articles in Cat. I; and see -^lkentia (Cat. I) and -*• opponere (Cat. I I I ) . 422 The more specific meanings developed from the basic meaning of promovere of to cause to move forward', 'to push'. 423 Cf. O L D promovere (4); promotio. In the Middle Ages the terms were used for advancement in the hierarchy of, for example, the church: ad sacros ordines promovere, promovere ad saderdotium, ad episcopatum. Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 400.
PROMOVERE, PROMOTIO, PROMOTOR, PROMOVENDUS
319
most frequently 'to take one's master's or doctor's degree';424 promotio came to refer specifically to 'graduation'.425 The term promotor seems to have been invented only in the later Middle Ages. It does not occur in the printed editions of the early sources of the universities.426
424 Cf. N I E R M .
(3);
B L A I S E , Lex.
(1).
425
(2); B L A I S E , Lex.
(1).
Cf. N I E R M .
426 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 396.
320
punctum In the context of education, especially at the universities of Italy and France, the general word punctum acquired a specific technical meaning.427 In thirteenth-century Bologna a system was invented in which a curricular text was divided into portions, originally marked with dots (puncta). These portions were to be treated within a certain time-span, usually about two weeks and thus the amount of time a professor spent on a certain subject was regulated. A professor who spent too much time on a portion of text was fined. In the course of the thirteenth century the system, which was developed at the Faculty of Law in Bologna, was adopted by other faculties and other universities in Italy and France.428 The act of dividing texts into portions, carried out by a board of professors, was called taxare puncta and taxatio punctorum. From time to time the text-divisions were revised. The expression punctum taxatum was used for a set portion of text to be treated within the given time-span. In addition the term came to play a role in the context of examinations. A candidate was given two puncta to prepare (assignatio punctorum), on which he was subsequently questioned.429
427 On the division of texts see also -^capitulum. A full treatment of punctum is given in O. W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 302-306. See also L . J . BATAILLON, Exemplar, pecia, quaternus, CTVJC1MA II (1989), p. 207, who points out that the division of a text into puncta was sometimes made to harmonize with its division into -specie. See the treatment of —»/>«v« in Category I I . 428 Cf. A . M A I E R U , La terminologie de I'universite de Bologne de medecine et des arts, CIVICIMA V (1992), p. 141. 429 Examples of the use of the term in this context are given by A. M A I E R U in La terminologie de I'universite de Bologne de medecine et des arts, CTVLCIMA V (1992), pp. 149-151; here, the examination procedure at the Faculty of Medicine and Arts in Bologna is described.
PUNCTUM
321
Both in classical and in medieval Latin punctum had a wide range of meanings.430 Since the portions of text were originally marked with dots, it seems logical to conclude that the specific meaning described above was derived from its use in the sense of 'dot' or 'point', a punctuation sign."1 In medieval Latin punctum was also used, occasionally, in the meaning of'section' of a text or 'chapter'.432 This meaning seems to be derived from the practice described above of dividing a text into portions for educational purposes, and not the other way around.
430 For the different meanings of the word in classical Latin see F O R C ; O L D . In medieval Latin the meanings of the word range from 'section' to 'condition', and from 'stab wound' to 'musical note'. See D u C ; N I E R M . ; B L A I S E , Lex. 431 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 305-306. This use is already attested in I S I D O R E , Etymologies 1,20,3. 432
NIF.RM.
(2);
B L A I S E , Lex (4).
322
qu(a)estio, dubium Qu(a)estio or 'question' is a term that occurs both in Antiquity and in the Middle Ages in sources related to schools and learning. In the course of the twelfth century, however, questio developed a specific technical meaning, which implied a certain setting (that is, a master treating a text), a certain kind of question (that is, a contradictory opposition which could be answered with a yes or a no), and a certain method (that is, treatment of the problem according to the rules of dialectics). Thus from the twelfth century the term questio referred to a specific kind of scholarly exercise.433 On the origin of the questio in this sense opinions differ. It has been defended that the questio developed from the teaching practice of jurists,434 but also that its origin is to be sought in the ars dialectica as practiced in twelfth-century schools,435 or even in the Arabic world.436
433 There is a large bibliography on the subject. The relation between lectio and questio has been eloquently described by (among many others) G . PARE, A . B R U N E T and P. TREMBLAY, La renaissance du XII' siecle (1933), pp. 124-131. See also O . W E I J E R S , Terminohgie des universites (1987), pp. 335-338, 345; E A D . , L'enseignement du 'trivium a la Faculte des arts de Paris (1994); E A D . , La 'disputatida la Faculte des arts de Paris (1995), pp. 25-40; E A D . , Le maniement du savoir (1996), pp. 61-75 (Chap. IV, La methode de la 'questio'). See also B . C . B A Z A N , G . F R A N S E N , J . W I P P E L , D . JACQUART, Les questions disputees et
les questions quodlibetiques (1985). See also the articles on -^disputatio, -^quodlibet and -^-sophisma. On the relations between the terms questio, —>sopbisma and problema see A . M A I E R U , University Training in Medieval Europe (1994), pp. 130-T34. 434 For references see O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 337 n. 78; and G . F R A N S E N in Les questions disputees et les questions quodlibetiques (1985), pp. 243-246. For the questio in schools of Law see also V. C o m , Termini del dirrito civile, CPVICIMA I I I (1990), pp. 237-241. In these articles set expressions used in specific meanings in the particular context are treated: quaestio reportata, quaestio redacta, quaestio legitima, etc. 435 For references see B . C . B A Z A N , Les questions disputees et les questions quodlibetiques (1985), pp. 25-40. For the questio in theological education see also S.F. B R O W N , Key Terms in Medieval Theological Vocabulary, CPVICIMA I I I (1990), pp. 85-89. 436 For references see D . JAQUART, Les questions disputees et les questions quodlibetiques (1985), pp. 286-287.
QU(A)ESTIO, D U B I U M
323
It is clear, however, that the teaching method of the questio developed from the practice of lectio, that is, a master reading and simultaneously commenting upon a curricular text (cf. -^legere). The texts read in the classroom inevitably contained opposing or even contradictory materials, for which solutions had to be found by the interpreters of the texts. For the treatment of such questions or contradictions a set scheme had been developed by the beginning of the thirteenth century. A dubium or questio was put, which could (in principle) be answered with yes or no: the formula utrum ... an ... was frequently used.437 Arguments in favour and against the possible solutions were phrased, and, the 'right' solution {solutio or determinatio) followed, while counterarguments were refuted. The difference between dubia and questiones is not clearly defined, but in general one could propose that dubium was used for relatively simple questions which required straightforward explanations,438 and questio for more intricate questions that required discussion. In addition to dubium, dubitatio and, of course, the verb dubitare were generally used in this context.439 Originally the questio was closely connected to the text treated in the lectio: the written product of such a lectio usually consisted of a paraphrase and exposition of the text and the treatment of problems arising from the text or problems concerning the interpretation of the text. These asides were called dubia or questiones. In the second half of the thirteenth century a new type of commentaries on curricular texts developed, which consisted entirely of questiones, and which consequently no longer treated the whole text, but just its problematic aspects.440
437 O n this 'utrum procedure' see L . M . D E R I J K , Specific Tools concerning Logical Education, CIMCIMA I I I (1990), pp. 65-66. 438 Treatment according to the dialectical scheme was usually reserved for proper questiones. (See also -^questio disputata.) 439 T h e treatment of ambiguous passages in a text was often introduced with the verb dubitare: 'Forte aliquis dubitaret ...', 'Dubitatur postea ...', 'Dubitatur consequenter ...'. Series of dubia were attached to the main text treated in a lectio, but could also be transmitted separately. O n this development see O . W E I J E R S , La 'disputatio'a la Faculte des arts de Paris (1995), pp. 15-16, 17-28. 440 O . W E I J E R S treats these 'commentaires sous forme de 'questiones" in Le maniement du savoir (1996), pp. 44-45; and in La 'disputatio'a la Faculte des arts de Paris (1995), pp. 25-40.
324
QU(A)ESTIO, D U B I U M
Thus the development of the genre can be sketched as follows: originally, questiones were part of the lectio of a master: the reading {lectio) and exposition [expositio) of a curricular text was alternated with or followed by the posing of certain questions (which had the form of a contradictary opposition): dubia or questiones. Subsequently, in the second half of the thirteenth century a type of commentary developed which consisted entirely of questiones, arising from the basic text but no longer covering the complete text. Finally, in the same period a type of questio developed which was no longer related to the lectio of curricular texts, but which treated fundamental questions in separate sessions (-^disputatio and questio disputata). It is important to note, however, that these developments did not happen in a straightforward way: the three types existed alongside one another and were related to different types of teaching.441 Apart from the scholarly exercise of the questio, which occurs in the statutes of universities, the term is frequently used for various literary products. The questio disputata is either the report (cf. -^reportare) of a disputation, or a treatise deliberately modelled as such — it is often hard to distinguish between the two.442 But we also have today, for example, collections of questiones (disputate) on a certain subject (for instance on a work of Aristotle) or within a certain discipline (these may be die result of series of lectures); collections of questiones which were used as scholarly exercises for training dialectical skills; or collections of questiones which were designed to prepare students for their examinations.443 Derived from quaerere ('to search' or 'to ask a question'444), throughout Antiquity and the Middle Ages quaestio kept the same general meaning of'the act of searching', and was used in many specific meanings.445 One 441 This development is more amply treated (and illustrated with examples) in, among others, O. W E I J E R S , L'enseignement du 'triviurria, la Faculte' des arts de Paris (1994), pp. 6174442 See the article on -^disputatio, and see O. W E I J E R S , La 'disputatid a la Faculte des arts de Paris (1995), pp. 64-67. 443 For references see O . W E I J E R S , La 'disputatio'a la Faculte des arts de Paris (1995), pp. 38-39444 Cf. OLD. 445 For the use of the term in a legal context see, for example, O L D (2-4); N I E R M . quaestio and questio.
QU(A)ESTIO, DUBIUM
325
of its more general meanings, which lies at the basis of the medieval use of the term in the context of schools and learning, is 'question' or 'subject of discussion'.4415 In the twelfth century the term developed in addition the specific technical meaning of 'contradictory opposition, which one can discuss in a dialectical fashion'. The term was adopted into the vocabulary of the medieval universities, where the questio became one of the most important teaching devices, originally in close conjunction with the lectio (cf. —tlegere), and later also as a more independent device which developed into the ->disputation
I 446Cf. O L D (6); BLAISE, Lex. (1). 447 Cf. O. WEIJERS, Terminologk des universites (1987), p. 345.
326
quodlibet, quodlibetalis, quodlibetarius, quodlibeticus A quodlibet {disputatio or questio de quolibet, disputatio or questio quod-
libetalis/ quodlibetica) is a specific kind of solemn disputation that flourished particularly at the Faculties of Theology in the period 1240-1330.448 This kind of disputation differed from the ordinary solemn disputations or disputed questions in several ways. First, as the name reveals, appropriate questions could be raised by anyone {a quolibet): masters, bachelors, but also students or even members of the learned elite outside the university. Secondly, equally indicated by die term itself, any appropriate topic {de quolibet) could be brought to the fore in a quodlibet. Thus the written records of quodlibetal disputations often show a wide range of unrelated topics, since they were not governed by one single theme (as was usually the case in questiones disputate) .449 Thirdly, the master who conducted the quodlibet was supposed to re-address the discussion of the first session in a structured way in a second session, called determinatio {-^determinare); in this second session the master was to present a coherent and logical treatment of all questions raised.450 Fourthly, quodlibets could only be held at two determined periods in the academic year: on a few days during Advent (whence the expression quodlibet in/de Natali), and during Lent (whence the expression quodlibet in/de Paschd). Finally, 448 See O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 355-360; and especially J . W . W I P P E L , who gives a thorough introduction to the genre in his contribution to B . C . B A Z A N , G . F R A N S E N , D . JACQUART and J . W . W I P P E L , Les questions dispute'es et les questions
quodlibetiques (1985), pp. 153-221. My own short treatment of the term largely follows his more extensive one. In his bibliography (pp. 153-156), an important place is occupied by P. G L O R I E U X , who published studies on quodlibets throughout his career, from 1925 to 1968. (See his two-volumed study —La litterature quodlibetique de 1260 a 1320 (1925) and La litterature quodlibetique (1935)—, which contains listings of Masters with their respective Quodlibets and of anonymous Quodlibetal Questions.) 449 In pp. 172-175 Wippel gives a set of practical criteria which one can use to distinguish quodlibets from ordinary solemn questiones disputate (c£ —>disputatio). 4 5 ° Wippel treats this aspect in pp. 166-171, and refers to earlier studies by P. G L O R I E U X , esp. Le Quodlibet et sesprocedes redactionnels (1939), in which he identified five basic structures for the second session of quodlibets or their written reports, which were developed during the latter part of the thirteenth century.
QUODLIBET
327
masters were not required to conduct quodlibetal disputations. At the same time, however, these prestigious events became a major instrument in die hands of great masters to convey their own views on a wide range of subjects to the learned elite. As mentioned above, the quodlibet originally developed at the Faculty of Theology of the University of Paris. Its precise origin remains unknown, but by 1230 the quodlibet had already emerged as a distinct type of disputation with its resulting literary form.451 From there, the practice spilled over to other universities (in the closing decades of the century the genre became particularly important at the Theology Faculty of Oxford), other faculties,'152 and even to the educational institutions of the religious orders.453 In the latter part of the thirteenth century, the adjectives {-^questio/-^ disputatio) quodlibetalis, quodlibetaria and quodlibetica were forged.454
451 For a fuller treatment of the origin and development of the genre see J.W. W I P P E L , Les questions disputes et les questions quodlibetiques (1985), pp. 176-182. After 1330, the genre was still in use, but there was no longer any significant production of quodlibets from the major Faculties of Theology. The genre seems to have lost its importance by then. 452 For studies on the quodlibet in the context of Faculties of Arts, see O . W E I J E R S , La 'disputatio'a la Faculte des arts de Paris (1995), pp. 106-108; J.A. W E I S H E I P L , Curriculum of the Faculty of Arts at Oxford(1964), pp. 182-185; O . W E I J E R S , La 'disputatio'dans les Facultes des arts au moyen age (2002), pp. 52-58, 135-136, 256-260. Weijers argues that quodlibets existed from ca. 1300 onwards, and that they mostly treated questions in the field of the natural sciences. The latter also holds true for the quodlibets conducted in the Arts Faculty of Oxford, but here the evidence does not reach back further than 1340. Wippel, Weijers and Weisheipl all agree that the sources of information concerning non-theological quodlibets are very meagre in wesrern Europe. In her latest book, however, in which Weijers treats the material on quodlibets in central Europe, she concludes that here (and especially in Prague) the importance and organisation of quodlibetal disputations was very different from western Europe. Here the quodlibetal disputation seems to have been a matter principally of the Faculty of Arts, and less of the Faculty of Theology. See O. W E I J E R S , La 'disputatio'dans les Facultes des arts (2002), pp. 280, 285-290, 298-312, 325. 453 See, e.g., M . M . M U L C H A H E Y , 'First the Bow is Bent in Study. Dominican Education before 1350 (1998), pp. 173-175; B . R O E S T , A History of Franciscan Education (c. 1210-1517) (2000), pp. 134-135. 454 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 360; D u C , quodlibetum; B L A I S E , Lex, under quaestio: (1) quaestiones quodlibetales.
328
QUODLIBET
The use of quodlibet and its related terms or expressions455 is specifically restricted, at least originally, to the context of the medieval university. The adjective quilibet, 'anyone', 'whoever', of which quodlibetis the neuter,456 was, of course, common throughout Antiquity and the Middle Ages. A -^disputatio or —tquestio de quolibet, on any topic, or a quolibet, raised by anyone, is in concurrence with the original meaning of quilibet. After the -^disputationes or -^questiones de quolibet had become a regular part of university education, quodlibet was also used independently for the same phenomenon.
455 For a list see O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 360. 456 Note that in classical Latin quilibet also existed as a pronoun, but then its neuter was
quidlibet, cf. OLD.
329
regere, regimen One of the terms used in the Middle Ages in the meaning of 'to teach' is regere.457 In the twelfth century this verb was used in expressions such as scholas regere or studium regere ('to lead or be the head of a school'). These expressions form the basis for the later absolute use of the verb, which became prominent in the context of the universities from the thirteenth century. A -^magister (Cat. I)'leading' a school —a magister regens— was not only responsible for the administration of the school, but was often also its (only) teacher. Regere and regens were, in this context, the most common words for teaching, or having a position as a teacher.458 Expressions such as regere in grammatica, theologia ('to teach grammar, theology') underline this. In the context of the university -^magistri (actu) regentes, masters who were in fact practising teachers, were opposed to -^nnagistri non regentes, masters who had acquired the master's degree and the licence to teach, but who were not active as teachers.459 In this same context regere is often accompanied by vocabulary specific to the university, such as regere —»
330
REGERE, REGIMEN
Analogously to -elector (Cat. I) and synonymously with regens, -Erector (Cat. I) was originally also used in the meaning of'teacher', but when this term became the general term for the 'head' of a school (or of the corporate body of the university), this meaning disappeared.461 Regimen ('leadership, the act of management'), finally, was used in the twelfth century in expressions such as regimen ecclesiae or monasterii, but also regimen scholarum — 'the act of managing (and teaching at) a school'. The term was adopted into the vocabulary of the university, where it was used in the meaning of'professorship'.462 In classical Latin the basic meaning of regere is 'to direct', 'to lead'. The verb was applied in all kinds of more specific meanings,463 and remained in use in all kinds of contexts in the Middle Ages.464 One of these specific meanings was 'to manage', 'to direct', used for the managing of religious communities, churches or monasteries, but also the running of an estate or the direction of a choir or school.465 From this last meaning developed the absolute use of the verb in the meaning of'to teach' or, in the context of the university, 'to hold a chair'.466 Both in classical and in medieval Latin, regimen had the meaning of 'act of management, leadership'. Applied to the specific context of the schools, the term acquired the new meaning of'professorship'.467
461 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 295-296. 462N1FRM. (9); B L A I S E , Lex. (6). O . W E I J E R S also mentions regentia, which was used in the meaning of 'period of professorship', 'the period of time during which one is a magister regens'. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 295-296. See also D u C ; Lex.lat.Ned. MediiAevi (2). 463 Cf. F O R C ; OLD. 464Cf. NIERM.; BLAISE, Lex. 465 Cf. N I E R M . (resp. 1, 4, 2). 466Cf. DuC. (1); N I E R M . (3); BLAISE, Lex., (7); Lex.lat.Ned. MediiAevi (I4). 467 N I E R M . (9); BLAISE, Lex. (6).
331
repertorium, inventarium The terms repertorium {reportorium, reportatoriuni) and inventarium {inventoriumY^ both refer to the function of enabling a person to 'find' {reperire, invenire) what he was looking for as quickly as possible. Both terms became common especially in the later Middle Ages (the thirteenth-fifteenth centuries), a time characterized by an ever growing number of books. New tools for research were invented (among them the index {-^tabula) and the concordance (->concordantia)), and the production of already existing tools such as the florilegium (->compilare) and die dictionary (—tglossarium) increased. Repertorium was used for a particular type of reference book, a collection of (alphabetically or systematically ordered) abstracts from extensive works.469 Most often it was used for 'dictionaries' of concepts from the field of Law.470 Terms used to describe a repertorium or the act of making one are (among others) compendium, colligere (collectio) and —> compilare (compilatio). The term was also used for other research tools, such as 'table of contents' or 'index', and in the later Middle Ages it was a quite common term for a library catalogue.471
468 For a fuller treatment of these terms, see O . W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen age, CIVICIMA I V (1991), pp. 103-105, 135-139 and 145-146; O . W E I J E R S , Les dictionnaires et autres repertoires, CIVICIMA I I I (1990), pp. 204-205.
469J. Hamesse, for example, mentions the word as one of the many terms which occur in titles of fiorilegia: cf. J . HAMESSE, Le vocabulaire desflorileges medievaux, CIVICIMA I I I (1990), p. 211. 470 Other terms for similar works were, for example, general terms for collections of abstracts such as breviarium, memoriale or remissorium (a work which 'refers', remittere, the reader to the sources); general terms for alphabetically ordered works such as ^mlphabetum, —>glossarium, dictionarius, vocabularium; the general term for 'list', -^tabula; or descriptive expressions such as 'expositio terminorum', 'termini iuris utriusque', etc. Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen age, CIVICIMA I V (1991), p. 138. 47 1 Cf. A . D E R O L E Z , Les catalogues de bibliotheques (1979), p. 24. Derolez suggests that the term implies that the list was seen as a tool for research or consultation. The use of the term in this sense dates from the fourteenth/fifteenth centuries.
332
REPERTORIUM, INVENTARIUM
Repertorium was the common term for a (juridical) reference book, but inventarium (inventorium) could be used as its synonym.472 More commonly, however, the term had the meaning of 'a list or inventory' of, for example, goods, possessions, but also —be it occasionally— of subjects treated in a book ('index') or (in the later Middle Ages) of the books in a library (library catalogue').473 In classical Latin repertorium seems to occur only once,474 and its use before the thirteenth century remains unattested.475 The term was derived from reperire ('to find by looking', 'to search for'), and gained popularity only in the fourteenth and fifteenth centuries for research tools such as 'reference work', 'index' or 'table of contents'. At that time the term also became a common term for library catalogues. Besides repertorium the forms reportorium and (occasionally) reportatorium are found, but repertorium seems to be the most common. Inventarium is a classical term, used for inventories or lists of possessions or current assets.476 In the Middle Ages this meaning remained in use,477 but the term was also applied in the new meanings described above. Besides the classical form inventarium the medieval form inventorium is found.478
472 Examples are given by O. W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen age, CJVLCLMA IV (1991), p. 136. 473 Cf. A. D E R O L E Z , Lei catalogues de bibliotbkques (1979), p. 23. An early but isolated example of this use dates from 882, but it only becomes more frequent in the thirteenth century. In the fourteenth and fifteenth centuries its popularity had grown so much as to eclipse other terms. 474 Cf. O L D : ULPIANUS, Digesta Justiniani, i6.j,j. The meaning of the word is here 'inventory' or 'catalogue'. 475 Cf. D u C ; SOUTER; O. WEIJERS, Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen age, CW1CIMA IV (1991), p. 139 n. 351.
476Cf.TLL;OLD. 477 Cf. NIERM.; BLAISE, Lex.; D M L . DuC. gives fifteenth-century verbs derived from inventarium: inventariare, inventarisare and inventoriare. 478 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen age, CIVICIMA I V (1991), p. 136, n. 323; D M L .
333
reportare, reportatio, reportator In the context of schools and universities, especially from the thirteenth century onwards, reportare, reportatio and reportator were terms relating to the transmission from oral text to written record.479 It was common practice to take notes of courses, lectures, disputations or the conclusions of disputations (-^-determinare), for example because die purchase of books was often beyond the budget of ordinary scholars or students. This practice extended beyond the context of education: preacher's sermons480 or transcripts from law suits and hearings are transmitted to us in the same way. However, although the practice of capturing an oral presentation in notes is already described in texts from the twelfth century, the terms reportare and reportatio were only used in this sense from the thirteenth century onwards.481 Moreover, they seem to have become widely used only because of their adoption into the vocabulary of the medieval university.482 The status of a reportatio remains undefined. A reportatio may be no more than a personal set of notes of a student, often a severely abbreviated and rushed text, since the master did not deliver his lecture at
479 O n these terms see J . - G . B O U G E R O L , De la 'reportatio' a la 'redactio' (1982); J . H A M E S S E , 'Reportatio' et transmission de textes (1986); O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 361-365; J . H A M E S S E , 'Collatio' et 'reportatio', CIVICIMA I (1988), pp. 83-86; E A D . , La technique de la reportation (1997). 480 For the state of research and bibliographical references on this subject, J . H A M E S S E refers to the proceedings of the conference Dalpulpito alia navata. La predicazione medievale nella sua recezione da pane degli ascoltatori (secc. XIIL-XV), published in: Medioevo e Rinascimento 3 (1989). ( J . H A M E S S E , La technique de la reportation (1997), p. 405 n. 1.) 481 J . - G . B O U G E R O I . points to the terms colligere, recolligere and deportare in similar meanings: De la 'reportatio'a la 'redactio'(1982), pp. 52-53. See also J . H A M E S S E , 'Reportatio' et transmission de texts (1986), pp. 12-14, on t n e early history of the practice. 482 O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), pp. 363-365, 365: ' O n peut done constater que l'emploi de reportare et reportatio dans le sens de noter par ecrit ce que Ton entend prononcer par un precheur, un professeur, les protagonistes d'une dispute, est une nouveaute qui a son origine dans le cadre universitaire du X I I F siecle.'
334
REPORTARE, REPORTATIO, REPORTATOR
dictating speed.48' The first part of a disputation, in which several persons engaged in a sometimes heated debate, was, of course, even more difficult to capture in writing.484 On the other hand, a reportatio can be one of the aids used by a master to prepare a scholastic text. In this case the reportatio was used, in conjunction, for example, with the master's initial notes for the lecture or disputation, to prepare a definitive text for official publication.485 For this process, some masters would use assistants {-^socii (Cat. I)), usually bachelors, referred to as reportatores.486 They prepared the reportationes, i.e. they tracked down citations, filled in arguments and structured the
483 Terms which relate to the process of dictating a text to a scribe are -^dictare, pronuntiare, legere ad pennant or dare ad pennant. O n this, see J . H A M E S S E , Le vocabulaire de la transmission orale des textes, CLVLCLMA I I (1989), pp. 168-194; a n d s e e -^-dictare. There are some texts that relate the problems students faced while taking their notes: crowded and noisy classrooms, mumbling professors, not enough chairs, not enough parchment, etc. Cf. J . H A M E S S E , 'Reportatio'et transmission de texts (1986), pp. 14-15. 484 J . H A M E S S E addresses this problem in detail in La technique de la reportation (1997), pp. 407-415. 485 This process is described in detail in J . - G . B O U G E R O L , De la 'reportatio'a la 'redactio' (1982), pp. 57-68 (taking the example of a —tquestio disputata of Saint Bonavcnture); J. H A M E S S E , 'Reportatio' et transmission de texts (1986), pp. 14-15; W . J . COURTENAY, Programs of Study and Genres of Scholastic Theological Production (1994), pp. 342-344; J . H A M E S S E , La technique de la reportation (1997), pp. 416-419. Note, however, that in the Middle Ages the terms redigere, redacta and redactio were not used for the process of transforming a set of notes into a proper publication. The socalled questio redacta (cf., among odiers, H . K A N T O R O W I C Z , The quaestiones disputatae of the Glossators (1939), p. 35; G . F R A N S E N , Les questions disputees dans les facultes de droit, in: B . C . B A Z A N etc., Les questions disputees et les questions quodlibetiques (1985), p. 236) is a modern term for a medieval phenomenon. Redigere was used in general senses, such as 'to bring back' or 'to reduce', but also in the somewhat related meaning of 'to put into writing' (redigere in scriptis), or 'to translate' (into Latin, for example); cf. Lex.Lat.Ned. Medii Aevi (Bi,2); A R N A L D I , SOUTER. Terms used for the process of reworking a text were, perhaps, colligere, recolligere or deportare-, cf. J . - G . B O U G E R O L , De la 'reportatio'a la 'redactio'(1982), pp. 52-53. 486 The term is attested in published university sources from the second decade of the fourteenth century onwards, cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 364. J . H A M E S S E points at the terms translare and translator, which sometimes act as synonyms for reportare and reportator: La technique de la reportation, p. 420-421, n. 48.
REPORTARE, REPORTATIO, REPORTATOR
335
text. They prepared, in other words, a revised and annotated copy, which the master could turn into a definitive text.487 In classical Latin reportare was mainly used for literally bringing or taking something back to its (or his/hers) original place, or for the bringing home of, for example, loot from war.488 One of its meanings, however, was also to bring back information, 'to report',489 and it is this meaning which lies at the basis of the medieval use of the term in the context described above.490 Furthermore, it is important to note that it is only from the thirteenth century that the practice of making notes of an oral performance seems to have been referred to by the terms reportare and reportatio.491
487 It is important to note that the main goal of reportationes was not so much to remain faithful to the oral performance, but rather to prepare personal texts as memory aids or source texts for definitive, publishable versions of the performances. Cf. J . H A M E S S E , 'Reportatio' et transmission de texts (1986), pp. 12-13; W . J . COURTENAY, Programs of Study and Genres of Scholastic Theological Production (1994), p. 344. 488 Cf. O L D (1-3). 489 Cf. F O R C .
(8); O L D
(4).
490Cf. B L A I S E , Lex., reportare (2); reportatio (1). 491 Gregory the Great uses the verb excipere for the same activity; cf. O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 365 n. 254; J . H A M E S S E , 'Reportatio'et transmission de texts (1986), pp. 12-13.
336
sententia, summa In the context of anthologies492 one often comes across the terms sententiae and summae (or summulae).4^ Both are used for collections of statements that carry a certain authority, established opinions on particular subjects. Both, furthermore, developed from the need for systematic expositions of authoritative material. Products typically of the scholastic period, the central goal of these anthological works was to attempt to harmonize conflicting authoritative texts by using (Aristotelian) logic. Sententiae and summae were genres that originally developed in the fields of Theology and Law, but which are subsequently found in all fields of medieval scholarship. Both in Antiquity and in the Middle Ages sententia had a wide spectrum of meanings, varying from 'opinion',494 to 'meaning',495 but also 'de492 For other terms in this field see —tcompildre. 493 The bibliography on these genres is large. For introductory treatments see, among others, G . PARE, A . B R U N E T , P. TREMBLAY, La renaissance du XII' sieck (1933), pp. 240274; P. G L O R I E U X , 'Sentences and Summa', The New Catholic Encyclopedia 13, pp. 94-96; T h . R I C K L I N , 'Sententia', and R . I M B A C H & Th. R I C K L I N , 'Sentenzenkommentare',
Lexikon des Mittelalters 7, col. 1765-1766 and 1767-1769; G . M . A R M S T R O N G , 'Proverbs and Sententiae', The Dictionary of the Middle Ages 10, pp. 189-192. On the meaning of the terms in the context of florilegia see J . H A M E S S E , Le vocabulaire des florileges medievaux, CIWCIMA I I I (1990), pp. 215-216; O . W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen Age, CIVICIMA IV (1991), pp. 85-88. On the meaning of summa in the context of Civil Law see P. W E I M A R , Die legistische Litemtur der Glossatorenzeit (1973), pp. 188-213 ('Suramen'); V. C o m , Termini deldirrito civile, CIVICIMA I I I (1990), p. 233. 494 In the twelfth century opinio and sententia were, in some contexts, juxtaposed as synonyms, but in others they were, on the contrary, opposed to each other. John of Salisbury, for example, defines opinio as 'opinion' or 'idea' in general, and sententia as 'accepted, shared opinion', 'an expression with certainty, authority'. Cf. G . PARE, A . B R U N E T , P. T R E M B L A Y , La renaissance du XII' siecle (1933), p. 270; J . H A M E S S E , Le vocabulaire des florileges medievaux, CIVICIMA I I I (1990), pp. 215-216. 495 In the twelfth century Hugh of St.-Victor axiomatized the threesome littera, sensus and sententia for the exposition of biblical texts: littera referred to the words themselves and their order, sensus to the obvious meaning of the text, and sententia to the deeper meaning, hidden behind the obvious one, to be exposed by exegesis. Sententia became, in this context, synonymous with intentio (auctoris), the intention of the author, or profundior intelligentia, deeper understanding. Cf. H . B R I N K M A N N , MittelalterlicheHermeneutik (1980), pp. 157-162; O . W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen age, CIVICIMA I V (1991), P- 71; J - H A M E S S E , Approche terminologique de certaines methodes d'enseignement et de recherche, CIVICIMA V I I I (1995), p. 23.
SENTENTIA, SUMMA
337
cision',496 '(juridical) judgement'. In the context of florilegia, however, it was mainly used in the sense of 'phrase' or 'sentence' (containing a moral lesson or some kind of wisdom), or 'quotation' (from an authoritative text, e.g., in the case of theological anthologies, the Fathers and early Christian writers).497 In the course of the twelfth and especially in the thirteenth century, however, this neutral meaning changed into a more specific one, which developed in the field of Theology.498 The growing interest in an orderly presentation of authoritative material and the scholastic method of dealing with contradictory statements in this material transformed these anthologies into full treatments of Christian doctrine, in which the authorities were not only quoted, but also discussed, elaborated and commented upon.499 This doctrinal type of sententiae-collection, usually centered around one or more points of dogma or morals and soon even around the totality of doctrine, quickly developed in the twelfth centry. Famous examples are Abelard's Introductio ad theologiam and his Sic et non, and,
496 This meaning is reflected in the use of sententia in the expression sententiae magistrates for the final conclusions of masters, with which they settled questions or disputations. Cf. G . PARE, A. B R U N E T , P. T R E M B L A Y , La renaissance duXII' siecle (1933), pp. 271-272. 497 ^n th' s context sententia is on a par with dictum, 'saying' or 'apophtegm', or also proverbium-, 'proverb'. 498 This shift in meaning is described in G . PARE, A . B R U N E T , P. T R E M B L A Y , La renaissance du XII* siecle (1933), pp. 267-274. 499 Thus two meanings of sententia, 'quotation' and 'deeper meaning, sense' seem to have influenced each other and intertwined. Sententia came to mean the 'essence' of a text, not only in the field of Theology, but also in other fields. In the classification of commentaries, moreover, sententiae, which focused on central truths in the text, could be opposed to commentaries which explained the text word for word. It should also be noted that the use of the term in these meanings was not restricted to the field of Theology. Cf. Chr. F L U E L E R , Die verschiedenen Literarischen Gattungen der Aristoteleskommentare (1994), pp. 85-86, 88-93. See also the verb sentenciare, used as synonymous to exponere, 'to clarify the (deeper) sense of a text'. A . M A I E R U , University Training in Medieval Europe (1994), p. 85. Cf. -^legere, lectio.
338
SENTENTIA, SUMMA
of course, Peter Lombard's Sententiae (or Liber quattuor sententiarum) ,5UU which became a text-book for students and bachelors of Theology.501 Summae are summarizing handbooks of authoritative material, systematically ordered and produced to fulfil the need for systematic expositions of large corpora of material, such as the sources of Canon or Civil Law.502 Thus summae differ from sententiae in that they are not in essence collections of quotations, but rather summarizing descriptions, paraphrases of authoritative material.503 In the course of time interpretative material came to play an increasingly important part in summaetreatises, just as the amount of discussion and commentary in theological sententiae-collections grew.504
500 Peter Lombards Sententiae were written between 1155 and 1158, when he taught Theology in Paris. There are, however, earlier examples of sententiae-collections, cf. M. C O L I S H , From the Sentence Collection to the Sentence Commentary and the Summa (1994). 501 Papal approval was given in 1215, but this should be considered a mere confirmation of the position the work had already attained. In the second half of the thirteenth century the title (baccalarius) sententiarius (cf. —tbaccalarius in Cat. I) was adopted into the vocabulary of the universities: a bachelor who taught on Peter Lombards Sententiae. 502 See the extensive treatment of the genre of summae in the field of Civil Law by P. W E I M A R , Die legistische Literatur der Glossatorenzeit (1973), pp. 188-213 ('Summen'). He defines summa as follows: 'Summen sind zusammenfassende Darstellungen des Gegenstandes eines Titels der Quellen oder Schriften, die aus solchen Darstellungen aufgebaut sind' (p. 188). He distinguishes four types of summae: 1) monograph-summae (often called summulae), which introduce the reader to a specific work or topic; 2) collected summae, which (ideally) give an introduction to the whole field; 3) summae collections, which are to be placed in a didactic context and give descriptions of source-material on particular topics —their didactic background is revealed by their often 'non-definite' form and the inclusion of commentary and discussion—; 4) summae compilations. For a useful introduction to summae in the field of Theology, see P. G L O R I E U X , 'Sentences and Summa', The New Catholic Encyclopedia 13, pp. 94-96; and J . J . E . G R A C I A , 'Scholasticism and scholastic method', The Dictionary of the Middle Ages n, p. 57. 503 See also, for example, G . R . EVANS, Theology: The Vocabulary of Teaching and Research 1300-1600, CTVICIMA V I I I (1995), p. 123, who mentions summae in which summaries of academic disputations are systematically ordered under topic-headings. 504 The thirteenth century is generally marked as the heyday of theological summae, culminating in Thomas Aquinas's Summa theologiae, which in its turn became a text-book in the study of Theology, on a par with Peter Lombard's Sententiae.
SF.NTENTIA, SUMMA
339
In classical and medieval Latin sententia has a wide spectrum of meanings, varying from 'opinion' or 'idea' to 'authoritative decision', 'sentence'.505 In Antiquity the word already had the meaning of 'a self-contained group of words', 'sentence',506 which lies at the base of its use in the context of medieval florilegia in the sense of 'axiom or wisdom, borrowed from authoritative writings'.507 As shown above, however, scholastic methods transformed the definition of sententiae from 'collection of quotations' (from the Fathers and early Christian authors) to 'collections of accepted opinions on disputed (theological) matters'. A second line of semantic development of sententia can be sketched starting from its classical meaning of 'sense', 'meaning'.508 In the Middle Ages sententia in this meaning became the opposite of sensus: where sensus was used for the obvious meaning of a text, sententia was used for the deeper meaning, unlocked by exegesis.™ Summa in the sense of text-book or compendium did not exist in classical Latin. It was used, however, in the sense of 'whole', 'overview' of all elements of a complex matter.510 In Christian Latin the term was first used in the concrete sense of 'epitome',511 a use which became common in the Middle Ages.512
505 Cf. O L D . 506 Cf. O L D (8). 507 Cf. DuC. (1); BLAISE, Lex. (2); BLAISE, Diet. (2); Lex.Lat.Ned. MediiAevi (2). 508 Cf. O L D (7). 509 Cf. Lex.lat.Ned. MediiAevi (2a-b). 510 Cf. O L D (4-6). Other meanings of the term are, e.g., 'total number', 'sum of money' or 'crowning stage, culmination', meanings that also persisted into medieval Latin (cf.
D u C ; BLAISE, Lex.; Lex.Lat.Ned. MediiAevi). 511 Cf. BLAISE, Diet. (2). 512 Cf. N I E R M ; B L A I S E , Lex. (2); Lex.Lat.Ned. MediiAevi (3). The latter mentions medieval neologisms related to this meaning: summarius — 'in general terms', 'in broad outline ; summator — one who writes a summa; and summare — 'to summarize' or 'to write a summa' (2). See also summula — 'short compendium', 'short treatise (of summarizing nature)'.
340
sophisma, sophistaria From the early twelfth century onwards, the term sophisma was used in a specific scholarly context. A sophisma was a statement with twofold implications, a puzzling sentence which provoked a discussion on some abstract issue, usually in the field of grammar or logic.513 Discussions on sophismata were intended to illustrate or verify certain grammatical or logical principles. Further, the term sophisma could be used either for the statement itself, or for the whole of the discussion which developed from the initial statement. Collections of sophismata were also called sophistarie or -^distinctiones sophismatum. 514
In the context of education, sophismata lie at the basis of scholarly exercises, which were readily adopted into the university curricula of the thirteenth century, especially those of the Arts Faculties.515 There the genre flourished and developed into a more complex exercise, and, finally, a specific literary genre. Originally, however, sophismata were closely linked to teaching practice: they were taken from curricular texts, and their treatment often referred to other curricular texts. The student was
513 L u c i d introductions to the genre are found in (in chronological order) the Lexikon desMittelaltersj, col. 2052-2054; S. R E A D (ed.), Sophisms in Medieval Logic and Grammar (1993), see esp. 'Introduction, pp. xi-xvii; O . W E I J E R S , Le maniement du savoit• (1996), pp. 94-100. They refer to the classic studies by M . G R A B M A N N , Die Sophismatalitteratur des 12. und 13. Jahrhunderts (1940); L . M . D E R I J K , Logica modernorum. A Contribution to the History of Early Terminist Logic, 3 Vols. (1962-1967); and H A G . B R A A K H U I S , Deijde eeuwse tractaten over syncategorematische termen (1979). In the 1980s and '90s, however, many more studies of sophisms were published by, among others, A. D E LIBERA, S. E B B E S E N , A . M A I E R U and I . ROSIER. See the bibliography in O. W E I J E R S , Le maniement
du savoir (1996), pp. 101-102. For related terms see the articles on -^questio, -^fallacia, -^insolubile, —>syncategoremd. 514 See L.M. DE R I J K , Specific Tools concerning Logical Education, CTVJCIMA I I I (1990), pp. 77-80. 515 O n this see O . W E I J E R S , La 'disputatio'a la Faculte des arts de Paris (1995), pp. 54-60, and 68-86; E A D . , La 'disputatio'dans les Facultes des arts au moyen age (2002), esp. pp. 5966,137-153 and 261-267.
SOPHISMA, SOPHISTARIA
341
stimulated to develop a better knowledge of the texts at hand and at the same time improve his skills in logical thinking and debating. Debates based on sophismata were thus a kind of —>disputationes in scholis, private disputations between students, conducted by masters in their own schools. They were intended to train students in the ars -^dialectica (Cat. I V ) at a basic level.516 In Paris in the course of the thirteenth century sophismata-disputations developed into a more complex genre, with more participants at higher levels and concerning issues of greater depth or generality. Written reports of sophismata-disputations which survive from around 1300 onwards show clearly that by then they had developed into solemn disputations {-^-disputationes sollemnes, magistrorum or ordinarie), in which bachelors played the roles of respondentes and opponentes (cf. -^opponere),
and masters and bachelors from different schools took part.517 In addition to these occasions, in which sophismata were the starting point for very complex excercises of logic reasoning, they also remained in use as basic premises for private disputations in the education of undergraduates. In the fourteenth century sophismata were mainly seen as theoretical excercises, useful for the basic training of students in logic reasoning, but they were no longer very close to the solemn —>disputationes.m
516 For the place of the sophistical disputation in the curriculum of the Arts Faculty in Oxford and Cambridge, see J.A. W E I S H E I P L , Curriculum of the Faculty of Arts at Oxford (1964), pp. 177-181; O . W E I J E R S , La 'disputatio'dans les Facultes des arts de Paris (1995), pp. 79-81,137-153517 O . W E I J E R S , Le maniement du savoir (1996), pp. 94-100; she gives a number of examples with special emphasis on the structure of each sophistical disputation. On the role of the sophism in the medieval university curriculum, see S. R E A D (ed.), Sophisms in Medieval Logic and Grammar (1993), pp. xiv-xvi. 518 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , La 'disputatio'dans les Facultes des arts de Paris (1995), pp. 325-326.
342
SOPHISMA, SOPHISTAR1A
In Antiquity the term sophistna (Greek o6
519 Cf. D u C , sophismum, B L A I S E , Lex., wphismus, sophisticatio, sophisticare. 520 Sec on this S. R E A D (ed.), Sophism in Medieval Logic and Grammar (1993), p. xii.
343
SyllogisniUS, condusio, corollarium In the fields of logic and dialectic syllogismi {sill-, sylo-, silo-) formed the basic elements of discourse.521 Essentially the classical Latin word syilogismus kept its meaning in the Middle Ages — it was defined as an act of reasoning, traditionally built out of three elements: two premises {propositiones) and a logical conclusion {conclusio).^22 Thus a syllogism can be defined as an artificially constructed deductive process. Syllogisms played an important role in Aristotelian logic, and consequently also in medieval logic. Different kinds of syllogism were defined, and received their own technical denominations: syllogismus demonstrativus, expositorius, hypotheticus, etc.523 These 'modes' of syllogism {modi syllogistici) received a thorough treatment in medieval education from the twelfth century onwards. In the twelfth and thirteenth centuries terms were invented that made use of the same root, such as syllogisare {-zare), 'to conclude by reasoning', or 'to reason by means of syllogism'; syllogistice, 'in the manner of a syllogism'; syllogisatio, 'the act of reasoning by means of syllogism'; and syllogisabilis, 'suitable for syllogism'.524 For the conclusive part of a syllogism the term conclusio was generally used. Conclusio, however, was also used as a terminus technicus in the context of the determination (cf. -^determinate) oiquestiones disputate (cf. —tdisputatio): it was the thesis (or rather one of the theses) in which such a questio disputata was organised. It was common practice, furthermore, to add to these conclusiones a kind of 'supplementary conclusions', which followed from the
521 There is a large bibliography on the subject. G o o d introductions with bibliographical references are found in S. K N U U T T I L A , 'Schlufimodi', Lexikon des Mittelalters 7, col. 1496-1498: R . A U D I (ed.), The Cambridge Dictionary of Philosophy (1995), pp. 780-782; J . R I T T E R and K . G R U N D E R (eds.), Historisches Worterbuch derPhilosophie, Band 10 (1998), col. 687-707. 522 Cf. conclusio: B L A I S E , Diet. (3); M W ( I I D ) ; D M L (4). 523 See, e.g., the index of A . M A I E R U , Terminologia hgica della tarda scolastica (1972), p. 681. 524 Cf. D u C ; BLAISE, Diet.; riches of the Lex.Lat.Ned. MediiAevi.
344
SYLLOGISMUS, CONCLUSIO, COROLLARIUM
dispute, but which did not relate to the central issue. The technical term used for these supplementary conclusions was corollarium {chor-, corro-, core-, corre-, -old,-, -ela-) — a term which is especially common in fourteenth-century logical texts, -^questiones disputatae or commentaries.52' The historical background of the Latin term syllogismus, imported from the Greek GVA.A,OYI.OU6<;, is not very revealing.526 Essentially it did not change its meaning in the Middle Ages. The only development of the term consists in the creation of new terms derived from syllogismus, such as syllogisare and syllogisabilis.
The use of corollarium in the meaning of (supplementary) conclusion, however, is entirely medieval. In Antiquity corollarium (derived from corolla, a small wreath of flowers) was used in the concrete meaning of 'garland' (often given as reward) and in the metonymical meaning of'additional or unsollicited payment', 'extra'.527 In medieval Latin the classical meanings of corollarium remained in use,528 but in addition the term was used in the meaning of'supplementary conclusion' in a syllogistic text, 'corollary',529 and also in the more general sense of'conclusion' or 'consequence'.530 The use of the term in this meaning seems to have been imported from the field of mathematics, where it was used in the sense of 'deduction from a previous demonstration'. It only became more common in the thirteenth century.531
525 For many examples of the use of these terms see O . W E I J E R S , La 'disputatio' dans les Facultes des arts au moyen age (2002). See also E A D . , La structure des commentaires philosophiques a la Faculte des arts (2002). 526 Cf. O L D . 527 Cf. T L L ; O L D . 528 Cf. MW (ia) 'little garland'; MW (ib) and D M L (a) 'extra gift, gratuity'. 529 Cf. D M L ( b ) . 530 Cf. D M L (b); MW (2a). The MW even attests the use of the term in the sense of 'summary', 'epitome' ( M W (2b)). 531 It was introduced by Boethius as the translation of the Greek jcopio|ia. Cf. T L L (3) (col.
345
syncategoremata, consignificantia Syncategorema or its Latin equivalent consignificans is a terminus technicus from the interface between grammar and logic.532 The basis of its use in the Middle Ages is to be found in Priscian's Institutiones Grammaticae ( I I , 15), where it is denned as a word which is neither subject nor predicate, and does not have a definitively established meaning.533 The meaning of a syncategorematic term was determined by its conjunction with other words in the same proposition. Originally, this category of words was grammatically limited to propositions or conjuncts (words such as 'every' or 'only'), but in the Middle Ages there was a tendency to broaden the definition to its maximum: any word that did not belong to subject or predicate could be classified as syncategorematic.534 In the twelfth century and later, when the logic of language had become an important discipline and provided scholars with their basic tools for the interpretation of authoritative texts, these syncategoremata became the subject of separate logical treatises. The genre of syncategoremata-tracts developed in the second half of the twelfth century, and
532 For introductions to the subject, see A . M A I E R U , Terminologid logica delta tarda scolastica (1972), esp. pp. 224-232; H . A . G . B R A A K H U I S , De ije eeuwse tractaten over syncategorematische termen (1979); N . K R E T Z M A N N , 'Syncategoremata, exponibilia, sophismata, in: N . K R E T Z M A N N , A . K E N N Y , J . P I N B O R G (eds.), The Cambridge History of Later Medieval Philosophy (1982), esp. pp. 211-116; 'Logik und Grammatik', in: P. SCHULTHESS and R . I M B A C H , Die Philosophic im lateinischen Mittelalter (1996), pp. 218-224. 533 Panes igitur orationis sunt secundum dialecticos duae, nomen et verbum, quia hae solae per se coniunctae plenam faciunt orationem, alias autem partes syncategoremata, hoc est consignificantia, appellabant.' Cf. H . A . G . B R A A K H U I S , De i}e eeuwse tractaten over syncategorematische termen (1979), pp. 2, and 2-7 on the late-antique sources for the medieval notion of syncategorema. Braakhuis mentions Boethius, who did not use the term syncategorema but only its Latin equivalent consignificans (and consignificare), as the second influential source for the notion of syncategorematic terms in the Middle Ages. 534 Cf. H . A . G . B R A A K H U I S , De ije eeuwse tractaten over syncategorematische termen
d979). p- 7-
346
SYNCATEGORF.MATA, CONSIGNIFICANTIA
flourished especially in the thirteenth century.533 In the late thirteenth and fourteenth century the treatment of syncategoremata was absorbed into general treatises on logic, or into -^sophismata-coWecxions, since the interpretation of the syncategorematic words (with their 'vis conjundendi, their 'power to confuse'536) often formed the crux to the solution of such paradoxes or ambiguous propositions. As can be expected, they were also important in the context of the -^disputationes de -^obligationibus, (playful) exercises in formal logic reasoning in which the interpretation of every single word and its influence on the meaning of the proposition at hand were extremely important. Since the oldest attestation of the term syncategorema (i.e. Priscian, Inst.Gramm. I I , 15) known today also formed the basis for its interpretation in the Middle Ages,537 the semantic development of the term is straightforward. Syncategorema was explained in the light of Artistotle's Categories, in which ten categories were distinguished for the ways in which a substance could be spoken about.538 Thus syncategorematic words
535 N . K R E T Z M A N N (The Cambridge History of Later Medieval Philosophy (1982), p. 215) sketches a development in three stages, the third of which is divided into two contemporaneous lines: ' 1 . their emergence as the focal points of certain logical or semantic relationships or special problems of interpretation (in the twelfth century, especially the latter half); 2. their identification as a distinguishable set of topics worthy of development in separate treatises called, typically, Syncategoremata (from the last quarter of the twelfth century to the last quarter of the thirteenth); 3a. their assimilation into general treatises on logic, sometimes as a group, but sometimes dispersed in ways designed to associate particular syncategoremata with more general topics in logic to which they are appopriate; and 3b. their absorption into the sophisma-literature, where a particular syncategorema may serve as the germ of a paradox the interest of which is often associated with metaphysics or natural philosophy more than with logic or semantics proper (from the first quarter of the fourteenth century to the disintegration of scholastic logic).' 536 A . M A I E R U , Terminologia kgica della tarda scoldstica (1972), p. 224. 537 Cf. H . A . G . B R A A K H U I S , De i$e eeuwse tractaten over syncategorematische termen (!979)> PP- 2 ' 3 ! he refers to G . N U C H E L M A N S , who treats the Greek background of the term in Theories of the proposition (1973). The term was imported from the Greek o"Wiccn:r|yopf|ua. 538 I.e. substantia, quantitas, ad aliquid, qualitas, facere, pati, situslpositio, ubi, quando and habere.
SYNCATEGOREMATA, CONSIGNIFICANTIA
347
were defined as words that have a determined meaning only in conjunction with categorematic words539 — that is, words that express categories and are, consequently, in themselves significant. In the definition of syncategorema the terms consignificare, consignificantia or consignificativus were often used, but although these then carry the same meaning,540 syncategorema remained the technical expression, and was used (for example) for treatises on the subject of syncategorematic terms.
539 Cf. M W , under consignificans; D M L , under consignificativus. 540 Cf. T L L , consignificare, -antia (references to Boethius and Priscian); M W , consignificans; D M L consignificare (ib-c), consignificatio, consignificativus. Note, however, that consignificare and its derivatives could also be used in a more general meaning, such as 'to imply' or 'have a connotation'. For example, consignificare was used for the phenomenon that a verb being in the past tense implied that the action took place in the past.
348
tabula, registrum (regestum) The index, a working tool for intellectual activity invented around the middle of the thirteenth century, was usually referred to by the general term tabula, less often by the term registrum (registum, regestrum, regestum), and occasionally by index, -^repertorium or —^concordantia.™
Commonly, the term tabula was used for a(n alphabetically ordered) list of subjects, chapters, incipits, etc. of a literary work, in expressions such as {e.g.) tabula super Augustinum, or tabula Augustini. Isolated ex-
amples from the twelfth century of attempts to classify texts systematically form the very beginning of the genre.542 The real 'invention' of the genre, however, can be dated around the mid-thirteenth century, when different systems are used all at once in different places all over Europe, especially in the context of die Cistercian and Mendicant orders.543 Texts which received the first indices were the Bible, the works of the Church Fatliers, Peter Lombard's Sententiae, and works of prominent scholars such as Thomas Aquinas, John of Salisbury, etc. At the end of the thirteenth century the making of an index was firmly integrated into the making of the book. In the fourteenth century, the index was adopted for genres outside its original (theological) scope: encyclopedias, lexicographical works and archives. The index proved especially useful for large
541 See for literature on the subject various articles by R . H . R O U S E , (among others) revolution desattitudes envers I'autoriteecrite (1981), pp. 119-125; and R . H . R O U S E & M.A. R O U S E , La naissttnce des index (1982), pp. 80-85. See also O . W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen Age, CIVICIMA IV (1991), esp. pp. 99-119. Weijers mentions alternative terms for the same phenomenon, which occur only occasionally or even in individual cases: directorium, epilogus, vocabularius, margarita or contractabula. Note that tabula, registrum and -^repertorium also occur in the context of library catalogues; cf. -^inventarium (Cat. I I ) . 542 Cf. R . H . R O U S E & M.A. R O U S E , 'Statim invenire' (1982), pp. 204-209. 543 Cf. R . H . R O U S E , L'evolution des attitudes envers I'autorite' ecrite (1981), pp. 119-125.
TABULA, REGISTRUM ( R E G E S T R U M )
349
collections, such as florilegia (cf. -^compilare)™ collections of sermons, legal collections, etc.545 Of the other terms used for index registrum is the most common: it is attested in this meaning from the end of the thirteenth century.546 The term index — the ancestor of our modern term for the phenomenon — only entered the vocabulary at the very end of the Middle Ages or the beginning of the Renaissance. -^Concordantia, a term generally used for concordances and only occasionally for an alphabetical index, is sometimes found in expressions which combine tabula and —tconcordantid: tabula concordantiarum, tabula de concordantiis.™7 -^>Repertorium,
finally, also generally has a different meaning ('repertory', 'compendium', especially in the area of Law), but occurs occasionally (at the end of the Middle Ages) in the sense of alphabetical index.548 In Antiquity tabula had many meanings: first of all its concrete meaning of 'board' (a panel of wood, but also a notice-board, a tablet used
544 Note that florilegia sometimes even bore the title 'tabula. In this case, the literary anthology was seen as a collection of relatively short texts. 545 Note also the medieval neologisms tabellula (small table, index or list) and tabulare (to make an (alphabetical) index). Cf. D u C , tabulare (i). The term tabulator, however, which has been mentioned in modern scholarship for one who makes an index, seems not to be medieval. Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen age, CIVICIMA IV (1991), p. 103, n. 85. She does note the expression abbreviator originalium, which may have the same meaning. 546 Orthographic variants are regestrum, regestum and registum; registrum and regestum are the forms most frequently used. Registrum is actually more commonly used in the sense of'register', 'record', for example a register of letters or charters, entered in a chronological or systematic order. Cf. D u C , under regestum, N I E R M . , also under regestum; and B L A I S E , Lex, registrum (i). Its derivative, registrare, was used in the meaning of'to make an index' or 'to provide with an index', but only occasionally and at the end of the Middle Ages. In earlier examples of the use of the word it has more often the meaning of'to register', 'to enter in a(n official) list', 'to keep record'. Cf. D u C . , registrare (under regestum); N I E R M . , registrare and registrator. 547 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen age, CIVICIMA I V (1991), pp. 106-107. Of the three terms most frequently used, tabula seems to be at once the most common and the most general. Registrum emphasizes the list-character of the index, while -^concordantia stresses the aspect of alphabetical organization. 548 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen age, CIVICIMA I V (1991), p. 104.
350
TABULA, REGISTRUM ( R E G E S T R U M )
for record, or a writing-tablet), and secondly abstract meanings such as 'record' or 'document'.549 In the Middle Ages many of these meanings continued to exist and new ones developed (e.g. '(portable) altar',550 'reckoning board or abacus'551)- The meaning 'index' probably developed from that of 'notice-board'; a large board on which public information could be found, which usually took the form of lists (of names, properties, decrees, etc.). Subsequently, tabula was used for all kinds of lists: registers, obituary lists, lists of books, concordances and also alphabetical indices.552 Registrum is a medieval word, which perhaps has its origin in the classical verb regerere (regestus), used by Quintilianus and Prudentius in the sense of'register' or 'catalogue'.553 Gregory die Great used the term for collections of letters, and it was used for (official) lists of letters, books, documents, of which one kept record in a certain (chronological or systematical) order. It is this aspect of'making a list of things' that lies at the base of the use of the word in the sense of alphabetical index.
549 Cf. F O R C ; O L D (1-6 versus 7-8). 550 Cf. D u C . (1); N I E R M . (2); B L A I S E , Lex.
(2).
551 O . W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen age, CTVICIMA I V (1991), p.105. 552 D u C . gives a wide range of specific uses of the term. On the semantic development o f the terms see O . W E I J E R S , Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen age, CIVICIMA I V (1991), pp. 105-106. 553 Cf. F O R C , regestus (5); O L D , regerere (4c); D u C . {regestum); B L A I S E , Diet, (registrum).
Category IV The Names of the Disciplines, their Teachers and Students abacus, abacista arithmeticus, mathematicus ars, scientia, disciplina ars dictaminis, ars dictandi, dictator artes liberales, trivium, quadrivium artes mechanicae artista astrologia, astrologus, astronomia, astronomus computus, calculus dialectica, logica divina scientia, sacra doctrina, theologia, metaphysica, prima philosophia ethica, oeconomica, politica geometria, geographia, mappa mundi grammatica, grammaticus, grammatica speculativa ius canonicum, ius civile, canonista, decretista, decretalista, legista musica, musicus, cantus, cantor philosophia, philosophus, philosophari physica, physicus, medicina, medicus rhetorica, rhetor theoreticus, practicus
f
353
abacus, abacista Abacus, from the Greek apo£ was used both in Antiquity and in the Middle Ages in the sense of 'calculatory table' or 'reckoning board'.' In origin it was a table or board on which units, tens, hundreds and thousands were registered in the addition, subtraction, multiplication or division of large numbers. Several devices were developed to overcome the difficulties of reckoning with larger numbers in the Roman number system: counting tables or reckoning columns {tabula calcuLttoria), a system in which the hand functioned as a counting board (abacus manualis), etc.2 The term abacista, 'he who reckons with a reckoning board or on the fingers of the hand', or 'he who is experienced in the art of reckoning', and the verb abacizare, 'to work with a reckoning board', were derived from abacus, and were first used in the twelfth century.3 Even after the introduction of Arabic counting with its decimal structure, the abacus was not immediately abandoned as an instrument for calculating. Gerbert of Aurillac, whom tradition has credited with the introduction of Arabic ciphers in Western Europe, describes in his treatise Regulae de numerorum abaci rationibus (ca. 980) the use of stones (apices)
with Arabic ciphers on the abacus or reckoning board. The introduction of the Indian-Arabic mathematical tradition in the West did not cause medieval society to discard the abacus as an aid in the practical technique of calculating. In the later Middle Ages and especially in Italian cities specialized calculus schools are found. Their masters were called abacisti, magistri abachi or magistri de abaco; their methods abacus (abbacus).4 1 For a good introduction to the subject and ample bibliography, see M . S . M A H O NEY, 'Mathematics', Dictionary of the Middle Ages 8, pp. 205-222. See also E.A. N E U E N SCHWANDF.R, 'Abakus', Lexikon des Mittelaiters I , col. io-n. 2 Tradition has credited Bede (t735), author of De computo vel loquela digitorum, with the introduction of finger reckoning into Europe. His system allowed calculations with numbers as large as 9,999. 3 Cf. M W ; DML; N I E R M . Note that the M W distinguishes between the use of abacista in the sense of'he who reckons with the abacus', and 'he who reckons with his fingers'. 4 Cf. C. FROVA, I.e scuole municipali all'epoca delk universita, CIVICIMA V (1992), p. 187; M . FOLKERTS & E.A. NEUENSCHWANDER, 'Rechenkunst', Lexikon des Mittelaiters 7, col. 502-508.
354
ABACUS, ABACISTA
In Antiquity the term abacus had the more general meaning of 'board', 'table' or 'slab', be it in specific functions. It was used for a slab-topped table or sideboard, for an ornamental slab or panel on a wall or a slab at the top of a column, or for a board for playing games on.5 In the early Middle Ages some of these specific meanings are still (but only rarely) encountered.6 Commonly, however, it is used in the specific meaning of 'reckoning board', also adopted from Antiquity.7 Abacista and abacizare are medieval neologisms, attested from roughly the twelfth century.
5 Cf. O L D (i, 2 and 3b resp.); T L L (I, IV, II resp.). 6 Einhard (ca. 770-840), for example, uses the word for the slab at the top of columns (cf. M W (II)). In the D M L the meaning of'cupboard, clothespress or sideboard' is attested (1), but examples of the word in this meaning date only from the sixteenth century. 7 Cf. O L D (3a); M W (I); D M L (z).
355
arithmeticus, mathematicus Both in Antiquity and in the Middle Ages the ancient art of mathematics was commonly called (ars) mathematica or (ars) arithmetica.8 Martianus Capella and Boethius offered their medieval readers introductions into the rudiments of mathematics, definitions of terms and an overview of elementary theorems. Mathematicus and arithmeticus were largely interchangeable terms in the ancient tradition and its medieval reception, and (ars) -^geometria was sometimes used in the same meaning. In the late eleventh and early twelfth century, the introduction of Hindu-Arabic sources for mathematics radically changed the discipline itself and its terminology. The Latin tradition of the works of the Arabic mathematician Muhammed ibn Musa •A-Khwdrizml led to the introduction of the term algorismus {alch-, alchoa-) in the twelfth century. It was instantly used in the meaning of 'mathematical', 'pertaining to mathematics', or, as a substantive, 'mathematics'. The term algorismus implies the use of the Arabic counting system with the ciphers i to 9 and o and its decimal structure. The old terms mathematica and arithmetica, however, were used not only for arithmetic or calculus with Roman ciphers, but also for arithmetic or calculus according to the decimal system. Algebra, a term introduced in the Latin West in the twelfth century, but rarely used before the sixteenth century, came from another work of al- Khwarizml, viz. his book Kitab al-mukhtasar fi'-l-hisab al-jabr wa'lmuqabalah,9 'Compendious book on calculation by completion {al-jabr)
8 There is a large bibliography on the subject. For useful introductions with special emphasis on terminology and further bibliographical references, see A . A L L A R D , La formation du vocabulaire latin de I'arithmetique medievale, CTVICIMA I I I (1990); J . D . N O R T H , Aspects of the Language of Medieval Mathematics, CIVLCLMA V I I I (1995). For general introductions and bibliographical references, see M . FOLKERTS & E.A. N E U E N S C H W A N D E R , 'Rechenkunst', Lexikon des Mittelalters 7, col. 502-508; M . S . M A H O N E Y , Mathematics (1978); and I D . , 'Mathematics', Dictionary of the Middle Ages 8, pp. 205-222 (with a long annotated bibliography). 9 Translated into Latin as Liber algebre. Note that the last Arabic word of the title, almuqabalah, was also Latinised: almucabola. Cf. D M L .
356
ARITHMETICUS, MATHEMATICUS
and balancing'. Translations of parts of this book were first made by Robert of Chester in 1145, and some decades later by Gerard of Cremona. The term algebra was used for the mathematical technique of creating solution paradigms for different types of problems, using equations in which the actual numbers were replaced by symbols (ax2=bx, for example, or ax2=b).10 Arithmetica (arithmeticus), from the Greek api6jiTiTiKf|, and mathematica (mathematicus), from the Greek uaeriumiKf], were both used in the sense of 'arithmetic' or 'mathematics', in Antiquity and in the Middle Ages.11 In classical Latin mathematica had the additional meaning of 'astrology', mathematicus of 'belonging to astrology' or 'astrologer'.12 In the Middle Ages mathematicus continued to be used also in this sense, and from this basic meaning several others branched off: 'magical', (mathematicus as masculine substantive:) 'astrologer, diviner, sorcerer', (mathematica as feminine substantive:) 'astrology, divination, sorcery'.13 Furthermore, mathematica was used for the four numerical arts as a whole (cf. quadrivium in the article on ->artes liberates), or for 'abstract knowledge' or 'abstract things'.14 Medieval neologisms derived from mathematicus are the adjective mathematicalis, the proverb mathematice, and the noun mathematicitasP Arithmeticus was spelled in many ways in the Middle Ages: areth-, arit-, aris-, ares-, art-, -metrica, -methica, -medica, etc.16 Medieval neologisms derived from this term are arithmeter ('arithmetician'), arithmeti-
10 See M . MAHONEY, 'Mathematics', Dictionary of the Middle Ages, p. 2i2fT. Note, however, that the term was also used in a medical sense for the healing of broken bones (by, e.g., the surgeon William of Saliceto in the second half of the thirteenth century). Cf. DML, MW u Cf. TLL; OLD. 12 Cf. TLL (IB, IIA2, IIBzb); OLD. 13 Cf. NC (IA2; IIA2, IIB3, IIC2); DML (2, 4b, 5c, 7b). 14 Cf. NG (IIB1-2, IlCi); DML (5b, 6). 15 Cf. DML. 16 C f . M W
ARITHMETICUS, MATHEMATICUS
357
calls ('pertaining to arithmetic', 'arithmetical') and the adverb arithmeticale." Arithmeticus was used as an adjective ('arithmetical'),18 as a masculine substantive ('arithmetician' or 'mathematician'),19 and as a feminine substantive ('arithmetic', or, on occasion, also metonymically 'handbook for arithmetic').20
17 18 19 20
Cf. MW. Cf. D M L (a); M W (1). Cf. D M L (b); M W IIA). Cf. DML (c), MW (IIB1-2).
358
ars, scientia, disciplina In the classifications of sciences that were so popular in the twelfth and later centuries of the Middle Ages, many words are used for the branches of knowledge: ars, scientia, and disciplina, but also doctrina, -^facultas (Cat. \),-^studium (Cat. I ) . 2 1 Sometimes specific meanings are attached to them,22 but in many cases they are virtually interchangeable, and used in each other's definition. A particular ars is, for example, defined as scientia of a certain subject, etc.23 The ancient distinction between ars and disciplina, or TE%VT| and emcTTrpTi, was still repeated by many medieval authors, who defined ars as knowledge of a practical kind, a set of rules governing a certain area of knowledge, and disciplina or scientia as knowledge of a higher kind, a discerning and penetrating intellectual grasp of a certain subject.24 In this sense disciplina and scientia are sometimes equivalent to sapientia, wisdom, or -^philosophia, which is often used in the sense of'all branches of knowledge'. At the same time, scientia, disciplina and ars are used as equivalents from ancient times on.25 In the more general usage in the twelfth and thirteenth centuries scientia seems to become the more common term for a branch of knowledge or discipline, while ars is mostly
21 Also, but less frequently and only in specific contexts, ratio, prudentia, sapientia, and methodus. See on this several articles in Arts liberaux etphilosophie au moyen age (1969), esp. H . - I . M A R R O U , Les arts liberaux dans lAntiquite classique; the introductory statements of J.A. W E I S H E I P I . to the chapter The Nature, Scope, and Classification of the Sciences, in: Science in the Middle Ages (1978); H . M E R L E , 'Ars' (1986); O . W E I J E R S , L'appellation des disciplines dans les classifications des sciences (1986-1987); several articles in I . C R A E M E R R U E G E N B E R G and A . S P E E R (eds.), Scientia und ars im Hoch- und Spa'tmittelalter 1 (1994), esp. those of J . H A M E S S E , Scientia et ars dans le 'Libri Sententiariurri de Pierre Lombard, and C . LATLEUR, Scientia et ars dans les introductions a la philosophie des maitres es arts. 22 On the specific meaning of doctrina in the context of medicine, for example, see D. JACQUART, L'enseignement de la medecine, CIVICIMA I I I (1990), pp. 111-116. 23 For example, an often quoted definition of the ars musica is 'Ars musica est scientia bene modulandi'. 24 H . - I . M A R R O U , Les arts liberaux dans lAntiquite classique (1969); M.-D. C H E N U , Notes de lexicographicphilosophique medievale. Disciplina (1936); H . M E R L E , 'Ars' (1986). 25 H . M E R L E , 'Ars' (1986), pp. 98-108.
ARS, SCIENTIA, DISCIPLINA
359
only used in set expressions such as, for example, -Cartes liberates, ->ars dictaminis, ars poetica or ars disputandi.2b
There is an almost endless list of set expressions involving ars, scientia or disciplina, defining certain branches of knowledge or certain technical skills. Some of them are treated in this volume, such as -Cartes liberates, the liberal arts; -cartes mechanicae, technologies or handicrafts; ->aw dictaminis, the art of composing letters or documents; -^divina scientia, dieology; scientia iudiciaria (—>astrologia), astrology; scientia speculativa as opposed to scientiapractica or actualis (cf. —ttheoricus, practicus); scientia disciplinalis or doctrinalis for the four liberal arts that form the quadrivium (cf. -cartes liberates); or the expressions ars artium, scientia scientiarum or disciplina disciplinarum for -^dialectica (logic). Many others are also found in the sources of medieval intellectual life.27 Ars has a wide range of meanings, both in Antiquity and in the Middle Ages. Its basic meaning, 'skill' or 'art', branches off into 'human or artificial ingenuity' (as opposed to 'natural'), 'technical device', 'profession or trade', work of art', 'theory' or 'the rules of a certain branch of knowledge' (either abstract or concrete, in written form: 'text-book', treatise').28 A wide range of meanings remained in use in die Middle Ages,29 but in the specific context of knowledge and learning ars was used in the technical meaning of 'one of tlie liberal arts' (and, without specification this often refers to grammar or logic), 'compendium on a certain branch of learning', 'theoretical knowledge' or 'practical skill'.30 In classical and medieval Latin scientia, formed out of the verb scio, 'to know', has the meaning of'knowledge' or 'learning' in general.31 As
16 Cf. J . H A M E S S E , Scientia etars dans le 'Libri Sententiarium de Pierre Lombard (1994); and C . LAFLEUR, Scientia et ars dans les introductions a la phiksophie des maitres es arts (i994)27 See, for example, the indices of the CIVICIMA-vohmes; O. WEIJERS, L'appellation des disciplines dans les classifications des sciences (1986-1987), pp. 63-64; E . W H I T N E Y , Paradise Restored (1990); A . M A I E R U , University Training in Medieval Europe (1994); O . W E I J E R S & L . H O L T Z (eds.), L'enseignement des disciplines a la Faculte des arts (1997). 28 C f . T L L ; O L D . 29 S e e M W ; D M L . 30 Cf. MW (IA-B); D M L (1-3). 31 O L D .
360
ARS, SCIENTIA, DISCIPLINA
the Latin equivalent of the Greek iniaxf[\ir[, it is sometimes used in opposition to ars (or TE%VT|), as in the opposition 'knowledge, wisdom' versus 'practical or technical skill, set of rules and principles of a certain branch of knowledge'. Just as often, however, both terms are used as equivalents, and appear in each other's definition. Disciplina has as its basic meaning 'teaching', 'instruction' or 'training'. From this basis its meaning developed in two directions: it came to mean '(teaching in) a particular art', 'discipline' or 'branch of knowledge'; and 'discipline' in the sense of'order', 'moral training'.32 In early Christian and medieval times the word also came to mean 'monastic discipline or rule',33 and not only 'discipline' but also '(corporeal) punishment', or 'the power to inflict punishment'.34 In the educational context disciplina is obviously also commonly used in this latter sense. It occurs equally if not more often, however, as the equivalent of scientia and/or ars, in the sense of'branch of knowledge or study'.35
32 Cf.TLL;OLD. 33 Cf. B L A I S E , Diet.; N I E R M . (6); D M L (2). 34 N I E R M . (8-10); D M L (3). 35 NIERM. (1); DML (1).
361
ars dictaminis, ars dictandi, dictator The ars dictaminis or ars dictandi36 was the part of medieval rhetoric that taught the rules for composing skilful, well-crafted prose, especially letters and official documents.37 The writing of epistolary prose, legal and other public documents had, of course, always been a specific area of rhetoric, but it was only at the beginning of the twelfth century that the first attempts were made to set out all the rules of this discipline in a systematic way. The theoretical introduction was usually followed by a collection of model letters and charters, which illustrated the rules set out in the first part. The Northern Italian scholars Adalbert the Samaritan and Hugh of Bologna,38 both from Bologna and both probably teachers at private schools, are credited with the composition of the first handbooks of this new art.39 Around the middle of the century the ars dictaminis had become a separate subject in France, especially in the educational centres of Tours and Orleans, and by the end of the century it was also taught in Germany. In England and the Iberian Peninsula the first treatises date only from the second half of the thirteenth century. Both professional writers of letters or official documents and teachers of the art were generally referred to as dictatores.40
36 Other sets of terms for the same art were ars dictatoria, arsprosandi, ars epistolaris or epistolandi, etc. 37 There is a large bibliography on the subject of medieval rhetoric in general, and on the ars dictaminis or ars dictandi in particular. See, for introductions to the subject with further bibliographical references, H . M . S C H A I X E R , 'Ars dictaminis, Ars dictandi', Lexikon des Mittelalters 1, col. 1034-1039; M . C A M A R G O , Ars dictaminis, ars dictandi (1991); O . G Y O T J E A N N I N , J . P Y C K E and B . - M . T O C K , Diplomatique medievale (1993), pp. 230*3338 Adalbert the Samaritan wrote his Praecepta dictaminum between mi and 1115, Hugh of Bologna wrote his Rationes dictandiprosaice around 1119-1124. 39 The controversy over its earliest history is analyzed by F.J. W O R S T B R O C K , Die Anfdnge des mittelalterlicben Ars dictandi (1989). 40 NlERM. (5); B L A I S E , Lex. (3). For examples of the use of the term in this sense, see C . V U I X I E Z , Le vocabulairedes ecoles urbaines desXIF etXIIFsiecles, CIVICIMA V (1992), pp. 87, 94, 98.
362
ARS D1CTAMINIS, ARS DICTANDI, DIC1ATOR
In the treatises and handbooks of the ars dictaminis the art was ranked as a branch of the ars -^rhetorica*1 and the ars dictaminis in its turn branched off into several subdivisions: ars arengandi (the art of public speeches, cf. -^>arenga (Cat. Ill)), ars notariae (the technique of drawing up legal, diplomatic and business documents),42 arspraedicandi (the composition and delivery of sermons),43 ars punctandi (the rules of punctuation), etc. Sometimes, when dictamen was taken in the broader sense of 'the art or practice of literary composition', the arspoetica (the art of composing poetry)44 was even ranked under the ars dictaminis. These different genres of prose and poetry, however, were only occasionally treated in handbooks of the ars dictaminis; in most cases they received separate treatments in separate manuals. Most manuals of the ars dictaminis in fact concentrated on the writing of letters and official documents, which also often took the form of letters. Dictamen is a late-antique word, derived from the verb dictare and its specific meaning of'to compose' or 'to write' (a literary work or letter).45 In medieval Latin dictamen is used in more general meanings (literary work or composition', 'written copy'), but also the more specific meanings such as the one that concerns us here: 'art or practice of literary composition'.46 From the beginning of the twelfth century on ars dictaminis (also ars dictandi or ars dktatoria) is a set expression for the technique of
41 Apart from the ars —trhetorica the ars dictaminis also overlapped, of course, with the ars —>grammatica. 42 Specifically on the ars notariae, its history and its handbooks see G.F. O R L A N D F J . U , Genesi deW'ars notariae nelsecoloXIII(1965); G . VAN D I E V O E T , Les coutumiers, ksstyles, les formulaires et ks 'artes notariae'(1986). 43 Cf. M . G . B R I S C O E & B . H . JAYE, Artes praedicandi and Artes orandi (1992). 44 Also: poetria, ars versificatoria or versificaria, ars versificandi. Cf. D . K E L L Y , The arts of poetry and prose (1991).
45 Cf.TLL. 46 Cf. D u C ; N I E R M . (1-2); B L A I S E , Lex. (1); D M L (1). Dictamenprosaicum, for example, was a set expression for the composition of prose, used in opposition with dictamen metricum (rythmicum, prosimetricum) for the composition of poetry or prosimetrum (a mixture of prose and poetry).
ARS DICTAMINIS, ARS DICTANDI, DICTATOR
363
prose writing, and more specifically the set of rules for composing letters and other prose documents. From then on the term is also used metonymically for manuals that comprise these rules.47 From late-antique times dictator was used in a new meaning, again derived from dictare in its specific meaning of'to compose or write (a literary work or letter)': 'one who writes' or 'one who dictates', 'author' or 'professional scribe' (notary, copyist).48 In the Middle Ages the term was used for professional writers of documents.49 Within the context of the ars dictaminis it was used in an even more specific meaning: 'teacher of the ars dictaminis'.50
f
A
ft
47 These were also called, for example, pmecepta dictaminum, summa dictaminis or dictandi, rationes dictandi, etc. 48 Cf. BLAISE, Diet. (2-4). Note that the ancient meaning of dictator , 'dictator', 'magistrate' or 'military leader', which is mentioned in among others BLAISE, Diet. (1); and D M L (1), is absent in, for example, N I E R M . and BLAISE, Lex. 49 Cf. N I E R M . (3); B L A I S E , Lex. (1); D M L (za-b).
50 This seems to be the case especially in thirteenth- and fourteenth-century Italy, France and Germany: cf. N I E R M . (5); BLAISE, Lex. (3). This specific meaning is absent from, for example, the D M L .
364
artes liberales, trivium, quadriviutn The concept of the (septem) artes liberales (also: liberales artes, disciplinae, doctrinae), a system of seven branches of science comprising both language studies and mathematical or physical disciplines, has its roots in ancient Greece, but was only fully in use in the educational ideal of the Middle Ages.51 From the early Middle Ages on, furthermore, the seven branches were divided into two groups. The first (and more elementary) one consisted of three language-related studies: grammar, rhetoric and dialectic (logic). Because of their number they were called trivium or artes triviales, but other names were also used: artes or scientiae sermocinales, for example, artes rationales, or artes eloquentiae?2 The four disciplines of the second group, the quadrivium (quadruvium) or artes quadriviales, were arithmetic, geometry, astronomy and music. This group was also known as artes reales or physicae, and was sometimes called -^mathematica or mathesis, scientia disciplinalis or doctrinalisP The expression artes liberales was often used in opposition to expressions such as artes illiberales or -cartes mechanicae; the liberal arts were arts or sciences pursued for the sake of 'wisdom' or 'knowledge' only, while the illiberal arts had a utilitarian character, often involved physical
51 There is a fair amount of scholarship on this subject. See, inter alia, the volumes Arts liberaux etphilosophic au moyen age (1969); J . K O C H (ed.), Artes liberales von der antiken Bildungzur Wissenschafi des Mittelalters (repr. 1976). For a general introduction, see D . L . W A G N E R (ed.), The Seven Liberal Arts in the Middle Ages (1983). See also the relevant articles in the Dictionary of the Middle Ages: M . S T O R M , 'Trivium', Dictionary of the Middle Ages 12, pp. 205-207; C M . B O W E R , 'Quadrivium', Dictionary of the Middle Ages to, pp. 237-238; and in the Lexikon des Mittelalters: G . B E R N T , 'Artes liberales', Lexikon des Mittelalters 1, cols. 1058-106. On the history of the terminology of triviutn and quadrivium, see P. R A J N A , Le denominazioni 'trivium'e 'quadrivium (1928). 52 Note that in some contexts the term logica is used in the sense of trivium, but that logica is also (and more frequently) an alternative term for only one of the trivial arts, viz. —tdialectica. Cf. O . W E I J E R S , L'appellation des disciplines dans les classifications des sciences (1986-1987), pp. 53-55. 53 Cf. W E I J E R S , L'appellation des disciplines dans les classifications des sciences (1986-1987), p. 47-
ARTES LIBERALES, TRIVIUM, QUADRIVIUM
365
rather than mental labour and were pursued out of physical necessity or for economic purposes.54 The ancient tradition of the artes liberales was readily incorporated into the Christian culture and educational system of late Antiquity. The importance of studying the seven liberal arts was clearly defended by, among others, Augustine in his De doctrina christiana. The ancient and late-antique text-books on (all or individual) liberal arts, such as Martianus Capellas De nuptiis Philologiae et Mercurii, Boethius' treatises on arithmetic and music, Cassiodorus' Institutiones and Isidore's Etymologiae, were studied with enthusiasm, especially in the early Middle Ages. In the twelfth century, when other manners of classification were transmitted to the West from Greek and Arabic sources, the traditional system of seven artes liberales, divided into trivium and quadrivium, was gradually eclipsed by other systems. They were still, however, accepted as a part of the curriculum of both the lower schools and the universities in their so-called facultas artium (also ordo artistaruni) or Faculty of Arts. The expression artes liberales {liberales artes, liberales disciplinae) is al-
ready present in ancient sources, and is the Latin equivalent of the Greek EyKV)KA,ioc, itcciSela,55 a system of general education guiding the student of philosophy on his way to the highest knowledge. The expression occurs in Augustine's and Tertullian's writings, and was adopted by the influential encyclopedists Cassiodore and Isidore.56 Usually the adjective liberalis is explained as 'free'; that is, the artes liberales are branches of knowledge fit for free men. Some, however, have otlier etymological explanations: Cassiodore, for example, treats liberales as a derivative of liber, 'book'.
54 On the opposition between the artes liberales and illiberales {mechankae, sordidae, vulgares), see -cartes mechanicae, and E . W H I T N E Y , Paradise restored (1990), pp. 27-32, 140. 55 See T L L , ars (esp. col. 662); H . - I . M A R R O U , Les arts liberauxdans I'Antiquite classique (1969). 56 Note that originally the preferred order was liberales artes or liberales disciplinae, and that it is only from the tenth century on that the set expression seems to have become [septeni) artes liberales.
366
ARTES LIBERALES, TRIVIUM, QUADRIVIUM
Quadrivium, or rather quadruvium,51 first occurs in Boethius' De institutione arithmetica (dated probably in the first decennium of the sixth century). Its original meaning, 'meeting-place of four roads', is used figuratively by Boethius: a fourfold path to pure, incorporeal knowledge. Each of these four paths is a mathematical discipline: arithmetic, music, geometry and astronomy. In the Middle Ages the meaning of 'set of four number-related liberal arts' became predominant.58 The term trivium in the sense of 'the three language-related liberal arts' seems to have been shaped after the model of quadrivium. Analogously with quadrivium the original meaning of trivium is 'meeting-place of three roads',59 but in the Middle Ages this literal meaning seems to have disappeared. From its first use in the ninth century it has the general meaning of'set of diree language-related liberal arts': grammar, rhetoric and dialectic.60
57
Both forms, quadrivium and quadruvium, exist in classical and late-antique Latin
(cf. F O R C ; O L D ; B L A I S E , Diet.), but according to C M . B O W E R , the latter (original) form
began to disappear after the ninth century. ('Quadrivium', Dictionary of the Middle Ages io, pp. 237-238.) O n this and on the history of the term trivium, see esp. R RAJNA, Le denominazioni 'trivium'e 'quadrivium''(1928). 58 Cf. B L A I S E , Lex. (1) ; N I E R M . But note that the original meaning of 'fourfold crossroads' is also still in use ( D u C ) , and that the term is sometimes used for other 'standard sets of four': Flodoard of Rheims, for example, uses quadrivium for a set of four virtues ( B L A I S E , Lex, (2)). 59 FORC.; O L D
60 Cf. M . STORM, 'Trivium', Dictionary of the Middle Ages 12, pp. 205-207; D u C ; BLAISE, Lex.; N I E R M . Note that it was occasionally used for other 'groups of three': Hugh of St. Victor, for example, uses the term in the expression trivium sapientiae {i.e. ethics, logic and physics), but also in the traditional sense of the threesome grammar, rhetoric and dialectic.
367
artes mechanicae The medieval category of artes mechanicae is roughly equivalent to the modern concept of technologies or crafts.61 It was used for all arts, crafts or disciplines that were connected to the physical world. In the early medieval tradition the seven liberal arts {-cartes liberates) were paralleled by seven 'earthly arts, human in their orientation.62 The concept of the artes mechanicae was fleshed out in the twelfth and thirteenth centuries, when for example Hugh of St. Victor identified the seven mechanical arts as those of fabric-making (lanificium), armament and architecture (armatum), commerce (navigatio), agriculture (agricultura), hunting and food {venatio), medicine {medicind) and theatrics {theatricd). Many medieval authors roughly took over Hugh's classification, but varied its content and terminology. The art of commerce, for example, was often
61 See the introduction and bibliography of E . W H I T N E Y , Artes mechanicae (1996), pp. 431-435; see also N . CLAGETT, The Science of Mechanics in the Middle Ages (1961); G . H . A L L A R D & S. L U S I G N A N (eds.), Les arts mecaniques au moyen age (1982); E . W H I T N E Y , Paradise Restored (1990). 62 John the Scot (t ca. 877/879) has been credited with the first use of the expression in his commentary on Martianus Capellas De nuptiis Phitologiae et Mercurii. Cf. E. W H I T N E Y , Artes mechanicae (1996), p. 431. It should be noted that in classificatory schemes of the branches of knowledge the artes mechanicae were generally low in status, because of their close connection to earthly life, and their lack of a spiritual or moral element. They were labelled leviores ('of lesser weight'), minores ('of lesser importance'), inferiores ('of lesser value') or serviles ('auxiliary'). Because of the mechanical arts' ability to change nature and create unnatural instruments and machines, several medieval authors even used the pejorative label adulterinus ('adulterous, impure'). Cf. G . H . A L L A R D , Les arts mecaniques aux yetix de I'ideologie me'di&ale (1982); G . OVTTT, Ihe Status of the Mechanical Arts in Medieval Classifications of Learning (1983). Sometimes the term ars mechanica was used as a synonym of ars nicromantia, 'black magic', to which die term mechanicus in the sense of 'sorcerer' still testifies (cf. B L A I S E , Lex.;
NIERM.).
These pejorative labels, however, are only used in, and as a direct consequence of, the theoretical and philosophical orientation of classificatory schemes. They are not reflected in the general value attached to manual labour or technological progress, which was generally high throughout the Middle Ages.
368
ARTES MECHANICAE
called mercatura or negotiatoria; the art of agriculture was also called terraecultus; for lanificus the alternative names of ars vestitiva or coopertiva were introduced; and the art of hunting and food was also referred to as ars cibativa or nutritiva.^ W i t h the introduction of new Arabic and Greek texts in the twelfth and thirteenth centuries the names for the whole category of mechanical arts also varied. Albertus Magnus, for example, refers to them also as the artes factivae ('productive arts'), or artes quae dicuntur in Greco apotelesmata.64 The classifications of branches of knowledge were strongly influenced by the tendency to distinguish practical and theoretical subdivisions in each discipline (cf. -^-theoreticus, practicus), and some of the mechanical arts were schematized as practical subdivisions of general sciences. Agriculture, for example, and the construction of machines and engines were classified under practical geometry, the use of -^abacus and astronomical tables, the science of calendars, weights and measurements, and business techniques under practical arithmetic.65 The systems of classification remained far more closely tied to a philosophical tradition than to the actual practice of technological activities, and reveal little about the technical vocabulary of the individual arts and crafts. In Antiquity the expression artes mechanicae did not exist. The singular ars mechanics was used for the art of machines (for example: the art of the construction of engines of war, astronomical models or lifting devices).66 Parallel with the category -Cartes liberates, arts and sciences directed towards the mind, the category of arts or sciences oriented towards the body and the physical world tended to receive pejorative labels: artes illiberales, sordidae or vulgares. This category included, for example, medi-
63 64 65 66
E . W H I T N E Y , Artes mechanicae (1996), pp. 432-433. E . W H I T N E Y , Paradise Restored (1990), pp. 37,114, 137 E . W H I T N E Y , Artes mechanicae (1996), p. 433. Cf. E . W H I T N E Y , Artes mechanicae (1996), pp. 431-432; T L L ; O L D .
ARTES MECHANICAE
369
cine, architecture, agriculture, navigation, commerce, and theatre.67 In the course of the Middle Ages, the artes mechanicae gradually lost their negative connotation. By the end of the thirteenth century they were viewed not as the highest form of learning, but nevertheless an essential kind of knowledge, which shared the ultimate aims of natural philosophy or theology.68 The creation of a coherent conception of'technological sciences', labelled artes mechanicae, was a distinctively medieval achieve-
6j A considerable group of authors under Platonic or Neoplatonic influence created a category of 'semi-liberal' arts, for the apparently more noble earthly disciplines, such as medicine, agriculture and navigation. Cf. E . W H I T N E Y , Artes mechanicae (1996), p. 432. 68 E . W H I T N E Y , Paradise restored (1990), pp. 147-149. 69 E . W H I T N E Y , Artes mechanicae (1996), p. 432. Cf. N G ( I , I I B ) ; D M L (1, 5, 6). Note also the meaning of mechanicus (subst. m.) as 'craftsman', 'person engaged in manual labour', 'mechanic': NG (Ila); D M L (2, 4).
370
artista The medieval term artista. refers in general to someone who studies or has studied the liberal arts (cf. -cartes liberates) .70 Most often it is used in the sense of 'studens assignatus ad artes' ('student at the Arts Faculty'). It occurs, for example, in contexts in which arts students are distinguished from students of grammar, theology or other disciplines. Less frequently it is also used in the sense of magister artium ('master of arts'), in contexts where, for example, masters of arts as a group are set apart from masters of grammar, theology, medicine, etc. This latter use occurs mainly in university documents or statutes, for example in the records of official meetings of the masters of arts in Oxford, where they discussed the proposed statutes,71 or in the sources of the collegia artistarum (or artistarum et medicorum),11 the corporate bodies of -^doctores (Cat. I) in the arts (or medicine) at the university of Padua.73 In the educational context of the Mendicant orders, finally, the word -Cartes is often used to refer to any discipline other than theology; consequently, in some contexts artista has the meaning of 'logician' or 'philosopher'.74 The term artista is a medieval neologism, derived from the specific technical meaning of -cartes liberates in the medieval educational context. It does not exist in Antiquity, and is first found in sources from the second third of the thirteenth century.75 The use of the suffix — ista seems to have been popular in the thirteenth and fourteenth centuries to create names for students or
70 Cf. J . VERGER'S treatment of the lemma 'Artista' in Lexikon des Mittelalters i , col. 1072, and W . J . COURTENAY, The Arts Faculty at Paris in 1529 (1997), p. 57. 71 O . O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universith (1987), p. 64. 72 Cf. -^collegium in Cat. I. 73 O . O . W E I J E R S , Terminologie des universites (1987), p. 72. 74 A . M A I E R U , Figure di docenti nelle scuole domenicane, CIVICIMA I X (1999), pp56-57; M . M . M U L C H A H E Y , Dominican Educational Vocabulary, CIVICIMA I X (1999), p. 101.
75 Cf. J . V E R G E R , 'Artista', Lexikon des Mittelalters 1, col. 1072.
ARTISTA
371
experts in certain disciplines. In this same period one also finds, for example, legista, iurista, canonista and decretista for students or professionals in the field of Law;76 or questionista and sophista for advanced students at the Faculty of Arts, who were to train their skills in logic reasoning by taking part in disputations.77 Outside the educational context the term artista is occasionally used to refer to a 'craftsman' or 'artificer' in general, also only from the thirteenth century onwards.78
76 Cf. —>ius canonicum, ius civile. 77 Cf. —>questionista, sophista in Cat. I. Note that sophista is an ancient word, signifying 'teacher in rhetoric and philosophy'. It was not used in its new meaning, however, until the thirteenth century. Nevertheless, there are also older examples of a similar use of-ista: computista and abacista, for example, in the field of mathematics (cf. ->abacus and -^computus), grammatista in the field of grammar (cf. -tgrammatica), etc. See also L B I O N D I , Lat. 'ethimologistd (2001), pp. 165-166. 78
Cf. MW; NIERM.; DML.
372
astrologia, astrologus, astronomia, astronomus Although the modern concepts of astronomy and astrology are very different —the one being the science of the dimensions and quantities of the celestial orbs and bodies, the other the study of the celestial powers and their effects on the terrestial region— in the Middle Ages the terms astrologia and astronomia were both used for the science of the cosmos in general, including astrology.79 Astronomia or astrologia (also astronomica or astrologica) was one of the seven liberal arts, and was a firm element of the educational programme throughout the Middle Ages. In Isidores often quoted Etymologiae the two disciplines were distinguished: astronomia was defined as the mathematical science that measured the position and the movement of the planets and stars, while astrologia, as in our modern definition of the concept, concerned the art of predicting events on earth, influenced or indicated by planets.80 But even when quoting Isidore, some medieval authors interchanged the terms astronomia and astrologia, or deviated from the Isidorian definitions in the rest of their treatises. On the whole, the two terms are interchangeable throughout the medieval period. Metonymically the terms could also be used for a book or treatise on the subject.81
79 The bibliography on this subject is enormous. Fot good introductions with bibliographical references, see E . G R A N T , 'Astronomy, cosmology and cosmography', and C h . B U R N E T T , Astrology (1996) , pp. 363-368 and 369-382 resp.; O . P E D E R S E N , 'Astrology' and I D . , 'Astronomy', Dictionary of the Middle Ages I, pp. 604-610 and 610-616 resp.; H. G R E I V E , 'Astrologie', and B.L. van der W A E R D E N , 'Astronomie', Lexikon des Mittelalters 1, cols. 1137-1145 and 150-1153 resp. The CIVICIMA-anide on the subject of astronomy, R . L O R C H , Astronomical Terminology, CIVICIMA I I I (1990), pp. 182-196, does not treat the terms used for the discipline itself, but rather the technical vocabulary used within the discipline, and the strong influence of Arabic terminology from roughly the twelfth century onwards. 80 Note that Isidore subdivided astrologia into two categories: astrologia naturalis or natural astrology, which concerns the influence of, e.g., the course of the sun (the seasons) or the moon (the tides); and astrologia superstitiosa or 'superstitious' astrology, i.e. the kind practised by astrologers {mathematici) who make predictions from the planets, who 'read' the characters of men and women on the basis of their zodiac signs, etc. ISIDORE, Etym. 3.27. 81 Cf. MW (astrologia 2; astronomica (subst. neuter plural of astronomicus) c).
'• ASTROLOGIA, ASTROLOGUS, ASTRONOMIA, ASTRONOMUS
373
Astronomer and astrologer were likewise not distinguished in medieval Latin. The term astronomus (or the substantively used adjective astronomicus) was used both for astronomer and astrologer; astrologus was used just as often in the meaning of astronomer as astrologer.82 For astrology, further, several other expressions were used in medieval Latin. In line with the ancient tradition, -^mathematica was occasionally used in the sense of astrology, mathematicus similarly for astrologer.83 In the later period astrologus became the preferred term. In the thirteenth century Albertus Magnus introduced the phrase scientia iudiciorum astrorum for astrology.84 This expression and its variants {scientia iudiciaria, iudicia, ars iudicalis) became frequent in the latter part of the thirteenth century and thereafter. The medieval meanings of astrologia and astronomia (both in ancient times imported from the Greek actpo^oyia and ccrjTpovojxia ) did not in fact deviate from their ancient ones. Here too, astrologia can have trie meaning of astronomy and astrology,85 and the same holds true, although from a later date, for astronomia.86 Similarly astrologus was used both for astronomer and astrologer. Astronomus appeared later in the Latin vocabulary, but was also used in both meanings.87
82 Cf. MW (astrologus 1-2; astronomus 1-2); D M L (astrologus a-b; astronomus a-b; astronomicus b). 83 Cf. NG (IA2; IIA2, IIB3, IIC2); D M L (2, 4 b, 5c, 7 b). 84 Ch. BURNETT, Astrology (1996), p. 372. This phrase is a literal translation of the Arabic name of the discipline. The influence of Arabic terminology began in the late renth or early eleventh century, when the Arabic and Jewish astrological material was first introduced in the West. The lion's share of Arabic astrological texts were translated in the twelfth century, and with these translations many neologisms, transliterations of Arabic terms, entered the medieval Latin vocabulary. 85 T L L ; O L D . Note that astrologia also had the metonymical meaning of 'book on astronomy or astrology'; O L D (b). 86 TLL. 87 TLL.
374
computus, calculus Computus had essentially two meanings in the Middle Ages: it was used in the general meaning of'reckoning', 'counting' or 'the art of reckoning' (also ars computandi),™ and in the specific technical meaning of 'reckoning in relation to chronology'.89 The chief purpose of computus in this sense, i.e. the separate discipline of the computation of time, was to determine the date of Easter, a process that required an intricate coordination of lunar and solar cycles with the cycle of the days of the week. Computus in this sense became an obligatory part of the school curriculum in the Carolingian period.90 Computus was used metonymically for the discipline of reckoning time, but also for different kinds of products of this discipline: a book containing its rules and methods,91 or a calendar. Further, the term was used in specific senses related to the general meaning of computare ('to count'): 'year-book', 'tax-book', or 'account'.92 From computare and computus several neologisms were formed in medieval Latin: computarius, for example, which was used as a substantive for a person rendering account ('accountant'), or for a person experienced in the art of computation (also: teacher of this art). The classical term computator (calculator, reckoner) was used in the new meaning of 'chronologer', and the medieval term computista was used in the same way.93 The original meaning of calculus is 'pebble', 'small stone'. It was used for all kinds of small stones: gem, piece used in games, pebble used for
88 For a useful introduction with ample bibliographical references, see M . FOLKERTS & E.A. N E U E N S C H W A N D E R , 'Rechenkunst', Lexikon des Mittelalters 7, col. 502-508. 89 O n time reckoning see the introductions of W . B E R G M A N N , 'Komputistik', Lexikon des Mittelalters 5, col. 1293-1295; J . J . J O H N , 'Computus', Dictionary of the Middle Ages 3, p. 509; U.C. M E R Z B A C H , 'Calendars and Reckoning of Time', Dictionary of the Middle Ages 3, pp. 17-30. 90 Cf. R R I C H E , Le vocabulaire des ecoles carolingiennes, CIVICIMA V (1992), pp. 40. 91 Cf. M W (Azb; Bi) 92 Cf. M W (IB2, B 4 ) ; D M L (2). 93 Cf. M W ; D M L . Note that computator was also used for 'things that count': reckoning board, counter or token coin. (Cf. D M L . ) BI.AISK, Lex., furthermore, mentions the new forms computatorium (table for reckoning, counter), and computorium, a list of liturgical feasts, or of the dead, for example, or a calendar.
COMPUTUS, CALCULUS
375
voting, even kidney stone, but also for pebbles used for reckoning. From this specific use the metonymical meaning of 'reckoning' developed, or 'the art of reckoning'. Ars computandi was used alongside and synonymously with ars calculaneti.9"
From calculus the medieval terms calculativa (also: ars calculativa, 'art of reckoning'), and the substantively used participle calculans ('chronologer') were derived. From its earliest existence onwards, the late-antique form computus {con-, -po-, -turn), derived from the verb computare ('to calculate, count, reckon'), had the double meaning of'reckoning, calculus' in general, and the specific art of chronological reckoning.95 The two meanings remained in use throughout the Middle Ages and beyond. Some other derivations of computare, such as computator, computatorius and computatio, developed
new specific additional meanings relating to time reckoning. Computatio, for example, was sometimes used in the meaning of'calendar',96 computator (or computista) for a person experienced in the art of time reckoning, or a teacher of this art.97 Already in Antiquity the word calculus ('small stone', 'pebble') developed the specific meaning of 'pebble used for reckoning, counter', and metonymically also of'(method of) calculation'. A black pebble used for voting led to another branch of specific meanings, which already existed in Antiquity and persisted into the Middle Ages: 'vote', 'verdict', 'sentence' or 'judgement'.98 In the Middle Ages, furthermore, the meaning of calculus seems to have been influenced by that of computus, for it was also used in the specific meaning of 'time reckoning', and some of its derivatives acquired similar connotations. Calculans or calculator, for example, were sometimes used for 'chronologer', calcuLttio for 'time reckoning', and calculatorius for 'concerning the art of time reckoning'.99
94 See MW (IIB2), where it is noted that calculus and ars calculandi ate also used in the specific sense that computus {ars computandi) had developed: 'discipline of time-reckoning' or 'handbook fot time-reckoning'. 95 Cf. B L A I S E , Diet. (1). 96 Cf. M W ( l B i ) . 97 Cf. MW(i). 98 Cf. M W ( I I C z ) ; M W ( 5 a - c ) . 99 Cf. M W : calculans, calculator (1); calculatio (ia); calculatorius (ib).
376
dialectica, logica In the medieval intellectual tradition dialectica and logica are (with some exceptions) generally used as two terms for the same discipline: the art or science of sound reasoning, on the basis of the systematic analysis of language and meaning. Thinkers of Antiquity (Plato, Aristotle, the Stoic philosophers) shaped the medieval understanding of this art; the late-antique translators and commentators (notably Martianus Capella, Boethius and Augustine) deeply influenced its medieval content and terminology.100 Especially in medieval classifications of sciences dialectica and logica are often distinguished from each other, and from other terms such as analytica or -^phibsophia. It is telling, however, that in the earlier Middle Ages die three trivial liberal arts {-^grammatica, -^rhetorica, and dialectica) together are named logica, while at the very end of the Middle Ages there is a tendency to refer to the whole of logica as dialectica. At different times dialectica and logica comprised different elements of the art of logical reasoning, or different elements were emphasized,101 but they were also used synonymously throughout the Middle Ages. Since the subject
100 There is a large bibliography on this subject. For introductions and further references see, for example, L . O E I N G - H A N H O F F , 'Dialektik', Historisches Worterbuch der Philosophic, col. 164-184; P. SCHULTHESS & R . I M B A C H (eds.), Die Philosophic im Lzteinischen Mittelalter, J.P. B E C K M A N N , 'Logik', Lexikon des Mittelalters 5, col. 2071-2077; A . D E L I B E R A & B . M O J S I S C H , 'Dialektik', Lexikon des Mittelalters 2, col. 944-946; P.O. L E W R Y , 'Dialectic', Dictionary of the Middle Ages 4, pp. 168-171; several chapters in the Cambridge History of Later Medieval Philosophy ( N . K R E T Z M A N N , A . K E N N Y , J . P I N B O R G , eds.). O n the terminology of logic see A . M A I E R U , Terminologia logica della tarda scolastica (1971). 101 L . O E I N G - H A N H O F F describes the distinctions between the two terms in his article 'Dialektik' for the Historisches Worterbuch der Philosophic. In some definitions the emphasis was placed on the art of arguing, and dialectica or logica had the restricted sense of a technique for finding arguments that would be accepted in disputation: 'scientia bene disputandi', 'ars dubitandi or 'dualis sermo quifit inter opponentem et respondentem . In other definitions the all-encompassing aspect of logic or reason was emphasized, which could lead one to the truth: 'veri etfalsi iudicandi scientid, 'ars bene disserendi' or 'discernendi verum afalso'. Both were already present in the ancient tradition.
DIALECTICA, LOGICA
i, '
377
of dialectica or logica —the verification of the correctness of argumentation in order to distinguish between true and false statements— was so basic to any science, the two were often described as ars artium, scientia scientiarum or disciplina disciplinarum. Up to and including the twelfth century, the programme of logic texts consisted of Aristotle's Categoriae and De interpretatione, Porphyrius's Isagoge and Boethius' translations, commentaries and treatises on logic: De sillogismis categoricis, De sillogismis hypotheticis, De divisione and De topkis differentiis. Around the middle of the twelfth century the old canon of logic texts was extended with newly translated works: Aristotle's Analytica priora and Analytica posteriora, his Topica and Sophistici elenchi. The old canon was in retrospect named logica vetus (or ars vetus), while the new extended one was named logica nova (or ars nova)}01 Those who were experienced or authoritative in the ars dialectica or logica were called dialectici, logici (loici, loyci).m Another set of technical expressions is the opposition between logica antiqua and logica moderna or modernorum}04 In the period between 1175 and 1250 the so-called logica moderna or modernorum was developed in opposition to the then labelled logica antiqua (the Aristotelian and Boethian tradition of logica vetus and logica nova). At the heart of the new movement lay a theory about meaning, which was brought fortli by reflections on the boundaries between grammar and logic (see also —> grammatica speculativa). The adherents of the logica moderna pleaded for interpretation and signification of individual terms {termini or nomina) within the context of the sentence or proposition, and developed a system in which terms were categorized into terms with a definite meaning
102 O n the curriculum of logic in medieval universities see J . A . W E I S H E I P L , Curriculum of the Faculty of Arts at Oxford (1964), pp. 169-170. 103 This goes for both ancient and medieval Latin: cf. T L L (logicus, loicus, under 1); O L D {dialecticus, b); D M L (dialecticus 2, logicus 4). For subtle differences in the meanings of dialecticus, demonstrator and sophista within the context of university disputations, see C. LAFLEUR, Logic in the Barcelona Compendium (1993), pp. 90-94. 104 O n logica moderna or terminist logic see the indispensable study of L . M . D E RTJK, Logica modernorum. A Contribution to the History of Early Terminist Logic, 3 Vols. (1962-1967). For a short introduction see A . G . W E I L E R , 'Antiqui/moderni', Historisches Worterbuch der Philosophic 1, col. 407-410.
378
DIALECTICA, LOGICA
{categoremata, that is subject-predicate), and terms with a meaning which depended on their connection to categoremic words {-^syncategoremata (Cat. III)). The most important treatise of modern logic —which is also called terminist logic— is Petrus Hispanus' Tractatus (later also called Summulae logicales) .™5
For the adherents of the different schools of logic, terms such as moderni versus antiqui, terministae or nominates (nominalistae) versus reales or
realistae were used.106 Already in Antiquity the feminine forms of the adjectives dialecticus (from the Greek 5UXA,£KTIK6C,) and logicus (loicus) (from the Greek ^oyiKoq) were used substantively in the meaning of logic or dialectic as a branch of philosophy,107 and they continued to be used in this sense throughout the Middle Ages and beyond.108 Although in some texts dialectica and logica were explicitly distinguished from each other and from other terms such as analytica and ->philosophia, in most cases die two terms are used interchangeably throughout Antiquity and the Middle Ages. In the Middle Ages the new schools of logic were responsible for the introduction of a large new set of technical terms or expressions, such as die above-mentioned logica moderna versus antiqua, nominates versus reales, etc.109
105 Other important texts and authors are, from Oxford, the anonymous treatises Logica ut dicit and Logica cum sit nostra, William of Shyrewood's Lntroductiones in logicam (12301240), and Roger Bacon's Summulae dialectkes (ca. 12.50); and from Paris the anonymous Ars meliduna (ca. 1154-1180), and works of Johannes Pagus (ca. 1230), Nicholas of Paris and Lambert of Lagny (ca. 1260-1265). 106 There is very little material on these terms, and one should be aware that in modern literature the terms used are often modern denominations of adherents of a certain logical movement or school. A thorough study of the medieval vocabulary in this field remains a desideratum. 107 Cf. T L L ; O L D (dialecticus c). 108 Cf. NG logicus (IB); D M L {logicus z, dialecticus c). 109 Especially terminist logic had an extensive technical vocabulary.
379
divina scientia, sacra doctrina, theologia, theologus, metaphysica, prima philosophia Throughout the Middle Ages the study of the Bible and Christian dogma was usually referred to with expressions using traditional words such as lectio or studium:™ lectio sacra; lectio or studium divinaepaginae, divinorum librorum, divinae or sacrae scripturae. Divina scientia111 or sacra doctrina were also used for the whole of Christian doctrine, but so were the more ambiguous expressions (in the tradition of Aristotle and Avicenna) metaphysica and prima philosophia. The twelfth-century translator of Arabic philosophical texts Dominicus Gundissalinus uses prima philosophia and metaphysica in the sense of'the philosophical study of'supernatural', i.e. divine things'. Others, however, such as Robert Kilwardby (t 1279) and John of Dacia (master in Paris in the second half of the thirteenth century), distinguish between the two: while theologia, to their mind, is the study of God and Christian doctrine, metaphysica or prima philosophia is the speculative study of the physical world. When Aristotle's Metaphysica became known in the West, the focus of the discipline of metaphysics shifted from theological questions, concerning questions of the nature of God or his divine 'being', to ontological questions in general, the science of 'essence' or 'being'.112
n o O n the vocabulary of theology see E . L E S N E , Les ecoles de la fin du VLLF siecle a la fin du XIF (1940), pp. 640-676; O . W E I J E R S , L'appellation des disciplines dans les classifications des sciences (1986-1987), pp. 49-50; S.F. B R O W N , Key terms in Medieval 'Theological Vocabulary, CTVJCIMA I I I (1990), pp. 82-96; G . R . EVANS, Theology: the Vocabulary of Teaching and Research 1300-1600, CTVJCIMA V I I I (1995), pp. 118-133; A . SOLIGNAC, "Iheologie. Le mot et sa signification, Dictionnaire de Spiritualite 15, col. 463-482; S.E B R O W N , Theology and Philosophy (1996). HI Note, however, that the late medieval expression ars divina has the meaning of 'alchemy' ( B L A I S E , Lex).
112 See J.P. B E C K M A N N , 'Metaphysik', Lexikon des Mittelahers 6, cols. 570-576 for an introduction and further references; see also L . O R I N G - H A N H O F F , Die Methoden der Metaphysik im Mitteklter (1963); and L. H O N N E F E L D E R , Der zweite Anfang der Metaphysik (1987)-
380
DIVINA SCIENTIA, SACEA DOCTRINA, THEOLOGIA
The medieval use of the term theologia and its derivatives (theologicus, theolog(iz)are, theologari, theologus) is not straightforward. In the ancient tradition the primary meaning of the term was 'discourse on god or the gods', and it was both used for mythology and for the system of teaching or theological doctrine about the gods. The Christian authors of the first centuries AD used it only reluctantly, and sometimes qualified it with the adjective vera to indicate that it was the Christian doctrine they were referring to, not pagan mythology.113 In the rare occurrences of theologia or its derivatives dating from the early Middle Ages, the term has a very general meaning: 'teaching' or 'discourse' on God or the Bible.114 In the monastic context theologia and expressions such as vita theologica referred to a life of contemplation and prayer. In the twelfth century, Abelard seems to have been the first to use theologia in a more specific sense, i.e. the coherent and logically argued system of Christian dogma. In some contexts the word is applied especially to one of the central truths of Christian dogma: the doctrine of the Trinity.115 It is only in the thirteenth century, under the influence of Aristotelianism and in the context of the universities, that theologia gradually takes on its current meaning.116 By the end of the thirteenth century it is generally accepted that theologia is a(n academic) science, and the one that is superior to all others at that, and that it has its own methods and principles. The Faculty of Theology became the most important one at many universities, especially that of Paris. At the same time, however, the meanings attached to theologia at earlier stages, such as Holy Scripture, or Christian doctrine on the Trinity, continue to be used occasionally. The traditional expressions, divina scientia, sacra doctrina, sacra pagina, etc. also remain in use for the discipline of theology.
113 For a thorough analysis of the uses and meanings of the word in Classical and early Christian times, cf. A. SOLIGNAC, 'Theologie. Le mot et sa signification', Dictionnaire de Spiritualite 15, cols. 463-472. 114 The most prominent author to use theologia and theologus in the early Middle Ages is John the Scot. Cf. A . SOLIGNAC, 'Theologie. Le mot et sa signification', Dictionnaire de Spiritualite i*,, col. 473 for further references. 115 On Abelard see ibid., cols. 473-474 for further references. 116 Cf. ibid., cols. 478-482.
DIVINA SCIENTIA, SACRA DOCTRINA, THEOLOGIA
381
Theologia, from the Greek BeoXoyia, originally meant 'discourse about god or the gods', and was used both for mythology and a system of teaching about the Gods, or, in other words, both for story-telling about the divine world, and for reasoning about it. Theologi, similarly, was both used for those who discoursed about die gods in stories, the ancient mythographers, and for die teachers of theology in, for example, the Stoic tradition.117 In the days of early Christianity theologia and theologi are only rarely used. For Augustine they are clearly linked with the gods of the poets, and have a pejorative connotation. In the early Middle Ages the term was also rarely used, and Abelard seems to have been the first to re-introduce it in a new meaning: coherent doctrine on Christian dogma, especially the Trinity. From then on, the term becomes more common, and is also used alongside sacra doctrina, divina scientia or similar expressions for the whole of Christian teaching. Especially in the thirteenth and fourteenth centuries, new terms and expressions are introduced that reflect the new meaning of the term: facultas theologiae ('discipline of theology', 'divinity school' or 'faculty of theology');118 theologare {-art) or theologizare ('to practise or teach theology').119 Theologus came to mean 'someone who practises or teaches theology', and theologicus 'theological'.1
•MM
ft
117 A. SOLIGNAC also mentions the meaning of 'servants of the temple' for the Greek ftecAoyoi. ("Iheologie. Le mot ct sa signification', Dictionnaire de Spiritualite 15, cols. 463-466). Cf. F O R C ; O L D .
Ho Cf. A. SOLIGNAC, Theologie. Le mot et sa signification', Dictionnaire de Spiritualite 15. col. 477. 119 120
Cf. Cf.
DuC;
BLAISE,
B L A I S E , Lex.
Lex.
382
ethica, oeconomica, politica In medieval classifications of the sciences, which are especially prominent in the twelfth and thirteenth centuries,121 die Aristotelian threesome (scientia or philosophia) ethica (aethi-, eti-, ethi, exhi-, ethy-, etc.)}22 oeconomica (e-, ae-, i-, jy-)123 and politica are known collectively as scientie practice (practical sciences), active (active sciences) or morales (moral sciences). Ethica is defined as the study of personal morality, the ethics of the individual; oeconomica as the study of domestic society, the management or ethics of the family or household; and politica the study of civilian society, the management or ethics of the state. In the traditional vocabulary of Antiquity, often also applied in the Middle Ages, solitarius, privatus and publicus are used as synonyms for respectively ethicus, oeconomicus and politicus. For ethica the alternative terms monastica or moralis are also used; for oeconomica privata, dispensativa or dispensatoria; and for politica civilis.nA Ethicus was also used as a (masculine) substantive, in the meaning of 'moral philosopher', but also of'Aristotle', or 'a classical author'.125 The expression (libri) ethicorum or ethica (Aristotelis) was generally used to refer to Aristotle's Ethica Nicomachea.126
121 On these ancient and medieval classifications of the sciences see the publications of J.A. W E I S H E I P L , Classification of the Sciences in Medieval Thought (1965), pp. 63-66; and ID., The Nature, Scope and Classification of the Sciences (1987), pp. 468-474; O . W E I J E R S , L'appellation des disciplines dans les classifications des sciences (1986-1987), pp. 48-49; E. W H I T N E Y , Paradise Restored(1990), pp. 35, 61, 69. 122 For all kinds of (late-)antique spellings cf. T L L . 123 Cf. MW 124 The term monastica can be found in Robert Kilwardby's works, and in those of John of Dacia. Only from the thirteenth century on is it attested in the sense of 'private' or 'concerning the individual', derived from the original Greek meaning of the term u,0 Veto TlKoq in the sense of'solitary, individual'. In almost all other contexts it has the general meaning of'monastic', 'belonging to the monastery'. The alternative terms dispensativa and civilis, furthermore, are already found in Cassiodore and Isidore. Cf. O . W E I J E R S , L'appellation des disciplines dans les classifications des sciences (1986-1987), pp. 48-49. 125 Cf. D M L (2a-c). The D M L gives ample examples of classical authors referred to as ethicus: Horace, Ovid, Cicero, Seneca, etc. 126 Cf. DML (3).
ETHICA, OKCONOMICA, POLITICA
383
The three terms are all simply transliterations of the Greek words ('relating to morals, ethical'), OIKOVOUIKOC; ('relating to household management'), and Jto^micoi; ('concerning civil government, political'). In the Middle Ages the scientie practice may have been classified in schemes that differ from the ancient ones, but the meaning of the terms did not change.127
127 Cf. TLL; OLD; D M L (ethicus); MW (oeconomicus).
384 geometria, geographia, mappa mundi Geometria (or geometricd), as one of the arts of the quadrivium (cf. —> artes liberates), had a prominent place in the medieval curriculum.128 It concerned the discipline of measurement: the measurement of immobile,129 solid bodies, geometrical figures, or, also, the surveying of land. In some cases the discipline of surveying actually led to a description of the earth, its countries and peoples, and geometria was in fact used for what we would call geography rather than geometry.130 The ancient discipline of geographia or 'geography' was widely studied in the Middle Ages, and it was referred to with its antique name.131 For geographical descriptions of the world, however, a new word was introduced, mappa mundi (mappamundi),"2 derived from mappa ('(piece of) doth') and mundus ('world'). One should note, however, that mappa mundi was not necessarily a graphic depiction of the world, and that it is common to find the term used in a metaphorical sense for verbal descriptions of the world. Other terms used for the phenomenon of maps are imago
128 There is little material on the subject, and hardly any on its terminological aspect. For a general introduction see B . H U G H E S , Mathematics and Geometry (1996). For its place in the medieval classifications of science see J.A. W E I S H E I P L , Jhe Nature, Scope, and Classification of the Sciences (1987), esp. charts 1-6. O . W E I J F . R S briefly treats its terminology in L'appellation des disciplines dans les classifications des sciences (1986-1987), p. 48. 129 The study of moving bodies, i.e. the planetary orbits and the sphere of the fixed stars, was the object of -^astrohgia, astronomia. 130 This is the case, for example, in Martianus Capella's treatment of the art in his De
nuptiis Philologiae et Mercurii, book 6. Cf. W.H. STAHL & R. JOHNSON, Martianus Capella and the Seven Liberal Arts, Vol. 1 (repr. 1977), pp. 126-148. 131 For introductions to the discipline in the Middle Ages see, for example, P. G A U T I E R D A L C H E , Geographic et culture (1997). See also T L L ; O L D and D M L under geographia. 132 O n this see D . W O O D W A R D , '18. Medieval Mappaemundi', in: J . B . H A R L E Y & D . W O O D W A R D , The History of Cartography, Vol. I (1987), pp. 286-370; P. G A U T I E R D A L C H E ,
Nouvelks lumieres sur la 'Descriptio mappe mundi'de Hugues de Saint-Victor, reprinted in
Geographic et culture, number X I I (pp. 1-27). The earliest attestations of mappa mundi seem to date from the eleventh century. Cf. D u C ; N G ; DML; N I E R M .
GEOMETRIA, GEOGRAPHIA, MAPPA MUNDI
385
mundi, pictura, descriptio or tabula, but mappa mixndi is by far the most common.133 In classification systems geometria was classified as a theoretical science concerning the physical world, and ordered among the mathematical sciences.134 Twelfth- and thirteenth-century authors sometimes subdivided the ars geometria into separate disciplines, such as altimetria, planimetria and cosmimetria, steriometria and perspectiva, etc.135
The semantic background of geometria is not very revealing. Imported from the Greek (yecoueTpia), the term, which originally signified the science of the measurement of the earth or land, was used both in Antiquity and in the Middle Ages for the science of the measurement of solid bodies and their shapes. Geometrica, treated either as a neuter plural or a feminine singular form, either as an adjective or as a noun, was also used.136 In late Latin, the terms geometricus and geometer were introduced for geometrist, or teacher of geometry,137 and in medieval Latin the verb geometricare, to measure, was added to the vocabulary.138
133 In the classical Latin of the late R o m a n era terms such as forma, figura, orbis pictus or orbis terrarum descriptio were used for the phenomenon of maps. Cf. D . W O O D W A R D , 'Medieval Mappaemundi' (1987), pp. 287-288. 134 In some contexts mathematica or arithmeticd and geometria are even used as synonyms. Cf. -^arithmeticus. 135 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , L'appellation des disciplines dam les classifications des sciences (19861987), p. 48. 136 Cf. OLD; DML. 137 Cf. T L L (geometricus); D M I . {geometer).
138 Cf. DuC.
386
grammatica, grammaticus, grammatica speculativa The ars grammatica is, from ancient times on, the art or science that concerns the rules of language, its pronunciation, morphology, syntax, etc.139 In the ancient tradition grammatica was the first component of the -^trivium, the three arts of the seven —Cartes liberates that were concerned with language. Since throughout the Middle Ages the teaching of language, of reading and writing, was in fact the teaching of Latin, grammatica almost always implied 'Latin grammar'. Throughout the Middle Ages the late-Latin grammarians Donatus (ca. 350, Ars minor and Ars maior) and Priscian (ca. 500, Institutiones grammaticae) formed the basis of grammatical education. Both in Antiquity and in the Middle Ages die adjective grammaticus was also used as a substantive for persons experienced in the field of (Latin) grammar. In a general sense the word was used for 'literate person', 'scholar'. In a more narrow sense the term was used for teachers of the Latin language and its exemplary (classical) literary works.140 In the Middle Ages, however, the term was also used for those learning grammar. A pupil or student learning grammar was also referred to as grammaticus (puer), or occasionally as grammatista or grammaticulus.141
By the thirteenth century, however, the teaching of grammar as incorporated into the curriculum of the university faculties of arts had
139 There is a large bibliography on the axs grammatica in ancient and medieval times. For basic introductions with ample bibliographical references see the relevant articles in the Dictionary of the Middle Ages (5, pp. 648-651: R . H . R O B I N S , 'Grammar'); the Lexikon desMittelalters (4, col. 1637-1645: J . G R U B E R & E . P E R E Z R O D R I G U E Z , 'Grammatik'); and
the chapter on grammar in the bibliographical guide of F.A.C. M A N T E L L O & A . G . R I G G , Medieval Latin (1996): V . A . L A W , Grammar (pp. 288-295). See also, for example, the introductions and bibliographies in R.W. H U N T , Collected Papers on the History of Grammar in the Middle Ages (1980); and L. H O L T Z , Donat et la tradition de I'enseignement grammatical (1981). 140 Cf. T L L ; O L D . See also DuC. (1); D M L (za-b). 141 Cf. D M L (ic, 2c); BLAISE, Lex., grammaticus, grammatista, grammaticulus. Note, however, that the O L D and DuC. both have grammatista in the meaning of 'teacher of grammar'.
GRAMMATICA, GRAMMATICUS, GRAMMATICA SPECULATIVA
387
changed under the influence of Aristotelian logic. In addition to the traditional ars grammatica, which set out the rules of proper writing and speaking and which was taught at a basic level, often in grammar schools, the advanced arts student was introduced to a philosophical approach to grammar. Under the name of grammatica speculativa language and grammar were studied/w se:142 attention focused on what was beneath the surface of language, the construction of the abstract grammar scheme (in theory universal, independent of the actual language in question) as opposed to the concrete forms of the words themselves. A key term in this new approach was modi significandi, the 'modes of signifying', a term first used by Boethius (but not as a terminus technicus) to explain the difference between noun and verb: a noun has a certain meaning or content, a verb, on the other hand, presents its meaning or content in a certain way {modus), and at the same time gives information {consignificai) concerning, for example, the time or duration of its content. In the twelfth and particularly in the thirteenth century this theory was extended to all grammatical elements of language, and grew into an all-encompassing theory of language and meaning, with a whole set of termini technici of its own: modus essendi, modus intelligendi, conceptus, intellectus, significatum, modus significandi essentialis, modus
significandi accidentalis, etc.143 In the retrospect of the Renaissance the speculative grammarians of the thirteenth and fourteenth centuries were, because of their central theory of the modi significandi, named modistae}44
142 Numerous studies focus on the field of speculative grammar. For basic introductions and further bibliographical references see, for example, J . P I N B O R G , 'Speculative Grammar', in: The Cambridge History of Later Medieval Philosophy (1982), pp. 254-269; I . ROSIER, La grammaire speculative des modistes (1983); K . M . F R E D B O R G , 'Speculative Grammar', in: A History of Twelfth-Century Western Philosophy (1988), pp. 177-195. 143 In contrast with the medieval terminology of traditional grammar, that of the speculative movement has received much scholarly attention. See, for example, I . R O S I E R , La terminologie linguistique latine medievale (1992). H 4 I - R O S I E R , La grammaire speculative des modistes (1983), p. 9.
388
GRAMMATICA, GRAMMATICUS, GRAMMATICA SPECUI.ATIVA
In the thirteenth century, furthermore, the concept of grammatica positiva was introduced: grammar as the discipline of the proper use of language, separated again from the intricate theories of signification and logic of speculative grammar.145 Both in Antiquity and in the Middle Ages, grammatica (imported from the Greek Ypocu|iaT,iKr|, sc. xexvr|) was used for the study of literature and language both in a broad sense (including exegesis, literary criticism, etc.), as well as in the more narrow modern sense of'grammar', the art of die proper use of language.146 Already in Antiquity grammaticus, with its basic adjectival meaning of'of or concerning grammar' (in the broad sense described above), was used as a noun for 'expert in the field of literature and language', 'grammarian' or 'teacher of (Latin or Greek) language and grammar'.147 In the Middle Ages the term was in addition used for pupils of grammar, for example as an adjective in the expression puer grammaticus (or grammaticus puer), but also substantively.148 W i t h the development of the new field of grammatica speculativa new sets technical terms were introduced in treatises and handbooks, but the basic meaning of the word grammatica did not change.
145 O n this see the lengthy introduction by A . G R O N D E U X , '81. La Grammatica positiva dans le Bas Moyen-Agc', in: History of the Language Sciences (2000), pp. 598-610. 146 Cf. T L L (under grammaticus); O L D ; D M L . Note that in the Christian Latin of the early period grammatica also had the specific meaning of'the study of profane literature', probably because the 'models of exemplary use of language' were in fact the classical authors. Cf. B L A I S E , Diet. 147 TLL; OLD. 148 Cf. D M L (1 and 2b).
389
ius canonicum, ius civile, canonista, decretista, decretalista, legista From the period of the early Christian church on, ecclesiastical law, ius canonicum, was distinguished from secular law, ius civile or ius commune.™ Ius canonicum or canon law regulated the lives of the clerics, but because of the enormous range of subjects touched by canon law, it also had a major influence on lay people. Its sources are both legislative documents, such as the proceedings of councils, papal decrees and the Bible, and intermediate sources by which the law was transmitted, such as the canonical collections — extracts, for example, of earlier conciliar canons, or Latin translations of canons of councils held in the eastern part of the empire. For secular law, ancient Rome was the bedrock upon which medieval law was built. Its influence is clearly recognizable in early medieval legal texts, and with its resurrection in the law schools of eleventh century Bologna it became the core of the academic legal curriculum across medieval Europe. The central collection or codification is Emperor Justinian's Corpus iuris civilis from the sixth century, which provided medieval jurists with model material for the legislation of the monarchical constitution, family law, and all other kinds of legal procedures, contracts, testaments, etc. Again in Bologna, but this time around 1140, Gratian made a central collection for canon law: the Decretum or Concordia discordantium canonum. His systematization and explanation of the earlier sources made the professionalization of the study of canon law possible, and a 'decretist' science with a distinctive Latin style began to develop. New compilations were made, a trend which culminated in the Decretales promulgated by Pope Gregory IX in 1234.
149 There is, again, a large bibliography on the subject. For useful introductions with ample bibliographical references see, among others, the relevant articles in the Dictionary of the Middle Ages (Vol. 7): R. REYNOLDS, 'Law, Canon: to Gratian' (pp. 395-413); S. CHODOROW, 'Law, Canon: after Gratian' (pp. 413-418); T. KUEHN, 'Law, schools of (pp. 512.-517). and in EA.C. MANTELLO & A.G. RIGG, Medieval Latin (1996): J . GILCHRIST, Canon Law (pp. 241-253); K. PENNINGTON, Roman and Secular Law (pp. 254-266).
390
IUS CANONICUM, IUS CIVILE
It is from the professionalization of both secular and canon law that specific terminology starts to be used for experts or teachers of law.150 Those who were experienced in civil law (with its leges) were called legistae, those who studied or taught canon law (with its canones) were called canonistae.'51 From Gratian's Decretum (the plural form Decreta is also used), the term decretista was forged, and from Gregory's Decretales the term decretalista,1S2 for those who were educated in the field of canon law, or who practised canon law as lawyers. With the exception of legista, which also has the general meaning of one who has studied or practised law,153 these terms do not seem to occur before the thirteenth century, when law had become a proper field of study at the universities. In ancient times jurists or legal experts were referred to by expressions such as iuris peritus, consultus, sciens, or prudens,m lawyers as causae or causarum actor, orator or (but usually in a pejorative way) causidicus. The terms described above, canonista,155 decret(al)ista,156 and iurista,151 are all medieval neologisms, which do not seem to occur before the thirteenth century. Only legista is older:158 it was already in use in the Carolingian period.
I J O There is surprisingly little modern scholarly material on this subject. Even in the elaborate handbook of H. C o i N G , Handbuch der QueUen und Literatur der neueren europdischen Privatsgeschichte (1973), very little attention is given to the medieval terms for lawyers and jurists. Since the professionalization of law is a process that only took place in the course of the twelfth century, some medieval Latin dictionaries are also of-no use. O n e of the few short references I found is J . A . C L A R E N C E S M I T H , Medieval Law Teachers and Writers: Civilian and Canonist (1975), pp. 21-22. 151 Note that for those who had studied law at die universities other expressions were also generally used: doctor legum, legumprofessor, etc. C f . —^doctor (Cat. I ) . 152 N o t e diat Raimundus Lullus used yet another thirteenth-century term, iurista, in opposition to decretalista, for scholars i n civil and canon law respectively. Cf. R A I M U N D U S L U L L U S (ca. 1232-1315), Lectura artis, C C C M 113, pars V I , 1.1523-1529 (p. 417) ; N I E R M . . 153 Cf. DML(a). 154 Note that jurisconsultus (juris consultus) and jurisperitus {jurisperitus) were still in use in the M i d d l e Ages for those learned in law: cf. D M L . 155 Cf. DML. 156
Cf. DuC; NIERM.; DML.
157 Cf. DuC; DML. 158 Cf. D u C ; N I E R M . ; D M L ; N G . The D M L also has the alternative legister, but only in an attestation from the sixteenth century.
391
musica, musicus, cantus, cantor In the ancient tradition musica (ars musica, musica disciplina)™ concerned first and foremost rational knowledge of music, not its performance practice. The Greeks did not write about the performance of music, but about its basic mathematical principles, its structure, and its terminology. In Boethius' De institutione musica, which remained the most important source for the ancient body of knowledge on music throughout the Middle Ages, the dichotomy between musicus and cantor is very strong: the musicus is the scholar who has mastered the Pythagorean truths of music, and the cantor is no more than a slave, performing music seemingly without any understanding, merely copying the melody from a teacher.160 In the Middle Ages Boethius' dichotomy was faithfully copied into many treatises on music, but on the other hand cantus, plainchant, was immensely important in the performance of liturgy. In addition to the ancient tradition of music theory, which was —at least in medieval society, where the ancient tone-systems described in the original Greek sources were no longer in use— purely speculative, a new kind of music theory developed that concerned itself with plainchant and the performance of liturgy. The earliest treatises of this kind date from the second half of the ninth century. Already in these first treatises the word cantor was used in a much more positive meaning: a skilled singer of plainchant.161 At the same time musicus remained in use throughout the Middle Ages in the
159 Note that the term armonia (harmonia) was also used for the ars musica, in, for example, the influential treatise on the seven liberal arts of the late-antique author Martianus Capella, De nuptiis Philologiae et Mercurii. 160 On the ancient tradition of music theory in the Middle Ages see, for example, the studies of A . B A R B E R A (ed.), Music Theory and Its Sources (1990); L.P. G R I J P & P. S C H E E P E R S (eds.), Van Aristoxenos tot Stockhausen 1 (1990); F. Z A M I N E R (ed.), Geschichte der Musiktheorie y. Rezeption des antiken Fachs im Mittelalter (1990). 161 Note, however, that in ancient times and throughout the Middle Ages cantor was also used for 'singer' in general.
392
MUSICA, MUSICUS, CANTUS, CANTOR
Boethian sense of music theorist, and cantor in the inferior sense of'mere performer'.162 In the terminology of the church cantor developed several more specific meanings. It was used in the sense of chorister, but also 'precentor' or 'leader of the church choir'; from the late tenth century on it was also used for 'the office of cantor or precentor' — an office that involved leading the choir, teaching chant and organising the liturgical performances;163 in the early polyphony of the eleventh and twelfth centuries cantor was used for 'the one who performs the part called 'cantus";mand at the very end of the Middle Ages the term was used in the sense of 'schoolteacher of (church) music and chant'. 165 Many sets of terms, furthermore, were in use for the classification of music into different categories.166 The most important threesome comes, again, from Boethius' De institutione musica. He divided music into musica mundana, which concerns all harmonious relations in the cosmos (between the planets, between the seasons of the year, etc.), musica humana, which is the harmonious relationship between the human body and soul, and musica instrumentis constituta — artificial music, made by mankind on musical instruments. The first two concepts in fact concern music of a very different kind, harmony in micro- and macrocosmos,167 and only the concept of musica instrumentis constituta refers to what is perceived as music in the modern sense of the word. In the Middle Ages
162 For a thorough overview of the meanings of the two terms and their backgrounds, see the article of E . R E I M E R , Musicus-cantor (1978), in: Handworterbuch der musikalischen Terminologie I I I . 16} Cf. ibid., pp. 9-10,11-12. Note that there are many more expressions and terms for the precentor. R E I M E R lists, among others, primicerius cantorum, cantor primus, archicantor, praecentor (p. 10). 164 Cf. E . R E I M E R , Musicus-cantor (1978), p. 11. 165 Cf. ibid., p. 12. 166 O n different classification systems see G . P I E T Z S C H , Die Klassifikation der Musik (1929). 167 There is a large bibliography on cosmic harmony and the music of the spheres. See, among others: L . SPITZER, Classical and Christian Ideas of World Harmony (1944-1945); J . G O D W I N , Harmony of Heaven and Earth (1986).
MUSICA, MUSICUS, CANTUS, CANTOR
I -j. ~'\ H sy| A •: i ; , \- •
393
the first two categories were sometimes merged under the term musica naturalis (divinely inspired music), and many classification systems subdivided Boethius' third category (also called musica artificialis) into, for example, musica humana or musica armonica (music of the human voice), musica organica (music made on wind instruments), musica rithmica (music made on plucked or percussion instruments), etc. Music theory was divided into musica speculativa or theorica (the ancient tradition with its emphasis on numerical ratios), and musicapractica (theory relating to the performance of chant). Another set of technical terms in the field of music was developed to distinguish between different rhythmical styles, for which notational symbols were invented in the thirteenth and fourteenth centuries. 168 F r o m then on cantus or musica mensurabilis was used for rhythmically measured polyphony, while rhythmically unmeasured polyphony was called cantus planus. In the fourteenth century the term ars nova was used in music theoretical writings for the highly developed rhythmic practice of the Notre-Dame school in Paris, and contrasted with the ars vetus or antiqua. Already in Antiquity the feminine substantive musica was used for the concept of music as a discipline, including both theoretical principles and teachings aimed at the performance of music.169 The ancient meaning of the adjective musicus was primarily 'relating to the Muses or to their arts and studies', and secondly 'of or concerned with music'.170 It was also already used specifically in relation to persons in the sense of 'expert in the art or theory of music', not only in adjectival form but also as a substantive.171 In the tradition of the late-antique writers of treatises on musical theory (Censorinus, Boethius), the word had strongly absorbed this latter
168 On this subject see the introductions and bibliographical references in the articles of Die Musik in Geschichte und Gegenwart i : W . F R O B E N I U S , 'Ars antiqua', cols. 865-877; K . K U E G L E , M . G O M E Z , U . G U N T H E R , 'Ars nova—ars subtilior', cols. 877-918.
169 Cf. T L L ; O L D (1). It was also used in the general sense of'music, musical sounds' (*)•
170 T L L ; O L D (1-2). 171 T L L ; O L D (3); B L A I S E , Diet.
394
MUSICA, MUSICUS, CANTUS, CANTOR
meaning: 'music theorist', 'scholar in the field of speculative music theory'. This meaning prevailed throughout the Middle Ages, although from the eleventh century the word is also occasionally used as a general term for a 'musician', 'player of a musical instrument' or 'singer'. Only in the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries, however, this latter meaning eclipses the late-antique/medieval one. m In ancient times cantus had the general meaning of'singing' or 'song', and more specialized meanings such as 'poetry or verse', 'incantation or the utterance of spells', 'the song of birds' or 'the music of instruments'.173 In the Latin of the early Christian and medieval periods it kept all these meanings, but also developed a specifically Christian meaning: 'chant' or 'a chant used in the liturgy'.174 In ancient times cantor had the general meaning of 'singer', and kept this general meaning throughout the Middle Ages.175 In the vocabulary of the church, however, several more specific meanings developed. Cantor was used to denote an ordinary chorister, but also the precentor (also: precentor, cantor primus, etc.) or leader of the church choir;176 in the context of polyphony it was used to denote the performer of a certain part; in the context of episcopal and collegiate churches of the tenth century and later, it was used for the office of cantor or precentor; and at the very end of the Middle Ages it was used for the music teacher in (ecclesiastical) schools.177
172 Cf. R E I M E R , Musicus-cantor, p. 1. Cf. D M L (3, 5); N G (IB, IIA). 173 Cf. T L L ; O L D . 174 Cf. BLAISE, Diet.; D M L ; M W . 175 Cf. T L L ; O L D ; D M L (1); M W (I). 176 Cf. MW (IAza-b); D M L (2a-b). 177 Cf. E. R E I M E R , Musicus-cantor (1978), p. 1.
395
philosophia, philosophus, philosophari The concept of philosophia (filosofia) had many layers of meaning in the medieval world.178 In the ancient tradition philosophia was often used in the sense of 'all learning' or 'all earthly knowledge or wisdom'. In Boethius' influential work Consolatio Philosophiae philosophia is personified as a woman with infinite wisdom, the mother of all sciences or arts, including the seven liberal arts (cf. -cartes liberates).119 Augustine, another author whose works shaped the medieval understanding of the concept, contrasted the philosophia gentium or mundana philosophia, that is, the ancient or pagan philosophical ideas, with christiana philosophia, vera et sancta philosophia, nostra philosophia: the Christian system of ideas and beliefs.180 The distinction between pagan and Christian philosophy did not imply rejection of the first, however, because in Augustine's educational program the whole of pagan knowledge (Platonist philosophy and, especially, the seven liberal arts) were seen as useful tools to the understanding of the Bible and the divine creation. In the Middle Ages the double meaning of the term remained intact. Philosophia could be used both for the ancient set of ideas, body $&'•
178 For useful introductions with ample bibliography on this extensive subject see, for example, S.F. B R O W N , Theology and Philosophy (1996); D . LUSCOMBE, Philosophy and 'f* Philosophers in the Schools of the Twelfth Century, CP/ICIMA V (1992), pp. 73-85; various it , articles in the Dictionary of the Middle Ages: D . J . M . BRADLEY, 'Philosophy and theology, •*?"' Western European: to mid twelfth century', (Dictionary of the Middle Ages 9, pp. 582,ft S9°)J W . H . PRINCIPE, 'Philosophy and theology, Western European: twelfth century to i /j Aquinas', (Dictionary of the Middle Ages 9, pp. 590-606), E.A. SYNAN, 'Philosophy and i 1 theology, Western European: terminology', Dictionary of the Middle Ages 9, pp. 616-617); and J.P. B E C K M A N N , 'Philosophie. A. Westen', Lexikon des Mittelalters 6, cols. 2086-2092. Note that the terminology of philosophy and theology are closely connected to each other. Some argued that, since philosophia is 'the love of Wisdom', and since God is Wisdom in the Christian world view, philosophy and theology are one and the same discipline. 179 P- COURCELLE, La Consolation de Philosophie dans la tradition litteraire (1967). 180 Otfier expressions Augustine uses for pagan philosophy are huius mundi philosophia, academia philosophia; for Christian philosophy he also uses, for example, verissima philosophia. Cf. S.F. B R O W N , Theology and Philosophy (1996), p. 271. O n Augustine see also D.J.M. BRADLEY, 'Philosophy and Theology, Western European: to Mid Twelfth Century', Dictionary of 'the Middle Ages 9, pp. 583-584.
396
PHILOSOPHIA, PHILOSOPHUS, PHILOSOPHARI
of knowledge or sciences, and for the Christian truths, which included a large part of the ancient heritage. In the twelfth and thirteenth centuries, however, when a systematic doctrine of Christianity had been devised and was studied as a whole in the schools of the Church, the study of theological truths and pagan philosophy drifted apart.181 In some contexts philosophia was used in a pejorative way, implying a certain amount of 'falseness' in contrast with the one and only true philosophy of Christianity. The Augustinian tradition, however, of naming the whole of Christian doctrine by expressions including the word philosophia also persevered. In the thirteenth-century context of schools and universities the term philosophia retreated somewhat into the background. Philosophia was used as a co-ordinating term for disciplines that were taught in the schools and universities. Materials from the philosophies of the Stoics and Platonists had been assimilated into the commentaries, questions and disputations concerning theological texts. Aristotle's logical and non logical works (such as the Physica, De anima, Metaphysica, and Ethicd) were part of the official curriculum of the arts faculties. Philosophy thus remained an essential part of the educational program, but hid, so to speak, under a variety of terms: logica, -^dialectica, -^physica, metaphysica, —^ethica, etc.
The different systems of dividing philosophia into categories of philosophical knowledge reflect this trend.182 In the Stoic/Platonic tradition philosophia is often divided into three categories: logic (rational philosophy), physics (natural philosophy) and ethics (moral philosophy). In the Aristotelian tradition, which became particularly important in the twelfth and thirteenth centuries, philosophia usually had two branches: {philosophia) theorica (also: speculativa, inspectiva) and {philosophia) prac-
tica (also: aaualis).m Speculative philosophy was in turn often divided
181 W. DUNPHY, 'Philosophy and Theology, Western European: Thirteenth-Century Crisis', Dictionary of the Middle Ages 9, pp. 606-608. 182 Note that classifications or divisions of the sciences formed a whole literary genre, which particularly flourished in the thirteenth century. Cf. (among others) J . A . W E I S H E I P L , The Nature, Scope, and Classification of the Sciences (1978); O . W E I J E R S , L'appellation des disciplines dans Us classifications des sciences (1986-1987), pp. 39-64; C. L A F L E U R , Quatre introductions a la philosophic (1988). See also -^theoreticus, practicus. 183 On practical philosophy and its subdivisions see -^ethica, oeconomica, politica.
PHILOSOPHIA, PHILOSOPHUS, PHILOSOPHARI
,' ]t %< S0 .i$t 3'J* ft 'jjf
1
'1 .„',*' f- §i f$>
397
into natural philosophy {philosophia naturalis or just philosophia)184 and divine wisdom {philosophia theologica or just theologia), of which the latter was, of course, superior to the first.185 Philosophus {filo-, phylo-, fylo-, -sofus) was most often used in the Middle Ages for ancient thinkers or authors.186 In the commentary tradition on Aristotle, for example, philosophus was often used as such for 'the Philosopher', i.e. Aristotle. It seems that it was not until the twelfth century that it was used for contemporary thinkers, and Abelard was probably the first to have been awarded the title. W i l l i a m of Conches, for example, uses the term for himself. A term more often used for contemporary authors dealing with philosophical or theological questions was philosophans or philosophantes, derived from the verb philosophari, 'to philosophize'. Although philosophans was also occasionally used for nonChristian philosophers, in many contexts it has the specific connotation of Christian (contemporary) author, who applies the knowledge inherited from the ancient world in order to solve questions of a Christian nature.187 In the ancient world philosophia (q>iX,ooo
184 See, for example, the articles of A . M A I E R U , Figure di docenti nelle scuole domenicdne, CIVICIMAIX (1999), p. 52; and M . M . MULCHAHEY, Dominican Educational Vocabulary, CIVICIMA IX (1999), p. 98, where philosophia is used in the sense of'natural philosophy' within the context of Dominican education. 185 See S.F. B R O W N , Theology and philosophy (1996), p. 273: 'In relation, however, to theologia, the scientific study of the Scriptures, philosophy generally played the role of ancilla or handmaid.' On ancilla, cf. ibid. pp. 273-274. 186 Cf. D . L U S C O M B E , Philosophy and Philosophers in the Schools of the Twelfth Century, CIVICIMA V (1992), pp. 83-84. 187 See on this especially G . S C H R I M P F , 'Philosophy— philosophantes'(19&2). The earlier scholarship on the subject is summarized in this article. See also D . I . U S C O M B E , Philosophy and Philosophers in the Schools of the Twelfth Century, CIVICIMA V (1992), pp. 84-85. 188 Cf. TLL; OLD.
398
PHILOSOPHIA, PHILOSOPHUS, PH1LOSOPHARI
edge, as divine wisdom (in the context of both Judaism and Christianity) or —on the contrary— earthly or human knowledge; sometimes the term was used for individual sciences or arts, sometimes for the seven liberal arts as a whole.189 Within Christianity, furthermore, philosophia was not only used for die Christian faith, but also for the monastic way of life, in which contemplation played such an important role.190 In the Middle Ages all diese layers of meaning survived, and additionally several expressions were used to distinguish between them. The pagan philosophical tradition was called plainly philosophia, but also philosophia gentium or mundana, to contrast it with the 'true' philosophy of Christianity, vera philosophia, nostra philosophia, etc. The study of the supernatural, metaphysica, was also called philosophia prima (cf. -^divina scientia). Furthermore, not only the ancient philosophical heritage, but sometimes also the literary heritage was called philosophia.191 The substantive philosophus (cpi^ocotpoc, reflects all the different meanings of philosophia. It was used in a very general way, for a 'philosopher' or even for 'a wise or learned man' in general.192 But analogously with philosophia's meaning of'monastic life', it was also used for a monk;193 and analogously with philosophia's meaning of'ancient literature' it was sometimes used for the great poets of the past (Virgil, Ovid, Horace). It was used for individual philosophers — in the latter part of the Middle Ages mostly for 'the Philosopher', Aristotle.194 Furthermore the expressions philosophus naturalis or realis, philosophus primus or philosophus rationalis were used to distinguish between natural philosophers, metaphysicians and logicians respectively.195 Finally, the term was used for school master or headmaster in some ecclesiastical schools.196
189 T L L (IIA).
190 TLL (IIB). 191 Cf. D u C ; N I E R M . ; BLAISE, Lex. ; Lex.Lat.Ned. MediiAevi. 192 Cf. I ' L L ; O L D ; D u C . (1); B L A I S E , Lex. (2); Lex.Lat.Ned. MediiAevi (a). 193 Cf. T L L (IB3); N I E R M . (2). 194
Cf.
BLAISE, Lex.
(1)
195 Lex.Lat.Ned. MediiAevi (c). 196
DuC. (2); N I E R M .
( I ) ; B L A I S E , Lex.
(3).
PHILOSOPHIA, PHILOSOPHUS, PHILOSOPHARI
399
The meanings of the ancient verb philosophari were also broadened in the Middle Ages.197 It was used in its ancient meaning, 'to philosophize', 'to study or apply oneself to philosophy', or 'to teach philosophy',198 but from early Christian times onwards it was also applied to leading a monastic or religious life.'99 Furthermore, as was shown above, the participle philosophans acquired the specific technical meaning of Christian philosopher or theologian, who uses ancient knowledge to solve theological questions.
197 Note that the form philosophare also appears in the Middle Ages; Lex.Lat.Ned. Medii Aevi. 198 Cf. TLL; O L D . 199 TLL; DuC. (under philosopkia i); N I E R M . ; Lex.Lat.Ned. Medii Aevi (4).
400
physica, physicus, medicina, medicus In the medieval world physica, as opposed to metaphysica (cf. -^divina scientia), concerned the visible world, the normal course of nature.200 In the classifications of the sciences inherited from the Aristotelian tradition, physica (also scientia or philosophia natumlis) was listed among the theoretical or speculative sciences, together with theology (or metaphysics) and mathematics. In classifications following the Stoic tradition physica was one of the three branches of philosophy,201 and comprised in itself the four arts of the —^quadrivium (mathematics, geometry, music and astronomy) or indeed all theoretical or speculative sciences. In this context physica is taken as equivalent to theorica or speculativa (cf. —> theoreticus, practicus) .202
Medicina,203 the art of medicine, was often listed as one of the branches of physica; it was, after all, the physical science that concerned the
200 There is a large bibliography on the subject. For introductions with bibliography see E . D . SYLLA, Physics (1996); I D . , 'Physics', Dictionary of the Middle Ages 9, pp. 620628; S. D O N A T I & A . SPEER, 'Physik und Naturphilosophie', Lexikon des Mittelalters 6, cols. 2111-2117. See also the articles on physica in the collection edited by I . C R A E M E R R U E G E N B E R G and A . S P E E R : Scientia und ars im Hoch- und Spdtmittelalter 1 (1994), pp. 369-445. Specifically on the terminology of the discipline and on its place in medieval classifications of sciences, see J.A. W E I S H E I P L , The Nature, Scope, and Classification of the Sciences (1978); O . W E I J E R S , L'appellation des disciplines dans les classifications des sciences (1986-1987), pp. 52-53. 201 The other two branches are ethics and logic. Cf. J.A. W E I S H E I P L , The Nature, Scope, and Classification of the Sciences (1978), Chart 4 (p. 473). 202 O . W E I J E R S {L'appellation des disciplines dans les classifications des sciences (1986-1987), p. 52) gives an example of this use taken from Hugh of St. Victor's Didascalicon (II,i6, p. 35):'physica aliquando large accipitur aequipollens theoricae'. 203 The bibliography on this subject is equally large. For good introductions and bibliographical references see P.M. J O N E S , Medicine (1996); M . M C V A U G H , 'Medicine, History of, and L . D E M A I T R E , 'Medicine, Schools o f , both in Dictionary of the Middle Ages 8, pp. 247-254 and 254-261; H . S C H I P P E R G E S , 'Medizin', Lexikon des Mittelalters 6, cols. 452459. Specifically on the vocabulary of the discipline see D . JACQUART, L'enseignement de la medecine, CLVICLMA I I I (1990); D . JACQUART, 'Theorica' et practicd dans I'enseignement de la medecine a Salerne, CTVTCIMA V (1992). On its place in different classifications of the sciences see J.A. W E I S H E I P L , The Nature, Scope, and Classification of the Sciences (1978), esp. the various charts; and O . W E I J E R S , L'appellation des disciplines dans les classifications des sciences (1986-1987), pp. 51-52.
PHYSICA, PHYSICUS, MEDICINA, MEDICUS
401
human body (occasionally also called physica terrestris).204 Moreover, the science of medicine explicidy included a theoretical branch in addition to a practical one: it studied the philosophy of medicine, the (Aristotelian) principles of physiology and pathology as opposed to the specifics of diagnosis, prognosis and treatment. This division between theorica and practica within the discipline of medicine became particularly strong from the late eleventh century, when new Greek and Arabic materials were translated into Latin and became known in the West. Thus the term physicus became, in some contexts, the equivalent of medicus — it could have the meaning of 'physicist' as well as 'physician', of 'natural philosopher' as well as 'medical doctor'.205 In a third, intrinsically medieval classification of the sciences, introduced by Hugh of St. Victor and followed by many, physica and medicina were categorized in different branches. Here physica was a subcategory of —*philosophia or scientia theorica/speculativa, while medicina was one of the —cartes mechanicae, and ranked among the arts (or crafts) of fabric-making, hunting, commerce, etc.206 In this context the term chirurgia (cirurgia) sometimes replaced medicina.207 In the medical schools, however, which first became firmly established in Salerno in the second half of the eleventh century, natural philosophy formed an important part of the curriculum; techniques of Aristotelian logic and natural philosophy were applied to the Greek, Arabic and Byzantine works, and methods of -^questio and -^disputatio were applied to these texts.208 Thus medicina, and in particular the theoretical
204 Cf. O . W E I J E R S , L'appellation des disciplines dans les classifications des sciences (19861987), p. 52. 205 Note the expressions mentioned in D . LUSCOMBE'S article: theorici in physica for physicists, and practici in physica for physicians: Philosophy and Philosophers in the Schools of the Twelfth Century, CIWCIMA V (1992), pp. 76-77. 206 Cf. ]A. W E I S H E I P L , The Nature, Scope, and Classification of the Sciences (1978), Chart 6 (p. 480). O n medicine as a mechanical art, see also E . W H I T N E Y , Paradise Restored (1990), pp. 83,103,107, no, 115,119. 207 E . W H I T N E Y , Paradise Restored (1990), p. 103; O . W E I J E R S , L'appellation des disciplines dans les classifications des sciences (1986-1987), p. 52. 208 See the articles of D . JACQUART mentioned above: L'enseignement de la medicine, CTVICIMA I I I (1990) and 'Theorica' et 'practica' dans I'enseignement de la medecine a Salerne, CTVTCIMA V (1992).
402
PHYSTCA, PHYSICUS, MED1CINA, MEDICUS
side of medicina, was a speculative science, and medical students were educated in physics as well as for the medical profession. The organization of the educational programme and the vocabulary used reflect this. In Padua, for example, separate chairs existed for medicina theorica and medicina practka. The discipline taught at the Faculty of Medicine in the universities was called scientia or facultas medicine, but also phisice facutas.209 To practise the profession of medical doctor was known as practicare.210 In the ancient tradition physics and medicine were similarly not very clearly distinguished. Physica, the feminine singular or neuter plural noun from the adjective physicus (Greek cptxnKoq), was used for natural philosophy or science, the study of nature,211 but medicine formed a nat-. ural part of the discipline.212 Already in Antiquity we find physicus used in the sense of 'physician alongside the more general meaning of 'physicist'.213 In the Middle Ages the meaning of'medicine' and 'physician for physica and physicus become even stronger.214 Already in Antiquity medicina was used for the art or practice of healing,215 the discipline of medicine. It was also used metonymically for concrete things pertaining to this discipline: 'the medical profession'; 'the administration of drugs' or 'a particular remedy or treatment', and even 'a physician's house, surgery'.216 In medieval Latin this variety of meanings remained in use.217 Medicus was used in ancient and in medieval times
209 See A . M A I E R U , La terminologie de I'universite de Bologne de me'decine et des arts, CF/ICIMAW (1992), pp. 143-144. 210 D. JACQUART, L'enseignement de la medicine, CIWCIMA III (1990), p. 108. 211 TLL; OLD. 212 Note that physica was also often used in medieval Latin to refer to the famous work of Aristotle by that title; see E . D . S Y L L A , Physics (1996); Lex.Lat.Ned. Medii Aevi (IIB). 213 T L L (IIAib and IIAia). 214 D u C ; B L A I S E , Lex. (1) ; Lex.Lat.Ned. Medii Aevi physicus (IIA2). 215 Note that the healing could also be of a spiritual kind: T L L ; O L D (6); NG and DML. 216 Cf. OLD. 217 Cf. NG; DML.
PHYSICA, PHYSICUS, MEDICINA, MEDICUS
403
for a doctor, physician or healer in general. In the Middle Ages it had the additional meaning of 'academically trained physician', and was sometimes used as a title or surname.218 Medieval creations based on medicina are the verbs medicinare (-an), 'to treat with medicine, cure, heal';219 or medicare, 'to treat' or 'administer medicine'.220
218 D M L (3). 219 D M L . 220 NG.
404
rhetorica, rhetor The ars rhetorica,221 the art of skilled use of language that prepares a speaker or writer for public discourse, was deemed very important in the medieval curriculum.222 As one of the arts of the ->trivium, the three language-related liberal arts, it was taught in monastic or cathedral schools, in urban schools, in the -^studia (Cat. I) of the religious orders and often also at the arts faculties of the universities. The rhetorical discipline as taught in the Middle Ages was traditionally based on ancient works,223 i.e. those of Cicero {De inventione and also his Topicd), and the anonymous Rhetorica ad Herennium.21* The technical vocabulary used within the discipline was that transmitted by the Romans. In addition to the treatment of the ancient rhetorical texts new genres of treatises on separate traditional and new branches of the ancient ars rhetorica were developed in the late eleventh and twelfth centuries, which dealt with what could be called 'applied' arts of rhetoric: the —> ars dictaminis or dictandi (the art of applying rhetoric to letter-writing); the ars poetriae or ars versificandi (versificatoria) et prosandi (the art of
221 Other medieval expressions for the same art are ars oratorio., ars arengandi, (artificiosa) eloquentia. Sometimes dictamen or ars dictaminis is used in the broad sense of'rhetoric in general, the art of general persuasion' (cf. —>ars dictaminis). 222 There is a large bibliography on the subject. A.fairly recent and very good introduction to the genre of rhetorical treatises, including a thorough overview of earlier scholarship and a large bibliography, is found in J . O . W A R D , Ciceronian rhetoric (1995). See, furthermore, J . J . M U R P H Y , Rhetoric (1996), and, especially on the vocabulary of the discipline, J . O . W A R D , Rhetoric and the Art of dictamen, CWICIMA H I (1990). See also the introductions and bibliographies of P. K L O P S C H , 'Rhetorik', Lexikon des Mittelalters 7, cols. 786-789; and J . J . M U R P H Y , 'Rhetoric: Western European', Dictionary of the Middle Ages 10, pp. 351-364223 From the end of the thirteenth century the study of rhetoric in the medieval university was primarily based on Aristotle's Rhetorica. On the reception history of Aristotle's Rhetorica cf. G . D A H A N , I . R O S I E R - C A T A C H , La Rhetoriqued'Aristote (1998). 224 Note that Cicero's De inventione was also known under the name rhetorica vetus or prima, and the Rhetorica adHerennium under the name rhetorica nova or (less frequently) secunda. Throughout the Middle Ages the Rhetorica ad Herennium was attributed to Cicero. Only at the very end of the fifteenth century was this attribution seen as doubtful. Cf. G.C. A L E S S I O , 'Rhetorica ad Herennium', Lexikon des Mittelalters 7, cols. 785-786.
RHETORICA, RHETOR
405
applying rhetoric to the composition of verse or prose); and the arspraedicandi (sermocinalis, sermocinandi, componendi sermones, etc.) (the art
of the composition and delivery of religious and/or moral sermons).225 From the twelfth century to an increasing extent these branches received attention in separate treatises, while the ancient and late-antique texts were treated in commentaries and general introductions to the principles of the classical art of rhetoric as laid down by Cicero, Quintilian and the late-antique rhetors. The semantic background of the terms rhetorica and rhetor is rather static. The ancient ars rhetorica, transmitted from the Greeks (p-nTOpiKr] T&xvri) through the Romans into the Middle Ages, remained basically the same in Antiquity and the Middle Ages: 'the art of public speaking (and writing)'. A rhetor (Gk. pf|TO>p) was traditionally 'a professional teacher of rhetoric', or 'a person trained in the discipline'.226 In the Middle Ages these terms were used in a similar manner.227 Medieval alternatives for professional rhetoricians or teachers of rhetoric were the substantively used adjective rhetoricus,22* or expressions such as magister or doctor rhetorice.229 The term rhetorica, further, both as the substantively used neuter plural of the adjective rhetoricus and as a feminine singular substantive, was in medieval Latin also used metonymically in the sense of 'treatise on rhetoric'.230
225 On each of these genres in medieval literature separate volumes have appeared in the series Typologie des Sources: M . CAMARGO, Ars dictaminis, ars dictandi (1991); D . K E L L Y , The Arts of Poetry and Prose (1991); B . H . JAYE, Artes praedicandi (1992). 226 Cf.
FORC; OLD.
227 Cf. Lex.Lat.Ned. MediiAevi. 228 Cf. Lex.Lat.Ned. MediiAevi (Hi); C. VULLIEZ, Le vocabulaire des ecoles urbaines des Xir etXIIF siecles, CIWCLMA V (1992), p. ^. 229 Cf. A . M A I E R U , La terminologie de Vuniversite de Bologne de medecine et des arts, CLVLCIMA V (1992), p. 148. 230 Cf. Lex.Lat.Ned. MediiAevi.
406
theoreticus (theoricus), practicus In medieval classifications of the sciences the terms {scientia or philosophid) theoretica and practica distinguish categories of sciences rather than individual sciences.231 They divide the whole of human knowledge, often called -^philosophia, into theoretical sciences, which involve the human mind and intellect, and practical sciences, which involve action, and which concern human life; into pure and applied sciences, one could say. Thus, in the classifications inherited from the ancient world, politics, economics and morals were categorized under practica, metaphysics (theology), the quadrivial arts, and physics under theoretica.232 Within individual disciplines, however, theoretical and practical areas were also recognized and categorized as such. In medicine the division between theoretica and practica was particularly strong,233 but in the context of the art of rhetoric, for example, the term practica was used for practical works such as collections of models; the opposing set of terms speculativa and practica were also used in the context of the ars -^musica; and the expression practica geometriae was used for applied geometry.234
231 For the use of these terms in ancient and medieval classifications of the sciences see J.A. W E I S H E I P L , The Nature, Scope, and Classification of the Sciences (1987); O . W E I J E R S , L'appeUation des disciplines dans les classifications des sciences (1986-1987), pp. 44-45 ; O. W E I J E R S , 'Les classifications du savoir', in: Le maniement du savoir (1996), pp. 187-201; D . L U S C O M B E , Philosophy and Philosophers in the Schools of the Twelfth Century, CIVICIMA V (1992), pp. 75-80. 232 In the Aristotelian twofold system the theoretical category comprised metaphysica, mathematica (which included all numerical arts of the quadrivium), an&physica. In some divisions a third category of sciences was added: the scientieproductive or productive sciences, which concerned, among others, the language-related arts of the trivium (grammar, rhetoric, dialectic). 233 Cf. -^physica, and the articles by D . JACQUART, L'enseignement de la medecine, CP/ICIMA I I I (1990); E A D . , "Iheoricd et 'practica' dans I'enseignement de la medecine, CIVICIMAV (1992). 234 J . O . "WARD, Rhetoric and the Art of dictamen, CIVICIMA I I I (1990), pp. 42, 45; W. FROBENIUS, Methoden und Hilfimittel mittelalterlicher Musiktheorie, CIVICIMA I I I (1990), p. 133; J.D. N O R T H , Aspects of the Language of Medieval Mathematics, CIVICIMA V I I I (1995), p. 139.
THERORETICUS ( T H F . O R I C U S ) , PRACTICUS
;f V \" a ^, ]{ ^
y
407
In the ancient classifications that were received in the Middle Ages the term speculativa was used instead of the term theoretica, which was only introduced in late Antiquity. In late-antique and medieval classifications one also finds the terms inspectiva or considerativa. In late-antique texts the form theorica is occasionally found next to the ancient form theoretica, and it becomes more frequent than the original in the twelfth and thirteenth century. For practica, also a post-classical term, several alternatives were used: activa or actualis were already used by the late-antique authors Boethius, Cassiodore and Isidore, and twelfth- and thirteenthcentury authors also use the term operativa. Both theoreticus and practicus are post-classical, and both are transliterations from the Greek (GerapriTaKoc, and npaKtiKoq). When they were introduced into the Latin vocabulary they were already specifically used in the context of classifications of the sciences.235 Boethius, for example, whose influence on medieval philosophical thinking and its vocabulary can hardly be overstated, used them in this way. Theoreticus or theoricus had the meaning of'speculative', 'contemplative',236 practicus of'practical', 'active', or, specifically concerning sciences, 'applied'.237
I
235 E.g., T L L practicus (ia). 236 Cf. F O R C ; I.Kwis & SHORT; D U C . ; N I E R M . ; B L A I S E , Lex. Note that, from early
Christian times on, theoreticus and theoricus also had the meaning of 'religiously contemplative', 'meditative': B I J U S E , Diet.; DuC. 237 Cf. T L L ; L E W I S & SHORT; N I E R M . ; B L A I S E (2). Note also a different use of practicus
mentioned in DuC. and BLAISE ( I ) : 'experienced', 'competent'.
Index I Reference to the relevant articles per category Category I: The Vocabulary of Schools and Universities ad studium, —»studium" administrator, —^procurator, —»bursa" album, —»matriculan amanuensis, —>cancellarius" annales, —>matriculan apparitor, —>bedellus, —^conservator" arc(h)a a. communis archiclavus, archiclaverius, —»custosn archidiaconus, —»cancellarius,—» licentia archiscola, —»magistern, —» sc(h)olasticusn auditor, —>sc(h)olaris" aula, —>hospitium, —»provisor Australes, ->natio baccalarius (baca-, -cha-, -alia-, -cell-, etc.) b. biblicus b. formatus b. institutarius b. sententiarius banca, (-us), —»bancarius bancarius (-c(h)erius, -quarius, -querius) b. generalis b. maior bedallaria (-dellaria), -»bedellus bedellionatus, —^bedellus bedellus (bi-, pe-) b. communis" b. generalis b. maior b. minor b. specialis bejaunare, bejaunnizare, —»bejaunus"
bejaunium, —»bejaunus bejaunum, —>bejaunus" bejaunus (beanus) beneficiare, —>bursan beneficiatus, beneficiarius, —>bursa biblicus, —elector Boreales, —>natio bulla, —>arc(h)a bursa (byrsa) b. communis bursalis, —>bursa bursarius, —»bursa iunior, medius, senior b., —»bursa primus, secundus, tertius b., -> bursa cambitor, —»massarius campsor, ->massarius cancellaria, —»cancellarius cancellarius capiscol (-scola), —»cancellarius, —> magister", —>sc(h)olasticusn capsa, —>arc(h)a caput scolae, —»cancellarius, —>magister", —>sc(h)olasticus" cathalogus, ^•matricula'1 cathedra c. magistralis c. docentis, doctoris cathedratus, —^cathedra causidicus, —>doctorn cessare c. a lectionibus cessatio, —»cessare c. magistrorum, —»cessare cetus (coetus), —>congregatio c. magistrorum, —>congregatio
410
INDEX I
chardnacius, —»custosn chartophylax, —»custosn chartularius, —»custos" cista, —>-arc(h)a c. communis, —»arc(h)a Citramontani, —»bedellus, —»natio, —»-notarius, —^-procurator", ^•rector, —»statutum, -»universitas" claviger, —»custos" clavipotens, —^custos" clericus c. litteratus c. scolaris collecta collectas facere, collectare collegiatus, —»sc(h)olaris", —»socius collegium c. ardstarum (et medicomm) c. doctorum (utriusque iuris) c. magistrorum combejaunus, —>bejaunus commensales, -4communa" commissarius communa communarius, —»communa communia, ->conununa communio, —»natio", —»universitas communitas, —»natio" confratria, —»natio" congregatio c. artistarum c. generalis c. magna c. minor c. nigra c. plena c. regentium conservator c. librorum c. privilegiorum c. studii consiliaria, —>natio, —^procurator" consiliarius, —»massarius, —>natio, —> procurator, —>rector consortium (-cium), -^collegium, —>
congregatio11, —>nation, ->universitas contrarotulatio, —>rotulus" contrarotulator, —>rotulus" contrarotulatum, —»rotulus" controversia scholastica, —> sc(h)olasticus conventus, ^collegium", —>congretadon, ^-doctor", —>universitas convocatio, —>congregatio crastina, -^cessare11 custos c. armarii c. bibliothece c. chartarum c. cignorum" c. ciste" c. depositi, -^procurator" c. equorum c. grangiorum c. hospitii c. infantium c. librorum c. litterarum c. maneriorum c. puerorum c. thesauri c. thesauri chartarum" decanus defensor, —^conservator" d. ecclesiae, —^conservator" d. monasterii, —^conservator11 depositarius, —»bursa", —^procurator" dies legibilis, ^cessare" discipulus disputationes Sorbonicae, —»-hospitium" doctor d. (actu) legens/regens" d. artium" d. decretorum11 d. grammatice et rhetorice" d. in artibus" d. in sacra pagina
411 d. in utroque iure d. iuris canonici d. iuris civilis d. logicae" d. medicine" d. theologiae d. utriusque iuris doctorare, (doctorari), doctoratus, —> doctor doctus, -^-doctor" dominus d. legum d. meus domus, —»bursa, —^-collegium, —»congregatio11, —>hospitium d. beneficiatorum, —»bursa d. ecdesia, —»hospitium" d. (pauperum) scolarium, —»hospitium ductor puerorum, —>p(a)edagogus ebdomadarius (hebdo-), —»commissarius facultas f. artium (liberalium)n f. astrologiae" f. chirurgiae" f. geometriae" f. grammaticae" f. iuris canonici/civilis11 f. logicae" f. medicinae/medicorum" f. physicae" f. rhetoricae" f. theologiae11 fenerator, ->massarius" glomerellus, —>magister" gradus, —>licentia g. bachelarii, —»licentia g. dignitatum, —»licentia g. ecclesiasticus, —»licentia g. magistri, magisterii, grammaticus, ->p(a)edagogusn
grex, —»congregatio" gubernator, -Erector" hebdomadarius (ebdo-), —»commissarius h. lector (ad mensas), —>commissarius h. coquine, —»commissarius hospes, —>socius hospitium n. clericorum h. pauperum h. peregrinorum idiota, —>litteratus illitteratus, ^litteratus inceptio lectionum, —»cessaren incipere, ^cessare i. lectiones, —»cessare" institutor, —>p(a)edagogus" instructor, —»p(a)edagogus" irrotulare, —»rotulus" irrotulamentum, —>rotulus" iudex, —>doctor" iustitiarius (scholarum), —»conservator iuvenis, —»discipulus", ^studens" labes bejaunica, —»bejaunus laicus, —>clericus, —>litteratus l.i scolares, —>clericus lator rotuli, ^^rotulus, —>prior lector biblicus
1. extraordinaria" in iure civili11 in logica" . ordinaria" 1. principalis" 1. romanae curiae" 1. sacri palatii" 1. sententiarium 1. theologiae" 1. Tractatuum" legis (legum) doctor, —>doctor
412
INDEX I
legum professor, —^professor leucoma (rotuli), -»matriculan licentia I. determinandi 1. disputandi" 1. (ubique) docendi 1. exercendi", also —>notariusn 1. (extra) ordinaria, n 1. incipiendi 1. practicandi 1. specialis11 licentiabilis, —>licentian licentiare, —>licentia licentiatio, —»licentia" licentiatorius, —•licentia" licentiatura, —»licentian licentiatus, —»licentia, —^baccalarius licentiose, —»licentia" literaliter loqui, —»litteratus" littera, —>litteratus° l.as discere, —»clericus, litteratus" l.as dare, —»clericus l.is dare, —•litteratus11 litterate, —>litteratusn litteratior, —»litteratus litteratissimus, —>litteratus litteratus locus, —^collegium", —»congregatio" magister m. abachi" m. actu legens/regens m. artis litterarie" m. artium m. bursales" m. coquine" m. collegii (collegiatus)" m. de abacho" m. domus" m. exercitus" m. exhibitionis" m. glomerie" m. gram(m)atice, grammaticalis m. in artibus" m. (regentes) in grammatica
m. in logica" m. in primitivis" m. in theologia m. infantium11 m. lapidum" m. legens m. militum" m. monasterii" m. non legens/regens m. novitiorum11 m. operis" m. principalis", also —>prior" m. prior, —>prior m. puerorum" m. regens m. sacre pagine m. scolae, also —»sc(h)olaris, —> sc(h)olasticus m. scolaris puerorum" m. scolarum, also —>sc(h)olaris, —»sc(h)olasticus m. studentium" pauperes m.i" magisterium magistralis, magistralia, —>magisterium auctoritas m. cathedra m. definitio m. dictum m. dignitas m. sententia m. magistrare, —»magisterium magne scole, —»sc(h)ola massa, ->bedellus massarius matricula matricularium librarie, —»matricula" ministerium, —>magisterium" monasterium, —•collegium" mutuator, —•massarius" natio n. Australium n. Borealium
INDEX I
n. Citramontani n. Ultramontani notarius n. communis" n. publicus11 nove scole, —»sc(h)ola nuntius, —>bedellus, —»massarius n. communis, —»bedellus n. maior, —»bedellusn, —»massarius n. minor, -^bedellus" n. ordinarius, —>bedellus° n. scholarium, —»bedellus n. volans, —>bedellusn ordinarium, —»cessaren magnum o., —»cessare" parvum o., —>cessaren p(a)edagogium, —»p(a)edagogus, —> sc(h)ofan p(a)edagogus parve scnole, —»sc(h)ola pauper, —»hospitium, —»magistern, —> matricula, —»sc(h)olaris, —»socius domus p.um scolarium, —»hospitium" hospitia p.um, —»hospitium p.es, ^sc(h)olaris n p.es scolares, —»sc(h)olaris p.i, —>matricula p.i magistri, —>magister", —>socius scolares p.es, —>sc(h)olaris studentes p.es, —»sc(h)olarisn pedellus, —»bedellus peritus, —>doctor" pr(a)eceptor, -»p(a)edagogus p. monasterii, ^p(a)edagogus n p. palatii, ^p(a)edagogusn p. provinciae, —»p(a)edagogusn pr(a)epositus, ^^collegium p. Durse, —>bursa" praesidens, ->rectorn principalis, ^hospitium", -»provisor p. civitatis, —>provisor
413
prior magister p. p. cantorum p. ecclesiae" p. provincialis p. scolarum procurator p. minor, also —»rotulusn p. maior p. parvus professor p. grammaticae" p. legum (legum p.) p. medicinae/medicinalis scientiae" p. naturalis et phisicalis scientiae" p. regens, —>discipulusn, Erector, ->sc(h)olarisn sacrae theologiae p. provectus, —^doctor" provisor puer, —>discipulus", —^p(a)edagogus, —»sc(h)olarisn, —>studens° magister p.orum, —>magister" p.o litteras dare, —>clericus quaestor, —>massarius" questionista reassumere, —»cessaren receptor, ^massarius rector r. citramontanorum r. ecclesiarum r. hospitiorum r. mundi r. palatii r. provinciae r. scolarum r. ultramontanorum rectoratus, —Erector rectorius (-ria), —Erector reformator, ^conservator" r. baccalariorum, —>conservatorn r. studii, —^conservator"
414
INDEX I
regimen scolarum, —^cathedra" repetitor, elector" respondere de questione, de sophismatibus, —»questionistan resumere, —»cessare resumptio, —»cessaren rolla, —>rotulus" rollus, —Hotulus" rotella, —»rotulus" rotulus, rotula lator r.i r.i nominandorum rudis, —•doctor" salariare, -»collecta salariatus, —»collecta (doctores) s.i, —^collecta sedes s.e, —»collecta salarium, —»collecta s. annuum" salarizare, —>collecta sc(h)ola s. bestiarum" s. canonicae s. cantorum, also —»sc(h)olasticus s. claustralis s. lectorum s. monastica s. palatina, also —»sc(h)olaris s. scribendi, also —»sc(h)olaris s.ae publicae s.as regere, exercere" sc(h)olaris (adj.) clericus s. disciplina s. magister s., also —Unagister" sc(h)olaris (sub.) magister scolarium pauper s. s. collegiatus, ->bejaunus, —»socius scolarius, —»sc(h)olarisn scholaster, —»magister" scolasticus controversia s.a
scrinium, —»arc(h)a secundus lector, —elector, —»baccalarius senior, —>custos sententiarius, —elector serviens, —>bedellus, —^conservator" simplex, —»litteratus societas, ^collegium, —»natio, -^ universitas socius senior socius sophista, —^questionista s. generalis, ^-questionista s. in parviso, —>questionistan statutarius, ^statutum statutum compositor s.orum s.a civitatis s.a conciliorum/concilii s.a decretalia s.a synodi stipendium, —>collecta studens pauperes s.es, —>sc(h)olarisn studere, —>studens s. sacrae paginae s. in scientiis studium
ads." s.a arabica s.a artium, also —elector" s.a ebraica s.a exteriora" s.a generale theologiae s.a generalia ex consuetudine" s.a generalia ex privilegio" s.a generalia provinciae, —elector" s.a generalia respectu regni" s.a generalia theologiae" s.a in logicalibus s.a in naturarum s.a liberalium artium11 s.a linguarum s.a logicalia s.a naturalium, naturarum
i
INDEX I
s.a particularia s.a particulare theologiae s.a philosophiae s.a provincialia s.a sollemnia s. commune" s. generale s. generale provinciae" s. generale theologiae" s. regere", also —»sc(h)ola s. romanae curae" s. sacrae scripturae" s. sapientae" s. universale" subbedellus, —>bedellus subconservator, —•conservator11 subcustos, —»custos sublector, —elector, —»baccalarius subprocurator, —^procurator suspendere, —»cessare suspendium, —»cessare suspensio, —»cessare syndicus, —»notarius s. rectorum, —»notarius
415
tabellio, —»cancellarius" taxare, —Haxatio taxatio t. peciarum c. quatern(i)orum taxator, —Haxatio tractator (studii), —^conservator Ultramontani, -»bedellus, —»natio, —»notarius, —^procurator, —Erector, —»statutum, —>universitasn universitas u. doctorum u. magistrorum et scolarium u. scolarium (etc.) vacatio, —»cessaren vicecancellarius, —^cancellarius" vicecustos, —>custos vicenarius, ->decanus yconomus, —^procurator, —»bursa°
Category I I : The Vocabulary of the Book and Book Production abecedaria, —»chirographum abradere, —>radere adbreviatio librorum, —>inventarium album, —^papyrus almarium, ^armarium" amanuensis, —>scriba ambo, —»armariumn analogium, —>armarium" annotatio librorum, —»inventarium antiquarius, —>scriba archiclaverius, —>archivum, —>librarius" archiclavus, —^archivum, -^librarius"
archiscrinius, —>archivum", —^librarius" archiverius, —>archivum archivum armamentarius, —>librarius" armararius, ^armarium, —>librariusn armaria, ^^armarium" armarista, —>librarius", —>armarium armarium a. commune" a. ecclesie" armarius, —»armarium, —>bibliotheca, —^librarius armentarius, —»librariusn
416 ars scribendi, -»scriberen ars scriptoriae, —»scriberen anavus, —^calamus atramentariolum, —»atramentum atramentarium, —»atramentum atramentarius, —>atramentumn atramentum a. librarium a. scriptorium authenticum, —^exemplar bambicynus, —»papyrus bambyx (bombyx, pambix, banbix, etc.), —^papyrus bancus, —»armariumn bibliotheca bibliothecarius, —»bibliotheca, —> librarius binio, —»quaternio" bombycina, —»papyrus bombyx (bambyx, bombix, bomix, bombax, bombis, pombix, etc.), —»papyrus breve de libris, —»inventarium breviarium, —>inventarium breviculus, —Mnventarium brevis, —»c(h)arta b. librorum, —Mnventarium buxeus, —>tabula cerata" tabellae b.ae, —Habula cerata" buxum, —»tabula cerata buxa cerata, —Habula cerata" calamare, —^calamus, —»scribere calamaris, —»calamus calamarium, —»calamus, —»scribere" calamus argenteus c.n cm acuere" cm temperare" cancellarius, —»scriba canipulus, ->calamusn carta, ^c(h)arta, —>papyrus cartularii, ^papyrus" catalogus (cath-, kath-), ^inventa-
INDEX I
rium c. hereticorum, —Hnventarium" c. romanorum pontificum, —> inventarium" caternio, —>quaternio caternus (-num), —»quaternio cos scribere, ^quaternio" caudex, —>codex caudices, —>tabula cerata cautio, —»chirographum cera(e), ^tabula cerata ceraculum, —^tabula cerata cerata, —Mabula cerata cerea, —>tabula cerata c(h)araxare, ^scribere charaxator, —>scriberen charaxatura, —>scriberen c(h)arta, also ^papyrus cm facere, —>c(h)arta" c. bambukina, —>papyrus c. bombicyna (bamba-), ^papyrus c. cuttanea (cuttunea), —>papyrus c. damascena, —>papyrus c. de papyro, —>papyrus ce dentatae, —^chirographum c.e divisae, —»chirographum c.e litterae, —>chirographum c. non nata, ^-papyrus c. papyri, —»papyrus c.e partitae, —>chirographum c.e pecudinae, —^papyrus c.e per alphabetum divisae/ partitae, —»chirographum c.e per cyrographum divisae/ partitae, -»chirographum c. virginea, —>papyrus c.e vitulinae, —^papyrus c(h)artaceus (-cius,-icius), —>c(h)arta,
ppy c(h)artarium, —»archivum, —>c(h)arta chartarius, —»archivum charteus, —>c(h)arta, —^papyrus c(h)articinus (-nius), —>c(h)arta, —> papyrus
1
417
INDEX I
c(h)artigraphus, —»c(h)arta chartinacius, ->archivum" chartophylacium, —•archivum", —>• c(h)arta chartophylax, —»archivum chartula, —»c(h)arta, —yvolumen11 chartularium, —»archivum, —»c(h)arta chartularius, —»archivum, —»papyrus", —>scriba chirographare, —»chirographum chirographizare (-isare), —»chirographum chirographum (chy-, ci-, cy-) cinnabaris, —»atramentum cinnabrium, —»atramentum cista exemplariorum, —^exemplar clericus, —»scriba codex codices Dominici" divini codices" latini codices" sacri codices" codicellus, —>codex, —»sc(h)eda codicillus, ^•codex c.i cerati, —»codex" codiculus, ^codex componere, —»scribere conservator librorum, —»librariusn copia, —>scribere" copiare, —»scribere copista, —>scribere" cornicularius, —>atramentum corniculus, —>-atramentum cornu (cum incausto), ->atramentum corpus, ^codex" coto, —^papyrus cotum, -^papyrus creta, —»radere cultellus, ->calamus custos, —»archivum c. armarii, —>librarius" c. bibliothece, —»librarius" c. chartarum, ->archivum, -> librarius11 c. librorum, —»librariusn
c. litterarum, —^archivum c. thesauri (chartarum), —>archivum, ^librarius" dare ad pennam, ^scribere decretum, —>c(h)arta descriptio librorum, —»inventarium dictare, —>pecia", —^scribere dictica, ^tabula cerata diploma, —»c(h)arta" dipticha (-tycha, -tica), —>tabula cerata discus, ^•armarium" duplices, —>tabula cerata effigiare, —>scribere, ^tabula cerata" encausterium, ->atramentum encaustum, ^•atramentum e. sacrum, —^atramentum11 epistola, —»c(h)arta eradere, —^radere esturmentum, —>c(h)arta exarare, —>scribere, tabula cerata" exemplar e.ia epistolarium cista e.iorum exemplare, —^exemplar", —>scribere exemplarius, —^exemplar exemplator, —>exemplar, ^stationarius11 exemplum, —^exemplar extramentum, —>c(n)arta ferrum, —»graphium folium, —^tabula cerata graphiare, —>scribere graphiolum, —»graphium" graphium g. argenteum" graphius, —>graphium (h)arundo, —»calamus implere ceras, —>scribere
418
INDEX I
imprimere, —»scribere incausterium, -»atramentum incaustum, —»atramentum cornu cum i.o, —»atramentum inchartare, —»c(h)artan index, —>inventarium indiculum (-ulus), —•inventarium instrumentum, —>c(h)arta inventarium (-orium)
nota, —>c(h)arta notarius, ^scriba notitia, —>c(h)arta n. librorum, —»inventarium novacula, —>radere numerus librorum, -^inventarium observator librorum, —>librariusn ordinatio librorum, —»inventarium ordo librorum, ^inventarium
kathalogus, —»inventarium libellus, —»codex", —»liber, —»sc(h)eda libellulus, —»liber liber 1. alfabeti 1. (extra)ordinarius 1. quasi armarium 1. vocabulorum l.i catenati liberculus, —»liber libraria, -^bibliotheca, —^librarius librarista, —»librariusn librarium, —>librarius librarius litterae, —»c(h)arta mandatum, —»c(h)arta manu scriptum, —>chirographum membrana (men-), —>c(n)arta, —> papyrus membramen, —»papyrus membranula (-utum), —>papyrus membranum, —^papyrus memoratorium, —»c(h)arta memoriale, ^c(h)arta miniare, —»atramentumn minium, ^•atramentum monimentum, —»c(h)arta monumentum, —>c(h)arta mucro, —»graphium multiplices, —^tabula cerata munimentum, —»c(h)arta nomina librorum, —^inventarium
pagina, —»c(h)arta paginula, —Habula cerata palimpsestus (-um), d papyraceus, ^papyrus papyreus (-rius) —>papyrus papyrus (papirus, papirius) par, —»codexn pars, —^codex11 pecia (petia) stationarius p.arum, also —>stationarius peciarius, —>pecia pellis, —>-papyrus p. edulina, ^•papyrus penna (pinna), —>calamus p.m acuere, —^calamus" p.m temperare, ^^calamus" pennaculum, —»calamus pennula, ^calamus pergamenarius (-minarius), —»papyrus pergamentarius, ^-papyrus pergamenum (parga-, berga-, -mena, -mina, etc.), —^papyrus p.a graeca, —^papyrus pergamineus, —>papyrusn pinna, —»calamus pluma, ^calamus plumalis, —»calamus p. aerea, ^calamus" plumbum, —^calamus pluteus, —>armarium" polyptycha, —>tabula cerata polyptychum, ^c(h)arta n
419
radere rasorium, —•radere rasura, —•radere regestum, —•inventarium registrum, —•inventarium repertorium, -^inventarium reportatorium, —•inventarium reportorium, —•inventarium repositor librorum, —•librarius" repositorium (librorum), —•armarium n repositorius librorum, —•librarius" rescribere, —•radere, —•scribere rescriptum, —•scribere" rotula, —•volumen" rubeus, —•atramentum
sc(h)edarius, —•sc(h)edan sc(h)edula (cedula, sc(h)idula), —> sc(h)eda scriba scribens, —•scriba scribere scriniarius, —•librarius'1, —•scriba scriptor, —•scriba, —•stationarius" s.es publici, —•scriba" scriptorium s. regis" scriptrix, —•scriba" scriptum, —•cOilarta sculpare, —•scribere sedile, —•armarium" senio, —•quaternio sepia, —•atramentum" sexternus, —•quaternio stallum, —•armarium" statio, ^stationarius s. generalis" s. publica11 s. universitatis11 stationarius s. librorum s. peciarum s. universitatis stilus (still-", sty-), —•calamus11, —• graphium s.m ducere, —•scribere s. argenteus, —•graphium11 s. ferreus, —•calamus" s. plumbeus, —•calamus stormentum, —•c(h)arta sumere, —•scribere" summa librorum, —•inventarium sumptum, —•scribere" syngrapha, —•chirographum"
sacrista, —•librarius" sacristanus, —•librarius11 scalpellum, ^-calamus, —•radere scalprum, -•radere scamnum, sc(h)eda (sc(h)ida)
tabella, —•tabula cerata t.ae buxeae, —•tabula cerata" tabellio, —•scriba tabellula, —•tabula cerata tabula, —•inventarium tabula cerata
pr(a)eceptum, -»c(h)arta privilegium, —>c(h)arta pronuntiare, —•pecia" pronuntiatio, —•pecia" protocollare, ^sc(h)eda" protocollarius, —•sc(h)eda" protocollator, —»sc(h)edan protocollum, --•sc(h)eda pugillaris, -»tabula cerata pulpitum, —•armarium11 pumex, —>radere pungere, —•scribere, tabula cerata" quaternio quaterniolus, —•quaternio quaterniunculus, —•quaternio quaternulus, —•quaternio quaternum, —•quaternio quatemus, —•quaternio quinio, —•quaternio quinternus, —•quaternio
420 bina t. duae t.ae t. cera illita" t. cerea t. de ebore t. eburneae t. ex ebore caxatio taxator, —Haxatio ternio, —»quaternio" ternus, —»quaternion testamentum, —»c(h)arta thesaurarius, —»librariusn thesaurus, —»archivum thomus, —»volumen tincta (tinta), ->atramentum tituli librorum, —»inventarium tomellus, —^volumen
tomulus, —Wolumen tomus (thomus), —Vvolumen transcopiare, ->scriberen transcribere, —»radere, —»scribere transcriptum, —>scribere" translatare, —>scribere translatum, —>scriberen transsumere, —»scribere" transsumptum, —>scriberen triplices, —Habula cerata vellum, —^papyrus'1 venditores librorum, —»stationarius vitulinium (-num), —^papyrus" volumen vomer, —»graphium
Category I I I : The Vocabulary of Teaching Methods, Instruments and Products of Intellectual Life abbreviare, —»compilare abbreviatio, —>compilare abbreviator originalium, —>tabulan abcdarium, —>alphabetum abecedarium, —>alphabetum abescetarium, —>alphabetum abezedarius, —^alphabetum abicidarium, —^alphabetum accessus, —>accessus ad auctorem, —> principium accessus ad auctorem actor, —»auctor admonitio, —>pr(a)edicare allegoria, —>involucrum, anagogia, —>postilla alphabetarium, —>alphabetum alphabetarius, —>alphabetum alphabetum (alfa-, -us) annotare, —>commentari annotatio, —»commentari annotator, ^commentari anthologia, —»compilare"
apparare, ->glossa" appericio, —^glossarium11 approbare, ^examinare" approbatus, ^examinare11 (h)arenga (arr-, -an-, -in-, -gua) (h)arengare, —>(h)arenga arguere, —»disputation argumentatio, —>disputatio° argumentum, —>brocarda, —>disputatio articulatus, —^capitulum" articulus, ^-capitulum a. fidei, ^capitulum assignatio punctorum, —>punctum auctor auctoritas, ^auctor, —^exemplum" audire, see also —>examinaren a. cursorie a. de artibus a. in artibus a. leges a. (extra)ordinarie
421 a. physicam auditio, —»audire, —»examinaren auditor, —>audire auditus, —»audire aula, -*principium n aulare, —»principiumn magister aulandus, —>principium" aulatio, —»principium" aulator, —»prindpiumn aulica, —»principium" aut(h)enticus, —»auctor" aut(h)or, —»auctor baccalarius biblicus, —»cursusn, —> pr(a)edicare baccalarius formatus, —>pr(a)edicare baccalarius sententiarius, —> pr(a)edicare, —>sententia" biblice, —»cursus legere Bibliam b., —»cursus biblicus, —>cursus" biretizare, —»incipere" biretizatio, —Mncipere" biretta, —>incipere" birettare, —Mncipere" birettatio, —Mncipere" birettum (birr-, -etum), —>inciperen breviarium, —>repertoriumn brocarda brocardica, -^brocarda argumenta brocardica canon, —>capitulumn capitulare, —»capitulum capitulatio, ^capitulum capitulum partes capituli" caput, -^capitulum" causa apparentiae/defectus, -»fallacian circumstantiae, —>accessus ad auctorem collatio collectanea, —>compilare collectio, ->compilare, ^repertorium
colligere, —»compilare, —>reperto rium, —>reportaren commendatio, —Mncipere pium commentari (-are) commentarius (-ium), —>commentari, ^•legere commentator, —>commentari commentum, —»commentari compendium, —>repertorium compilare compilatio, —>compilare compilator, —>compilare componere, ^-compilare, —>edere, —> reportare compositor, —>compilare compositio, —>etymologia, —>-derivatio, —>reportare concedere, —>obligatio concio, —>pr(a)edicare" conclusio, —»syllogismus concordantia concordantie c. verborum conferre, —»collatio consignificans, —>syncategoremata consignificantia, —>syncategoremata consignificare, —>syncategoremata consignificativus, —>syncategoremata contractabula, —>tabulan contraria, —>concordantian conventare, —»examinare conventandus, —>examinare (doctor) conventatus, —>examinare conventari, ^-examinare" conventatio, —>examinare conventus, ->examinare recipere/suscipere conventum, —> examinare" corollarie, —>syllogismus11 corollarium (chor-, corro-, co(r)re-, -ola-, -ela-), —>syllogismus corollarius, ^syllogismus" cursare, —>cursus
422
INDEX I
cursor, —»cursus cursor Bibliae" cursor Sententiarum, de Sentenciis cursorie, —»cursus legere c, —>cursus, —»dictaren legere Bilbiam c, —»cursus legere Sententias c, —>cursus cursorius, —»cursus lectio c.a, —>cursus cursus cm canere cm incipere cm terminare c. canonicus c divinus c. horarum c. psalmorum c. vigilarum lectio/legere ad c m " dare ad pennam, —»dictare, —>reportaren decerpere, —>compilare declaxnare, —»decfararen declarare declaratio, —»declarare, —^glossarium" d. legum, —»declarare" definire (diff-), -»declararen definitio (diff-), —»declararen, —>glossarium11 deflorare, —»compilaren defloratio, —»compilaren libri deflorationum, —»compilare deponere, —»pr(a)esentare deportare, —>reportare" depositio, —>pr(a)esentare d. magistrorum, —»pr(a)esentare, —>incipere depositor, —>pr(a)esentare depromere, -^edere derivare (dir-), —»derivation nomen derivatum, —»derivatio derivarius, —>derivatio" derivatio (dir-)
derivativus (dir-), —>derivatio nomen derivativum, ->derivatio derivator, —^derivatio" describere, —>declarare" descriptio, —»declarare", ^^glossarium" determinare examinatio ad determinandum licentia determinandi determinatio, —>determinare, —> qu(a)estio i. in aliis, —>determinare determinator, —>determinare dictamen, —>dictare dictare dictata, —>dictaren dictatio, —>dictare dictator, —>dictare dictio, —»glossarium dictionarius (-rium), —^glossarium, -^•repertorium dictum, —>sententian difEnitio, ^glossarium" directorium, —Habula" disputabilis, —>disputatio dies d., —>disputatio, narius", —»principium disputare, —>disputatio, —»ordinariusn disputatio d. de oblibatione, —>obligatio d. de questione d. de quodlibet/quolibet, also —> quodlibet d. de sophismatibus d. extraordinaria, —>ordinariusn d. in aula, also —»principium" d. in scholis, also —»sophisman d. magistrorum, also —»sophisman d. ordinaria, also —>sophisma" d. publica d. quodlibetica, also —»quodlibet d. quodlibetalis, —>quodlibet d. sollemnis(, in studio sollempni), also —»sophisman d. vesperia, —>principium
423 distinctio d. sophismatum, —»sophisma distinguere, -»distinctio dividere, —»distinctio divisio, —»distinctio divisio textus, —•distinctio11 divisio capitulorum, distinctio" docere, —»legere" dubitare, ->obligatio, —»qu(a)estio dubitatio, -»pr(a)esentaren, -» qu(a)estio dubium, —»legere, —»qu(a)estio edere e. in lucem e. in publicum editio, —»edere editiuncula, —»edere" editor, —»edere educere, —»edere" elementum, —»alphabetumn elucidatio, —»glossarium11 emittere, —>ederen enucleare, —»dedarare" enucleatio, —»declararen epilogus, ^^tabula" estivaliter, —»ordinarius" ethimologista, —>etymologian etymologia (ethy-, eti-, ethi-) examen, —»examinare e. determinantium, —>examinare e. in cameris, —>examinaren e. in communibus, —^examinare" e. in propriis, —>examinaren e. licentiandi, —>examinare e. privatum, —>examinare examinare examinatio, —>examinare e. clericorum, —>examinare e. determinandi, —»examinare e. ad determinandum, —>determinare11 e. determinantium, ^examinare e. licentiandi, ->examinare e. privata, —>examinare
e. publica, —>examinare examinator, ^examinare verus e., —>examinare excerpere, ^compilare excipere, —>reportaren exemplum exhortatio, ^-pr(a)edicaren explanare, —»declarare explanatio, —>declarare explicatio, —»etymologia exponere, —>commentari, —»declarare, ^•glossarium", ->sententia11 expositio, —>commentari, ^ d e clarare, —»etymologia, —>legere", q ( ) i e.(nes) vocabulorum, terminorum, dictionum, nominum, —> glossarium" expositive, —>declarare expositivus (-v), —>declarare, —»glossarium" expositor, —^commentari, —>declarare expositores sacri, sacre pagine, —» declarare" expositorium, —>glossariumn expromere, ^^edere extractiones, ^compilare extrahere, -^compilare extraordinarie, ^ordinarius extraordinarium, —»ordinarius extraordinarius, —>ordinarius libri e.i, —•ordinarius fallacia f. in dictione f. extra dictionem fen, ^capitulum 11 festa, —»legere figura, —»alphabetumn Fiorarium, —>-compilare Floretum, —>compilare florilegium, ->compilare flos, —>compilare Flores paradysi, —»compilare
424
INDEX I
Liber florum, —»compilare Manipulus florum, —»compilare forma, —»examinare, —»distinctio" libri de forma, —»examinare" forma tranctandi, —»distinction forma tractatus, —>distinctio" gemma, —»compilare" generalia, —»brocarda glossa (glosa) collectae glossae Glossa communis Glossa ordinaria glossans, —*glossa glossare, —>glossa glossarium (glosa-, -ius) glossator, —>glossa glossatura, —>glossa glossatus, —»glossa glossema, —»glossa, —>glossarium glossographus, —^glossa glossula, —>glossa, —»glossarium glossulare, —»glossa harenga, —>(h)arenga homilia, —»pr(a)edicaren historia, —»exemplumn in scriptis dare, —»dictare inauguratio, —Mncipere" inceptio, -^incipere inceptor, ->incipere incipere i. legere incipiens, —»incipere index, —>tabula ingressus, —»accessus", —>principium insolubile insolubilis, ^^insolubile argumenta i.ia, -^insolubile" instructio, —>legeren instructor, ^legere" instruere, -^legere11 integumentum, ->involucrum intelligentia profundior, —>sententia
intentio, —>legeren, ^sententia" i. auctoris, —>sententian interpres, —Mnterpretari interpretari (-are) see also —>dedarare interpretatio, —>dedarare, —>interpretari interpretative, —>dedarare interpretator, -^dedarare, —^interpretari introitus, —»accessusn, —>prindpium inventariare, —>repertoriumn inventarisare, —>repertorium" inventarium (-orium), ^-repertorium inventoriare, —>repertoriumn involucrum lectio, —>legere, see also —>cursus, —> ordinarius, —»qu(a)estio 1. ad cursum/cursoria, —>cursus, —>legere 1. divina, —>legeren 1. extraordinaria, —>cursusn, —> legere", —>ordinariusn 1. ordinaria, —»cursus, —>legere, —>ordinarius 1. privata, —>legere" 1. sollemnis, —>legeren lector, —^cursus" 1. principalis, —>cursusn secundus 1., —>cursusn lectura, —>legere, —>ordinarius 1. in aula" legens, —>legere magister (actu) legens, —>regeren legere 1. ab aliquo" 1. ad pennam, —>dictare, —>reportare" 1. ad cursum/cursorie, see also —> cursus, —>dictaren 1. extraordinarie 1. ordinarie, see also —>ordinariusn 1. raptim, —>dictaren 1. sollempniter"
425 1. cractim, —>dictare" legibilis, —»legere dies 1., —Megere 1. festinanter, —>cursusn 1. festive, ->cursusn 1. ordinarie, —»cursusn lexicon, —»glossariumn liber, —»capitulum licentia incipiendi, —»incipere licentiatus, -»examinare, —»promovere linguae vulgares, —Mnterpretari littera, —»alphabetumn, —»postilla, sententia" litteris mandare, —»edere loci sophistici, —»fallacian
audire o.; disputare o.; legere o.; regere o., etc., —»ordinarius ordinarium, —»ordinarius magnum o., ^-ordinarius parvum o., —>ordinarius ordinarius disputatio o.; habitus o.; hora o.; lectio o.; liber o., etc. ordinatio (partium), —^distinction — legere" ordo, —»alphabetum, —>distinctio", ->legere°, —>ordinarius o. litterarum, —>alphabetum o. tractandi, —»distinction o. tractatus, —^distinctio" origo vocabulorum, ^-etymologia
margarita, —Habula" materia, —»accessus ad auctorem11 maximae apparentes, —»fallacia" meditare, -»legere" meditatio, —>legeren memoriale, —»repertorium" multiplex actuale/potentiale/ phantasticum, —»fallacia"
palea, —>capitulumn paradigma, ^^exemplum paragraphare (-fare), —»capitulum paragraphus (-fus, -phum, -fa), —> capitulum paralogismus, ^fallacia11 pars, —»glossarium" particula, —»capitulumn partiri, ^distinctio" peccans in materia/in forma, —>fallacia" periochiae, —»accessus ad auctorem positio, ->pr(a)esentaren positura, —^capitulum11 postilla postillare, —^postilla postillarium, —>postilla postillatio, ^^postilla postillator, ^^postilla pr(a)edicare ars praedicandi, praedicatoria pr(a)edicatio, —>pr(a)edicare pr(a)esentare magister/professor presentans pr(a)esentatio, —>pr(a)esentare pr(a)esentator, —>pr(a)esentare, —> promovere primitivus, ^•derivatio
narratio, —•exemplum'1 n. authentica, —^exemplum" negare, —H>bligatio nomen, —»glossariumn nota, —»commentari", —>glossan, —> legere notare, —>legere notandum quod, —>legere notula, —»commentarin, —>glossa" obligatio disputatio de o.ne obligatus, —»obligatio omilia, —» pr(a)edicare" opinio, —»sententian opponens, —>opponere opponere oppositio, —^opponere ordinarie, —»ordinarius
426
INDEX I
principalis, —»derivatio principium problema, —»qu(a)estio" processus, —»pr(a)edicare" prodire in lucem, —»edere profundior intelligentia, —»sententia prooemium, —»(h)arenga promere, —^edere promotio, —»promovere promotor, —»promovere promovendus, —»promovere promovere p. ad cathedram p. ad episcopatum" p. ad honorem magistri p. ad magisterium p. ad sacerdodum" p. ad sacros ordines" promptuarium, —»concordantia pronuntiare, —»dictare, —«eportare" pronuntiatio, —>dictare pronuntiative, -»dictare pronuntiator, —»dictare modo pronuntiantium, —>dictare pronuntiatio, —»dictare propositio, —»syllogismus propositum, —»(h)arenga proprietas rei, —>etymologia proverbium, —»sententian psalmi abededarii, —»alphabetum publicare, —»edere publicatio, —»edere publicator, —»edere punctum p. taxatum qu(a)estio q. a/de quolibet, see also —»quodlibet q. in aula, ^-principium" q. legitima" q. quodlibetalis, ^-quodlibet q. redacta", see also —»redigere" q. reportata" qu(a)estio disputata, —>disputatio
questionista, —»qu(a)estio quodlibet disputatio/questio a quolibet disputatio/questio de quolibct disputatio/questio quodlibetalis, quodlibetica q. in/de Natali q. in/de Pascha quodlibetica, —>quodlibet quodlibetalis, —>quodlibet quodlibetarius, —>quodlibet quolibet, —>quodlibet ratio, —>disputatio recipere conventum, —>examinareri recitare, —»declararen recoil igere, —»reportare" redactio, ^^redigere, —»reporrare" redigere, —>reportaren r. in scriptis, —>reportare" regens, —»regere magister (actu) regens, —»regere magister non regens, —»regere regentia, —»regeren regere licentia regendi" r. in grammatica r. in theologia r. (extra)ordinarie scholas r. studium r. regestrurn (-turn), —>tabula regimen, —>regere r. ecclesiae, —>regere r. monasterii, —>regere r. scholarum, —>regere registrare, —>tabulan registrator, ->tabula" registrum (-rum), —nabula remissorium, ^•repertorium" repertorium (-portorium, -portatorium) repetitiones, —>examinaren reportare reportatio, —>reportare
427 r. redacta, —»reportare reportator, —»reportare representare, —»pr(a)esentaren representatio, —»pr(a)esentare" respondens, —»opponere, —»promovere respondere, —»opponere r. de questione, —»disputatio", —> opponere" r. in/de sophismatibus, —»disputatio", —•opponere'1 responsio, —»opponere" resumere, —»incipere resumentes, —>incipere" resumpta, —»inciperen questio/disputatio r., —Mncipere" resumptio, —Hncipere rubrica, —»capitulum rubricare, —^capitulum rubricella, —»capitulum ruminare, —»legeren ruminatio, —»legere" scholia, —^glossa11 scintilla, —>compilare" scribere, ->edere sensus, —>legere, —>postilla, —»sententia s. litceralis, ^cursus, —»legere sentenciare, ->sententia" sententia s. in generali, —>legere" s. in speciali, —>legere" s. magistralis, —»sententian sententiarius, —>cursusn sermo, —»pr(a)edicare ars faciendi/componendi sermones, —»pr(a)edicare s. examinatorius, ^^pr(a)edicare s. generalis, —»pr(a)edicare s. magistralis, ->pr(a)edicare s. publicus, ->pr(a)edicare sermocinari, —»pr(a)edicare ars sermocinandi, —>pr(a)edicare similitudo, -^exemplum11
s. litterarum, —>etymologia solutio, ^-brocarda, ^•determinare, —>disputatio, —>qu(a)estio s.nes contrarietatum, —^brocarda sophisma distinctiones sophismatum sophistaria, —»sophisma sophisticare, —>sophisma sophisticatio, —»sophisma sophismum (-mus), —»sophisman studere, —>audire stylo commendare, —>edere subdeterminator, ^determinare sublector, —»cursus, ^-pr(a)edicare summa, —»sententia summare, —^sententia" summarius, —>sententian summator, —»sententian summula, —>sententia suscipere conventum, —>examinare syllogisare (-zare), ^-syllogismus syllogisabilis, —>syllogismus syllogisatio, —^syllogismus syllogismus (sill-, sylo-, silo-) s. demonstrativus s. expositorius s. hypotheticus syllogistice, —>syllogismus syllogisticus, —>syllogismus modi syllogistici, ->syllogismus syncategorema synonyma (sino-, cino-, seno-, sini-, -nima), ->glossarium" tabellula, —Habula" tabula t. concordantiarum t. de concordantiis tabulare, ^^tabula" tabulator, —Habula" taxare puncta, —»punctum taxatio punctorum, —^punctum temptare, —»examinaren temptator (temptor), —>examinaren terminus, —>glossarium"
428
iNi
t(h)eutonizare (-sare), —Mnterpretari t(h)eutonizatio (-satio), —»interpretari titulare, —»capitulum titulatio, —>capitulumn titulus, —^capitulum tractare, ->cfistinction forma/ordo tractandi, —^distinctio" tractatus, —»capitulum, —»distinction, -»compilaren, —»pr(a)edicaren forma/ordo tractatus —»distinctio" tradere in arnicas aures, —>edere traducere, —»interpretari transferre, —Mnterpretari translare, —•reportare'1 translatare, —>interpretari translatio, —»interpretari translator, —>interpretari, —»reportaren transponere, —>interpretari
vacatio, —>legere venire in publicum, —»edere verbum, —»glossariumn verificare, —»declararen verificatio, —•declarare'1 versus, —»capitulum vertere, —>interpretari vesperiare, —•principium" vesperiandus, —>principiumn vesperie, —>principium vespcrius, —>principium vis confundendi, —»syncategorema vocabularium (-rius), ^-elossarium, —»repertoriumn, —^tabula" vocabulum, —»glossarium volumen, —>capitulum vox, —>-glossariumn vulgarizare (-sare), —>interpretari vulgarizatio (-satio), —>interpretari
utrum ... an ..., —»qu(a)estio
Category I V : The Names of the Disciplines, their Teachers and Students abacista, —>abacus abacizare, —^abacus abacus (abbacus) a. manualis activa, —Hheoreticus actualis, —»philosophia, —>theoreticus aeconomicus, -a (oeco-, eco-, ico-, yco-), -^ethica agricultura, -Cartes mechanicae a^ebra, —>arithmeticus algorism us (alch-, alchoa-), —>arithmeticus almucabola, —>arithmeticusn altimetria, —»geometria analytica, ^dialectica ancilla, —»philosophia" antiqui, —>dialectica
apices, —^abacus archicantor, —>musica" arithmeter, —>arithmetica arithmeticale, —»arithmetica arithmeticalis, —>arithmetica arithmeticus (areth-, arit-, aris-, ares-, ari-, -metrica, -methica, -medica) armatura, ->artes mechanicae armonia, —»musican ars ars adulterina, —>artes mechanicae11 ars antiqua, —^musica ars arengandi, —>ars dictaminis, —> rhetorica" ars arithmetica, —>aritlimeticus ars artium, —>ars —>dialectica ars bene disserendi, —»dialectica"
INDEX I
ars calculandi, calculativa, -»computus ars cibativa, —»artes mechanicae ars computandi, —»computus ars coopertiva, -Cartes mechanicae ars dictaminis ars dictandi, —»ars dictaminis ars dictatoria, -»ars dictaminis ars disputandi, —>ars ars divina, —»divina scientia" ars dubitandi, —»dialectican ars epistolaris, epistolandi, —»ars dictaminis" ars grammatica, —»grammatica, —>ars dictaminis11 ars illiberalis, —Cartes liberales ars iudicalis, —»astrologia ars mathematica, —»arithmeticus ars musica, —»musica ars nicromantia, —>artes mechanicae11 ars notariae, —>ars dictaminis ars nova, —»dialectica, —»musica ars nutritiva, —>artes mechanicae ars oratoria, —>rhetorican ars poetica, —»ars dictaminis ars poetria(e), —>ars dictaminis11, —> rhetorica ars praedicandi, —»ars dictaminis, —> rhetorica ars prosandi, —»ars dictaminis11, —> rhetorica ars punctandi, —»ars dictaminis ars rationalis, —»artes liberales ars realis, —>artes liberales ars rhetorica, —»rhetorica, dictaminis ars sermocinalis/sermocinandi/ componendi sermones, —^rhetorica ars subtilior, —»musican ars versificatoria, versificaria, versificandi, —»ars dictaminis11, —> rhetorica ars vestitiva, —»artes mechanicae
429
ars vetus, —>dialectica, —»musica artes apotelesmata, —>artes mechanicae artes eloquentiae, —»artes liberales artes factivae, —>artes mechanicae artes illiberales, —>artes liberales, —> artes mechanicae artes inferiores, —>artes mechanicae11 artes leviores, —>artes mechanicae" artes liberales artes mechanicae artes minores, —Cartes mechanicae" artes physicae, Cartes liberales artes quadriviales, —Cartes liberales artes reales, Cartes liberales artes sermocinales, ^-artes liberales artes serviles, -Cartes mechanicae11 artes sordidae, —Cartes mechanicae artes rationales, —>artes liberales artes triviales, —>artes liberales artes vulgares, —>artes mechanicae artista astrologia astrologia naturalis" astrologia superstitiosa" astrologica, —>astrologia astrologus, —>astrologia astronomia, —>astrologia astronomica, ^astrologia astronomicus, —>astrologia astronomus, —»astrologia calculans, ^computus calculatio, —^computus calculativa, -^computus calculator, —>computus calculatorius, —»computus calculus, —>computus canonista, —»artista, ^-ius canonicum cantor, —>musica cantor primus, —>musica primicerius cantorum, —Mnusica" cantus, —>musica c. mensurabilis, —»musica c. planus, —>musica
\ 430
INDEX I
causae/causarum actor, —»ius canonicum causidicus, —»ius canonicum chirurgia (cirurgia), —>physica civilis, —»ethica computare, —>computus computarius, —»computus computatio, —>-computus computator, —»computus computatorium, —>computusn computatorius, —»computus computista, —»computus computorium, —•computus" computus (con-, -po-, -turn) conceptus, —>grammatica considerativa, —»theoreticus cosmimetria, —»geometria decretalista, -»ius canonicum decretista, —»artista, —»ius canonicum demonstrator, —»dialectica" descriptio, —>geometria orbis terrarum d., —»geometrian dialectica dialecticus, —»dialectica dictamen, —»ars dictaminis, —»rhetorica" d. prosaicum" d. metricum" d. prosimetricum11 d. rhythmicum" dictator, —»ars dictaminis disciplina, —>ars d. disciplinarum, -»ars, —»dialectica d.e liberales, —Cartes liberales dispensativa, —>ethica dispensatoria, —>ethica divina scientia doctor legum, —»ius canonicum" doctrina, —»ars d.e liberales, -Cartes liberales economicus, -a (oeco-, acco-, ico-, yco-), —>ethica
eloquentia, —>artes liberales, —»rhetorica11 artificiosa e., —>rhetorica" ethica (aethi-, eti-, edii-, exhi-, ethy-) e.a Aristotelis libri e.orum scientia/philosophia e.a facultas, —»ars f. medicine, —»physica f. theologiae, —>divina scientia figura, —>geometrian forma, —>geometrian geographia, —»geometria geometer, ^•geometria geometria arsg. practica g.e, —»theoreticus geometrica, —»geometria geometricare, —^geometria geometricus, —>geometria grammatica arsg. g. positiva g. speculativa grammaticulus, -^grammatica grammaticus, ^grammatica g. puer, —>grammatica grammatista, —>grammatica harmonia, ->musica" iconomicus, -a (oeco-, aeco-, eco-, yco-), —^ethica imago mundi, —»geometria inspectiva, -^philosophia, -^theoreticus intellectus, -^grammatica iurista, —^artista, ^-ius canonicum" iuris consultus (jurisconsultus), ->ius canonicum iuris peritus (jurispericus), —>ius canonicum iuris prudens, —>ius canonicum
431 iuris sciens, —»ius canomcum ius i. canonicum i. civile i. commune lanificium, -Cartes mechanicae lectio sacra, —»divina scientia lectio divinae paginae, divinae/sacrae scripturae, divinorum librorum, —»divina scientia legista, —>artista, —Mus canonicum legister, —Mus canonicum" legum professor, —»ius canonicum" logica, —Cartes liberales", —»dialectica, —»philosophia 1. antiqua, —»dialectica 1. moderna, modernorum, —>dialectica 1. nova, —>dialectica 1. vetus, —»dialectica logicus, (loicus, loycus) —»dialectica magistri abachi, de abaco, —>abacus mappa mundi (mappamundi), —> geometria matnematica, —»arithmeticus, —> artes liberales, —»astrologia, —» theoreticus" mathematicalis, —»arithmeticus mathematicitas, —>arithmeticus mathematicus, ->arithmeticus, —> astrologia mathesis, —>artes liberales mechanicus, —»artes mechanicae" medicare, —»physica medicina, Cartes mechanicae, —> physica facultas m.e, —>physica m. practica, —>physica m. theorica, —^physica scientia m.e, —>physica medicinare (-ari), —>physica medicus, —>physica mercatura, —>artes mechanicae
metaphysica, —»divina scientia, —> philosophia, ->physica, —»theoreticus" methodus, —>-ars" modern i, —>dialectica modi significandi, —»grammatica modistae, —>grammatica modus, —»grammatica m. essendi, —>grammatica m. intelligendi, —>grammatica m. significandi (essentialis/ accidentalis), —^grammatica monastica, —»ethica moralis, —^ethica musica ars m. m. armonica m. artificialis m. disciplina m. humana/humane m. instrumentis constituta m. mensurabilis m. mundana m. naturalis m. organica m. practica m. rithmica m. speculativa m. theorica musicus, —»musica navigatio, —Cartes mechanicae negotiatoria, —>artes mechanicae nominates, —>dialectica nominalistae, —>dialectica oeconomicus, -a (e-, ae-, i - , y-), —> ethica operativa, —>theoreticus orator, —>ius canonicum orbis pictus, —>geometria" orbis terrarum descriptio, —>geometria" ordo artistarum, —Cartes liberales
402.
INDEX I
perspectiva, —»geometria philosophans, —»philosophia philosophare, —»philosophian philosophari, —^philosophia philosophia (filo-, -sofia) academia p." Christiana p. huius mundi p." mundana p. nostra p. p. actualis p. gentium p. inspectiva p. naturalia p. naturalis, —»physica p. prima (prima p.), also —»divina scientia p. speculativa p. theologica p. theor(et)ica, also —>theoreticus vera et sancta p. verissima p.n philosophus (nlo-, phylo-, fylo-, -sofus), ^philosophia p. naturalis, —H>hilosophia p. primus, —>pnilosophia p. rationalis, —^philosophia p. realis, —»philosophia physica p. terrestris practici in p." theorici in p." p.e facultas physicus, —>physica pictura, —>geometria planimetria, —»geometria poetria, —>ars dictaminis" politicus, -a, —»ethica practicus, —>theoreticus p.a, ^philosophia p.a geometriae, —Hheoreticus practicare, —>physica praecentor (precentor), —»musica praecepta dictaminum, —>ars dictaminis"
prima philosophia, —»divina scientia privatus, —»ethica prudentia, —»ars" publicus, —»ethica quadrivium (quadruvium), —>artes liberales, —Hheoreticus" questionista, —»artista ratio, —»arsn r.nes dictandi, —»ars dictaminis" reales, —>dialectica realistae, —»dialectica rhetor, —»rhetorica rhetorica ars r. doctor r.e magister r.e r. nova" r. prima" r. secunda" r. vetus" rhetoricus, —>rhetorica sacra doctrina, —»divina scientia sacra pagina, —>divina scientia sapientia, —>ars amor/studium s.ae, —>philosophia scientia, —>ars s. bene disputandi, ^dialectica" s. disciplinalis, —Cartes liberales s. doctrinalis, —>artes liberales s. ethica, ^^ethica s. iudiciaria (iudicia) —>astrologia s. iudiciorum astrorum, —»astrologia s. medicine, —^physica s. naturalis, —>physica s. scientiarum, —>ars, ^dialectica s. theor(et)ica, —>theoreticus s.e active, —»ethica s.e eloquentiae, —Cartes liberales s.e morales, —>ethica s.e practice, ->ethica s.e productive, —>theoreticusn
INDEX I
433
s.e rationales, —»artes liberates s.e sermocinales, —»artes liberales veri et falsi iudicandi s., —»dialectica" significatum, ->grammatica solitarius, —»ethica sophista, —»artista, —^dialectica11 speculativa, —»physica, —»tlieoreticus steriometria, —>geometria studium, —>ars studium divinae paginae, divinae/sacrae scripturae, divinorum librorum, —> divina scientia summa dictaminis/dictandi, ^-ars dictaminis"
theologia, —>divina scientia, ophia facultas t.e, ^divina scientia theologicus, —>divina scientia philosophia theologica, —>philosophia theologus, —>divina scientia theoreticus philosophia t.a, —»philosophia scientia t.a theorica, —>-physica, —>theoreticus theoricus, —Hheoreticus trivium, —Cartes liberals, —Hheoreticusn t. sapientiae, —Cartes liberales11
tabula, —^geometria t. calculatoria, ^abacus terministae, —>dialectica terraecultus, ->artes mechanicae theatrica, —Cartes mechanicae theologare, -izare, -ari, —»divina scientia
venatio, —>artes mechanicae vita theologica, —>divina scientia yconomicus, -a (e-, ae-, i - , oe-),—> ethica
434
Index II Reference per term to pagenumbers abacista, 353-354; 371 abacizare, 353; 354 abacus (abb-), 353-354; 368; 371 abacus manualis, 353 abbas, 112 abbreviare, 237; 239 abbreviatio (ad-), 176; 237 abbreviator originalium, 349 abecedarium (-us, abc-, abeze-, abici-, etc.), 166; 218-219 abradere, 192 academia philosophia, 395 accessus (ad auctorem), 215-217; 315; 317 activus, 382; 407 actor, 222 actualis, 359; 396; 407 ad studium, 144 administrator, 44; 71; 114; 115; 124 admonitio, 309 adulterinus, 367 agere, 222 agriculture, 367 album, 103; 184 algebra, 356 algorismus (alch-, alchoa-), 355 allegoria, 290; 307 almarium, 155 almucabola, 355 alphabetarium (-us), 218-219 alphabetum (-us, alfa-), 218-219; 331 altimetria, 385 amanuensis, 45; 196; 197 ambo, 155 amicus, 136 amor sapientiae, 397 anagogia, 307 analogium, 155 analytica, 376; 378 ancilla, 397 annales, 103
annotare, 235 annotatio, 235 annotator, 235 anthologia, 238 antiquarius, 196; 197 antiqui, 378 apices, 353 apotelesmata, 368 apparare, 278 apparitor, 39; 68 appericio, 279 approbare, 271 approbatus, 271 arc(h)a, 31-32; 154 arc(h)a communis, 31 archicantor, 392 archiclaverius (-clavus), 71; 153; 180 archidiaconus, 45-47; 89 archiscola, 96; 133 archiscrinius, 153; 180 archiverius, 153 archivum, 31; 153-154 arenga (ha-, -ran-, -gua, etc.), 220-221 arengare (ha-), 220-221 arguere, 258 argumentatio, 258 argumentum, 258 argumentum brocardicum, 226 argumentum insolubilium, 286 arithmeter, 356 arithmetica (arit-, aris-, ares-, etc.), 355-357; 385 arithmeticalis, -e, 356; 357 arithmeticus (arit-, aris-, ares-, etc.), 355-357; 385 armamentarius, 180 armararius, 156; 180 armarista, 156; 180 armarium, 31; 153; 155-156; 160; 180; 181 armarium commune, 155
435 armarium ecclesie, 155 armarius, 155-156; 160; 175; 180; 182 armatura, 367 armentarius, 180 armonia, 391 ars, 81; 355; 358-360; 370 ars antiqua, 393 ars arengandi, 362; 404 ars arithmetica, 355 ars artium, 359; 377 ars bene disserendi, 376 ars calculandi, calculativa, 375 ars cibativa, 368 ars componendi/ faciendi sermones, 310; 405 ars computandi, 374; 375 ars coopertiva, 368 ars dialectica, 322; 341 ars dictaminis, 107; 255; 359; 361-363; 404 ars dictandi, 361-363; 404 ars dictatoria, 361; 362 ars disputandi, 359 ars divina, 379 ars dubitandi, 376 ars epistolandi/ epistolaris, 361 ars geometria, 355; 385 ars grammatica, 362; 386; 387 ars iudicalis, 373 ars mathematica, 355 ars musica, 358; 391 ars nicromantia, 367 ars notariae, 107; 362 ars nova, 377; 393 ars nutritiva, 368 ars oratoria, 404 ars poetica, 359; 362 ars pr(a)edicandi/ predicatoria, 310; 311; 362; 405 ars prosandi, 361; 404 ars punctandi, 362 ars rhetorica, 362; 404; 405 ars scribendi, 200 ars scriptoriae, 200 ars sermocinalis, sermocinandi, 310;
312; 364; 405 ars versificandi/ versificaria/ versificatoria, 362; 404 ars vestitiva, 368 ars vetus, 377; 393 artavus, 161 artes adulterinae, 367 artes eloquentiae, 364 artes factivae, 368 artes illiberales, 364; 368 artes inferiores, 367 artes leviores, 367 artes liberales, 356; 359; 364-366; 367; 368; 370; 384; 386; 395 artes mechanicae, 359; 364; 365; 367369; 401 artes minores, 367 artes physicae, 364 artes quadriviales, 364 artes rationales, 364 artes reales, 364 artes serviles, 367 artes sordidae, 365; 368 artes triviales, 364 artes vulgares, 365; 368 articulatus, 230 articulus, 228-231 artista, 370-371 arundo, 161; 162 assignatio punctorum, 320 astrologia, 359; 372.-373; 3&4 astrologia naturalis, 372 astrologia superstitiosa, 372 astrologica, 372 astrologus, 372-373 astronomia, 372-373; 384 astronomicus (-a), 372; 373 astronomus, 372-373 ater, 157 atramentariolum, 158 atramentarium (-us), 158 atramentum, 157-158; 162 auctor, 196; 222-223; 237! 23& auctoritas, 196; 222-223; 237! 2 7 2 auctoritates magistrates, 98
436
INDEX II
audire, 139; 124-225; 271; 297; 304 auditio, 224-225; 271 auditor, 224-225 auditor, 132 auditus, 224-225 augere, 222 auieo, 222 aula, 58; 82-84; 118; 315 aulatio, 315 aulator, 315 aulica, 315 Australes, 106 aut(h)or, 222 authenticus (-um), 171; 222; 272 bacca laurea, 35 baccalaria, 35 baccalarius (baca-, bace-, bache-, etc.), 33-35; 59; 61; 79; 82; 86; 132; 244; 251; 302; 310; 318 baccalarius biblicus, 34; 244; 310 baccalarius formatus, 34; 310 baccalarius institutarii, 34 baccalarius sententiarius, 34; 310; 338 baculus, 35 bambyx (ban-, -bix), 185; 186 banca, 36 bancarius (-c(h)erius, -quarius, -querius), 36-37 bancus, 36; 155 beanus, 41 bedellaria (-dal-), 39 bedellionatus, 39 bedellus, 36; 38-40; 68; 100; 187 bedellus communis, 36; 39 bedellus generalis, 36; 38; 39; 203 bedellus maior, 36; 39 bedellus minor, 36; 39 bedellus specialis, 36; 38 bejannizare, 41 bejaunare, 41 bejaunium (-num), 41 bejaunus, 41; 136 beneflciare, 43 beneficiarius, 43
beneficiatus, 42-44 biblicus, 34; 85; 243 bibliotheca, 159-160; 180; 181 bibliothecarius, 159-160; 180; 182 bina tabula, 208 biretizare (-zatio), 283 biretta (birr-, -turn), 283 birettare (-ratio), 283 bombix (-bis, -byx, -ix, -ax), 185; 186 Boreales, 106 breve de libris, 176 breviarium, 176; 331 breviculus, 176 brevis librorum, 176 brevis, 163 brocarda, 226-227 brocardica, 226-227 brocc(h)us, 226; 227 bulla, 31 bursa, 42-44; 63; 82; 114; 135 bursalis, 42-44 bursarius, 42-44; 114; 135 buxa cerata, 207 buxum, 207 byrsa, 44 c(h)araxare, 199 c(h)arta, 103; 153; 163-165; 183; 185; 212 c(h)arta bombicyna (bamba-, bambu),i85 c(h)arta cuttanea (cuttu-), 185 c(h)arta damascena, 185 c(h)arta de papyro, 185 c(h)arta dentata, 166 c(h)arta divisa, 166 c(h)arta non nata, 184 c(h)arta papyri, 185 c(h)arta partita, 166 c(h)arta pecudina, 184 c(h)arta virginea, 184 c(h)arta vitulina, 184 c(h)artaceus (-cius, -icius), 163; 183 c(h)artarium (-us), 153-154 c(h)arteus, 163; 183 c(h)articinus, 163; 183
It-
437
INDEX II
c(h)artigraphus, 163 c(h)artinacius, 153 c(h)artula, 154; 163; 164; 212 c(h)artularium, 153-154 c(h)artularius, 153; 154; 184; 196 c(h)irurgia, 401 calamare (-ris), 162; 199 calamarium, 162; 199 calamus, 157; 161-162; 199; 201 calculans, 375 calculatio, 375 calculativa, 375 calculator, 374; 375 calculatorius, 353; 375 calculus, 353; 355; 374-375 cambi(a)re, 101 cambitor, 101 campsor, 100-101; 107 cancellaria, 47 cancellarius, 45-47; 88; 89; 124; 133; 134; 196; 197 canipulus, 161 canon, 53; 230; 390 canonista, 76; 371; 389-390 cantor, 391-394 cantus, 391-394 capiscol (-scola), 45; 96; 133 capitulare (-atio), 228; 230 capitulum, 212; 228-231; 240; 320 capsa, 31-32 caput, 228 caput sc(h)olae, 45; 96; 133 cat(h)alogus, 175-177 categoremata, 378 caternio, 191 caternos scribere, 190 caternum (-nus), 190; 191 cathalogus, 103 cathedra, 48-49; 98 cathedra docentis/ doctoris, 48 cathedra magistralis, 48; 98 cathedratus, 48 causa apparentiae/ defectus, 275 causa, 215; 216 causae/ causarum actor, 390
causidicus, 76; 390 cautio, 167 cedula, 194 cera, 208 ceraculum, 208 cessare, 50-52; 282; 284; 296 cessatio, 50-52; 282^84 cessatio magistrorum, 51 cetus, 66; 67 cetus magistrorum, 66; 67 charaxator, 199 charaxatura, 199 chartinacius, 72 chartophylacium, 153; 163 chartophylax, 72; 153 chartularius, 72 chirographare, 167 chirographizare (-isare), 167 chirographum (chy-, ci-, cy-), 166-167 Christiana philosophia, 395 cinnabaris, 157 cinnabrium, 157 circumstantiae, 215 cista, 31-32 cista communis, 31 cista exemplariorum, 171 Citramontani, 38; 104; 105; 106; 107; 113; 122; 124; 137; 148 civilis, 382; 389 daviger, 71 davipotens, 71 clericus, 53-54; 92; 132; 196-197 clericus litteratus, 53 clericus scolaris, 54; 131 codex (caudex), 159; 160; 168-169; 170; 208; 211; 212
codicellus (-cillus, -culus), 168; 169; 195 codicilli cerati, 169 coetus, 66 collatio, 232-234; 309 collecta, 33; 55-56 collectae glossae, 277 collectanea, 237 collectare, 56
438 collectas facere, 56 collectio, 237; 331 collegiatus, 95; 135-136 collegium, 43; 57-60; 65; 82; 83; 104; 109; 137; 148; 370 collegium artistarum (et medicorum), 57; 37O collegium doctorum, 57; 58; 107 collegium magistrorum, 57; 58 colligere, 56; 237; 239; 331; 333; 334 combejaunus, 41 commendatio, 283; 316 commensales, 63 commentari (-re), 235-236; 245; 278 commentarius (-urn), 235-236; 238; 278; 296 commentator, 235-236; 278 commentum, 235-236; 278 commissarius, 61-62 committere, 62 communa (-ne), 42; 63-64 communarius, 63-64 communia, 42; 63-64 communio, 64; 104; 148 communitas, 64; 104 compendium, 331 compilare, 237-239; 261; 264; 331; 336; 349 compilatio, 237-239; 331 compilator, 237-239 componere, 198; 200; 239; 264 compositio, 247-249; 267 compositor (statutorum), 137; 238 computare, 374; 375 computarius, 374 computatio, 375 computator, 374; 375 computatorium (-us), 374; 375 computista, 371; 374; 375 computorium, 374 computus (con-, -po-, -turn), 371; 374-375 concedere, 298 conceptus, 387 concio, 309
conclusio, 343-344 concordantia, 240-241; 331; 348; 349 concordare, 241 conferre, 234 confratria, 104 congregatio, 65-6-7; 329 congregatio artistarum, 66 congregatio generalis, 65; 67 congregatio magistrorum, 67 congregatio magna, 66 congregatio maior, 329 congregatio minor, 329 congregatio nigra, 66 congregatio plena, 65; 66; 6y congregatio regentium, 66; 329 conservator (privilegiorum), 68-69 conservator librorum, 68; 180 conservator studii, 68 considerativa, 407 consignificantia, 298; 345-347 consignificare (-cans), 345; 347 consignificativus, 347 consiliaria, 104-106; 113 consiliarius, 100; 105; 113-115; 123 consortium (-cium), 57; 65; 104; 148 contractabula, 348 contraria, 241 contrarotulatio, 126 contrarotulator, 126 contrarotulatum, 126 controversia scholastica, 134 conventandus, 270 conventare (-ri), 270 conventatio, 270 conventatus, 270 conventus, 59; 65; 66; 78; 148; 268271 convocatio, 66 copia, 198 copiare, 198 copista, 198 cornicularius, 158 corniculus, 158 cornu, 158 corollarium (chor-, corro-, core-,
INDEX II
etc.), 343-344 corpus, 168 cosmimetria, 385 coto (-turn), 186 crastina, 50 creta, 192 cultellus, 161 currere, 242; 244 cursare, 242-244 cursim, 244 cursor, 34; 242-244 cursorie, 224; 242-244; 253; 304 cursorius, 33; 86; 242-244; 295; 304 cursu, 244 cursus, 33; 34; 86; 224; 242-244; 292; 295; 304 custos, 45; 70-72; 96; 115; 118; 119; 122; 136; 153; 180 custos armarii, 71; 180 custos bibliothece, 71; 180 custos chartarum, 71; 72; 180 custos depositi, 115 custos librorum, 70; 71; 72; 180 custos litterarum, 71; 153 custos puerorum, 70; 72 custos thesauri, 71; 153; 180 dare ad pennam, 198; 200; 253; 334 decanus, 73-74; 81 decerpere, 239 declamare, 245 declarare, 235; 245-246; 247; 287 declaratio, 245-246; 279 decretalista, 389-390 decretista, 76; 371; 389-390 decretum, 163 defensor, 68; 69 definire, 246 definitio (diff-), 246; 279 deflorare (-atio), 238 demonstrator, 377 deponere, 313-314 deportare, 333; 334 depositarius, 44; 115 depositio, 282; 313-314
439
depositio magistrorum, 282; 313 depositor, 313-314 depromere, 264 derivare (di-), 247; 249 derivarius, 248 derivatio (di-), 246; 247-249; 266; 267; 288; 311 derivativus (di-), 247; 249 derivator, 248 describere, 246 descriptio librorum, 176 descriptio, 246; 279; 385 determinare, 33; 89; 250-252; 269; 283; 301; 305; 316; 326; 333; 343 determinatio, 33; 89; 220; 250-252; 258; 268; 283; 305; 323; 326 determinatio in aliis, 252 determinator, 250-252 dialectica, 359; 364; 376-378; 396 dialecticus, 377; 378 dicta magistralia, 98 dictamen, 255; 362; 404; 406 dictare, 188; 198; 200; 253-255; 264; 334; 362 dictata, 254 dictatio, 255 dictator, 254; 255; 361-363 dictica, 208 dictio, 36; 281 dictionarius (-urn), 279-281; 331 dictum, 237; 337 dies disputabilis, 258; 259; 283; 296; 316 dies legibilis, 50; 283 dignitas magistralis, 98 diploma, 163 dipticha (-ty-, -ca), 208 directorium, 348 disciplina, 81; 358-360; 364 disciplina disciplinarum, 359; 377 disciplina scolaris, 131 discipulus, 75; 131; 132; 139 discus, 155 dispensativa (-toria), 382 disputabilis, 258; 305
440
INDEX II
disputare, 256-259; 304 disputatio, 34; 120; 225; 230; 233; 234; 250; 256-259; 269; 283; 292; 294; 296; 299; 301; 302; 304; 310; 322; 324; 325; 328; 341; 343; 4OI disputatio a/de quolibet, 259; 326; 327;328 disputatio de obligationibus, 298; 346 disputatio de questione, 259 disputatio de sophismatibus, 259 disputatio extraordinaria, 305 disputatio in aula, 315 disputatio in scholis, 302; 341 disputatio in studio sollempni, 257 disputatio magistrorum, 257; 258; 302; 341 disputatio ordinaria, 257; 258; 305; 341 disputatio publica, 258; 302 disputatio quodlibetalis/ -libetica/ -libetaria, 259; 326; 327 disputatio resumpta, 284 disputatio sollemnis, 302 disputatio vesperia, 317 disputationes Sorbonicae, 83 distinctio, 218; 229; 230; 240; 260163; 281; 310; 311 distinctiones sophismatum, 340 distinguere, 260-263 dividere, 260 divina scientia, 359; 379-381; 398; 400 divini codices, 168 divisio, 260 docere, jj; 293 doctor, 76-78; 79; 97; 109; no; 116; 117; 304; 318; 319; 370; 390 doctor (actu) legens, 76; 86 doctor (actu) regens, 75; 76; 86; 132; 139 doctor artium, 77 doctor conventatus, 270 doctor decretorum, 76 doctor grammatice et rhetorice, 77 doctor in artibus, 77 doctor in sacra pagina, 77 doctor in utroque iure, 77
doctor iuris canonici, 77 doctor iuris civilis, 76 doctor iuris, 79; 116 doctor legis/legum, 76; 79; 116 doctor legum, 390 doctor logicae, 77 doctor medicine, 77 doctor salariatus, 55 doctor theologiae, 77 doctor utriusque iuris, 77 doctorare (-ri), 78 doctoratus, 78 doctrina, 358; 364 doctus, 77 dominus, 79; 104; 135 dominus legum, 79 domus, 43; 58; 59; 65; 82-84; 95; IO 4 domus beneficiatorum, 43 domus ecclesia, 82 domus (pauperum) scolarium, 82; 83 duae tabulae, 208 dubitare (-atio), 298; 313; 323 dubium, 294; 322-325 ductor puerorum, 109 duplices, 208 ebdomadarius, 61 ecclesia, 136 edere in lucem/ in publicum, 264 edere, 198; 264-265 editio, 264-265 editiuncula, 265 editor, 264-265 educere, 264 effigiare, 199; 207 elementum, 218 eloquentia, 404 elucidatio, 279 emittere, 264 encausterium, 158 encaustum, 157-158 enucleare (-atio), 246 epilogus, 348 epistola, 163 eradere, 192-193
INDEX II
estivaliter, 305 esturmentum, 164 ethica (aethi-, eti-, ethi-, etc.), 382383; 396 ethimologista, 266; 371 etymologia (ethy-, eci-, ethi-), 246; 247; 266-267; 288 examen, 33; 88; 250; 251; 268-271 examen determinantium, 33; 268 examen in cameris, 268 examen in communibus, 268 examen in propriis, 268 examen privatum, 270 examinare, 224; 268-271; 316 examinatio, 268-271 examinatio clericorum, 271 examinatio determinandi, 268; 269 examinatio licentiandi, 268; 269 examinatio privata, 270 examinatio publica, 269; 270; 316 examinator, 268-271 exarare, 199; 207 excetpere, 239 excipere, 335 exemplar, 145; 170-172; 181; 182; 187; 188; 198; 203; 204; 205; 209; 274 exemplare, 172; 198 exemplarius, 171; 172 exemplatot, 170-172; 188; 203; 204 exemplum, 170-172; 198; 218; 229; 272-274; 290 exhortatio, 309 explanare, 235; 245-246 explanatio, 215; 245-246 explicatio, 266 exponere, 235; 245-246; 279; 337 expositio, 235; 245-246; 266; 279; 294; 324; 331
expositivus (-ve), 245; 279 expositor, 235; 245 expositorium, 279 expromere, 264 extractiones, 237 exttahere, 237 extramentum, 164
441
extraordinarie, 224; 242; 304-306; 329 extraordinarius, 33; 85; 86; 178; 242; 295; 304-306 facultas, 80-81; 137; 147; 215; 358; 365; 381; 402 facultas artium (liberalium), 80 facultas astrologiae, 80 facultas chirurgiae, 80 facultas geometriae, 80 facultas giammaticae, 80 facultas iutis canonici/ civilis, 80 facultas logicae, 80 facultas medicinae/ medicorum, 80; 402 facultas physicae, 80 facultas rhetoricae, 80 facultas theologiae, 80; 381 fallacia, 256; 275-276; 285; 298; 340 fallax, 276 fallere, 276 fen, 230 fenerator, 100 ferrum, 173 festa, 296 figura, 218; 385 florilegium, 237 flos, 237; 238 folium, 208 forma, 260; 269; 275; 385 forma/ordo tractandi, 260 forma/ordo tractatus, 260 gemma, 237 generalia, 226 geographia, 384-385 geometer, 385 geometria, 355; 384-385 geometrica, 384; 385 geometricare, 385 geometricus, 385 glomerellus, 96 glosa, 277-278; 279 Glossa communis, 278 Glossa ordinaria, 277; 278
442
INDEX II
glossa, 235; 277-278; 279; 281 glossare (-ans), 235; 278 glossarium (glosa-, -us), 218, 277; 278; 279-281; 331 glossator, 278 glossatura, 278 glossatus, 278 glossema, 277; 279 glossographus, 278 glossula, 278; 279; 281 glossulare, 278 gradus, 90 grammatica, 92; 95; 96; 109; 362; 376; 386-388 grammatica positiva, 388 grammatica speculativa, 377; 386-388 grammaticulus, 386 grammaticus, 92; 109; 386-388 grammaticus puer, 386; 388 grammatista, 371; 386 graphiare, 198 graphiolum, 174 graphium, 173-174; 201; 207 graphius, 173 grex, 65 gubernator, 122 harenga (ar- -ran-, etc.), 220-221 harengare (ar-), 220-221 harmonia, 391 harundo, 161; 162 hebdomadarius, 61-62 historia, 272 hora (extra)ordinaria, 305 hospes, 135 hospitium, 58; 82-84; 118; 203 huius mundi philosophia, 395 idiota, 92; 93 illitteratus, 92-94 imago mundi, 384 implere ceras, 199 imprimere, 199 in lucem prodire, 264 in publicum venire, 264
in scriptis dare, 253 inauguratio, 283 incausterium, 158 incaustum, 157; 158 inceptio, 34; 50; 90; 258; 269; 270; 282-284; 3J6; 317 inceptor, 282-284 inchartare, 164 incipere, 34; 50; 90; 95; 120; 244; 269; 282-284; 310; 315 incipere lectiones, 50 incipere legere, 284 incipiens, 284 index, 176; 348; 349 indiculum (-ulus), 176 ingressus, 215; 315; 317 insolubile (-lis), 285-286; 298; 340 inspectiva, 396; 407 institutor, 109 instructio, 165; 293 instructor, 109; no; 293 instruere, 165; 293 instrumentum, 163-165; 183 integumentum, 290-291 intellectus, 387 intentio, 215; 216; 294; 336 interpres, 86; 287; 288; 289 interpretare, 287-289 interpretari, 235; 245-246; 267; 287289 interpretatio, 245-246; 247; 267; 287289 interpretativus (-ve), 245; 338 interpretator, 245; 288; 289 intrare, 304 introitus, 82; 215; 310; 315; 317 invenire, 331 inventariare (-toriare, -tarisare), 332 inventarium, 103; 175-177; 331-332; 348 inventorium, 175; 177; 331; 332 involucrum, 223; 290-291 irrotulamentum, 126 irrotulare, 126 iudex, 76
INDEX II
iunior bursarius, 44 iuris consultus (jurisconsultus), 390 iuris peritus (jurisperitus), 390 iuris prudens, 390 iuris sciens, 390 iurista, 371; 390 ius canonicum, 371; 389-390 ius civile, 371; 389-390 ius commune, 389 ius, 76; 389 iustitia, 69 iustitiarius (scholarum), 68-69 iuvenis, 75; 139 kathalogus, 176 labes bejaunica, 41 laicus, 54; 93 laicus scolaris, 54 lanificium, 367 lator rotuli, i n ; 126; 127 lectio, 33; 235; 283; 292-297; 304; 305; 310; 322; 323; 324; 325; 337; 379 lectio ad cursum, 242; 295 lectio cursoria, 242; 243; 294; 295 lectio divina, 292 lectio divinae paginae, divinorum librorum, sacrae/ divinae scripturae, 379 lectio (extra) ordinaria, 242; 244; 294; 295; 304; 305; 306 lectio privata, 295 lectio sacra, 379 lectio sollemnis, 295 lector, 35; 61; 85-87; 141; 243; 293; 330 lector biblicus, 85 lector extraordinarius, 85 lector in iure civili, 86 lector in logica, 86 lector principalis, 85; 243 lector romanae curiae, 85 lector sacri palatii, 85 lector sententiarium, 85 lectura, 292-297; 304 legens, 76; 86; 95; 304; 329
443
legere, 33; 76; 86; 87; 224; 238; 242; 283; 292-297; 304; 305; 310; 323; 325; 329; 337 legere (extra)ordinarie, 294; 306; 329 legere ab aliquo, 297 legere ad pennam, 253; 254; 334 legere Bibliam biblice, 243 legere cursorie, 242; 244; 253; 295 legere raptim, 253 legere Sententias cursorie, 243 legere sollempniter, 295 legere tractim, 253 leges, 390 legibilis, 243; 283; 292-297 legis/legum doctor, 76; 119 legista, 371; 389-390 legister, 390 legum professor, 76; j<); 116; 390 leucoma rotuli, 103 lexicon, 279 libellulus, 179 libellus, 168; 178-179; 195 liber, 103; 168; 175; 178-179; 211; 212; 228; 279; 304; 365 liber (extra)ordinarius, 178; 305 liber alfabeti, 178 liber de forma, 269 liber ethicorum, 382 liber quasi armarium, 178 liber vocabulorum, 178 liberales artes/ disciplinae/ doctrinae, 364; 365 liberculus, 179 libraria, 156; 159; 180-182 librarista, 180 librarium, 180-182 librarius, 68; 153; 159; 160; 180-182; 187; 197; 203; 204; 210 libri catenati, 155; 178 licentia, 34; 88-91; 95; 107; 250; 251; 270; 302; 318; 329 licentia (extra)ordinaria, 90 licentia (ubique) docendi, 45; 46; 88; 89; 90; 95; 133; 143; T44; 268; 283; 302; 329
444
INDEX II
licentia determinandi, 89; 250; 251 licentia disputandi, 90 licentia exercendi, 90; 107 licentia incipiendi, 90; 282 licentia legendi, 329 licentia practicandi, 90 licentia regendi, 329 licentia specialis, 90 licentiabilis, 90 licentiare, 88-91 licentiatio, 90 licentiatorius, 90 licentiatura, 90 licentiatus, 34; 88-91; 270; 318 licentiose, 90 linguae vulgares, 288 literaliter loqui, 92 littera, 92; 163; 166; 218; 307; 336 litteras dare, 53 litteras discere, 53; 93 litterate, 92 litteratior (-issimus), 93 litteratus, 53; 92-94 litteris mandare, 264 loci sophistici, 275 locus, 59; 65; 141; 215 logica, 364; 376-378; 396 logica antiqua, 377 logica moderna/ modemorum, 377; 378 logica nova, 377 logica vetus, 377 logicus (loicus, loycus), 377; 378 magister, 34; 70; 75; 76; 77; 78; 79; 85; 95-97; 98; 109; no; 116; 117; 122; 132; 133; 139; 243; 251; 257; 258; 269; 282; 293; 302; 316; 318; 329 magister (actu) legens, 95; 293; 304; 329 magister (actu) regens, 65; 66; 81; 95; 96; 113; 293; 304; 305; 329; 330 magister (extra)ordinarius, 305 magister abachi/ de abacho, 95; 353 magister artium, 95; 370
magister aulandus, 315 magister bursalis, 95 magister collegiatus/ collegii, 95 magister domus, 95 magister glomerie, 96 magister grammatice, 95; 96 magister in artibus, 95 magister in grammatica, 95; 96 magister in logica, 95 magister in primitivis, 95 magister in theologia, 95; 96 magister infantium, 95 magister licentiatus, 34 magister monasterii, 95 magister non regens, 95; 329 magister presentans, 313 magister principals, 111 magister prior, in magister puerorum, 95; 96 magister sacre pagine, 96 magister sacri palatii magister sc(h)olarum (-rium), 45; 86; 95; 96; 131; 133-134 magister scolae, 95; 96 magister scolaris, 95; 131 magister studentium, 86; 95; 232 magisterium, 98-99; 318 magistralis, 98-99 magistrare, 98-99 magne scole, 129 magnum ordinarium, 50; 306 mandatum, 163 mansa (-us), 100 manu scriptum, 167 mappa mundi (mappamundi), 384385 mappa, 384 margarita, 348 massa, 38; 100 massarius, 100-101; 107 materia, 215; 216; 275 mathematica, 355-357; 364; 373; 385; 406 madiematicalis, 356 mathematicitas, 356
445 mathematicus, 355-357; 372! 373 mathesis, 364 matricula, 102-103; 126 matricularium librarie, 102 matrix, 102 maximae apparentes, 275 mechanicus, 367; 369 medicare, 403 medicina, 367; 400-403 medicina practica, 402 medicina theorica, 402 medicinare (-ari), 403 medicus, 400-403 meditare (-atio), 292 medius bursarius, 44 membrana (men-, -num, -men), 103; 163; 183-186 membranulum (-la), 184; 186 memoratorium, 163 memoriale, 163; 331 mensa, 100 mercatura, 368 metaphysica, 379-381; 396; 398; 400; 406 methodus, 358 miniare, 157 ministerium, 99 minium, 157 moderni, 377; 378 modistae, 387 modo pronuntiantium, 254 modus, 215 modus essendi, 387 modus intelligendi, 387 modus significandi, 387 modus syllogisticus, 343 monasterium, 59 monastica, 382 moralis, 308; 382 mucro, 174 multiplex actuale/ potentiale/ phantasticum, 275 multiplices, 208 mundana philosophia, 395 mundus, 384
munimentum (mo-, -nu-), 163-165; 183 musica, 358; 391-394; 406 musica armonica, 393 musica artificialis, 393 musica disciplina, 391 musica humana, 392; 393 musica instrumentis constituta, 392 musica mensurabilis, 393 musica mundana, 392 musica naturalis, 393 musica organica, 393 musica practica, 393 musica rithmica, 393 musica speculativa, 393 musica theorica, 393 musicus, 391-394 mutuator, 100 narratio, 272 natio, 31; 38; 39; 41; 65; 73; 104-106; 108; 113; 115; 122; 123; 124; 125; 137; 148; 209
navigatio, 367 negare, 298 negotiatoria, 368 nomen, 176; 247; 281; 377 nomen derivatum, 247 nominales, 378 nominalistae, 378 nostra philosophia, 395; 398 nota, 163; 197; 277; 294 notandum quod, 294 notarius, 107-108; 196-197 notitia, 163; 176 notula, 277 novacula, 192 nove scole, 129 numerus librorum, 215 nuntius, 38-40; 100 obligatio, 256; 298-300; 301; 313; 346 obligatus, 298; 300 observator librorum, 180 oeconomica (e-, ae-, i - , y-), 382-383
446
INDEX II
oeconomicus, 382; 383; 396 omilia, 309 operativa, 407 opinio, 336 opponens, 233; 250; 257; 258; 298; 301-303; 341
opponere, 233; 250; 257; 283; 298; 301303; 315; 318; 341 oppositio, 301 orator, 69; 390 orbis pictus, 385 orbis terrarum descriptio, 385 ordinarie, 33; 224; 242; 243; 257; 258; 295; 304-306; 329; 341 ordinarium, 50; 305; 306 ordinarius, 33; 85; 86; 178; 242; 292; 295; 304-306 ordinatio, 176; 260; 294 ordo, 219; 294; 304; 306 ordo artistarum, 365 ordo librorum, 176; 215 ordo litterarum, 219 ordo tranctandi/ tractatus, 260 origo vocabulorum, 266 p(a)edagogium, 109-110; 129 p(a)edagogus, 76; 109-110; 129 pagina, 77; 163; 308 paginula, 208 palea, 230 palimpsestum (-tus), 193 pambix, 185 papyraceus, 183 papyreus (-pi-, -rius), 183 papyrus (-pi-), 103; 154; 161; 163; 164; 169; 183-186; 192; 194; 195; 212 par, 168 paradigma, 274 paragraphare (-fare), 229 paragraphus (-um, -fiis, -fum, -fa), 228-231
paralogismus, 275 pars, 168; 281 partes capituli, 228 particule, 228
partiri, 260 parve scole, 129 parvum ordinarium, 50; 306 pauperes magistri, 95; 135 pauperes scolares, 131 pauperi, 102; 131 pecia (petia), 145; 170; 171; 172; 181; 182; 187-189; 190; 204; 209; 253; 254; 32.0 peciarius, 187-189 pedellus, 38; 40 pellis, 184; 186 penna (pinna), 157; 161-162; 201 pennaculum, 162 pennula, 161 pergamenarius (-mi-), 184 pergamenum (-mena, -mina, parga-, Derga, etc.), 183-186 pergamineus, 184 periochiae, 215 periti, 77 perspectiva, 385 philosophans, 397; 399 philosophari (-re), 395-399 philosophia (filo-, -Sofia), 216; 358; 376; 378; 379; 382; 395-399; 406 philosophia actualis, 396 philosophia gentium, 395; 398 philosophia inspectiva, 396 philosophia naturalis, 397; 400 philosophia practica, 396; 406 philosophia prima, 379-381; 398 philosophia speculativa, 396; 401 philosophia theologica, 397 philosophia theor(et)ica, 396; 406 philosophus (filo-, phylo-, fylo-, -sofas), 395-398 philosophus naturalis, 398 philosophus primus, 398 philosophus rationalis, 398 philosophus realis, 398 physica (phi-), 396; 400-403; 406 physicus, 400-403 pictura, 385 planimetria, 385
INDEX II
pluma, 161 plumalis, 161 plumbum, 161-162; 201 pluteus, 155 poetria, 362 politica, -us, 382-383; 396 polyptychum, 163 pombix, 185 positio, 313; 346 positura, 229 posta, 308 postilla, 307-308 postillare, 308 postillarium, 308 postillatio, 308 postillator, 308 pr(a)ecentor, 112; 392; 394 pr(a)eceptor, 109-110; 125 pr(a)eceptum, 163 pr(a)edicare, 309-312 pr(a)edicatio, 309-312 pr(a)esentare, 282; 313-314; 318 pr(a)esentatio, 282; 313-314 pr(a)esentator, 313-314; 318 practica, -us, 359; 368; 382; 396; 400; 401; 406-407 practicare, 402 practici in physica, 401 praesidens, 122 prepositus, 44; 57 prima philosophia, 379-381 primicerius cantorum, 392 primitivus, 247; 249 principalis, 70; 82; 85; 95; i n ; 118-119; 247; 249 principium, 117; 215; 270; 282; 283; 284; 310; 315-317 prior, 57; 59; 74; 111-112; 114; 118; 119; 126 privatus, 382 privilegium, 163 problema, 322 processus, 309 procurare, 115 procurator, 39; 41; 44; 61; 73; 105; 106;
447
108; 113-115; 118; 119; 123; 124 professor, 76; 109; no; 116-117 professor (extra)ordinarius, 305 professor grammaticae, 116 professor legum, 79; 117 professor medicinae, 116 professor naturalis et phisicalis scientiae, 116 professor presentans, 313 professor regens, 75; 122; 125; 132; 139 profiteor, 117 profundior intelligentia, 336 promere, 264 promotio, 318-319 promotor, 318-319 promovendus, 318-319 promovere, 318-319 promptuarium, 240 pronuntiare, 188; 253-255; 334 pronuntiatio, 188; 254; 255 pronuntiative, 255 pronunciator, 255 prooemia, 221 propositio, 343 propositum, 220-221 proprietas rei, 266 protocollare, 194 protocollarius, 194 protocollator, 194 protocollum, 194-195 provecti, 77 proverbium, 337 providere, 118 provisor, 59; 60; 70; i n ; 115; 118-119 prudentia, 358 publicare, 264-265 publicacio, 264-265 publicator, 264-265 publicus, 382 puer, 75; 109; 132; 139 puer grammaticus, 386; 388 puero litteras dare, 53 pugillaris, 208 pulpitum, 155 pumex, 192
448
INDEX II
punctum, 270; 304; 320-321 punctum (extra)ordinarium, 305 punctum taxatum, 320 pungere, 199; 207 qu(a)estio, 120; 121; 126; 220; 225; 258; 259; 292; 294; 322-325; 327; 328; 340; 401 qu(a)estio a/de quolibet, 326; 328 qu(a)estio disputata, 230; 256-259; 261; 294; 324; 326; 343; 344 qu(a)estio in aula, 315 qu(a)estio legitima, 322 qu(a)estio quodlibetalis/ -ica/ -aria, 326; 327; 328 qu(a)estio redacta, 322; 334 qu(a)estio reportata, 322 qu(a)estio resumpta, 284 quadrivium (-druvium), 356; 359; 364-366; 384; 400; 406 quaerere, 324 quaestor, 100 quaternio, 190-191; 195 quaterniolus, 190 quaterniunculus, 190 quaternulus, 190 quaternus (-num), 187; 188; 190-191 quattuor, 191 questionista, 120-121; 371 quilibet, 328 quinio, 190 quinternus, 190 quodlibet, 259; 322; 326-328 quodlibet in/de Natali, 326 quodlibet in/de Pascha, 326 quodlibetalis, 326-328 quodlibetarius, 326-328 quodlibeticus, 326-328 quolibet, 233; 259; 326; 328 radere, 192-193 rasorium, 192 ratio, 258; 358 rationes dictandi, 363 reales, 378
realistae, 378 reassumere, 50 receptor, 100-101; 107 recipere conventum, 270 recitare, 245 recitator, 86 recolligere, 333; 334 rector, 38; 46; 57; 73; 100; 102; 105; 106; 107; i n ; 113; 114; 118; 122-125; 134; 203; 209; 330 rector citramontanorum, 123 rector scolarum, 122; 125 rector ultramontanorum, 123 rectoratus, 124 rectoria, -ius, 124 redactio, 334 redigere, 334 reformator, 69 reformator bacallariorum, 69 reformator studii, 69 regens, 76; 86; 293; 304; 329; 330 regentia, 330 regere, 65; 75; 76; 86; 122; 128; 132; 139; 141; 293; 304; 329-330 regere (extra)ordinarie, 329 regere in grammatica, 329 regere in theologia, 329 regerere, 177; 350 regestum (-trum), 175; 177; 348-350 regimen, 48; 329-330 regimen scolarum, 48 registrare, 349 registrator, 349 registrum (-turn), 103; 175-177; 348remissorium, 331 remittere, 331 reperire, 176; 177; 331 repertorium, 175-177; 331-332; 348; 349 repetitio, 268 repetitor, 86 reportare, 253; 324; 333-335 reportatio, 107; 253; 333-335 reportator, 333-335
449 reportatorium, 177; 331; 332 reportorium, 177; 331; 332 repositor librorum, 180 repositorium, 155 representare (-atio), 313 rescribere, 192-193; 198 rescriptum, 198 respondens, 233; 250; 257; 258; 283; 298; 301-303; 315; 318; 341 respondere, 120; 259; 301-303 respondere de questione, 120; 259; 302 respondere de sophismatibus, 120; 259; 302
responsio, 301; 303 resumentes, 283 resumere, 50; 282-284 resumpta, 284 resumptio, 50; 282-284 rhetor, 121; 404-405 rhetorica, 362; 376; 404-405 rhetoricus, 405 rolla (-us), 127 rota (-to), 127 rotella, 127 rotula, 102; 103; 126-127; 211 rotuli nominandorum, 39; 126; 127 rotulus, 102; 103; 111; 126-127 ruber, 230 rubeus, 157 rubrica, 228-231 rubricare, 229 rubricella, 229 rudes, 77 ruminare (-atio), 292 sacra doctrina, 379-381 sacra pagina, 380 sacrae theologiae professor, 116 sacrista(-nus), 45; 180 sal, 56 salariare (-izare), 56 salariatus, 55 salarium, 55-56 sapiens deceptor, 121 sapientia, 358
sc(h)eda (schi-, sci-), 163; 194-195 sc(h)edarius, 194 sc(h)edula (schi, sci-), 163; 194-195 sc(h)ola, 41; 45; 75; 82; 95; 96; 109; 128-130; 131; 133; 134; 139; 141; 224; 225; 304 sc(h)ola canonica, 128 sc(h)ola cantorum, 130; 134 sc(h)ola claustralis, 128 sc(h)ola lectorum, 128 sc(h)ola monastica, 128 sc(h)ola palatina, 130; 131 sc(h)ola publica, 128 sc(h)ola scribendi, 128,131 sc(h)olaris, 54; 75; 86; 95; 96; 129; 131132; 133; 135; 136; 139; 224; 225; 318 sc(h)olaris collegiatus, 41 sc(h)olaris pauper, 131 sc(h)olas exercere, 128 sc(h)olas regere, 128; 141; 329 sc(h)olasticus, 45; 88; 96; 133-134 scalpellum, 161; 192 scalprum, 192 scamnum, 155 scholaster, 96 scholia, 277 scientia, 81; 358-360 scientia bene disputandi, 376 scientia disciplinalis, 359; 364 scientia doctrinalis, 359; 364 scientia iudicia(-ria)/ iudiciorum astrorum, 359; 373 scientia medicine, 402 scientia naturalis, 400 scientia scientiarum, 359; 377 scientia theor(et)ica, 401; 406 scientiae activae, 382 scientiae morales, 382 scientiae practicae, 382; 383; 406 scientiae productivae, 406 scientiae sermocinales, 364 scintilla, 237 scolarius, 131 scriba, 107; 196-197 scribens, 196
450
INDEX II
scribere, 197; 198-200; 264 scrinarius, 196 scrinium, 31 scriptor, 107; 196-197; 204 scriptorium, 160; 162; 173; 180; 182; 201-202
scriptrix, 196 scriptum, 163; 170 sculpare, 199 secundus lector, 35; 243 sedile, 155 sedis salariata, 55 senio, 190 senior, 71; 74 senior bursarius, 44 senior socius, 136 sensus, 307; 336; 339 sensus litteralis, 242; 295 sentenciare, 337 sententia, 142; 237; 294; 336-339 sententia in generali, 294 sententia in speciali, 294 sententia magistralis, 98; 337 sententiarius, 34; 85; 243; 338 sepia, 157 sermo, 309-312 sermocinalis (-cinandi), 364; 405 sermocinari, 312 serviens, 39; 68 sexternus, 190 significatum, 387 similitudo, 266; 273 simplex, 93 societas, 57; 104-106; 148 socius, 42; 43; 59; 75; 104; 129; 131; 132; 135-136; 334 solitarius, 382 solubile, 285 solutio, 250; 258; 323 solutiones contrarietatum, 226 solvere, 285 sophisma, 120; 121; 259; 275; 285; 322; 340-342; 346 sophista, 120-121; 371; 377 sophista generalis, 120
sophista in parviso, 120 sophistaria, 340-342 sophistes, 121 sophisticare (-catio), 342 speculativa, 359; 396; 400; 401; 406; 407 stallum, 155 statio, 38; 203-206; 209; 210 statio generalis, 203 statio publica, 203 statio universitatis, 203 stationarius, 38; 170; 171; 180; 181; 187; 188; 203-206; 210 stationarius librorum, 203; 204 stationarius peciarum, 181; 188; 203; 204 stationarius universitatis, 203 statuo, 137 statutarius, 137-138 statutum, 137-138 steriometria, 385 stilum ducere, 199 stilus (sty-, still-), 161,173-174; 207 stipendium, 55 stormentum, 164 studens, 75; 131; 132; 135; 139-140; 224; 318 studentes pauperes, 131 studere, 139-140; 224 studia arabica, 143 studia artium, 85; 142 studia ebraica, 143 studia exteriora, 141 studia generalia ex consuetudine, 143 studia generalia ex privilegio, 143 studia generalia provinciae, 85 studia generalia respectu regni, 143 studia grammaticalia, 85 studia in logicalibus, 142 studia in naturalia, 142 studia liberalium artium, 141 studia linguarum, 143 studia logicae novae, 85 studia logicalia, 85; 142 studia naturalium/ naturalia/ natu-
INDEX II
rarum, 85; 142 studia particulare theologiae, 142 studia particularia, 142 studia philosophiae, 85; 142 studia provincialia, 142 studia sollemnia, 85; 142 studia theologiae, 141 studium, 59; 82; 85; 101; 118; 128; 129; 141-144; 147; 311; 358; 379; 404 studium commune, 143 studium divinae paginae, divinae/ sacrae scripturae, divinorum librorum, 379 studium generate provinciae, 142 studium generale theologiae, 142 studium generale, 141-144; 147 studium romanae curae, 141 studium sacrae scripturae, 141 studium sapientiae, 141; 397 studium universale, 143 studium/ studia regere, 141; 329 stylo commendare, 264 subbedellus, 39 subconservator, 68 subcustos, 71 subdeterminator, 250-252 sublector, 35; 85; 243 subprocurator, 115 sumere, 198 summa, 142; 237; 336-339 summa dictaminis/ dictandi, 363 summa librorum, 176 summare, 339 summarius, 339 summator, 339 summula, 336; 339 sumptum, 198 suscipere conventum, 270 suspendere, 50-52 suspendium, 51; 52 suspensio, 50-52 syllogisabilis, 343; 344 syllogisare (-zare,-satio), 343; 344 syllogismus (sill-, sylo-, silo-), 343-344 syllogistice, 343
451
syncategorema, 285; 298; 340; 345347;378 syndicus, 107-108 syngrapha, 167 synonyma (sino-, seno, -nima, etc.), 280 t(h)eutonizare (-zatio), 287-289 tabella, 207 tabellae buxeae, 207 tabellio, 45; 196; 197 tabellula, 207; 349 tabula, 169; 175; 176; 207; 208; 240; 331; 348-350; 353; 385 tabula calculatoria, 353 tabula cera illita, 207 tabula cerata, 173; 207-208 tabulae de/ex ebore, 207 tabulare, 349 tabulator, 349 taxare, 83; 145-146 320 taxatio, 83; 145-146; 171; 188; 204; 209-210; 320 taxatio punctorum, 320 taxatio quatern(i)orum/ peciarum, 145 taxator, 145-146; 209-210 temptare, 271 temptator (temptor), 271 terministae, 378 terminus, 281; 377 ternio (-nus), 190 terraecultus, 368 testamentum, 163 theatrica, 367 theologare (-ari), 380; 381 theologia, 95; 96; 379-381; 397 theologicus, 380; 381 theologizare, 380; 381 theologus, 379-381 theoreticus, 368; 396; 400; 406-407 theorica, -us, 359; 393; 396; 400; 401; 406-407 theorici in physica, 401 thesaurarius, 180 thesaurus, 153
452
INDEX II
tincta (tinta), 157-158 titulare (-latio), 228; 230 tituli libromm, 176 titulus, 215; 228-231 tomellus (-ulus), 211 tomus (tho-), 211-212 tractare, 69 tractator (studii), 68-69 tractatus, 228; 238; 309 tradere in arnicas aures, 264 traducere, 287 ttanscopiare, 198 tianscribere, 193; 198-200 transcriptum, 198 transferre, 245; 287-289 translare, 334 translatare, 198; 287; 289 translatio, 287-289 translator, 287; 288; 289; 334 translatum, 198 transponere, 287 transsumere (-sumptum), 198 triplices, 208 trivium, 364-366; 386; 404; 406 trivium sapientiae, 366 Ultramontani, 38; 104; 105; 106; 107; 113; 122; 124; 137; 148 universitas, 57; 104; 129; 147-149 universitas doctorum, 147 universitas (magistrorum et) scolarium, 147 universus, 149 utrum ... an ..., 323 vacatio, 50; 296 vellum, 184 venatio, 367 venditores librorum, 204 vera et sancta philosophia, 395 verbum, 281; 345 veri et falsi iudicandi scientia, 376 verificare (-catio), 245 verissima philosophia, 395 versificandi, 362; 404
versificaria, 362 versus, 212 vertere, 287 vesper (-a), 317 vesperiandus, 316 vesperiare, 316 vesperie, 282; 283; 284; 315-317 vesperius (-tinus), 317 vicecancellarius, 46 vicecustos, 71 vicenarius, 73 vis confundendi, 346 vita theologica, 380 vitulinum (-nium), 184 vocabularium (-us), 279-281; 331; 348 vocabulum, 280; 281 volumen, 103; 127; 168; 170; 178; 211212 volvere, 127; 211; 212 vomer, 173 vox, 281 vulgarizare (-sare), 287-289 vulgarizatio, 287-289 yconomus, 44; 115
Select Bibliography Dictionaries BLAISE, Diet. BLAISE, Lex.
DML DuC.
FORC.
A. B L A I S E , Dictionnaire latin-francais des auteurs chretiens, Turnhout 19672 A. BLAISE, Lexicon Latinitatis Medii Aevi, (Corpus Christianorum Continuatio Mediaevalis), Turnhout 1975 Dictionary of Medieval Latin from the British Sources, R . E . LATHAM & D.R. H O W L E T T (eds.), London, Oxford 1975Ch.
DUFRESNE,
SEIGNEUR
DU
CANGE,
Glossarium Mediae et Infimae Latinitatis, revised edition by L. FAVRE [et al.], 10 vols., Niort, London 1883-1887 E . F O R C E L L I N I (ed.), Totius latinitatis lexicon, 4 vols., Padua 1771; revised edition by F. C O R R A D I N I & J . P E R I N , 6 vols., 1864-
Gloss.Med.Lat. Cataloniae
1926; several reprints Glossarium Mediae Latinitatis Cataloniae, M.BASSOLS
D E C L I M E N T , J . BASTARDAS PARERA, E. R O D O N B I L U E [et al.], Barcelona
Gloss.Med.Lat. Sueciae
1960Glossarium Mediae Latinitatis Sueciae, U. W E S T E R B E R G H & E . O D E L M A N , Stockholm
Handwbrterbuch der mus. Term.
LATHAM
LE ROBERT
1968Handworterbuch der musikalischen Terminologie, H . H . E G G E B R E C H T (ed.), Wiesbaden 1972R.E. LATHAM, Revised Medieval Latin WordList from British and Irish Sources, London, etc. 1965 P. ROBERT, Dictionnaire alphabetique et analogique de la langue frangaise, 7 vols., Paris 1966-1970
454
BIBLIOGRAPHY
LEWIS & SHORT
C.T. LEWIS & C. SHORT, A Latin Dictionary, Oxford 1980*
Lex.Lat.Med.Aev. Hungariae
Lexicon Latinitatis MediiAevi Hungariae, J. HARMATTA, I . B O R O N K A I [et al.], Budapest
Lex.Lat.Med.Aev. lugoslaviae
Lex.Lat.Ned. MediiAevi
Lex.Med. et Inf. Lot. Polonorum
LSJ
MW NG
1987Lexicon Latinitatis Medii Aevi lugoslaviae, V. GORTAN & M. KOSTRENCIC, 2 vols., Zagreb 1969-1978 Lexicon Latinitatis Nederlandicae Medii Aevi, J.W. FUCHS, O. WEIJERS & M . G U M BERT-HEPP, Leiden 1970Lexicon Mediae etlnfimae Latinitatis Polonorum, M . PLEZI (ed.) [et al.], Krakow 1953H.G. LIDDELL, R. SCOTT, H.S. JONES [et al.], A Greek-English Lexicon, Oxford 19251968 Mittellateinisches Wdrterbuch, O . P R I N Z , J . S C H N E I D E R & T. PAYR (eds.), Miinchen 1959Novum Glossarium Mediae Latinitatis, F. BLATT, Y. LEFEVRE & J . MONFRIN (eds.),
Copenhagen, Geneva 1957NlERM.
OLD OED SOUTER TLL Tresor de la langue francaise
J.F. N I E R M E Y E R , Mediae Latinitatis Lexicon Minus, Leiden 1984* Oxford Latin Dictionary, P.G.W. G L A R E (ed.), Oxford 1968-1982 The Oxford English Dictionary, A. S I M P S O N & E.S.C. W E I N E R , 20 vols., 2nd ed., Oxford 1989 A . SOUTER, A Glossary of Later Latin to 600 A.D., Oxford 1949 Thesaurus Linguae Latinae, F. V O L L M E R , E . B I C K E L [et al.], Leipzig 1900Tresor de la langue frangaise, P. I M B S (ed.) [et al.], 16 vols., Paris 1971-1994
BIBLIOGRAPHY
455
Encyclopedias and general works of reference The Cambridge Dictionary of Philosophy, R. A U D I (ed.), Cambridge 1995 The Dictionary of the Middle Ages, J . R . STRAYER (ed.) [et al.], 12 vols., 1982-1989 Dictionnaire d'archeologie chretienne et de liturgie, F. C A B R O L & H . L E C L E R C Q (eds.), 15 vols., 1903-1953
Dictionnaire de spiritualite, ascetique et mystique: Doctrine et histoire, M . V I L L E R , F. CAVALLERA & J . D E G U I B E R T (eds.) [et al.], 17 vols., 1932-1995 Historisches Worterbuch der Philosophic, J . R I T T E R & K . G R U N D E R (eds.), 1971Lexikon desMittelalters, R. A U T Y (ed.) [et al.], 10 vols., 1980-1999 Die Musik in Geschichte und Gegenwart: Allgemeine Enzyklopadie der Musik, L. FINSCHER (ed.), 1994- (new edition) New Catholic Encyclopedia, N . J . L A C Y (ed.) [et al.], 17 vols., 2nd ed. 1991 Paulys Realencyclopddie der classischen Altertumswissenscha.fi, A. PAULY & G . W I S S O W A (eds.) [et al.], 1894-
Books and articles J J . G . A L E X A N D E R &C M . T . G I B S O N (eds.), Medieval Learning and Literature. Essays presented to R. W Hunt, Oxford 1976 A . A L L A R D , La formation du vocabulaire latin de I'arithmetique medievale, CIVICIMA I I I (1990), pp. 137-181 G . H . A L L A R D , Les arts mecaniques aux yeux de I'ideologie medievale, in: G . H . A L L A R D & S. L U S I G N A N (eds.), Les arts mecaniques au moyen age, (Cahiers d'etudes medievales 7), Montreal, Paris 1982, pp. 15-19 G . H . A L L A R D S. L U S I G N A N (eds.), Les arts mecaniques au moyen Age, (Cahiers d'etudes medievales 7), Montreal, Paris 1982 G . C . A L E S S I O , 'Rhetorica ad Herennium', Lexikon des Mittelalters 7, col. 785786 M . A M S L E R , Etymology and Grammatical Discourse in Late Antiquity and the Early Middle Ages, Amsterdam 1989 G . M . A R M S T R O N G , 'Proverbs and Sententiae', Dictionary of the Middle Ages 10, pp. 189-192 G . A R N A L D I , Introduction, CIVICIMA V (1992), pp. 9-12 Arts liberaux et philosophic au moyen Age, (Actes du quatrieme congres international de philosophic medievale), Montreal, Paris 1969
456
BIBLIOGRAPHY
E . J . A S H W O R T H , Les manuels de logique a I'universite d'Oxford aux XIV et XV siecles, in: J . H A M E S S E (ed.), Manuels, programmes de cours et techniques d'enseignement dans les universites medievales, Louvain-la-Neuve 1994, pp. 351370 A. BARBERA (ed.), Music Theory and Its Sources: Antiquity and the Middle Ages,
Notre Dame 1990 G . BARONE, Les convents des Mendiants, des colleges deguises?, CIV1CIMA V I (i993). pp- 149-157 L . J . BATAILLON, Les instruments des predkateurs au XIIP siecle, in: G . H A S E N O H R & J . L O N G E R E (eds.), Culture et travail intellectual dans I'Occident medieval, Paris 1981, pp. 179-209 —, Intermediates entre les traites de morale pratique et les sermons: les 'distinctiones' bibliques alphabetiques, in: Les genres litteraires dans les sources theologiques et philosophiques au moyen age, Louvain-la-Neuve 1982, pp. 213-226 —, Exemplar, pecia, quaternus, CIVICIMA II (1989), pp. 206-219 L.J. BATAILLON, B.G. GUYOT & R.H. ROUSE (eds.), La production du livre universitaire au moyen age. Exemplar et pecia, (Actes du symposium tenu au
Collegio San Bonaventura de Grottaferrata en mai 1983), Paris 1988 B.C. BAZAN, G. FRANSEN, D. JACQUART & J.W. WIPPEL, Les questions disputees et les questions quodlibetiques dans les Facultes de theologie, de droit et de medecine, (Typologie des sources du Moyen Age occidental 44-45),Turnhout 1985 J.P. B E C K M A N N , 'Logik', Lexikon des Mittelalters 5, col. 2071-2077 —, 'Metaphysik', Lexikon des Mittelalters 6, col. 570-576 —, 'Philosophic A. Westen', Lexikon des Mittelalters 6, col. 2086-2092 R.L. BENSON & G. CONSTABLE (eds.), Renaissance and Renewal in the Twelfth Century, Oxford 1982 W . B E R G M A N N , 'Komputistik', Lexikon des Mittelalters 5, col. 1293-1295 N . B E R I O U , Les sermons latins apres 1200, in: B . M . K I E N Z L E (ed.), The Sermon, (Typologie des sources du Moyen Age occidental 81-83), Turnhout 2000, pp. 363-447 G . BERNDT, Artes liberales', Lexikon des Mittelalters 1, col. 1058-106 —, 'auctor', 'auctoritas', Lexikon des Mittelalters 1, col. 1189-1190 L . B I O N D I , Lat. 'ethimologista': notes pour une histoire du mot, in: Archivum Latinitatis Medii Aevi 59 (2001), pp. 161-173 H . H . BIESTERFELDT, Zur medizinischen Terminologie des arabisch-islamischen Mittelalters, CIVICIMA V I I (1994), pp. 66-90
BIBLIOGRAPHY
457
B . B I S C H O F F , Zur Fruhgeschichte des mittelalterlichen Chirographum, in: Archivalische Zeitschrift 50/51 (1955), pp. 297-300 (repr. in Mittelalterliche Studien I, Stuttgart 1966, pp. 118-122) —, Paldographie des romischen Altertums und des abendldndischen Mittelalters, Miinchen 19862 J . - G . B O U G E R O L , De la 'reportatw a Lt 'redactio'(Saint Bonaventure, Qu.disp. 'De perfectione evangelka, q. 2, a. 2 dans les Hats successifs du texte), in: Les genres litte'raires dans les sources theologiques etphilosophiques medievales, Louvain-laNeuve 1982, pp. 51-65 P. BouRGAiN, La naissance officielle de I'oeuvre: I'expression me'taphorique de la mise aujour, CrVTCIMA II (1989), pp. 195-205 C M . B O W E R , 'Quadrivium', Dictionary of the Middle Ages 10, pp. 237-238 L . E . B O Y L E , 'Decretists', New Catholic Encyclopedia 4, pp. 711-713 —, Introduction, CTVICIMA II (1989), pp. 9-10 —, The Friars and Reading in Public, CTVJCIMA IX (1999), pp. 8-15 H . A . G . B R A A K H U I S , Deludeeeutvse tractaten oversyncategorematische termen. Inleidende studie en uitgave van Nicolaas van Parijs Sincategoreumata, (Doctoral Thesis University of Leiden), Meppel 1979 —, Logica modernorum as a Discipline at the Faculty of Arts of Paris in the Thirteenth Century, in: O . W E I J E R S & L . H O L T Z (eds.), L'enseignement des disciplines a la Faculte des Arts (Paris et Oxford, XIIP-XV* siecles), (Studia Artistarum 4), Turnhout 1997, pp. 129-145 D . J . M . BRADLEY, 'Philosophy and Theology, Western European: to M i d Twelfth Century', Dictionary of the Middle Ages 9, pp. 582-590 P. B R A N D , Learning English Customary Law: Education in the London Law School, 1250-1500, CTVICIMA V I I I (1995), pp. 199-213 C . B R E M O N D , J . L E G O F F 6C J . - C . S C H M I T T , L'Exempluni, (Typologie des Sources du Moyen Age occidental 40), Turnhout 1982 H . B R I N K M A N N , Verhullung (Integumentum) als literarische Darstellungsform
im Mittelalter, in: A. ZIMMERMANN & G . VUILLEMIN-DIEM (eds.), Der Begrijfder Reprdsentatio im Mittelalter: Stellvertretung, Symbol, Zeichen, Bild, (Miscellanea mediaevalia 8), Berlin, etc. 1971, pp. 314-339 —, Mittelalterliche Hermeneutik, Tubingen 1980 M . G . B R I S C O E , Artespraedicandi, in: M . G . B R I S C O E & B . H . JAYE, Artespraedicandi and artes orandi, (Typologie des sources du Moyen Age occidental 61), Turnhout 1992, pp. 11-76
458
BIBLIOGRAPHY
M . G . B R I S C O E & B . H . JAYE, Artespraedicandi and artes orandi, (Typologie des sources du Moyen Age occidental 61), Turnhout 1992 S.F. B R O W N , Key Terms in Medieval Theological Vocabulary, CTVICIMA I I I (1990), pp. 82-96 —, Theology and Philosophy, in: F.A.C. M A N T E L L O & A . G . R I G G (eds.), Medieval Latin. An Introduction and Bibliographical Guide, Washington 1996, pp. 267287 R. B U L L , DasgrofieBuch vom Wachs. Geschichte, Kultur, Technik,Teil 2, Miinchen 1977 C . B U R I D A N T , Lexicographie et glossographie medievales. Esquisse de bilan et perspectives de recherche, in: La lexicographie du latin medieval et ses rapports avec les recherches actuelles sur la civilisation du moyen age, Paris 1981, pp. 9-46 — (ed.), L'etymologie de TAntiquite a la Renaissance, (Lexique 14), [n.p.] 1998 Ch. B U R N E T T , The Institutional Context of Arabic-Latin Translations of the Middle Ages: a Reassessment of the 'School of Toledo', CTVICIMAYWl (1995), pp. 214-
—, Astrology, in: F.A.C. MANTELLO & A.G. R I G G (eds.), Medieval Latin. An Introduction and Bibliographical Guide, Washington 1996, pp. 369-382 M . C A M A R G O , Ars dictaminis, ars dictandi, (Typologie des sources du Moyen Age occidental 60), Turnhout 1991 A . M . CARABIAS T O R R E S , The Vocabulary of the Spanish 'Colegios Mayores' during the Middle and the Modern Age, CTVICIMAVl (1993), pp. 90-114 J . I . C A T T O (ed.), The History of the University of Oxford I , The Early Oxford Schools, Oxford 1984 J . I . C A T T O & R . E V A N S (eds.), The History of the University of Oxford I I , Late Medieval Oxford, Oxford 1992 J . C H A T I L L O N , La Bible dans les ecoles duXIP siecle, in: P. R I C H E & G . L O B R I C H O N (eds.), Le Moyen Age et la Bible, (Bible de Tous les temps 4), Paris 1984, pp. 163-197 —, Desarticulation et restructuration des textes a I'epoque scolastique, in: R. L A U F E R (ed.), La notion deparagraphe, Paris 1985, pp. 24-40 M . - D . C H E N U , Auctor, actor, autor, in: Bulletin Du Cange 3 (1927), pp. 81-86 —, Notes de lexicographie philosophique medievale. Disciplina, in: Revue des sciences philosophiques et theologiques 25 (1936), pp. 686-692 —, Involucrum. Le mythe selon les theologiens me'dievaux, in: Archives d'histoire doctrinale et litteraire du moyen age 22 (1955), pp. 75-79
BIBLIOGRAPHY
S.
CHODOROW,
459
'Law, Canon: after Gratian, Dictionary of the Middle Ages j, pp.
413-418 N . C L A G E T T , The Science of Mechanics in the Middle Ages, Madison 1961 J.A. C L A R E N C E S M I T H , Medieval Law Teachers and Writers: Civilian and Canonist, Ottawa 1975 H . C O I N G , Handbuch der Quellen und Litemtur der neueren europdischen Privatrechtsgeschichte, Band I, Miinchen 1973 M . C O L I S H , From the Sentence Collection to the Sentence Commentary and the Summa: Parisian Scholastic Theology, 1130-1215, in: J . H A M M E S S E (ed.), Manuels, programmes de cours et techniques d'enseignement dans les universite's medievales, Louvain-la-Neuve 1994, pp. 9-29 V. Coixi, Termini del dirrito civile, CTVTCIMA I I I , pp. 231-242 Y. CONGAR, Pour une histoire semantique du terme 'magisterium', in: Revue des sciences philosophiques et theologiques 60 (1976), pp. 85-98 —, Bref historique des formes du 'magistere' et de ses relations avec les docteurs, in: Revue des sciences philosophiques et theologiques 60 (1976), pp. 99-112 G . C O N T A M I N E (ed.), Traduction et traducteurs au Moyen Age, (Actes du colloque international du C N R S 1986), Paris 1989 E . C . C O P P E N S , L'interpretation analogique des termes de droit romain en droit canonique medieval, CTVICIMA I, pp. 54-64 P. C O U R C E L L E , La Consolation de Philosophic dans la tradition litteraire. Antecedents etposterite de Boece, Paris 1967 W J . C O U R T E N A Y , Programs of Study and Genres of Scholastic Theological Production in the Fourteenth Century, in: J . H A M E S S E (ed.), Manuels, programmes de cours et techniques d'enseignement dans les universites medievales, Louvain-la-Neuve 1994, pp. 325-350 —, The Arts Faculty at Paris in 132P, in: O . W E I J E R S & L . H O L T Z (eds.), L'enseignement des disciplines a la Faculte des arts (Paris et Oxford, XIIP-XV^ siecles), (Studia Artistarum 4), Turnhout 1997, pp. 55-69 I . C R A E M E R - R U E G E N B E R G & A. S P E E R (eds.), Scientia und ars im Hoch- und Spdtmittelalter 1-2, (Miscellanea Mediaevalia 22/1-2), Berlin, New York 1994 V. C R E S C E N Z I , Linguaggio scientifico e terminologia giuridica nei glossatori bolognesi: 'interpretari', 'interpretation CIVLCIMA V (1992), pp. 111-129 M . C R I S T I A N I , Le vocabulaire de I'enseignement dans la correspondance d'Alcuin, CIVICIMA V (1992), pp. 13-32 G . D A H A N & I . R O S I E R - C A T A C H , La 'Rhetorique d'Aristote: traditions et commentaries, de I'Antiquite au XVTP siecle, Paris 1998
460
BIBLIOGRAPHY
L . W . D A L Y , Contributions to a History of Alphabetization in Antiquity and the Middle Ages, (Collection Latomus 90), Bruxelles 1967 L . W . D A L Y & B.A. D A L Y , Some Techniques in Mediaeval Latin Lexicography, in: Speculum 39 (1964), pp. 229-239 A. D E L I B E R A SC B . M O J S I S C H , 'Dialektik', Lexikon des Mittelalters 2, col. 944946 L . D E M A I T R E , 'Medicine, Schools of, Dictionary of the Middle Ages 8, pp. 254261 P. D E N L E Y , The vocabulary of Italian colleges to i$oo, CLVICIMA V I (1993), pp. 72-79 A . D E R O L E Z , Les catalogues de biliotheques, (Typologie des sources du Moyen Age occidental 31), Turnhout 1979 —, 'Pecia, petia', Lexikon des Mittelalters 6, col. 1847-1848 A . D E R O L E Z & G . B E R N T , 'Bibliothek', Lexikon des Mittelalters 2, col. 113 J . D E S T R E Z , La pecia dans les manuscrits universitaires des XIIP et XIV siecles, Paris 1935 A . C . D I O N I S O T T I , Hellenismus, CLVICIMA V I I I (1995), pp. 45-58 F. D O L B E A U , Noms de livres, CIVICIMA I I (1989), pp. 79-99 —, Le role des interpretes dans les traductions hagiographiques d'Ltalie du Sud, in: C . C O N T A M I N E (ed.), Traduction et traducteurs au Moyen Age, (Actes du colloque international du C N R S 1986), Paris 1989, pp. 145-162 S. D O N A T I & A . S P E E R , 'Physik und Naturphilosophie', Lexikon des Mittelalters 6, c o l . 2111-2117
P D R O N K E (ed.), A History of Twelfth-Century Western Philosophy, Cambridge 1988 W . D U N P H Y , 'Philosophy and Theology, Western European: Thirteenth-Century Crisis', Dictionary of the Middle Ages 9, pp. 606-608 S. E B B E S E N , The Way Fallacies were treated in Scholastic Logic, in: Cahiers de I'institut du moyen-dge grec et latin 55 (Copenhague 1987), pp. 107-134 R.Y. E B I E D & M . J . L . Y O U N G , New Light on the Origin of the Term 'Baccalaureate', in: The Islamic Quarterly 18 (1974), PP- 3"7 A . E S P O S I T O , / collegi universitari de Roma: progetti e realizzazioni tra XIV e XV secolo, CIVICIMA VI (1993), pp. 80-89 G . R . E V A N S , Theology: The Vocabulary of Teaching and Research 1300-1600: Words and Concepts, CIVICIMA V I I I (1995), pp. 118-133 R. F E E N S T R A , 'Legum doctor', 'legum professor' et 'magister' comme termespour designer des juristes au moyen age, CIVICIMA I (1988), pp. 72-77
BIBLIOGRAPHY
461
R. FERRARA, 'Licentia exercendi'edessamedi notariato a Bologna nelsecolo XIII, in: Notariato Medievale Bolognese I I , Roma 1977, pp. 49-120 H . F I C H T E N A U , 'Arenga', Lexikon des Mittelalters 1, col. 917-918 J . M . F L E T C H E R , The Faculty of Arts, in: J . I . CATTO (ed.), The History of the University of Oxford I, The Early Oxford Schools, Oxford 1984, pp. 369-399 —, Some Problems of Collecting Terms used in Medieval Academic Life as illustrated by the Evidence for Certain Exercises in the Faculty of Arts at Oxford in the Late Middle Ages, CIVICIMA 1 (1988), pp. 47-53 —, The Vocabulary of Administration and Teaching at Merton College, Oxford, at the Close of the Middle Ages, CIVICIMA VI (1993), pp. 46-58 Chr. F L U E L E R , Die verschiedenen literarischen Gattungen derAristoteleskommentare: zur Terminologie der Uberschriften und Kolophone, in: J . H A M M E S S E (ed.), Manuels, programmes de cours et techniques d'enseignement dans les universites medievales, Louvain-la-Neuve 1994, pp. 75-116 M . FOLKERTS & E.A. N E U E N S C H W A N D E R , 'Rechenkunst', Lexikon des Mittelalters 7, col. 502-508 J . C . FRAKES, Remigius ofAuxerre, Eriugena, and the Greco-Latin CircumstantiaeFormula of Accessus ad Auctores, in: M . W . H E R R E N (ed.), The Sacred Nectar of the Greeks: the Study of Greek in the West in the Early Middle Ages, (King's College London Medieval Studies 2), London 1988, pp. 229-255
G. FRANSEN & D. MAFFEI, Harangues universitaires du XIV siecle, in: Studi Senesi 53 (3 rd Series, N o . 20) (1971), pp. 7-22 G . F R A N S E N , La lexicographie du droit canonique medieval (1140-1400), i n : La lexicographie du latin medieval et ses rapports avec les recherches actuelles sur la civilisation du moyen age, Paris 1981, pp. 191-196 K.M. FREDBORG, 'Speculative Grammar', in: P. DRONKE (ed.), A History of
Twelfth-Century Western Philosophy, Cambridge 1988, pp. 177-195 A.F. FRIAS & B.F. DA COSTA M A R Q U E S , "Theohgid, 'scientid et 'ars' dans les Sermones de frater Pelagius Parvus Colimbriensis, O.P., CIVICIMA IX (1999), pp. 16-25
W . F R O B E N I U S , Methoden und Hilfimittel mittelalterlicher Musiktheorie und ihr Vokabular, CIVICIMA I I I (1990), pp. 121-136 —, 'Ars antiqua, Die Musik in Geschichte und Gegenwart 1, Kassel etc. 1994, cols. 865-877 C . FROVA, Le scuole municipali all'epoca delle universita, CIVICIMA V (1992), pp. 177-190
462
BIBLIOGRAPHY
M . - C . G A R A N D , Manuscrits monastiques et scriptoria aux Xf et XIF siecles, in: Codicologica 3 (1980), pp. 8-33
A. G A R C I A Y GARCIA, La terminologia en las Facultades Juridicas Ibericas, CIVICIMA I (1988), pp. 65-71 —, Generos juridico-litemrios en la Peninsula Iberica, CTVJCIMA I I I (1990), pp. 97-103
—, Vocabulario de las escuelas en la Peninsula Iberica, CWICIMA V (1992), pp. 157-176
P. GASNAULT, Les supports et les instruments de I'ecriture a I'epoque medievale,
CIVICIMA II (1989), pp. 20-33 P. G A U T I E R D A L C H E , Geographic et culture. La representation de I'espace du VT au XIIe si'ecle, (Variorum Collected Studies Series CS 592), Aldershot 1997 J.-F. G E N E S T , Le mobilier des bibliotheques d'apres les inventaires medievaux, CIVICIMA II (1989), pp. 136-154 L. G I A R D , La constitution du systeme educatifjesuite au XVP siecle, CIVICIMA V I (1993), pp. 131-148
—, Comment Pietro Catena lit les 'loca mathematicd d'Aristote (Padoue 1556),
CIVICIMA VIII (1995), pp. 151-171 J . GILCHRIST, Canon Law, in: F.A.C. MANTEIXO & A.G. R I G G (eds.), Medieval Latin. An Introduction and Bibliographical Guide, Washington 1996, pp. 241253 G . G L A U C H E , Schullekture im Mittelalter, (Miinchener Beitrage zur Mediavistikund Renaissance Forschung 5), Miinchen 1970 —, 'Accessus ad auctores', Lexikon des Mittelalters 1, col. 71-72 P. G L O R I E U X , La litterature quodlibetique de 1260 a 1320, Tome I , Kain 1925; La litterature quodlibetique, Tome I I , Paris 1935 —, Le Quodlibet et sesprocedes re'dactionnels, in: Divus Thomas 42 (1939), pp. 6193 —, 'Sentences and Summa', New Catholic Encyclopedia, pp. 94-96 —, L'enseignement au moyen age. Techniques et methodes en usage a la Faculte de Theologie de Paris, au Xllle siecle, in: Archives d'histoire doctrinale et litteraire du moyen age 35 (1968), p. 65-186 J . G O D W I N , Harmony of Heaven and Earth, London 1986 D . G O R C E , La lectio divina des origines du Cenobitisme a Saint Benoit et Cassiodore,
Wepion-sur-Meuse, Paris 1925 N . G O R O C H O V , Le college de Navarre de safondation (1305) au debut du XV siecle (1418): histoire de I'institution, de sa vie intellectuelle et de son recrutement, {Etudes d'histoire medievale 1), Paris 1997
BIBLIOGRAPHY
463
T. G O T T L I E B , IJber Mittelalterliche Bibliotheken, Leipzig 1890 M . G R A B M A N N , Die Sophismatalitemtur des 12. und 13. Jahrhunderts mit Textausgabe eines Sophisma des Boetius von Dacien, (Beitrage zur Geschichte der Philosophic und Theologie des Mittelalters 36.1), Miinster 1940 J . J . E . G R A C I A , 'Scholasticism and Scholastic Method', Dictionary of the Middle Ages 11, p. 57 E . G R A N T , Astronomy, Cosmology and Cosmography, in: F.A.C. M A N T E L L O & A . G . R I G G (eds.), Medieval Latin. An Introduction and Bibliographical Guide, Washington 1996, pp. 363-368 R. G R E E N , O.F.M., An Introduction to the Logical Treatise De obligationibus, with Critical Texts ofWilliam of Sherwood (?) and Walther Burley, unpublished thesis, Catholic University of Louvain 1963 T. G R E G O R Y , Lessico Intellettuale Europeo: Recherches sur la terminologie intellectuelle du moyen age, CIVICIMA I (1988), pp. 97-105 H . G R E I V E , Astrologie', Lexikon des Mittelalters 1, col. 1137-1145 L.P. G R I J P & P. S C H E E P E R S (eds.), Van Aristoxenos tot Stockhausen 1: Van Oudheid tot Renaissance, Groningen 1990
A. GRONDEUX, '81. La Grammatica positiva dans le Bas Moyen-Age', in: S. AUROUX, E.EK. KOERNER, H.-J. N I E D E R E H E & K. VERSTEEGH (eds.), History of the Language Sciences. An International Handbook on the Evolution of the Study of Language from the Beginnings to the Present, Berlin, New York 2000, pp. 598-610 J . G R U B E R & E . P E R E Z R O D R I G U E Z , 'Grammatik', Lexikon des Mittelalters 4, col. 1637-1645 K . G R U B M U L L E R , Etymologie als Schliisselzur Welt? Bemerkungen zur Sprachtheorie
des Mittelalters, in: H . FROMM, W. HARMS & U . RUBERG (eds.), Verbum et signum. Beitrage zur medidvistischen Bedeutungsforschung I, Miinchen 1975, pp. 209-230 H . G R U N D M A N N , Litteratus — illitteratus. Der Wandel einer Bildungsnorm vom Altertum zum Mittelalter, originally in Archiv fur Kulturgeschichte TO (1958), reprinted in Ausgewdhlte Aufsdtze 3, Bildung und Sprache, (Schriften der M G H , Band 25.3), Stuttgart 1978, pp. 1-66 —, Die Frauen und die Literatur im Mittelalter. Ein Beitrag zur Frage nach der Entstehung des Schrifitums in der Volkssprache, originally in: Archiv fur Kulturgeschichte 26.2 (1935), reprinted in Ausgewdhlte Aufsdtze 3, Bildung und Sprache, (Schriften der M G H , Band 25.3), Stuttgart 1978, pp. 67-95
464
BIBLIOGRAPHY
B . G U E N E E , Lo storico e la compilazione nelXIII secolo, in: C . L E O N A R D I & G . O R L A N D I (eds.)> Aspetti delta ktteratum latina nel secolo XIII, Perugia 1986, pp. 57-76 J.P. G U M B E R T , Le texte intellectuel, sa forme physique et les termes du metier, CTVICIMA I (1988), pp. 96-104 —, La page intelligible: quelques remarques, CIVICIMA II (1989), pp. 111-119 O . G U Y O T J E A N N I N , Le vocabulaire de la diplomatique en latin medieval, CIVICIMA II (1989), pp. 120-134 0 . G U Y O T J E A N N I N , J . P Y C K E & B . - M . T O C K , Diplomatique medievale, (L'Atelier du medieviste 2), Turnhout 1993 M . B . H A C K E T T , The University as a Corporate Body, in: J . I . CATTO (ed.), The History of the University of Oxford!, The Early Oxford Schools, Oxford 1984, PP- 37-95 1. H A J N A L , L'enseignement de I'ecriture aux universites medievales, (2nd revised edi-
tion by L. M E Z E Y ) , Budapest 1959 J . H A M E S S E , Les florileges philosophiques du XIIP au XV siecle, in: Les genres litteraires dans les sources the'ologiques et philosophiques medievales. Definition, critique, exploitation, Louvain-la-Neuve 1982, pp. 181-191 —, 'Reportatio' et transmission de textes, in: M . ASZTALOS (ed.), The Editing of Theological and Philosophical Texts from the Middle Ages, Stockholm 1986, pp. 11-34 —, 'Collatio' et 'reportatio': deux vocables specifiques de la vie intellectuelle au moyen age, CTVICIMA I (1988), pp. 78-87 —, Le vocabulaire de la transmission orale des textes, CTVICIMA II (1989), pp. 168-194
—, Le vocabulaire des florileges medievaux, CIVICIMA I I I (1990), pp. 209-230 — (ed.), Manuels, programmes de cours et techniques d'enseignement dans les universites medievales, Louvain-la-Neuve 1994 —, Scientia et ars dans le 'Libri Sententiarium de Pierre Lombard. Approche lexicographique, in: I . C R A E M E R - R U E G E N B E R G & A . S P E E R (eds.), Scientia und ars im Hoch- und Spdtmittelalter 1, (Miscellanea Mediaevalia 22/1), Berlin, New York 1994, pp. 29-44 —, Approche terminologique de certaines methodes d'enseignement et de recherche a la fin du moyen age. 'Declarare', 'Recitare', 'Conclusio', CIVICIMA V I I I (1995), pp. 8-28 — (ed.), Les manuscripts des lexiques et glossaires de I'antiquite tardive a la fin du moyen age, (Textes et etudes du moyen age 4), Louvain-la-Neuve 1996
BIBLIOGRAPHY
465
—, La technique de la reportation, in: O . W E I J E R S & L. H O L T Z (eds.), L'enseignement des disciplines a la Faculte des arts (Paris et Oxford, XTIP-XV^ siecles), (Studia Artistarum 4),Turnhout 1997, pp. 405-421 —, La terminologie dominicaine a-t-elle eu une influence stir la terminologie cistercienne dans le domaine de la transmission du savoir?, CLVICLMA IX (1999), pp. 26-44 G . H A S E N O H R & J . L O N G E R E (eds.), Culture et travail intellectuel dans I'Occident medieval, Paris 1981 N . HATHAWAY, Compilatio: from Plagiarism to Compiling, in: Viator 20 (1989), pp. 19-44 L . H I C K M A N , 'Insolubilia', Historisches Worterbuch der Philosophic, Band 4, col. 396-400 M . M . H I L D E B R A N D T , The External School in Carolingian Society, (Education and Society in the Middle Ages and Renaissance 1), Leiden, New York, Koln 1992 L . H O D L & J . V E R G E R , 'Disputatio(n)', Lexikon des Mittelalters 3, col. 1116-1120 M . J . F . M . H O E N E N , J . H . S C H N E I D E R & G . W I E L A N D (eds.), Philosophy and Learning. Universities in the Middle Ages, (Education and Society in the Middle Ages and Renaissance 6), Leiden, New York, KSln 1995 L . H O L T Z , Donat et la tradition de I'enseignement grammatical. Etudes sur I'Ars Donati et sa diffusion (IV-D? siecle) et edition critique, Paris 1981 L . H O N N E F E L D E R , Der zweite Anfang der Metaphysik. Voraussetzungen, Ansdtze und Folgen der Wiederbegrundung der Metaphysik im 13./14. Jahrhundert, in: J.P. BECKMANN, L. HONNEFELDER, G. SCHRIMPF & G. WIELAND (eds.),
Philosophie im Mittelalter. Entwicklungslinien und Paradigmen, Hamburg 1987, pp. 165-186 B . H U G H E S , Mathematics and Geometry, in: F.A.C. M A N T E L L O & A . G . R I G G (eds.), Medieval Latin. An Introduction and Bibliographical Guide, Washington 1996, pp. 348-354 H . H U G O N N A R D - R O C H E , La formation du vocabulaire de la logique en arabe, CIVICIMA V I I (1994), pp. 22-37 K . W . H U M P H R E Y S , The Provision of Students' Text-Books in the Later Middle Ages, in: B . H A L L E R (ed.), Erlesenes aus der Welt des Buches, (Das Buch und sein Haus I ) , Wiesbaden 1979, pp. 61-76 R . W H U N T , Collected Papers on he History of Grammar in the Middle Ages, G . L . B U R S I L L - H A L L (ed.), (Amsterdam Studies in the Theory and History of Linguistic Science 3, Studies in the History of Linguistics 5), Amsterdam 1980
466
BIBLIOGRAPHY
A. Hus, Docere et les mots de lafamille de docere, Paris 1965 R . B . C . H U Y G E N S , Accessus ad auctores, Leiden 1970 R. I M B A C H & Th. R I C K L I N , 'Sentenzenkommentare1, Lexikon des Mittelalters 7, col. 1767-1769 J . I R I G O I N , 'Paper, Introduction of, Dictionary of the Middle Ages 9, pp. 388390 —, Terminologie du livre et de I'ecriture dans le monde byzantin, CIVICIMA II (1989), pp. 11-19 D . J A C Q U A R T , L'enseignement de la medecine: quelques termes fondamentaux, CIVICIMA I I I (1990), pp. 104-120 —, 'Theorica'et 'practicddans I'enseignement de la medecine a Salerne au XIP siecle, CIVICIMA V (1992), pp. 102-110 — (ed.), La formation du vocabulaire scientifique et intellectuel dans le monde arabe, ( C I V I C I M A , Etudes sur le vocabulaire intellectuel du moyen age V I I ) , Turnhout 1994 —, Les 'Concordances' de Pierre de Saint-Flour et I'enseignement de la medicine a Paris dans la seconde moitie du XIV siecle, CIVICIMA V I I I (1995), pp. 172183 E . J E A U N E A U , L'usage de la notion d"integumentuma travers les gloses de Guillaume de Conches, in: Archives d'histoire doctrinal et litteraire du moyen Age 24 (1958), pp. 35-100 —, Gloses et commentaires de textes philosophiques (Df-XIP siecles), in: Les genres litteraires dans les sources theologiques et philosophiques medievales. Definition, critique et exploitation, Louvain-la-Neuve 1982, pp. 117-132 J . J . J O H N , 'Computus', Dictionary of the Middle Ages 3, p. 509 P.M. J O N E S , Medicine, in: EA.C. M A N T E L L O & A . G . R I G G (eds.), Medieval Latin. An Introduction and Bibliographical Guide, Washington 1996, pp. 416-422 M . B . D E J O N G , In Samuel's Image. Child Oblation in the Early Medieval West, (Brill's Studies in Intellectual History 12), Leiden, New York, Koln 1996 M . - H . J U L L I E N D E P O M M E R O L , Le vocabulaire des colleges dans le midi de la France, CIVICIMA VI (1993), pp. 26-45 H . B . K A L I N , 'Papier', Lexikon des Mittelalters 6, col. 1664-1666 H . K A N T O R O W I C Z , Studies on the Glossators of the Roman Law, Cambridge 1938 —, Ihequaestionesdisputataeofthe Glossators, in: Tijdschrift voor Rechtsgeschiedenis 16 (1939), PP-1-67 G . K A R P P , 'Palimpsest', Lexikon des Mittelalters 6, col. 1641-1642
BIBLIOGRAPHY
467
D . K E L L Y , The Arts of Poetry and Prose, (Typologie des sources du Moyen Age occidental 59), Turnhout 1991 R. K I B R E , The Nations in the Mediaeval Universities, Cambridge M A 1948 B . M . K I E N Z L E (ed.), The Sermon, (Typologie des sources du Moyen Age occidental 81-83), Turnhout 2000 —, The Twelfth-Century Monastic Sermon, in: B . M . K I E N Z L E (ed.), The Sermon, (Typologie des sources du Moyen Age occidental 81-83), Turnhout 2000, pp. 271-323 R. K L I N C K , Die lateinische Etymologie des Mittelalters, (Medium Aevum, Philologische Studien 17), Miinchen 1970 P. K L O P S C H , 'Rhetorik', Lexikon des Mittelalters 7, col. 786-789 —, Einfuhrung in die Dichtungslehren des lateinischen Mittelalters, Darmstadt 1980 C . H . K N E E P K E N S , The Iudicium constructionis (summary), CIVICIMA I I I (1990), pp. 11-19 —, 'Ordo naturalisand 'ordo artificialis': A Note on the Terminology of ThirteenthCentury University Grammar, CIVICIMA V I I I (1995), pp. 59-82 S. K N U U T T I L A , 'SchluSmodi', Lexikon des Mittelalters 7, col. 1496-1498 G . K O B L E R , 'Statuten', Lexikon des Mittelalters 8, col. 70-72 J . K O C H (ed.), Artes liberates von der antiken Bildung zur Wissenschaft des Mittelalters, (Studien und Texte zur Geistesgeschichte des Mittelalters 5), Leiden, Koln 1976 (repr.) J . K R A Y E , Renaissance Commentaries on the Nicomachean Ethics, CIVICIMA V I I I (i995). PP- 96-116 N . K R E T Z M A N N , 'Syncategoremata, exponibilia, sophismata', in: N . K R E T Z M A N N , A . K E N N Y & J . P I N B O R G (eds.), The Cambridge History of Later Medieval Philosophy, Cambridge etc. 1982, pp. 211-245 N . K R E T Z M A N N , A. K E N N Y & J . P I N B O R G (eds.), Cambridge History of Later Medieval Philosophy from the Discovery of Aristotle to the Disintegration of Scholasticism 110-1600, Cambridge etc. 1982
K. KUEGLE, M . GOMEZ & U . GUNTHER, Ars nova—ars subtilior', Die Musik in Geschichte und Gegenwart 1, col. 877-918 'Law, schools of, Dictionary of the Middle Ages 7, pp. 512-517 K U N I T Z S C H , Die astronomische Terminologie im Almagest, CIVICIMA V I I (i994). PP- 55-65 S. K U T T N E R , Repertorium der Kanonistik (1140-1234). Prodromus Corporis Glossarum I, (Studi e testi 71), Citta del Vaticano 1937
T. P.
KUEHN,
468
BIBLIOGRAPHY
—, Reflexions sur les Brocards des Glossateurs, i n : Melanges Joseph de Ghellinck,
Tome 2, Gembloux 1951, pp. 767-792 E L A D N E R , 'Pergament', Lexikon des Mittelalters 6, col. 1885-1887 —, 'Tinte, I Westen', Lexikon des Mittelalters 8, col. 797 M.-P. L A F F I T T E , Le vocabulaire medieval de la reliure d'apres les anciens inventaires,
CIWCIMA II (1989), pp. 61-78 C.
Quatre introductions a la philosophic auXIIf siecle, Montreal, Paris 1988 —, Logic in the Barcelona Compendium. (With special reference to Aristotle's Topics and Sophistici elenchi.), in: K . J A C O B I (ed.), Argumentationstheorie. Scholastische Forschungen zu den logischen und semantischen Regeln korrekten Folgerns, (Studien und Texte zur Geistesgeschichte des Mittelalters 38), Leiden, New York, Koln 1993, pp. 81-98 —, Scientia et ars dans les introductions a la philosophic des maitres es arts de I'Universite de Paris au if siecle, in: I . C R A E M E R - R U E G E N B E R G & A. S P E E R (eds.), Scientia und ars im Hoch- und Spdtmittelalter 1, (Miscellanea Mediaevalia 22/1), Berlin, New York 1994, pp. 45-65 —, Les textes didascaliques' de la Faculte des arts de Paris au XIIL" siecle: 'notabilia'et status quaestionis', in: O. W E I J E R S & L . H O L T Z (eds.), L'enseignement des disciplines a la Faculte des arts (Paris et Oxford, XILP-XV" siecles), (Studia Artistarum 4), Turnhout 1997, pp. 345-372 E . L A L O U , Inventaire des tablettes medievales et presentation generale, in: E . L A L O U (ed.), Les tablettes a e'crire de I'Antiquite a I'Epoque Moderne, (Bibliologia 12), Turnhout 1992, pp. 233-247 R. L A U F E R (ed.), La notion deparagraphe, Paris 1985 V.A. L A W , Grammar, in: E A . C . M A N T E L L O & A . G . R I G G (eds.), Medieval Latin. An Introduction and Bibliographical Guide, Washington 1996, pp. 288-295 B . L A W N , The Rise and Decline of the Scholastic 'Quaestio Disputata' With Special Emphasis on its Use in the Teaching of Medicine and Science, Leiden, New York, Koln 1993 C . H . L A W R E N C E , The University in State and Church, in: J . I . CATTO (ed.), The History of the University of Oxford I, The Early Oxford Schools, Oxford 1984, pp. 97-I5O —, Stephen of Lexington and Cistercian Studies in the Thirteenth Century, in: Journal of Ecclesiastical History 11 (i960), pp. 164-178 D . R . L E A D E R , History of the University ofCambridgeVol. I : The University to IS46, Cambridge, etc. 1988 LAFLEUR,
BIBLIOGRAPHY
469
H . L E C L E R C Q , 'Encre, encrier', in: Dictionnaire d'archeologie chretienne et de liturgie V . i , cols. 39-42 J . L E C L E R C Q , Pour I'histoire du canifet de la lime, in: Scriptorium 26 (1972), pp. 294-300
P. L E H M A N N , Mittelalterliche Buchertitel I - I I , in: Sitzungsberichte der Bayerischen Akademie der Wissenschaften, Philosophisch-historische Klasse, 1948:4 (Miinchen 1949), pp. 1-69; and 1953:3 (Munchen 1953), pp. 1-66 R . E . L E R N E R , Poverty, Preaching, and Eschatology in the Revelation Commentaries of Hugh ofSt Cher', in: K . W A L S H & D . W O O D (eds.), The Bible in the Medieval World. Essays in Memory of Beryl Smalley, (Studies in Church History, Subsidia4), Oxford, New York 1985, pp. 157-189 E . L E S N E , Les ecoles de la fin du VHP siecle a la fin du XIf, (Histoire de la propri^te ecclesiastique en France, Tome V ) , Lille 1940 N . L E T T I N C K , L'interet de I analyse de termes pour I'etude de I'historiographie medievale, CPVJCIMA I (1988), pp. 33-40 P.O. L E W R Y , 'Dialectic', Dictionary of the Middle Ages 4, pp. 168-171 D . C . L I N D B E R G (ed.), Science in the Middle Ages, Chicago, London 1978 C . L I S T & W . B L U M , Buchkunst des Mittelalters. Ein illustriertes Handbuch, Stuttgart 1994 G . LoBRiCHON, Le Psautier d'Otbert, in: H . - J . M A R T I N & J . V E Z I N (eds.), Miseen page et mise en texte du livre manuscrit, Paris 1990, pp. 175-178 —, Lesgloses bibliqued'Henri, frere du roi Louis VII, in: H . - J . M A R T I N & J . V E Z I N (eds.), Mise en page et mise en texte du livre manuscrit, Paris 1990, pp. 179180 —, La bible d'un maitre dominicain de Paris, in: H . - J . M A R T I N & J . V E Z I N (eds.), Mise en page et mise en texte du livre manuscrit, Paris 1990, pp. 181-183 J . L O N G E R E , La predication medievale, Paris 1983 R . L O R C H , Astronomical Terminology, CIVICIMA I I I (1990), pp. 182-196 S. L O R E N Z , Libri ordinarie legendi. Eine Skizze zum Lehrplan der mitteleuropdischen Artistenfitkultdt von der Wende vom 14. zum 1$. Jahrhundert, in: W. H O G R E B E (ed.), Argumente und Zeugnisse, (Studia philosophica et historica 5), Frankfurt am Main, Bern, New York 1985, pp. 204-258 P. L O R Y , Mots d'alchimie, alchimie de mots, CIVICIMA V I I (1994), pp. 91-106 E.A. L O W E , Codices rescripti, in: PalaeographicalPapers 2 (1972), pp. 480-519 D . L U S C O M B E , Philosophy and Philosophers in the Schools of the Twelfth Century, CIVICIMA V (1992), pp. 73-85
470
BIBLIOGRAPHY
S. L U S I G N A N , L'enseignement des arts dans les collegesparisiens au Moyen Age, in: O . W E I J E R S & L . H O L T Z (eds.), L'enseignement des disciplines a la Faculte des arts (Paris et Oxford, XIIP-XV* siecles), (Studia Artistarum 4), Turnhout 1997, P P - 43-55
L . C M A C K I N N E Y , Medieval Medical Dictionaries and Glossaries, in: Medieval and Historiographical Studies in Honour of]. W. Thompson, Chicago 1938, pp. 240-268
M . S . M A H O N E Y , Mathematics, in: D . C . L I N D B E R G (ed.), Science in the Middle Ages, Chicago, London 1978, pp. 145-178 —, 'Mathematics', Dictionary of the Middle Ages 8, pp. 205-222 A . M A I E R U , Terminologia logica della tarda scolastica, (Lessico intellectuale europeo 8), Rome 1972 —, La terminologie de I'universite de Bologne de medecine et des arts: facultas', 'verificare, CIVICIMA V (1992), pp. 140-156 —, Figure di docenti nelle scuole domenicane dalla. Penisola Ibericafra XIII e XIV secolo, CIVICIMA EX (1999), pp. 45-88 —, University Training in Medieval Europe, (trans, and ed. D . N . P R Y D S ) , (Education and Society in the Middle Ages and Renaissance 3), Leiden, New York, Koln 1994 —, Methods of Teaching Logic during the Period of the Universities, in: University Training in Medieval Europe, (transl. and ed. D . N . P R Y D S ) , (Education and Society in the Middle Ages and Renaissance 3), Leiden, New York, Koln 1994, pp. 117-141 —, Les cours: 'lectio' et 'lectio cursoria' (d'apres les statuts de Paris et d'Oxford), in: O . W E I J E R S & L . H O L T Z (eds.), L'enseignement des disciplines a la Faculte des arts (Paris et Oxford, XIIP-XV siecles), (Studia Artistarum 4), Turnhout 1997, P P - 373-392-
G . M A K D I S I , The Model of Islamic Scholastic Culture and its Later Parallel in the Christian West, CIVICIMA VI (1993), pp. 158-174 F.A.C. M A N T E L L O & A . G . R I G G (eds.), Medieval Latin. An Introduction and Bibliographical Guide, Washington 1996 J . M A R E N B O N , Medieval Latin Commentaries and Glosses on Aristotelian Logical Texts, Before c. n$oAD, in: Ch. B U R N E T T (ed.), Glosses and Commentaries on Aristotelian Logical Texts. The Syriac, Arabic and Medieval Latin Traditions, (Warburg Institute Surveys and Texts 23), London 1993, pp. 77-97 K . M A R E S C H , 'Papyrus', Lexikon des Mittelalters 6, col. 1693-1695
BIBLIOGRAPHY
R.
MARICHAL,
471
Les manuscrits universitaires, in: H.-J. MARTIN & J . V E Z I N (eds.),
Mise en page et mise en texte du livre manuscrit, Paris 1990, pp. 210-217 H . - I . M A R R O U , Les arts liberaux dans I'Antiquite classique, in: Arts liberaux et philosophic au moyen age, (Actes du quatrieme congres international de philosophie medievale), Montreal, Paris 1969, pp. 5-33 H . - J . M A R T I N & J . V E Z I N (eds.), Mise en page et mise en texte du livre manuscrit, Paris 1990 O . M A Z A L , 'Schreiber', Lexikon des Mittelaltersj, col. 1552-1554 —, 'Skriptorium', Lexikon des Mittelalters 7, col. 1992-1997 M . M C C O R M I C K , 'Chained books', Dictionary of the Middle Ages 3, p. 240 —, 'Papyrus', Dictionary of the Middle Ages 9, p. 392 —, 'Parchment', Dictionary of the Middle Ages 9, p. 400 —, 'Pecia', Dictionary of the Middle Ages 9, p. 481 —, "Writing Materials, Western European', Dictionary of the Middle Ages 12, p. 699 R. M C K I T T E R I C K , Frauen und Schriftlichkeit im fruhen Mittelalter, in: H . - W . G O E T Z (ed.), Weibliche Lebensgestaltung im fruhen Mittelalter, Keulen 1991, pp. 65-118 M . M C V A U G H , 'Medicine, History of, Dictionary of the Middle Ages 8, pp. 247254 G . M E L V I L L E , Zur Flores-Metaphorik in der Mittelalterlichen Geschichtsschreibung. Ausdruck eines Formungsprinzips, in: Historisches Jahrbuch 90 (1970), pp. 6580 H . M E R L E , 'Ars' (Informations diverses IV.i), in: Bulletin de philosophic medievale 28 (1986), pp. 95-133 U . C . M E R Z B A C H , 'Calendars and Reckoning of Time', Dictionary of the Middle Ages 3, pp. 17-30 P. M I C H A U D - Q U A N T I N , Universitas. Expressions du mouvement communautaire dans le moyen age latin, Paris 1970 J . M I E T H K E , Universitas und Studium zu den Verfassungsstrukturen mittelalterlicher Universitdten, in: Aevum 73 (1999), pp. 493-511 A . J . M I N N I S , Late-Medieval Discussions of 'Compilatio' and the Role of the 'Compilator', in: Beitrdge zur Geschichte der deutschen Sprache und Literatur 101 (1979). PP- 385-421 —, Medieval Theory of Authorship. Scholastic Literary Attitudes in the Later Middle Ages, London 1984
472
BIBLIOGRAPHY
J . M O N F R I N , Lexiques latin-francais du moyen age, CIVICIMA I (1988), pp. 2632 —, Le catalogue et I'inventaire (Resume), CIVICIMA II (1989), p. 135 —, Conclusion, CTVICIMA II (1989), pp. 231-236 —, Conclusion, CTVICIMA V (1992), pp. 206-212 M . M O S T E R T (ed.), Communicatie in deMiddeleeuwen. Studies over de verschriftelijking van de middeleeuwse cultuur, Hilversum 1995 M . M . M U L C H A H E Y , Dominican Educational Vocabulary and the Order's Conceptualization of Studies before 1300. Borrowed Terminology, New Connotations, CTVICIMA IX (1999), pp. 89-118 —, 'First the Bow is Bent in Study. Dominican Education before 1550, (Pontifical Institute of Mediaeval Studies, Studies and Texts 132), Toronto 1998 B . M U N K O L S E N , Lesflorileges d'auteurs classiques, in: Lesgenres litteraires dans les sources theologiques et philosophiques medievales. Definition, critique, exploitation, Louvain-la-Neuve 1982, pp. 151-164 J J . M U R P H Y , 'Rhetoric: Western European', Dictionary of the Middle Ages 10, pp. 351-364 —, Rhetoric, in: F.A.C. M A N T E L L O & A . G . R I G G (eds.), Medieval Latin. An Introduction and Bibliographical Guide, Washington 1996, pp. 629-638 A.A. N A S C I M E N T O , Terminologie du livre dans les sources documentaires portugaises medievales: fragments d'un discours incomplet, CTVICIMA IX (1999), pp. 119138 E.A. N E U E N S C H W A N D E R , Abakus', Lexikon des Mittelalters 1, col. 10-11 H.A. N I E L S E N , Antinomy', New Catholic Encyclopedia 1, p. 621 J . D . N O R T H , Aspects of the Language of Medieval Mathematics, CTVICIMA V I I I (i995). PP-134-150 G . N U C H E L M A N S , Theories of the Proposition. Ancient and Medieval Conceptions of the Bearers of Truth and Falsity, (North-Holland Linguistic Series 8), Amsterdam, London 1973 V. N U T T O N , The Changing Language of Medicine, 1450-1550, CIVICIMA V I I I (1995), pp. 184-198
P.F.J. O B B E M A , Een Deventer bibliotheekcatalogus van het einde der vijftiende eeuw. Een bijdrage tot de studie van laat-middeleeuwse bibliotheekcatalogi, (Archiefen Bibliotheekwezen in Belgie, Extra nummer 8), Tongeren 1973 L . O E I N G - H A N H O F F , 'Dialektik', in: Historisches Worterbuch der Philosophic, Band 2, col. 164-184
473
BIBLIOGRAPHY
—, Die Methoden der Metaphysik im Mittelalter, in: Die Metaphysik im Mittelalter. Ihr Ursprung und ihre Bedeutung, (Miscellanea Mediaevalia 2), Berlin 1963, pp. 71-91 G.F. O R L A N D E L L I , Genesi deW'ars notariae nel secolo XIII, in: Studi medievali (Serie Terzd) 6 (1965), pp. 329-366 G . O V I T T , The Status of the Mechanical Arts in Medieval Classifications of Learning, in: Viator 14 (1983), pp. 89-105 M . C . M . P A C H E C O (ed.), Le vocabulaire des ecoles des Mendiants au moyen age, Actes du colloque Porto (Portugal), 11-12 octobre 1996, ( C I V I C I M A , Etudes sur le vocabulaire intellectuel du moyen age I X ) , Turnhout 1999 M . C . M . P A C H E C O &C M . I . M . P A C H E C O , Le vocabulaire de I'enseignement dans les Sermones d'Antoine de Lisbonne/Padoue, CIVICIMA IX (1999), pp. 139-154 J . PACQUET, Les matricules universitaires, (Typologie des Sources du Moyen Age occidental 65), Turnhout 1992 N . F . P A L M E R , Kapitel und Buch. Zu den Gliederungsprinzipien mittelalterlicher Biicher, in: H . K E L L E R & J . W O L L A S C H (eds.), Friihmittelalterliche Studien. Jahrbuch des Instituts fur Fruhmittelalterforschung der Universitdt Miinster, Band 23, Berlin, New York 1989, pp. 43-88 E . P A N E L L A , // 'lector romanae curiae' nelle cronache conventuali domenicane del XIII-XIVsecolo, CIVICIMA V (1992), pp. 130-139 G . P A R E , A . B R U N E T & P. T R E M B L A Y , La renaissance du XIP siecle. Les ecoles et I'enseignement, Paris, Ottawa 1933 M . B . PARKES, The Literacy of the Laity, in: D . D A I C H E S & A. T H R O L B Y (eds.), The Medieval World, London 1973, pp. 555-577 —, The Influence of the Concepts of'Ordinatio'and 'Compilatioon the Development
of the Book, in: J.J.G. ALEXANDER & M.T. GIBSON (eds.), Medieval Learning and Literature. Essays presented to R.W. Hunt, Oxford 1976, pp. 115-141 —, The Provision of Books, in: J . I . C A T T O & R. E V A N S (eds.), The History of the University of Oxford I I , Late Medieval Oxford, Oxford 1992, pp. 407-483 —, Pause and Effect. An Introduction to the History of Punctuation in the West, Cambridge 1992 M . B . P A R K E S & A . G . 'WATSON (eds.), Medieval Scribes, Manuscripts and Libraries. Essays presented to N.R. Ker, London 1978 O . P E D E R S E N , 'Astrology', Dictionary of the Middle Ages 1, pp. 604-610 —, 'Astronomy, Dictionary of the Middle Ages 1, pp. 610-616
K.
PENNINGTON,
Roman and Secular Law, in: EA.C.
MANTELLO
& A.G.
(eds.), Medieval Latin. An Introduction and Bibliographical Guide, Washington 1996, pp. 254-266 RIGG
474
BIBLIOGRAPHY
G . P E R I E S , La Faculte de droit dans I'ancienne Universite de Paris, Paris 1890 H . PETRE, R. CANTEL & R. RICARD, 'Exemplum', Dictionnaire de Spiritualite, IV 2, col. 1885-1902 G . P I E T Z S C H , Die Klassifikation der Musik von Boethius bis Ugolino von Orvieto, (Studien zur Musiktheorie des Mittelalters I), Halle 1929 J . PINBORG, 'Speculative Grammar', in: N . KRETZMANN, A. K E N N Y & J . PINBORG
(eds.), Cambridge History of Later Medieval Philosophy, Cambridge etc. 1982, pp. 254-269
G . P O L L A R D , The Pecia System in the Medieval Universities, in: M . B . PARKES & A . G . W A T S O N (eds.), Medieval Scribes, Manuscripts and Libraries. Essays presented to N.R. Ker, London 1978, pp. 145-161 K . P R E I S E N D A N Z , 'Quaternio' (2), Paulys Realencyclopadie der classischen Altertumswissenschafi, Vol. 47, col. 845-849 W . H . PRINCIPE, 'Philosophy and Theology, Western European: Twelfth Century to Aquinas', Dictionary of the Middle Ages 9, pp. 590-606 E.A. Q U A I N , The Medieval accessus ad auctores, in: Traditio 3 (1945), pp. 215-264 P. R A J N A , Le denominazioni 'trivium e quadrivium', in: Studi Medievali, N.S. 1 (1928), pp. 4-36 J . RAMBAUD, Le Decret de Gratian, HI: H.-J. M A R T I N & J . V E Z I N (eds.), Mise en page et mise en texte du livre manuscrit, Paris 1990, pp. 201-203 —, Les Decretales, in: H . - J . M A R T I N & J . V E Z I N (eds.), Mise en page et mise en texte du livre manuscrit, Paris 1990, pp. 204-209 H . RASHDALL, The Universities of Europe in the Middle Ages, (new edition in I I I Volumes edited by E M . POWICKE & A . B . E M D E N ) , Oxford 1987
S. R E A D (ed.), Sophisms in Medieval Logic and Grammar, (Nijhoff International Philosophy Series 48), Dordrecht, Boston, London 1993 E . R E I M E R (1978), Musicus-cantor, in Handworterbuch der musikalischen Terminologie I I I , pp. 1-13 C . R E N A R D Y , Le monde des maitres universitaires du diocese de Liege 1140-1350, Paris 1979 Rhetorique et histoire. U'exemplum et le modele de comportement dans le discours
ancient et medieval, (Table ronde organ isee par l'Ecole Francaise de Rome le 18 M a i 1979), Melanges de l'Ecole Francaise de Rome 1980 R . R E Y N O L D S , 'Law, Canon: to Gratian', Dictionary of the Middle Ages 7, pp. 395-413 P. R I C H E , Ecoles et enseignement dans le Haut Moyen Age. Fin du V* siecle—milieu du XF siecle, repr. Paris 1989
BIBLIOGRAPHY
475
—, Le vocabulaire des e'coles carolingiennes, CTVJCIMA V (1992), pp. 33-41 P. R I C H E & G . L O B R I C H O N (eds.), Le Moyen Age et la Bible, (Bible de tous lcs temps 4), Paris 1984 Th. R I C K X I N , 'Sententia', Lexikon des Mittelalters 7, col. 1765-1766 H . R I E D L I N G E R , 'Bibel — 2. Geschichte def Auslegung — d) Das 13. J h . ' , Lexikon des Mittelalters 2, col. 52-54 L . M . D E R I J K , Logica Modernorum. A Contribution to the History of Early Terminist Logic, 3 Vols., Assen 1962-1967 —, Some Thirteenth Century Tracts on the Game of Obligation, in: Vivarium 12 (1974), pp. 94-123, Vivarium 13 (1975)1 pp. 22-54, «md Vivarium 14 (1976), pp. 26-49 —, De quelques difficultes de nature linguistique dans le vocabulaire de Gilbert de la Poiree, CIVICIMA I (1988), pp. 19-25 —, Specific Tools concerning Logical Education, CLVICLMA I I I (1990), pp. 62-81 —, Teaching and Inquiry in ijih-14th Century Logic and Metaphysics, CTVICIMA V I I I (1995), pp. 83-95 S. Rizzo, // lessico filologico degli umanisti, Roma 1984 —, Sulla terminologia dell'insegnamento grammaticak nelle scuole umanistiche, CIVICIMA I I I (1990), pp. 29-44 R . H . R O B I N S , 'Grammar', Dictionary of the Middle Ages 5, pp. 648-651 M . A . R O D R I G U E S , Raimundus Lullus and his Book 'De modo naturali intelligendf, CIVICIMA IX (1999), pp. 155-163 B . R O E S T , 'Scientid and sapientia' in Gilbert of Tournais '(E)Rudimentum Doctrinae\ CIVICIMA IX (1999), pp. 164-179 —, A History of Franciscan Education (c. 1210-ip7), (Education and Society in the Middle Ages and Renaissance 11), Leiden, New York, Koln 2000 I . R O S I E R , La grammaire speculative des modistes, Lille 1983 —, La terminologie linguistique latine medievale, in: S. A U R O U X (ed.), Histoire des idees linguistiques, Vol. 2: Le de'veloppement de Lt grammaire occidental, Liege 1992, pp. 590-597 R . H . R O U S E , 'Manuscript books, Production of, Dictionary of the Middle Ages 8, pp. 100-105 —, revolution des attitudes envers I'autorite ecrite: Le developpement des instruments de travailau XIIP siecle, in: G . H A S E N O H R & J . L O N G E R E (eds.), Culture et travail intellectuel dans I'Occident medieval, Paris 1981, pp.115-144 R . H . & M . A . R O U S E , Biblical Distinctions in the Thirteenth Century, in: Archives d'Histoire Doctrinale et Litte'raire du Moyen Age 41 (1974), pp. 27-37
476
BIBLIOGRAPHY
—, 'History of Alphabetization', Dictionary of the Middle Ages 1, pp. 204-207 —, 'Statim invenire. Schools, Preachers and New Attitudes to the Page, in: R . L . B E N S T O N & G . C O N S T A B L E (eds.), Renaissance and Renewal in the Twelfth Century, Oxford 1982, pp. 201-225 —, Florilegia of patristic texts, in: Les genres litteraires dans les sources theologiques et philosophiques medievales. Definition, critique, exploitation, Louvain-la-Neuve 1982, pp. 165-180 —, La naissance des index, in: H . J . M A R T I N & R. C H A R T I E R (eds.), Histoire de I'edition frangaise, Tome I: Le livre conquerant, Paris 1982, pp. 77-85 —, La concordance verbale des Ecritures, in: P. R I C H E &C G . L O B R I C H O N (eds.), Le Moyen Age et la Bible, Paris 1984, pp. 115-122 —, Bibliography before Print: The Medieval De viris illustribus, in: P. G A N Z (ed.), The Role of the Book in Medieval Culture, (Bibliologia. Elementa ad librorum studia pertinentia 3), Turnhout 1986, pp. 133-153 —, The Book Trade at the University of Paris, ca. 1250 - ca. 1350, in: L J . BATAILLON, B . G . G U Y O T & R . H . R O U S E (eds.), La production du livre universitaire au moyen age. Exemplar etpecia, Paris 1988, pp. 41-114 —, The Vocabulary of Wax Tablets, CLVLCIMA II (1989), pp. 220-230 —, The Commercial Production of Manuscript Books in Late-Thirteenth-Century and Early-Fourteenth-Century Paris, in: L . L . B R O W N R I G G (ed.), MedievalBook Production. Assessing the Evidence, Los Altos Hills, Cal. 1990, pp. 103-115 —, Concordances et index, in: H . - J . M A R T I N & J . V E Z I N (eds.), Mise en page et mise en texte du livre manuscrit, Paris 1990, pp. 218-222 —, Authentic Witnesses. Approaches to Medieval Manuscripts, Notre Dame 1991 H . M . S C H A L L E R , Ars dictaminis, Ars dictandi', Lexikon des Mittelalters 1, col. 1034-1039 R. S C H E N D A , Stand und Aufgaben der Exempla Forschung, in: Fabula 10 (1969), pp. 69-85 H . S C H I P P E R G E S , 'Medizin', Lexikon des Mittelalters 6, col. 452-459 J . S C H N E I D E R , Zur Verbreitung und Verwendung von 'librarius' im Mittelalter bis zum Ende des 13. Jahrhunderts, in: Studien zur Buch- und Bibliotheksgeschichte, (Festschrift Hans Liilfing), Berlin 1976, pp. 23-32 G . S C H R I M P F , 'Philosophi'— philosophantes'. Zum Selbstverstdndnis der vor- und fruhscholastischen Denker, in: Studi Medievali (Serie Terza) 23.2 (1982), pp. 697-727 P. S C H U L T H E S S & R. I M B A C H , Die Philosophic im lateinischen Mittelalter. Ein Handbuch mit einem bio-bibliographischen Repertorium, Zurich, Diisseldorf 1996
BIBLIOGRAPHY
477
C . SIRAT, Deux mots de philosopbie juive au destin divergent, CIVICIMA V I I I (i995). PP- 236-251 F. S M A H E L , Scholae, Collegia et Bursae Universitatis Pragensis, CIVICIMA V I (1993), pp. 115-130
B . S M A L L E Y , The Study of the Bible in the Middle Ages, Oxford 19522
L.J. SMITH & J.H.M. TAYLOR (eds.), Women, the Book and the Worldly and Women, the Book and the Godly, Woodbridge 1995 EP.W. S O E T E R M E E R , La terminologie de la librairie a Bologne aux XIIP et XIV siecles, CIVICIMA I (1988), pp. 88-95 —, De pecia in juridische handschriften, Doctoral thesis, University of Leiden 1990 —, Utrumque ius in peciis. Die Produktion juristischer Biicher an italienischen und franzosischen Universitdten des 13. und 14. Jahrhunderts, (transl. G . H I L L N E R ) , Frankfurt am Main 2002 A. SOLIGNAC, 'Theologie. Le mot et sa signification', in: Dictionnaire de SpiritualiteXV, col. 463-482 S. S O N D E R E G G E R , Notker des Deutschen Terminologie des Ubersetzungsvorganges, in: Zeitschriftfur deutsche Philologie 106 (1987), pp. 15-24 P.V. SPADE, The Mediaeval Liar: A Catalogue of the Tnsolubilia'-Literature, Toronto 1975 —, Obligations: Developments in the Fourteenth Century, in: N . K R E T Z M A N N , A . K E N N Y & J . P I N B O R G (eds.), Cambridge History of Later Medieval Philosophy, Cambridge etc. 1982, pp. 335-341 L S P I T Z E R , Classical and Christian Ideas of World Harmony. Prolegomena to an Interpretation of the Word 'Stimmung, I, in: Traditio 2 (1944), pp. 409-464, and I I , in: Traditio 3 (1945), pp. 307-364 L. S P I T Z E R , Latin medieval hrocardfrancais brocard, in: Modern Language Notes 70 (1955), pp. 501-506
P. SPUNAR, La Faculte des arts dans les universites de I'Europe centrak, in: O . W E I J E R S & L. H O L T Z (eds.), L'enseignement des disciplines a la Faculte des arts (Paris et Oxford, XIIF-XV siecles), (Studia Artistarum 4), Turnhout 1997, pp. 467-475
W.H. STAHL & R. JOHNSON, Martianus Capella and the Seven Liberal Arts, Vol. 1, New York 1977 (repr.) M . S T E I N M A N N , 'Exemplar', Lexikon des Mittelalters 4, col. 165 P. S T I R N E M A N N & M.-Th. G O U S S E T , Marques, mots, pratiques: leur signification et leurs liens dans le travail des enlumineurs, CIVICIMA II (1989), pp. 34-55
478
BIBLIOGRAPHY
B . STOCK, Myth and Science in the Twelfth Century. A Study of Bernard Silvester, Princeton 1972 M . S T O R M , Trivium', Dictionary of the Middle Ages 12, pp. 205-207 P.F. S T U E H R E N B E R G , The Medieval Commentary Tradition: The Glossa Ordinaria, Hugh of St. Cher and Nicholas of Lyra and the Study of the Bible in the Middle Ages, in: Journal of Religious and Theological Information 1.2 (1993), pp. 91101 E . S T U M P , Obligations: From the Beginning to the Early Fourteenth Century, in: N . K R E T Z M A N N , A. K E N N Y & J . P I N B O R G (eds.), Cambridge History of Later Medieval Philosophy, Cambridge etc. 1982, pp. 315-341 E . D . SYLLA, 'Physics', Dictionary of the Middle Ages 9, pp. 620-628 —, Physics, in: F.A.C. M A N T B L L O & A . G . R I G G (eds.), Medieval Latin. An Introduction and Bibliographical Guide, Washington 1996, pp. 355-362 E.A. SYNAN, 'Philosophy and Theology, Western European: Terminology', Dictionary of the Middle Ages 9, pp. 616-617 M . TANAKA, La nation anglo-allemande de I'Universite de Paris a la fin du Moyen Age, (Melanges de la Bibliotheque de la Sorbonne 20), Paris 1990 G . - R . T E W E S , Terms used in Academic Life and corresponding Reality by the Example of the Bursae of the Arts Faculty at Cologne, CIVICIMA VI (1993), pp. 59-71
P. T H I L L E T , La formation du vocabulaire philosophique arabe, CIVICIMA V I I (1994), pp. 39-54
J . W . T H O M P S O N , The Literacy of the Laity in the Middle Ages, Berkeley 1939 C . T H U R O T , De I'organisation de I'enseignement dans I'Universite de Paris au Moyen-age, Paris 1850 J.-Y. T I L L I E T T E , Le vocabulaire des ecoles monastiques d'apres les prescriptions des consuetudines (XF-XIP siecles), CIVICIMA V (1992), pp. 60-72 G . T R O U P E A U , La terminologie grammatical, CIVICIMA V I I (1994), p. 11-21 W . T R U S E N , Chirographum und Teilurkunde im Mittelalter, in: Archivalische ZeitschriftTi (1979), pp. 233-249 P.E T S C H U D R I N , Le developpement technique de lapapeterie, de ses debuts en Asie a I'Europede la Renaissance, in: M . Z E R D O U N B A T - Y E H O U D A (ed.), Le papier au moyen age: histoire et techniques, (Bibliologia 19), Turnhout 1999, pp. 12-16 F - C . T U B A C H , Index exemplorum, A Handbook of Medieval Religious Tales, Helsinki 1969 G . V A N D I E V O E T , Les coutumiers, les styles, les formulaires et les artes notariae', (Typologie des sources du Moyen Age occidental 48), Turnhout 1986
BIBLIOGRAPHY
479
J . V E R G E R , 'Artista', Lexikon des Mittelalters i , col. 1072 —, L'exegese de I'Universite, in: P. R I C H E & G . L O B R I C H O N (eds.), Le Moyen Age et la Bible, (Bible de tous les temps 4), Paris 1984, pp. 199-230 —, 'Nova et 'veterd dans le vocabulaire des premiers statuts et privileges universitairesfrangais, CWICIMA V (1992), pp. 191-205 —, Conclusion, CIVICIMA VI (1993), pp. 175-180 —, Conclusion, CIVICIMA IX (1999), pp. 180-186 —, La Faculte des arts: le cadre institutionnel, in: O . W E I J E R S &C L . H O L T Z (eds.), L'enseignement des disciplines h la Faculte des arts (Paris et Oxford, XIIP-XV siecles), (Studia Artistarum 4), Turnhout 1997, pp. 30-35 A. V E R N E T , DU 'chartophylaxau 'Librarian, CIVICIMA I I (1989), pp. 155-167 J . V E Z I N , La division enparagraphes dans les manuscrits de la basse Antiquite et du haut Moyen Age, in: R. L A U F E R (ed.), La notion deparagraphe, Paris 1985, pp. 41-51 J . V E Z I N , Le vocabulaire latin de la reliure au moyen age, CIVICIMA I I (1989), pp. 56-60 C . V I L L A , // lessico della stilistica fra XI e XIIIsec, CIVICIMA V (1992), pp. 4259 C . V U L L I E Z , Le vocabulaire des ecoles urbaines des XIP et XIIF siecles a travers les 'summae dictaminis', CIVICIMA V (1992), pp. 86-101 B . L . VAN D E R W A E R D E N , 'Astronomie', Lexikon des Mittelalters 1, col. 1150-1153 D . L . W A G N E R (ed.), The Seven Liberal Arts in the Middle Ages, Bloomington 1983 J . O . W A R D , Rhetoric and the Art of dictamen, CIVICIMA I I I (1990), pp. 20-61 —, Ciceronian Rhetoric in Freatise, Scholion and Commentary, (Typologie des sources du Moyen Age occidental 58), Turnhout 1995 W . W A T T E N B A C H , Das Schriftwesen im Mittelalter, Leipzig 1896 O . W E I J E R S , L'appellation des disciplines dans les classifications des sciences au XIP et XIIP siecles, in: Archivum Latinitatis Medii Aevi 46-47 (1986-1987), pp. 39-64 —, Ferminologie des universites aus XIIP siecle, (Lessico Intellettuale Europeo 39), Roma 1987 — (ed.), Ferminologie de la vie intellectuelle au moyen age, Actes de colloque Leyde/La Haye 20-21 septembre 1985, ( C I V I C I M A , Etudes sur le vocabulaire intellectuel du moyen age I ) , Turnhout 1988 —, La specificite du vocabulaire universitaire du XIIF siecle, CIVICIMA I (1988), pp. 41-46
480
BIBLIOGRAPHY
— (ed.), Vocabulaire du livre et de Vecriture au moyen age, Actes de la table ronde Paris 24-26 septembre 1987, ( C I V I C I M A , Etudes sur le vocabulaire intellectuel du moyen age I I ) , Turnhout 1989 —, Lexicography in the Middle Ages, in: Viator 20 (1989), pp.139-153 — (ed.), Methodes et instruments du travail intellectuel au moyen age. Etudes sur le vocabulaire, ( C I V I C I M A , Etudes sur le vocabulaire intellectuel du moyen age I I I ) , Turnhout 1990 —, Les dictionnaires et autres repertoires, CIVICIMA I I I (1990), pp. 197-208 —, Dictionnaires et repertoires au moyen age. Une etude du vocabulaire, ( C I V I C I M A , Etudes sur le vocabulaire intellectuel du moyen age I V ) , Turnhout 1991 — (ed.), Vocabulaires des e'coles etdes methodes d'enseignementau moyen age, Actes
du colloque Rome 21-22 octobre 1989, ( C I V I C I M A , Etudes sur le vocabulaire intellectuel du moyen age V ) , Turnhout 1992 — (ed.), Vocabulaire des colleges universitaires (XIIf-XVT siecles), Actes du colloque Leuven 9-11 avril 1992, ( C I V I C I M A , Etudes sur le vocabulaire intellectuel du moyen age V I ) , Turnhout 1993 —, Le vocabulaire du College de Sorbonne, CIVICIMA VI (1993), pp. 9-25 —, L'enseignement du 'trivium a la Faculte des arts de Paris, in: J . H A M E S S E (ed.), Manuels, programmes de cours et techniques d'enseignement dans les universites medievales, Louvain-la-Neuve 1994, pp. 57-74 — (ed.), Vocabulary of Teaching and Research Between Middle Ages and Renaissance, Proceedings of the Colloquium London, Warburg Institute, 1112 March 1994, ( C I V I C I M A , Etudes sur le vocabulaire intellectuel du moyen age V I I I ) , Turnhout 1995 —, Les regies d'examen dans les universites medievales, in: M . J . F . M . H O E N E N , J . H . S C H N E I D E R , G . W I E L A N D (eds.), Philosophy and Learning. Universities in the Middle Ages, Leiden, New York, Koln 1995, pp. 201-224 —, La disputatio' a la Faculte des arts de Paris (1200-1350 environ). Esquisse d'une typologie, (Studia Artistarum 2), Turnhout 1995 —, Le maniement du savoir. Pratiques intellectuelles a I'epoque des premieres universites (XIIF-XIV siecles), (Studia Artistarum, Subsidia), Turnhout 1996 —, De lajoute dialectique a la dispute scolastique, i n : Academie des Inscriptions et Belles-Lettres. Comptes rendus des seances de 1'anne'e 1999, Paris 1999 (2000), pp. 509-518
—, La 'disputatio' dans les Faculte's des arts au moyen age, (Studia Artistarum 10), Turnhout 2002
BIBLIOGRAPHY
481
—, La structure des commentaires philosophiques a la Faculte des arts : quelques observations, in: G. FIORAVANTI, C. LEONARDI & S. PERFETTI (eds.), Ilcommen-
tofilosojico nell'occidente latino (secoli XIII-XV), Turnhout 2002, pp. 17-41 O . W E I J E R S & L . H O L T Z (eds.), L'enseignement des disciplines a la Faculte des arts (Paris et Oxford, XIIP-XV siecles), (Studia Artistarum 4), Turnhout 1997 A . G . W E I L E R , Antiqui/moderni', Historisches Worterbuch der Philosophie 1, col. 407-410
—, La systematique de la theologie morale selon Arnold Geilhoven, CIVTCIMA I (1988), pp. 11-18
P. W E I M A R , Argumenta brocardica, in: Studia Gratiana 14 (Collectanea Stephan Kutner4,1967), pp. 89-123 (repr. in Zur Renaissance der Rechtswissenschaji im Mittelalter, (Bibliotheca eruditorum 8), Goldbach 1997, pp. 45*-77*) —, Die legistische Literatur und die Methode des Rechtsunterrichts der Glossatorenzeit, in: Ius commune 2 (1969), pp. 43-83 (repr. in Zur Renaissance der Rechtswissenschaft im Mittelalter, (Bibliotheca eruditorum 8), Goldbach 1997, pp. 3*-43*) —, Die legistische Literatur der Glossatorenzeit, in: H . C O I N G (ed.), Handbuch der Quellen und Literatur der neueren europdischen Privatrechtsgeschichte, Vol. I, Mittelalter (1100-1500), Miinchen 1973, pp. 188-213 fSummen) —-, 'brocarda, brocardica', Lexikon des Mittelalters 2, col. 707-708 J.A. W E I S H E I P L , Curriculum of the Faculty of Arts at Oxford in the Early Fourteenth Century, in: Mediaeval Studies 26 (1964), pp. 143-185 —, Classification of the Sciences in Medieval Thought, in: Mediaeval Studies 27 (1965), pp. 54-90
—, The Parisian Faculty of Arts in Mid-Thirteenth Century: 1240-12J0, in: The American Benedictine Review 25.2 (1975), pp. 200-217 —, The Nature, Scope, and Classification of the Sciences, in: D . C . L I N D B E R G (ed.), Science in the Middle Ages, Chicago, London 1978, pp. 461-482 J.-Th. W E L T E R , VExemplum dans la litterature religieuse et didactique du Moyen Age, Paris, Toulouse 1927 (Repr. Slatkine 1973) H J . W E S T R A , The Commentary on Martianus Capella's 'De nuptiis Philologiae et Mercurii' attributed to Bernardus Silvestris, (Pontifical Institute of Medieval Studies, Studies and Texts 80), Toronto 1986 —, The Allegorical Interpretation of Myth: Its Origins, Justification and Effect, in:
A. WELKENHUYSEN, H . BRAET & W. VERBEKE (eds), Mediaeval Antiquity, (Mediaevalia Lovaniensia 24), Leuven 1995, pp. 277-291
482
BIBLIOGRAPHY
E . W H I T N E Y , Paradise Restored. The Mechanical Arts from Antiquity through the Thirteenth Century, (Transactions of the American Philosophical Society 80.1), Philadelphia 1990 —, Artes mechanicae, in: F.A.C. M A N T E L L O & A . G . R I G G (eds.), Medieval Latin. An Introduction and Bibliographical Guide, Washington 1996, pp. 431-435
D. WOODWARD, '18. MedievalMappaemundi, in: J.B. HARLEY & D. WOODWARD, The History of Cartography, Vol. I, Chicago, London 1987, pp. 286-370 F J . W O R S T B R O C K , Die Anfdnge des mittelalterlichen Ars dictandi, in: Fruhmittelalterliche Studien 23 (1989), pp. 1-32. F. Z A M I N E R (ed.), Geschichte der Musiktheorie 3: Rezeption des antiken Fachs irn Mittelalter, Darmstadt 1990 M . Z E R D O U N B A T - Y E H O U D A , Les encres noires au moyen Age (jusqu'en 1600), Paris 1983 — (ed.), Lepapier au moyen age: histoire et techniques, (Bibliologia 19), Turnhout 1999 M . A . Z I E R , Sermons of the Twelfth-Century Schoolmasters and Canons, in: B . M . K I E N Z L E (ed.), The Sermon, (Typologie des sources du Moyen Age occidental 81-83), Turnhout 2000, pp. 325-362 M . Z I M M E R M A N (ed.), Auctor et auctoritas: invention et conformisme dans I'icriture medievale (Actes du colloque de Saint-Quentin-en-Yvelines, juin 1999), Paris 2001
